Skip to main content

Full text of "CSUF Course Catalogs 1959-2007"

See other formats


£\-v 




1989 - 1991 University Catalog 

Available from: Titan Bookstore, Fullerton, CA 92634 
Price. $4.00 including sales tax. 

Add $2.25 for postage and handling if ordered by mail. 

University Address 

When corresponding with the university, write to the specif- 
ic office, school or department — 

California State University, Fullerton 
Fullerton, CA 92634-4080 
Telephone information (714) 773-2011 

Changes in Rules and Policies 

Although every effort has been made to assure the accuracy 
of the information in this catalog, students and others who 
use this catalog should note that laws, rules and policies 
change from time to time and that these changes may alter 
the information contained in this publication. Changes may 
come in the form of statutes enacted by the Legislature or 
rules and policies adopted by the Board of Trustees of The 
California State University, by the chancellor or designee of 
The California State University, or by the president or desig- 
nee of the institution. Further, it is not possible in a publica- 
tion of this size to include all of the rules, policies and other 
information which pertain to the student, the institution, and 
The California State University. More current or complete 
information may be obtained from the appropriate depart- 
ment, school or administrative office. 

Nothing in this catalog shall be construed, operate as or 
have the effect of an abridgment or a limitation of any 
rights, powers or privileges of the Board of Trustees of The 
California State University, the chancellor of the California 
State University or the president of the campus. The Board 
of Trustees, the chancellor and the president are autho- 
rized by law to adopt, amend or repeal rules and policies 
which apply to students. This catalog does not constitute a 
contract or the terms and conditions of a contract between 
the student and the institution or The California State Uni- 
versity. The relationship of the student to the institution is 
one governed by statute, rules and policy adopted by the 
Legislature, the Board of Trustees, the chancellor, the 
president and their duly authorized designees. 

Effective date: August 22, 1989 


California State 
University, Fullerton 



Accreditations and 
Associations 

Accreditation Board for Engineering and Technology, Inc. 
Accrediting Council on Education in Journalism and Mass 
Communications 

American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business 
American Chemical Society 
American Speech and Hearing Association 
Commission on Teacher Credentialing 
Computer Sciences Accreditation Board, Inc. 

National Association for Foreign Student Affairs 
National Association of Schools of Art and Design 
National Association of Schools of Dance 
National Association of Schools of Music 
National Association of Schools of Public Affairs and 
Administration 

National Association of Schools of Theatre 
National Athletic Trainers Association 
National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education 
National League for Nursing 

Southern California Consortium on International Studies 
Universities Field Staff International 
Western Association of Graduate Schools 
Western Association of Schools and Colleges 


itMcial Collect***^ 1 -' - r * ry 

California State Uaivtr-.ty. F utter wt 


1 


Nondiscrimination Policy 

Sex 

The California State University does not discriminate on 
the basis of sex in the educational programs or activities it 
conducts. Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972, 
as amended, and the administrative regulations adopted 
thereunder prohibit discrimination on the basis of sex in 
education programs and activities operated by California 
State University, Fullerton. Such programs and activities 
include admission of students and employment. Inquiries 
concerning the application of Title IX to programs and 
activities of California State University, Fullerton may be 
referred to Rosamaria G6mez-Amaro, the campus officer 
assigned the administrative responsibility of reviewing 
such matters or to the Regional Director of the Office of 
Civil Rights, Region 9, 221 Main Street, 10th Floor, San 
Francisco, CA 94105. 

Handicap 

The California State University does not discriminate on 
the basis of handicap and is in compliance with Section 
504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and the 
regulations adopted thereunder. 

More specifically, The California State University does not 
discriminate in admission or access to, or treatment or 
employment in, its programs and activities. Rosamaria 
Gbmez-Amaro, Director of Affirmative Action, has been 
designated to coordinate the efforts of California State 
University, Fullerton to comply with the act and its imple- 
menting regulations. Inquiries concerning compliance 
may be addressed to this person at California State Uni- 
versity, Fullerton, Langsdorf Hall 101, Fullerton, CA 
92634, (714) 773-3951. 

Race, Color or National Origin 

The California State University complies with the require- 
ments of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 and the 
regulations adopted thereunder. No person shall, on the 
grounds of race, color or national origin, be excluded from 
participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be otherwise 
subjected to discrimination under any program of The Cali- 
fornia State University. 


This Catalog 

Within this catalog may be found general academic and 
administrative information as well as specific descriptions 
of the departments, their majors and the courses offered in 
each. The first major part contains orienting information 
such as the calendar, materials on the California State 
University, an overview of Cal State Fullerton and facts 
about student services and activities on the campus. 

The subsequent sections of the catalog are concerned with: 
admission, registration, records and regulations; academic 
advisement; and university courses. The next sections de- 
scribe the departments and the programs of study and 
courses they offer. The final part of the catalog contains a 
listing of the faculty and administration. An index may be 
found at the end to help the reader locate specific items. 

Because this catalog must be prepared well ahead of the 
academic year it covers, changes in some programs and 
rules occur. The class schedule and subsequent errata 
sheets are the final authority in regard to classes offered, 
instructors and revisions of regulations. This publication 
may be bought for a small fee from the Titan Bookstore. 

Credits 

The California State University, Fullerton, catalog is pre- 
pared by the Office of Academic, Graduate, and Interna- 
tional Programs; Dennis F. Berg, Associate Vice President 
for Academic Programs; William W. Haddad, Assistant 
Vice President for Graduate and International Programs. 

Editor/Project Coordinator Gladys Fleckles 

Catalog Design Shushan Wilson 

Cover Photograph Geana Woods 

Selected photographs appear through the courtesy of the 
Office of Public Affairs and the Daily Titan. 

Proofreading Elaine Lekich 

Curriculum Editing School Deans 

Department Chairs 
Program Coordinators 

Typesetting Keyboard Network, Inc. 

Printing Sinclair Printing 

Los Angeles 


2 


President’s Message 

California State University, Fullerton provides excellent 
educational opportunities to residents of the region, the 
state, and the broader community of which it is a part. 
Toward this end, the university is committed to attracting 
and retaining a diverse student body for all its programs. 
Fundamental to these endeavors are excellence in instruc- 
tion and actively involved faculty whose teaching is trans- 
formed by discovery, whose creative and scholarly work is 
an extension of the classroom, laboratory or studio, and 
whose service is informed by perceived needs and current 
knowledge. 

The university is here to develop and challenge students 
intellectually to help them understand their leadership role 
in a democratic society and their responsibility to be in- 
formed citizens. Strong undergraduate programs in the 
traditional liberal arts and sciences disciplines as well as 
pre-professional and professional programs are under- 
girded by a broadly based general education curriculum 
designed to educate every matriculated undergraduate 
student with regard to the history and diversity of human 
thought and culture. Postbaccalaureate work leading to 
degrees, credentials, licensures, and certificates will pro- 
vide students with the depth of advanced knowledge need- 
ed with major discipline areas of professional fields. 

Higher education is clearly the source of strength for our 
pluralistic society. The future of society requires an in- 
formed and educated populace. Students today cannot 
count on pursuing one career path throughout their adult 
lives. The jobs that exist today will change radically tomor- 
row. Individuals will need to have tremendous flexibility to 
be able to move from one career to another. 

In the future, a diverse educational experience will be the 
critical foundation for success. What tomorrow’s students 
will need is not just mastery of subject matter, but mastery 
of learning. Education will not be simply an introduction to 
a career, but a lifelong endeavor. 

During the two years that this catalog is in effect, the uni- 
versity is undergoing a major physical transformation as 
part of its ongoing efforts to improve and broaden service 
to students and the community. The Engineering Building 
addition is scheduled for completion in September 1989 
which will provide additional classrooms, laboratories and 
offices in the Engineering Center. Adding further to the 
transformation will be an on-campus hotel/conference 
center, a sports complex featuring a multipurpose stadium 
as well as a baseball pavillion, a Science Building addition 
which will provide 60,000 assignable square feet of mod- 
ern laboratory space for the departments of Biology, 



Chemistry, Earth Sciences, and Physics as well as an ad- 
dition to the University Center. 

Our students, numbering more than 24,000, come from the 
state, the nation and the world, giving the university an 
increasingly international flavor. The campus is ethnically 
diverse and reflects the many different cultures of the 
region. 

We are proud that in the university’s relatively short history 
our curriculum has grown to include 44 undergraduate 
majors and 41 graduate degrees, plus a variety of creden- 
tial and certificate programs. The spirit of the campus is 
warm and friendly, with faculty members actively involved 
in giving each student the finest academic experience 
possible. 

We care about our students as citizens, as scholars and as 
human beings preparing to serve society. We hope you will 
join us soon to share in the challenge and excitement of the 
Cal State Fullerton experience. 



Jewel Plummer Cobb 
President 

California State University, Fullerton 


3 



Table of Contents 


President’s Message 3 

Academic Calendars 10 

The California State University 13 

California State University, Fullerton 17 

University Advisory Board 20 

Community Minority Affairs Advisory Council 20 

University Administration 21 

CSUF Foundation 25 

CSUF Alumni 25 

Community Support Groups 25 

ACADEMIC SERVICES 

Academic Affairs 28 

Vice President for Academic Affairs 28 

Academic Programs 29 

Academic Senate 29 

Admissions and Records 29 

Analytical Studies 29 

Computer Center 30 

Extended Education 30 

Graduate Studies 30 

Faculty Affairs and Records 30 

Faculty Research . 30 

International Programs 30 

Television & Media Support Services 30 

Library 31 

Student Academic Affairs 32 

Academic Advisement Center 32 

Athletic Academic Services 32 

Center for Internships and Cooperative Education ... 32 

Educational Opportunity Program 33 

Learning Assistance Resource Center 33 

Mentor Program 34 

Student Academic Services 34 

Student Affirmative Action 34 

University Outreach Services 34 

Writing Center 34 

Honors Programs 36 

Dean’s Honor List 36 

General Education Honors . 36 

Honors at Entrance 36 


Honors at Graduation 36 

Honor Societies 37 

President’s Opportunity Scholars 37 

President’s Scholars Program 37 

Institutes and Centers 38 

California Desert Studies Consortium 38 

Center for Economic Education 38 

Center for Governmental Studies 38 

Center for International Business 39 

Infant and Child Studies Center 39 

Foreign Language Laboratory 39 

Institute for Early Childhood Education 39 

Institute for Geophysics 39 

Institute for Molecular Biology and Nutrition 39 

Laboratory for Phonetic Research 39 

Ruby Gerontology Center 40 

Social Science Research Center 40 

Southern California Ocean Studies Consortium — 40 

Sport and Movement Institute 40 

Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 40 

STUDENT SERVICES AND ACTIVITIES 

Student Services 42 

Vice President for Student Services 42 

Academic Appeals 42 

Adult Reentry Center 43 

Career Development Center 43 

Financial Aid Office 44 

Disabled Student Services 44 

Health and Counseling Services 44 

Housing Services and Residential Life 45 

International Education and Exchange 45 

School Based Student Services 45 

Testing and Research 46 

Women’s Center 46 

Student Activities 47 

University Activities Center 47 

Associated Students 49 

Child Care Center 49 

University Center 49 

Human Corps 50 

University Recreation Program 51 


4 


Intercollegiate Athletics 52 

Conference Memberships 52 

Men’s Intercollegiate Athletics 53 

Women’s Intercollegiate Athletics 54 

Resources 55 

Anthropology Museum 55 

Art Gallery 55 

Dance Repertory Threatre 55 

Daily Titan ,> 55 

Fullerton Arboretum 56 

Herbarium 56 

Oral History Program 56 

Reading Clinic 56 

Speech and Hearing Clinic 56 

Theatre Department Productions 57 

Titan Shops 57 

Undergraduate Reading Lab 57 

University Channel 57 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

School Advisement Offices . : 60 

Academic Advisement Center 61 

Departmental Academic Advisement 62 

Preprofessional Programs 62 

Health Professions 63 

Answers to Your Questions 64 

ADMISSIONS POLICIES 

Undergraduate Students 66 

Freshmen Requirements 66 

English Placement Test (EPT) 68 

Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) Test 68 

Residency Requirements 69 

Application Procedures 71 

Admission Requirements . . 74 

First-Time Freshman 74 

Undergraduate Transfer Students 75 

International Students . 76 

Transfer Credits . 78 

REGISTRATION PROCEDURES 

Registration Information . . 82 

Schedule of Fees 84 

Financial Aid 87 


UNIVERSITY REGULATIONS 


Enrollment Regulations 92 

Grading Policies 93 

Grading System 93 

Administrative Grading Symbols 94 

Student Records 95 

Continuous Residency Regulations 99 

Stop-Out Policy 99 

Leave of Absence 99 

Complete Withdrawal from the University 100 

Retention, Probation and Disqualification 100 

Student Conduct 100 

Student Rights 102 


GRADUATE REGULATIONS 


Graduate Application Procedures 106 

Graduate Admissions 108 

Requirements for the Master’s Degree 109 

Graduate Enrollment Policies 112 

Graduate Academic Standards 115 

Theses and Projects 116 

Steps in the Master’s Degree 119 


ACADEMIC PROGRAMS 


Degree Programs 122 

Graduation Requirements for the 

Bachelor’s Degree 123 

General Education 126 

Teaching Credential Programs 137 

Extended Education 150 

International Programs 151 

Special Major Program 153 

Interdisciplinary Studies Program 153 

Course Numbering Code 154 

Cross-Disciplinary University Programs 156 

Library Courses : . . 156 


CURRICULA 


SCHOOL OF THE ARTS 159 

Art 161 

Music 173 

Theatre and Dance 186 


5 


SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

AND ECONOMICS 197 

Accounting 200 

Business Administration Degrees 206 

Economics 214 

Finance 220 

International Business Program 223 

Management 226 

Management Information Systems 230 

Management Science 232 

Marketing 238 

SCHOOL OF COMMUNICATIONS 241 

Communications 243 

Speech Communication 250 

SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING AND 

COMPUTER SCIENCE 259 

Computer Science 261 

Engineering 266 

Civil Engineering 269 

Electrical Engineering 275 

Mechanical Engineering 281 

SCHOOL OF HUMAN DEVELOPMENT AND 
COMMUNITY SERVICE 287 

Child Development Program 289 

Counseling 292 

Educational Administration 297 

Elementary and Bilingual Education 301 

Health, Physical Education and Recreation 309 

Human Services Program 318 

Military Science Program 321 

Nursing 323 

Reading 327 

Secondary Teacher Education 331 

Special Education 335 

SCHOOL OF HUMANITIES AND 

SOCIAL SCIENCES 339 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 341 

American Studies 344 

Anthropology 348 


Chicano Studies 354 

Criminal Justice 357 

English/Comparative Literature 360 

Environmental Studies 368 

Foreign Languages and Literature 370 

Geography 387 

Gerontology 392 

History 394 

Latin American Studies Program 401 

Liberal Studies Program 404 

Linguistics 406 

Pacific Rim Studies 411 

Philosophy 413 

Political Science 418 

Psychology 426 

Religious Studies 434 

Russian and East European Area 

Studies Program 439 

Social Sciences Program 441 

Sociology 443 

Women s Studies 449 

SCHOOL OF NATURAL SCIENCE 

AND MATHEMATICS 451 

Biological Science 453 

Chemistry & Biochemistry 461 

Geological Sciences 469 

Mathematics 474 

Physics 481 

Science Education Program 485 

Special Programs 488 

Astronomy 488 

Earth Science 488 

Geochemistry 488 

Marine Sciences 488 

Medical Biology 489 

Meteorology 489 

Oceanography 489 

Physical Science 489 

FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATION 491 

INDEX 530 

CAMPUS MAP Back Cover 


6 


Academic Advisement 60 

Academic Advisement Center 61 

Academic Affairs 28 

Academic Appeals 42 

Academic Calendars 10 

Academic Programs 121 

Academic Senate 29 

Academic Services 27 

Accounting 200 

Administrative Grading Symbols 94 

Admission Requirements 74 

Admissions Policies 65 

Admissions and Records 29 

Adult Reentry Center . 43 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 341 

American Studies 344 

Analytical Studies 29 

Answers to Your Questions 64 

Anthropology 348 

Anthropology Museum 55 

Application Procedures 71 

Art 161 

Art Gallery 55 

Associated Students 49 

Astronomy 488 

Athletic Academic Services 32 

Biological Science 453 

Business Administration Degrees 206 

CSUF Alumni 25 

CSUF Foundation 25 

California Desert Studies Consortium 38 

Career Development Center 43 

Center for Economic Education 38 

Center for Governmental Studies 38 

Center for International Business 39 

Center for Internships and Cooperative Education . 32 

Chemistry & Biochemistry 461 

Chicano Studies 354 

Child Care Center 49 

Child Development Program 289 

Child and Infant Studies Center 39 

Civil Engineering 269 

Communications 243 

Communicative Disorders 250 


Subject Contents 


Community Minority Affairs Advisory Council 20 

Community Support Groups 25 

Comparative Literature 360 

Computer Center 30 

Computer Science 261 

Conference Memberships 52 

Continuous Residency Regulations 99 

Counseling 292 

Course Numbering Code 154 

Criminal Justice 357 

Cross-Disciplinary University Programs 156 

Curricula 157 

Daily Titan 55 

Dance Repertory Theatre 55 

Dean’s Honor List 36 

Degree Programs 122 

Departmental Academic Advisement 62 

Disabled Student Services 44 

Earth Science 488 

Economics 214 

Educational Administration 297 

Educational Opportunity Program 33 

Electrical Engineering 275 

Elementary and Bilingual Education 301 

Engineering 266 

English Placement Test (EPT) 68 

English/Comparative Literature 360 

Enrollment Regulations 92 

Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) Test 68 

Environmental Studies 368 

Ethnic Studies 341 

Extended Education 150 

Faculty Affairs and Records 30 

Faculty and Administration 491 

Faculty Research 30 

Finance 220 

Financial Aid 87 

Financial Aid Office 44 

Foreign Language Laboratory 39 

Foreign Languages and Literature 370 

French 370 

Freshman Requirements 66 

Fullerton Arboretum ^ 56 

General Education 126 


7 


General Education Honors 36 

Geography 387 

Geological Sciences 469 

German 370 

Gerontology 392 

Grading Policies 93 

Grading System 93 

Graduate Academic Standards 115 

Graduate Admissions 108 

Graduate Studies 30 

Graduate Application Procedures 106 

Graduate Enrollment Policies 112 

Graduate Regulations 105 

Graduation Requirements for the 

Bachelor s Degree 123 

Health, Physical Education and Recreation 309 

Health Professions 63 

Health and Counseling Services 44 

Herbarium 56 

History 394 

Honors Programs 36 

Honors Societies 37 

Honors at Entrance 36 

Honors at Graduation 36 

Housing Services and Residential Life 45 

Human Corps 50 

Human Services Program 318 

Index 530 

Institute for Early Childhood Education 39 

Institute for Geophysics 39 

Institute for Molecular Biology & Nutrition 39 

Institutes and Centers 38 

Intercollegiate Athletics 52 

Intercultural Development Center 45 

Interdisciplinary Studies 153 

International Baccalaureate Program 67 

International Business Program 223 

International Education and Exchange 45 

International Programs 151 

International Students 76 

Interdisciplinary Studies 153 

Laboratory for Phonetic Research 39 

Latin American Studies Program 401 

Learning Assistance Resource Center 33 

Leave of Absence 99 

Liberal Studies Program 404 

Library ! 31 


Library Courses 156 

Linguistics 406 

Management 226 

Management Information Systems 230 

Management Science 232 

Marine Sciences 488 

Marketing 238 

Mathematics 474 

Mechanical Engineering 281 

Medical Biology 489 

Men’s Intercollegiate Athletics 53 

Mentor Program 34 

Meteorology 489 

Military Science Program 321 

Multiple Subject Credential and Waiver 

Program 137 

Museum Studies 167 

Music 173 

Nursing 323 

Oceanography 489 

Oral History Program 56 

Pacific Rim Studies 411 

Philosophy 413 

Physical Education 309 

Physical Science 489 

Physics 481 

Political Science 418 

Preprofessional Programs 62 

President s Message 3 

President’s Opportunity Scholars Program 37 

President’s Scholars Program 37 

Psychology 426 

Public Administration 418 

Reading 323 

Reading Clinic 56 

Registration Information 82 

Registration Procedures 81 

Religious Studies 434 

Requirements for the Master’s Degree 109 

Residency Requirements 69 

Retention, Probation and Disqualification 100 

Ruby Gerontology Center 40 

Russian and East European Area 

Studies Program 439 

Schedule of Fees 84 

School Advisement Offices 60 

School Based Student Services 45 


8 


School of Business Administration and 

Economics 197 

School of Communications 241 

School of Engineering & Computer Science 259 

School of Human Development 

and Community Service 287 

School of Humanities and Social Sciences 339 

School of Natural Science & Mathematics 451 

School of the Arts 159 

Science Education Program 485 

Secondary Teacher Education 331 

Single Subject Credentials and Waiver Programs . 137 

Social Sciences Program 441 

Social Science Research Center 40 

Sociology 443 

Southern California Ocean Studies Consortium — 40 

Spanish 370 

Special Education 335 

Special Major Program 153 

Special Programs 488 

Speech and Hearing Clinic . . 56 

Speech Communication 250 

Sport and Movement Institute 40 

Steps in the Master s Degree 119 

Stop-Out Policy 99 

Student Academic Affairs 32 

Student Academic Services 34 

Student Activities 47 

Student Affirmative Action 34 

Student Conduct 100 

Student Records 95 

Student Rights 102 


Student Services 42 

Summer Session 77 

Taxation 200 

Teacher Credential Programs 137 

Teachers of English to Speakers of Other 

Languages 378 

Television & Media Support Services 30 

Testing and Research 46 

Theatre & Dance 186 

Theatre Department Productions 57 

Theses and Projects 116 

Titan Shops 57 

Transfer Credits 78 

Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 40 

Undergraduate Reading Lab 57 

University Activities Center 47 

University Administration 21 

University Advisory Board 20 

University Center 49 

University Channel 57 

University Outreach Services 34 

University Recreation Programs 51 

University Regulations 91 

Vice President for Academic Affairs 28 

Vice President for Student Services 42 

Withdrawal from the University 100 

Women’s Center 46 

Women’s Intercollegiate Athletics 54 

Women’s Studies Program 449 

Writing Center 34 


9 


1 989-90 Academic Calendar 


Please note: This academic calendar is not intended to be construed as an employee work calendar. 


SUMMER SESSION 1989 


May 30, 

Tuesday Instruction begins; registration and 

classes. 

July 4, 

Tuesday Independence Day — 

Campus closed. 

August 1, 

Tuesday Initial period for filing applications for 

admission to the spring semester 
1990 begins. 

August 18, 

Friday Instruction ends. 

FALL SEMESTER 1989 

August 22, 

Tuesday Academic year begins; advisement 

and orientation begins. 

August 28, 

Monday Instruction begins. 

September 4, 

Monday Labor Day — Campus closed. 

September 8, 

Friday Admission day — Campus open. 

September 30, 

Saturday Rosh Hashanah — Campus open. 

October 9, 

Monday Yom Kippur — Campus open. 

October 9, 

Monday Columbus Day — Campus open. 

November 1, 

Wednesday Initial period for filing applications for 

admission to the fall semester 1990 
begins. 

November 10, 

Friday Veterans Day observed — Campus 


open. 

November 23-24, 

Thursday-Friday Thanksgiving recess — Campus 
closed. 

December 8, 


Friday Last day of classes. 

December 1 1 , 

Monday Examination preparation day. 

December 11-15, 

Monday-Friday . . Semester examinations. 
December 16, 

Saturday Winter recess begins. 

December 23-31 . . Holiday break — Campus closed. 


January 1 , 
Monday , . . 

January 2, 
Tuesday . . . 

January 3, 
Wednesday 


1990 

New Year’s Day — Campus closed. 
Winter recess ends. 

Semester ends; grade reports due. 


INTERSESSION - 1990 


January 2, 

Tuesday Intersession begins. 

January 15, 

Monday Martin Luther King, Jr. Day — 

Campus closed. 

January 26, 

Friday Intersession ends. 


SPRING SEMESTER 1990 

January 22, 

Monday Semester begins; advisement 

begins; orientation. 


January 29, 
Monday .. 

February 12, 
Monday .. 

February 19, 
Monday .. 



Instruction begins. 

Lincoln’s Birthday — Campus open. 

Washington’s Birthday — 

Campus closed. 

Spring recess begins. 

Instruction resumes. 


May 18, 

Friday Last day of classes. 

May 21, 

Monday Examination preparation day. 


May 21-25, 

Monday-Friday . . Semester examinations. 


May 26-27, 

Saturday-Sunday Commencement exercises. 


May 28, 

Monday Memorial Day — Campus closed. 

May 29-31, 

Tuesday 

-Thursday Evaluation days; grade reports due. 

May 31, 

Thursday Semester ends. 


10 


1990-91 Academic Calendar 

SUMMER SESSION 1990 1991 


May 29, 


January 1 , 


Tuesday 

July 4, 

Instruction begins; registration and 
classes. 

Tuesday 

January 2, 

. New Year’s Day — Campus closed. 

Independence Day — Campus 

Wednesday 

. Winter recess ends. 

Wednesday 

closed. 

January 3, 


August 1, 


Thursday 

. Semester ends; grade reports due. 

Wednesday 

Initial period for filing applications for 

INTERSESSION - 1991 

August 17, 

admission to the spring semester 
1991 begins. 

January 7, 

Monday 

. Intersession begins. 

Friday 

Instruction ends. 

January 21 , 


FALL SEMESTER 1990 

Monday 

. Martin Luther King, Jr. Day — 
Campus closed. 

August 27, 

Monday 

Academic year begins; advisement 
and orientation begins. 

February 1, 

Friday 

. Intersession ends. 

September 3, 


SPRING SEMESTER 1991 

Monday 

Labor Day — Campus closed. 

January 28, 


September 4, 


Monday 

. Semester begins; advisement and 

Tuesday 

September 10, 

Instruction begins. 

February 4, 

orientation begins. 

Monday 

Admission Day observed — Campus 
open. 

Rosh Hashanah — Campus open. 

Monday 

. Instruction begins. 

September 20, 
Thursday 

February 1 1 , 
Monday 

. Lincoln’s Birthday — Campus open. 

September 29, 


February 18, 


Saturday 

Yom Kippur — Campus open. 

Monday 

. Washington’s Birthday — 

October 8, 


Campus closed. 

Monday 

Columbus Day — Campus open. 

March 25, 


November 1, 


Monday 

. Spring recess begins. 

Thursday 

Initial period for filing applications for 
admission to the Fall Semester 1991 
begins. 

April 1, 

Monday 

. Instruction resumes. 

November 12, 


May 24, 


Monday 

Veterans Day observed — Campus 

Friday 

. Last day of classes. 


open. 

May 27, 


November 22-23 


Monday 

. Memorial Day — Campus closed; 

Thursday-Friday 

Thanksgiving recess — Campus 
closed. 


examination preparation day. 

December 14, 

May 28-31, 


Last day of classes. 

Tuesday-Friday 

. Semester examinations. 

Friday 


December 17, 


June 1-2 


Monday 

. Examination preparation day. 

Saturday-Sunday Commencement exercises. 

December 17-21 


June 3-6 


Monday-Friday . 

. Semester examinations. 

Monday 


December 22, 


-Thursday 

. Evaluation days; grade reports due. 

Saturday 

. Winter recess begins. 

June 6, 


December 22-31 . 

. Holiday break — Campus closed. 

Thursday 

. Semester ends. 


11 



12 


The California State University 





The individual California State Colleges were brought to- 
gether as a system by the Donahoe Higher Education Act 
of 1960. In 1972 the system became The California State 
University and Colleges and in 1982 the system became 
The California State University. Today, all 19 campuses 
have the title “university.” 

The oldest campus — San Jose State University — was 
founded as a Normal School in 1857 and became the first 
institution of public higher education in California. 

Responsibility for The California State University is vested 
in the Board of Trustees, whose members are appointed 
by the governor. The trustees appoint the chancellor, who 
is the chief executive officer of the system, and the presi- 
dents, who are the chief executive officers on the respec- 
tive campuses. 

The trustees, the chancellor and the presidents develop 
systemwide policy, with actual implementation at the cam- 
pus level taking place through broadly based consultative 
procedures. The Academic Senate of The California State 
University, made up of elected representatives of the facul- 
ty from each campus, recommends academic policy to the 
Board of Trustees through the chancellor. 

Academic excellence has been achieved by The California 
State University through a distinguished faculty, whose 
primary responsibility is superior teaching. While each 
campus in the system has its own unique geographic and 
curricular character, all campuses, as multipurpose institu- 
tions, offer undergraduate and graduate instruction for 
professional and occupational goals as well as broad liber- 
al education. All of the campuses require for graduation a 
basic program of “General Education-Breadth Require- 
ments” regardless of the type of bachelor’s degree or ma- 
jor field selected by the student. 

The California State University offers more than 1,500 
bachelor’s and master’s degree programs in some 200 
subject areas. Many of these programs are offered so that 
students can complete all upper-division and graduate re- 
quirements by part-time late afternoon and evening study. 
In addition, a variety of teaching and school service cre- 
dential programs are available. A limited number of doctor- 
al degrees are offered jointly with the University of Califor- 
nia and with private institutions in California. 

System enrollments total approximately 355,000 students, 
who are taught by a faculty of 1 9,700. Last year the system 
awarded over 50 percent of the bachelor’s degrees and 30 
percent of the master’s degrees granted in California. 
More than one million persons have graduated from the 1 9 
campuses since 1960. 


The CSU 


13 



The California State University 


California State University, Bakersfield 

California State Polytechnic University, 

Pomona 

California State University, Northridge 
California State University, Los Angeles 
California State University, Dominguez Hills 
California State University, Long Beach 
Office of the Chancellor, Long Beach 
California State University, Fullerton 
California State University, San Bernardino 
San Diego State University 


-Humboldt State University 
California State University, Chico 
Sonoma State University 
California State University, Sacramento 
San Francisco State University 
California State University, Hayward 
San Jose State University 
California State University, Stanislaus 

California State University, Fresno 

California Polytechnic State University, 
San Luis Obispo 




The CSU 



Campuses of The California State University 


California State University, Bakersfield 
9001 Stockdale Highway 
Bakersfield, CA 93311-1099 
Dr. Thomas A. Arciniega, President 
(805) 644-201 1 


California State Polytechnic University, Pomona 
3801 West Temple Avenue 
Pomona, CA 91768 
Dr. Hugh O. La Bounty, President 
(714) 869-7659 


California State University, Chico 
1 st and Normal Streets 
Chico, CA 95929 
Dr. Robin S. Wilson, President 
(916) 895-6116 


California State University, Sacramento 
6000 J Street 
Sacramento, CA 95819 
Dr. Donald R. Gerth, President 
(916) 278-6011 


California State University, Dominguez Hills 
Carson, CA 90747 
Dr. Jack Brownell, President 
(213) 516-3300 

California State University, Fresno 
Shaw and Cedar Avenues 
Fresno, CA 93740 
Dr. Harold H. Haak, President 
(209) 294-4240 

California State University, Fullerton 
Fullerton, CA 92634-4080 
Dr. Jewel Plummer Cobb, President 
(714) 773-2011 

California State University, Hayward 
Hayward, CA 94542 
Dr. Ellis E. McCune, President 
(415) 881-3000 

Humboldt State University 
Areata, CA 95521 
Dr. Alistair W. McCrone, President 
(707) 826-301 1 

California State University, Long Beach 
1250 Bellflower Boulevard 
Long Beach, CA 90840 
Dr. Curtis L. McCray, President 
(213) 985-4111 

California State University, Los Angeles 
5151 State University Drive 
Los Angeles, CA 90032 
Dr. James M. Rosser, President 
(213) 343-3000 

California State University, Northridge 
18111 Nordhoff Street 
Northridge, CA 91330 
Dr. James W. Cleary, President 
(818) 885-1200 


California State College, San Bernardino 
5500 University Parkway 
San Bernardino, CA 92407 
Dr. Anthony H. Evans, President 
(714) 887-7201 

San Diego State University 
5300 Campanile Drive 
San Diego, CA 92182 
Dr. Thomas B. Day, President 
(619) 594-5000 

Imperial Valley Campus 
720 Heber Avenue 
Calexico, CA 92231 
(619) 357-3721 

San Francisco State University 
1600 Holloway Avenue 
San Francisco, CA 94132 
Dr. Robert A. Corrigan, President 
(415) 338-1111 

San Jose State University 
One Washington Square 
San Jose, CA 95192 
Dr. Gail Fullerton, President 
(408) 924-1000 

California Polytechnic State University, San Luis Obispo 
San Luis Obispo, CA 93407 
Dr. Warren J. Baker, President 
(805) 756-0111 

Sonoma State University 
1801 East Cotati Avenue 
Rohnert Park, CA 94928 
Dr. David W. Benson, President 
(707) 664-2880 

California State University, Stanislaus 
801 West Monte Vista Avenue 
Turlock, CA 95380 
Dr. John W. Moore, President 
(209) 667-3122 


The CSU 


15 


Trustees and Officers of The California State University 


Ex Officio Trustees 

The Honorable George Deukmejian 

Governor of California 

State Capitol, Sacramento, CA 95814 

The Honorable Leo T. McCarthy 
Lieutenant Governor of California 
State Capitol, Sacramento, CA 95814 

The Honorable Willie L. Brown, Jr 

Speaker of the Assembly 

State Capitol, Sacramento, CA 95814 

The Honorable Bill Honig 
State Superintendent of 
Public Instruction 

721 Capitol Mall, Sacramento, CA 95814 

Dr. W. Ann Reynolds 
Chancellor of the California State 
University 
400 Golden Shore, 

Long Beach, CA 90802-4275 


Appointed Trustees 

Appointments are for a term of eight years, except for a 
student Trustee, alumni Trustee, and faculty Trustee 
whose terms are for two years. Terms expire in the year in 
parentheses. Names are listed in order of appointment to 
the Board. 

Dr. Claudia H. Hampton (1994) 

Mr. Willie J. Stennis (1991) 

Mr. George M. Marcus (1989) 

Mr. Dixon R. Harwin (1990) 

Mr. Thomas J. Bernard (1989) 

Mr. Roland E. Arnall (1990) 

Dr. Dale B. Ride (1992) 

Mr. Lee A. Grissom (1988) 

Ms. Marian Bagdasarian (1988) 

Mrs. Marianthi Lansdale (1993) 

Mr. Dean S. Lesher (1993) 

Dr. John E. Kashiwabara (1994) 

Ms. Martha C. Falgatter (1995) 

Mr. William D. Campbell (1995) 

Dr. Lyman H. Heine (1989) 

Mr. John F. Sweeney (1989) 

Mr. Ralph P. Pesqueira (1996) 

Mr. Ted J. Saenger (1991) 

Mr. J. Gary Shansby (1992) 


Correspondence with Trustees should be sent: 

c/o Trustees Secretariat 

The California State University 

400 Golden Shore, Suite 322 

Long Beach, California 90802-4275 


Officers of the Trustees 

Governor George Deukmejian 
President 

Mrs. Marianthi Lansdale 
Chair 

Mr. William D. Campbell 
Vice Chair 

Chancellor W. Ann Reynolds 
Secretary-Treasurer 


Office of the Chancellor 

The California State University 
400 Golden Shore 
Long Beach, CA 90802-4275, 
(213) 590-5506 

Dr. W. Ann Reynolds 
Chancellor 

Dr. Herbert L. Carter 
Executive Vice Chancellor 

Dr. Lee R. Kerschner 
Vice Chancellor, 

Academic Affairs 

Mr. D. Dale Hanner 
Vice Chancellor, 

Business Affairs 

Dr. Caesar J. Naples 
Vice Chancellor, 

Faculty and Staff Relations 

Mr. Mayer Chapman 
Vice Chancellor and 
General Counsel 

Dr. John M. Smart 
Vice Chancellor, 

University Affairs 


1 



The CSU 


California State 
University, Fullerton 



r 


Governance 

Governance on the campus at California State University, 
Fullerton is the responsibility of the president and her ad- 
ministrative staff. Working closely with the president are a 
number of faculty and student groups which initiate, re- 
view, and/or recommend for approval, various university 
programs, policies, and procedures. Although the presi- 
dent is vested with the final authority for all university ac- 
tivities, maximum faculty and staff participation in campus 
decision-making and governance has become traditional. 
Students also are actively involved, with student represen- 
tatives being included on almost all university, school, and 
departmental committees and policy-making bodies. 

Advisory Board 

The California State University, Fullerton Advisory Board 
consists of community leaders interested in the develop- 
ment and welfare of the university. The board advises the 
president on a number of matters, particularly those affect- 
ing university and community relations. Members are ap- 
pointed by the president for terms of four years. 

Philosophy and Objectives 

Institutions of higher learning disseminate and advance 
knowledge. The philosophy which guides an institution 
can limit or promote the successful achievement of these 
objectives. Therefore, from its inception, Cal State Fuller- 
ton has consciously endeavored, through its educational 
program, to enhance the fullest possible development of 
those it serves. For both professors and students this en- 
tails a commitment to high standards of scholarship, to a 
comprehensive rather than a narrow approach in major 
areas of study, and to a concern with research and other 
creative activity. 

The university is committed to provide students with the 
intellectual skills necessary for their continued personal 
and professional development, as well as an awareness of 
human achievement. General education forms one seg- 
ment of a student’s program of study. The other two major 
segments are courses taken in the major field of concen- 
tration, and courses taken as electives. Specifically, the 
general education program has as its objectives the devel- 
opment in each student of: 

• The skills of reading, writing, computing and thinking. 

• An understanding of the development of Western civil- 
ization. 


CSUF 


17 


• An awareness of the content, approaches, and methods 
of the various disciplines and of the interrelationships of 
those disciplines. 

• An understanding of cultural diversity within our own 
society and of the cultures of other societies. 

• An appreciation of aesthetics through practice or criti- 
cism of the arts. 

To achieve these objectives the faculty of California State 
University, Fullerton has established a general education 
program described under “Graduation Requirements for 
the Bachelor s Degree.” 


Retrospect and Prospect 

In 1 957 Cal State Fullerton became the 1 2th State College 
in California to be authorized by the Legislature. The fol- 
lowing year a site was designated in northeast Fullerton. It 
was purchased in 1959, when Dr. William B. Langsdorf 
was appointed as founding president, the first staff was 
selected and plans for opening the new college were 
made. Orange County State College started classes for 
452 full- and/or part-time students in September, 1959, 
using leased quarters for its administrative offices on the 
Fullerton Union High School campus and for its class- 
rooms at Fullerton’s Sunny Hills High School. In the fall of 
1960, the college opened classes on its own campus, 
where it occupied 12 temporary buildings. The name 
changed to Orange State College in July, 1962, to Califor- 
nia State College at Fullerton in July, 1964, to California 
State College, Fullerton in July, 1968 and to California 
State University. Fullerton in June, 1972. The first perma- 
nent building, the six-story Letters and Science Building 
(now known as McCarthy Hall), was occupied in 1963. 

Today, there is much dramatic evidence of additional, rapid 
growth. Seventeen buildings or building clusters have 
been completed, and enrollment has climbed to more than 
24,000. Since 1963 the curriculum has expanded to in- 
clude lower division work and many graduate programs. 

The Donahoe Higher Education Act of 1960 established 
the California State Colleges as a system under an inde- 
pendent Board of Trustees, redefined the functions of the 
State Colleges, and related them to both the community 
colleges and the University of California system. Cal State 
Fullerton was the first of the State Colleges to submit and 
secure approval for a five-year master curricular plan and 
one of the first three to secure approval of a master build- 
ing plan. It also was able to think in terms of its ultimate 
enrollment objectives from the beginning. 

On May 26, 1971, Dr. L. Donald Shields, who had served 
as acting president for seven months, was appointed the 
second president of Cal State Fullerton. Dr. Miles D. 
McCarthy became acting president in January, 1981, and 
Dr. Jewel Plummer Cobb took office October 1, 1981. 


Environment of the University 

Fullerton, a city of more than 100,000 inhabitants, 'is located 
in northern Orange County, about 30 miles southeast of 
central Los Angeles. It is part of a new Southern California 
population center and within easy freeway access of all the 
diverse natural and cultural attractions of this region. 

Orange County, with an area of 782 square miles, is the 
48th in size of California’s 58 counties, but it is the third 
largest county in population (2.3 million). Orange County 
has experienced during the last three decades almost un- 
precedented growth as communities continue to occupy 
the diminishing expanses of open land. 

Today, there co-exists an interesting mixture of the old and 
new economic and life styles in Orange County. Underneath 
the soil, archaelogists and bulldozers uncover traces of the 
hunting and gathering Indian bands which flourished at least 
as early as 4,000 years ago in what was a benign and bounti- 
ful region. More visible traces remain of the Spanish and 
Mexican periods and cultures: Mission San Juan Capistrano, 
which began the agricultural tradition in Orange County, and 
subsequent adobes from the great land grants and ranches 
that followed. Additionally, both customs and many names 
persist from this period, and so does some ranching. The 
architectural and other evidences of the subsequent pioneer 
period are still quite visible: farmsteads, old buildings from 
the new towns that then were established in the late 1800’s, 
mining operations, and traces of early resort and other types 
of promotional activities. For about 100 years, farming was 
the main economic activity with products such as grapes, 
walnuts, vegetables, and oranges, replacing the older wheat 
and cattle ranches. Today, agriculture still is very important. 
Orange County ranks high among California’s counties in 
mineral production with its oil, natural gas, sand and gravel, 
and clay mining and processing activities. 

The extensive development of the 42 miles of beaches in 
Orange County and the development of such attractions 
as Disneyland, Knott’s Berry Farm, the Laguna Festival of 
Arts and Pageant of the Masters, the Anaheim Stadium 
and Convention Center and the Orange County Perform- 
ing Arts Center continue to make tourism an increasingly 
important activity. So does the Mediterranean-type cli- 
mate, with rainfall averaging 14 inches per year, and gen- 
erally mild days (either freezing or 100- degree tempera- 
tures uncommon) with frequent morning fogs during the 
summer. Both downtown Los Angeles and the Pacific 
Ocean can be reached by car in half an hour, and mountain 
and desert recreation areas are as close as an hour’s drive 
from the campus. 


The Campus and Its Buildings 

Once part of a vast orange grove, Cal State Fullerton’s 
attractively landscaped campus now consists of 225 acres 
bounded on the south by Nutwood Avenue, on the west by 
State College Boulevard, on the north by Yorba Linda Bou- 
levard and on the east by the Orange Freeway. 



CSUF 


The portion of Orange County immediately surrounding 
the campus is predominantly suburban; it includes housing 
tracts, apartment complexes, shopping centers, space- 
age industrial firms, and undeveloped hills and fields. 

Other educational institutions also are part of the immedi- 
ate environment. The Southern California College of Op- 
tometry, with its four modernistic buildings, opened in the 
spring of 1 973. It is just north of Cal State Fullerton. To Cal 
State’s immediate south is Pacific Christian College, a 
liberal arts school with a Bible emphasis, where students 
started classes in the fall of 1973. The Western State Uni- 
versity College of Law, California’s largest law school, oc- 
cupied its new campus to the immediate west of Cal State 
in January, 1975. 

The Cal State Fullerton campus itself has a high density 
urban layout of buildings and facilities developed to serve 
a predominantly commuting public. The university’s mod- 
ern buildings were planned so that no student should need 
more than 1 0 minutes to go from one class to another. The 
campus is surrounded with landscaped parking facilities. 

The first permanent building, the Letters and Science 
Building, was occupied in 1963. This imposing structure, 
master planned to serve ultimately as a facility for under- 
graduate and graduate science instruction and research, 
has been used to house other programs until they could 
warrant new facilities of their own. This building is now 
called Miles D. McCarthy Hall. 

Since 1963, growth has been rapid. The Performing Arts 
Center was completed in 1964, the Physical Education 
Building in 1965, the Library Building in 1966, the Com- 
mons in 1967, the Humanities-Social Sciences Building 
and Visual Arts Center in 1969, William B. Langsdorf Hall 
(Administration-Business Administration) and the Engi- 
neering Building in 1971, the Student Health Center in 
1974, the Education-Classroom Building and University 
Center in 1976, an addition to the Visual Arts Center in 
1979, and the first phase of student housing and the Ruby 
Gerontology Center in 1988. The latter facility is the first 
building on campus financed solely by contributed funds. 

Due for completion in fall 1989 are a five-story addition to 
the Engineering complex and a 225-room full-service Mar- 
riott Hotel. The latter project is a joint venture involving the 
Marriott Corp., the university and the City of Fullerton. 

Next on the construction schedule are a $6.7 million sports 
complex featuring a 10,000-seat multipurpose stadium 
and a 1,500-seat baseball pavilion, and additions to both 
the University Center and McCarthy Hall. 

In the northeast corner of the campus is the Fullerton 
Arboretum, which was dedicated in the fall of 1979 in a 
joint venture with the city of Fullerton. It includes a 1 5-acre 
contoured botanical garden, a three-acre organic garden 
and a two-acre experimental plot. The ecologically ar- 
ranged flora depicts habitats from the desert to the tropics. 
The Fullerton Arboretum also includes Heritage House, a 
19th-century restored dwelling. Heritage House serves as 
a cultural museum for North Orange County as well as an 
Arboretum office. 


The ample freeway and surface street accommodations 
that approach the main entrance to the university’s mod- 
ern campus also provide comparatively easy access to the 
great and diverse learning resources available in Southern 
California: many other colleges and universities; muse- 
ums, libraries, art galleries; zoos; and the wide variety of 
economic, governmental, social, and cultural activities 
and experiments that may be found in this dynamic and 
complex region of California and the United States. 


Information concerning the instructional, laboratory and 
other physical plant facilities which relate to the academic 
program may be obtained from the Office of Facility Plan- 
ning and Operations. 


Students of the University 

Much of the distinctive character and learning atmosphere 
of any campus comes from the nature and vitality of its 
students. Diversity, the synthesis of academic with work 
and family interests, strong achievement records, and rela- 
tive maturity are some of the predominant characteristics 
of the student body at Cal State Fullerton. 


The university is primarily a commuter institution, with one 
on-campus residence facility which opened in the spring of 
1988. At least 50 percent of the students work 20 or more 
hours per week, and yet 57 percent of all students take 1 2 or 
more hours of course work each semester. The majority of 
students live in North Orange County. Of the fall 1987 new 
undergraduate students, 40 percent came from California 
high schools, 42 percent came from California community 
colleges, 8 percent from other Cal State campuses, 4 per- 
cent from other California colleges and universities, and 5 
percent from other states or other countries. The fall 1987 
new graduate students came from other Cal State campuses 
(55 percent), other California colleges and universities (21 
percent), and other states or other countries (25 percent). 


The student body is 9 percent first-time freshmen, 20 per- 
cent other lower division, 54 percent upper division, and 1 7 
percent graduate levels. Fifty-four percent of all students 
are women. The median age of all students is 23; under- 
graduates have a median age of 22, while graduate stu- 
dents have a median age of 30. The majority of students 
take advantage of course offerings during the day and at 
night, in order to create a workable schedule for their mul- 
tiple responsibilities. 


Many students already have clearly defined interests in a 
major field of study. Only 7 percent of all students have not 
yet declared a major, and are in the process of exploring 
different fields of knowledge. During 1987-88, 3,686 un- 
dergraduates received their baccalaureate degrees, and 
678 graduates received their master’s degrees. 


CSUF 


19 


The Faculty 

Central to the effectiveness of any institution of higher 
learning is the quality and dedication of its individual facul- 
ty members to teaching and scholarship. 

In the fall of 1987 there were 762 full-time faculty and 
administrators and 662 part-time faculty members teach- 
ing on the campus. Almost all the full-time faculty had 
some previous college or university teaching experience 
before coming to Fullerton. Faculty members also have a 
wide variety of experiences and creative activities. A very 
high percent of the full-time faculty have earned their doc- 
toral degrees, and these have come from more than 100 
major colleges and universities. 

Criteria for selection to the faculty include mastery of 
knowledge in an academic specialty, demonstrated skill 
and experience in teaching, and continuing interest in 
scholarly study and research. Retention and promotion 
criteria include service to the university and community. 

Information concerning the faculty and other personnel 
may be obtained from the Office of Faculty Affairs and 
Records. 

University Advisory Board 
Members 


H. William Bridgford, Chair 

Chairman of the Board & CEO 

Bridgford Foods Corp Anaheim 

Evelyn E. Bauman, Vice Chair Fullerton 

Robert F. Beaver 

President, William-Brent Co., Inc Los Angeles 

Manuel R. Caldera 

President, The Caldera Co Los Angeles 

Don Karcher 

President, 

Carl Karcher Enterprises, Inc Anaheim 

Frederick T. Mason 

Attorney at Law Santa Ana 

William J. McGarvey, Jr. 

Chairman of the Board, 

McGarvey-Clark Realty, Inc Fullerton 

Dr. Arnold Miller 

President, 

Technology Strategy Group Fullerton 

John Rau 

President, David Industries Costa Mesa 

Ruth Schermitzler Brea 

Richard J. Stegemeier 

President, Unocal Los Angeles 

Norman V. Wagner, III 

Consultant Orange 


President’s Community Minority 
Affairs Advisory Council 


John Hobgood, Chair 

Communications Consultant Laguna Beach 

Maggie Carrillo-Mejia, Vice Chair 

Principal, Anaheim High School Anaheim 

Dr. Tsu-Tsair O. Chi, Vice Chair 


Labortory Director, Omicron Incorporated . . Anaheim 
Andrew Washington, Vice Chair 

Principal, Gonsalves Elementary School Cerritos 

Paul Apodaca 

Curator, Bowers Museum Santa Ana 

Jo Caines 

Director of Community Relations, 

KOCE-TV Huntington Beach 

Frank Dominguez 
United Way, Director, Hispanic 

Development Council Garden Grove 

Sandy Dooley 

President, Intertribal Council San Dimas 

Rev. Jonathan M. Fujita Huntington Beach 

Marne A. Glass 

Attorney-at-Law Santa Ana Heights 

Edmond Madrid 

Elementary School Principal Placentia 

Mary Miller 

Executive Director, Orange County 

Urban League Santa Ana 

Albert Perales 

Counselor, Kraemer Jr. High School Placentia 

Chieu Minh Pham 

Educator and Computer Specialist Orange 

Dr. Son Kim Vo 

Orange County Refugee Services and 
Coordinator, CSUF Intercultural 

Development Center Santa Ana 

Joshua White 

Developer/lnsurance Planner Anaheim 

Henry Yee 

Certified Public Accountant Accountancy 

of Yee, So and Chao Huntington Beach 


CSUF 


University Administration 

President Jewel Plummer Cobb 

Staff Assistant Norma Morris 

Executive Assistant Thomas G. Coley 

Director of Affirmative Action Rosamaria Gomez-Amaro 

Administrative Assistant F. Caroline Cosgrove 

Director of Athletics Edward Carroll 

Associate Athletic Director Leanne Grotke 

Athletics Business Manager Steve DiTolla 

Assistant Director, Development Andy Hurley 

Tickets/Events Manager Greg Merfeld 

Sports Information Director Mel Franks 

Vice President for Academic Affairs Jack W. Coleman 

Staff Assistant Marlys K. Rietman 

Associate Vice President, Academic Affairs Michael H. Clapp 

Administrative Assistant, Faculty Affairs and Records Vacant 

Associate Vice President, Academic Programs Dennis F. Berg 

Assistant Vice President/Graduate International Programs William W. Haddad 

Director of Graduate Studies Gladys Fleckles 

Athletic Academic Coordinator Alison Cone 

Associate Vice President, Research and External Programs Patrick A. Wegner 

Director of Extension Administration James T. Mavity 

Director of Extended Education Programs Ruth Truman 

Director of Program Management Judy Strong 

Director of Corporate Education Matti Dobbs 

Director of Seminars and Teleconferences Lee Bentley 

University Librarian Richard C. Pollard 

Assistant to the University Librarian E. Sue Boeltl 

Collection Development Officer Patricia L. Bril 

Chair, Public Services Douglas Highsmith 

Chair, Technical Services Janice Zlendich 

Director of Admissions and Records James C. Blackburn 

Assistant to the Director of Admissions and Records Francis M. Casey 

Associate Director of Admissions William Gowler (Acting) 

University Articulation Officer Barbara Hooper (Acting) 

Registrar Carole Jones 

Assistant Registrar Lynette Housty 

Director of Academic Advisement Judith V. Ramirez 

Assistant to the Director Jane Kobayashi 

Director of Analytical Studies Dolores Hope Vura 

Associate Director of Analytical Studies Robert Fecarotta 

Director, Faculty Research and Development Stuart A. Ross 

Coordinator, Contracts and Grants Elizabeth Gewin 

Coordinator of Health Professions Albert Flores 

Director, Information Services and Computer Center Gene H. Dippel 

Manager, Administrative Applications Bobbe Webber 

Manager, User Services Dick Bednar 

Manager, Operations Charles Sowers 

Director, Center for Internships and Cooperative Education Carolyn Kubiak 

Radiation Safety Officer John Elliott 

Director, Student Academic Services and University Outreach Silas M. Abrego 

Associate Director, Student Academic Services and University Outreach Jeremiah W. Moore 

Coordinator, Student Academic Services Stephanie Ortiz 

Coordinator, Learning Assistance Resource Center Ina Katz 

Coordinator, University Outreach Services and Relations with Schools and Colleges Vacant 

Director of Television and Media Support Center Ernest B. Gourdine 

Media Consultant William Shultz 

Distribution and Maintenance Supervisor Michael Dufour 


CSUF 


Vice President for Administration Sal D. Rinella 

Associate Vice President for Administration William Glover 

Manager, Logistical Services Holly M. Hall 

Campus & U.S. Mail Service Services Spergeon R. Taylor 

Procurement Officer LeRoy Page 

Director, Public Safety Daniel A. Byrnes 

Environmental Health & Safety Officer Thomas J. Whitfield 

Manager, Parking/Transportation/Visitor Information Thomas A. Beringer 

Manager, Telephone Services Jeni L. Cansler 

Associate Vice President, Facility Planning & Construction James B. Sharp 

Facility Planner Robin I. Moore 

Energy Coordinator/Project Manager James J. Corbett 

Insurance & Facility Use Officer Martin E. Carbone 

Director, Design & Construction Services Glenn M. Lemon 

Coordinator of Design/Project Manager Philo F. Rohrbough 

Director of Budget Planning & Administration Sherri L. Anderson 

Assistant Director, Budget Planning & Administration Bradley W. Wells 

Budget Systems Analyst Keiko Takahashi 

Personal Services Budget Analyst Michele L. Janiel 

Operating Expense & Equipment Budget Analyst Linda Erickson 

Payroll Supervisor Ruby Hamilton 

Controller Vacant 

Assistant Controller Charles R. Umlauf 

General Accounting Supervisor Linda L. Whittington (acting) 

Accounts Payable Supervisor Frances D. Wrable 

Cashiering Supervisor Charme G. Paul 

Manager, Student Accounting Carlos Navarette 

Financial Aid Accounting Supervisor Roberta J. Wallstrom 

Internal Financial Analyst/ Auditor Ronald G. Lamb 

Director, Personnel Services & Staff Employee Relations David J. Losco 

Associate Director and Manager of Employee Relations 
Service Center Manager: University Relations and Development/ 

Office of the President Emily E. Gilbert 

Employee Benefits Marylin O. White 

Service Center Manager: Academic Affairs Anne M. Megli 

Service Center Manager: Administrative Affairs/Student Services Ron Cataraha 

Training and Development Marianne R. Kreter 

Unemployment Insurance Dorothy A. Edwards 

Workers’ Compensation Coordinator Donna B. Burg 

Director, Physical Plant ’ Roger C. Allen 

Associate Director, Building Services/Engineering Charles D. Stevens 

Assistant Director, Operations Vacant 

Manager, Administrative Services Willem Van Der Pol 

Foundation Executive Director William E. Dickerson 

Director of Finance and Administration Tricia D. Villa-lopez 

Grants Administrator Pearl Cheng 

Titan Bookstore & Titan Shops Director James F. Sando 

Dining Services Director Pat Koch 

Vice President for Student Services Charles W. Buck (Acting) 

Associate Vice President for Student Services Vacant 

Assistant Vice President for Student Services William J. Reeves 

Administrator for Associated Students William G. Pollock 

Coordinator, Academic Appeals Ernest A. Becker 

Director, Career Development Center Roberta F. Browning 

Director, Financial Aid James T. Shafer 

Director, Disabled Student Services Paul K. Miller 

Director, Housing and Residence Life Roy Williams 

Director, International Education and Exchange Robert Ericksen 

Director, Student Health and Counseling Service Vacant 

Director, Testing and Research John Gillis 

Director, University Activities Center Loydene Pritchard 

Director, Women’s Center Barbara McDowell 


CSUF 


Vice President for University Relations and Development Anthony Macias 

Director of Administration Kathy Yarbrough 

Director of Alumni Affairs Sue Lasswell 

Director of Development Information Systems Karen Brown 

Director of Public Affairs Jerry J. Keating 

Director of Public Information Judy M. Mandel 

Executive Director of Titan Athletic Foundation John Rebenstorf (acting) 


Schools, Divisions and Departments 

School of the Arts 

Dean Jerry Samuelson 

Associate Dean Frank E. Cummings, III 

Art Department Alvin Ching 

Music Department Benton Minor 

Theatre Department Joseph A. Arnold, Jr 

School of Business Administration and Economics 

Dean Thomas L. Brown 

Associate Dean Kenneth Goldin 

Associate Dean Paul Hugstad 

Associate Dean Keith Lantz 

Accounting Department Vacant 

Economics Department Anil Puri 

Finance Department John Emery 

Management Department Thomas W. Johnson 

Management Science Department Zvi Drezner 

Marketing Department Irene Lange 

School of Communications 

Dean David B. Sachsman 

Associate Dean Robert Emry (acting) 

Associate Dean Terry Hynes (acting) 

Coordinator, Special Projects Laela E. Handy 

Communications Department Edgar P. Trotter, III 

Speech Communication Department Joyce M. Flocken 

School of Engineering and Computer Science 

Dean John C. Billelo 

Associate Dean Nick Mousouris 

Associate Dean Timothy Lancey 

Civil Engineering Department Dindial Ramsamooj 

Computer Science Department Charles Mosmann 

Electrical Engineering Department Young Kwon 

Mechanical Engineering Department Jesa Kreiner 


School of Human Development and Community Service 

Dean 

Associate Dean 

Counseling Department 

Educational Administration Department 

Elementary and Bilingual Education Department 

Health, Physical Education and Recreation Department 

Nursing Department 

Reading Department 

Secondary Education Department 

Special Education Department 

Child Development Program 

Human Services Program 

Military Science Program 

University Recreation Program 


Mary Kay Tetreault 

Michael Parker 

James R. Bitter 

Walter Beckman (Acting) 

Donald Pease 

Anne Marie Bird 

Julia B. George 

Ashley Bishop 

Paul Kane 

Calvin Nelson 

Judith Ramirez, Coordinator 

Gerald Corey, Coordinator 

Major Kenneth Sadeckas, Coordinator 
Ronald G. Andris, Director 


CSUF 


School of Humanities and Social Sciences 


Dean 

Associate Dean 

Administrative Assistant 

Afro-Ethnic Studies Department 

American Studies Department 

Anthropology Department 

Chicano Studies Department 

Criminal Justice Department 

English and Comparative Literature Department 

Foreign Languages and Literatures Department 

Geography Department 

History Department 

Linguistics Department 

Philosophy Department 

Political Science Department 

Psychology Department 

Religious Studies Department 

Sociology Department 

Environmental Studies Program 

Gerontology Program 

Latin American Studies Program 

Liberal Studies Program 

Russian and East European Area Studies Program 

M.A. in Social Sciences Program 

Women’s Studies Program 

School of Natural Science and Mathematics 

Dean 

Associate Dean, Academic Affairs 

Associate Dean, Administrative Affairs 

Biological Science Department 

Chemistry and Biochemistry Department 

Geological Sciences Department 

Mathematics Department 

Physics Department 

Science Education Program 


Don A. Schweitzer 

Chris Cozby 

Elaine Hutchison 

Carl E. Jackson 

Allan Axelrad 

Jacob Pandian 

Isaac Cardenas 

Garrett W. Capune 

Joseph Sawicki 

Jacqueline Kiraithe 

Robert Young 

James F. Woodward 

Thomas P. Klammer 

David Depew 

Alan Saltzstein 

Patricia Worden 

Benjamin Hubbard 

Rae R. Newton 

. . Stewart Long, Coordinator 
. Rosalie Gilford, Coordinator 
. . Bruce Wright, Coordinator 
Ronald Clapper, Coordinator 
Robert Feldman, Coordinator 
— Ron Riggio, Coordinator 
. . Betty Safford, Coordinator 


A. James Diefenderfer 

Margaret Woyski 

Marvin Rosenberg 

Lon McClanahan 

Robert Belloli 

Gerald Brem (acting) 

James O. Friel 

Dorothy Woolum 

Eric Streitberger, Coordinator 



CSUF 


California State University, 
Fullerton Foundation 

The California State University, Fullerton Foundation was 
established and incorporated as a not-for-profit corpora- 
tion in October 1959. The Foundation is an auxiliary orga- 
nization of the university established to provide essential 
student, faculty and staff services which cannot be pro- 
vided from state appropriations. It also supplements the 
program and activities of the university in appropriate ways 
by assisting the university in fulfilling its purposes and in 
serving the people of the State of California — especially 
those in the immediate Fullerton area. 

Some of the activities in which the Foundation assists the 
university are developing and administering research and 
educational grants and contracts; conducting bookstore, 
food service and vending operations on campus; accumu- 
lating and managing endowment and student scholarship 
funds; and administering various educationally related 
functions and special programs such as the Tucker Wildlife 
Sanctuary. 

The Foundation s overall policies are administered by a 
Board of Directors composed of members of the university 
faculty, administration and students as well as prominent 
community leaders. 


Board of Directors 

David L. Palmer, Chair# 

Sal D. Rinella, Vice Chair* 

Gary R. Del Fium, Secretary# 

Tricia D. Villa-lopez, Treasurer* (ex officio) 

William M. Dickerson, Executive Director* (ex officio) 
John W. Bedell** 

Ted Bremner# 

Charles W. Buck* 

Bert Buzan** 

Claire Carlson# 

Edward Carpenter# 

Robert Clark, Jr.# 

Jewel Plummer Cobb* 

Jack W. Coleman* 

A. James Diefenderfer* 

Vincent Fabrizio* 

Steven Jacques* 

Maria C. Linder** 

Robert Ostengaard# 

Walter J. Pray# 

James P. Stickels** 

Judy Wallace* 

Administrative Officers 

William M. Dickerson, Executive Director 
Tricia D. Villa-lopez, Director of Finance and 
Administration 

James F. Sando, Director of Commercial Operations 

•Administrator ‘‘Faculty ^Student #Community Member 


CSUF Alumni 

Five students were first to graduate from Cal State Fuller- 
ton, becoming the Class of 1960. Since then, over 75,000 
graduates have passed through the university. 

CSUF alumni have a vested interest in their university. 
They have been part of its past, belong to its present and 
are working for its future. Representing those alumni and 
many affiliates, the Conference of CSUF Alumni consists 
of the Executive Council (governing body); School Alumni 
Councils; chartered departmental, special interest and re- 
gional clubs; and other alumni groups and affiliates. 
Inaugurated in November, 1983, the organization serves 
to advance the university’s interests through alumni tal- 
ents, services, energies and financial assistance to nurture 
and enhance the academic setting in such a way that 
students will benefit directly. The group promotes alumni 
involvement on campus and honors outstanding student, 
faculty, staff, community and alumni achievement. 
Anyone graduating from CSUF with a bachelor’s degree, 
master’s degree or a credential is a regular member of the 
organization. Regular members enjoy tangible benefits 
such as the quarterly publication ( Titan News), library 
privileges, insurance program, various events and dis- 
counts. There are also associate, affiliate, honorary and 
community membership categories. 

Call the Alumni Affairs Office for further information. 

Community Support Groups 

California State University, Fullerton has established close 
relationships with the community. There are 1 1 community 
support groups with approximately 8,000 members who 
are involved in the life of the university and who support the 
university in ways that are unique to their particular organi- 
zation. Each group determines for itself membership crite- 
ria, annual membership fees, and its primary goal for uni- 
versity assistance. Further information about community 
support groups may be obtained from the Office of Univer- 
sity Relations and Development located in Langsdorf Hall 
805 at (714) 773-2108. 

Art Alliance 

The Art Alliance provides support programs for the Art 
Department and Gallery through scholarships for art stu- 
dents; endowment funds; financial support for Main Art 
Gallery exhibitions and catalogs; and the administration of 
a docent program which provides tours for special groups 
and high school students. 


CSUF 


Continuing Learning 
Experience 

Continuing Learning Experience is an organization of re- 
tired and semi-retired men and women who wish to pursue 
continuous learning in a high-level educational environ- 
ment. CLE’s programs are designed to serve special inter- 
est groups and/or respond to special academic needs in 
the community. Members of CLE were active in raising 
funds for the Ruby Gerontology Center on campus. 

Friends of the State University 

The Friends of the State University is a group that reaches 
out to assist Cal State Fullerton. Its members include com- 
munity leaders, community organizations and businesses, 
university faculty members and interested individuals. The 
Friends serves as a channel of communications from the 
community to the leaders of the university and from the 
university back to the community. Members provide 
through their membership contributions financial support 
for a variety of activities for which other funds are unavail- 
able such as scholarships, faculty research and special 
equipment. The Friends also honors students who distin- 
guish themselves through service to the community. 

Friends of the Arboretum 

Besides contributing annually to the Fullerton Arboretum 
operating budget, the Friends augments and assists the 
Arboretum program through a wide variety of volunteer 
functions. The purpose of the Arboretum is threefold: to 
create a quiet, esthetic retreat in the midst of a rapidly 
growing urban area; to provide the university and sur- 
rounding communities with a resource for environmental 
and historical education; and to encourage research and 
experimentation in horticulture, plant ecology, and the con- 
servation of natural resources. 

Music Associates 

The Music Associates supports the programs, faculty and 
students of the Music Department through memberships 
and fund-raising events. 

Parents’ Association 

The Parents’ Association is designed to respond to the 
needs and interests of the parents of California State Uni- 
versity, Fullerton students. The organization sponsors a 
broad spectrum of activities and educational programs as 
well as contributing financially to unmet university needs. 


Patrons of the Library 

The Patrons of the Library is an organization of community 
leaders, concerned citizens, former students, faculty and 
staff who generate financial support to sustain the margin 
of excellence of the university Library. It is a group that is 
unique among the 19 campuses of The California State 
University in the quality of its support of library holdings 
and facilities. 


President’s Associates 

The President’s Associates is an organization of dedicated 
community leaders who are committed to the support of 
quality higher education. Membership contributions en- 
able the university to initiate and sustain quality cultural 
and educational programs of both breadth and depth de- 
signed to benefit students, faculty and members of the 
communities served by the university. 


Reading Educators’ Guild 

The Reading Educators’ Guild is composed of those who 
have graduated from California State University, Fullerton 
with a Master of Science in Education, Reading. The Guild 
sponsors credit courses and non-credit workshops, has a 
close working relationship with the Institute for Reading, 
and promotes research dealing with all aspects of reading. 


Titan Athletic Foundation 

The Titan Athletic Foundation is a nonprofit organization 
that exists solely to aid the athletic program at California 
State University, Fullerton. The Foundation is composed of 
individuals who have a genuine interest in athletics, the 
university, and the community and support athletics by 
providing funds for scholarships that ensure an effective 
recruiting program. 


Tucker Wildlife Society 

The Tucker Wildlife Society is made up of university and 
community members who donate time and financial sup- 
port to the Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary in order to provide 
education programs to Orange County youngsters. Help is 
also provided to support the wildlife rehabilitation pro- 
grams. More than 6500 volunteer hours are provided to the 
sanctuary each year to help in reaching out to over 60,000 
people from the Orange County community. 


CSUF 


Academic Services 



27 



Academic Affairs 

California State University, Fullerton provides a diversity of 
educational opportunities to satisfy the broad range of 
backgrounds and interests of its students. The academic 
programs available include 44 bachelor’s degrees, 41 
master s degrees, 41 minors, 5 certificates and 15 teach- 
ing credential programs. Approximately 3,694 courses 
have been developed to provide learning from introductory 
to highly specialized, in-depth and advanced work in a 
wide variety and growing number of fields of study. 

Certain traditions have developed with the academic pro- 
grams at Fullerton. One is that of relative balance in 
strength of the programs in the physical sciences, the so- 
cial sciences, the humanities and the fine arts. Another is 
that of academic excellence in the various specializations 
offered by the university and the comparative freedom giv- 
en to departments and professional schools to develop 
programs for their majors. Through the general education 
program of the university, students are prepared in basic 
subjects and gain experience in a variety of carefully se- 
lected disciplines. 

Vice President for 
Academic Affairs 

McCarthy Hall 133 
(714) 773-2614 

The Vice President for Academic Affairs is responsible for 
the leadership and coordination of all campus academic 
matters. The Vice President is the chief academic officer 
for the campus and is directly involved in the areas of 
curriculum, faculty personnel processes and budget and 
resource allocation as they pertain to instruction and aca- 
demic support. 

The academic vice president works closely with the Presi- 
dent, the academic associate vice presidents, deans, and 
program directors regarding all instructional^ related 
planning and operational matters. Related responsibilities 
include: (1) instructional resource administration relating 
to staffing, operating expenses and equipment; (2) assur- 
ing that all faculty and staff personnel actions reinforce and 
complement the qualitative objectives of the university 
while meeting its strong commitment to the principles and 
spirit of affirmative action; (3) academic support services 
such as the library, admissions and records, extended edu- 
cation, computer center, and student EOP and affirmative 
action programs. As chief academic officer, the Vice Presi- 
dent reviews and recommends to the President on all fac- 
ulty and tenure considerations as well as other academic 
personnel actions as required by university policy. 

Information concerning the academic programs of Cal 
State Fullerton may be obtained from the Office of the Vice 
President for Academic Affairs. This information may in- 
clude: 

1 . The current degree programs and other educational 
and training programs; 



Academic Affairs 


2. The instructional, laboratory, and other physical plant fa- 
cilities which relate to the academic program; 

3. The faculty and other instructional personnel; 

4. Data regarding student retention at Cal State Fullerton 
and, if available, the number and percentage of stu- 
dents completing the program in which the student is 
enrolled or has expressed interest; and 

5. The names of associations, agencies or governmental 
bodies which accredit, approve, or license the institu- 
tion and its programs, and the procedures under which 
any current or prospective student may obtain or review 
upon request a copy of the documents describing the 
institution’s accreditation, approval or licensing. 

Academic, Graduate and 
International Programs 

McCarthy Hall 129 
(714) 773-3602 

The Office of Academic, Graduate and International Pro- 
grams coordinates the development of educational pro- 
grams; provides an all-university perspective on educa- 
tional activities at the campus; and stimulates academic 
innovations. 

The Associate Vice President, Academic Programs, and 
the Assistant Vice President, Graduate and International 
Programs, are responsible for administering university 
policies and regulations dealing with undergraduate and 
graduate curricula; fostering and administering institution- 
al exchange programs with foreign universities; preparing 
and publishing the university catalog; and serving as liai- 
son to the Western Association of Schools and Colleges 
(WASC) and other accrediting agencies. 

The Office of Academic, Graduate and International Pro- 
grams provides leadership for the Curriculum Committee, 
General Education Committee, Graduate Education Com- 
mittee, International Education Committee and other 
groups and individuals concerned with changing and im- 
proving the educational programs of this institution. Re- 
sponsibilities relating to the Chancellor’s Office include 
regular review and updating of the Academic Master Plan; 
coordination of program performance review; and staff 
reports for the Chancellor’s Office relating to academic 
planning. 

Academic Senate 

McCarthy Hall 143 
(714) 773-3683 

The Academic Senate develops, formulates and reviews 
educational and professional policy which becomes uni- 
versity policy if approved by the President. Among other 
things, educational and professional policy includes: cur- 
ricula; academic standards; criteria and standards for the 
selection, retention, and promotion of faculty members; 
academic and administrative policies concerning stu- 
dents; and allocation of resources. There are 15 standing 
committees of the Senate. The Senate consists of 44 
members and includes two student representatives. 


The 15 standing committees of the Academic Senate are: 
Academic Standards Committee, Budget Advisory Com- 
mittee, Computing Affairs Committee, Curriculum Com- 
mittee, Elections Committee, Extended Education Com- 
mittee, Faculty Affairs Committee, Faculty Development 
and Educational Innovation Committee, General Educa- 
tion Committee, Graduate Education Committee, Interna- 
tional Education Committee, Library Committee, Long 
Range Planning and Priorities Committee, Research 
Committee, and Student Academic Life Committee. 

The Senate typically meets every other Thursday in Li- 
brary 117 at 11:00 a.m. 

Admissions and Records 

Langsdorf Hall Lobby 
(714) 773-2300 

The Office of Admissions and Records is responsible for 
the administration of the admission, registration, records, 
and services to undergraduate and graduate students in 
the regular sessions of California State University, Fuller- 
ton. These programs and services provide preadmission 
guidance to prospective students and current information 
about the university’s curricula and requirements to school 
and college counselors; admit and readmit students within 
enrollment categories and priorities; evaluate the applica- 
bility of undergraduate transfer credit toward all-university 
requirements of the curriculum; provide liaison in the iden- 
tification and resolution of articulation problems of transfer 
students; register student programs of study, including en- 
rollment into classes; maintain academic records; admin- 
ister academic probation and disqualification policies; pro- 
vide enrollment certifications on student request, including 
transcripts of academic records, to the Veterans Adminis- 
tration and for other purposes; certify the completion of 
degree and credential requirements; receive petitions for 
exceptions to academic regulations; and provide informa- 
tion about these programs and services. 

Analytical Studies 

McCarthy Hall 136 
(714) 773-2121 

The Office of Analytical Studies is responsible for the orga- 
nization, analysis, and presentation of the information and 
data essential for the support of campus policy formula- 
tion, resource allocation, and short- and long-range plan- 
ning. The office participates in the development and en- 
hancement of institutional information data base systems, 
and conducts descriptive and analytic research on cam- 
pus trends, program and policy effectiveness, and a vari- 
ety of institutional characteristics, as required by the Presi- 
dent and the Vice President for Academic Affairs. 

Among the institutional data with which the Office of Ana- 
lytical Studies is concerned are student and faculty de- 
mography, student progress, enrollment, curriculum and 
scheduling, space and facilities utilization, testing, work- 
load, regional demography, affirmative action, budget and 
program performance review. 


Academic Affairs 


The Office of Analytical Studies produces and publishes 
regular campus reports such as the Statistical Handbook, 
as well as relevant reports required by the Chancellor’s 
Office and other agencies. 

Computer Center 

McCarthy Hall 38 
(714) 773-3921 

The Computer Center is located in the basement of McCar- 
thy Hall. The campus has two separate mainframe comput- 
ers: a CDC Cyber 830 with a capacity to support 100 stu- 
dents for time-sharing applications and a CDC Cyber 860 for 
all on-line administrative data processing for the University. 
Also available for instructional support are two PRIME 9755 
computers, one DEC VAX and one IBM 9370. Instructional 
users have access to such software applications as SPSS- 
X, SAS, SPICE, BMD, and STRUDL, and a variety of other 
discipline-specific programming tools. 

Students have access to these central computing re- 
sources from over 500 micro-computers and terminals 
connected to the campus data communications network. 
Open-access satellite labs are located in each building, 
allowing students convenient computer-related services. 
Computer workshops are conducted to train and assist 
students in the proper use of computing equipment. 

Extended Education 

Building T-14 
(714) 773-2611 

The Office of Extended Education is responsible for all 
university program and course offerings not supported by 
state appropriations. These include summer and interses- 
sion, extension courses, adjunct enrollment, travel study 
programs, contract courses, certificate programs and tele- 
conference programming. In contrast to state-supported 
programs which require matriculation and a degree objec- 
tive, most Extended Education programs allow any adult 
and selected high school student to participate. The prima- 
ry objective of Extended Education is to augment the regu- 
lar university offerings and to provide further educational 
opportunities for all who wish to gain new knowledge and 
skills or to enhance those already acquired. Courses are 
taught by regular university faculty, visiting faculty and 
practicing professionals. All are specialists in their fields. 
Additional information concerning the Extended Educa- 
tion programs may be found in the Academic Programs 
section of this catalog. 

Graduate Studies 

McCarthy Hall 129 
(714) 773-2618 

The staff of the Office of Graduate Studies assists students 
in answering questions about admission, academic poli- 
cies and procedures, graduate programs, financial assis- 
tance, student services, and other matters of concern to 
applicants or graduate students. The office is also respon- 
sible for performing an evaluation of student programs at 
classification and completion of requirements for authoriz- 
ing award of degree. 


The Assistant Vice President for Graduate and Internation- 
al Programs is the appropriate university authority for co- 
ordinating and administering all matters related to gradu- 
ate degree curricula. This position is guided by the policy 
recommendations of the Graduate Education Committee. 

Faculty Affairs and Records 

McCarthy Hall 142 
(714) 773-2125 

The Office of Faculty Affairs and Records is the official 
repository for documents and correspondence concerning 
full-time teaching and administrative faculty. It has respon- 
sibility for retaining documentation pertaining to employ- 
ment, reappointment, tenure, promotion, leaves of ab- 
sence, grievances, disciplinary actions and separations. 

Faculty Research 

McCarthy Hall 112 
(714)773-2106 

The Office of Faculty Research and Development provides 
assistance to faculty and staff in their efforts to obtain 
funding for research and other creative activities. The of- 
fice offers pre-proposal consultation, information about 
funding opportunities and assistance with budgets, techni- 
cal design, typing and editing of proposals. It also publi- 
cizes and administers intramural research grants. A small 
library is maintained in McCarthy Hall 1 12 to aid faculty in 
identifying grant resources, federal/private announce- 
ments and agency/foundation grant profiles. 

International Programs 

McCarthy Hall 129 
(714)773-2618 

The Office of Academic, Graduate and International Pro- 
grams serves as the focus for all aspects of the Universi- 
ty’s commitment to academic internationalization. It is re- 
sponsible for overseeing and directing the international- 
ization of the curriculum. It also initiates and administers 
contacts with sister institutions throughout the world in 
order to foster the exchange of faculty and students. 

For more information on specific opportunities to study 
abroad, either through the CSU system-wide International 
Program or direct links that CSU Fullerton has with foreign 
institutions, see the section of this catalog titled “Interna- 
tional Programs’’ on page 151. 

Television & Media Support 
Services 

Library 80 
(714) 773-2621 

The Television and Media Support Center, located on the 
Lower Level of the Library building, includes audiovisual 
equipment and media distribution, materials design and 
production and instructional television services. 
Audiovisual services for the faculty include the use of 
audiovisual equipment and materials. Conventional class- 
room AV equipment — motion picture, slide, opaque, and 


Academic Affairs 


overhead transparency projectors, audio and video tape 
recorders, and phonographs — are provided. Special pur- 
pose equipment and accessories are available. 

Design and production Services for faculty include assis- 
tance in selecting appropriate media for specific course ob- 
jectives, and the production of media not otherwise obtain- 
able. Graphics of all sorts rendered as overhead trans- 
parencies, easel or wall posters, or camera ready copy are 
available. Photographic slides and prints are provided. Au- 
diotapes are produced, edited, and duplicated, on reel or 
cassette, for classroom use. Modules incorporating several 
media (e.g. sound/slide) will be designed and packaged in 
consultation with requesting faculty. 

Personnel of the Center consult with faculty in the analysis 
of media needs and advise in the procurement or produc- 
tion of materials appropriate for instructional goals and 
objectives. 

Television services include the production of instructional 
and informational modules for closed circuit distribution on 
campus or presentation within the classroom or distribu- 
tion by means of CATV. Videotaping can take place in 
studio facilities, in the classroom, or at appropriate loca- 
tions on or off the campus. Courses are delivered by 
means of cable television and microwave transmission to 
high schools and other remote sites by means of the Titan 
Interactive Network (TIN). The Television and Media Sup- 
port Center, in cooperation with Extended Education, re- 
ceives satellite-delivered teleconferences for the cam- 
puses and members of TIN. 

Television and Media Support Center staff operate the 
system which provides university access programming to 
the CATV companies in Fullerton, Placentia, Anaheim, 
and Villa Park. While the CSUF Communications Depart- 
ment and the Theatre Department contribute to the cable 
schedule, instructional programming and operations man- 
agement are provided by the Television and Media Sup- 
port Center. 

Interactive Televised Instruction is the latest addition to the 
Center’s responsibilities. ITI employs a television broad- 
cast technology known as Instructional Television Fixed 
Service. An associated audio teleconferencing system 
permits interaction by students at remote viewing locations 
with faculty in studio on campus. Students who, for various 
reasons, find it difficult to meet classes on campus can 
"attend” and participate in regular university courses by 
means of ITI. 


The University Library 

Library 229 
(714) 773-2714 

Chief among the learning resources on the campus is the 
University Library. The six-story building located in the heart 
of the campus houses a collection of well over 600,000 
books and bound periodicals, as well as one and a half 
million other items including government documents (feder- 
al, state, local, and international), maps, microforms, and 


non-print materials such as kits, phonorecords, video- 
tapes, audio tapes, compact discs, and filmstrips. Books 
and other materials are selected through the joint efforts of 
instructional faculty and librarians to support the graduate 
and undergraduate programs of the university. In addition 
to the general collection, supplemental and special collec- 
tions designed to support both the curriculum and instruc- 
tional ly-related research have been developed. 

The student identification card issued by the university 
serves as a library card for checking out books and other 
materials. Cards must, however, be validated each semes- 
ter at the library circulation counter. The loss or theft of the 
student ID, as well as any changes of address, must be 
immediately reported to the library circulation counter. Li- 
brary users are responsible for the return of all materials 
charged out to their ID card; early reporting of a lost ID will 
reduce the risk of misuse of the card. If there is need to be 
absent from the immediate area for more than two weeks, 
all library materials should be returned as they are subject 
to a two- week recall. 

Materials for required and recommended course-related 
reading are made available for limited loan periods 
through the Reserve Book Room. For the user’s conve- 
nience, several photocopiers and microform reader/print- 
ers are available. Other specialized facilities include music 
listening rooms and equipment to view videotapes, group 
study rooms, and a microform reading area. 

As part of the curriculum, the University Library offers 
courses in bibliographic research, including Library 200 
(Elements of Bibliographic Investigation). Tours and lec- 
tures for individual classes are given at the request of the 
faculty. In addition to formal instruction in bibliographic 
research, general and subject-specialized reference and 
research services are provided by the library faculty. 

Primary access to the University Library’s holding is pro- 
vided by the Online Public Access Catalog (OPAC). The 
OPAC supplements and will ultimately replace the card 
catalog, and provides access to books, government docu- 
ments and other materials by author, title, and subject. The 
OPAC can be searched not only from terminals in the 
library building, but from terminals in other buildings on 
campus and through off-campus dial-up access. 

Subject access to periodicals and similar types of literature 
is provided through both printed indexes and abstracts and 
through CD-ROM tools such as InfoTrac. Access is also 
enhanced through the Computerized Information Retrieval 
Services (CIRS), a fee-based service offered by the Refer- 
ence Section. Details on this and other services offered by 
the University Library are available at the Reference Desk. 

In addition to the many resources available on campus, 
mutual use agreements make accessible to student and 
faculty the library collections of the eighteen other libraries 
of the California State University system, of the closest 
University of California campuses (Irvine and Riverside), 
and of neighboring institutions such as Fullerton College. 
Interlibrary borrowing arrangements with major university 
and research libraries throughout the country expand the 
resources available to the CSUF community. 


Academic Affairs 


Student Academic Affairs 


Academic Advisement Center 

Humanities 112 
(714) 773-3605 

The Academic Advisement Center provides information 
and guidance in the choice of an undergraduate major, a 
school of interest, or selection of elective and general edu- 
cation courses. It is the administrative center for under- 
graduate students who have not declared a major or 
school of interest. Refer to the Academic Advisement sec- 
tion for additional information. 

Student Academic Services 
and University Outreach 

Library (lower level) 18 
(714) 773-2484 

The primary responsibility of Student Academic Services 
and University Outreach is the recruitment and retention of 
students at California State University, Fullerton. Inherent 
to this mission is the strict attention that must be given to 
increasing the number and graduation rates of underrepre- 
sented students. Moreover, the unit is assigned much of 
the responsibility for coordinating institutional efforts in 
providing educational opportunity for all students. 

The Student Academic Services and University Outreach 
Office develops and coordinates a comprehensive pro- 
gram of outreach services and activities which assist to 
make the university more visible, attractive, and accessi- 
ble to all potential students. A number of programs have 
been consolidated under this office. These are described 
on the following pages. 

Athletic Academic Services 

Physical Education 130B 
(714) 773-3057 

As an integral part of the CSUF student advising system, the 
Athletic Academic Coordinator’s office provides advisement 
for student-athletes; provides referrals to campus academic 
support units; and conducts programs which are designed to 
assist student-athletes in meeting their academic goals. 



Center for Internships and 
Cooperative Education 

Langsdorf Hall 210 
(714)773-2171 

The Center for Internships/Cooperative Education was es- 
tablished to offer students the opportunity to formally inte- 
grate academic experience with practical work experience 
prior to graduation. The Internship Program offers students 
an opportunity to expand their knowledge and skills in a “real 
work” situation which better prepares them to select a career 


Student Academic Affairs 


and successfully enter the job market. Through academic 
study and practical experience, students enhance their aca- 
demic knowledge, personal development, and professional 
preparation. Other valuable benefits of an internship are: 

1 . Gain work experience 

2. Network and develop industry contacts 

3. Earn academic credit 

4. Solidify academic and career goals 

5. Earn money while learning 

6. Test various fields within a major 

The program involves the cooperative efforts of both facul- 
ty and employers in the creation of opportunities for stu- 
dents that fulfill academic and professional needs. Each 
internship is supervised and monitored by the employer, 
while faculty coordinators provide guidance to students to 
insure the academic integrity of the work experience. 

There are two internship/cooperative education program 
options. Students can work part-time while attending regu- 
lar classes or full-time for a semester and can continue 
classes the following semester. Most assignments are sal- 
aried positions and consequently assist the student to fi- 
nance their educational expenses. 

CSUF currently has 39 academic programs that offer in- 
ternships in fields from the arts to the sciences. To partici- 
pate in the internship program a student must: 

1 . Be at least in the junior year of study 

2. Be in good academic standing 

3. Receive approval from a faculty coordinator 

4. Enroll in the departmental internship course 

The internship itself must be related to, or consistent with, 
the goals of the academic curriculum. In most departments 
up to six units of internship credit may be earned. Students 
may be able to receive credit for this experience if they 
have a job which relates to their academic major. Students 
should not wait until their final semester to participate! 

For further information, contact the Center for Internships/ 
Cooperative Education. The Center is open 8:00 a.m. to 
5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. 

Educational Opportunity 
Program 

Library (lower level) 20 
(714) 773-2784 

The Educational Opportunity Program (EOP) is primarily a 
"Special Admissions” program available to legal residents of 
the State of California. EOP is designed to provide informa- 
tion regarding admission, financial assistance, and support- 
ive services to prospective undergraduate students who 
have potential to perform satisfactorily at the university level, 
but who might be prevented from doing so because of eco- 
nomic, educational and environmental disadvantages. 


EOP gives each of the students individual attention. It uses 
knowledge of the students’ distinctive patterns of social 
behavior, learning styles, motivations, and aspirations to 
assist them in realizing their full potentials. 

The services offered by the Educational Opportunity Pro- 
gram include: advisement, tutoring, and retention ser- 
vices. These services ensure a progressive rate of student 
achievement. 

Advisement Services 

The EOP advisement component, (See Student Academic 
Services), is one key to the effectiveness of the EOP. Peer 
mentors, working under the direction of professional staff, 
serve as important liaisons between each EOP student 
and the university as a whole. Assistance and guidance 
are provided to help the student resolve academic, social, 
financial and personal problems. The EOP component of 
the Academic Services Center also serves as a referral 
point to direct students to the appropriate support ser- 
vices, e.g. Financial Aid, Learning Assistance Resource 
Center, and Health Center. 


Learning Assistance Resource 
Center (LARC) 

Library (lower level) 38 
(714) 773-3488 

The Learning Assistance Resource Center (LARC), locat- 
ed on the lower level of the Library, offers a wide range of 
services for students who want to improve their academic 
skills. LARC services include: 

1 . Strategies for Learning classes to help students learn 
more and earn higher grades. Strategies classes em- 
phasize use of appropriate study skills in general edu- 
cation courses (e.g. history, political science, biological 
science and chemistry). 

2. Test preparation classes to help students prepare for the 
Entry Level Mathematics Examination, the California Ba- 
sic Educational Skills Test and the Graduate Record 
Exam. 

3. The Computer Assisted Instruction Lab to help stu- 
dents prepare for the ELM, GRE, EUT, and CBEST. In 
addition, there are self-help programs in mathematics, 
English grammar, and reading that students can use 
independently to learn new skills or to review old skills. 
Materials are also available to help students learn 
about other subjects such as political science, biology, 
history, and chemistry. 

4. Workshops to help students improve their test-taking 
skills, reduce test-taking anxiety, and deal with stress 
related to test-taking. 


Student Academic Affairs 


Mentor Program 

McCarthy Hall 33 
(714) 773-3709 

The Mentor Program seeks to improve the interaction of 
individual students with university personnel by matching a 
student with a faculty or staff member in a mentoring rela- 
tionship. Mentors provide encouragement to the students 
with whom they work in the following ways: (1) serving as 
role models, (2) helping to build self-esteem, (3) support- 
ing the student’s educational and career goals, (4) provid- 
ing general counsel and advice, and (5) providing feed- 
back on the student’s progress. 


Student Academic Services 

Humanities 113 
(714) 773-2288 

An important component of the Educational Equity Pro- 
grams (Student Affirmative Action and the Educational 
Opportunity Program) is Student Academic Services. 
These support services are designed to facilitate student 
adjustment, academic achievement and persistence at 
CSUF. Through individual advisement, guidance, work- 
shops, and social activities, students are encouraged to- 
ward their educational goals. The center also provides 
referrals to other appropriate services and is an important 
liaison between each individual student and various uni- 
versity offices. 


Student Affirmative Action 

Library (lower level) 22 
(714) 773-2086 

Student Affirmative Action (SAA) is part of The California 
State University’s systemwide Student Affirmative Action 
plan which was mandated by the California Legislature in 
1 984 under Assembly Concurrent Resolution No. 1 51 . The 
intent of this resolution was to address the underrepresen- 
tation of ethnic minority, women and economically disad- 
vantaged students enrolled in California postsecondary 
institutions. 

At Fullerton, the SAA program focuses on ethnic minority 
students from underrepresented groups who are academi- 
cally qualified to meet the system’s regular admission re- 
quirements. The program s major activities fall into two 
components: outreach and educational enhancement. 

Outreach Services 

Outreach services and activities to increase the enroll- 
ment of regularly admissable ethnic minority students from 
underrepresented groups to Cal State Fullerton is one of 
the responsibilities of SAA. 

High School and community college students seeking ad- 
mission to the university are provided information on Ful- 
lerton admissions’ procedures, academic programs and 


student support services. Students are also provided indi- 
vidual advisement and assistance with application pro- 
cesses and information on financial aid and scholarships. 
Parents of prospective students are also invited to partici- 
pate in outreach activities including a parent support group 
and information workshops which familiarize them with 
various segments of the university and promote their in- 
volvement in the college experience of their offsprings. 

The Intermediate Outreach Program works with ethnic mi- 
nority students from local junior high schools to assist in 
preparing them to enroll successfully and excel academi- 
cally in college. 

Educational Enhancement 

Recognizing that students are more likely to succeed in an 
environment where they are treated with sensitivity and 
understanding, the SAA educational enhancement com- 
ponent works with faculty, staff and administrators to cre- 
ate a sensitive and supportive environment for minority 
and underrepresented students. 

University Outreach Services 

Library (lower level) 22 
(714) 773-2086 

The University Outreach Service Office develops and co- 
ordinates a comprehensive program of outreach services 
and activities which assist to make the university more 
visible, attractive and accessible to all potential students. 
An overall goal of the office is to increase the enrollment of 
students at Cal State Fullerton with a special emphasis on 
students from underrepresented ethnic minority groups. 

To accomplish this goal, outreach staff make presentations 
to high school and community college students, parents and 
counselors regarding Fullerton admissions procedures (in- 
cluding admission to the Educational Opportunity Program 
(EOP) and Student Affirmative Action (SAA), academic pro- 
grams and student support services). Students are also pro- 
vided individual advisement and assistance with application 
processes and financial aid procedures. 

Special activities including campus tours, financial aid 
workshops for parents and conferences for high school 
and community college counselors are also sponsored by 
the office. 

In keeping with the university’s commitment to increase the 
representation of ethnic minority and underrepresented stu- 
dents at Fullerton, special efforts are made to incorporate the 
unique needs of these students in the development and 
implementation of all outreach efforts. 

Writing Center 

Humanities 528 
(714) 773-3650 

The Writing Center provides tutorial assistance primarily 
for students who are enrolled in English 099, 101, 106,201 
and 301 classes; however, tutors will assist students who 


Student Academic Affairs 


seek help in writing papers for other English classes, espe- 
cially students who need to improve their knowledge of 
writing and language skills in order to complete their uni- 
versity requirements. The tutors provide individualized in- 
struction adjusted to the learning pace of the student. They 
attempt to help the student meet both the demands of 
academic writing and the standards of clear, concise 
prose. 


The staff is trained to work with students who are preparing 
papers for a course or who need help in interpreting the 
instructor’s comments on a completed paper. They do not 
proofread nor do they edit papers; rather, they offer con- 
structive suggestions designed to help the student master 
the techniques of proofreading and editing. The tutor’s 
goal is to increase the student’s competency, not to im- 
prove any given paper. If a student needs intensive work on 
grammar, the tutor will provide one-to-one tutoring and will 
introduce the student to a variety of study materials, includ- 
ing written exercises and computer programs. 



Student Academic Affairs 



Honors Programs 

Dean’s Honor List 

Academic achievement is recognized with the publication 
each semester of a list of undergraduate students whose 
grade-point average for the previous term is 3.5 or better 
for 1 2 units of graded course work. Students are notified in 
writing when they have earned this distinction. 

General Education Honors 

The General Education Honors Program offers students 
many of the benefits of education at a small college in the 
midst of the rich resources of a large university. Courses in 
the General Education Honors Program provide challeng- 
ing learning experiences in smaller classes, individualized 
attention from professors, and closer interaction with other 
students. 

The program also gives students the opportunity to earn 
recognition for distinguished academic performance in 
general education courses. Students who successfully 
complete the requirements for honors in general education 
will have a notation placed on their transcripts. 

In order to graduate with honors in general education, a 
student must: complete the university’s general education 
requirements; be accepted into the General Education 
Honors Program; complete 30 units of general education 
honors courses; maintain a grade-point average of 3.25 in 
all general education honors classes. 

For additional information, please refer to the General 
Education section of this catalog. 

Honors at Entrance 

Honors at entrance are awarded to both freshman and 
transfer students who have demonstrated outstanding 
achievement in past academic work. For first-time fresh- 
men with no previous college units earned, a grade point of 
3.5 on a four-point scale must be earned in the course 
work considered for admission to the university. Students 
who have completed fewer than 56 transferable semester 
units of credit must meet the grade-point average criteria 
for first-time freshmen and must also have earned a 3.5 
grade-point average on all college work attempted. Stu- 
dents who have completed 56 or more transferable se- 
mester units are eligible if a grade-point average of 3.5 is 
earned in all college work completed. 



Honors at Graduation 

Honors at graduation for baccalaureate recipients are 
based on overall performance and have been defined by 
the Academic Senate in three classifications: 

With honors g.p.a. 3.50-3.74 

With high honors g.p.a. 3.75-3.89 

With highest honors g.p.a. 3.90-4.00 


Honors Programs 


Honor Societies 

Chapters of seven honor societies have been chartered at 
California State University, Fullerton to recognize students 
who demonstrate superior scholarship and leadership in 
academic fields. 

Alpha Kappa Delta — Promotes and recognizes high 
scholastic achievement among junior, seniors and gradu- 
ate students in sociology. 

Beta Alpha Psl — Encourages and gives recognition to 
scholastic and professional excellence in the field of ac- 
counting. 

Beta Gamma Sigma — Encourages and rewards scholar- 
ship and accomplishment among students of business and 
administration. 

Golden Key National Honor Society — Promotes and 
recognizes scholastic excellence among juniors and sen- 
iors at CSUF. 

Kappa Tau Alpha — Serves as a vehicle of recognition for 
oustanding students in the field of mass communication. 
Lambda Alpha Ceta — Encourages and stimulates supe- 
rior scholarship and professionalism among students in 
anthropology. 

Mu Phi Epsilon — Promotes high standards in education 
and performance in the professional world of music. 
Omicron Delta Epsilon — Recognizes high scholastic 
achievement in economics. 

Phi Alpha Theta — Serves as a vehicle of recognition for 
outstanding students in the field of history. 

Phi Delta Gamma — Promotes the highest professional 
ideals among women of the graduate schools. 

Phi Kappa Phi — Provides an honor society dedicated to 
the unity and democracy of education and open to honor 
students from all departments of American universities 
and colleges. 

Psi Chi — Advances and maintains scholarship in the 
science of psychology. 

Tau Beta Chi — Promotes and encourages scholastic 
excellence among top junior and senior engineering stu- 
dents. 

President’s Opportunity 
Scholars Program 

California State University, Fullerton established the 
President’s Opportunity Scholars Program as a means of 
recognizing the academic and extracurricular excellence 
of a select group of students. Its special focus is outstand- 
ing students from the current year of high school graduates 
who are also members of minority groups which are under- 
represented in higher education — primarily black and 
Hispanic students. Scholars receive $1,000 per year for 
four years while maintaining eligibility in the program. 

To be eligible for consideration, an applicant must: 

• Be a legal resident of California. 


• Have a grade-point average of at least 3.2 in all 
academic subjects for the 1 0th, 1 1 th and first half of 
the 12th grades. 

• Earn a Scholastic Aptitude Test total score of 900 
or higher, or an American College Test composite 
score of 20 or higher. 

• Graduate from high school in the class year pre- 
ceding the fall semester for which applying. 

• Document significant contributions to school and 
community activities during the high school years. 

• Verify outstanding individual achievement. 

• File for admission to Cal State Fullerton before apply- 
ing for a President’s Opportunity Scholars award. 

• Submit a completed President’s Opportunity Schol- 
ars application form and arrange for the Secondary 
School Report and Description and Evaluation of 
Student forms to be submitted by the high school 
principal or a counselor and by a faculty member. 

President’s Scholars Program 

California State University, Fullerton established the 
President’s Scholars Program as a means of recognizing 
the academic and extracurricular excellence of a select 
group of students. Funded by the President’s Associates, 
the program began in 1979 with the first 10 President’s 
Scholars. Each year 10 additional President’s Scholars 
are selected with the potential eligibility of all chosen indi- 
viduals extending for a total of four years. President’s 
Scholars receive $1,000 a year. 

To be eligible for consideration, an applicant must: 

• Be a legal resident of California. 

• Present a grade-point average of at least 3.5 in all 
academic subjects for the 1 0th , 1 1 th and first half of 
the 12th grades. 

• Earn a Scholastic Aptitude Test total score of 1050 
or higher, or an American College Test composite 
score of 24 or higher. 

• Graduate from high school. 

• Verify outstanding individual achievement. 

• Document significant contributions to school and 
community activities during the high school years. 

• File for admission to Cal State Fullerton before ap- 
plying for a President’s Scholars award. 

• Submit a completed President’s Scholars applica- 
tion form and arrange for the Secondary School 
Report and Description and Evaluation of Student 
forms to be submitted by the high school principal 
or a counselor and by a faculty member. 

Application forms for both Scholars Programs are avail- 
able by telephoning (714) 773-2010 or by writing the Presi- 
dent’s Scholars Screening Committee, President’s Schol- 
ars Program, Library 18, California State University, Fuller- 
ton, CA 92634. 


Honors Programs 


Institutes and Centers 


California Desert Studies 
Consortium 

McCarthy Hall 282 
(714) 773-2428 

The California Desert Studies Consortium consists of seven 
California State University campuses including Dominguez 
Hills, Fullerton, Long Beach, Los Angeles, Northridge, Po- 
mona, and San Bernardino. The primary objectives of this 
consortium are to promote and provide physical and aca- 
demic support for undergraduate educational programs in a 
variety of disciplines and to better understand and manage 
the physical and biological aspects of desert environments. 
The CSU Desert Studies Center provides living accommo- 
dations and laboratory space for over 1 00 undergraduates at 
Soda Springs in the Mojave Desert, a location central to all 
high desert study areas. 


Center for Economic Education 

Langsdorf Hall 530 
(714) 773-2248 

The Center for Economic Education is one of many such 
centers at colleges and universities in the United States 
working with the Joint Council on Economics Education at 
the national level and the California Council on Economic 
Education to expand economic understanding. Center 
programs include services to schools and colleges, indi- 
vidual educators, and the community; research and pro- 
fessional training; and operation of an economic education 
information center. The center is located in the School of 
Business Administration and Economics. 



Center for Governmental 
Studies 

Education Classroom 424 
(714) 773-3521 

The Center for Governmental Studies supports research, 
training and publication which assist governmental, profes- 
sional and civic groups. It is housed in the Political Science 
Department and draws upon departmental, community and 
alumni expertise. The Institute publishes monographs and 
books, sponsors training programs, and supports theoretical 
and applied research which are of interest to public policy 
makers. Institute funds also assist in supporting the teaching 
mission of the department. 


Institutes and Centers 


Center for International 
Business 

Langsdorf Hall 626 
(714) 773-2223 

The need for an international dimension to business educa- 
tion is underscored by the importance of international busi- 
ness operations to domestic firms and the development of 
multinational firms and agencies. Equally important is a 
growing awareness of the diversity among the world s cul- 
tures and economies, and an understanding of an unavoid- 
able interdependence between nations. The International 
Business Center has undertaken to meet these challenges 
in the international area by developing international business 
programs with the School of Business Administration and 
Economics. 

Infant and Child Study Center 

Humanities 519 
(714) 773-3589 

The Infant and Child Study Center in the Department of 
Psychology supports the research and instructional activi- 
ties of faculty and students in developmental psychology. 
Unique opportunities are provided to students in both re- 
search training and applied developmental psychology. 
Programmatic research conducted at the center includes: 
(1) longitudinal assessment of the relationships between 
home environment, mental development and school readi- 
ness; (2) experimental analysis of perceptual and cogni- 
tive abilities; (3) life-span changes in memory and informa- 
tion processing; (4) learning disabilities in children and 
adults; (5) memory strategy instruction across the life- 
span; (6) development of cerebral hemisphere specializa- 
tion; and (7) parent-child computer learning activities. 

Institute for Early Childhood 
Education 

Education Classroom 379 
(714)773-3411 

The Institute for Early Childhood Education (1) fosters and 
encourages communication of ideas and information among 
its membership for mutual professional development; (2) en- 
courages its members to engage in research and writing 
related to the problems of early childhood education; (3) 
encourages students and teachers to adopt an approach of 
inquiry to solve their professional concerns relating to the 
education of young children; and (4) seeks ways of improv- 
ing the individual teaching performance of its membership 
through communication with others at all levels of instruction. 

Institute of Geophysics 

McCarthy Hall 263 
(714) 773-3882 

The Institute of Geophysics is an interdisciplinary organi- 
zation currently comprised of faculty members from the 


Departments of Geological Sciences and Physics. It was 
established to foster the communication of ideas and infor- 
mation; encourage interdisciplinary research; and improve 
instruction in geophysics. Membership is open to all faculty 
members who are interested in aspects of geophysics. 

Institute for Molecular Biology 
and Nutrition 

McCarthy Hall 580 
(714) 773-3624 

The purposes of the institute are: (1 ) to foster and encour- 
age communication of ideas and information among its 
membership for mutual professional improvement; (2) to 
encourage students to adopt affiliation with the member- 
ship and to adopt an interdisciplinary understanding of 
their particular areas of emphasis; (3) to foster an active 
research program on problems best approached by the 
integration of chemistry, physics and biology; and (4) to 
seek ways of improving the individual teaching perfor- 
mance of its membership through interdisciplinary com- 
munication at all levels of instruction. 

The institute sponsors a series of special seminars devoted 
to topics in the molecular biological sciences, featuring 
speakers from its own personnel and from other campuses. 

Laboratory of Phonetic 
Research 

Education Classroom 630D 
(714) 773-2526 
(714) 773-2441 

The Laboratory of Phonetic Research is a research and 
training facility in the Department of Linguistics. It is 
equipped with electromechanical facilities for the acousti- 
cal, psychoacoustical, and physiological study of human 
speech. Its objectives are twofold: 

Instruction. To provide teaching, training and experience 
to assist the language handicapped. 

Research. To provide advanced students and faculty 
with facilities for research on language function and 
dysfunction. 

Foreign Language Laboratory 

Humanities 325 
(714) 773-2153 

Instructional technology in the Department of Foreign Lan- 
guages changed dramatically in 1987 when an antiquated 
reel-to-reel audio lab was replaced by a state-of-the-art 36- 
station Tandberg IS-10 audio lab and an 8-station computer 
lab that is both networked and partially equipped with audio- 
to-computer interfaces. Additional hardware includes a pow- 
erful Xerox 6085 computer and laser printer capable of dis- 
playing and printing not only the Roman alphabets but also 
Russian, Chinese and Japanese. 


Institutes and Centers 


Foreign Language broadcasts provide students with authen- 
tic and interesting supplements to classroom instruction. To 
facilitate such programming, the laboratory has special video 
units that accommodate recordings made in foreign coun- 
tries. Interactive videodiscs, the latest in a series of techno- 
logical enhancements to the study of foreign languages, are 
also available for classroom and individual use. 


Ruby Gerontology Center 

Ruby Gerontology Center 17 
(714) 449-7007 

The Charles L. and Rachael E. Ruby Gerontology Center 
serves as a forum for intellectual activity and creative schol- 
arship in the area of gerontology. The Center also houses the 
activities of the Continuing Learning Experience organiza- 
tion and is a resource center on aging for the Orange County 
region. The Center’s goals include promoting educational 
programs concerning adult development and aging, devel- 
oping productive intergenerational activities in education 
and research, fostering cross-disciplinary research on topics 
related to aging and later life, providing opportunities for 
lifelong learning, and expanding opportunities for profes- 
sional growth and development for those interested in 
gerontology. 

Social Science Research 
Center 

Humanities 523 
(714) 773-2202 

The Social Science Research Center supports the instruc- 
tional activities and research of the faculty and students in 
the School of Humanities and Social Sciences. The SSRC 
has three broad mission areas: (1) Instructional Support, (2) 
Research Support, and (3) Community Service. The facility 
provides instructional support through courses and work- 
shops offered in the Microcomputer Teaching Laboratory. 
Students and faculty have access to computer workstations 
in an open computer laboratory during normal university 
hours and on weekends. Research activities of the faculty 
and students are supported through consultation with the 
professional and graduate assistant staff of the SSRC. The 
SSRC provides community service to agencies and organi- 
zations within Orange County in the areas of survey re- 
search, program evaluation and statistical analysis. The 
community service activities also provide instructional and 
research opportunities for the faculty and students. 


Southern California Ocean 
Studies Consortium 

McCarthy Hall 282 
(714) 773-3614 

The Southern California Ocean Studies Consortium, which 
consists of six State University campuses (Dominguez Hills, 
Fullerton, Long Beach, Los Angeles, Northridge, Pomona), 
participates in training managers and scientists and in edu- 
cating the general public by coordinating and facilitating ma- 
rine educational and research activities. It provides facilities 
for introducing students to the marine environment or for 
intensive participation by students pursuing professional 
programs. The major facility is the R. V. Nautilus (50-foot 
vessel) which is used by classes and research programs in 
biology, geology and ocean engineering. In addition the Con- 
sortium serves as an educational and research liaison be- 
tween regions, states and nations. 

Sport and Movement Institute 

Physical Education 134 
(714) 773-3316 

The purpose of the Sport and Movement Institute is to pro- 
mote an atmosphere congenial to research, creative activity, 
and services concerned with human movement and its relat- 
ed phenomena. Specifically, the organization endeavors to: 
(1) provide services of evaluation, consultation and advise- 
ment; (2) foster and encourage the generation and commu- 
nication of ideas and information; (3) interpret and facilitate 
the practical application of research findings; (4) provide 
opportunities for individuals and community groups to par- 
ticipate in activities of the Institute such as clinics, work- 
shops, seminars, etc.; (5) promote and support research and 
other scholarly activities on the part of the membership. 

Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 

McCarthy Hall 236A 
(714) 649-2760 
(714) 773-3451 

The Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary operates as a nonprofit 
California State University, Fullerton Foundation agency. 
Located in Modjeska Canyon in the Santa Ana Mountains, 
the sanctuary provides for a program of continuing educa- 
tional service to the community; a research center for bio- 
logical field studies; a facility for teacher education in na- 
ture interpretation and conservation education; and a cen- 
ter for training students planning to enter into the public 
service field of nature interpretation. 


Institutes and Centers 



Student Services 
and Activities 


41 


Student Services 


While classroom activity is devoted to the academic devel- 
opment of the learner, Student Services offers programs 
which support the academic program and simultaneously 
provide students with services and opportunities for per- 
sonal growth. Some Student Services programs such as 
housing and financial aid emphasize their service and edu- 
cationally supportive roles; others, like counseling, accen- 
tuate their developmental aspects. The opportunities of- 
fered by the university’s Student Services program vary 
from the traditional social activities to lectures and con- 
certs funded through the Associated Students. Develop- 
mental activities include the exploration of personal and 
vocational life styles and leadership and training. 

Student Services are comprised of Academic Appeals, the 
Adult Reentry Center, the Career Development Center, Dis- 
abled Student Services, Financial Aid, Health and Counsel- 
ing Service, Housing Services and Residence Life, Interna- 
tional Education and Exchange, Testing and Research, Uni- 
versity Activities Center, University Center (Student Union), 
and Women’s Center. 


Vice President for 
Student Services 

Langsdorf Hall 810 
(714) 773-3221 

The efforts of all of the Student Services are coordinated 
and supervised by the vice president for student services. 
The vice president is responsible for the quality of student 
life on the campus and works with faculty, administration 
and students to improve the campus environment. The 
vice president is assisted by an associate vice president 
and an assistant vice president. This office is also charged 
with administering the university’s academic appeals pro- 
cedure and the student disciplinary codes. 


Academic Appeals 

Langsdorf Hall 810 
(714) 773-3836 

Students who have grade disputes are encouraged to 
make every effort to resolve the issue informally by meet- 
ing with the instructor, department chair, and dean of the 
school. Students who feel they have been unsuccessful at 
resolving the issue informally, should contact the coordina- 
tor of academic appeals, who will work to resolve the dis- 
pute informally and provide information and clarification 
about university policies. Students are encouraged to con- 
tact the coordinator if they have questions about the aca- 
demic appeals process. 



Student Services 



Adult Reentry Center 

McCarthy Hall 33 
(714) 773-3889 

The Adult Reentry Center (ARC) serves adults who, after a 
break in their education, are considering beginning or con- 
tinuing their college education. The center provides sup- 
port and guidance for currently enrolled reentry students 
and others whose needs differ from those of the traditional 
university student. 

ARC offers a variety of programs which include support 
counseling, workshops, support groups and referrals to staff 
and faculty. The center’s counselors and programs can help 
students and prospective students to clarify their goals and 
determine if a university education is the appropriate method 
for attaining those goals. The center also provides informa- 
tion and assistance with university application and registra- 
tion procedures as well as personal, academic and career 
counseling. Special programs, groups, workshops, films and 
discussions which focus on the special needs of reentry 
students are presented each semester. Evening hours are 
always available. 

Career Development Center 

Langsdorf Hall 208 
(714)773-3121 

The Career Development Center is structured to meet the 
wide range of students’ career needs and to help explore, 
develop and realize career plans. The center has designed 
many programs and services tailored to fit career explora- 
tion, planning and employment needs. 

The center can help with career planning and research or 
provide job search skills and employment opportunities. 
Because the career planning process involves many vari- 
ables, the CDC draws upon both on- and off-campus re- 
sources. Counselors work closely with employers and on 
task forces with faculty to develop career programs rel- 
evant to educational experiences. Whether a student is 
just beginning career research or is ready to look for a job, 
the CDC has counselors and programs that will help define 
and achieve career goals. 

Counseling 

CDC professionals can help to identify interests, skills and 
values and their relationship to career opportunities through 
counseling and vocational testing. In addition to career is- 
sues, CDC counselors are trained to assist with personal 
problems that may be interfering with progress. An individ- 
ual, confidential appointment can help clarify concerns and 
develop a plan of action. 

Seminars and Workshops 

Group sessions examine topics such as career planning, 
resume writing, job search techniques, interview skills and 
other career related subjects throughout the semester. 
Many of these seminars are designed for specific academ- 
ic areas. In addition, workshops in personal development 


and life skills are offered in the center. See the CDC Calen- 
dar published every semester for current information. 

Career Resource Library 

The center has an extensive collection of career search, 
occupational and labor market information to help with 
career research. The library includes books, pamphlets, 
brochures, as well as audio and video tapes. 

Part-Time Employment 

The center has listings of part-time, summer and tempo- 
rary employment which are received each day from local 
employers. 

Career Employment 

Counseling, employment listings and recorded job infor- 
mation are available to students and graduates seeking 
full-time career opportunities. The jobs are found in gov- 
ernment agencies, business, industry, manufacturing and 
service industries. 

On Campus Recruitment 

Several hundred employers send recruiters to the CDC 
each fall and spring to recruit graduating seniors, graduate 
students and alumni. 

Educational Placement 

The center provides complete services for candidates 
seeking employment in educational institutions including: 
placement counseling, placement file service, position list- 
ings and a published bulletin of administrative openings. 

Minority Services 

The CDC is aware of the career needs of minority students; 
counselors work closely with employers, clubs and profes- 
sional organizations to provide services and opportunities 
that will help meet these needs. 

SIGI PLUS ™ 

SIGI PLUS™ (pronounced “Siggy”) is a computer-based Sys- 
tem of Interactive Guidance and Information that will help 
make career decisions. The program will help examine val- 
ues, explore career options and master decision-making 
strategies. 

Career Class 

Career Exploration and Life Planning (Counseling 252) is 
a three unit course designed to facilitate career and educa- 
tional decision making. Specific objectives of the class 
include increasing awareness of self, the world of work, 
relationships between college majors and occupations, 
and job search skills. See the current Class Schedule for 
further information. 

Alumni Career Bank 

The Alumni Career Bank is composed of more than 500 
CSUF alumni who have volunteered to share their work ex- 
periences with students. Over 100 career areas and nearly 
every major and program are represented in the bank. 


Student Services 


Walk-In Counselor 

Throughout the day a CDC counselor is available to help 
define career needs and suggest appropriate CDC ser- 
vices. Designed to answer short questions and provide 
information. 

The services of the Career Development Center are avail- 
able without cost to currently enrolled students. Services 
are also available to alumni without charge for six months 
following graduation. After that period, alumni will be 
charged a nominal fee for certain services. 

The university will furnish, upon request, information con- 
cerning the subsequent employment of graduates from 
programs or courses of study which have the purpose of 
preparing students for a particular career field. This infor- 
mation includes data concerning average starting salary 
and the percentage of previously enrolled students who 
obtained employment. The information provided may in- 
clude data collected from either graduates of the campus 
or graduates of all campuses in The California State Uni- 
versity system. Copies of the published information may 
be requested from the director of the center. 

Financial Aid 

McCarthy Hall 63 
(714) 773-3125 

The purpose of the Financial Aid Office is to provide finan- 
cial assistance to eligible students. The office administers 
the following student financial assistance programs: 

Supplemental Loans for Students (SLS) 

Parent Loan (PLUS) Program 
Perkins Loan (formerly NDSL) 

Stafford Loan (formerly GSL) 

Pell Grant 

Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant 
Bureau of Indian Affairs Grant 
State University Grant Program 
Educational Opportunity Program Grant 
College Work Study Program 
Cal Grant A (State Scholarship) 

Cal Grant B (College Opportunity Grant) 

Graduate Fellowship 
Private Scholarship 
Emergency Loan Fund 

For further information concerning financial aid programs 
available at the university see the Registration Procedures 
section of this catalog or call the Financial Aid Office. 

Disabled Student Services 

Library 113 
(714)773-3117 

Disabled Student Services provides assistance and offers 
special services to all handicapped/disabled students. The 
purpose of this program is to make all of the university’s 
educational, cultural, social and physical facilities and pro- 
grams available to students with orthopedic and/or perceptu- 


al handicaps/disabilities. The program serves as a central- 
ized source of information and provides students with indi- 
vidual attention. The professional and support staff are ex- 
perienced with the particular needs of persons with disabil- 
ities. 

The program works in close cooperation with other univer- 
sity departments in order to provide a full range of ser- 
vices. These services include classroom support services 
(readers, notetakers, tutors, interpreters for the deaf/hear- 
ing impaired, alternative testing) counseling, handicapped 
parking, application assistance and priority registration, 
academic advisement, career counseling and job-place- 
ment, housing and transportation, health services for 
acute illness and advocacy. 

The program also coordinates and provides diagnostic 
assessment, counseling, advisement, advocacy and sup- 
portive services for students with learning disabilities. 

The program needs and encourages involvement and in- 
put from the students it serves in order to maintain a re- 
sponsive and quality program. 

Information regarding special facilities and services avail- 
able to disabled students may be obtained from the Office 
of Disabled Student Services. 


Health and Counseling Service 

Student Health Center 
(714) 773-2800 

The Student Health and Counseling Service is equipped to 
care for a wide range of outpatient medical problems. 

The Health and Counseling Service is staffed by doctors, 
nurses, laboratory and X-ray technologists, pharmacists 
and a physical therapist. Most of the doctors are primary 
care physicians. The staff also includes gynecologists, an 
orthopedist, a dermatologist, an allergist and a podiatrist. 
The center has a pharmacy (not for outside prescriptions), 
a laboratory, an X-ray service, physical therapy, and birth 
control and nutritional counseling. Students who encoun- 
ter emotional or personal problems can come to the Coun- 
seling and Mental Health Department where psychological 
counselors and psychiatrists are available for consultation 
and treatment when needed. 

All medical records are confidential; no information will be 
released without the patient’s written permission except in 
the rare case of a court subpoena. 

The cost of care provided by the Health and Counseling 
Service, except for a few specific fees, has been paid 
through student fees and by the State of California. Every 
registered student is eligible for care. The Health and 
Counseling Service cannot, however, meet all medical 
needs. Students are urged to obtain health insurance if 
they do not already have adequate private insurance. A 
good, inexpensive policy is offered through the Associated 
Students, Inc. 


Student Services 


Housing Services and 
Residence Life 

Cypress House 101 
(714) 773-2168 

The University welcomed its first on-campus resident stu- 
dents during spring semester 1988. Up to 396 students 
can be accommodated in 66 Residence Hall suites. This is 
the first phase of a two-phase construction program that 
will eventually house up to 800 students on campus. The 
six-person suites are air-conditioned, carpeted and fully 
furnished. 

The fenced complex has a study lounge, computer and 
typing rooms, a weight room, a multi-purpose room and 
coin-operated washers and dryers. Barbecue grills, a pic- 
nic area, a basketball court, a sand volleyball court, video 
game machines, billiards, ping pong, a large screen televi- 
sion set and VCR are also available for the residents. 
Contact the campus housing office for further information. 

The housing office is also ready to assist students in their 
search for off-campus housing. The office provides updat- 
ed listings of local apartment complexes. Bulletin boards 
are available outside of the housing office for the posting of 
cards by students seeking roommates or accommoda- 
tions. Other listings highlight rooms for rent in private 
homes and room offerings in exchange for light duties. 

Additional housing information available to students in- 
cludes a model rental agreement and community housing 
agency referrals on landlord/tenant law. 

International Education and 
Exchange 

McCarthy Hall 79 
(714) 773-2787 

California State University, Fullerton is a community of 
people from many nations and cultures. The Office of In- 
ternational Education and Exchange is dedicated to pro- 
moting the exchange of knowledge and experience within 
the multicultural campus community and with the world at 
large. The office provides information and assistance for 
all international students attending CSUF and for U.S. 
students planning to study abroad. 

International Students 

Over 700 students from nearly 70 countries study at CSUF 
as international students, and the staff of the Office of 
International Education and Exchange endeavors to pro- 
vide them with a home away from home. The office pro- 
vides visa eligibility documents, pre-arrival information, 
and orientation to newly admitted students. The door is 
always open for students to meet with an adviser to dis- 
cuss academic concerns, cultural adjustment, immigration 
matters or just to chat. 


Campus activities such as international dinners and dis- 
cussions occur throughout the year. The office coordinates 
programs in the Fullerton community, such as the Friend- 
ship Families hospitality program. 

Study, Work and Travel Abroad 

A year or semester overseas can provide an invaluable 
educational experience. Cultural awareness, language 
skills and an in-depth knowledge of one’s field from an 
international perspective are but a few of the many bene- 
fits of studying abroad. A well planned program offers ca- 
reer advantages with the increasingly multinational and 
multicultural organizations and communities of southern 
California. 

The California State University International Programs is an 
academic year program with 25 centers in 15 countries. 
International Programs participants remain enrolled at 
CSUF, earn residential credit, and pay only home campus 
fees. All personal expenses are the student’s responsibility. 

CSUF has established campus-based direct exchange pro- 
grams with universities in China, France, Japan and Mexico. 
Application and admission requirements vary somewhat by 
country. No overseas tuition is charged; students pay regular 
CSUF campus fees, plus international transportation, living, 
and related expenses. Semester programs are available. 
Detailed information may be found in the “International Pro- 
grams” section of this catalog. 

Information on the International Programs as well as a 
general library on study, work, and travel abroad are avail- 
able in the International Education Office. 

Intercultural Development Center 

The Intercultural Development Center, located in the Li- 
brary, Room 4-B, offers educational support programs and 
services for foreign-born students. Students will be offered 
programs such as employment skills workshops, peer sup- 
port groups, and English Writing Proficiency Exam prep- 
aration sessions. 

The Intercultural Development Center builds cross-cultural 
awareness in the campus community by serving as a re- 
source center with published materials and presentations on 
diverse cultures. The Center is well-equipped to assist Viet- 
namese students with academic and personal problems. 

School Based Student Services 

The school based student services program was devel- 
oped to broaden services to students in the academic 
schools and to increase interaction between students, fac- 
ulty and student services. An assistant dean who special- 
izes in student services is available in most of the schools. 
The responsibilities of the assistant deans may include, 
but are not limited to, counseling students with personal 
and academic questions, assisting student and alumni 
groups in achieving their goals, referring students and fac- 
ulty to specific campus resources, and working with orien- 
tation and academic advisement programs. 


Student Services 


Contact the assistant dean in your school for information The center also administers other group tests related to 

about a number of projects and programs which may be of CSUF degree requirements. Information on these tests is 

interest to you. available in the center: 


Testing and Research 

Langsdorf Hall 206 
(714) 773-3838 

The Testing Center provides a variety of testing and re- 
search services to the university. 

The center supports the counseling services available 
through the Career Development Center and the Student 
Health and Counseling Service by administering a variety 
of psychological tests designed to help students gain a 
better understanding of themselves and of their goals and 
interests. These tests are administered on an individual 
basis in response to counselor referrals. 

The center conducts ongoing research and evaluation of 
university testing programs and consults with members of 
the university community regarding the design and con- 
duct of testing-related studies and survey research. The 
center also designs and conducts surveys of student 
needs, attitudes, and other characteristics. 

National group testing programs related to undergraduate 
and graduate school admissions and teacher certification 
are also coordinated by the center. Information on the 
following tests is available in the center: 

American College Test (ACT) 

Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) 

Graduate Record Examination (GRE) 

Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT) 

Law School Admission Test (LSAT) 

Medical College Admission Test (MCAT) 

National Teacher Examination (NTE) 

California Basic Educational Skills Test (CBEST) 
Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) 
Miller Analogies Test (MAT) 


English Placement Test (EPT) 

Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) 

English Equivalency Examination (EEE) 

Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) 
Accounting Qualifying Exam (AQE) 

Mathematics Qualifying Examination (MQE) 

Women’s Center 

McCarthy Hall 33 
(714) 773-3928 

Although the Women’s Center maintains its original pur- 
pose of fostering greater awareness of women’s concerns, 
and supporting rights of all women and men, it is open to all 
interested students. The center’s hours are from 8 a.m. to 
5 p.m. Monday through Friday. Evening appointments are 
always available. 

The Women’s Center is a place for all students — women 
and men — a place to get help with any problem you may 
have — a place to study, relax and make new friends. In 
short, an excellent center for students to receive support, 
information and resources to help them explore the many 
options available to them. 

Programs and services include individual counseling, 
speakers, films, skill-building workshops, growth-oriented 
support groups, resource information and referrals. 

The Women’s Center is closely involved with the minor in 
Women’s Studies. The center houses a Women’s Studies 
Library of over 800 books and files with excellent research 
materials. A listing of film and tape titles round out the 
collection. The center also gathers and maintains informa- 
tion on local women’s events, news and networks. 


Student Services 



Student Activities 

Opportunities to teach and to learn are not limited to the 
classroom at California State University, Fullerton. Stu- 
dents taking full advantage of the many educational oppor- 
tunities find themselves attending lectures, concerts and 
seminars offered as part of a well-developed co-curriculum 
on campus. Students not only attend events, but they par- 
ticipate in the planning and implementation of a full slate of 
activities held throughout the year. Through their participa- 
tion, students experiment with new interests and broaden 
their experience with existing interests. Many clubs and 
organizations exist in the academic disciplines which en- 
courage close contact between students and faculty. 

University Activities Center 

University Center 2-43 
(714) 773-3211 

From New Student Orientation through commencement 
the University Activities Center serves as a resource for 
students seeking to develop their management, leader- 
ship and organizational skills. New Student Orientation is 
coordinated by the center and held each semester during 
the week prior to the beginning of classes. Since orienta- 
tion is staffed by students, this program is an excellent way 
for new students to take advantage of training resources 
and become involved with the university. 

Opportunities for involvement in the center’s programs are 
open to all students according to their interests, abilities 
and time. Staff members at the Activities Center advise 
many student organizations and are available as re- 
sources in the formation of new groups and strengthening 
existing groups. Workshops on team building, organiza- 
tional behavior, leadership styles, group dynamics and 
programming aids are available by contacting the office. 

Leadership Opportunities 

Workshops and training programs are available to teach 
and encourage students who may want to learn or refine 
leadership skills. Practical application of these skills is 
available through the approximately 200 campus clubs 
and organizations. Academic and professional organiza- 
tions are either closely affiliated with academic areas at 
Cal State Fullerton or have national professional recogni- 
tion. These groups offer students a chance to identify with 
faculty and community members who have similar career 
interests. 

Councils and task forces are formed by representatives of 
other officially recognized organizations. These groups of- 
ten have a specific purpose or are formed to solve a par- 
ticular problem. 

Cultural organizations seek to present ethnic, minority and 
cultural programs for the Cal State Fullerton campus. 
Many opportunities are created for the development of 
leadership and programming skills in this area because of 
the diversity of the cultures represented on campus. 


Student Activities 



Greek letter fraternities and sororities with national affilia- 
tion also exist at Cal State Fullerton. With a choice from 
fifteen fraternities and seven sororities, Cal State Fullerton 
students can usually find a group with which they want to 
affiliate. Rush information is available at the University 
Activities Center. 

Many religious organizations have been formed at Cal 
State Fullerton with representation from a wide variety of 
religious persuasions. Groups which are predominantly 
political in nature and those whose goal is service to oth- 
ers also enjoy student support. 

Club sports, recreation and leisure groups in a variety of 
recreational programs are very active on campus. Some 
are competitive as teams and others offer students a 
chance to develop individual skills which can be used as 
lifetime leisure activities. 

AS Productions 

University Center M-17 
(714) 773-3501 

Entertainment possibilities are endless with Associated 
Students Productions at CSUF. ASP consists of six com- 
mittees composed of student volunteers whose common 
interest is to keep the campus alive with quality entertain- 
ment and educational presentations. 

Any student can apply to be a program director or assistant 
director. Candidates for these posts are appointed by the 
ASI president and are approved by the board of directors. 
Their responsibilities include planning and implementing 
programs, managing budgets, and training committee 
members. 

Committee members are student volunteers who attend 
regular meetings, help in program selection and work at 
the actual events. Joining a committee is a great way to 
have fun while learning leadership, communication and 
organization skills, as well as making a lot of new friends. 

Students can join an AS Productions committee anytime 
during the year by contacting the ASP office. 

AS Productions coordinates the film series, lecture series 
and concert series committees. The film series presents a 
variety of contemporary, classic and foreign movies to stu- 
dents at a cost lower than that charged by most commer- 
cial theaters. The speaker series provides the campus with 
prominent speakers who create a forum for issues and 
topics that are of importance to the campus and to the 
community. Noontime and major concerts provide a show- 
case of original music ranging from classical to rock. Major 
concerts are usually held indoors while all noontime con- 
certs are performed at the Soundstage. 

Pub entertainment features bands from local nightclubs in 
the afternoon as well as evening concerts in the University 
Center Pub. 

Special Events offers unique and memorable events such 
as fairs, theatre groups and other special entertainment. 


Camp Titan 

Camp Titan is a service opportunity for students who enjoy 
the special feeling that comes from sharing their time with 
children. 

CSUF students devote one week of their time each June to 
be friends and counselors to 80 to 100 children attending 
Camp Titan, which is accredited by the American Camp 
Association. 

The children range in age from 7 to 12 years and are 
selected on a referral basis from community service agen- 
cies. Because all of the children are underprivileged, they 
attend camp at no cost to their families. 

Students enjoy a special time of helping these children 
develop positive attitudes about themselves. The week is 
as much fun for the counselors as it is for the children. 

Students who are interested in a week of hiking, fishing, 
sitting around a campfire, swimming and spending time 
with children, can obtain further information about Camp 
Titan from the University Activities Center. 

Departmental Association Council 

The Departmental Association Council (DAC) is the orga- 
nization formed by the Associated Students to represent 
the academic associations at CSUF. DAC is composed of 
student delegates who represent all of the academic stu- 
dent organizations within each department. By being a 
member of his or her own departmental student organiza- 
tion the student is a part of the DAC. 

The DAC provides funding for programs originated by 
member organizations. Student departmental organiza- 
tions can use DAC funds to provide speakers, films and 
presentations that enhance the classroom experience. 

Individual students can receive funds for use in conducting 
research. All CSUF students are eligible to apply for such 
funds. 

The DAC provides a forum for discussion of student ideas 
and concerns. All students are welcome to attend council 
meetings. 

For more information on how to get involved in the DAC, 
contact the University Activities Center. 

Multicultural Council 

The Multicultural Council is composed of the student cul- 
tural clubs and organizations at CSUF. It provides funds to 
student groups that represent ethnic programs and for 
educational programs that have cultural bases. For more 
information about the Multicultural Council contact the 
University Activities Center. 

Student Publications 

Titan Times is a biweekly newsletter that contains current 
news about campus events. It is a calendar of the pro- 
grams and activities of CSUF clubs and organizations. 
Items for publication may be given to the Titan Times 
editor in the University Center. Titan Times is available in 
distribution boxes throughout campus. 


Student Activities 


Associated Students 

University Center 2-7 
(714) 773-3295 

The Associated Students, Inc. is a campus involvement con- 
nection at California State University, Fullerton. ASI offers a 
variety of learning experiences through its government, pro- 
grams and services. Many campus special events are the 
product of student efforts to bring students new educational 
opportunities, to teach them about the campus, and to pro- 
vide them a friendly, social atmosphere at CSUF. 

ASI is a non-profit corporation supported by the activity fee 
students pay through registration each semester. By pay- 
ing this fee, students are automatically a member of the 
Associated Students, Inc. The purpose of the corporation 
is to provide academic and co-curricular programs and 
services for students. When students are involved in ASI 
they are a part of an energetic, productive group, learning 
valuable organization and communication skills that can 
augment their personal and professional growth. 

ASI Government 

The ASI government controls the actions of the corpora- 
tion; it is a powerful, active organization that has use for 
students’ talents and skills. To apply for a position or find 
out more about student government, visit the ASI govern- 
ment office in the University Center. 

ASI President and Vice President 

The ASI president and vice president are chosen through 
student elections each spring and manage the corporation 
and its employees and volunteers. These officers repre- 
sent students’ needs and interests to CSUF’s faculty and 
administration and to the surrounding community. They 
also participate in several committees. Along with the ex- 
ecutive staff, the president and vice president submit rec- 
ommendations to the ASI Board of Directors on the corpo- 
ration’s annual budget of more than $4.1 million. 

ASI Executive Staff 

The executive staff works with the president and vice presi- 
dent to direct the programs and operation of the corpora- 
tion. All executive staff members are appointed by the ASI 
president. Students may apply for these positions in the 
ASI government office. 

The ASI controller is the chief financial officer who coordi- 
nates the budget process. The chief-of-staff recruits stu- 
dents for presidential appointments and implements spe- 
cial projects. The director of legislative affairs is the CSUF 
representative to the California State Student Association. 
This statewide organization influences decisions about 
education, fee schedules and related topics. The public 
relations director is responsible for marketing the corpora- 
tion and communicating with the campus community. Stu- 
dent volunteers are assigned specific duties according to 
the needs of the corporation. 


ASI Board of Directors 

The ASI Board of Directors is composed of three directors 
from each school who are elected to serve one-year terms. 
The ASI president, vice president, controller and adminis- 
trator, one faculty council representative and one appoin- 
tee of the university president also sit on the board. Direc- 
tors also sit on various board subcommittees and other 
university committees. 

These directors represent the student body and work with 
the executive staff to implement programs that fulfill stu- 
dents’ academic and co-curricular needs. They deal with 
issues regarding the business and affairs of the corpora- 
tion, including approving budgets and appointments, au- 
thorizing business contracts, and issuing policy state- 
ments for administrative purposes. 

The weekly meetings of the ASI board are held in the Legis- 
lative Chambers in the University Center. All students are 
welcome to attend. Board seats are open to all students. 
Election applications are available at the midpoint of each 
semester in the ASI government office in University Center. 

ASI Judicial Commission 

The ASI judicial commission decides cases for the Associ- 
ated Students, Inc. The five justices, who serve staggered 
two-year terms, make decisions according to the ASI by- 
laws. Any student can bring a case to the ASI judicial 
commission. 

Child Care Center 

Buildings 200 and 400 
(714) 773-2961 

The Child Care Center is sponsored and funded by Associ- 
ated Students, Inc. For a nominal fee, children aged 3 
months through 5 years whose parents are CSUF stu- 
dents, staff or faculty can benefit from the services of the 
center. Trained preschool teachers offer a comprehensive 
curriculum which covers learning skills in several areas of 
education. 

Legal Information and Referral 

(714) 870-5757 

The Associated Students contracts with the College Legal 
Clinic, a Fullerton-based corporation, to provide informa- 
tion on legal procedures and initial consultation on all 
types of legal matters. If desired, students are referred to 
Orange County attorneys for reduced fee services. A 24- 
hour hot line is maintained by the College Legal Clinic. 

University Center 

The University Center is located on the northwest corner of 
campus and provides areas for recreation, relaxation and 
study. Each semester a portion of student fees helps sup- 
port the services available there. 

In August of 1989, construction of additional facilities will 
commence. This much needed expansion will increase the 
existing facility by almost two-thirds and will provide addi- 
tional dining, recreation and programming areas. A club 


Student Activities 


and organizational wing will also be included. The estimat- 
ed cost of this student-funded project will be approximately 
$10,000,000 and will be completed in the spring of 1991 . 

University Center Governing Board 

The University Center Governing Board establishes oper- 
ating policies for the University Center. Board members 
include students, faculty, an alumni representative, admin- 
istrative representatives and an appointee of the university 
president. Additionally, the board also evaluates the pro- 
grams and services of the University Center as well as 
space allocation and budgetary matters. 

Board members are involved in several committees. Among 
them are the Food Services Committee, Policy Committee, 
Interior Design Committee and the Future Directions Com- 
mittee. Any student may apply for a board position. 

Main Information Desk 

The main information counter of the University Center has 
the answer to most questions. It’s the place to purchase 
OCTD bus passes and ticket books; tickets for some cam- 
pus events; receive vending machine refunds; retrieve lost 
belongings from "lost and found”; and obtain general cam- 
pus information. In addition, student clubs or organiza- 
tions can place announcements of coming events on the 
building’s three video screens by filling out the appropriate 
request form. The nearby rideshare board contains the 
names and phone numbers of people seeking carpool 
companions for long-distance trips. 

The reservation office located behind the information desk 
provides meeting/event facilities and related services in 
the UC for student groups, faculty/staff groups, and for the 
surrounding community. While specific room rental rates 
vary, some facilities are frequently available at no charge to 
CSUF chartered student organizations. 

Amphitheatre 

The Becker Amphitheatre was built by the Associated Stu- 
dents, Inc. in conjunction with the University Center. The 
amphitheatre, located at the south end of the University 
Center, is used for noontime concerts, theatre productions 
and other live entertainment. 

Center Gallery 

The Center Gallery offers displays of student, graduate 
and faculty artwork. Exhibits usually feature the work of a 
single artist and are shown for three weeks. All exhibits are 
chosen by a student art gallery coordinator. 

Graphic Services and Photo Lab 

University Center Graphic Services develops quality flyers, 
brochures, logos, letterheads and posters. Services include 
illustration, layout design, paste up, and desk top publishing. 
This area also offers a complete black and white photo lab. 
All services are provided at very reasonable prices. 

Music Listening Room 

The Music Listening Room has a living room atmosphere, 
with soft chairs, bean bag chairs, bright lights for reading, 
and a counter full of magazines. The Music Listening 


Room has a wide selection of the latest releases of rock, 
jazz, classical and country-western music. There also are 
headsets to listen to one of the many albums that are on 
cassette tapes. 

Pub, Snack Bar, Garden Cafe 

The Pub’s congenial atmosphere offers a place to relax 
selling soft drinks, beer and wine, sandwiches, pizza, 
baked potatoes and other foods. Major sporting events are 
shown on the Pub’s big-screen television, and music is 
played continuously. The Pub is located on the University 
Center’s lower level. 

The Snack Bar is located on the main level of the Universi- 
ty Center and specializes in a variety of fast foods. 

The Garden Cafe is located on the lower plaza of the 
University Center and offers a unique cafe menu in a 
pleasant outdoor garden setting. 

Student Typing and Word Processing 
Center 

Aside from the study lounges, this is one of the most popu- 
lar services offered by the University Center. Here, stu- 
dents can rent typewriters and personal computers to give 
their assignments that professional look. 

UC Programming 

UC Programming is a committee of the University Center 
Board, the governing body of the University Center. The 
committee’s purpose is to develop and present social, cul- 
tural and educational programs of interest to the University 
community. 

UC Recreation Area 

It’s mostly fun n’ games on the lower level of the UC. The 
recreation area offers a place for diversions that include a 
lounge with a large screen television, a billiard room, table 
tennis, video and pinball games, a counter for renting lock- 
ers, small table games and the Titan Bowl. The CSUF 
community is invited to participate in the various bowling 
leagues and tournaments sponsored each semester. 

UC Theatre 

The University Center Theatre is available to clubs and 
organizations for meetings, conference lectures and other 
presentations. It can be reserved through the reservation 
office at the information counter. 

Human Corps Community 
Service Program 

Historically, the mission of American colleges and universi- 
ties has included a strong commitment to community ser- 
vice. California State University, Fullerton, as a publicly- 
supported university, places a high priority on service to 
the community. A primary goal of the total educational 
process is to prepare students for responsible citizenship. 
The University has encouraged, since its founding, an 
ethic of community involvement and participation on the 


Student Activities 


part of its faculty, staff, and student body. Student clubs 
and organizations have carried out many social service 
projects, faculty have contributed their expertise to the 
solution of various civic problems, and individual students, 
staff, and faculty have all volunteered their time, effort, and 
abilities to fraternal, civic, and religious organizations and 
activities. 

Therefore, the university welcomes the establishment of 
the Human Corps and the focus it places on service to the 
community. Under the Human Corps legislation, all stu- 
dents in publicly supported colleges and universities in 
California are strongly encouraged to provide an average 
of 30 hours of community service activity each year. Com- 
munity service includes, but is not limited to: tutoring, liter- 
acy training, neighborhood improvement, job training, 
youth work, health-support services, mental health care, 
and assistance to the elderly, disabled, disadvantaged, 
and homeless. To support students in achieving this goal, 
Cal State Fullerton will: 

1 . establish a volunteer bureau and other systems of re- 
ferral 

2. provide support to student organizations seeking ser- 
vice projects, and 

3. create methods for rewarding and recognizing service 
contributions by individual students and student organi- 
zations. 

Academic credit for certain class-related service activities 
is already provided in some cases and departments are 
encouraged to expand such opportunities where academi- 
cally appropriate. Pay may also be accepted for certain 
service activities, such as paid internships or stipends and 
work-study employment. 

Further information can be obtained from the University 
Activities Center, Room 2-43, University Center. 

University Recreation Program 

Believing that recreation and leisure pursuits are an inte- 
gral part of one’s total educational experience and 


achievement, the Office of University Recreation strives to 
provide all students an opportunity to use their leisure time 
wisely in order to attain the highest degree of physical 
reward and mental relaxation. 

The benefits of the recreation program are numerous, and 
it has been proven time and again, that those who maintain 
good health and physical fitness, perform better in all as- 
pects of life. These programs are free to all students. 

Informal Leisure Recreation 

An intensive program of unstructured recreational activities 
are available to all CSUF students. By presenting a validat- 
ed, photo ID card, students can participate in the supervised 
use of numerous facilities including the racquetball and ten- 
nis courts, swimming complex, gymnasium and weightroom. 
These facilities are open seven days a week. 

Intramural Sports 

The Intramural Sports program is designed for the student 
who does not have the skill or time to devote to intercolle- 
giate athletics. This low competitive program offers 59 
separately structured sporting events. Activities such as 
flag football, ultimate frisbee, inner tube water polo, horse- 
shoes, bowling and volleyball are scheduled at various 
times and days to accommodate individual schedules. 

Club Sports 

The Club Sports program is for individuals or organiza- 
tions with similar athletic or recreational interests who wish 
to compete against other clubs and colleges. Typical clubs 
include rugby, archery, ice hockey, bowling, skiing, soccer, 
and volleyball. 

Student Family Memberships 

Current CSUF students who are married may purchase a 
recreation membership for their spouse and children (21 
years and younger, living at home). Unmarried students 
living at home may purchase a recreation membership for 
their parents and siblings (21 years and younger, living at 
home). 



Student Activities 



Intercollegiate Athletics 

Physical Education 158 
(714) 773-2677 

Director of Athletics: Ed Carroll 
Associate Directors: Steve DiTolla, Leanne Grotke 
Academic Coordinator: Alison Cone 
Tickets/ Event Manager: Greg Merfeld 
Sports Information Director: Mel Franks 

Coaches 

Baseball 
Larry Cochell 

Basketball 
To Be Named (Men) 

Maryalyce Jeremiah (Women) 

Cross Country/Track (Men/Women) 

John Elders 

Fencing (Men/Women) 

Heizaburo Okawa 

Football 
Gene Murphy 

Gymnastics 
Dick Wolfe (Men) 

Lynn Rogers (Women) 

Soccer 
Al Mistri 

Softball 
Judi Garman 

Tennis (Women) 

Brad Allen 


Volleyball 
Jim Huffman 

Wrestling 
Dan Lewis 

Conference Memberships 

National Collegiate Athletic Association 
(NCAA) Division I 

Big West Conference 



Intercollegiate Athletics 



The rise of academic prestige at California State Universi- 
ty, Fullerton has grown alongside the development of one 
of the nation’s premier athletics departments. The inter- 
collegiate athletics department provides student-athletes 
the opportunity to compete against the country’s finest 
competition as well as providing a top-notch education. In 
an effort to ensure academic development, the university 
provides counseling systems designed specifically for stu- 
dent-athletes. Those services include academic advise- 
ment, guidance counseling and daily study halls. 

CSUF has also made a commitment to provide facilities 
that enable fans and athletes alike to enjoy first-rate com- 
petition. The long-awaited Sports Complex will give Fuller- 
ton fans a much-needed home football and soccer stadi- 
um. The complex will provide a 10,000-seat stadium plus 
upgraded baseball facilities that will seat over 2,000. Al- 
ready completed are two lit softball diamonds and a lighted 
soccer field that enable fans to enjoy the university’s many 
night events. Titan Gymnasium already enjoys tremen- 
dous popularity among the local community with over 
4,000 fans attending home basketball (men and wom- 
en’s), gymnastics (men and women’s) and women’s vol- 
leyball events. An outdoor swimming complex, racquetball 
courts, weighttraining facilities, a high-level gymnastics 
practice facility plus facilities for wrestling and fencing 
make the Fullerton athletic complex a step above. 

Men’s Intercollegiate Athletics 

Baseball 

Few NCAA Division I baseball programs have enjoyed the 
degree of success that the Titans have had over the past 
decade and a half. During that time, the Titans won 12 
conference championships, five regional championships 
and two national championships. Major League stars Tim 
Wallach (Montreal Expos), Jeff Robinson (Pittsburgh Pi- 
rates) and Greg Mathews (St. Louis Cardinals) have de- 
veloped at Fullerton. Year in and year out the Titans com- 
pete against the nation’s finest programs and always come 
out winners. 

Basketball 

The development of Fullerton basketball has been one of 
college sports’ finest Cinderella stories. Always in conten- 
tion for the Big West Championship, the program has pro- 
duced half a dozen professional prospects and made a 
pair of NIT appearances. 1984 Olympic Team point guard 
Leon Wood is one of many fine athletes who has helped 
develop the Titans into a team that will continue to grow 
The university’s commitment to basketball ensures that 
success in the years to come. 

Cross Country 

Men’s cross country is making positive strides. The pro- 
gram competes in the very competitive Big West Confer- 
ence which is perennially in the spotlight for national atten- 
tion. The campus and outlying community offer a beautiful 
setting which enable the sport to set new standards 
among local and national universities. 


Football 

The most visible program in an athletics department is foot- 
ball and the growth the Titans have displayed on the gridiron 
during the 1980s has been an inspiring example to all Fuller- 
ton teams. A struggling Division l-A program became re- 
spectable with back-to-back conference championships in 
1983 and 1984 and now Fullerton is raising its sights by 
scheduling such opponents as LSU, Florida and West Virgin- 
ia. The arrival of the on-campus stadium is the final link to a 
consistently competitive major college program. 

Soccer 

Soccer is another of Fullerton’s many sports where strong 
coaching has turned the program into a West Coast power. 
Al Mistri developed one of Southern California’s finest soc- 
cer programs at Damien High School in Claremont before 
taking over at Fullerton. Through hard work and support 
from a summer soccer camp, Coach Mistri has turned 
Titan soccer into one of the NCAA’s most competitive 
squads. Fullerton shared the conference championship in 
1986 and, with the help of the new stadium, expects to 
challenge for the crown every season. 

Fencing 

One of the West Coast’s few Division I fencing programs 
gives prospective athletes a chance to train in a traditional, 
unique sport. The team has enjoyed a great deal of suc- 
cess over the past few years competing against local uni- 
versities in sabre, foil and epee. 

Gymnastics 

Fullerton gymnastics have always been one of the NCAA’s 
great success stories. Head Coach Dick Wolfe has won 
three NCAA championships and countless conference ti- 
tles in making the Titan team one of the nation’s premier 
units. Numerous All-Americans have competed under 
Coach Wolfe including Nissen Award candidate Ron How- 
ard. Innovative gymnastics have always been the course 
of the program as several internationally recognized tricks 
were devised under Coach Wolfe including the now 
famous Thomas Flair performed by U.S. Olympian Kurt 
Thomas. 

Track 

Reinstated for the 1989 season, a spring track program 
provides a complement to the fall cross country schedule 
and should attract greater numbers of athletes. A new 
running track is part of the Sports Complex project and will 
certainly accelerate the growth of the program that was 
one of the mainstays of Fullerton’s athletics department in 
the early 1970s. 

Wrestling 

Another sport that few West Coast schools support is pros- 
pering in Orange County as CSUF proves that hard work 
and strong coaching can bring success. Prospective ath- 
letes will find an atmosphere that is unparalleled among 
California universities. Top-notch competition and an All- 
American environment are two reasons why Fullerton 


Intercollegiate Athletics 


wrestling is so successful. The Titans compete in the rug- 
ged Pac-10 conference. 

Women’s Intercollegiate 
Athletics 

Basketball 

The rise in popularity of women’s basketball has its foun- 
dations tied to the success of Fullerton women’s basket- 
ball teams. Under former Coach Billie Moore, the Titans 
won one of the very first national championships given out 
in the sport and recent teams have continued to be com- 
petitive on a regional basis. Two of women’s basketball’s 
greatest names have risen from Fullerton including 1976 
Olympian Nancy Dunkle and All-American Robin Holmes. 

Fencing 

One of the West Coast’s few Division I fencing programs 
gives prospective athletes a chance to train in a traditional, 
unique sport. The team has enjoyed a great deal of suc- 
cess over the past few years competing against local uni- 
versities in sabre, foil and epee. 

Gymnastics 

The consistent efforts of Lynn Rogers’ women’s gymnas- 
tics squad have made them a top-five national power for 1 1 
of the past 13 years. No other school in the nation has 
produced more All-Americans or finished in the top three 
for more years than the Titans. Potential scholar-athletes 
receive an opportunity to compete and win year round. 

Softball 

The sport of softball continues to set new standards of excel- 
lence on the local and national level. Always a contender for 
the NCAA title, the Titans captured their first championship in 
1986. Coach Judi Garman’s teaching has brought the uni- 
versity countless All-Americans including former Broderick 


Award winners Kathy Van Wyk, Susan Lefebvre and Connie 
Clark. A newly finished on-campus facility now enables an 
even greater audience to enjoy one of the nation’s most 
successful teams face off against other national powers. The 
Titans compete in the Big West with such national powers as 
Fresno State, UOP and Long Beach. 

Cross Country 

The re-birth of a spring track schedule has been a boon to 
cross country as athletes in the distance races can now train 
on a competitive level year-round. An outstanding setting 
plus the addition of some outstanding athletes make suc- 
cess a very strong likelihood in the years to come. 

Tennis 

One of the university’s many programs on the rise, Fullerton 
can take advantage of the beautiful climate of Orange Coun- 
ty to attract the nation’s top athletes to Fullerton. The rede- 
velopment of the tennis facilities in the future make Titan 
tennis a program that is bound to remain competitive in the 
Big West. 

Track 

Fullerton made its strongest showing in more than a decade 
in the 1988 conference championship meet and optimism 
abounds that the Titans will become a competitive force in 
the Big West Conference. A new running facility and the 
advancements made in distance running by the cross coun- 
try team combined with the climate in southern California 
should ensure Fullerton of a solid track program. 

Volleyball 

Despite playing in collegiate volleyball’s most competitive 
conference, Titan volleyball has proven to be a program on 
the rise. The obvious attraction of playing against NCAA 
Championship contenders in the nation’s strongest confer- 
ence in the Big West have positioned Titan volleyball as a 
program on the rise. The acquisition of future athletes, plus 
the development of budding stars will create an environment 
that will be hard to beat in the upcoming years. 


Intercollegiate Athletics 


Resources 



Anthropology Museum 

The Museum of Anthropology is an educational and re- 
search resource for the University and the community. It 
houses, sponsors, and conducts a variety of activities as 
part of the CSUF Anthropology program. Exhibits of the 
Museum of Anthropology have included artifacts from 
California, the Middle East, Mesoamerica, the Southwest 
and Oceania. The well-equipped archaeology laboratory, 
faunal collection and research library provide facilities for 
research. Internships and classes in museum techniques 
are offered for students interested in museology. The mu- 
seum publishes a series of Occasional Papers, adminis- 
ters an annual scholarship for archaeology students, 
houses the business office of the Society for California 
Archaeology, conducts studies on cultural resource man- 
agement and is the clearing house for Orange County 
archaeology. The extensive collections are curated by a 
certified museologist. 

Art Gallery 

Since 1963 the Art Gallery at California State University, 
Fullerton has brought to the campus carefully developed 
art exhibitions that instruct, inspire and challenge the stu- 
dent to the visual arts. Exhibitions of national interest and 
of museum caliber are presented to the entire student 
body, faculty and to the community. These act not only as 
an educational tool but also create interaction between 
various departmental disciplines and between the campus 
and the community. In 1970 the Art Gallery was housed in 
its current permanent location within the Visual Arts Cen- 
ter. In the following years, the gallery has earned national 
visibility for its program in Museum Studies and Exhibition 
Design in which museum preprofessionals may obtain 
both conceptual and practical experience. 


Dance Repertory Theatre 

The Dance Repertory Theatre was formed in 1981 as a 
culminating experience for selected students graduating 
from the Department of Theatre and Dance. It offers recent 
graduating students in dance an opportunity to perform 
with a professionally oriented company, preparing them for 
their careers in dance. Dance Repertory Theatre also per- 
mits the university’s distinguished dance faculty to contin- 
ue their professional commitment through public perfor- 
mance. Dance Repertory Theatre members are carefully 
chosen, based upon their training in ballet and modern 
dance, to tour a repertory of established and original cho- 
reography. The company has toured extensively in south- 
ern California, the midwest and Europe. 


Daily Titan 

Cal State Fullerton’s Daily Titan is one of the largest col- 
lege newspapers in California. In recent years, it has be- 
come one of the most critically successful, as well. 


Resources 


The Titan earned first place among all college dailies in the 
state in 1987 and 1988 competitions sponsored by the 
California Intercollegiate Press Association. 

The Titan is published every Tuesday through Friday 
throughout the academic year. It is produced, written and 
edited entirely by Cal State Fullerton students. All its pho- 
tographic content is the work of CSUF students. 

The Daily Titan has a daily readership of more than 1 9,000. 
It is distributed at more than 40 locations on campus, as 
well as in newsracks near the University. 

Work on the Daily Titan provides intensive experience in 
newswriting, copy editing, page layout and the myriad other 
functions necessary to produce a modern daily newspaper. 

Fullerton Arboretum 

The Fullerton Arboretum is a 26-acre botanical garden — 
a living museum of plants — located at the northeast cor- 
ner of the campus. It contains local historical artifacts in the 
Heritage House museum and horticultural collections that 
attract visitors from the University and the surrounding 
communities. The Arboretum is an island of serenity in an 
increasingly urban/metropolitan environment. 

The Arboretum offers countless opportunities to study lo- 
cal history and culture. Heritage House is the restored 
residence and medical office of Dr. George C. Clark, an 
Orange County pioneer physician. The Clark home was 
built in 1 894 and exemplifies the Eastlake Victorian style of 
architecture. The house is listed in the National Register of 
Historic Places and the Inventory of California Historic 
Sites. It is also an Orange County Historic Site. It is open to 
the public on Sundays from 2 to 4 p.m., at which time 
trained docents discuss the period furnishings and memo- 
rabilia. Several student projects and studies have used 
this facility. 

The Arboretum grounds contain a recirculating waterfall, 
pond and stream system that is a focal point for migratory 
waterfowl and human visitors. Many plants are grown in 
groups according to their moisture requirements. Others 
form special collections such as conifers, palms and rare 
fruits. Special plant displays assist visitors in their selec- 
tion of plant materials for urban landscaping. 

The CSUF Associated Students (AS) helped to initiate the 
Fullerton Arboretum by contributing $10,000 in 1971. 
Since then, the AS have contributed support monies each 
year to hire students to help in the maintenance and oper- 
ation of the Arboretum. 

The Friends of the Fullerton Arboretum, the community 
support group, also supplies operating monies, manages 
the gift and garden shop, propagates plants for plant sales 
and provides countless hours of volunteer effort in behalf 
of the Arboretum. 

The Fullerton Arboretum is open 8 a.m. to 4:45 p.m., seven 
days a week. The Arboretum is closed on Christmas, 
Thanksgiving and New Year’s Day. 

Herbarium 

The Faye A. MacFadden Herbarium is named after Faye A. 
MacFadden, who sold her extensive collection of plants to 


the university just prior to her death in 1964. The collection 
now includes over 25,000 vascular plants, about 12,000 
bryophytes and nearly 800 lichen specimens. The plants 
are used as a research and teaching tool. The bryophyte 
collection is reported to be the largest in the Southwest. 

Oral History Program 

The Oral History Program offers students a source of infor- 
mation, courses and work experience. The program has 
conducted over 2,000 interviews on the history of Orange 
County, the western United States, and other areas of 
historical study. Either transcriptions or tapes are available 
for any student to use as they would use any library materi- 
als, at the Oral History Archive. 

Most of these interviews were done by students in the 
several classes offered at the Oral History Program. The 
program also maintains a student staff through intern- 
ships, work study or grant-supported positions. These staff 
receive experience in word-processing, editing, book pro- 
duction and organizational administration. They are cred- 
ited with authorship or assistance on publications, and 
several alumni of the program now hold important profes- 
sional positions. 

Reading Clinic 

Education Classroom 24 
(714) 773-3356 

The Reading Clinic serves three major purposes. First, it 
provides a controlled, supervised setting for the training of 
reading specialists and classroom teachers who wish to 
improve their skills in working with learning disabled and 
reading disabled students. 

Secondly, the clinic serves as a community service provid- 
ing very low cost, high quality instruction in reading that is 
not available elsewhere in Orange County. The clinic works 
closely with the Southern California College of Optometry 
in order to provide broader services. 

The third purpose of the clinic is to provide parent educa- 
tion to community members whose children have reading 
disabilities. The clinic provides parent inservice sessions, 
a hot line for phone information, and a monthly newsletter 
of information, tips and examples of student work. The 
clinic is proud of its 20-year service to the university and 
community. 

Speech and Hearing Clinic 

The Speech and Hearing Clinic (SHC) is an integral part of 
the curricular programs of the university leading to a B. A. and 
M.A. Degree in Communicative Disorders. Since 1961 the 
Department of Speech Communication has provided 
speech, language and hearing services to the community in 
conjunction with its training program for professional speech 
pathologists. The original clinic held the distinction of being 
the first institution in California to receive registration under 
Interim Standards for both speech pathology and audiology 
by the Professional Services Board of the American Board of 


Resources 


Examiners in Speech Pathology and Audiology (ABESPA), 
which is the accreditation board of the American Speech- 
Language-Hearing Association (ASHA). The graduate pro- 
gram in Communicative Disorders holds the distinction of 
being one of only two academic programs in California to 
maintain continuous accreditation by the Educational Train- 
ing Board of ABESPA since September 1969. 

The clinic is composed of a Speech Pathology Unit, an Audi- 
ology Unit and a Communicative Disorders Research Labo- 
ratory with special emphasis given to voice disorders. The 
clinic offers the services of a resident professional Speech 
Pathologist who holds the Certificate of Clinical Competence 
(CCC-SP), faculty supervisors who are clinically certified 
and, in addition, hold doctoral degrees in the field, and stu- 
dent clinicians who have met strictly prescribed standards for 
admission to clinical practicum. Referrals to the clinic come 
from a variety of sources including: physicians, teachers, 
rehabilitative centers, private speech pathologists and audi- 
ologists, and self-referrals. Services available at the clinic 
include: diagnostic evaluations, therapeutic intervention, 
audiometric testing, rehabilitative audiology including hear- 
ing aid evaluations, screening tests for students seeking 
state credentials, and family counseling relative to problems 
associated with communicative disorders. 

Theatre and Dance Department 
Productions 

CSUF students receive reduced ticket rates to all Theatre 
and Dance Department productions. Each year, six plays 
and two dance concerts are produced on main stage along 
with theatre for young audiences, touring plays, master’s 
thesis productions, playwright workshops and original one- 
acts. CSUF plays have been selected eight times during 
the last ten years to be produced at the American College 
Theatre Festivals, selected out of over 50 production en- 
tries. In 1983, its production of The Bulldog and the Bear 
was selected from over 500 production entries to be pro- 
duced at the National American College Theatre Festival 
at the John F. Kennedy Center in Washington, D.C. 

Titan Shops 

Titan Shops is a subsidiary of the California State University, 
Fullerton Foundation and is the organization that is responsi- 
ble for the administration of the Titan Bookstore, Dining Ser- 
vices and Vending Services for the university. Titan Shops 
policy is set by the CSUF Foundation Board of Directors. 
Titan Shops is administered by the Foundation’s Director of 
Commercial Operations. 

Titan Bookstore 

The Titan Bookstore is located on the ground floor of the 
Commons Building directly east of the University Center 
and west of the Library. Its primary function is to service the 
textbook and school supply requirements of the students 
of the university. In addition to these items, however, the 
Titan Bookstore carries an extensive stock of office sup- 
plies, greeting cards and clothing items, a trade book de- 
partment which encompasses 15,000 reference and gen- 
eral interest books, a photocopy center and a gift depart- 


ment with an ever changing selection of items. Finally, the 
Titan Bookstore is engaged in the sale of personal comput- 
ers at significant price reductions to encourage the use of 
computers and development of computer literacy at the 
university. 

Dining Services 

Titan Shops is responsible for the operation of Food Ser- 
vices on the University campus. Primary Food Service 
facilities are on the second floor of the Commons (the 
Commons cafeteria), on the University Center ground floor 
(the UC Snack Bar) and at the southeast corner of the 
campus (McTitan’s and Salad Daze). In addition to these 
primary facilities there is a Pub serving food, beer and 
wine on the basement level of the University Center, and 
the Garden Cafe, an outdoor cafe on the lower level of the 
University Center. Catering for the university is the respon- 
sibility of Dining Services. 

Vending 

Over 75 food and beverage vending machines are located 
at several areas on the campus to service the needs of the 
university. Product selection and prices are monitored by 
the University Food Service Committee. In addition, the 
vending program includes payphones across the campus 
and laundry machines in the residence halls. 

Undergraduate Reading Lab 

Education Classroom 249 and 18 

The Undergraduate Reading Lab/Professional Library is an 
essential element in the Reading Program for both graduate 
and undergraduate students. It serves as a resource for 
materials and equipment by which undergraduate students 
can improve their reading skills and complete additional 
class assignments. The lab also functions as a liaison be- 
tween faculty and students, as a diagnostic lab for required 
or additional assessment of student skills, and as a profes- 
sional resource for graduate students and faculty. 

The lab has also offered services to special students from 
the Handicapped Center, Women’s Center and the Coun- 
seling Center. In addition, the development of a profes- 
sional library and the recent donation of material from the 
Reading Educators Guild aids graduate students in their 
research and course work. Finally, a goal of this lab is to 
develop a base of software materials for both classroom 
and individual student use. 

University Channel 

As part of two local cable television agreements covering 
the cities of Fullerton, Placentia, Buena Park and Ana- 
heim, the university provides programming for dedicated 
channels on those systems. In January 1 981 , regular pro- 
duction of programs about Cal State Fullerton and Orange 
County in general was begun. Students in senior level 
communications courses conceive, write and produce a 
wide variety of videotaped interview and discussion pro- 
grams as well as special live coverage of sports and other 
events over University Channel 54. 


Resources 



58 




Academic 

Advisement 


59 


Academic Advisement 


Academic Advisement Policy 

The CSUF Academic Policy (UPS 300.002) states that: 

— the responsibility for ensuring the availability of 
academic advisement rests with each school 
dean; 

— every student should declare a major or school of 
interest as soon as possible after admission to the 
university; and 

— all students shall confer with an academic adviser 
on a regular basis. 

Choosing General Education 
Courses and Electives 

In keeping with the liberal arts tradition, the university re- 
quires its graduates to have sampled a variety of disci- 
plines as part of their general education. The broad cate- 
gories of general education courses are presented in the 
catalog section on “Graduation Requirements for the 
Bachelor’s Degree.” 

All students are strongly encouraged to consult with faculty 
members or the Academic Advisement Center about 
choice of general education and elective courses. 

Advisement in the Major 

Students who have declared a major should consult their 
departmental adviser on a regular basis for academic 
advice. 

Advisement for Students Who 
Have Not Selected a Major 

Students who have not declared a major should consult one 
of the school advisement offices listed below or the Academ- 
ic Advisement Center to discuss their academic goals. 



School Advisement Offices 

Students who have declared a school of interest or who 
wish to explore the majors offered by a specific school 
should contact the appropriate school advisement office: 

School of the Arts Office of the Dean 

Visual Arts 1 99 
(714) 773-3256 

School of Business Business Advising Center 
Administration Langsdorf Hall 700 

and Economics (714) 773-2211 


Academic Advisement 


School of Communications 


School of Engineering 
and Computer Science 


Office of the 
Associate Dean 
Education Classroom 46 
(714) 773-3355 

Office of the 
Associate Dean 
Engineering 100 
(714) 773-3362 


School of Human Office of the 

Development And Associate Dean 

Community Service Education Classroom 324 

(714) 773-2165 


School of Humanities and Office of Student 

Social Sciences Academic Affairs 

McCarthy Hall 103 
(714) 773-2024 


School of Natural 
Science and Mathematics 


Office of 
Academic Affairs 
McCarthy Hall 166 
(714) 773-2638 


Academic Advisement Center 

Humanities 112 
(714) 773-3606 

The Academic Advisement Center provides guidance in 
the selection of elective and general education courses. It 
is the administrative center for undeclared undergraduate 
majors. All problems encountered by the undeclared ma- 
jor, which normally require the assistance of a department 
chair, are handled by the director of the Academic Advise- 
ment Center. 

For help in choosing general education courses, students 
should seek the advice of the director or of an adviser in 
the Academic Advisement Center. 

No appointment is necessary to engage the assistance of 
an adviser about various aspects of academic life at the 
university. For more specific information about the office, 
the student should consult the class schedule. 


Undeclared Majors 

Lower division students who are uncertain about their pri- 
mary educational or vocational goals may enroll as unde- 
clared majors. However, they should select a school which 
reflects their general interests and consult the school ad- 
visement office for academic assistance. During their 
freshman and sophomore years, such students should ex- 
plore their interests and potential by enrolling in a set of 
courses recommended by a school adviser. 


Choosing an Undergraduate 
Major 

Every student should choose a major by the beginning of 
the junior year so that he or she may complete major 
requirements in an orderly way. Most major requirements 
allow students the freedom to take a number of courses in 
fields other than in the major. 

To help students, the University has available a number of 
useful resources: the academic information sessions con- 
ducted in May and November; summary sheets on majors 
available from department offices or the Academic Advise- 
ment Center; a variety of counseling and testing services 
provided by the Career Development Center; and bro- 
chures and manuals from school and department offices 
describing their programs of study and later work opportu- 
nities. There are student organizations with disciplinary 
and professional interests and a Career Development 
Center which has information on vocations and work op- 
portunities to help in the selection of a major. 

The task of selecting a major (and often a minor or other 
complementary specialization) becomes one of crystalliz- 
ing ideas on the basis of experiences in specific courses, 
discussions with other students, faculty, the staff of the 
Academic Advisement Center, etc. The option to take a 
limited number of courses on a Credit/No Credit basis 
often will help students explore new interests. 

Students must plan freshman or sophomore programs 
which will permit them to enter or take advanced courses 
in fields they may want to pursue. They should be sure to 
begin or complete requirements such as mathematics, 
chemistry or a foreign language early in their academic 
careers. Students anticipating graduate or professional 
study should exercise special care in planning undergrad- 
uate programs and seek faculty counseling in the field of 
interest. Advance examination of the possibilities of gradu- 
ate or professional study will be helpful to students who 
have clear educational and vocational objectives. 

Those whose goals and objectives have not yet crystallized 
will have opportunities to take courses in various fields and 
make up their minds during their lower division work. They 
should, however, take full advantage of the opportunities that 
exist on and outside the campus to learn more about avail- 
able fields of study and occupational fields. 

Planning a Major Program 

When students have selected a major field, they should 
study all the requirements which are specified in this cata- 
log under their chosen degree program. They should make 
a tentative semester by semester plan for completing the 
requirements including prerequisites and discuss this plan 
with an adviser in the major. 

In addition to courses in the major department, related 
courses in other fields and supporting courses in basic 
skills may also be required. These should be included in 
the tentative semester by semester plan. 


Academic Advisement 


Some departments require placement tests prior to admis- 
sion to classes. The times and places for such tests are 
given in the class schedule. Students should purchase a 
copy of the class schedule at the Titan Bookstore when 
registration for classes begins. 

Change of Major, Degree or 
Credential Objective 

To change a major, degree, or credential objective, obtain 
the required form in the Office of Admissions and Records 
or the Academic Advisement Center and take it to the 
appropriate office(s) for signature(s). Such a change is not 
official until the form has been signed and filed in the 
Registrar’s Office. 

Departmental Academic 
Advisement 

Each department follows the advisement system which it 
finds the most appropriate for its majors. 

It is the responsibility of the student to obtain the assis- 
tance of a faculty adviser. 

The adviser is a resource person who can provide informa- 
tion and suggestions and who can assist the student to 
find the most desirable ways to meet the requirements for 
graduation and for the major or credential. The final choice 
of courses and the responsibility for the program lies with 
the student. Undergraduate students who have not yet 
decided upon a major (undeclared majors) or who are not 
seeking a degree will be advised in the Academic Advise- 
ment Center. 

Academic program advisers are able to offer better advice 
if students provide lists of courses they have taken and 
their own copies of transcripts from colleges previously 
attended (if students are new to Cal State Fullerton). 

Undergraduate advisement coordinators are appointed by 
each department (for the School of Business Administra- 
tion and Economics see below) in order to facilitate com- 
munication between students and faculty. They coordinate 
advisement in each department and act as resource per- 
sons for the students and the faculty of the department in 
all matters of advisement. 

The School of Business Administration and Economics 
provides advisement in the advisement center of the 
school. 

Graduate students will be assigned a major adviser in their 
fields of specialization, except in education where all will 
have a professional adviser from the School of Human 
Development and Community Service. Those students 
seeking a credential for teaching in secondary schools will 
be assigned both a professional and a major adviser. 


Preprofessional Programs 

The academic programs of the university provide appropri- 
ate preparation for graduate work in a variety of fields. 
Students who have made tentative decisions about institu- 
tions at which they may wish to pursue graduate work 
should consult the catalogs of those graduate schools as 
they plan their undergraduate programs. Students plan- 
ning to undertake graduate work should supplement their 
undergraduate programs by anticipating requirements at 
major graduate schools. 

The university offers a number of professional programs 
through the master’s degree. These include programs in 
the fine arts, business administration, communications, 
education, engineering, health education and physical 
education and recreation, public administration, and 
speech pathology-audiology. Students interested in pre- 
paring for professional careers in these areas, either here 
or at other educational institutions, are encouraged to 
seek assistance and guidance from CSUF faculty mem- 
bers in these fields. 

Prelegal Preparation 

It is recommended that prospective law students prepare 
themselves in such fields as English, American history, eco- 
nomics, political science (particularly the history and devel- 
opment of English and American political institutions) and 
such undergraduate courses as judicial process, administra- 
tive law, constitutional law and international law, philosophy 
(particularly ethics and logic), business administration, an- 
thropology, psychology and sociology. 

A distribution of course sequences among the social sci- 
ences, the natural sciences and the humanities is desir- 
able. Students with interest in becoming lawyers should 
contact the Prelaw Society. Some faculty members in the 
School of Business Administration and Economics and 
Departments of American Studies, History and Political 
Science, also can provide advice and assistance. 

Pretheological 

Students who might be interested in pursuing careers in 
counseling, social work, the teaching of religion, and the 
ministry and associated fields should take some courses in 
religion, psychology, anthropology, sociology, philosophy, 
education, communications, history, English, speech com- 
munication and a foreign language. Students desiring as- 
sistance and counseling regarding advanced work in reli- 
gious studies or professional careers in the ministry or 
rabbinate may seek help from the faculty in the Depart- 
ment of Religious Studies. 

Social Welfare 

Students who plan to seek employment in social work or 
social welfare should prepare themselves in the fields of 
human services, psychology (particularly child and ado- 
lescent psychology), sociology, anthropology, political sci- 
ence, economics and research methods in social science. 


Academic Advisement 


Students who intend to enter a professional school follow- 
ing undergraduate training should learn about the specific 
prerequisites for admission to the graduate school of their 
choice. Ordinarily a major in one of the social sciences, 
and some additional work in at least several other social 
sciences, are recommended. Students with interests in 
pursuing careers in the fields of social welfare should con- 
tact the Department of Sociology or the Human Services 
Program for advice and assistance. 


Health Professions 

Langsdorf Hall 203 
(714) 773-3980 

All health professions programs are seeking the best 
qualified applicants with a good command of communica- 
tion skills, rigorous basic science preparation and as broad 
a general education base as possible. 

The Health Professions Committee assists students to 
prepare the best academic programs consistent with their 
former educational experience, interests and professional 
objectives. 


Student Responsibility 

All new students, both first-time freshmen and transfer 
students, interested in preparing to enter one of the follow- 
ing health professions, or related health professions, 
should register with the secretary of the committee, in the 
Health Professions Office. These health professions are 
medicine, osteopathic medicine, podiatric medicine, vet- 
erinary medicine, chiropractic, clinical pharmacy, clinical 
pharmacology, dentistry, optometry. 

The related health professions include anatomist, dental 
hygienist, histologist, medical technologist, nutritionist, oc- 
cupational therapist, orthotist-prosthetist, pharmacologist, 
physical therapist, pharmacist, physiologist, public health. 

Health Professions Committee 

The committee assists the student to (a) gain some pre- 
ceptorship” experience with a practicing professional in 
the area appropriate to the field of interest; (b) select a list 
of professional schools to which there is a likelihood of 
admission; (c) prepare professional school applications; 
(d) prepare for an admissions interview. 

The committee prepares recommendation letters for ap- 
proved applicants. 


Academic Advisement 


Answers To Your Questions 


TOPIC 

Academic Appeals 
Add or Drop a Class 
Address Change 
Admissions/Applications 
Advisement: 

Undeclared Major 
Declared Majors 
Athletics Tickets/Passport 
Child Care 
Counseling: 

Personal 

Vocational 

Degree Application/Diploma Orders 
Degree Evaluation, Undergraduate 
Disqualification/Reinstatement 
Educational Opportunities Program 
Emergency Messages 
Employment (part-time) 

Enrollment Verification: 

Duplicate I.D. Card or Fee Receipt 
Letter Request 
Extension Class Information 
Evaluations/General Education 
Financial Aid 
Foreign Student: 

Advisement 
Permits to Register 
Graduate Studies 
Graduation Requirements 
Handicapped Services 
Health Insurance 
Housing 

Internships and Cooperative Ed. 
Learning Assistance 
Mentor Program 
Name Change 
Organizations & Clubs 
Parking: 

Fees 

Information 
Handicapped 
Readmission 
Records (Student) 

Registration Fees 

Residency 

Scholarships 

Student Affirmative Action 
Summer Sessions, Information 
Test Information 
Transcripts 
Tutoring 

Veterans Certification 
Women s Center 


WHERE TO GO 

Academic Appeals Office 
See Class Schedule 
Admissions & Records Counter 
Admissions & Records Counter 

Academic Advisement Center 
Major Department 
Athletic Ticket Office 
Child Care Center 

Counseling Service-Health Center 
Career Development Center 
Graduation Unit 
Graduation Unit 
Admissions Counselor 
Student Academic Services 
Vice President for Student Services 
Placement Services 

Cashier 

Admissions & Records Counter 
Extended Education Office 
Evaluations Unit 
Financial Aid Office 

Major Department 
International Education Office 
Graduate Studies Office 
Graduation Unit 
Disabled Student Services 
University Center 
Housing Office 
Internship Office 

Learning Assistance Resource Center 
Student Academic Services Office 
Admissions & Records Counter 
University Center 

Cashier 

Department of Public Safety 
Disabled Student Services 
Admissions & Records Counter 
Records Office 
Cashier 

Evaluations Unit 
Financial Aid Office 
Student Academic Services 
Extended Education Center 
Testing Center 

Admissions & Records Counter 
Learning Assistance Resource Center 
Veterans Affairs Office 
Women’s Center 


LOCATION 

TELEPHONE 

Langsdorf Hall-810 

773-3836 

773-2300 

Landgsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Humanities-112 

773-3606 

Physical Education- 122 

773-2783 

Temporary-200 

773-2961 

Health Center 

773-2800 

Langsdorf Hall-208 

773-3121 

Langsdorf Hall-1 10A 

773-2300 

Langsdorf Hall-1 10A 

773-2300 

Langsdorf Hall-107 

773-2370 

Humanities 113 

773-2288 

Langsdorf Hall-810 

773-3221 

Langsdorf Hall-208 

773-3744 

Langsdorf Hall-108 

773-3918 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Temporary- 14 

773-261 1 

Langsdorf Hall-11 OB 

773-2300 

McCarthy Hall-63 

773-3125 


McCarthy Hall-79 

773-2787 

McCarthy Hall-129 

773-2618 

Langsdorf Hall-1 10A 

773-2300 

Library-113 

773-3117 

U.C. Lobby 

773-2468 

Residence Halls 

773-2168 

Langsdorf Hall-210 

773-2171 

Library 38 

773-3488 

Humanities-1 13 

773-2288 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

U.C. 2-43 

773-321 1 

Langsdorf Hall-108 

773-3918 

Temporary- 1200 

773-2515 

Library- 1 13 

773-3117 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Langsdorf Hall-1 10 

773-2300 

Langsdorf Hall-108 

773-3918 

Langsdorf Hall-110 

773-2300 

McCarthy Hall-63 

773-3125 

Humanities-1 13 

773-2288 

Temporary- 14 

773-261 1 

Langsdorf Hall-206 

773-3838 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Library-38 

773-3488 

Langsdorf Hall-IOOB 

773-2300 

McCarthy Hall-33 

773-3928 


Academic Advisement 


Admissions Policies 



65 


Undergraduate Students 


Freshmen Requirements 

You will qualify for regular admission as a first-time fresh- 
man if you 

1 . are a high school graduate, 

2. have a qualifiable eligibility index (see Eligibility Index 
Table next page) and 

3. have completed with grades of C or better the courses 
in the comprehensive pattern of college preparatory 
subject requirements: 

English: 4 years 

Mathematics, 3 years: algebra, geometry, and interme- 
diate algebra 

U.S. History or U.S. history and government: 1 year 

Science, 1 year with laboratory: biology, chemistry, 
physics, or other acceptable laboratory science 

Foreign Language: 2 years in the same language (may 
be waived for applicants who demonstrate competence 
in a language other than English equivalent to or higher 
than expected of students who complete two years of 
foreign language study) 

Visual and Performing Arts, 1 year: art, dance, drama/ 
theater, or music 

Electives, 3 years: selected from English, advanced 
mathematics, social science, history, laboratory sci- 
ence, foreign language, visual and performing arts, and 
agriculture 

Eligibility Index 

The eligibility index is the combination of your high school 
grade point average and your score on either the American 
College Test (ACT) or the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT). 
For this purpose we compute your grade point average on 
your final three years of high school studies, excluding 
physical education and military science, and use bonus 
points for certain honors courses, (see "High School Hon- 
ors Courses” in this section of the catalog.) CSUF may 
offer you early, provisional admission based on your work 
completed through the junior year of high school and 
planned for your senior year. 

You can calculate the index by multiplying your grade point 
average by 800 and adding your total score on the SAT. Or, 
if you took the ACT, multiply your grade point average by 
200 and add ten times the composite score from the ACT. 
If you are a California high school graduate (or a legal 
resident of California for tuition purposes), you need a 
minimum index of 2800 using the SAT or 674 using the 
ACT ; the table on the next page shows the combinations of 
test scores and averages required. 



Admissions Policies 


Eligibility Index Table for California High School Graduates or Residents of California 



A.C.T. 

S.A.T. 


A.C.T. 

S.A.T. 


A.C.T. 

S.A.T. 


A.C.T. 

S.A.T. 


A.C.T. 

S.A.T. 

G.P.A. 

Score 

Score 

G.P.A. 

Score 

Score 

G.P.A. 

Score Score 

G.P.A. 

Score 

Score 

G.P.A. 

Score 

Score 

3.00 and above 













qualifies with any score 

2.79 

12 

570 

2.58 

16 

740 

2.37 

20 

910 

2.16 

25 

1080 

2.99 

8 

410 

2.78 

12 

580 

2.57 

16 

750 

2.36 

21 

920 

2.15 

25 

1080 

2.98 

8 

420 

2.77 

12 

590 

2.56 

17 

760 

2.35 

21 

920 

2.14 

25 

1090 

2.97 

8 

430 

2.76 

13 

600 

2.55 

17 

760 

2.34 

21 

930 

2.13 

25 

1100 

2.96 

9 

440 

2.75 

13 

600 

2.54 

17 

770 

2.33 

21 

940 

2.12 

25 

1110 

2.95 

9 

440 

2.74 

13 

610 

2.53 

17 

780 

2.32 

21 

950 

2.11 

26 

1120 

2.94 

9 

450 

2.73 

13 

620 

2.52 

17 

790 

2.31 

22 

960 

2.10 

26 

1120 

2.93 

9 

460 

2.72 

13 

630 

2.51 

18 

800 

2.30 

22 

960 

2.09 

26 

1130 

2.92 

9 

470 

2.71 

14 

640 

2.50 

18 

800 

2.29 

22 

970 

2.08 

26 

1140 

2.91 

10 

480 

2.70 

14 

640 

2.49 

18 

810 

2.28 

22 

980 

2.07 

26 

1150 

2.90 

10 

480 

2.69 

14 

650 

2.48 

18 

820 

2.27 

22 

990 

2.06 

27 

1160 

2.89 

10 

490 

2.68 

14 

660 

2.47 

18 

830 

2.26 

23 

1000 

2.05 

27 

1160 

2.88 

10 

500 

2.67 

14 

670 

2.46 

19 

840 

2.25 

23 

1000 

2.04 

27 

1170 

2.87 

10 

510 

2.66 

15 

680 

2.45 

19 

840 

2.24 

23 

1010 

2.03 

27 

1180 

2.86 

11 

520 

2.65 

15 

680 

2.44 

19 

850 

2.23 

23 

1020 

2.02 

27 

1190 

2.85 

11 

520 

2.64 

15 

690 

2.43 

19 

860 

2.22 

23 

1030 

2.01 

28 

1200 

2.84 

11 

530 

2.63 

15 

700 

2.42 

19 

870 

2.21 

24 

1040 

2.00 

28 

1200 

2.83 

11 

540 

2.62 

15 

710 

2.41 

20 

880 

2.20 

24 

1040 




2.82 

11 

550 

2.61 

16 

720 

2.40 

20 

880 

2.19 

24 

1050 

Below 2.00 does not 

2.81 

12 

560 

2.60 

16 

720 

2.39 

20 

890 

2.18 

24 

1060 

qualify for regular 

2.80 

12 

560 

2.59 

16 

730 

2.38 

20 

900 

2.17 

24 

1070 


aamission 



If you neither graduated from a California high school nor 
are a legal resident of California for tuition purposes, you 
need a minimum index of 3402 (SAT) or 822 (ACT). 

Applicants with grade-point averages above 3.00 (3.60 for 
nonresidents) are exempt from the test requirement. 

Eligibility Index Alternative — As an alternative to cal- 
culating an eligibility index, California residents (or 
graduates of California high schools) may use the ta- 
ble on the next page to determine their eligibility. 

You will qualify for regular admission to programs not im- 
pacted (See “Impacted Programs” in the Application Pro- 
cedure section of this catalog) when the university verifies 
that you have a qualifiable eligibility index and that you will 
have completed the comprehensive pattern of college pre- 
paratory subjects. You may still qualify for regular admis- 
sion on condition, if you are missing a limited number of 
the required subjects. Please consult a counselor if you 
have any questions. 

"Conditional admission” is an alternative means to estab- 
lish eligibility for admission. Applicants otherwise eligible 
for regular admission, but missing a limited number of the 
preparatory subjects, will be regularly admitted on condi- 
tion that they make up the missing subjects early in their 
baccalaureate studies. Students will not be denied admis- 
sion during the phase-in period simply because they lack a 
limited part of the required pattern. 

The phase-in schedule is: 

Fall 1989 — Summer 1991: at least 12 of the required 15 
units, including at least 3 of the units required in English 
and 2 of the units required in mathematics. 

Fall 1991 — Summer 1992: at least 13 of the required 15 
units, including at least 3 of the units required in English 
and 2 of the units required in mathematics. 


Fall 1992 and later: full implementation of the 15-unit re- 
quirement expected. 

Transfer Requirements 

You will qualify for admission as a transfer student if you 
have a grade point average of 2.0 (C) or better in all trans- 
ferable units attempted, are in good standing at the last 
college or university attended, and meet the following 
standard: 

(a) were eligible as a freshman, or 

(b) were eligible as a freshman except for the college 
preparatory subjects and have completed appropri- 
ate college courses in the missing subjects, or 

(c) have completed at least 56 transferable semester (84 
quarter) units and have completed appropriate col- 
lege courses to make up any missing subjects in 
college preparatory courses. (Nonresidents must 
have a 2.4 grade point average or better.) 

High School Honors Courses 

Grades in up to eight semester courses, taken in the last 
two years of high school, that are designated honors in 
approved subjects receive additional points in grade point 
average calculations. Each unit of A in approved courses 
will receive a total of 5 points; B, 4 points; C, 3 points; D 1 
point; and none for F grades. 

International Baccalaureate Program 

California State University, Fullerton recognizes the high 
scholastic quality of the International Baccalaureate Diplo- 
ma Program. High school graduates who have participat- 
ed in the program are encouraged to apply for admission, 
and those who have received the International Baccalau- 


Admissions Policies 



reate Diploma will be given special consideration for ad- 
mission. Advanced placement and/or university credit for 
International Baccalaureate subject examinations may be 
awarded at the discretion of individual departments. 

Health Screening 

All new and readmitted students born after January 1, 
1 957, will be notified of the requirement to present proof of 
measles and rubella immunizations. This is not an admis- 
sions requirement, but shall be required of students by the 
beginning of their second term of enrollment in CSU. Proof 
of measles and rubella immunizations shall also be re- 
quired for certain groups of enrolled students who have 
increased exposure to these diseases. 

Measles and Rubella Immunizations 

The campus shall notify certain students born after Janu- 
ary 1, 1957, of the CSU requirement to present proof of 
measles and rubella immunizations by the beginning of the 
next term of enrollment. At the beginning of the next term 
of enrollment, those so notified who have not presented 
acceptable proof of the immunizations shall be notified 
further of the need to comply before receiving registration 
materials to enroll for the succeeding term. 

Persons subject to these health screening provisions 
include: 

New students enrolling fall 1986 and later; 

Readmitted students reenrolling fall 1986 and later; 

Students who reside in campus residence halls; 

Students who obtained their primary and secondary 
schooling outside the United States; 

Students enrolled in dietetics, medical technology, 
nursing, physical therapy, and any practicum, student 
teaching, or field work involving preschool-age chil- 
dren, school-age children, or taking place in a hospital 
or health care setting. (Campuses may modify the list 
of types of study in this reference as appropriate to 
their curricula.) 

The Student Health Center shall provide immunizations 
without cost to those students unable to obtain acceptable 
proof of immunizations. 

Test Scores 

Freshman and transfer applicants who have fewer than 56 
semester or 84 quarter units of transferable college work 
must submit scores, unless exempt, from either the Scholas- 
tic Aptitude Test of the College Board (SAT) or the American 
College Test Program (ACT). You may obtain registration 
forms and the dates for either test from school or college 
counselors or from a campus Testing Office or may write to: 

The Col lege Board (SAT) American Col lege Testing Program (ACT) 
Registration Unit, Box 592 Registration Unit, P.O. Box 168 

Princeton, New Jersey 08541 Iowa City, Iowa 52240 


TOEFL Requirement 

All undergraduate applicants, regardless of citizenship, 
whose preparatory education was principally in a lan- 
guage other than English, must demonstrate competence 
in English. Those who have not attended schools for at 
least three years schools at the secondary level or above 
where English is the principal language of instruction must 
earn a minimum score of 500 on the Test of English as a 
Foreign Language (TOEFL). Individual campuses may re- 
quire a higher score. 

Placement Test Requirements 

English Placement Test (EPT) 

The English Placement Test (EPT) is required of all enter- 
ing California State University undergraduate students 
who are not otherwise exempt. Exemptions are granted 
only for those students who present proof of having met 
one of the following criteria: 

• a score of 3, 4 or 5 on either the Language and Compo- 
sition or the Composition and Literature examination of 
the College Board Advanced Placement Program 

• a satisfactory score on the CSU English Equivalency 
Examination 

• a score of 470 or above on the Verbal section of the 
College Board Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT-Verbal) 

• a score of 22 or above on the ACT English Usage Test 

• a score of 600 or above on the College Board Achieve- 
ment Test in English Composition with essay 

• completion of an acceptable college course in English 
composition of four quarter or three semester units with 
a grade of C or better 

The EPT is offered only to admitted students and has no 
effect on admission decisions. Effective with the 1986/87 
academic year, all nonexempt students subject to the 
1985/87 or subsequent catalogs, including those enrolling 
with 56 or more transferable semester units, are required 
to take the EPT. 

California State University, Fullerton (CSUF) has estab- 
lished the following policy regarding compliance with this 
regulation: 

Effective fall 1986, all new and continuing undergraduate 
students who have not taken the EPT and who are not 
otherwise exempt must take the test prior to the beginning 
of their next semester of enrollment at CSUF. Students 
who fail to comply with this policy shall be placed on ad- 
ministrative academic probation in their next semester of 
enrollment at Fullerton. Students on probation for this rea- 
son who do not take the EPT prior to the beginning of their 
third semester of enrollment at CSUF will be administra- 
tively disqualified from enrolling until they take the EPT 

Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) Test 

The Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) test is required of all 
California State University undergraduate students who 


Admissions Policies 


were admitted for fall 1983 or after under the 1983/84 or 
later campus catalog and who are not otherwise exempt. 
Exemptions are granted only for those students who pre- 
sent proof of having met one of the following criteria: 

• a score of 3 or above on the College Board Advanced 
Placement Mathematics examination (AB or BC) 

• a score of 530 or above on the Mathematics section of 
the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT-Math) 

• a score of 23 or above on the ACT Mathematics Test 

• a score of 520 or above on the College Board Math 
Achievement Test, Level 1 

• a score of 540 or above on the College Board Math 
Achievement Test, Level 2 

• completion of a college course that satisfies the Gener- 
al Education-Breadth Requirement in Quantitative 
Reasoning, provided it is above the level of intermedi- 
ate algebra with a grade of C or better. 

The ELM test is offered only to admitted students and has 
no effect on admission decisions, but it must be taken and 
passed before the student can enroll in any course that 
satisfies the Mathematical Concepts and Quantitative 
Reasoning portion of the General Education-Breadth re- 
quirements. 

California State University, Fullerton (CSUF) established the 
following policy regarding compliance with this regulation: 

Requirement To Take The ELM Test: 

Effective fall 1986, all new and continuing undergraduate 
students who have not taken the ELM test and who are not 
otherwise exempt must take the test prior to the beginning 
of their next semester of enrollment at CSUF. Students 
who fail to comply shall be placed on administrative aca- 
demic probation in their next semester of enrollment at 
Fullerton. Students on probation for this reason who do not 
take the test prior to the beginning of the third semester of 
enrollment at CSUF will be administratively disqualified 
from enrolling until such time as they take the ELM test. 

Students Who Have Taken But Not Passed The 
ELM Test: 

Students who have taken but failed to pass the ELM test 
must participate in a program designed to assist them in 
learning the skills needed to pass the test (such as the 
Intensive Learning Experience). The program may be one 
offered at CSUF or an appropriate program on another 
campus. For continuing students, participation must begin 
in the fall 1986 semester. Effective fall 1986, new and 
returning students must participate in an approved pro- 
gram in their first semester of enrollment after the receipt 
of the test results. Learning Assistance Resource Center is 
responsible for monitoring compliance with this provision 
and for certifying the appropriateness of the course in 
which the student wishes to participate. 

Participation in a program to prepare for the ELM test must 
be continued until the test is passed. At least one attempt to 
pass the test must be made each semester. Students who 
fail to comply with this requirement shall be placed on admin- 
istrative academic probation. Students on probation for this 


reason must pass the ELM test before the beginning of the 
next semester or they will be administratively disqualified 
from enrolling until they obtain a passing score. 

ELM And Credit Unit Limitations: 

Students not otherwise exempt and who have not passed 
the ELM test will be placed on administrative academic 
probation the first semester after they complete 61 or more 
semester units of credit. Such students must pass the ELM 
test before the beginning of the next semester or they will 
be administratively disqualified. 

Residency Requirements 

The campus admissions office determines the residence 
status of all new and returning students for nonresident 
tuition purposes. Responses to the Application for Admis- 
sion and, if necessary, other evidence furnished by the 
student are used in making this determination. A student 
who fails to submit adequate information to establish a 
right to classification as a California resident will be classi- 
fied as a nonresident. 

The following statement of the rules regarding residency 
determination for nonresident tuition purposes is not a com- 
plete discussion of the law, but a summary of the principal 
rules and their exceptions. The law governing residence de- 
termination for tuition purposes by The California State Uni- 
versity is found in Education Code Sections 68000-68090, 
68121, 68123, 68124, 89705-89707.5, and 90408 and in 
Title 5 of the California Code of Regulations, Sections 
41 900-41 91 2. A copy of the statutes and regulations is avail- 
able for inspection in the campus admissions office. 

Legal residence may be established by an adult who is 
physically present in the state and who, at the same time, 
intends to make California his or her permanent home. 
Steps must be taken at least one year prior to the resi- 
dence determination date to show an intent to make Cali- 
fornia the permanent home with concurrent relinquish- 
ment of the prior legal residence. The steps necessary to 
show California residency intent will vary from case to 
case. Included among the steps may be registering to vote 
and voting in elections in California; filing resident Califor- 
nia state income tax forms on total income; ownership of 
residential property or continuous occupancy or renting of 
an apartment on a lease basis where one’s permanent 
belongings are kept; maintaining active resident member- 
ships in California professional or social organizations; 
maintaining California vehicle plates and operator’s li- 
cense; maintaining active savings and checking accounts 
in California banks; maintaining permanent military ad- 
dress and home of record in California if one is in the 
military service. 

The student who is within the state for educational pur- 
poses only does not gain the status of resident regardless 
of the length of the student’s stay in California. 

In general, the unmarried minor (a person under 18 years 
of age) derives legal residence from the parent with whom 
the minor maintains or last maintained his or her place of 
abode. The residence of a minor cannot be changed by the 


Admissions Policies 


minor or the minor’s guardian, so long as the minor’s par- 
ents are living. 

A married person may establish his or her residence inde- 
pendent of his or her spouse. 

An alien may establish his or her residence, unless pre- 
cluded by the Immigration and Nationality Act from estab- 
lishing domicile in the United States. An unmarried minor 
alien derives his or her residence from the parent with 
whom the minor maintains or last maintained his or her 
place of abode. 

Nonresident students seeking reclassification are required 
by law to complete a supplemental questionnaire concern- 
ing financial independence. 

The general rule is that a student must have been a Cali- 
fornia resident for at least one year immediately preceding 
the residence determination date in order to qualify as a 
“resident student” for tuition purposes. A residence deter- 
mination date is set for each academic term. 

At the Fullerton campus, the residence determination date 
for the fall term is September 20, and for the spring term is 
January 25. 

Questions regarding residence determination dates 
should be directed to the campus admissions office which 
can give you the residence determination date for the term 
for which you are registering. 

There are exceptions from nonresident tuition, including: 

1 . Persons below the age of 1 9 whose parents were resi- 
dents of California but who left the state while the stu- 
dent, who remained, was still a minor. When the minor 
reaches age 1 8, the exception continues for one year to 
enable the student to qualify as a resident student. 

2. Minors who have been present in California with the 
intent of acquiring residence for more than a year be- 
fore the residence determination date, and entirely self- 
supporting for that period of time. 

3. Persons below the age of 19 who have lived with and 
been under the continuous direct care and control of an 
adult, not a parent, for the two years immediately pre- 
ceding the residence determination date. Such adults 
must have been a California resident for the most re- 
cent year. 

4. Dependent children and spouses of persons in active 
military service stationed in California on the residence 
determination date. This exception applies only for the 
minimum time required for the student to obtain Califor- 
nia residence and maintain that residence for a year. 
The exception, once attained, is not affected by retire- 
ment or transfer of the military person outside the state. 

5. Military personnel in active service stationed in Cali- 
fornia on the residence determination date for pur- 
poses other than education at state-supported institu- 
tions of higher education. This exception applies only 
for the minimum time required for the student to obtain 
California residence and maintain that residence for a 
year. 


6. Dependent children of a California resident who has 
been a California resident for the most recent year. 
This exception continues until the student has resided 
in the state the minimum time necessary to become a 
resident, so long as continuous attendance is main- 
tained at an institution. 

7. Certain credentialed, full-time employees of Califor- 
nia school districts. 

8. Full-time State University employees and their chil- 
dren and spouses: State employees assigned to work 
outside the State and their children and spouses. This 
exception applies only for the minimum time required 
for the student to obtain California residence and 
maintain that residence for one year. 

9. Certain exchange students. 

1 0. Children of deceased public law enforcement or fire sup- 
pression employees, who were California residents, and 
who were killed in the course of law enforcement or fire 
suppression duties. 

The initial campus determination of residency classifica- 
tion is made by the evaluations unit of Admissions and 
Records. The final campus residency decision is made by 
the Director of Admissions and Records. Written appeals 
may be made to the Director in Langsdorf Hall 102. 

Any student, following a final campus decision on his or her 
residence classification, only may make written appeal 
within 1 20 calendar days of notification of the final decision 
on campus of the classification to: 

The California State University 

Office of General Counsel 

400 Golden Shore 

Long Beach, California 90802-4275 

The Office of General Counsel may make a decision on the 
issue, or it may send the matter back to the campus for 
further review. Students classified incorrectly as residents 
or incorrectly granted an exception from nonresident tu- 
ition are subject to reclassification as nonresidents and 
payment of nonresident tuition in arrears. If incorrect clas- 
sification results from false or concealed facts, the student 
is subject to discipline pursuant to Section 41 301 of Title 5 
of the California Code of Regulations. Resident students 
who become nonresidents, and nonresident students 
qualifying for exceptions whose basis for so qualifying 
changes, must immediately notify the admissions office. 
Applications for a change in classification with respect to a 
previous term are not accepted. 

The student is cautioned that this summation of rules re- 
garding residency determination is by no means a com- 
plete explanation of their meaning. The student should 
also note that changes may have been made in the rate of 
nonresident tuition, in the statutes, and in the regulations 
between the time this catalog is published and the relevant 
residence determination date. 


Admissions Policies 


Application Procedures 



Applications may be obtained from the admissions office 
at any of the campuses of The California State University 
or at any California high school or community college. 
Requirements for admission to California State University, 
Fullerton are in accordance with Title 5, Chapter 1, Sub- 
chapter 3, of the California Code of Regulations. A student 
unsure of these requirements should consult a high school 
or community college counselor or the admissions office at 
California State University, Fullerton. 

The CSU advises prospective students that they must sup- 
ply complete and accurate information on the application 
for admission, residence questions and financial aid 
forms. Further, applicants must submit authentic and offi- 
cial transcripts of all previous academic work attempted. 
Failure to file complete, accurate and authentic application 
documents may result in denial of admission, cancellation 
of academic credit, suspension or expulsion (Section 
41 301 , Article 1.1, Title 5, California Code of Regulations). 

Prospective students, applying for part-time or full-time 
programs of study, in day or evening classes, must file a 
complete application as described in the admissions book- 
let. The $45 nonrefundable application fee should be in the 
form of a check or money order payable to The California 
State University. The application fee may not be trans- 
ferred or used to apply to another term. Applicants need 
file only at their campus of first choice. An alternative 
choice campus and major may be indicated on the applica- 
tion. Applicants should list as an alternative campus only 
that campus of The California State University that they 
would be able to attend. Generally, an alternative major 
will be considered at the first choice campus before an 
application is redirected to an alternative choice campus. 
Applicants will be considered automatically at the alterna- 
tive choice campus only if the first choice campus is unable 
to accommodate them. 


How to Apply for Admissions 

1. Submit a completed application for admission within 
the announced filing period accompanied by the re- 
quired application fee to: 

Office of Admissions and Records 
California State University, Fullerton 
Fullerton, California 92634 

2. When asked to do so request required transcripts of re- 
cord of all previous scholastic work from each school or 
college attended. The transcripts required at CSUF are: 

— for undergraduate applicants with fewer than 56 
transferable semester units: 

(a) the high school transcript, and 

(b) a transcript from each college or university 
attended. 


Application Procedures 



— for undergraduates with 56 or more transferable 
semester units: 

(a) a transcript from each college or university 
attended. 

— for graduates: 

(a) applicants for unclassified postbaccalaureate 
standing with no degree or credential objective 
must submit a transcript from the college or 
university where the baccalaureate was 
earned. Further, one transcript from other insti- 
tutions attended is required as necessary so 
that the university has a complete record of the 
last 60 semester units attempted prior to en- 
rollment at Fullerton. 

(b) applicants for a master’s degree or teaching 
credential, or both, must submit two copies of 
the transcript from each college or university 
attended. 

Note: In addition, all students should have a personal 
set of college transcripts for advising purposes. All tran- 
scripts must be received directly from the issuing insti- 
tutions and become official records of the university; 
such transcripts therefore cannot be returned or re- 
issued. Foreign language transcripts must be accom- 
panied by certified English translations. 

3. All undergraduate students who have completed fewer 
than 56 semester or 84 quarter units of transferable 
work are required to submit scores from either one of 
two national testing programs before eligibility for ad- 
mission to the university can be determined. This re- 
quirement does not affect undergraduate students who 
have previously attended CSUF and who have submit- 
ted ACT or SAT scores at the time of their first admis- 
sion. Registration forms and test dates for either test 
may be obtained from school or college counselors, 
from the address below, or from campus testing offices. 
For either test, submit the registration form and fee at 
least one month prior to the test date. 

ACT Address 

American College Testing Program, Inc. 

Registration Unit, P.O. Box 168 

Iowa City, Iowa 52240 

SAT Address 

College Entrance Examination Board 

P.O. Box 592 

Princeton, New Jersey 08541 

Applicants to graduate programs must submit the scores 
of any qualifying examinations required in their prospec- 
tive programs of study. 

Impacted Programs 

The CSU designates programs to be impacted when more 
applications are received in the first month of the fall and 
spring filing period than the spaces available. Some pro- 
grams are impacted at every campus where they are of- 
fered; others are impacted at some campuses but not all. 


You must meet supplementary admissions criteria if apply- 
ing to an impacted program. 

The CSU will announce before the opening of the fall filing 
period which programs are designated impacted for the 
academic year. That announcement will be published in 
the CSU School and College Review, distributed to high 
school and college counselors. We will also give informa- 
tion about the supplementary criteria to program appli- 
cants. 

You must file your application for admission to an impacted 
program during the first month of the filing period. Further, if 
you wish to be considered in impacted programs at two or 
more campuses, you must file an application to each. Non- 
resident applicants are rarely admitted to impacted pro- 
grams. 

Supplementary Admission Criteria: Each campus with im- 
pacted programs uses supplementary admission criteria in 
screening applicants. Supplementary criteria may include 
ranking on the freshman eligibility index, the overall trans- 
fer grade point average, and a combination of campus- 
developed criteria. If you are required to submit scores on 
either the SAT or ACT, you should take the tests no later 
than December if applying for fall admission. The supple- 
mentary admission criteria used by the individual cam- 
puses to screen applicants appear periodically in the CSU 
School and College Review and are sent by the campuses 
to all applicants seeking admission to an impacted pro- 
gram. 

Unlike unaccommodated applicants to locally impacted 
programs, who may be redirected to another campus in 
the same major, unaccommodated applicants to system- 
wide impacted programs may not be redirected in the 
same major, but may choose an alternative major either at 
the first choice campus or another campus. 

At the time of the preparation of this catalog, no majors at 
California State University, Fullerton have been declared 
impacted. Such circumstances are liable to change so 
early application is advised. 

Application Filing Periods 

Terms Filing Period Begins Filing Period Duration 
Fall Previous November Until application 

Spring Previous August categories are filled 

Application Acknowledgment 

Applicants who can be accommodated will receive letters 
acknowledging their application. The letters are not state- 
ments of admission but are commitments by Cal State 
Fullerton to admit the applicants who establish their eligi- 
bility for admission. The acknowledgment letters direct ap- 
plicants to arrange to have appropriate records forwarded 
promptly to the admissions office. Applicants will normally 
receive their acknowledgments within two weeks of the 
receipt of their applications. 

Acknowledgment letters may not be transferred to another 
term or to other campuses. 


Application Procedures 


Hardship Petitions 

Fullerton has established procedures to consider qualified 
applicants who would be faced with an extreme hardship if 
not admitted. Prospective hardship petitioners should 
write to the director of admissions and records regarding 
specific policies governing hardship admission. 


Records Retention 

The university retains the admissions materials for those 
who apply, but who for whatever reason do not enroll for 
two years. For those who do enroll the university will retain 
the materials in student folders, including transcripts of the 
record of work completed elsewhere, for five years beyond 
the date of last attendance. 

Records of academic performance at California State Uni- 
versity, Fullerton, including individual student records, fac- 
ulty grade lists, and graduation lists are kept permanently. 



Application Procedures 


Admission Requirements 

Admission Requirements for 
First-Time Freshmen 

High School Graduates 

You will qualify for regular admission as a first-time fresh- 
man if you 

1 . are a high school graduate 

2. have a qualifiable eligibility index (see previous chart), 
and 

3. have completed with grades of C or better the courses 
in the comprehensive pattern of college preparatory 
subject requirements: 

English: 4 years 

Mathematics, 3 years: algebra, geometry, and interme- 
diate algebra 

U.S. History or U.S. history and government: year 

Science, 1 year with laboratory: biology, chemistry, 
physics, or other acceptable laboratory science 

Foreign Language: 2 years in the same language (may 
be waived for applicants who demonstrate competence 
in a language other than English equivalent to or higher 
than expected of students who complete two years of 
foreign language study) 

Visual and Performing Arts, 1 year: art, dance, drama/ 
theater, or music 

Electives, 3 years: selected from English, advanced 
mathematics, social science, history, laboratory sci- 
ence, foreign language, visual and performing arts, and 
agriculture 

Subject Requirements 

The California State University requires that all undergrad- 
uate applicants for admission complete with a C or better a 
comprehensive pattern of college preparatory study total- 
ing 15 units. A “unit” is one year of study in high school. 

California secondary school courses that meet the subject 
requirements are listed in “Courses to Meet Requirements 
for Admission to the University of California,” published for, 
and available at each high school. 

Making Up Missing College Preparatory Subject Require- 
ments: Undergraduate applicants who did not complete 
the subject requirements while in high school may make up 
missing subjects in any of the following ways: 

1. Complete appropriate courses with a C or better in 
adult school or high school summer sessions. 

2. Complete appropriate college courses with a C or bet- 
ter. 



Admission Requirements 


3. Earn acceptable scores on specified examinations. 

4. Applicants with 56 or more semester (84 quarter) units 
may complete, with a C or better in each course, one of 
the following alternatives: 

a. 1987 or earlier high school graduates: the CSU 
general education requirements in communication 
in the English language (at least 9 semester units) 
and mathematics (usually 3 semester units); 

b. 1988 and later high school graduates: complete a 
minimum of 30 semester (45 quarter) units to be 
chosen from courses in English, arts and human- 
ities, social science, science, and mathematics of 
at least equivalent level to courses that meet gener- 
al education or transfer curriculum requirements. 
Each student must complete all CSU general edu- 
cation requirements in communication in the En- 
glish language (at least 9 semester units) and 
mathematics (usually 3 semester units). 

Please consult with any CSU admissions office for further 
information about alternative ways to satisfy the subject 
requirements. 

Substitutions for Disabled Students 

Disabled student applicants are strongly encouraged to 
complete college preparatory course requirements if at all 
possible. If an applicant is judged unable to fulfill a specific 
course requirement because of a disability, alternative col- 
lege preparatory courses may be substituted for specific 
subject requirements. Students who are deaf and hearing 
impaired, are blind and visually impaired, or have learning 
disabilities, may in certain circumstances qualify for sub- 
stitutions for the foreign language, laboratory science, and 
mathematics subject requirements. Substitutions may be 
authorized on an individual basis after review and recom- 
mendation by the applicant s academic adviser or guid- 
ance counselor in consultation with the director of CSUF’s 
Disabled Student Services. 

Although the distribution may be slightly different from the 
course pattern required of other students, students quali- 
fying for substitutions will still be held for 1 5 units of college 
preparatory study. Students should be aware that course 
substitutions may limit later enrollment in certain majors, 
particularly those involving mathematics. For further infor- 
mation and substitution forms, please contact the director 
of CSUF’s Disabled Student Services. 

Provisional Admission 

The university may provisionally admit first-time freshman 
applicants based on their academic performance through 
the junior year of high school. California State University, 
Fullerton will monitor the senior year of study of those 
provisionally admitted to ensure that those so admitted 
complete their senior year of studies satisfactorily, includ- 
ing the required college preparatory subjects, and gradu- 
ate from high school. 


Non-High School Graduates 

Applicants over 1 8 years of age, but who have not graduated 
from high school, will be considered for admission as first- 
time freshmen only when preparation in all other ways is 
such that the university believes promise of academic suc- 
cess is equivalent to that of eligible California high school 
graduates. 

High School Students 

Students still enrolled in high school will be considered for 
enrollment in certain special programs if recommended by 
the principal and the appropriate campus department chair 
and if preparation is equivalent to that required of eligible 
California high school graduates. Such admission is only 
for a given program and does not constitute the right to 
continued enrollment. 

Adult Students 

As an alternative to regular admission criteria, an appli- 
cant who is twenty-five years of age or older may be con- 
sidered for admission as an adult student if the following 
basic conditions are met: 

1. Possesses a high school diploma (or has established 
equivalence through either the Tests of General Educa- 
tional Development (GED) or the California High School 
Proficiency Examination). 

2. Has not been enrolled in college as a full-time student 
for more than one term during the past five years. Part- 
time enrollment is permissible. 

3. If there has been any college attendance in the past five 
years, has earned a C average or better. 

Consideration will be based upon a judgement as to 
whether the applicant is likely to succeed as a regularly 
admitted freshman or transfer and will include an assess- 
ment of basic skills in the English language and mathemat- 
ical computation. 

Admission Requirements for 
Undergraduate Transfer 
Students 

You will qualify for admission as a transfer student if you 
have a grade point average of 2.0 (C) or better in all trans- 
ferable units attempted, are in good standing at the last 
college or university attended, and meet the following 
standard: 

1. were eligible as a freshman, or 

2. were eligible as a freshman except for the college pre- 
paratory subjects and have completed appropriate col- 
lege courses in the missing subjects or 

3. have completed at least 56 transferable semester (84 
quarter) units and have completed appropriate courses 
to make up any missing subjects in college preparatory 
courses (Nonresidents must have a 2.4 grade-point 
average or better.) 


Admission Requirements 


For these requirements, transferable courses are those 
designated for that purpose by the college or university 
offering the courses. 

Admission Requirements for 
International Students 

The university is pleased to accept applications from inter- 
national students. Freshman applicants applying directly 
from overseas should have outstanding academic qualifi- 
cations and meet TOEFL score requirements. Applicants 
who are graduates of foreign secondary schools must 
have preparation equivalent to that required of eligible 
California high school graduates. The university will care- 
fully review the previous record of all such applicants and 
only those with promise of academic success equivalent to 
that of eligible California high school graduates will be 
admitted. Undergraduate transfers, who have completed a 
two-year program in an accredited institution of higher 
education, with a good academic record and satisfactory 
TOEFL scores, shall receive priority for admission. 

Postbaccalaureate applicants who have completed a 
bachelor’s degree or its equivalent, with a strong academic 
record, and satisfactory TOEFL scores from an accredited 
institution may be considered for admission as graduate 
students. 

The university has established deadlines to insure the 
timely processing of all applications and to enable admit- 
ted applicants to make arrangements to reach the U.S. 
and the campus prior to orientation and registration. Early 
application is strongly advised due to strong demand for 
programs. Newly admitted students are required to take 
an English Placement Examination prior to enrollment in 
classes (mid- August for fall semester and mid- January for 
spring semester). 

Applications may be submitted according to the following 
schedule: 

For Fall Semester 

Apply beginning November 1 of preceding year. Applica- 
tion must be completed with supporting documents by 
April 15. 

For Spring Semester 

Apply beginning August 1 of preceding year. Application 
must be completed with supporting documents by Sep- 
tember 15. 

All international student applicants must declare a major 
field of study when the application is filed. Campus pro- 
grams of study which receive more applications than 
spaces are available, have been declared impacted, and 
are not open to nonresidents, foreign or domestic. 

All applicants whose native language is other than English 
are required to present scores for the Test of English as a 
Foreign Language (TOEFL) before they can be admitted to 
the university. Undergraduate applicants must achieve a 
score of 500; graduate applicants a score of 550. Adequate 
performance on the TOEFL is mandatory for admission. 


Applicants should obtain the TOEFL Bulletin of Informa- 
tion and registration forms well in advance. Copies of this 
bulletin and registration forms are often available at Ameri- 
can embassies and consulates, offices of the United 
States Information Service, United States educational 
commissions and foundations abroad, bi-national centers, 
and several private organizations. Those who cannot ob- 
tain locally a TOEFL Bulletin of Information should write to: 
Test of English as a Foreign Language, Box 899, Princeton, 
New Jersey, USA, 08541 . 

International student applicants must include a statement 
of financial support accompanied by a bank statement 
from their sponsor. Students sponsored by an international 
organization or home government agency must include a 
letter of scholarship support specifying this university and 
the students proposed degree and program of study. For 
an international student studying in 1988-89 the cost for 
nonresident tuition and fees was $5,528 based upon 15 
units of course work each semester with living expenses 
estimated at $8,360, totalling $1 3,888 (subject to change). 
Financial support documents must reflect availability of 
this amount. 

Transcripts of all educational documents in languages oth- 
er than English must be accompanied by translation into 
English certified by independent agencies. All academic 
records must be received directly from the issuing institu- 
tions and become official records of the university. 

International student applicants who are admitted by the 
university will be issued form 1-20 which is used to obtain 
an F-1 student visa from a U.S. Embassy or Consulate 
overseas. Students transferring from a U.S. institution will 
use form 1-20 to apply for transfer authorization through 
the Immigration and Naturalization Service. Arrival, orien- 
tation and registration information from the Office of Inter- 
national Education and Exchange will accompany the ad- 
mission materials mailed to new students. 

Admission Requirements for 
Postbaccalaureate and 
Graduate Students 

See admissions information in the “Graduate Regula- 
tions” section of this catalog. 


Cancellation of Admission 

A student admitted to the university for a given semester 
but who does not register in the specified semester will 
have the admission canceled. The student must file a new 
application form when again seeking admission and must 
follow the complete application procedure and meet the 
current admission requirements. 


Admission Requirements 


Admission Requirements for 
Summer Session Students 

Although the quality of the program and most of the course 
offerings are the same as in the regular session, the uni- 
versity does not require an advance application or tran- 
scripts from students registering for credit courses in the 
summer session. Students normally must be high school 
graduates, however, and are expected to have satisfied the 
prerequisites for the courses in which they register. In addi- 
tion, students are expected to file a request to register in 
the summer session. Admission to summer session does 
not grant admission to the regular session. 

Readmission of Former 
Students 

A student previously enrolled in the university, planning to 
return after an absence of more than one semester, must 
file a new application for admission. A student absent for 
one semester, and who enrolls elsewhere in the interim, 
must also file an application for readmission. Unless a 
leave of absence was granted, catalog requirements at the 
time of readmission will apply. Please see the "Stop-Out 
Policy" section in the regulations subchapter of this cata- 
log for further informationon applications for readmission. 


Former Students in Good Standing 

A student who left the university in good standing will be 
readmitted provided any academic work attempted else- 
where since the last attendance does not change his or her 
scholastic status. Transcripts of the record of any work 
attempted in the interim are required. 


Former Students Who Were on Probation 

A student on probation at the close of the last enrollment 
will be readmitted on probation provided he or she is other- 
wise eligible. The student must furnish transcripts of any 
college work taken during the absence. 


Former Students Who Were Disqualified 

The readmission of a previously disqualified student is by 
special action only. Ordinarily the university will consider 
an application for reinstatement only after the student has 
remained absent for a minimum of one year following dis- 
qualification and has fulfilled all recommended conditions. 
In every instance, readmission is based on evidence, in- 
cluding transcripts of study completed elsewhere after dis- 
qualification, that in the judgement of the university war- 
rants such action. If readmitted, the student is placed on 
scholastic probation. 


Admission Requirements 


Transfer Credits 


Evaluation of Transfer Credits 

The Office of Admissions and Records will evaluate previous 
college work in relation to the requirements of Fullerton. All 
degree candidates will be issued a credit summary during 
the first semester of attendance which serves as a basis for 
determining remaining requirements for the student’s specif- 
ic objectives. The admissions office will convert quarter units 
of credit transferred to the university to semester units by 
multiplying quarter-unit totals by two-thirds. 

Once issued to a student, the evaluation remains valid as 
long as the student enrolls at the date specified, pursues 
the objective specified, and remains in continuous atten- 
dance. The student will not be held to additional gradua- 
tion requirements unless such requirements become man- 
datory as a result of changes in the California Administra- 
tive Code or the California Education Code. If the student 
does not remain in continuous attendance and has not 
applied for and been granted a formal leave of absence, 
the evaluation issued upon readmission will specify the 
remaining requirements for the student’s objectives. 

In view of the foregoing regulations, the student should 
notify the Office of Admissions and Records immediately 
of a change in the objective specified in the evaluation. 
While the evaluation for a student remains valid, the stu- 
dent is held responsible for complying with all changes in 
regulations and procedures which may appear in subse- 
quent catalogs. 

Acceptance of Credit 

Credit for work completed at accredited institutions, other 
than course work identified by such institutions as remedi- 
al or in other ways as being nontransferable, will be ac- 
cepted toward the satisfaction of baccalaureate degree 
and credential requirements at the university within limita- 
tions of residence requirements and community college 
transfer maximums. 

Transfer of Credit From a 
Community College 

Upper division credit is not allowed for courses taken in a 
community college. Credential credit is not allowed for 
courses in professional education taken in a community 
college. This does not invalidate credit for preprofessional 
courses taken at a community college, such as introduc- 
tion to education, art or design, arithmetic, or music for 
classroom teachers. After a student has completed 70 
units of college credit at a community college, no further 
community college units may be accepted for unit credit. 

Credit by Advanced Placement 

Students who have successfully completed courses in the 
advanced placement program of the College Entrance Ex- 
amination Board (defined as receiving a score of 3, 4 or 5) 



Transfer Credits 


shall be granted credit for each advanced placement 
course toward graduation, advanced placement in the uni- 
versity’s sequence of courses and credit for curriculum 
requirements. 

Cal State Fullerton grants credit toward its undergraduate 
degrees for successful completion of examinations of the 
Advanced Placement Program of the College Board. Stu- 
dents who present scores of three or better will be granted 
six semester units of college credit. 


Advanced Placement 

Equivalent 

Semester 

Course 

Course: CSUF 

Units 

American History 

History 180 

3 

Art History 

Art 201 A, B 

3-6* 

Studio Art 

Art 103 or 104 

Art 107A or 107B 


Biology 

Bio Sci 101 

3 

Chemistry 

Chemistry 

120A,B 

6** 

Computer Science 

Computer Science 121 

3*** 


Computer Science 131 

3*** 

English 

English 101 

3 


English 200 

3 

European History 

History 11 0B 

3 

French 

French 101, 102 

10**** 

German 

German 101, 102 

10**** 

Latin 4 

Latin 101 

3 

Latin 5 

Latin 101, 102 

6 

Math A & B 

Math 150 A 

4 

Math B & C 

Math 150A.B 

8 

Physics 

Physics 21 1 A,B 


Spanish 

Spanish 101, 102 

10**** 


Credit for Extension and 
Correspondence Courses 

The maximum amount of credit through correspondence 
and extension courses which may be allowed toward the 
bachelor’s degree is 24 units, if otherwise applicable. 

Credit for Noncollegiate 
Instruction 

Cal State Fullerton grants undergraduate degree credit for 
successful completion of non-col legiate instruction, either 
military or civilian, appropriate to the baccalaureate, that 
has been recommended by the Commission on Educa- 
tional Credit and Credentials of the American Council on 

'Consult the Department of Art for applicability of advanced placement 
examination credit. 

"To complete the requirement for Chemistry 120A.B, the student must 
successfully complete four units of Chemistry 1 20A and 1 20B laboratory at 
Cal State Fullerton. 

"'Consult the Department of Computer Science for applicability of ad- 
vanced placement examination credit. 

""No Credit for literature. 

'""To complete the requirement for Physics 211A.B the student must 
successfully complete two units of Physics 211 A and 21 IB laboratory at 
CSUF. 


Education. The number of units allowed are those recom- 
mended in the Guide to the Evaluation of Educational Ex- 
perience in the Armed Services and the National Guide to 
Educational Credit for Training Programs. Students who 
have at least one year of active military service may be 
granted six or 12 units of undergraduate credit. 

College Level Examination 
Program 

The university shall accept three semester units of credit 
for each of the following College Level Examination Pro- 
gram (CLEP) examinations, subject to achievement of the 
scores indicated, provided the examination was not taken 
previously within one calendar year and that degree credit 
has not been granted for previous course work at the 
equivalent or at a more advanced level than for the exami- 


nation in question. 

Examination Passing score 

Mathematics General Exam 50* 

College Algebra-Trigonometry 49 

Introductory Calculus and Analytic Geometry 48 

Statistics 49 

General Chemistry 48 


'On both parts of examination. 

Fullerton may grant additional credit and advanced stand- 
ing based upon CLEP examination results using as mini- 
mum standards: 

General Examinations 

1 . That the student achieve a score at or above the 50th 
percentile, college sophomore norms. 

2. That no unit credit be granted for any test in the general 
examinations, but that up to six units of general educa- 
tion requirements be waived for each test completed 
with the appropriate score. 

Subject Examinations 

1 . That the student submit a score at or above the 50th 
percentile of those in the norm group who earned a 
mark of C or better. 

2. That equivalency to Fullerton courses be determined 
by the appropriate academic department in conjunction 
with the Office of Admissions and Records. 

3. That university credit shall have not been previously 
earned in the courses in question. 

In no case will credit so awarded count toward residence 
credit. 

English Equivalency 
Examination 

Students passing the California State University English 
Equivalency Examination shall be awarded six semester 
units of credit (English 1 01 and 200 — GE categories A.1 . 
& C.4.) provided credit has not been granted previously at 
the equivalent or at more advanced levels. Further, those 
who pass this optional examination are exempt from the 
requirement to take the English Placement Test. 


Transfer Credits 



80 


Registration 

Procedures 



81 


Registration Information 


Orientation 

Various opportunities are provided for new students to obtain 
information relating to academic programs, student services 
and activities, and other aspects of university life. Informa- 
tion about specific programs is published separately. 

Registration 

Class Schedule 

A complete listing of courses offered will be found in the 
class schedule published prior to the start of each semes- 
ter. This publication, which may be purchased in the Titan 
Bookstore, also includes detailed information pertaining to 
the semester including class enrollment and fee payment 
procedures. 

It is important that students familiarize themselves not only 
with the academic policies stated in this catalog but also 
with the requirements and procedures in the class sched- 
ule as both are used in the selection of classes for the 
semester. 

Registration 

Registration is made up of two steps — class enrollment and 
fee payment, and may be accomplished through early regis- 
tration by mail, walk-through registration during the month 
preceding the first day of instruction, or through late registra- 
tion during the first three weeks of instruction. Most students 
should find early registration by mail advantageous. 

At registration, every student is required to file a study 
program with the Office of Admissions and Records. The 
filing of a program by the student and its acceptance by the 
university obligates the student to perform the designated 
work to the best of his or her ability. It is emphasized that 
registration does not become official until all fees have 
been paid. 

Computerized Records System 

The student records system, including the registration pro- 
cess, is computerized. It is a fact of life in a large institution 
such as Cal State Fullerton that computerization is essen- 
tial. Thus, there are requirements for data cards, code 
numbers, student file numbers and for meeting precise 
criteria for recording data, which introduce impersonal ele- 
ments in the student records system. Despite these condi- 
tions, every effort is made to provide courteous, efficient 
and personalized service to students and the entire univer- 
sity community. To assist in providing this service, students 
are urged to be careful and accurate in preparing forms, 
especially the course request registration forms and 
change of program forms. Accurate preparation of infor- 
mation will assure each student of error-free records. 



Registration Information 


Controlled Entry Classes 

In general, all courses listed in the semester class sched- 
ule shall be available to all matriculated students except for 
appropriate academic restrictions as stated in the sched- 
ule and the catalog. These restrictions, including special 
qualifications and other academic limitations, on class en- 
try shall be published in the class schedule as appropriate 
footnotes to the designated class or class section and shall 
be consistent with the catalog. 


Late Registration 

The last day to register late each semester will be an- 
nounced in the class schedule. Late registrants will find 
themselves handicapped in arranging their programs and 
must pay a $25 late registration fee in addition to regular 
fees. 

Changes in Program After 
Registration 

Each student is responsible for the program of courses 
listed at registration. Changes may be made thereafter 
only by filing a change of program form in the Office of 
Admissions and Records following procedures announced 
in the class schedule. 

Students may add classes to their programs of study dur- 
ing the first three weeks of instruction. They may drop 
classes through the first two weeks. After the second week 
of instruction the university expects students to complete 
all courses in which they are enrolled. If students must 
withdraw after the deadline for dropping classes published 
in the class schedule, they are subject to the withdrawal 
policy contained in the “University Regulations” section of 
this catalog. In all instances, dropped classes must be 
reported to the Office of Admissions and Records; stu- 
dents not attending class are not dropped automatically. 

Concurrent Enrollment Outside 
the CSU System 

A student enrolled at the university may enroll concurrently 
for additional courses at another institution outside the 
CSU system without advance written approval from the 
student’s academic adviser or the Office of Admissions 
and Records. Students are reminded that the study load in 
the proposed combined program of study may not exceed 
the maximum number of units authorized at this university. 


Enrollment at Other CSU 
Campuses 

Fullerton students may enroll at other campuses of The 
California State University either while concurrently en- 
rolled at Cal State Fullerton or as visitors. There are cer- 
tain eligibility requirements and enrollment conditions that 
must be met, including completion of at least one semester 
at Cal State Fullerton and being in good academic stand- 
ing. Information and application forms may be obtained 
from the Office of Admissions and Records. 


Visitor Enrollment 

Students enrolled at other campuses of The California 
State University may enroll at Cal State Fullerton while 
concurrently enrolled at their home campus or as visitors. 
Information about eligibility requirements, enrollment con- 
ditions and application forms are available from the Office 
of Admissions and Records at the home campus. 


Auditors 

A properly qualified student may enroll in classes as an 
auditor. The student must meet the regular university ad- 
mission requirements and must pay the same fees as oth- 
er students. See the description of Audit in the “University 
Regulations” section of this catalog under “Administrative 
Symbols.” 


Disabled Students 

Disabled students who require assistance should consult 
with Disabled Student Services prior to the announced 
semester registration period so that special arrangements 
can be made. 


Veterans 

California State University, Fullerton is approved by the 
Bureau of School Approvals, State Department of Educa- 
tion, to offer programs to veterans seeking benefits under 
state and federal legislation. All students seeking veter- 
ans’ benefits must have a degree or credential objective. 

Applications for benefits should be filed well in advance of 
the semester in which the veteran plans to use these bene- 
fits to have the authorization at the time of registration. 


Registration Information 


Schedule of Fees 
1 989-90 


Tuition is not charged to legal residents of California. The 
1 989-90 and 1 990-91 schedule of fees will be published in 
the class schedules for those years. The following are the 
fees and nonresident tuition assessed at the time of pre- 
paring this catalog. 

Application fee (nonrefundable) 

Payable by check or money order at time 
application is made $45 

All Students (Per Semester Fees) 

State University fee 

0 to 6 units 

7 or more units 

Facilities fee 

Associated Students fee 

University Union fee 

Instructional ly-related activity fee 

Nonresident and Foreign Visa Students 

Nonresident tuition fee (in addition to fees 


charged all students) per unit $165 

Summer Session 

Course fee per unit see current bulletin 

Associated Students fee $3 

University Union fee 5 

Extension Fees 

Per unit see current bulletin 


$219 
. 375 
...3 
. . 24 
. . 49 
.. 10 


Other Fees or Charges 


University I.D. card $3 

Late registration fee (in addition to other fees 

listed above) 25 

Check returned from bank for any cause 10 

Transcript fee 4 

Graduation and diploma fee 25 

Failure to meet an administrative time limit 10 


Miscellaneous course fees Selected courses 

require instructional fees as indicated in the class 
schedule and under the course description in the 
catalog. 

Consult current class schedule for further information. 



Auditors pay the same fees as others. 

Fees are subject to change by the Trustees of The Califor- 
nia State University without advance notice. 


Schedule of Fees 


Alan Pattee Scholarships 

Children of deceased public law enforcement or fire sup- 
pression employees, who were California residents and 
who were killed in the course of law enforcement or fire 
suppression duties, are not charged fees or tuition of any 
kind at any California State University campus, according 
to the Alan Pattee Scholarship Act, Education Code Sec- 
tion 68121. Students qualifying for these benefits are 
known as Alan Pattee scholars. For further information 
contact the Admissions Office, which determines eligibility. 


Waiver of Fees 

Section 32320 of the California Education Code provides 
for the waiver of certain fees other than nonresident tuition, 
for certain veterans’ dependents. Those who meet one or 
more of the following criteria should present to the university 
registrar a certificate of eligibility obtained from the Division 
of Educational Assistance, California Department of Veter- 
ans Affairs, on or before the date of registration. 

A. Children of veterans who have service-connected dis- 
abilities and whose annual income not including gov- 
ernmental compensation for such service-connected 
disability does not exceed $5,000. 

B. Children of veterans killed in action or because of a 
service-connected disability, where the annual income 
of such children, including the value of any support 
received from parents and the annual income of sur- 
viving parents, does not exceed $5,000. No limitations 
on age or length of residency. 


Refund of Fees 

Details concerning fees which may be refunded, the cir- 
cumstances under which fees may be refunded, and the 
appropriate procedure to be followed in seeking refunds 
may be obtained by consulting Section 41803 (parking 
fees), 41913 (nonresident tuition), 42019 (housing 
charges) and 41802 (all other fees) of Title 5, California 
Code of Regulations. In all cases it is important to act 
quickly in applying for a refund. 

Information concerning the policy and appropriate proce- 
dure to be followed in seeking a refund may be obtained 
from the Office of the Registrar or the Cashier’s Office. 


Parking Fees 

Semester pass (nonreserved spaces): 


Regular and limited students 

(4-wheeled vehicle) $54.00 

Regular and limited students 

(2-wheeled vehicle) 13.50 

Coin operated gate per exit 1.50 

Summer session (4-wheeled vehicle) 36.00 

Summer session (2-wheeled vehicle) 9.00 


Typical Student Expenses 

Typical school year budgets for California residents living 
at home or making other housing arrangements will vary 
widely. It is estimated that, including a $4,700 yearly 
allowance for room and board, and $400 for books and 
supplies, the total cost will approximate $7,600 for an un- 
married person. Nonresident students must also allow for 
nonresident tuition in addition to those fees listed above. 

State University Fee 

The state university fee provides financing for the following 
student services. 

1 . Social and Cultural Development Activities. Provides 
for the coordination of various student activities, stu- 
dent organizations, student government and cultural 
programs. 

2. Counseling. Includes the cost of counselors’ salaries and 
clerical support, plus operating expenses and equipment. 

3. Testing. Covers the cost of test officers, psychometrists, 
clerical support, operating expenses and equipment. 

4. Placement. Provides career information to students 
and faculty for academic program planning and em- 
ployment information to graduates and students. 

5. Financial Aids Administration. Includes the cost of the 
counseling and business services provided in connec- 
tion with the financial aid programs. 

6. Health Services. Provides health services to students 
and covers the cost of salaries of medical officers and 
nurses and related clerical and technical personnel, as 
well as operating expenses and equipment. 

7. Housing. Supports personnel who provide housing in- 
formation and monitor housing services available to 
students. 

8. Student Services Administration. Covers 50 percent of 
the cost of the office of the vice president for student 
services, which has responsibility for the overall admin- 
istration of student services. 

Associated Students Fee 

The law governing The California State University pro- 
vides that a student body fee may be established by stu- 
dent referendum with the approval of two-thirds of those 
students voting. The Associated Students fee was estab- 
lished at California State University, Fullerton by student 
referendum in December 1 959. The same fee can be abol- 
ished by a similar two-thirds approval of students voting on 
a referendum called for by a petition signed by ten percent 
of the regularly enrolled students (Education Code , Sec- 
tion 89300). The level of the fee is set by the Chancellor 
who may approve a fee increase only following a referen- 
dum approved by a majority of the students. The Associat- 
ed Students fee supports a variety of cultural and recrea- 
tional programs, child care centers and special student 
support programs. 


Schedule of Fees 


Average Annual Costs and 
Sources of Funds Per Full-Time 
Equivalent Student 

The 1 9 campuses and the Chancellor’s Office of The Cali- 
fornia State University are financed primarily through fund- 
ing provided by the taxpayers of California. The total State 
appropriation to the CSU for 1988-89, including capital 
outlay and employee compensation increases, is 
$1 ,588,41 6,000. The total cost of education for CSU, how- 
ever, is $1 ,906,075,325 which provides support for a pro- 
jected 261,049 full-time equivalent (FTE)* students. 


The total cost of education in the CSU is defined as the 
expenditures for current operations, including payments 
made to the students in the form of financial aid, and all fully 
reimbursed programs contained in State appropriations, but 
excluding capital outlay appropriations. The average cost of 
education is determined by dividing the total cost by the total 
FTES. The average cost is further differentiated into three 
categories: State support (the State appropriation, excluding 
capital outlay), Student Fee support, and support from other 
sources (including federal funds). 

Thus, excluding costs which relate to capital outlay (i.e., 
building amortization), the average cost of education per 
FTE student is $7,302. Of this amount, the average student 
fee support per FTE is $1 ,028. The calculation for this latter 
amount includes the amount paid by nonresident students. 


Source of Funds and Average Costs for 1988/89 CSU Budget 
(Projected Enrollment: 261,049 FTE) 

Average 
Cost Per 

Amount Student (FTE) Percentage 


Total Cost of Education $1,906,075,325** $7,302 100.0 

State Appropriation 1,466,139,000*** 5,617 77.0 

Student Fee Support 268,290,444 1,028**** 14.0 

Support from Other Sources 171,645,881 657 9.0 


* For budgetary purposes, full-time equivalent (FTE) translates total head count into total academic student load equivalent to 15 units per term. Some 
students enroll for more than 15 units: some students enroll for fewer than 15 units. 

** The total cost of education does not include the amount related to lottery and the capital investment of the CSU. The estimated replacement cost of all the 
system s permanent facilities and equipment on the 19 campuses is currently valued at $5.3 billion, excluding the cost of land. 

*** This figure does not include the capital outlay appropriation of $122,277,000. 

**** The average costs paid by a student include the State University Fee, Application Fee, and Nonresident Tuition. Individual students may pay less than 
$1,028 depending on whether they are part-time, full-time, resident or nonresident students. 


Schedule of Fees 


Financial Aid 


Eligibility Requirements 

The following eligibility requirements apply to all financial 
aid programs except emergency loans and scholarships. 

In order to be eligible for financial assistance, applicants 
must demonstrate financial need. Financial need is the 
difference between the reasonable and approved costs 
incurred by a student at CSUF and all of the resources 
available to the student, including contributions from par- 
ents, student (and spouse, if applicable), and any other aid 
the student may be eligible to receive. 

In addition to demonstrating financial need, all applicants 
must: 

1. be a national of the United States or be in the United 
States for other than a temporary purpose and intend to 
become a permanent resident thereof, or be a perma- 
nent resident of the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands 
(Holders of student visas are not eligible); 

2. be accepted for enrollment as at least a half-time stu- 
dent, or in the case of a student already attending the 
university, be enrolled and in good standing as at least 
a half-time student; 

3. maintain satisfactory academic progress in the course 
of study according to the standards and practices of the 
university; 

4. not be in default on any loan made from a student loan 
fund and not owe a refund on grants previously re- 
ceived for attendance at any college or university. 

5. submit a completed Student Aid Application for Califor- 
nia (SAAC) or an Application for Federal Student Aid if 
the student wants only a Pell Grant, and all documenta- 
tion requested by the Financial Aid Office; and 

6. be registered for the Draft with the Selective Service or 
certify that he/she is not required to register. 

Application Periods 

The deadlines listed below are approximate and are sub- 
ject to annual changes. Consult with the Financial Aid 
Office for current dates. 

Emergency Loans 

Emergency loans are available from the first day of classes 
until 30 days before the end of the semester. 

Scholarships 

Applications for scholarships are due in the Financial Aid 
Office by mid-March. Students should contact the Finan- 
cial Aid Office for an application in mid- January. 

Bureau of Indian Affairs Grants 

Consult with the BIA for exact dates. The application dead- 
line is usually in mid-June. 



Financial Aid 



Stafford Loans (Formerly GSL) 

Apply after June 1 for the fall semester and academic year, 
and after November 1 for the spring semester. 

Cal Grants and Graduate Fellowships 

First-time applicants must complete and mail the Student 
Aid Application for California (SAAC) and for graduate 
students also the SAAC Supplement form by March 2. 

Pell Grant only (no other aid desired) 

Apply by May 1 of the academic year for which aid is 
desired. 

All Other Aid 

Priority is given to SAAC applications mailed between Jan- 
uary 1 and March 2 for the next academic year. 

Rights and Responsibilities of 
Students Receiving Aid 

Rights 

All students are entitled to and are guaranteed fair and 
equitable treatment in the awarding of financial aid. In 
addition, there shall be no discrimination of any kind. Ap- 
peals procedures exist for anyone who feels that a viola- 
tion has occurred; consult with the director of financial aid 
for details. 

All students have the right to receive full and open informa- 
tion about various financial aid programs and the status of 
their eligibility. In addition, they have the right to know the 
selection and review processes used in awarding financial 
aid. 

All students have the right to know the costs of attending 
the institution, the refund policies in case of withdrawal 
from the university, the academic programs offered by the 
university, the faculty and physical facilities of the institu- 
tion, and data regarding student retention at the university. 

Responsibilities 

All financial aid recipients agree to carry and complete a 
specific number of units each semester, report graduation 
or withdrawal from the university and to notify the Financial 
Aid Office of any changes in their financial or marital sta- 
tus, or unit load. 

Recipients of financial aid must use the funds only to meet 
education costs. Any other use of the funds is prohibited by 
law. 

Students who are receiving financial aid must maintain satis- 
factory academic progress. See the section below for details. 


Satisfactory Academic Progress 
Standards 

The Higher Education Act, as amended, requires that stu- 
dents maintain satisfactory academic progress in the 
course of study they are pursuing according to standards 
and practices set by each college and university. 

Students should be aware that these standards must be 
the same or stricter than the standards for a student en- 
rolled in California State University, Fullerton in the same 
academic program who is not receiving assistance under a 
Title IV program. 

Qualitative Standards (Measurement by 
Grades) 

All students, including financial aid recipients, must main- 
tain scholastic academic progress as outlined in the Cali- 
fornia State University, Fullerton catalog. 

Students are expected to complete their educational ob- 
jective, degree, or certificate according to the following 
schedule: 

Required for Degree Max. Completed Units 
Undergraduate: 

124 units (B.A.) 150 

Graduate: 

30 or more depending 50 

upon program 

A student who cannot complete his/her objective within the 
maximum attempted units outlined above according to 
his/her degree standing will not be eligible for any financial 
aid from any federal or state source. 

Successful Completion Requirement 

In order to maintain satisfactory academic progress, each 
student must have a cumulative C average or an academic 
standing consistent with the institution’s requirements for 
graduation by the end of the student’s second academic 
year. This requirement is in addition to the requirement 
that a student maintain scholastic academic progress at 
the end of each semester as defined by California State 
University, Fullerton. Since California State University, Ful- 
lerton academic probation and disqualification standards 
permit a student to enroll on academic probation with a 
cumulative grade-point average of 1 .86 or better with few- 
er than 60 semester units, the equivalent of the end of the 
student’s second academic year, CSUF meets the provi- 
sions of the Higher Education Amendments of 1986. As a 
result, a student who maintains a 1 .86 or better cumulative 
grade-point average at the end of the second academic 
year will be considered to be making satisfactory academ- 
ic progress. 


Financial Aid 


Semester Grade Review 

Even though California State University, Fullerton will 
measure Satisfactory Academic Progress according to the 
number of units successfully completed at the end of each 
academic year, federal financial aid program regulations 
require each college and university to determine that a 
student is maintaining Satisfactory Academic Progress 
each payment period and each time it certifies a Stafford 
Loan or SLS. To meet this requirement, a student will have 
been certified as having made Satisfactory Academic Pro- 
gress for payment purposes at the end of the fall semester 
if the student meets the "qualitative standards” as outlined 
above. 

Determination of Units Completed 

The following grades will be counted in determining units 
successfully completed: A, B, C, D, CR (credit). 

SP (Satisfactory Progress) and RD (Report Delayed) will 
be temporarily considered as units completed provided 
these designations are replaced with an acceptable final 
grade within one calendar year from the beginning date of 
the semester. If the final SP grade is not posted within one 
year, the student must submit a written appeal to the Fi- 
nancial Aid Office. If a Report is Delayed beyond one year, 
the student must submit to the Financial Aid Office a state- 
ment from the faculty member explaining the cause for the 
extended delay. 

The following grades will count as units attempted but will 
not count as units completed: F, NC (No Credit), W (With- 
drawal), AU (Audit), I (Incomplete), U (Unofficial Withdrawal). 

If a grade is changed after the official posting for a semes- 
ter, it is the student’s responsibility to bring verification of 
the change to the Financial Aid Office. 

Repeated Courses: A repeated course in which the stu- 
dent initially received a D or F will not count as units at- 
tempted or completed since an improved grade will only 
result in a grade change and not additional unit credit. A 
repeated course in which a student withdrew or received 
an unauthorized incomplete will count as units attempted 
and completed. 

Remedial Courses will be considered as units completed 
for purposes of reviewing a student’s Satisfactory Aca- 
demic Progress only when the university or department 
requires a student to take a remedial course(s) as part of 
his/her program whether or not the student receives unit 
credit towards graduation. 

Failure to Maintain Satisfactory Academic 
Progress 

A student who fails to maintain the qualitative or quantita- 
tive measurement standards will be defined as having 
failed to maintain Satisfactory Academic Progress and will 
be ineligible to receive any federal or state financial aid. 

Reinstatement of Financial Aid Eligibility 

Students whose financial aid eligibility has been terminat- 
ed for failure to complete the minimum number of units 


may have their aid eligibility reevaluated when the deficit 
units are completed and the student has demonstrated 
capability of making satisfactory academic progress in ac- 
cordance with the incremental completion rate. 

Appeal 

Students who fail to meet the Satisfactory Academic Pro- 
gress standards and who are disqualified from financial aid 
eligibility may appeal their disqualification to the Director 
of Financial Aid by completing and submitting a written 
appeal within 10 days of receipt of the "Notification of 
Financial Aid Disqualification.” No appeal will be approved 
unless the mitigating circumstance is unique and compel- 
ling, e.g., documented injury which prevented the student 
from attending classes, parental or spousal death, ex- 
tended illness, etc. 

The "Financial Aid Petition” is available in the Financial 
Aid Office. 

Eligibility for Multiple Degrees 

Students will be eligible to receive financial aid towards the 
completion of their first bachelor’s degree and towards 
their first graduate degree. 


Refund Policy 

As stated in the appropriate CSUF Class Schedule, a stu- 
dent may be entitled to a refund of fees if he/she withdraws 
from the University or drops units. If a student received 
financial aid, fee refunds will be credited partially or com- 
pletely to various financial aid accounts according to the 
formulas below: 

Since financial aid is awarded to help meet educational 
costs, financial aid is considered to be used first for direct 
educational costs (fees). Therefore, if a student withdraws 
and is scheduled to receive a refund of fees, all or part of 
this refund will be used to reimburse the financial aid pro- 
gram^) from which the student received funds. 

If a student received financial aid in excess of direct fees, a 
repayment of additional financial aid funds may be required. 

I. Refund to be returned to Title IV programs: 

A = Amount of fee refunded 

B = Total Title IV aid (excluding CWS) for semester 
Total aid awarded (excluding CWS) for semester. 

A x B = Amount of refund to Title IV 

II. Distribution order of Title IV portion of refund among 
Title IV programs: 

1. Perkins (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

2. SEOG (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

3. PELL (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

4. Stafford (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

5. SLS (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 


Financial Aid 


III. When the Stafford is the only Title IV aid received (ex- 
cluding CWS) the following distribution formula will be 
used: 

Refund to Stafford = Amount of Stafford Estimated 

cost of attendance for 
loan period 

IV. Any remaining refund amount not credited to Title IV 
programs as per the above formulas will be distributed 
as follows: 

1. EOPG (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

2. SUG (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

3. Student (remaining amount of refund) 

Repayment Policy 

Since financial aid is awarded to help meet educational 
costs, financial aid is considered to be used first for direct 
educational costs (fees). Therefore, if a student withdraws 
and is scheduled to receive a refund of fees, all or part of 
this refund will be used to reimburse the financial aid pro- 
gram^) from which the student received funds. 

If a student received financial aid in excess of direct fees, a 
repayment of additional financial aid funds may be required. 


Students who receive financial aid and later terminate their 
enrollment by dropping out or by withdrawing and who 
received cash disbursements of Title IV financial aid for 
payment of their non-institutional costs require institution- 
al review to determine if there has been an overpayment, 
and therefore, if a repayment is required. Repayment des- 
ignates the amount that a student must repay of the funds 
he/she received in cash that could not have reasonably 
been spent for non-institutional costs during the portion of 
the term that the student was enrolled. 

Total Title IV funds disbursed in cash to the student minus 
Stafford, SLS, CWS minus non-institutional costs paid by 
the student from the disbursement for the portion of the 
payment period during which the student was enrolled 
(room, board, books, supplies, transportation, miscella- 
neous expenses) = overpayment. 

Overpayment X Total amount of Title IV (minus CWS, Staf- 
ford, SLS) -r Total amount of aid (minus 
CWS, Stafford, SLS) = Title IV Repay- 
ment 

Order of distribution for repayment: Perkins, SEOG, then 
Pell. 


Financial Aid 



University 

Regulations 

Each student is responsible for meeting the requirements 
printed in the university catalog and all published regula- 
tions of the university. 

The university establishes certain academic policies and re- 
quirements which must be met before a degree is granted. 
These include major and unit requirements and prerequi- 
sites. While advisors, directors, deans and faculty will pro- 
vide a student with information and advice, responsibility for 
meeting these requirements rests with the student. Since 
failure to satisfy these requirements may result in the degree 
being withheld, it is important for each student to become 
thoroughly acquainted with all regulations. The catalog and 
the semester class schedule, available in the Titan Book- 
store, are the best sources of information on current policy 
and regulations. 

The student also has the responsibility for securing the 
consent of the instructor before enrolling in a course with 
prerequisites that the student has not completed. 

To ensure receipt of timely information and accurate grade 
reports from the university, each student must keep the 
Office of Admissions and Records informed of changes in 
personal data, including changes in name, address and 
program of study. Each student is mailed a student data 
verification each semester during the third week of classes 
to ensure the accuracy of demographic and official enroll- 
ment data for that term; enrollment corrections must be 
reported to the registrar by the 20th day of classes, using 
Change of Program forms. Between the 1 5th and 20th day 
of classes, a petition will also be required to make such 
changes. Other corrections should be reported on the form 
and returned to the Office of Admissions and Records. 


University Regulations 


Enrollment Regulations 


Unit of Credit 

Each semester unit represents three hours of university work 
per week for one semester Courses are of three types: 

Lecture: one hour in class plus two hours of study. 
Activity: two hours of class plus one hour of study. 
Laboratory: three hours in class. 

Some courses may combine two or more of these types. 
All required courses carry unit credit. 


Classification in the University 

Undergraduate students who have completed 0-29 se- 
mester units of work are classified as freshmen, 30-59 
semester units as sophomores, 60-89 semester units as 
juniors, and 90 or more as seniors. 


Maximum Number of Units 

Undergraduate students’ requests to enroll for more than 
1 9 units must be approved by the student’s advisor and the 
department chair of the major. If such requests are denied, 
appeals may be made to the appropriate school dean. 
(Undeclared majors must receive the approval of the direc- 
tor of academic advisement.) The minimum full-time pro- 
gram is 12 units. 

A student whose academic record justifies a study list in 
excess of the normal may request to be allowed to enroll 
for extra units. Request forms may be obtained from the 
Office of Admissions and Records. In general, only stu- 
dents with superior academic records are allowed to enroll 
for more than the maximum. In addition, the need to enroll 
for the extra study must be established. Factors such as 
time spent in employment or commuting, the nature of the 
academic program, extracurricular activities and the stu- 
dent’s health should be considered in planning a study 
program. Students who are employed or have outside re- 
sponsibilities are advised to reduce their program of study. 

The minimum and maximum units of a full-time program of 
study for graduate students are defined in the “Graduate 
Regulations” section of this catalog. 


Graduate Level Courses 

Graduate level (500) courses are organized primarily for 
graduate students. Undergraduate students may be per- 
mitted to enroll in a graduate level course if: 

a. they have reached senior status (completed a minimum 
of 90 semester units) 

b. have the academic preparation and prerequisites re- 
quired for entry into the course 

c. gain the consent of the instructor. 

Students wishing to use 500-level coursework taken dur- 
ing their undergraduate degree toward a master’s degree 
should read the section on postgraduate credit in the 
“Graduate Regulations” section of this catalog. 

Class Attendance 

While class attendance is not recorded officially by the 
university, regular attendance in class is often essential to 
success in a course. The policy on class attendance is 
within the discretion of the individual faculty member and 
shall be announced by the faculty member at the first class 
meeting of the semester. 

Initial Class Meeting 

It is especially important that students attend the first 
meeting of a class. Students absent from the first meeting 
and who fail to notify the instructor or departmental office 
no later than 24 hours after the class meeting may be 
denied admission to the class. Instructors may deny ad- 
mission to absentees to admit persons on waiting lists. 

Instructor-Initiated Drops 

A student who registers for a class and whose name ap- 
pears on the first-day-of-class list should attend all class 
meetings in the first week. If the student is absent without 
notifying the instructor or departmental office within 24 
hours after any meeting missed during that week, the stu- 
dent may then be dropped administratively from the class 
by the instructor; however, ultimately it is the student’s 
responsibility to ensure that he/she has been dropped 
from the class and if not, to follow the appropriate proce- 
dures for withdrawing from the class. An instructor may 
also administratively drop a student who does not meet 
prerequisites for the course. These administrative with- 
drawals shall be without penalty and must be filed by the 
instructor with the registrar no later than the end of the 
second week of instruction (the specific date is published 
in the class schedule each semester). 


Enrollment Regulations 


Grading Policies 



Grading System 

Every student of the university will have all course work 
evaluated and reported by the faculty using letter grades or 
administrative symbols. 

The university uses a combination of traditional and non- 
traditional grading options as follows: 

Traditional 

Option 1. Letter grades, defined as: 

A — outstanding performance 
B — above average performance 
C — average performance 
D — below average performance, though passing 
F — failure 

Nontraditional 

Option 2. CR (Credit) for satisfactory (equivalent to C or 
better in undergraduate courses; B or better in graduate 
courses) and NC (No Credit) for less than satisfactory work. 

When, because of circumstances, a student does not com- 
plete a particular course, or withdraws, certain administra- 
tive symbols may be assigned by the faculty. Grades and 
symbols are listed in the chart on the following page to- 
gether with grade-point values. The chart also illustrates 
the academic bookkeeping involved for all grades and 
symbols used. 

Selection of Grading Option 

Selection of a grading option, with certain exceptions, is 
the responsibility of the student. Graduate students must 
use Option 1 for courses that are on study plans leading to 
master’s degrees. Undergraduates must use Option 1 for 
major, minor and general education requirements. 

Exceptions are those courses designated by the faculty to 
be graded solely on an Option 2 basis. 

These courses will be so designated in the class schedule 
(and shall not be changed by the faculty after publication of 
the class schedule) for each semester and may be includ- 
ed in major, core or special program requirements. 

Students shall inform the registrar up to the end of the third 
week of classes regarding the selection of grading options 
in designated courses. If a student does not do so, Option 
1 will be used. 

The faculty shall grade all students using the traditional A, 
B, C, D or F grades except in Credit/No Credit courses, 
and the registrar shall make the necessary changes from 
A, B, C, D or F, converting A, B, C to Credit, and D and F to 
No Credit in undergraduate courses and A, B to Credit, 
and C, D and F to No Credit in graduate courses. In those 
courses offered only on a Credit/No Credit basis, the in- 
structor shall assign grades of CR or NC or appropriate 
administrative symbols. 


Grading Policies 


Nontraditional Grade Option 

A nontraditional grading option is available to undergrad- 
uate students, nonobjective graduate students and to clas- 
sified graduate students for courses not included in the 
approved study plan. Any student attempting a course 
using the nontraditional grading option must meet the pre- 
requisites for that course. Each student shall be permitted 
to select courses in subjects outside of the major, minor 
and general education requirements for enrollment on a 
Credit/No Credit basis (grading Option 2). The phrase 
“major requirements” shall be taken to include core plus 
concentration (or option) requirements in departments us- 
ing such terms, and professional course requirements in 
teacher education curricula. A student in any one term 
may take one course under Option 2. In addition, he or she 
may enroll in a required course offered only under Option 
2; however, a maximum of 36 units of Credit/No Credit 
courses, including those transferred from other institu- 
tions, may be counted toward the baccalaureate. 

Under Option 2 the term “Credit” signifies that the stu- 
dent’s academic performance was such that he or she was 
awarded full credit in undergraduate courses with a quality 
level of achievement equivalent to a C grade or better. In all 
graduate level and professional education courses Credit 
signifies academic performance equivalent to B or A 
grades. No Credit signifies that the student attempted the 
course but that the performance did not warrant credit 
toward the objective. 

Ordinarily, a student shall be limited to one nonmajor 
course per term using this option, exclusive of courses 
offered only on a Credit/No Credit basis. 

When an undergraduate student changes his or her major 
field of study to one where he or she has completed 
courses with CR grades, such lower division courses shall 
be included in major requirements. Upper division courses 
may be included at the option of the department upon 
petition by the student. 


ADVISORY CAUTION: Undergraduate students 
who plan to pursue graduate or professional studies 
later are advised to be selective in opting for courses 
on a credit/no credit basis. As a general rule (advis- 
ory only), course work that is preparatory or prereq- 
uisite to advanced specialized study should be com- 
pleted and evaluated on a letter grade basis and not 
Credit/No Credit. 


Administrative Symbols 

Incomplete Authorized (I) 

The symbol I signifies that a portion of required course 
work has not been completed and evaluated in the pre- 
scribed time period owing to unforeseen but fully justified 
reasons and that there is still a possibility of earning credit. 
It is the responsibility of the student to bring pertinent 
information to the instructor and to reach agreement on the 
means by which the remaining course requirements will be 


Grade or 



Grade 


Symbol 

Units 

Units 

Point 

Full 

Option 1 

Attempted 

Earned 

Value 

Credit 

A 

Yes 

Yes 

4 

Yes 

B 

Yes 

Yes 

3 

Yes 

C 

Yes 

Yes 

2 

Yes 

D 

Yes 

Yes 

1 

No 

F 

Yes 

No 

0 

No 

Option 2 

CR 

* 

Yes 

None 

Yes 

NC 

* 

No 

None 

No 

Administrative 





Symbols 

1 (Incomplete 
authorized) 

t 

No 



U (Unauthorized 
incomplete) 

Yes 

No 

0 

No 

W (Withdrawal) 

No 

No 

None 

No 

WF (Withdrawal) 

Yes 

No 

0 

No 

AU (Audit) 

SP (Satisfactory 

No 

No 

None 

No 

progress) 

No 

No 

None 

No 

RD (Report 
delayed) 

No 

No 

None 

No 

TOTALS 

Used 

Counted 

Used 



In 

in 

Toward 



GPA 

Objective 

GPA 



*Credit/No Credit course units are not included in GPA computations, 
tlf not completed within one semester the I will be changed to an F (or NC). 


satisfied. A final grade is assigned when the work agreed 
upon has been completed and evaluated. 

An Incomplete must be made up during the semester im- 
mediately following the end of the term in which it was 
assigned. This limitation prevails whether or not the stu- 
dent maintains continuous enrollment. Failure to complete 
the assigned work will result in an Incomplete being 
changed to an F or an NC. 

A grade of Incomplete may be given only when, in the 
opinion of the instructor, a student cannot complete a 
course during the semester of enrollment for reasons be- 
yond the student’s control. Such reasons are assumed to 
include: illness of the student or of members of the stu- 
dent’s immediate family, extraordinary financial problems, 
loss of outside position and other exigencies. In assigning 
a grade of I, the instructor shall file with the department for 
future reference and student access a Statement of Re- 
quirements for Completion of Course Work. The require- 
ments shall not include retaking the course. The instructor 
will also designate a time limit (up to one semester) for 
completing requirements. Upon request, a copy of the doc- 
ument will be furnished to the student. The student should 
review this statement at the earliest opportunity. 

The statement of requirements will include an indication of 
the quality of the student’s work to date. This not only 
provides an interim evaluation for the student but assists 
the department chair in assigning a final grade in those 
instances where the instructor is no longer available. 


Grading Policies 


When the specific requirements are completed, the in- 
structor will report a change of grade. The responsibility for 
changing the incomplete grade rests with the instructor. 

Withdrawal (W, WF) 

Students may withdraw from class during the first two 
weeks of instruction. After that time students should com- 
plete all courses in which they are enrolled. 

The university authorizes withdrawal after the first two 
weeks of instruction and prior to the last three weeks of 
instruction only with the approval of the instructor and the 
department chair or school dean. All requests for permis- 
sion to withdraw and all approvals shall be made in writing 
on the Change of Program form and shall be filed at the 
Office of Admissions and Records by students or their 
proxies. 

Prior to the 20th day of instruction, students may withdraw 
from classes without record of enrollment. Students with- 
drawing from class after the 20th day of instruction shall 
receive grading symbols of W or WF. The symbol W signi- 
fies that the student dropped the course after the 20th day 
of instruction and that the quality of performance at the 
time of withdrawal was C or better. The symbol WF signi- 
fies that the student dropped the course after the 20th day 
of instruction and that the quality of performance at the 
time of withdrawal was below average. W’s are not count- 
ed in grade-point average calculations; WF’s are counted 
in the same way as F grades. When signing the Change of 
Program form, the instructor shall indicate to the student 
whether W or WF will be given. 

Students may not withdraw during the final three weeks of 
instruction except in cases, appropriately documented, 
such as accident or serious illness, where the assignment 
of an Incomplete is not practicable. Ordinarily, withdrawals 
of this nature will involve withdrawal from all classes ex- 
cept that Credit or Incomplete Authorized (I) may be as- 
signed for courses in which students have completed suffi- 
cient work to permit an evaluation to be made. Petitions for 
permission to withdraw from all classes under these cir- 
cumstances, with authorizations as described above, shall 
be submitted with Change of Program forms by the stu- 
dents (or their proxies) to the registrar. 

Unauthorized Incomplete (U) 

The symbol U indicates that an enrolled student did not 
withdraw from the course but failed to complete course 
requirements. It is used when, in the opinion of the instruc- 
tor, completed assignments or course activities or both 
were insufficient to make normal evaluation of academic 
performance possible. For purposes of grade-point aver- 
age computations this symbol is equivalent to an F. 

Students may petition for retroactive withdrawal from indi- 
vidual courses or from an entire semester, provided they 
can document both the serious and compelling reasons or 
circumstances that required the withdrawal and the date of 
such withdrawal. Such a petition must be filed within 30 
days after the first class day of the following semester. 


ADVISORY NOTE: Students who unofficially with- 
draw and who are receiving financial aid or benefits 
which are dependent on completion of specified 
course units are advised that they may have such 
benefits suspended and may be subject to repay- 
ment of allowances received after date of unofficial 
withdrawal. 


Audit (AU) 

The symbol AU is used by the registrar in those instances 
where a student has enrolled in a course either for informa- 
tion or other purposes not related to the student’s formal 
academic objective. Enrollment as an auditor is subject to 
the permission of the instructor, provided that enrollment in 
any course as an auditor shall be permitted only after 
students otherwise eligible to enroll in the course on a 
credit basis have had an opportunity to do so. Auditors are 
subject to the same fees as credit students and regular 
class attendance is expected. Once enrolled as an auditor, 
a student may not change to credit status unless such a 
change is requested prior to the last day to add classes. A 
student who is enrolled for credit may not change to audit 
after the third week of instruction. An auditor is not permit- 
ted to take examinations in the course; therefore, there is 
no basis for evaluation nor a formal grade report. 

Satisfactory Progress (SP) 

The SP symbol is used in connection with thesis, project or 
similar courses that extend beyond one academic term. It 
indicates that work is in progress, and has been evaluated 
and found to be satisfactory to date, but that assignment of 
a final grade must await completion of additional course 
work. Cumulative enrollment in units attempted may not 
exceed the total number applicable to the student’s educa- 
tional objective. Work is to be completed within a stipulated 
period which may not exceed one year except for graduate 
degree theses or projects for which the time may be longer, 
but may not exceed the overall limit for completion of all 
master’s degree requirements. Any extension of time must 
receive prior authorization by the dean of the school (or the 
dean’s designee) in which the course is offered. 

Report Delayed (RD) 

The RD symbol is used where a delay in the reporting of a 
final grade is due to circumstances beyond the control of 
the student. The symbol is assigned by the registrar and 
will be replaced as soon as possible. An RD shall not be 
included in calculation of a grade-point average. 

Student Records 

Grade Reports to Students 

A report of the final grades assigned in classes is sent to 
each student at the end of each semester. Many students 
also leave self-addressed post cards for instructors of spe- 
cific courses to send them earlier reports. 


Grading Policies 


Class Grade-Point Averages 

Beginning with the fall semester 1978, information is in- 
cluded on student grade reports and permanent academic 
records that is intended to depict the level of achievement 
of students in relation to other students in a particular 
class. The information is displayed in parentheses before 
each course grade. The first set of figures indicates the 
number of students officially completing the course and 
the second set is the class grade-point average. In making 
the computations, marks of W,l, CR, NC, and SP are ex- 
cluded. This same information is displayed for summer 
session classes, but not for extension or intersession 
classes sponsored by the Office of Extended Education. 

Examinations 

Final examinations, if required by the instructor, will be 
given at times scheduled by the university. Once estab- 
lished, the final examination schedule may not be changed 
unless approved by the dean of the school. No makeup 
final examination will be given except for reason of illness 
or other verified emergencies. 

Credit by Examination 

Students may be granted credit toward the baccalaureate 
and to meet curriculum requirements in certain designated 
courses by the satisfactory completion of challenge exami- 
nations in the courses. The examinations are to be com- 
prehensive and administered by the sponsoring depart- 
ments. Well in advance of the semester in which a chal- 
lenge examination is to be administered, the student, using 
the appropriate university form, will secure written approv- 
al of his or her major advisor and the chair of the depart- 
ment in which the course is offered. In general, prior work 
or academic experience will be required. 

Courses to be offered as challenge examinations will be 
determined by the academic departments. Matriculated 
students may either enroll in these courses during registra- 
tion or add them during the first three weeks of the semes- 
ter. The examination must be administered not later than 
the end of the third week of instruction. 

Upon successful completion of the examination, the in- 
structor will report the grade of CR. Students who fail the 
challenge examination may elect to continue the course 
for credit or may officially withdraw from the course 
through the normal class withdrawal procedure. The chal- 
lenge examination for any course may be administered 
only once. 

A maximum of 30 credits can be earned by challenge 
examination, including those earned by advanced place- 
ment. Credit by examination may not be used to fulfill the 
minimum residence requirements. 

Grade-Point Averages 

The numerical grade-point values in the grading system 
chart are intended to give an exact determination of a 
student’s scholastic standing. To compute the grade-point 
average for course work at Fullerton, the grade-point value 
of each grade, with the exception noted in the ‘‘Repetition 


of Courses” section, is multiplied first by the unit value of 
each course to obtain a total of all grade points earned. 
The total is then divided by the total units attempted in all 
courses in which grades of A, B, C, D, F, U and WF were 
received. The resulting figure is the grade-point average. 

Repetition of Courses 

Undergraduate students may repeat courses at California 
State University, Fullerton for which D or failing grades 
were earned either at Cal State Fullerton or at other institu- 
tions; in repeating such courses, the traditional grading 
system shall be used. In computing the grade-point aver- 
age of a student who repeats courses in which he or she 
received D or failing grades, only the most recently earned 
grades and grade points shall be used for the first 1 6 units 
repeated. Nevertheless, the original grade on the academ- 
ic record shall not be changed or eradicated. 

In exercising this option, an undergraduate student must 
repeat the course at Cal State Fullerton and may request 
application of this policy when a course has been repeat- 
ed. This should be accomplished using the appropriate 
form, immediately following the term in which the course 
has been completed, so that the student’s grade-point 
average can be revised. In the absence of student re- 
quests, courses successfully repeated are routinely cred- 
ited by the Office of Admissions and Records during de- 
gree requirement reviews at the time of graduation. 

This policy may also be applied to courses in which U or 
WF grades were assigned, as a means of eliminating such 
marks from grade-point average computations. 

In the case of any repetition beyond the 16-unit limit or in 
courses for which a C or better grade was awarded, both 
grades are considered in computing grade-point aver- 
ages. Successful repetition of a course originally passed 
carries no additional unit credit toward a degree or creden- 
tial except for certain courses such as independent study, 
practicum, or other courses specified in this catalog as 
‘‘may be repeated for credit.” 

Students transferring from other colleges where courses 
were taken and repeated may be eligible for consideration 
under this policy. In general, the policy of the college where 
the course was repeated shall be followed; however, units 
for the courses taken and repeated at the transfer institu- 
tion are included in the 16-unit limitation. 

Subject to the following restrictions, if a graduate or post- 
baccalaureate student (excluding students with a second 
bachelor’s degree objective) repeats courses for which a 
grade of U (unauthorized incomplete) was received, only 
the most recently earned grade(s) and grade points shall 
be used in computing the grade point average; however, 
the original U grade(s) will remain on the permanent re- 
cord. This policy may be applied only to grades earned 
during the first semester in which U grades are received. 
Repeated courses must be taken at Cal State Fullerton 
using the traditional grading system. Students who have 
successfully repeated a U-graded course must notify the 
Admissions and Records office using the appropriate form 
if they wish adjustment to their grade point average. 


Grading Policies 


Grade Changes 

The university recognizes the long-standing prerogatives 
of faculty to set standards of performance and to apply 
them to individual students. The university will seek to 
correct injustices to students but at the same time believes 
that the instructor’s judgment at the time the original grade 
is assigned is better than a later reconsideration of an 
individual case. Equity to all students is of fundamental 
concern. The following policies apply to changes of grades 
except for changes of Incomplete Authorized and Unauth- 
orized Incomplete symbols. 

1 . In general, all course grades are final when filed by the 
instructor in the end-of-term course grade report. Each 
student is notified by mail of the grades earned during 
the term, and these grades become a part of the official 
record. 

2. A change of grade may occur only in cases of clerical 
error, administrative error, or where the instructor re- 
evaluates the original course assignments of a student 
and discovers an error in the original evaluation. A cleri- 
cal error is an error made by the instructor or an assis- 
tant in calculating or recording the grade. A change of 
grade shall not occur as a consequence of the accep- 
tance of additional work or reexamination beyond the 
specified course requirements. 

3. A request for a change of grade shall be initiated by the 
student affected and shall be directed to the instructor 
within 60 calendar days of the first day of classes of the 
regular semester following the award of the original 
grade. If the instructor determines that there is a valid 
basis for the change, a Change of Grade form shall be 
used to notify the Office of Admissions and Records. 
These forms are available in department offices and 
are not to be handled by students. If the instructor de- 
termines that there is not a valid basis for the change, 
and denies the student’s request, the instructor’s deci- 
sion is final. The student may file a petition with the 
Academic Appeals Board on the basis of capricious or 
prejudicial treatment by the instructor. 

4. The Change of Grade form completed and signed by 
the instructor, noting the basis for the change, shall not 
be accepted by the registrar unless approved separate- 
ly by the department chair and school dean. 

5. If a request for change of grade is initiated after 60 
calendar days into the following semester, it will be 
approved only in extraordinary circumstances. An ex- 
planation of such circumstances must accompany the 
request and must be approved separately by the in- 
structor, department chair, and the dean before accep- 
tance by the registrar. 

Academic Dishonesty 

Academic dishonesty includes such things as cheating, 
inventing false information or citations, plagiarism, and 
helping someone else commit an act of academic dis- 
honesty. It usually involves an attempt by a student to show 
possession of a level of knowledge or skill which he or she 
does not possess. 


Cheating is defined as the act of obtaining or attempting to 
obtain credit for work by the use of any dishonest, decep- 
tive, fraudulent or unauthorized means. Examples of 
cheating include, but are not limited to: using notes or aids 
or the help of other students on tests and examinations in 
ways other than those expressly permitted by the instruc- 
tor, plagiarism as defined below, tampering with the grad- 
ing procedures, and collaborating with others on any as- 
signment where such collaboration is expressly forbidden 
by an instructor. 

Plagiarism is defined as the act of taking the specific sub- 
stance of another and offering it as one’s own without 
giving credit to the source. When sources are used, ac- 
knowledgment of the original author or source must be 
made following standard scholarly practice. 

The initial responsibility for detecting and dealing with aca- 
demic dishonesty lies with the instructor concerned. An 
instructor who believes that an act of academic dishonesty 
has occurred is obligated to discuss the matter with the 
student involved. The instructor should possess reason- 
able evidence, such as documents or personal observa- 
tion. However, if circumstances prevent consultation with 
the student, the instructor may take whatever action, sub- 
ject to student appeal, the instructor deems appropriate. 

An instructor who is convinced by the evidence that a 
student is guilty of academic dishonesty shall: 

1. Assign an appropriate academic penalty. This may 
range from an oral reprimand to an F in the course. To 
the extent that the faculty member considers the aca- 
demic dishonesty to manifest the student’s lack of 
scholarship and to reflect on the student’s academic 
performance and academic integrity in a course, the 
student’s grade should be adversely affected. Suggest- 
ed guidelines for appropriate actions are an oral repri- 
mand in cases where there is reasonable doubt that the 
student knew that his or her action constituted academ- 
ic dishonesty; an F on the particular paper, project or 
examination where the act of dishonesty was unpre- 
meditated, or where there were significant mitigating 
circumstances, or an F in the course where the dishon- 
esty was premeditated or planned. 

2. Report to the student involved, to the department chair, 
and to the vice president for student services the al- 
leged incident of academic dishonesty, including rel- 
evant documentation, and make recommendations for 
action that he or she deems appropriate. 

The vice president for student services shall maintain an 
academic dishonesty file of all cases of academic dis- 
honesty with the appropriate documentation. Students 
shall be informed when their names are inserted into the 
file and provided with copies of any appeals or disciplinary 
procedures in which they may become involved. The vice 
president for student services or his or her designees may 
initiate disciplinary proceedings under Title 5, California 
Administrative Code, Section 41301 , and Chancellor’s Ex- 
ecutive Order 148; when two or more incidents involving 
the same student occur, he or she shall do so. Opportuni- 
ties for appeal regarding sanctions resulting from disci- 
plinary proceedings are provided by Executive Order 148. 


Grading Policies 


A student may appeal any action taken on a charge of 
academic dishonesty under the University Policy State- 
ment 300.030, “Academic Appeals.” If the Academic Ap- 
peals Board decides that a student is innocent of academic 
dishonesty, then no entry shall be made in the academic 
dishonesty file. 

If the Academic Appeals Board decides either that a stu- 
dent is innocent of academic dishonesty, or that a faculty 
member has acted arbitrarily or capriciously towards a stu- 
dent, it shall instruct the faculty member to meet with his or 
her department chair and, if appropriate, the dean of the 
school for the purpose of reassessing the student’s perfor- 
mance. If the faculty member refuses to do so, or if the 
Board’s recommendation does not specify a particular 
grade as the one to be assigned, the matter shall be re- 
ferred to an ad hoc committee, to be established by the 
department, which shall have ultimate authority to act in 
the case. 

Academic Renewal 

Under certain circumstances, the university may disregard 
up to two semesters or three quarters of previous under- 
graduate course work taken at any college or university 
from all considerations associated with requirements for 
the baccalaureate. These circumstances are: 

1 . that the student has requested the action formally and 
has presented evidence that work completed in the 
terms under consideration is substandard and not rep- 
resentative of present scholastic ability and level of 
performance; and 

2. that the level of performance represented by the terms 
under consideration was due to extenuating circum- 
stances; and 

3. that there is every evidence that the student would find 
it necessary to complete additional terms to qualify for 
the baccalaureate if the request were not approved. 

Final determination that one or more terms shall be disre- 
garded in the determination of eligibility for graduation 


shall be based upon a careful review of evidence by the 
Review Committee for Academic Renewal and shall be 
made only when: 

1 . five years have elapsed since the most recent work to 
be disregarded was completed; and 

2. the student has completed at Fullerton, since the most 
recent work to be disregarded was completed, 1 5 semes- 
ter units with at least a 3.0 grade-point average, or 30 
semester units with at least a 2.5 GPA, or 45 semester 
units with at least a 2.0 GPA. Work completed at another 
institution cannot be used to satisfy this requirement. 

When such action is taken, the student’s permanent aca- 
demic record shall be annotated so that it is readily evident to 
all users of the record that no work taken during the disre- 
garded terms, even if satisfactory, may apply toward bacca- 
laureate requirements. All work must remain legible on the 
record ensuring a true and complete academic history. 

This policy is not intended to merely allow students a 
means by which they may improve their overall grade- 
point averages. 

Transcripts 

Official transcripts of courses taken at the university are 
issued only with the written permission of the student con- 
cerned. Partial transcripts are not issued. A fee of $4 for 
each transcript must be received before the transcript can 
be released. 

Normally, transcripts are available within three working days, 
except at the end of the semester when the student should 
allow about 10 days after the last day of the semester. 

Transcripts from other institutions, which have been pre- 
sented for admission or evaluation, become a part of the 
student’s permanent academic file and are not returned or 
copied for distribution. Students desiring transcripts cover- 
ing work attempted elsewhere should request them from 
the institutions concerned. 



Grading Policies 


Continuous Residency 

Regulations 



Good Standing 

Good standing indicates that a student is eligible to contin- 
ue and is free from financial obligation to the university. A 
student under academic disqualification, disciplinary sus- 
pension or disciplinary expulsion is not eligible to receive a 
statement of good standing on transcripts issued by the 
university or on other documents. 

Choice of Requirements 

A student remaining in continuous attendance in regular 
sessions and continuing in the same curriculum at any 
campus of the California community colleges or in any 
combination of California community colleges and cam- 
puses of The California State University may, for purposes 
of meeting graduation requirements, elect to meet the 
graduation requirements of such campuses from which he 
or she will graduate in effect either at the time of entering 
the curriculum or at the time of graduation therefrom, ex- 
cept that substitutions for discontinued courses may be 
authorized or required by the proper university authorities. 

Stop-Out Policy 

With certain exceptions, undergraduate students and 
postbaccalaureate unclassified students may be absent 
for one semester and maintain their continuing student 
status. This includes election of curriculum requirements 
for graduation and eligibility to register for the next semes- 
ter. The exceptions are as follows: 

Disqualified Students — Students who are disquali- 
fied at the end of a semester and have not been rein- 
stated will not receive registration materials; they 
must apply for readmission, and if admitted, may be 
subject to new curriculum requirements. 

Foreign-Visa Students — Students with foreign visas 
are required to maintain continuous enrollment. The 
stop-out policy is not applicable. 

Students absent for more than one semester must apply for 
readmission should they wish to return to Fullerton. In some 
cases, however, election of catalog requirements will not be 
jeopardized for certain students. Students should consult an 
evaluator in the Office of Admissions & Records. 


Leave of Absence 

A leave of absence may be granted based on certain docu- 
mented extenuating circumstances and normally is grant- 
ed for not more than one year. 


Continuous Residency Regulations 


Such an approved leave of absence authorizes the stu- 
dent to return without reapplying to the university and con- 
tinue under the catalog requirements that applied to the 
enrollment prior to the absence. 

Undergraduate and postbaccalaureate unclassified grad- 
uate students on approved leaves of one year (two aca- 
demic semesters) or less are eligible to register for the 
semester immediately following the end of the leave and 
will be mailed registration materials automatically. 

The leave of absence policy for conditionally classified and 
classified graduate students and credential students is de- 
fined in the “Graduate Regulations” section of this catalog. 

Withdrawal from the University 

A student who wishes to withdraw from the university dur- 
ing a semester must complete a Change of Program form 
and obtain the required approvals. See the section on 
refund of fees for possible refunds. No student may with- 
draw after the date shown on the university calendar as the 
last day of instruction. Complete withdrawal from the uni- 
versity is accomplished by following the procedures for 
dropping classes. 

Retention, Probation and 
Disqualification 

For purposes of determining a student’s ability to remain in 
the university both quality of performance and progress 
towards the educational objective will be considered. 

Academic Probation 

An undergraduate student shall be placed on academic 
probation if in any semester the cumulative grade-point 
average or the grade-point average at Fullerton falls below 
2.0 (grade of C on a four-point scale). The student shall be 
advised of probation status promptly and, except in unusu- 
al instances, before the start of the next consecutive en- 
rollment period. 

An undergraduate student shall be removed from academ- 
ic probation and restored to clear standing upon achieving 
a cumulative grade-point average of 2.0 in all academic 
work attempted, in all such work attempted at Fullerton, 
and is making satisfactory progress towards his or her 
educational objective. 

A postbaccalaureate student (credential, unclassified or 
undeclared status but not second baccalaureate degree 
students) shall be subject to academic probation if after 
completing 12 or more units his or her postbaccalaureate 
cumulative grade-point average for units attempted at 
California State University, Fullerton falls below a 2.50 
average. The GPA will determine whether a student is 
subject to probation only after the student has completed 
12 semester units. 

A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree program 
in either conditionally classified or classified standing shall 
be subject to academic probation if he or she fails to main- 


tain a cumulative grade-point average of at least 3.0 
(grade of B on a four-point scale) in all units attempted. 

Academic Disqualification 

An undergraduate student on academic probation shall be 
subject to academic disqualification if: 

1. as a lower-division student (fewer than 60 semester 
units of college work completed) he or she falls 15 or 
more grade points below a 2.0 average on all college 
units attempted or in all units attempted at this institu- 
tion; or 

2. as a junior (60 to 89 V 2 semester units of college work 
completed) he or she falls nine or more grade points 
below a 2.0 average on all college units attempted or in 
all units attempted at this institution; or 

3. as a senior (90 or more semester units of college work 
completed) he or she falls six or more grade points 
below a 2.0 average on all college units attempted or in 
all units attempted at this institution. 

A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree program 
shall be subject to disqualification if while on probation 
sufficient grade points are not achieved to remove proba- 
tionary status. Disqualification may be either from further 
registration in a particular program or from further enroll- 
ment in the university, as determined by appropriate cam- 
pus authority. 

A postbaccalaureate student who is on probation shall be 
subject to disqualification if he or she fails to earn at least a 
2.50 grade-point average each term after the completion 
of 12 units at California State University, Fullerton in post- 
baccalaureate status. Disqualification may be either from 
further registration as a postbaccalaureate, credential or 
certificate program student or from enrollment at California 
State University, Fullerton, as determined by the vice 
president for academic affairs or designee. 


Student Conduct 

The university properly assumes that all students are in 
attendance to secure a sound education and that they will 
conduct themselves as mature citizens of the campus 
community. Compliance with all regulations of the univer- 
sity is therefore expected. If, however, on any occasion a 
student or an organization is alleged to have compromised 
accepted university standards, appropriate judiciary pro- 
cedures shall be initiated through the established universi- 
ty process. Every effort will be made to encourage and 
support the development of self-discipline and control by 
students and student organizations. The vice president for 
student services, aided by members of the faculty, is re- 
sponsible to the president of the university for the behavior 
of students in their relationships to the university. The 
president in turn is responsible to the chancellor and the 
trustees of The California State University, who them- 
selves are governed by specific laws of the State of Cali- 
fornia. 


Continuous Residency Regulations 


Students have the right to appeal certain disciplinary ac- 
tions taken by appropriate university authorities. Regula- 
tions governing original hearings and appeal rights and 
procedures have been carefully detailed to provide maxi- 
mum protection to both the individual charged and the 
university community. 

If the issue cannot be resolved informally, students should 
consult with the coordinator of academic appeals. 

Inappropriate conduct by students or by applicants for ad- 
mission is subject to discipline as provided in Sections 
41301 through 41304 of Title 5, Code of Regulations. 
These sections follow. 

Article 1.1, Title 5, California Code of 
Regulations 

41301. Expulsion, Suspension and Probation of Stu- 
dents. Following procedures consonant with due process 
established pursuant to Section 41304, any student of a 
campus may be expelled, suspended, placed on probation 
or given a lesser sanction for one or more of the following 
causes which must be campus-related: 

(a) Cheating or plagiarism in connection with an aca- 
demic program at a campus. 

(b) Forgery, alteration or misuse of campus documents, 
records, or identification of knowingly furnishing false 
information to a campus. 

(c) Misrepresentation of oneself or of an organization to 
be an agent of a campus. 

(d) Obstruction or disruption, on or off campus property, 
of the campus educational process, administrative 
process, or other campus function. 

(e) Physical abuse on or off campus property of the per- 
son or property of any member of the campus com- 
munity or of members of his or her family or the threat 
of such physical abuse. 

(f) Theft of, or non-accidental damage to, campus prop- 
erty, or property in the possession of, or owned by, a 
member of the campus community. 

(g) Unauthorized entry into, unauthorized use of, or mis- 
use of campus property. 

(h) On campus property, the sale or knowing possession 
of dangerous drugs, restricted dangerous drugs, or 
narcotics as those terms are used in California stat- 
utes, except when lawfully prescribed pursuant to 
medical or dental care, or when lawfully permitted for 
the purpose of research, instruction or analysis. 

(i) Knowing possession or use of explosives, dangerous 
chemicals or deadly weapons on campus property or 
at a campus function without prior authorization of 
the campus president. 

(j) Engaging in lewd, indecent, or obscene behavior on 
campus property or at a campus function. 

(k) Abusive behavior directed toward, or hazing of, a 
member of the campus community. 


(l) Violation of any order of a campus president, notice 
of which had been given prior to such violation and 
during the academic term in which the violation oc- 
curs, either by publication in the campus newspaper, 
or by posting on an official bulletin board designated 
for this purpose, and which order is not inconsistent 
with any of the other provisions of this Section. 

(m) Soliciting or assisting another to do any act which 
would subject a student to expulsion, suspension or 
probation pursuant to this Section. 

(n) For purposes of this Article, the following terms are 
defined: 

(1 ) The term "member of the campus community” is 
defined as meaning California State University 
trustees, academic, non-academic and adminis- 
trative personnel, students, and other persons 
while such other persons are on campus proper- 
ty or at a campus function. 

(2) The term “campus property” includes: 

(A) Real or personal property in the possession 
of, or under the control of, the Board of 
Trustees of The California State University, 
and 

(B) All campus feeding, retail, or residence fa- 
cilities whether operated by a campus or by 
a campus auxiliary organization. 

(3) The term "deadly weapons” includes any instru- 
ment or weapon of the kind commonly known as 
a blackjack, sling shot, billy, sandclub, sandbag, 
metal knuckles, any dirk, dagger, switchblade 
knife, pistol, revolver, or any other firearm, any 
knife having a blade longer than five inches, any 
razor with an unguarded blade, and any metal 
pipe or bar used or intended to be used as a club. 

(4) The term "behavior” includes conduct and ex- 
pression. 

(5) The term "hazing” means any method of initi- 
ation into a student organization or any pastime 
or amusement engaged in with regard to such an 
organization which causes, or is likely to cause, 
bodily danger, or physical or emotional harm, to 
any member of the campus community; but the 
term "hazing” does not include customary athle- 
tic events or other similar contests or competi- 
tions. 

(o) This Section is not adopted pursuant to Education 
Code Section 89031. 

(p) Notwithstanding any amendment or repeal pursuant 
to the resolution by which any provision of this Article 
is amended, all acts and omissions occurring prior to 
that effective date shall be subject to the provisions of 
this Article as in effect immediately prior to such ef- 
fective date. 


Continuous Residency Regulations 


101 


41302. Disposition of Fees: Campus Emergency; In- 
terim Suspension. The President of the campus may 
place on probation, suspend, or expel a student for one or 
more of the causes enumerated in Section 41 301 . No fees 
or tuition paid by or for such student for the semester, 
quarter, or summer session in which he or she is suspend- 
ed or expelled shall be refunded. If the student is readmit- 
ted before the close of the semester, quarter, or summer 
session in which he or she is suspended, no additional 
tuition or fees shall be required of the student on account of 
the suspension. 

During periods of campus emergency, as determined by 
the President of the individual campus, the President may, 
after consultation with the Chancellor, place into immedi- 
ate effect any emergency regulations, procedures, and 
other measures deemed necessary or appropriate to meet 
the emergency, safeguard persons and property, and 
maintain educational activities. 

The President may immediately impose an interim sus- 
pension in all cases in which there is reasonable cause to 
believe that such an immediate suspension is required in 
order to protect lives or property and to insure the mainte- 
nance of order. A student so placed on interim suspension 
shall be given prompt notice of charges and the opportuni- 
ty for a hearing within 10 days of the imposition of interim 
suspension. During the period of interim suspension, the 
student shall not, without prior written permission of the 
President or designated representative, enter any campus 
of the California State University other than to attend the 
hearing. Violation of any condition of interim suspension 
shall be grounds for expulsion. 

41303. Conduct by Applicants for Admission. Notwith- 
standing any provision in this Chapter 1 to the contrary, 
admission or readmission may be qualified or denied to 
any person who, while not enrolled as a student, commits 
acts which, were he enrolled as a student, would be the 
basis for disciplinary proceedings pursuant to Sections 
41301 or 41302. Admission or readmission may be quali- 
fied or denied to any person who, while a student, commits 
acts which are subject to disciplinary action pursuant to 
Section 41301 or Section 41302. Qualified admission or 
denial of admission in such cases shall be determined 
under procedures adopted pursuant to Section 41304. 

41304. Student Disciplinary Procedures for The Cali- 
fornia State University. The Chancellor shall prescribe, 
and may from time to time revise, a code of student disci- 
plinary procedures for The California State University. 
Subject to other applicable law, this code shall provide for 
determinations of fact and sanctions to be applied for con- 
duct which is a ground for discipline under Sections 41301 
or 41302, and for qualified admission or denial of admis- 
sion under Section 41303; the authority of the campus 
president in such matters; conduct-related determinations 
on financial aid eligibility and termination; alternative kinds 
of proceedings, including proceedings conducted by a 
hearing officer; time limitations; notice; conduct of hear- 
ings, including provisions governing evidence, a record, 
and review; and such other related matters as may be 
appropriate. The chancellor shall report actions taken un- 
der this section to the board. 


Debts Owed to the University 

Should a student or former student fail to pay a debt owed 
to the university, the university may “withhold permission 
to register, to use facilities for which a fee is authorized to 
be charged, to receive services, materials, food or mer- 
chandise or any combination of the above from any person 
owing a debt” until the debt is paid (see Title 5, California 
Code of Regulations, Sections 42380 and 42381). For 
example, the institution may withhold permission to re- 
ceive official transcripts of grades for any person owing a 
debt. If a student believes that he or she does not owe all or 
part of an unpaid obligation, the student should consult the 
business office. The business office, or another office to 
which the student may be referred, will review the pertinent 
information, including information the student may wish to 
present, and will advise the student of its conclusions with 
respect to the debt. 

Student Rights 

Right of Petition 

Students may petition for review of certain university aca- 
demic regulations when unusual circumstances exist. It 
should be noted, however, that academic regulations when 
they are contained in Title 5, California Code of Regula- 
tions, are not subject to petition. 

Petition forms are available in the Office of Admissions 
and Records and must first be reviewed and signed by 
appropriate officers before being reviewed by the universi- 
ty petitions committee. This committee will take action on 
the petition and the student will be notified of the decision. 
Results of the action will be placed in the student’s folder in 
the Office of Admissions and Records. 

The petitions committee members shall consist of the as- 
sociate dean of each school, or designee, a professional 
staff member appointed by the director of admissions and 
records, the Director of Academic Advisement, one faculty 
member of the University General Education Committee, 
and the assistant registrar, who will serve as the secretary. 

Right of Noncompliance 

Certain university activities either within or outside of the 
classroom may involve varying degrees of risk to the partici- 
pants. It is university policy that the instructor directing such 
activities fully divulge to all potential participants the specific 
nature of such risks and obtain from them their expressed or 
implied consent prior to undertaking activities. 

The student who at any time comes to believe that the risks, 
whether physical or psychological, are excessive has the 
responsibility to withdraw from participation at the time and 
to inquire of the instructor if there are alternative means of 
fulfilling the requirements without penalty. If there is none, the 
student may petition for withdrawal from the course without 
penalty or appeal for an appropriate modification of the activ- 
ity. The appeal may be made either to the chair of the depart- 
ment concerned, or to the chair of the Committee on Activi- 
ties Involving Human Subjects, or both. 


Continuous Residency Regulations 


Right of Academic Appeal 

The right of due process, appeal and peer judgment is 
established by the Student Bill of Rights and Responsibil- 
ities for students who feel they have been treated capri- 
ciously or with prejudice by faculty or administrators. Stu- 
dents should make every effort to resolve the issue infor- 
mally by consulting the individual concerned, and if 
necessary the department chair and dean of the school. 

Students who still believe the problem has not been resolved 
should consult with the coordinator of academic appeals. 
Upon the student’s request, the coordinator will convene the 
Academic Appeals Board to hear the student’s complaint. 
Students must initiate the appeals process by contacting the 
faculty member and/or the department chair within one aca- 
demic month after they could reasonably be expected to be 
aware of the action in question. 

Copies of the governing documents are available in the 
Academic Appeals Office. 

Privacy Rights of Students 

The federal Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 
1974 (20 U.S.C. 1232g) and regulations adopted thereun- 
der (34 C.F.R. 99)and California Education Code Section 
67100 et seq., set out requirements designed to protect 
the privacy of students concerning their records main- 
tained by the campus. Specifically, the statute and regula- 
tions govern access to student records maintained by the 
university, and the release of such records. In brief, the law 
provides that the university must provide students access 
to official records related to them and an opportunity for a 
hearing to challenge such records on the grounds that they 
are inaccurate, misleading or otherwise inappropriate. The 
right to a hearing under the law does not include any right 
to challenge the appropriateness of a grade as determined 
by the instructor. The law generally requires that written 
consent of the student be received before releasing per- 
sonally identifiable data about the student from records to 
other than a specified list of exceptions. The institution has 
adopted a set of policies and procedures concerning im- 
plementation of the statutes and the regulations on the 
campus. Copies of these policies and procedures may be 
obtained from the Vice President for Student Services. 
Among the types of information included in the campus 
statement of policies and procedures are: (1) the types of 
student records and the information contained therein; (2) 
the official responsible for the maintenance of each type of 
record; (3) the location of access lists which indicate per- 
sons requesting or receiving information from the record; 


(4) policies for reviewing and expunging records; (5) the 
access rights of students; (6) the procedures for challeng- 
ing the content of student records; (7) the cost which will be 
charged for reproducing copies of records; and (8) the right 
of the student to file a complaint with the Department of 
Education. An office and review board have been estab- 
lished by the Department to investigate and adjudicate 
violations and complaints. The office designated for this 
purpose is: The Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act 
Office (FERPA), U.S. Department of Health, Education 
and Welfare, 330 C Street, Room 451 1 , Washington, D.C. 
20202 . 

The campus is authorized under the Act to release “directory 
information” concerning students. “Directory information” in- 
cludes the student’s name, address, telephone listing, date 
and place of birth, major field of study, participation in official- 
ly recognized activities and sports, weight and height of 
members of athletic teams, dates of attendance, degrees 
and awards received, and the most recent previous educa- 
tional agency or institution attended by the student. The 
above designated information is subject to release by the 
university at any time unless it has received prior written 
objection from the student specifying information that the 
student requests not be released. Written objections should 
be sent to the Vice President for Student Services. 

The campus is authorized to provide access to student 
records to campus officials and employees who have le- 
gitimate educational interests in such access. These per- 
sons are those who have responsibilities in connection 
with the university’s academic, administrative or service 
functions and who have reason for using student records 
connected with university or other related academic 
responsibilities. 

Use of Social Security Number 

Applicants are requested, but not required, to include their 
social security account number in designated places on 
applications for admission pursuant to the authority con- 
tained in Title 5, California Code of Regulations, Section 
41201 . The social security number is used as a means of 
identifying records pertaining to the student as well as 
identifying the student for purposes of financial aid eligibil- 
ity and disbursement and the repayment of financial aid 
and other debts payable to the institution. At Fullerton, 
student records are identified by a university-assigned stu- 
dent file number, not the social security number, though the 
latter is used in financial aids administration and in student 
payroll records. 


Continuous Residency Regulations 


103 



104 




Graduate 

Regulations 

The regulations contained herein are in addition to other 
policies and procedures applying to both undergraduates 
and graduates which may be found in the preceding sec- 
tion of this catalog and the class schedule. Also, individual 
schools, divisions and departments may have established 
particular rules governing programs offered. 

Since all policies and procedures are subject to change, by 
appropriate authority, students should consult class 
schedules and other official announcements for possible 
revision of policies and procedures stated herein. 



Graduate Regulations 


105 


Graduate Applications 

All applicants for any type of postbaccalaureate or gradu- 
ate standing (e.g., master’s degree applicants, those 
seeking credentials, and those interested in taking 
courses for personal or professional growth) must file a 
complete application within the appropriate filing period. 

Second baccalaureate degree candidates should apply 
as postbaccalaureate students with an undergraduate 
degree objective. A complete application for postbacca- 
laureate or graduate standing includes all of the forms and 
fees described in the application booklet, including the 
supplementary graduate admissions application. Appli- 
cants who completed undergraduate degree requirements 
and graduated the preceding term are also required to 
complete and submit an application and the nonrefund- 
able application fee. In the event that an applicant wishes 
to be assured of initial consideration by more than one 
campus, it is necessary to submit a separate application 
(including fee) to each. 

Applications may be obtained from the Office of Admis- 
sions and Records or the Graduate Studies Office of any 
California State University campus. Instructions for com- 
pleting the application forms are included in the material 
supplied. Since some programs require the completion of 
an additional form as part of the application process, stu- 
dents should inquire concerning this possibility at the of- 
fice of the academic unit offering the particular program. 

Transcripts 

When an applicant for graduate standing, with a master’s 
degree objective, a credential-only objective, or a master’s 
degree and credential objective, receives the application 
acknowledgement, requests should be submitted to all of 
the institutions of higher learning in which previously regis- 
tered, requesting that two official transcripts from each 
institution be sent to the university Admissions and Re- 
cords office. 

One copy of each transcript will be forwarded to the aca- 
demic unit offering the degree or credential program speci- 
fied by the student as the objective; and the other offical 
transcript will be retained for use by both the Admissions 
and Records Office and the Graduate Studies Office. 

Students who receive their baccalaureate degree at Cal 
State Fullerton and continuing graduate students who 
change their declared objective subsequent to admission 
must obtain whatever additional transcripts are needed to 
provide two complete sets of transcripts, but do not need to 
request Cal State Fullerton transcripts. 

Postbaccalaureate applicants with no degree or credential 
objective must submit a transcript from the college or uni- 
versity where the baccalaureate was earned. Further, one 
transcript from other institutions attended is required as 
necessary so that Cal State Fullerton has a complete re- 
cord of the last 60 semester units attempted prior to enroll- 
ment at Fullerton. 



Graduate Applications 


All transcripts must be received directly from the issuing 
institutions and become official records of the university; 
such transcripts therefore cannot be returned or reissued. 
Transcripts which include course work from other than the 
issuing institution are not sufficient evidence of course 
work taken elsewhere. Foreign language transcripts must 
be accompanied by certified English translations. 


Tests 

The Graduate Record Examination (GRE), or another test, 
may be required for conditionally classified admission, or 
subsequently for the granting of classified standing. Test 
requirements vary from department to department. Stu- 
dents should refer to master’s degree requirements out- 
lined by each department in the "Curricula” section of this 
catalog. Applications and information on test dates for 
nationally administered tests (e.g. GRE, GMAT) are avail- 
able in the Testing Center. 


TOEFL Requirement 

All graduate and postbaccalaureate applicants, regardless 
of citizenship, whose preparatory education was principal- 
ly in a language other than English, must demonstrate 
competence in English. Those who do not possess a bach- 
elor’s degree from a postsecondary institution where En- 
glish is the principal language of instruction must receive a 
minimum score of 550 on the Test of English as a Foreign 
Language (TOEFL). 


International Students 

See procedures outlined in the international student por- 
tion of the "Admissions Policies” section of this catalog. 

Second Master’s Degree or 
Concentration 

Students may wish to pursue a second master’s degree or 
concentration. Approval for admission to graduate standing 
in the second degree program or concentration may be given 
only after the first degree has been awarded. Units used for 
the first degree or concentration may not be applied to the 
second. Students who have completed a master’s degree at 
Cal State Fullerton in one concentration and wish to com- 
plete another will not be awarded a second degree. 

Nonaccredited Schools 

An applicant who is a graduate of a nonaccredited school 
must apply for admission as an undergraduate to complete 
requirements for a bachelor’s degree from this institution. 
However, once admitted, a student in this category who 
gives evidence of unusual promise and superior back- 
ground may petition for graduate standing as conditionally 
classified. If the petition is granted, the student may then 
proceed in the graduate program. If the petition is denied, 
the student may be requested to complete a specified 
number of undergraduate units in order to establish equi- 
valency to the bachelor’s degree or to complete require- 
ments for a bachelor’s degree at CSUF. For further infor- 
mation, contact the Graduate Studies Office. 


Graduate Applications 


107 


Graduate Admissions 


Following completion of application procedures and sub- 
sequent review of the student’s eligibility by the Admis- 
sions Office and appropriate academic unit, the student 
will be notified by the Admissions Office concerning ad- 
mission. Only a written notice from the Admissions Office 
is valid proof of admission. Academic advisement prior to 
admission is tentative and cannot be construed as grant- 
ing official admission to a program or establishing require- 
ments for the degree. 

Students may apply for a degree objective, a credential or 
certificate objective, or no program objective. Four admis- 
sion categories are defined in terms of these academic 
objectives. 

Postbaccalaureate Standing: 
Unclassified 

To qualify for admission with no degree objective, students 
must (1) hold an acceptable bachelor’s degree from a re- 
gionally accredited institution or have equivalent prepara- 
tion as determined by the appropriate campus authority; 
(2) have a grade point average of at least 2.5 (A = 4.0) in 
the last 60 semester (90 quarter) units; and (3) have been 
in good standing at the last college attended. In unusual 
circumstances, exceptions may be made to these criteria. 

Admission with postbaccalaureate-unclassified standing 
does not constitute admission to graduate degree or cre- 
dential programs. If a student wishes to change academic 
objective after admission, an application for change of 
objective must be filed in the Admissions Office. 

Postbaccalaureate Standing: 
Classified 

To qualify for admission with a credential or certificate 
objective, students must (1) meet the requirements for 
postbaccalaureate-unclassified standing and (2) satisfy 
any additional professional, personal, scholastic, and oth- 
er standards, including qualifying examinations. Refer to 
specific credential requirements under the departmental 
section of this catalog. 


Graduate Standing: 
Conditionally Classified 

To qualify for admission with a graduate degree objective, 
students must (1) meet the admission requirements for 
postbaccalaureate-unclassified standing and (2) meet any 
additional requirements of the particular program includ- 
ing a favorable recommendation from the academic unit. 

An applicant who has deficiencies in prerequisite prepara- 
tion or in grade-point average may be considered for ad- 
mission in conditionally classified standing with the ap- 
proval and recommendation of the appropriate campus 
authority. A student admitted in conditionally classified 
standing may subsequently be granted classified standing 
in an authorized graduate degree curriculum if profession- 
al, personal, scholastic, or other standards including quali- 
fying examinations are met. 

Graduate Standing: Classified 

Determination of the student’s prerequisites and assign- 
ment of courses, units, and grade points required to re- 
move deficiencies is made by the academic unit. For spe- 
cific information on prerequisites to classified standing, 
consult departmental program requirements. 

Classified standing is normally granted when all prerequi- 
sites have been satisfactorily completed, the official study 
plan formulated, and the recommendation made by the 
appropriate graduate adviser and committee to the Dean 
of Graduate Studies who gives final approval. An eligible 
student may be granted classified standing prior to the first 
registration or during the first semester of registration. 

No more than nine units of postgraduate work taken at this 
institution prior to classified standing will be applied to a 
master’s degree study plan. Any acceptable transfer work 
is excluded from the nine units permitted. 

It is the student’s responsibility to initiate the request for 
classified standing in the appropriate academic unit by 
making an appointment with the departmental graduate 
adviser. The student will be sent a copy of the approved 
study plan by the Graduate Studies Office. Copies will be 
filed in the academic unit, university records, and the Grad- 
uate Studies Office. A student is not officially classified 
until an approved study plan is on file in the Graduate 
Studies Office. 


108 


Graduate Admissions 


Requirements for the 
Master’s Degree 

To be granted the master’s degree, a student must have 
been classified, advanced to candidacy, and completed a 
satisfactory pattern of study in an approved field. Require- 
ments which apply to all programs follow. For specific re- 
quirements of particular programs, see the program de- 
scriptions in the departmental section of this catalog. 

Each student s program for a master’s degree (including 
eligibility, classified standing, candidacy, and award of the 
degree) must be approved by the graduate program advis- 
er, the graduate committee, and the Dean of Graduate 
Studies. 


'll 


University Writing Requirement 

Students working toward a master’s degree are required to 
demonstrate writing ability commensurate with the bacca- 
laureate degree. This requirement should be met within 
the first nine units of graduate work by successfully com- 
pleting one of the following: 

1 . An upper-division writing requirement at any CSU cam- 
pus. 

2. An upper-division course at another university equiv- 
alent to a course which meets the Cal State Fullerton 
requirement. Such equivalence must be certified by the 
department or program responsible for the student’s 
academic work. 

3. Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency. 

4. An upper-division or graduate-level course that is certi- 
fied as meeting the writing requirement and is ap- 
proved by the department or program responsible for 
the student’s academic work. The grade received must 
be a C or better. 

Any student who has not met the requirement within the 
first nine units of graduate work shall be required to enroll 
in a certified course at the earliest opportunity. 

Departments and programs may, at their discretion and 
with approval of the Graduate Education Committee, es- 
tablish additional writing requirements for their graduate 
students. For further information, students should consult 
their program adviser or the Graduate Studies Office. 


Study Plan 

General requirements for the master’s degree study plan 
include: 

1 . A minimum of 30 approved semester units, or more, 
as determined by the particular program. 


Requirements for the Master’s Degree 



2. A minimum of 21 semester units in residence (transfer 
and Cal State Fullerton extension or intersession 
course work are not considered to be in residence). 

3. A unit of course work taken at a college or university 
on the quarter system will be considered as equivalent 
to two-thirds of a unit when such course work is con- 
sidered acceptable as transfer work. See additional 
requirements for transfer credit under “Graduate En- 
rollment Policies.” 

4. Upper-division and graduate-level courses only. The 
inclusion of 300-level course work is generally dis- 
couraged. The graduate program adviser must submit 
to the Dean of Graduate Studies a written justification 
for any 300-level course work proposed for inclusion 
on the study plan unless it is an existing program 
requirement. 

5. Not less than one-half of the total units in graduate 
(500-level) courses. 

6. Not more than six semester units for a thesis, if a 
thesis is required. 

7. A maximum of six units of independent study (excep- 
tions subject to approval by the appropriate school 
dean). 

8. No courses taken to satisfy prerequisite requirements 
included in the minimum of 30 units. 

9. None of the following: correspondence courses, credit 
by examination, or similar. 

1 0. No courses with nontraditional grades (e.g., CR, S, P). 

1 1 . A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 (B) in all courses 
attempted to satisfy requirements for the degree. 

12. All courses completed within five years of the date of 
award of the degree or satisfactorily validated. 

13. All courses taken after the baccalaureate (or postbac- 
calaureate credit granted) and not credited toward 
another degree. 

14. A final evaluation, which may be a thesis, a project, a 
comprehensive examination, or any combination of 
these. 

The approved study plan is valid as long as the student 
maintains continuous enrollment in regular semesters at 
the university; otherwise it is necessary to reapply and 
meet any changed or additional requirements approved in 
the interim. 

Election of Curriculum 

A student remaining in continuous attendance in regular 
semesters and continuing in the same curriculum may 
elect to meet the degree requirements in effect either at 
the time of entering the curriculum or at the time of comple- 
tion of degree requirements, except that substitution for 
discontinued courses may be approved by the graduate 
program adviser. 


Advisers and Committees 

University policy provides that each student’s program for 
the master’s degree shall be under the guidance of an 
adviser and committee. In some areas a graduate program 
adviser has been designated to give overall supervision for 
the graduate program. In others, the graduate program 
adviser also serves as the individual student’s adviser. The 
student’s adviser is usually a member of the committee. 
The committee is responsible for all major recommenda- 
tions to the Dean of Graduate Studies regarding the stu- 
dent’s achievement of classified standing, advancement to 
candidacy, and completion of the master’s degree. 

It is the responsibility of the student to arrange appoint- 
ments for advisement and other information in the office of 
the academic unit offering the degree program. As a mini- 
mum, the student should obtain advisement (1 ) either prior 
to or during the first semester of attendance, (2) when 
requesting classified standing, and (3) when applying for a 
graduation check prior to the final semester. 

It is advisable for the student to maintain a personal file of 
transcripts and other evidences of grades and achieve- 
ments, and to carry these whenever seeking advisement. 


Advancement to Candidacy 

A student who has been granted classified standing is 
normally advanced to candidacy after a request is filed for 
graduation by the student and an affirmative recommen- 
dation made by the graduate program adviser. A minimum 
grade-point average of 3.0 (B) for all study plan course 
work is required; other scholastic, professional and per- 
sonal standards, the passing of examinations, and other 
qualifications, may be prescribed. Only those students 
who continue to demonstrate a satisfactory level of scho- 
lastic competence and fitness, as determined by the ap- 
propriate authorities, shall be eligible to continue in gradu- 
ate programs. 

Completion of Requirements 
and Award of Degree 

The degree is awarded upon the satisfactory completion of 
all state and university requirements, the specific require- 
ments for the particular program, the recommendation of 
the appropriate graduate adviser and committee (ad- 
vancement to candidacy), and the approval of the faculty 
and the Dean of Graduate Studies. It is highly recommend- 
ed that all work for the degree, except final course exami- 
nations, be submitted by the last day of classes, in order to 
assure granting of the degree by the end of the semester 
or session. 

If a thesis is required, it must be deposited in the Titan 
Bookstore in accordance with the instruction shown under 
“Theses and Projects,” no later than the last day of final 
examinations for the semester or session in which the 
degree is to be awarded. 


Requirements for the Master’s Degree 


It is the student’s responsibility to file an application for a 
graduation check and pay the graduation and diploma fee 
prior to the beginning of the final semester. Forms are 
available at the Admissions and Records information 
counter, the Graduate Studies Office, and the Records 
Office graduation unit. 

The application for graduation initiates review of degree 
requirements and formal approval by the faculty as well as 
serving as a diploma order The last date to file the appli- 
cation is listed in the academic calendar of the class 
schedule for each regular semester. Candidates for Au- 
gust graduation must file their requests prior to registration 
for the spring semester. 

Students who fail to complete requirements as planned 
must update the application for a graduation check and do 
so by the appropriate deadline. An additional fee may be 
required. 

Since Cal State Fullerton is on the semester basis, mas- 
ter’s degree programs are ordinarily completed in January 
and June. A student who wishes to complete requirements 
during the summer must obtain written approval prior to 
summer term on a form available in the Graduate Studies 
Office. The approved form must be returned to Graduate 
Studies during the spring semester. 

The effective date of graduation will be the last day of the 
specific term in which requirements are completed. 

Commencement ceremonies are held only at the end of 
the spring semester. Students completing requirements at 
the end of the fall and spring semesters and during the 
following summer may participate in those ceremonies. 
Information concerning commencement activities is sent 
to students by the Registrar during the final semester. Ar- 
rangements for cap, gown and hood rental are made in the 
Titan Bookstore. 

Time Limit for Completion 

All requirements for the master’s degree, including all 
course work on the student’s study plan, normally should 
be completed within five years. This time limit commences 
with the semester of the earliest course used on the stu- 
dent’s study plan and consists of a total of ten (10) con- 
secutive semesters. When individual circumstances war- 
rant, this time limit may be extended for up to two years 
(four additional consecutive semesters). 


A student may request an extension of the five year time 
limit by filing a petition with the Graduate Studies Office. 
The petition must contain a full explanation of the circum- 
stances which prevented completion of the degree re- 
quirements within the normal five-year limit and must be 
approved (signed) by the graduate program adviser, the 
chair of the appropriate graduate committee and the Dean 
of Graduate Studies. Approvals for extension must be ob- 
tained prior to the expiration of the five-year limit. 

Outdated course work (course work older than the stu- 
dent’s approved time limit; i.e., normally five years but with 
approval may be a maximum of seven years) must be 
repeated. A maximum of nine (9) units of course work may 
be exempt from this policy if it can be validated. Copies of 
the “Petition for Validating Outdated Coursework” may be 
obtained from the Graduate Studies Office. Validation is 
allowed at the discretion of the graduate program adviser, 
the academic unit offering the subject course and the Dean 
of Graduate Studies. Validation must be accomplished by 
passing a written comprehensive test of the materials cov- 
ered by the course being validated or by some equivalent 
method with prior approval of both the graduate program 
adviser and the Dean of Graduate Studies. Any outdated 
course work which cannot be validated either because of a 
denial of the petition or because it is in excess of the nine 
units allowed for validation, must be repeated or updated 
through the use of additional study plan course work. If 
course work is repeated or additional course work is re- 
quired to update, the units and grades will be added to the 
study plan. 

NOTE: Outdated transfer course work cannot be validated. 


Changes in Study Plan 

If a classified graduate student wishes to make a change in 
the approved study plan, a request should be made to the 
appropriate graduate program adviser. Requests must be 
made prior to registration for any course work to be substitut- 
ed or added. No course may be removed from the study plan 
after a student has taken it. Forms which may be used to file 
a request are available in the Graduate Studies Office. 

Changes in study plan may also be warranted by outdated 
coursework or grade-point average (see “Time Limit for 
Completion” and “Grade-point Average Standards”). 


Requirements for the Master’s Degree 


Graduate Enrollment Policies 

Consult previous sections of this catalog and the class 
schedule for other information and regulations relating to 
registration and enrollment. 


Residence Requirement 

A student is considered to be in residence when registered 
during regular semesters at this university. Of the minimum 
of 30 semester units of approved course work required for 
the master’s degree, not less than 21 shall be completed in 
residence at this institution. Approved units earned in 
summer sessions may be substituted for regular semester 
unit requirements on a unit for unit basis. Extension or 
intersession course work may not be used to fulfill the 
minimum residence requirement. 


Continuous Enrollment 

A graduate student with a graduate degree objective 
should maintain continuous enrollment during regular se- 
mesters (summer sessions and extension excluded) until 
award of the degree. This policy is designed to eliminate 
the need for readmission to the university, provide opportu- 
nity for continuous use of facilities, including the Library, 
and assure the development of an integrated program, 
adequately supervised, and effectively terminated within 
the time limitations allowed by regulations. 

Unless granted an approved leave of absence, a graduate 
student who fails to register each semester has discontin- 
ued enrollment in the graduate degree program. If the 
student wishes to resume studies, it will be necessary to 
reapply for admission to the university and to the degree 
program and meet any changed or additional require- 
ments approved in the interim. 

Students who may have completed all course work, but 
who may not have satisfactorily completed a comprehen- 
sive examination or other requirement, are expected to 
maintain continuous enrollment until award of the degree. 

A graduate student who finds it impossible to attend during 
a certain semester and is not eligible for a leave of ab- 
sence, must register in Graduate Studies 700. Registra- 
tion in this course is restricted to conditionally classified or 
classified graduate students. It carries no unit credit and 
does not require class attendance. Registration in this 
course in each semester when no other course work is 
taken will be necessary until award of the degree. 

Similarly, Credential Studies 701 is available for students 
with a credential-only objective who find it impossible to en- 
roll in course work and are not eligible for a leave of absence. 



Graduate Enrollment Policies 


Leave of Absence 

Graduate degree or credential students may request a leave 
of absence for up to one year. Conditionally classified or 
classified graduate students qualify for a leave if they are in 
good academic standing and have completed at least six 
credit hours’ work toward the degree in residence at Cal 
State Fullerton. Students with a credential-only objective 
qualify if they have completed at least one semester of 
course work in good academic standing. Forms to request a 
leave of absence are available at the Admissions and Re- 
cords information counter or in the Graduate Studies Office. 

Any one of the following circumstances may be grounds for 
requesting a leave of absence: 

1 . Illness or disability (permanent or temporary) or similar 
personal exigencies including pregnancy which make it 
impossible or inadvisable for a student to register for 
classes. 

2. Activities which enhance a student’s professional ca- 
reer objectives. 

3. Active duty in the armed forces of the United States. 

4. Other reasons at the discretion of the Dean of Graduate 
Studies. 

After review by the Graduate Studies Office, the academic 
unit (where applicable), and the Registrar’s Office, a re- 
sponse is mailed to the student. 

A first-time leave of absence of one semester only will 
normally be granted upon request for students who qualify 
and will not require an application for readmission to the 
university. Registration materials for the semester follow- 
ing the leave will be sent to the student. 

Students requesting a subsequent leave or a leave longer 
than one semester are required to provide appropriate 
documentation (e.g., doctor’s recommendation, verifica- 
tion of employment). Such requests must also be en- 
dorsed by the program adviser. A leave granted for more 
than one semester does not reserve a place for the student 
at this university. An application for admission must be filed 
in order to be readmitted and permitted to enroll when the 
leave terminates. 

A leave granted to a degree objective student preserves 
the election of curriculum rights regarding catalog require- 
ments. However, leaves of absence do not change the time 
limit for completion of the degree. For credential students, 
a leave granted by the University does not exempt them 
from new requirements imposed by the State regardless of 
the catalog year and also does not extend time limitations 
imposed by the State for completing specific teaching cre- 
dential requirements. 

Study Load 

Graduate students must carry a study load of 12 units of 
course work a semester or nine units of which six are in 
500-level courses for full-time enrollment certification by 


the university. A normal full-time load in summer session is 
one and one-third units per week of instruction. The maxi- 
mum study load for students working toward a master’s 
degree is 12 units per semester; in exceptional cases, 
however, a student may take more with the approval of the 
graduate program adviser. 

Enrollment in Extended 
Education Programs 

In addition to its regular academic programs, the university 
offers a number of courses through its extended education 
program. These include the summer session, the exten- 
sion program and adjunct enrollment (a program permit- 
ting those who are not formally enrolled to take regular 
university courses). 

The applicability of credit earned through courses taken in 
any of the programs sponsored by the Office of Extended 
Education is subject to approval by the graduate program 
adviser and Dean of Graduate Studies. 

Summer Sessions 

Appropriate courses taken during the summer session 
may be applied to a graduate degree program, providing 
the courses are approved in advance. 

Extension 

No more than nine units of credit earned in the university 
extension program (including intersession course work) 
may be applied to a graduate degree. Consultation with a 
graduate adviser before taking an extension course is 
strongly recommended. 

It should be noted that enrollment in summer session or 
extension courses does not constitute admission to the 
university or enrollment as a continuing student in the uni- 
versity. Any student desiring a master’s degree must be 
admitted to a regular semester (fall or spring). 

Enrollment in 500-Level 
Courses by Seniors 

Undergraduate students may enroll in graduate level 
courses (500 level) if they: 

a. have reached senior status (i.e., completed a minimum 
of 90 semester units) 

b. have the academic preparation and prerequisites re- 
quired for entry into the course 

c. gain the consent of the instructor. 

Students wishing to use 500-level course work taken dur- 
ing their undergraduate degree toward a master’s degree 
should read the following section on Postgraduate Credit. 

Postgraduate Credit 

A graduate student may petition for a maximum of nine 
units of postgraduate credit for course work (either 400 or 
500 level) taken during the undergraduate degree if: 


Graduate Enrollment Policies 


113 


a. the course work was not used to meet any of the uni- 
versity’s requirements for the baccalaureate degree 
(including major, minor or concentration) 

b. the course work was taken during the final two semes- 
ters prior to the student’s graduation 

c. approved by the registrar of the appropriate university. 

Petition forms are available at the Admissions and Re- 
cords information counter. If approved, appropriate nota- 
tions will be entered on the student’s permanent record. 

The use of postgraduate course work on a student s gradu- 
ate study plan is governed by the general regulations for 
all graduate degrees and must be approved by the pro- 
gram adviser, the appropriate graduate committee and the 
Dean of Graduate Studies. 

Transfer Credit Policy 

Graduate students may be able to use a limited amount of 
transfer course work in meeting the requirements for a 
master’s degree. The use of transfer course work on a 
student’s study plan is subject to the following provisions: 

1. The course work being transferred must: 

a. have been taken at an accredited college or univer- 
sity. 

b. be acceptable for credit toward a graduate degree 
at the institution where the course work was taken. 

c. have been completed with a grade of B or better. 


d. not have been used in meeting the requirements for 
another earned degree (either graduate or under- 
graduate). 

e. have been completed within the student’s five-year 
time period which is required for completion of the 
requirements for the master’s degree at 
CSUF. 

2. An absolute minimum of 21 semester units toward any 
master’s degree at CSUF must be in residence units. 
For master’s degrees requiring more than 42 semester 
units, a minimum of half of the units used on the stu- 
dent’s study plan must be in residence units. Residence 
units include regular courses and extension courses 
offered as special sessions. 

3. Use of transfer work on a student’s study plan is subject 
to all other policies concerning study plan course work; 
e.g., fifty percent must be graduate level work, no corre- 
spondence course work, no credit by examination, no 
courses with nontraditional grades. 

4. In all cases, the use of transfer course work on a stu- 
dent’s study plan is subject to the acceptance and ap- 
proval of the academic unit’s graduate adviser and the 
Dean of Graduate Studies. Course work taken at an- 
other institution after admission to CSUF as a graduate 
student is rarely accepted for credit toward a master’s 
degree and can only be accepted if the student has 
received prior approval of both the graduate adviser 
and the Dean of Graduate Studies. 

5. Total approved transfer units and grade points will be 
entered on the CSUF transcript at graduation. 



Graduate Enrollment Policies 



Graduate Academic Standards 


Graduate study deals with more complex ideas and de- 
mands more sophisticated techniques, searching analy- 
sis, and creative thinking than undergraduate study. The 
research required is extensive in both primary and secon- 
dary sources and the quality of writing expected is high. 
The student is advised to consider these factors when 
deciding upon the amount of course work to be undertaken 
during any one semester. 


Grade-Point Average Standards 

Prerequisites 

The grade-point average required for prerequisites prior to 
classified standing varies according to the particular pro- 
gram. See requirements in departmental sections of this 
catalog. 

Study Plan 

Grade-point averages are calculated by dividing grade 
points earned by units attempted. The 30 or more semes- 
ter units of approved study plan course work, including 
transfer work, required for the degree must be completed 
with a 3.0 (B) minimum grade-point average. If a student 
approaches the completion of the degree requirements 
with less than a 3.0 average, a request may be made for a 
change in the study plan to add no more than six units of 
course work in order to achieve at least a 3.0. Requests for 
course work to be added to the study plan must be ap- 
proved by the graduate program adviser and Dean of 
Graduate Studies prior to registration (see “Changes in 
Study Plan”). If the grade-point average at any time falls 
below such a level that it cannot be raised to a 3.0 within 
the prescribed limits of course work, this has the effect of 
withdrawing the student from the master’s degree pro- 
gram. 

If permission is given to repeat a course, and the course is 
successfully repeated, both grades are considered in com- 
puting grade-point averages. However, successful repeti- 
tion of a course originally passed carries no additional unit 
credit toward a degree. 

University 

A graduate degree student is expected to earn a 3.0 aver- 
age in all postbaccalaureate course work taken at this 
university. Exception to this rule may be granted only if 
courses for which grades are not to be computed in the 
GPA have never been part of the student’s study plan for 
the degree, and if it is evident that they are inapplicable 
and inappropriate to the degree program. 


Academic Probation and 
Disqualification 

A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree program 
in either conditionally classified or classified graduate 
standing is subject to academic probation if a cumulative 
grade-point average of at least 3.0 (grade of B on a four- 
point scale) is not maintained. 

If sufficient grade points to remove probationary status are 
not earned while on probation, the student is subject to 
disqualification. Disqualification will prevent further regis- 
tration in a particular program or further enrollment in the 
university, as determined by appropriate campus authority. 

A graduate student may also be placed on probation or 
may be disqualified for unsatisfactory scholastic progress 
regardless of cumulative grade-point average. Such ac- 
tions may be due to repeated withdrawal, failure to pro- 
gress toward an educational objective, and non-compli- 
ance with an academic requirement. 

A postbaccalaureate student (credential, unclassified, or 
undeclared status) shall be subject to academic probation 
if after completing 12 or more units, the cumulative grade- 
point average falls below a 2.5 average. A postbaccalaure- 
ate student on probation shall be subject to disqualifica- 
tion if at least a 2.50 grade-point average is not earned 
each term after the completion of 12 units in postbacca- 
laureate status. Disqualification may be either from further 
registration toward a postbaccalaureate credential or cer- 
tificate program, or from further enrollment in the universi- 
ty as determined by the appropriate campus authority. 

Declassification 

Graduate students in classified graduate standing shall be 
declassified upon the recommendation of the appropriate 
academic unit, with a change to postbaccalaureate stand- 
ing, unclassified, when one or more of the following condi- 
tions exist: 

1 . The student’s request for declassification has been rec- 
ommended for approval by the graduate committee. 

2. The student fails to maintain the grade-point average 
required in the master’s degree program. 

3. The student has failed to demonstrate a satisfactory 
level of scholastic competence and fitness. 

4. The student fails to complete the degree within the 
prescribed time limit. 

A recommendation for declassification is sent to the Grad- 
uate Studies Office by the graduate program adviser for 
the particular degree. 


Graduate Academic Standards 


115 


Theses and Projects 


Definition 

A thesis is defined as the written product of a systematic 
study of a significant problem. It identifies the problem, states 
the major assumptions, explains the significance of the un- 
dertaking, sets forth the sources for and methods of gather- 
ing information, analyzes the data, and offers a conclusion or 
recommendation. The finished product evidences originality, 
critical and independent thinking, appropriate organization 
and format, and thorough documentation. Normally, an oral 
defense of the thesis is required. 

A project is a significant undertaking appropriate to the fine 
and applied arts or to professional fields. It also evidences 
originality and independent thinking, appropriate form and 
organization, and a rationale. It is described and summa- 
rized in a written abstract that includes the project’s signifi- 
cance, objectives, methodology and a conclusion or recom- 
mendation. An oral defense of the project may be required. 


Annual Thesis Award 

An award of $300 along with an engraved plaque will be 
given each year to the student whose thesis represents the 
highest standard of scholarly accomplishment as deter- 
mined by a panel of judges chosen from emeriti profes- 
sors. Interested students should contact the Graduate 
Studies Office or their program adviser for further informa- 
tion on eligibility and deadlines. Finalists from each school 
may also be recommended for Honorable Mention by the 
judges; these will receive a certificate of Honorable Men- 
tion and a cash award. 


General Regulations 

Of the minimum of 30 semester units of approved course 
work required for the master’s degree, no more than six 
are allowed for a thesis. 



When a thesis is required, the Library is to be provided with 
the approved original copy, or a fully acceptable duplicated 
copy, in the approved binding, and an acceptable microfilm 
of it. An abstract accompanies the thesis and will normally 
be published in the University Microfilms International 
journal, Masters Abstracts. Copies are thereby made 
available for order by interested scholars. 

When a project is required, it will be filed with the academic 
unit offering the degree program. Some record of the pro- 
ject, or the project itself, is preserved in the academic unit 
and, when appropriate, in the Library. When the appropri- 
ate authority recommends, a project or its written record 
may be treated as a thesis. 


Theses and Projects 


Although a minimum of three faculty members supervise 
and approve the thesis, it is possible for a qualified person 
who is not a regular university faculty member to serve as 
a visiting examiner and join in the approval of the written 
record. This person serves as the fourth member of the 
committee. 

Title to theses (and projects when treated as theses, as 
above) passes to the university upon their acceptance by 
the evaluating faculty. 

Variations from procedures and regulations should be re- 
ferred to the Office of Graduate Studies for approval. 

Format Guidelines and Style 
Manuals 

All-university format guidelines are included in a thesis 
manual which has been developed to assist the student in 
preparation of a thesis or a project which is to be treated as 
a thesis. Copies are available in the Office of Graduate 
Studies. It is the student's responsibility to make certain 
that the requirements are met. The student is strongly 
advised to become familiar with the instructions in the 
manual. Theses from the library or departmental offices 
should not be used as examples of correct format. 

The academic unit, through the student’s adviser and/or 
committee, is responsible for the academic content and 
English usage in the thesis and for the student’s correct 
use of forms of documentation and bibliography. In addi- 
tion to the university format guidelines, each academic unit 
may select a supplementary style manual to be followed in 
matters of documentation and bibliography. Students 
should consult their academic program adviser or thesis 
committee chair concerning the style manual used. 

If the supplementary style manual presents regulations 
which conflict with the all-university format guidelines pub- 
lished in the thesis manual, the university regulations take 
precedence. 

Some graduate programs require style manuals or guides 
designed for journal articles. Although these are helpful for 
abbreviations, tables, figures and footnoting, as well as other 
purposes, students should be aware of the difference be- 
tween a thesis and an article and make appropriate adapta- 
tions, approved by the graduate program adviser. 

If the academic unit does not recommend a specific style 
manual, the student should refer to A Manual for Writers of 
Term Papers, Theses, and Dissertations (Fifth Edition) by 
Kate L. Turabian. 

Thesis Typists 

The student makes all necessary arrangements for the 
typing of the thesis. A list of thesis typists is available in the 
Office of Graduate Studies. The university Career Devel- 
opment Center also maintains a listing of students and 
others who have indicated their availability for typing as- 
signments. An experienced typist is strongly advised, al- 
though the university does not endorse or recommend 
individual typists. 


Deadlines 

Adequate time should be allowed for typing, reading and 
approval by the adviser, the committee members, and the 
university thesis reader. 

It is recommended that the academic area sponsoring the 
degree program require that the final version of the thesis 
be submitted for approval at least six weeks prior to the last 
day of classes of the appropriate semester. The deadline 
for submission to the university thesis reader is two weeks 
prior to the last day of classes. For summer completion, 
the student should check with the academic unit and the 
Office of Graduate Studies for appropriate deadlines. The 
Office of Graduate Studies must receive notification from 
the Titan Bookstore by the last day of final examinations for 
the appropriate semester or session that the thesis has 
been deposited there and the fees paid. Ample time should 
be allowed for any special arrangements, such as duplica- 
tion of the thesis by the Titan Bookstore or elsewhere, prior 
to the deadline. 


Final Procedures 

1 . Approval Signatures: When the final draft is completed, 
the student obtains signatures on the approval page of all 
of the members of the committee. The title/approval page 
may be photocopied onto the correct paper stock; howev- 
er, the signatures must be original. Photocopied signa- 
tures are not acceptable for binding or microfilming. The 
signatures must be in black ink. If there is a disagreement 
within the committee concerning the acceptability of the 
thesis, the approving signatures of a majority of the com- 
mittee will be sufficient. Nonavailability of one member of 
the committee is not an adequate reason for acceptance 
of signatures by less than the full committee. No changes 
or additions will be allowed after the final signatures have 
been obtained. The student should arrange for at least 
three original title pages to be signed by the committee 
members. (Two originals are submitted to the bookstore 
with the thesis or project; one may be the student’s per- 
sonal copy or be used for the departmental copy.) 


2. University Thesis Reader: The thesis is ready for re- 
view by the university thesis reader after the faculty 
have signed off and the thesis has been typed in its final 
form. One unbound copy of the thesis including the 
original approval page is taken to the Office of Graduate 
Studies for review by the thesis reader for conformity to 
all-university format guidelines. The copy submitted to 
the Graduate Studies Office may be a photocopy pro- 
vided it is copied on the correct paper stock. The stu- 
dent, graduate program adviser, and thesis committee 
chair will be notified of any revisions or corrections 
which need to be made. Final approval on format is 
given by the Office of Graduate Studies on the “Thesis 
Approval Form.” 


Theses and Projects 


3. Binding and Microfilming: The student takes the ap- 
proved copy of the thesis, two signed title and approval 
pages, and the signed Thesis Approval Form to the Titan 
Bookstore and pays the appropriate fees. The bookstore 
arranges for the binding of the thesis by a local bindery 
and other services by University Microfilms International 
(UMI). Once submitted and receipted, the thesis may not 
be withdrawn by the student from the Titan Bookstore. 
The Titan Bookstore sends the approved original or dupli- 
cated copy (including the original signed approval page) 
to University Microfilms International for filming and publi- 
cation of the abstract, and upon its return sends it to the 
bindery. 

An agreement is normally completed for UMI to publish 
the abstract in Masters Abstracts, prepare a negative 
microfilm, and sell microfilm or xerographic copies to in- 
terested scholars. The university will accept alternative 


methods of microfilming, duplication of printed copies and 
binding, subject to the specifications on file in the Gradu- 
ate Studies Office. Arrangements for copyrighting are 
also possible, if desired, through UMI. 

4. Notification for Award of the Degree: The grade for the 
thesis is reported in the usual manner to the office of 
the registrar by the appropriate faculty. The Titan Book- 
store notifies the Office of Graduate Studies that the 
approved thesis has been deposited, the fees paid, and 
the agreement for microfilming and publication of the 
abstract completed by the student. 

5. Depositing of Thesis in Library: When the thesis is re- 
turned by the bindery, the bound copy is deposited for 
circulation in the library. One set of the slides or sepa- 
rately mounted illustrative material is housed with the 
bound copy. The second set is placed in the university 
archives with the microfilm copy. 


Theses and Projects 


Steps in the Master’s Degree 


There may be additional steps for individual students in 
particular programs; for these, consult the program de- 
scription and the academic unit (school, department or 
program) offering the degree program. 

• Action initiated by student (as indicated below) 

1. Admission to Graduate Standing: Conditionally Classi- 
fied 

• Apply for admission 

• Declare objective(s), using precise codes on the ap- 
plication form 

• Receive application acknowledgement from the Ad- 
missions Office 

• Request two sets of official transcripts of all previous 
college-level course work attempted to be sent to 
Admissions Office 

• Take tests, if required by program, and order test 
scores sent to Cal State Fullerton, designating ap- 
propriate academic unit on the test registration form 

• Consult appropriate academic unit for advisement 

• Provide appropriate academic unit with any other 
supporting statements or materials, as required 

Recommendation for admission made by academic 
unit to Admissions Office 

Receive notification of admission from Admissions Of- 
fice 

2. Graduate Standing: Classified 

• Complete any course prerequisites and/or remove 
deficiencies 

• Apply for classified standing in the academic 
area offering the particular program prior to 
completion of nine units of study plan course 
work 

• Consult appropriate academic unit for advisement, 
including development of official study plan 

• Provide appropriate academic unit with any other 
supporting statements or materials, as shown in 
program descriptions in this catalog 

• Take tests if required by program, and order test 
scores sent to Cal State Fullerton, designating ap- 
propriate academic unit on the test registration form 

Recommendation made by academic unit to the Dean 
of Graduate Studies 

Receive notification of classified standing being grant- 
ed from Graduate Studies when the study plan is sent, 
showing approval by the Dean of Graduate Studies. 


• If not received within a reasonable length of time, 
call the academic unit sponsoring the degree or 
Graduate Studies. 

3. Completion of Requirements 

• Apply for a graduation check and advancement 
to candidacy prior to the beginning of the final 
semester and no later than the deadline initiat- 
ing university review and formal approval by fac- 
ulty. The form is available at the Admissions and 
Records information desk, the Graduation Unit and 
the Graduate Studies Office. A graduation and di- 
ploma fee must be paid when filing request with the 
university cashier. 

• Consult appropriate academic unit for advisement 

• Complete written and/or oral examination, if re- 
quired 

• Complete thesis or project, if applicable 

• Obtain approval of committee 

• Obtain approval of university thesis reader (the- 
sis only) 

• Deposit approved copy of thesis and make arrange- 
ments for binding, microfilming and publication of 
the abstract in the Titan Bookstore by the applicable 
deadline 

Final, approved study plan, with recommendation, 
sent by appropriate academic unit to Dean of Gradu- 
ate Studies 

Preliminary approval, pending adequate grades, 
and completion of any other requirements, granted 
by Dean of Graduate Studies. 

• Complete all general and specific requirements, 
other than final course examinations, by the last day 
of classes, in order to assure granting of the degree 
by the end of the semester 

Final verification of completion of requirements sent 
by the Graduate Studies Office to the registrar 

Receive notification of award of degree from regis- 
trar approximately six weeks after the end of the 
semester 

4. Commencement 

• Make appropriate arrangements for cap, gown and 
hood rental in Titan Bookstore 

Commencement information sent by the Registrar’s 
Office 


Steps in the Master’s Degree 






Academic Programs 



121 


Degree Programs 

California State University, Fullerton offers the following 
baccalaureate degree programs which are described on 
the pages listed: 


B.A. American Studies 344 

B.A. Anthropology 348 

B.A. Art 161 

B.F.A. Art 161 

B.A. Biological Science 453 

B.A. Business Administration 206 

B.A. Chemistry 461 

B.S. Chemistry 461 

B.S. Child Development 289 

B.A. Communications 243 

B.A. Communicative Disorders 250 

B.A. Comparative Literature 360 

B.S. Computer Science 261 

B.A. Criminal Justice 357 

B.A. Economics 214 

B.S. Engineering 266 

B.A. English 360 

B.A. Ethnic Studies (with option in Afro-Ethnic studies 

and Chicano studies) 341 

B.A. French 370 

B.A. Geography 387 

B.S. Geology 469 

B.A. German 370 

B.A. History 394 

B.S. Human Services 318 

B.A. International Business with a concentration in 
French, German, Japanese, Portuguese or Spanish 223 

B.A. Latin American Studies 401 

B.A. Liberal Studies 404 

B.A. Linguistics 406 

B.A. Mathematics 474 

B.A. Music 173 

B.M. Music 173 

B.S. Nursing 323 

B.A. Philosophy 413 

B.S. Physical Education 309 

B.S. Physics 481 

B.A. Political Science (including concentration in public 

administration) 418 

B.A. Psychology 426 

B.A. Religious Studies 434 

B.A. Russian & East European Area Studies 439 

B.A. Sociology 443 

B.A. Spanish 370 

B.A. Special Major 153 

B.A. Speech Communication 250 

B.A. Theatre Arts 186 


! 


The following master’s degree programs are offered: 


M.S. Accountancy 200 

M.A. American Studies 344 

M.A. Anthropology 348 

M.A. Art 161 

M.F.A. Art 161 

M.A. Biology 453 

M.B.A. Business Administration 206 

M.S. Chemistry 461 

M.A. Communications 243 

M.A. Communicative Disorders 250 

M.A. Comparative Literature 360 

M.S. Computer Science 261 

M.S. Counseling 292 

M.A. Economics 214 

M.S. Education (with concentrations in bilingual/bi- 
cultural education [Spanish-English], elementary 
curriculum and instruction, reading, educational ad- 
ministration, special education and teaching English 

to speakers of other languages) 287 

M.S. Engineering 266 

M.A. English 360 

M.S. Environmental Studies 368 

M.A. French 370 

M.A. Geography 387 

M.A. German 370 

M.A. History 394 

M.A. Linguistics 406 

M.S. Management Science 232 

M.A. Mathematics 474 

M.A. Music 173 

M.M. Music 173 

M.S. Physical Education 309 

M.A. Political Science 418 

M.A. Psychology 426 

M.S. Psychology (Clinical/Community) 426 

M.P.A. Public Administration 418 

M.A.T. Science 489 

M.A. Social Sciences 441 

M.A. Sociology 443 

M.A. Spanish (including emphasis in bilingual 

studies) 370 

M.A. Interdisciplinary Studies 153 

M.A. Speech Communication 250 

M.S. Taxation 200 

M.A. Theatre Arts 186 

M.F.A. Theatre Arts (with concentrations in Acting, 
Directing, and Technical Theatre and Design) . 186 


Degree Programs 


Graduation Requirements 
for the Bachelor’s Degree 



Unit Requirements 

A. Total Unit Requirements 

The minimum number of semester units necessary for a 
bachelor’s degree, exclusive of remedial courses (i.e. 


course numbered 0-99) is as follows: 

1. For the Bachelor of Arts degree 124 

2. For the Bachelor of Fine Arts degree 132 

3. For the Bachelor of Science degree 124-132 

4. For the Bachelor of Nursing degree 128 

5. For the Bachelor of Science in Engineering 

degree 135 

6. For the Bachelor of Music degree 132 

B. Upper-Division Requirement 


A minimum of 40 semester units of upper division 
coursework is required for any CSUF bachelor’s degree. 
Courses offering upper division credit are those numbered 
at the 300- and 400-levels. 

All units from upper division courses are applicable to the 
upper division units requirement, including units from 
courses in the major, the minor, and general education. 

C. Special Unit Totals 

The maximum number of special semester units accepted 


for a bachelor’s degree is as follows: 

1 . Transferable units from community or junior 

colleges . 70 

2. Transferable units from a four-year university or 

college or from a combination of two and four-year 
institutions 94 

3. From credit by examination 30 

4. From extension & correspondence courses 24 

5. From credit/no credit courses 36 

6. From Reading Skills courses numbered at the 

1 00- and 200-levels 4 

7. From Internship courses 6 

8. From Independent Study courses 9 


Graduation Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree 


Residence Requirement 

A minimum of thirty (30) semester units must be earned in 
courses taken at California State University, Fullerton. 
Twenty-four (24) of these units must be earned in upper 
division courses. At least twelve (12) upper division se- 
mester units in the major must be taken at this institution. 
Courses taken in extension (except for summer session 
and intersession courses offered as part of the special 
sessions program) and units earned through credit by ex- 
amination may not be used to fulfill these requirements. 

Grade Point Average 
Requirements 

Three grade point averages, each 2.0 or higher, are re- 
quired for graduation: 

A. An average based on all units attempted, including 
those attempted at other institutions. 

B. An average based on all units attempted at CSUF. 

C. An average based on all units attempted in the major. 

Distribution of Requirements 

A. General Education 

A minimum of 51 semester units are needed to complete 
CSUF’s general education requirements. See the “Gener- 
al Education” section of this catalog. 

B. Major 

The unit requirements in a major varies substantially from 
major to major. Some majors require as little as 36 semes- 
ter units while others require as much as 105 units. Refer 
to the Department listings for the specific requirements of 
any particular major. 

C. Upper-Division Baccalaureate Writing 
Requirement 

The university requires that every person completing 
bachelor’s degrees under 1980-81 and later catalog re- 
quirements, demonstrate writing ability acceptable for 
graduation. The upper-division writing requirement has 
two parts; students must satisfy each: 

Upper-division course requirement: Each major re- 
quires that students pass a specially designated upper- 
division course or courses of at least three semester 
units. Examination requirement: The university faculty 
requires that each student pass the University Examina- 
tion in Writing Proficiency (EWP), which has been de- 
signed to measure writing ability. 

Courses. The University Board on Writing Proficiency 
must certify the course or courses that each major depart- 
ment designates to fulfill the requirement. Departments 
and programs may specify either a single course of at least 
three units which involves intensive instruction in writing, 


or two or more courses (a total of at least six units) in which 
students are required to write one or more lengthy papers, 
or several shorter ones, which involve the organization and 
expression of complex ideas. In these courses students 
will be given careful and timely evaluations of their writing 
and suggestions for improvement. An assessment of writ- 
ing competence will be included in determining the final 
course grade. 

Students must pass these courses with a grade of C or 
better. A list of courses designated for each major will 
appear in the class schedule each semester. 

Examination. After completing 60 units toward the baccalau- 
reate, students must take the University Examination in Writ- 
ing Proficiency (EWP). The EWP consists of two parts, a 
machine-scored test of Standard Written English, and a 90- 
minute essay which is evaluated by faculty readers. Students 
who fail the examination may retake it until they pass it. A 
limited number of students who have failed the EWP two or 
more times may enroll in English 199, Intensive Writing Re- 
view. Credit in English 199 will be equivalent to passing the 
examination. This course will not count toward graduation 
requirements, nor will it satisfy the upper division writing 
course requirement described above. Information about reg- 
istration for the EWP and testing dates is published in the 
class schedule each semester. 

Petitions. In certain cases, students may petition the Uni- 
versity Board on Writing Proficiency for exemption from or 
modification of the requirement. 

1 . Transfer students and candidates for a second bacca- 
laureate may be certified as meeting the requirement 
after they have submitted to the Board acceptable evi- 
dence of having completed the equivalent to CSUF’s 
upper division requirement. 

2. Students may petition for substitution of an alternative to 
the EWP when exceptional circumstances, e.g. a clinical- 
ly identified learning disability, make the examination in- 
appropriate. Petitions must include documentation of the 
special circumstances and propose specific alternative 
means of demonstrating writing proficiency. 

D. Minors 

A minor is not required for the baccalaureate; however, 
students may elect to complete one or more minors from 
those available and have that noted on their records. A 
minor consists of an academic program specified by the 
academic departments in the catalog. In completing the 
requirements for a minor, a minimum of twelve (1 2) units, of 
which at least six (6) must be upper division, must be 
distinct and different from the units used to complete the 
requirements of the major. Any units above this minimum 
requirement which can be used to satisfy both the require- 
ments for the minor and for the major may be double 
counted. General education courses, however, may be 
used to meet minor requirements. 


Graduation Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree 


E. Electives 

After fulfilling the requirements in general education, and a 
specific major (and possibly a minor), each student is free 
to choose the rest of the courses needed to complete the 
semester units required for graduation. Different majors 
vary considerably in both the number of units they require 
in their own and related fields. They also vary considerably 
in the amount of latitude or choice they permit in selecting 
courses to satisfy the major requirement. The general edu- 
cation requirement encourages freedom of choice within 
the natural sciences, social sciences, arts and humanities, 
and basic subjects. Students at the university use their 
electives to broaden their general education, deepen 
some aspect of their specialties, pursue work in related 
fields, and satisfy curiosities and enthusiasms for particu- 
lar subjects or areas of interest. 

Advisement on general education and electives is pro- 
vided by the Academic Advisement Center. 

F. Multiple Majors and Second 
Baccalaureate Degrees 

Within the units required for the baccalaureate it is possi- 
ble for a student to complete the requirements for more 
than one major within a degree program when the addi- 
tional major is within the degree of the first major. At least 
24 units, including 12 at the upper-division level, in each 
bachelor of arts major, or 36 units, including 18 at the 
upper-division level, in each bachelor of science major, 
must be applied exclusively to the respective major and 
may not be used to meet requirements in other majors or in 
general education. The student shall declare the addition- 
al major with the appropriate department not later than the 
beginning of the student’s final year of study. The comple- 
tion of additional majors will be noted at the time of gradu- 
ation by appropriate entries on the academic record and in 
the commencement program. 

It is also possible for a student to complete a major in one 
degree program and an additional major from a different 
program, provided the minimum units described in the pre- 
ceding paragraph are applied exclusively to the respective 
major and are not used in other majors or in general edu- 
cation. In this instance, the student has the option of which 
degree he or she will receive with the major appropriate to 
that degree. The completion of the additional major will be 
noted on the student’s academic record. The university 
does not award two degrees to the individual who com- 
pletes multiple majors in a four-year degree program. 

Second baccalaureate degrees: 

First degree completed elsewhere, second at Fullerton. 
Students seeking a bachelor’s degree from Fullerton after 
having received a baccalaureate from another institution 
may qualify for graduation with the approval and recom- 
mendation of the faculty upon completion of the following: 

(1) General Education requirements: Students holding a 
baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution 
will be held to (a) the breadth requirements of Execu- 
tive Order 338, i.e. 1 2 units in each of the areas of arts 
and humanities, social sciences, and math and sci- 
ence, (b) the statutory requirements and (c) the En- 
glish Writing Proficiency requirements. Students will- 
not be held to specific CSUF categories or courses. 


(2) all requirements in the major field of study 

(3) residence and scholarship requirements 

Two baccalaureates from Fullerton. With the approval and 
recommendation of the faculty, a student may qualify for a 
second baccalaureate under the following circumstances: 

(1 ) a minimum of 30 units beyond the awarding of the first 
degree have been earned 

(2) a minimum of 24 upper-division units are included 
among the 30 units mentioned above 

(3) a minimum of 12 units must be offered by the depart- 
ment in which the second degree is being sought 

(4) two or more degrees may not normally be awarded at 
the same time 

Units included in second baccalaureate programs may not 
apply to graduate degrees or credential programs. 

Graduation Requirement Check 

A candidate for graduation must file an application for a 
graduation requirements check during registration week 
for the semester prior to the semester in which the student 
expects to graduate. The graduation and diploma fee is 
required when the application is filed. Application forms 
are available at the Admissions and Records information 
counter and in the graduation unit. 

Candidates for the baccalaureate should refer to the se- 
mester class schedule for application filing dates. A senior 
should have completed at least 100 units (including the 
current work in progress) and a substantial portion of the 
major requirements before requesting a graduation check. 
If the candidate does not complete the requirements in the 
semester indicated, a change of graduation date must be 
filed in the Office of Admissions and Records. 

Faculty Approval and 
Recommendation 

Under provisions of the Academic Senate, the Office of 
Admissions and Records publishes a list of degree candi- 
dates twice a year: in the fall and in the spring (for both 
spring and summer graduates). After review and approval 
by the faculty, and upon verification of the completion of 
requirements, diplomas are issued with the last day of the 
respective term as the official date of graduation. 

Annual commencement exercises are held at the end of 
the spring semester for those who completed degree re- 
quirements mid-year and for those completing degree re- 
quirements in the spring semester or summer session. The 
president of the university, with the authority of the Board of 
Trustees, confers all degrees, subject to the completion of 
remaining requirements. 

Note: Students completing bachelor degree requirements 
who wish to continue their studies at the university for 
postbaccalaureate or graduate degree objectives must ap- 
ply for admission declaring their new objective. 


Graduation Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree 


General Education 


General Education Objectives 

The general education-breadth requirements are de- 
signed so that, taken with the major-depth program and 
electives presented by each baccalaureate candidate, 
they will assure that graduates have made noteworthy 
progress toward becoming truly educated persons. Par- 
ticularly, the purpose of these requirements is to provide 
means whereby graduates: 

A. will have achieved the ability to think clearly and logi- 
cally, to find and critically examine information, to com- 
municate orally and in writing, and to perform quantita- 
tive functions; 

B. will have acquired appreciable knowledge about their 
own bodies and minds, about how human society has 
developed and how it now functions, about the phys- 
ical world in which they live, about the other forms of 
life with which they share that world, and about the 
cultural endeavors and legacies of their civilization; 

C. will have come to an understanding and appreciation 
of the principles, methodologies, value systems, and 
thought processes employed in human inquiries. (Ex- 
ecutive Order 338) 

General Education 
Requirements 

All students beginning studies fall 1 987 or later must com- 
plete a minimum of 51 semester units of general education 
courses selected in accordance with the pattern designat- 
ed on the following pages. General education courses 
must be selected from an approved list and taken for a 
letter grade. Students should refer to the latest university 
Schedule of Classes for the most up-to-date list of ap- 
proved classes. A student who has a break in enrollment 
for more than one semester in any calendar year may be 
liable for new catalog requirements. 

Students must complete at least nine units of upper-division 
(i.e. 300- or 400-level) general education course work taken 
after the student has achieved junior standing (i.e. 60 units). 
At least nine units of general education must be earned in 
residence at California State University, Fullerton. 

A grade of C or better must be earned for each course in 
Basic Subjects: Oral Communication (I.A.), Written Com- 
munication (I.B.), Critical Thinking (I.C.), Reading (option- 
al) (I.D.), and Mathematics (III.A.4.). All general education 
courses must be taken on a grade option 1 basis (A, B, C, 

D. F). An option 2 (credit/no credit) course may be used for 
general education if that is the only grade option for the 
course. Consult the course description in the departmental 
sections of this catalog for grade option information on a 
specific course. 



126 


General Education 




Courses offered by the department of the student s major 
may not be used to fulfill the unit requirement of categories 
III or IV with the exception of categories offering choices 
from only one department. Courses which are cross-listed 
meet general education category requirements for all ma- 
jors except those in the home department of the cross- 
listed course. The “home” department is the one under 
which the course description appears in the catalog. For 
example, Anthropology is the “home” department for An- 
thropology/Religious Studies 305; hence, it may not be 
used by an Anthropology major to meet general education 
requirements. Also, no more than nine units from any sin- 
gle department may be used in meeting the requirements 
of general education. Upper-division courses offered by 
the department of the student’s major may not be used for 
general education credit. 

At least three (3) semester units of Cultural Diversity 
course work must be taken from among the asterisked 
courses in Section IV. At least one laboratory course must 
be taken from among the courses marked with a dagger (t) 
in Sections III.A.1., III.A.2., or III.A.3. 

Among the following list of requirements a few courses 
appear in more than one category. These courses may be 
used to fulfill the requirements of only one, and not both, of 
the categories within which they appear. 

A score of T145 or higher on the English Placement Test 
(EPT), or completion of English 99 with a grade of C or 
better, is a prerequisite for enrollment in courses in cate- 
gory I.A.2. Written Communication, for all students except 
those with an exemption. 

A score of 480 or higher on the Entry Level Mathematics 
(ELM) examination is a prerequisite for enrollment in 
courses in Category II.A.4. Mathematics for all students 
except those with an exemption. 

Certification Policy 

Under provisions of Executive Orders 338 and 342, 
accredited colleges and universities may certify the com- 
pletion of part of the 48-51 units required in general educa- 
tion. Within the policy of the Board of Trustees, Cal State 
Fullerton will accept such certification of general educa- 
tion up to a maximum of 39 semester units, but may accept 
no more in general education than the number of units 
required in each area and no more than 30 units in areas in 
which the student has not been certified. 

Transfer students who are certified in any category with 
fewer than the required units will be subject to additional 
units and will be permitted to take the additional units in 
upper-division categories. 

California Articulation Numbers 

California State University, Fullerton is authorized to 
cross-reference certain courses with California Articula- 
tion Number (CAN). This is a system of equating courses 
between campuses in California. It is used by an increas- 
ing number of community colleges and four-year universi- 


ties and colleges to identify some of the transferable, intro- 
ductory courses in several academic disciplines. 


The system assures students that CAN courses noted in the 
catalog of one campus will be accepted in lieu of the compa- 
rable CAN course on another participating campus. An ex- 
ample is our Anthropology 101 Introduction to Biological An- 
thropology; CAN ANTH 2 is accepted in lieu of courses 
similarly marked in other university or college catalogs. 


The California Articulation Numbers are listed in parenthe- 
ses by the course descriptions in the catalog. A listing of 
courses currently approved for CAN follows: 


California 
Articulation 
Number 
CAN ANTH 2 

CAN ANTH 4 

CAN ART 8 

CAN ART 10 

CAN BIOL 4 

CAN ENGL 2 

CAN ENGL 20 
CAN GOVT 2 
CAN HIST 8 
CAN HIST 10 

CAN JOUR 4 

CAN MATH 2 

CAN MATH 18 

CAN MATH 20 

CAN MATH 22 

CAN PHYS 2 

CAN PHYS 4 

CAN PHYS 8 

CAN PSY 2 

CAN SOC 2 

CAN SPCH 4 


Cal State Fullerton Courses 

Anthro 101 Introduction to Biological 

Anthropology 

Anthro 102 Introduction to Cultural 
Anthropology 

Art 107A Beginning Drawing and 
Painting 

Art 107B Beginning Drawing and 
Painting 

Biological Science 261 Principles of 
Zoology 

English 101 Beginning College 
Writing 

English 206 Introduction to Poetry 
Poli Sci 100 American Government 


History 170A United States to 1877 

History 1 70B United States Since 
1877 

Comm 233 Mass Communication in 
Modern Society 

Mathematics 110 Mathematics for 
Liberal Arts Students 


Mathematics 150A Analytic 
Geometry and Calculus 

Mathematics 1 50B Analytic 
Geometry and Calculus 

Mathematics 250A Intermediate 
Calculus 

Physics 21 1 A 21 1 AL Elementary 
Physics 

Physics 21 1 B 21 1 BL Elementary 
Physics 

Physics 225A 225AL Fundamental 
Physics: Mechanics + Lab 

Psychology 101 Introductory 
Psychology 

Sociology 101 Introduction to 
Sociology 

Speech Comm 102 Public Speaking 


General Education 


127 


Honors Program 

The General Education Honors Program offers students 
many of the benefits of education at a small college in the 
midst of the rich resources of a large university. Courses in 
the program provide challenging learning experiences in 
small classes, individual attention from professors and 
closer interaction with other students. 

In honors sections of general education courses, students 
are encouraged to contribute to discussion and to develop 
ideas in an active, imaginative and original way. For this 
reason, classes are small, averaging twenty students per 
class. Teachers contribute by making creative use of cur- 
ricular materials in their course design and in the assign- 
ments they give to students. They interact personally and 
intensively with each student and encourage students to 
interact with each other. These courses do not simply de- 
mand a greater quantity of work. They create a situation in 
which the student will naturally tend to do better work than 
in regular general education course sections. 

The General Education Honors Program also gives stu- 
dents an opportunity to earn recognition for distinguished 
academic performance in general education courses. Stu- 
dents who successfully complete the requirements for 
honors in general education will have a notation placed on 
their transcript. 

Eligibility for Entrance 

Eligibility for participation in the General Education Hon- 
ors Program is determined by each student’s prior aca- 
demic performance. Academic achievement in high school 
or college serves as the prerequisite for admission to the 
honors courses. 

Those eligible for entrance into honors sections include (1 ) 
first-time freshmen with a high school g.p.a. of 3.5 or better 
and (2) continuing students with an collegiate g.p.a. of 3.0 
or better. 

Exceptions to the above policy may be made with the 
consent of the honors course instructor and the authoriza- 
tion of the honors program coordinator. 

Entrance to the Program 

Students should declare their intent to pursue the General 
Education Honors Program by submitting a formal letter of 
application to the honors program coordinator. The letter 
should include the student’s name, current address and 
phone number, high school or college grade-point aver- 
age, and a paragraph stating the reasons for pursuing the 
program. The letter or request for application should be 
directed to the coordinator of the General Education Hon- 
ors Program. 

Requirements for Completion 

Completion of the General Education Honors Program is 
based entirely on satisfactory performance in designated 


honors sections of general education courses. These 
course sections are officially designated in the class 
schedule by an “H” after the course number. Honors sec- 
tions are offered for the following courses (not all are of- 
fered every semester): 

American Studies 201 
American Studies 301 
American Studies 450 
Anthropology 100 
Anthropology 101 
Anthropology 102 
Anthropology 415 
Art 101 

Biological Science 101 
Chemistry 120A 
Comparative Literature 110 
Comparative Literature 1 1 1 
Economics 100 
English 110 
English 111 
English 200 
Geol Sciences 101 
History 1 1 0A 
History 1 1 0B 

To complete the honors program, a student must (1) com- 
plete 30 units of general education honors courses with a 
grade of C or better in each course and (2) accomplish a 
g.p.a. of 3.25 or better for all general education honors 
courses attempted. With approval of the honors program 
coordinator, up to six units of advanced placement credit 
with a score of 4 or higher may be substituted for general 
education honors credit. 

Students are responsible for requesting a review of their 
records to verify completion. Upon verification, a notation 
will be made on the student’s transcript indicating comple- 
tion of the program. 

Transfer Course Work 

Students transferring into CSUF who have taken honors 
courses at another accredited institution may apply those 
courses to the General Education Honors Program. 

The following stipulations apply to the transfer of courses: 

1 . The course is used in partial fullfillment of CSUF gener- 
al education requirements. 

2. The course is designated and acknowledged as an 
honors course by the institution where the course was 
taken. 

3. The course was completed with a grade of B or better. 

4. A maximum of nine units of transfer honors courses 
may be applied toward completion of the honors pro- 
gram. 

Any questions concerning the Honors Program should be 
directed to the coordinator of the General Education Honors 
Program. 


History 430 
Mathematics 110 
Mathematics 150A 
Music 100 
Music 350 
Philosophy 100 
Philosophy 110 
Philosophy 115 
Philosophy 116 
Philosophy 200 
Philosophy 210 
Philosophy 310 
Political Science 100 
Political Science 350 
Psychology 101 
Religious Studies 110 
Sociology 456 

Speech Communication 102 


128 


General Education 


CSUF GENERAL EDUCATION CATEGORIES AND 
COMMUNITY COLLEGE EQUIVALENT CATEGORIES 

Community College 
Category 

I. Basic Subjects (9 units minimum) 

NOTE: Grade of C or better required in each section of category I and III.A.4. 

A. Oral Communication (3 units minimum) A-1 

B. Written Communication (3 units minimum) (Prerequisite: EPT) A-2 

C. Critical Thinking (3 units minimum) A-3 

D. Reading none 

II. Historical and Cultural Foundations (12 units minimum) 

A. The Development of Civilization (6 units minimum) 

1. Western Civilization to the Renaissance C-6 

2. Western Civilization since the Renaissance D-6 

B. American History, Institutions and Values (6 units minimum) 

1. American History (3 units minimum) D-5/F-1 

2. Government (3 units minimum) F-2 

III. Disciplinary Core Courses (21 units minimum) 

A. Mathematics and Natural Science (12 units minimum)* 

1. Physical Science (3 units minimum) B-1 

2. Biological Science (3 units minimum) B-2 

3. Alternatives in the Natural Sciences none 

* At least one laboratory course B-3 

4. Mathematics (3 units minimum) (Prerequisite: ELM) B-4 

NOTE: Grade of C or better required in section III.A.4. 

B. Arts and Humanities (6 units minimum) 

1. Introduction to the Arts (3 units minimum) C-1 

2. Introduction to the Humanities (3 units minimum) C-2 thru C-4 

C. Social Sciences (3 units minimum) 

1. Introduction to the Social Sciences (3 units minimum) D-1 thru D-4 

IV. Implications, Explorations and Life-Long Learning (9 units minimum) 

A. Implications and Explorations (6 units minimum)** 

1. Implications/Explorations/Participatory Experience in the Arts and Humanities (3 units minimum) C-1 thru C-5 

2. Implications/Explorations in the Social Sciences (3 units minimum) D-1 thru D-5 

**At least one asterisked Cultural Diversity course C-7/D-7 

B. Life-Long Learning (3 units minimum) E 


General Education 


I. BASIC SUBJECTS (9 units minimum) 

NOTE: A grade of “C” or better is required in sections I.A., 
I.B., and I.C. and III.A.4. 

A. Oral Communication (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area are designed to impart skills in the use 
of human symbolic interaction, focusing on effective 
speaking. 

Choices: 


Chicano Studies 102 
Speech Comm 1 00 

Speech Comm 1 02 
Theatre 1 1 0 


Communication Skills (3) 
Introduction to Human 
Communication (3) 

Public Speaking (3) 
Introduction to Oral 
Interpretation (3) 


B. Written Communication (3 units minimum) 

The course in this area is designed to impart skills in orga- 
nizing, analyzing, and expressing thoughts and concepts 
in standard written English. Students must pass the En- 
glish Placement Test prior to enrolling in the course. 

English 101 Beginning College Writing (3) 

C. Critical Thinking (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area are designed to develop skills in criti- 
cal thinking, including the ability to distinguish fact from 
judgment and belief from knowledge, to reason inductively 
and deductively, and to understand the formal and informal 
fallacies of language and thought. 

Choices: 


English 103 
Philosophy 200 
Philosophy 210 
Psychology 110 

Reading 290 

Speech Comm 235 


Critical Reasoning and Writing (3) 
Argument and Reasoning (3) 
Logic (3) 

Reasoning and Problem 
Solving (3) 

Critical Reading as Critical 
Thinking (3) 

Essentials of Argumentation and 
Debate (3) 


D. Reading Communication 


The course in this area is designed to impart skills in the 
use of human symbolic interaction, focusing on effective 
reading. 

Reading 201 Academic Reading: Analysis & 

Strategies (3) 


II. HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL 
FOUNDATIONS (12 units minimum) 

A. The Development of Civilization (6 units minimum) 

Courses in this area give a holistic view of the development 
of society — its values, traditions, and institutions. 

History 1 10A Western Civilization to the 16th 

Century (3) 

AND 

History 1 10B Western Civilization Since the 

16th Century (3) 


B. American History, Institutions and Values (6 units 
minimum) 

Courses in this section meet Title 5, section 40404, re- 
quirements by providing “comprehensive study of Ameri- 
can history and American government including the his- 
torical development of American institutions and ideals, 
the Constitution of the United States and the operation of 
representative democratic government under the Consti- 
tution, and the process of state and local government.” 

1. American History (3 units minimum) 

Choices: 

Afro-Ethnic 190 Survey of American History with 
Emphasis on Ethnic Minorities (3) 
American Studies 201 Introduction to American 
Studies (3) 

Chicano Studies 190 Survey of American History with 
Emphasis on Ethnic Minorities (3) 
History 1 70A United States to 1 877 (3) 

History 170B United States Since 1877 (3) 

History 180 Survey of American History (3) 

History 190 Survey of American History with 

Emphasis on Ethnic Minorities (3) 

NOTE: Students who take History 170A must also take 
History 170B and vice versa. 

2. Government (3 units minimum) 

Political Science 100 American Government (3) 

NOTE: Transfer students from outside the State of Califor- 
nia who have ALREADY completed a basic course in 
American Government may substitute Political Science 
300 Contemporary Issues in California Government and 
Politics (3) for Political Science 100. 


III. DISCIPLINARY CORE COURSES (21 
units minimum) 

A. Mathematics and Natural Sciences (12 units) 

At least one laboratory course must be taken in III.A.1., 
III. A. 2., or III. A. 3. Approved laboratory courses are indicat- 
ed with a dagger (t). 

1. Physical Science (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area provide the content and methodology 
that form the bases for studies in the physical sciences. 
Choices: 


Chemistry 1 00 
Chemistry 1 0OLt 
Chemistry 115t 

Chemistry 120At 
Geological Sci 101 
Geological Sci 1 01 L+ 
Physics 123 

Physics 1 23L+ 

Physics 211 A 
Physics 21 1 ALt 
Physics 225A 

Physics 225ALt 


Survey of Chemistry (3) 

Survey of Chemistry Lab (1) 
Introductory General 
Chemistry (4) 

General Chemistry (5) 

Physical Geology (3) 

Physical Geology Lab (1) 
Perspectives of Man’s Physical 
Universe (3) 

Perspectives of Man’s Physical 
Universe Lab (1) 

Elementary Physics (3) 
Elementary Physics Lab (1) 
Fundamental Physics: 
Mechanics (3) 

Fundamental Physics: Lab (1) 


130 


General Education 


2. Biological Science (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area provide the content and methodology 
that form the bases for studies in the biological sciences. 

Choices: 

Biological Sci 101 Elements of Biology (3) 

Biological Sci 1 01 Lt Elements of Biology (1) 

Biological Sci 131Lt Principals of Biology (3) 


3. Alternatives in Natural Sciences and Mathematics 


Courses in this area are topical and thematic specialized 
inquiries into the contributions of the sciences and math- 
ematics. These courses have a substantial scientific and / 
or mathematical content. In addition, they are either intro- 
ductory to the major subdisciplines or they relate science 
and/or mathematics to significant social problems or other 
related disciplines. 


Choices: 

Anthropology 101 

Anthropology 375 
Biological Sci 300 
Biological Sci 305 

Biological Sci 306 
Biological Sci 310 
Biological Sci 31 1 
Biological Sci 313 
Biological Sci 314 
Biological Sci 317 

Biological Sci 319 
Biological Sci 319Lt 
Biological Sci 323 

Biological Sci 352 
Biological Sci 353 
Biological Sci 353Lt 
Biological Sci 360 
Biological Sci 367 

Chemistry 1 1 1 
Chemistry 31 1 
Chemistry 321 
Computer Sci 313 
Computer Sci 381 
Geography 110 

Geography 1 20 
Geological Sci 1 20 
Geological Sci 1 20Lt 
Geological Sci 1 40 
Geological Sci 201 
Geological Sci 310 

Geological Sci 333 
Geological Sci 335 
Geological Sci 340 
Geological Sci 376 


Introduction to Biological 
Anthropology (3) 

Science in Archaeology (3) 
Environmental Biology (3) 

Human Heredity & 

Development (3) 

Biology of Aging (3) 

Human Physiology (3) 

Nutrition & Disease (3) 

Human Genetics (3) 

Human Issues in Genetics (1) 
Wildlife Conservation: Current 
Issues and Future Directions (1) 
Marine Biology (3) 

Marine Biology Lab (1) 

Biology of Sexually Transmitted 
Diseases (STD) (1) 

Plants and Life (3) 

Principles of Horticulture (2) 
Principles of Horticulture Lab (1) 
Biology Of Human Sexuality (1) 
Insects & The Human 
Ecosystem (3) 

Nutrition & Drugs (3) 

Nutrition & Disease (3) 
Molecules & Life (3) 

The Computer Impact (3) 
Knowledge Engineering (3) 
Principles of Physical 
Geography (3) 

Environment and Change (3) 
Introduction to Earth Science (3) 
Earth Science Lab (1) 

Earth’s Atmosphere (3) 

Earth History (4) 

Topics in California Related 
Geology (1-3) 

Oceanography (3) 

General Hydrology (3) 

General Meterology (3) 

Applied Geology (3) 


History 230 
History 321 
History 430 

Philosophy 303 

Philosophy 384 

Philosophy 386 
Physical Sci 100 

Physics 1 00 

Physics 1 05 

Physics 107 

Physics 200 
Physics 384 

Sociology 303 

Speech Comm 303 


Ascent of Man (3) 

Molecules and Life (3) 

History of Science: Copernicus to 
the Present (3) 

Introduction to Philosophy of 
Science (3) 

Philosophy of the Physical 
Sciences (3) 

Philosophy of Biology (3) 

Man and His Physical 
Environment (4) 

Man and His Physical 
Environment (4) 

Fads & Fallacies in the Name of 
Science (1) 

Nuclear Energy and Its Impact on 
Society (1) 

Introduction to Astronomy (4) 
Philosophy of the Physical 
Sciences (3) 

Statistics for the Social 
Sciences (3) 

Biology of Human 
Communication (3) 


4. Mathematics (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area are designed to provide a basis for 
understanding mathematical concepts and methodologies 
and their applications. A grade of "C" or better is required 
in this section. Students must pass the Entry Level Math- 
ematics (ELM) test before taking any course in this sec- 
tion. No more than four (4) units of lower-division course 
work may be counted in this section. 


Choices: 


Management Sci 361 


Mathematics 110 

Mathematics 115 
Mathematics 120 

Mathematics 125 
Mathematics 130 
Mathematics 135 
Mathematics 150A 

Mathematics 338 

Mathematics 368 
Philosophy 368 


Probability and Statistical 
Methods in Business & 

Economics (4) 

Mathematics for Liberal Arts 
Students (3) 

College Algebra (4) 

Introduction to Probability & 
Statistics (3) 

Precaculus (4) 

A Short Course in Calculus (4) 
Business Calculus (3) 

Analytic Geometry and 
Calculus (4) 

Statistics Applied to Natural 
Sciences (3) 

First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 
First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 


B. Arts and Humanities (6 units minimum) 


1. Introduction to the Arts (3 units minimum) 


Courses in this area are designed to motivate students to 
cultivate and refine their affective, cognitive and physical 
faculties through studying great works of the human imagi- 
nation. 


General Education 


131 


Choices: 

Art 101 
Art 201 A 
Art 201 B 
Art 31 1 
Art 312 
Dance 101 
Music 100 
Music 101 

Theatre 1 00 
Theatre 1 75 


Introduction to Art (3) 

Art and Civilization (3) 

Art and Civilization (3) 
Foundations of Modern Art (3) 
Modern Art (3) 

Introduction to Dance (3) 
Introduction to Music (3) 

Music Theory for Non-Music 
Majors (3) 

Introduction to the Theatre (3) 
History of Western Theatre (3) 


2. Introduction to the Humanities (3 units minimum) 


Courses in this area introduce students to reflective inquiry 
into the values and subjective responses of civilization in 
its language, philosophy, and literature. 

Choices: 


Anthropology 100 
Comparative Lit 110 

Comparative Lit 1 1 1 

Comparative Lit 324 
Comparative Lit 325 
Comparative Lit 352 
Comparative Lit 373 
English 110 

English 111 

English 200 
English 311 

English 312 

English 321 

English 322 

Foreign Lang 101 

Foreign Lang 102 

Foreign Lang 203 

Foreign Lang 204 

French 230 

French 240 

German 213 
German 214 


Non-Western Cultures & the 
Western Tradition (3) 

Literature of the Western World 
from Ancient through Medieval 
Times (3) 

Literature of the Western World 
from the Renaissance through the 
19th Century (3) 

World Literature to 1 650 (3) 

World Literature from 1650 (3) 
African Literature (3) 

Masters of Russian Literature (3) 
Literature of the Western World 
from Ancient through Medieval 
Times (3) 

Literature of the Western World 
from Renaissance through the 
19th Century (3) 

Introduction to Literature (3) 
Masters of British Literature to 
1760 (3) 

Masters of British Literature from 
1760 (3) 

American Literature to 
Whitman (3) 

American Literature from Twain to 
the Moderns (3) 

Fundamental Foreign 
Languages (3-5) 

Fundamental Foreign 
Languages (3-5) 

Intermediate Foreign 
Languages (3-5) 

Intermediate Foreign 
Languages (3-5) 

Intermediate Diction and 
Phonetics (2) 

Intermediate Conversation and 
Composition (2) 

Intermediate Reading (2) 
Intermediate Reading (2) 


Linguistics 106 
Linguistics 301 
Spanish 103 

Spanish 201 
Spanish 213 
Spanish 214 
Philosophy 100 
Philosophy 110 

Philosophy 115 
Philosophy 116 

Philosophy 290 

Philosophy 300 

Philosophy 310 
Relig. Studies 101 
Relig. Studies 102 
Relig. Studies 110 

Relig. Studies 200 
Relig. Studies 210 
Relig. Studies 301 


Language and Linguistics (3) 
Sanskrit (4) 

Intensive Review of Fundamental 
Spanish (5) 

Spanish for Hispanics (3) 
Intermediate Conversation (2) 
Intermediate Composition (2) 
Introduction to Philosophy (3) 
Comparative Study of the World’s 
Great Religions (3) 

Western Philosophy to 1600 (3) 
Western Philosophy since 
1600 (3) 

History of Philosophy: Greek 
Philosophy (3) 

History of Philosophy: Rationalism 
& Empiricism (3) 

Ethics (3) 

Fundamental Hebrew-A (4) 
Fundamental Hebrew-B (4) 
Comparative Study of the World’s 
Great Religions (3) 

Introduction to Christianity (3) 
Introduction to Judaism 
Sanskrit (4) 


C. Social Sciences (3 units minimum) 


1. Introduction to the Social Sciences (3 units mini- 
mum) 

Courses in this area provide an introduction to the concep- 
tual and methodological aspects of the social sciences to 
human, social, political, and economic institutions and be- 
havior in their contemporary and historical settings. 

Choices: 


American Studies 

Anthropology 1 02 

Economics 100 
Economics 201 
Economics 210 
Geography 100 
Political Sci 200 

Psychology 101 
Sociology 101 


101 Introduction to American Culture 
Studies (3) 

Introduction to Cultural 
Anthropology (3) 

The Economic Environment (3) 
Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Principles of Economics (5) 
World Geography (3) 

Introduction to the Study of 
Politics (3) 

Introductory Psychology (3) 
Introduction to Sociology (3) 


IV. IMPLICATIONS, EXPLORATIONS AND 
LIFE-LONG LEARNING (9 units minimum) 

At least one asterisked (*) course in IV. must be taken. 
Asterisked courses fulfill the cultural diversity requirement. 
Cultural diversity courses are designed to enhance under- 
standing of cultural differences within or between western 
and/or non-western societies. 


132 


General Education 


A. Implications and Explorations (6 units minimum) 

1. Implications, Explorations and Participatory Expe- 
rience in the Arts and Humanities (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area deepen the appreciation of the con- 
tent of III.B.1. and III.B.2. 

Choices: 

Afro-Ethnic 314 Pan-African Dance and 

Movement (3)* 

Afro-Ethnic 320 Black American Intellectual 

Thought (3)* 

Afro-Ethnic 352 African Literature (3) 

Afro-Ethnic 403 Oral History of Ethnic 

America (3)* 

Afro-Ethnic 410 Afro-American Literature (3) 

Afro-Ethnic 437 American Indian Religions and 
Philosophy (3) 

Afro-Ethnic 460 Afro-American Music 

Appreciation (3)* 

Anthropology 104 Traditional Cultures of the 

World (3)* 

Anthropology 305 Anthropology of Religion (3)* 

Anthropology 306 Comparative Aesthetics and 

Symbolism (3)* 

Art 100 Exploratory Course in Art (3) 

Art 103 Two-dimensional Design (3) 

Art 104 Three-dimensional Design (3) 

Art 106A Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Art 107A Beginning Drawing & Painting (3) 

Art 107B Beginning Drawing & Painting (3) 

Art 205A Beginning Crafts (3) 

Art 21 6A Beginning Sculpture (3) 

Art 326A Ceramic Sculpture (3) 

Art 338A Creative Photography (3) 

Art 364A Stained Glass (3) 

Chicano Studies 302 Ancient Mexican Culture (3)* 
Chicano Studies 304 Music of Mexico (3)* 

Chicano Studies 316 The Chicano Music 
Experience (3)* 

Chicano Studies 336 Main Trends in Spanish-American 
Literature (3) 

Chicano Studies 337 Contemporary Chicano 
Literature (3) 

Chicano Studies 430 The Evolution of Mexican 
Literature (3) 

Chicano Studies 433 Mexican Literature Since 1940 (3) 
Chicano Studies 440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3)* 
Comparative Lit 312 The Bible as Literature (3) 
Comparative Lit 315 Classical Mythology in World 
Literature (3) 

Comparative Lit 374 Soviet Literature (3) 

Comparative Lit 380 Introduction to Asian 
Literature (3)* 

Comparative Lit 423 Topics In Asian Literature (3)* 
Dance 112 Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 

Dance 122A Beginning Modern Dance (2) 

Dance 126 Dance Improvisation (2) 

Dance 132 Beginning Jazz Dance (2) 

Dance 301 Dance and Cultural Diversity (3)* 


Dance 325 

Dance Theory and Criticism (3) 

English 105 

Introduction to Creative 

Writing (3) 

English 204 

Intermediate Creative Writing (3) 

English 320 

Literature of the American 

Indians (3)* 

English 352 

African Literature (3) 

English 353 

Cultural Pluralism in American 
Literature (3)* 

English 354 

Linguistics & Literature (3) 

English 433 

Children’s Literature (3) 

French 31 5 

Origins of Modern France (3)* 

French 375 

Introduction to Literature (3) 

German 315 

Introduction to German 

Civilization (3)* 

German 375 

Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

History 405 

History of The Jews (3) 

Japanese 315 

Introduction to Japanese 
Civilization (3)* 

Japanese 316 

Modern Japan (3)* 

Portuguese 320 

Introduction to Luso-Brazilian 
Culture and Civilization (3)* 

Spanish 315 

Introduction to Spanish 
Civilization (3)* 

Spanish 316 

Introduction to Spanish- 
American Civilization (3)* 

Spanish 375 

Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

History 465A 

History of India (3)* 

History 483 

American Religious History (3) 

Library 200 

Elements of Bibliographic 
Investigation (3) 

Linguistics 354 

Linguistics and Literature (3) 

Music 183 

Voice Class for Non-majors (1) 

Music 184 A 

Piano Class for Non-majors (1) 

Music 184B 

Piano Class for Non-majors (1) 

Music 185A 

Guitar class for Non-majors (1) 

Music 185B 

Guitar class for Non-Majors (1) 

Music 301 

Techniques of Song Writing (3) 

Music 302 

History of Jazz (3)* 

Music 303 

Ethnic Music (3)* 

Music 304 

Music of Mexico (3)* 

Music 352 

Symphonic Music in 
Western/Eastern Cultures (3)* 

Music 361 A 

Symphony Orchestra (1) 

Music 361 B 

University Choir (1) 

Music 361 C 

Symphonic Band (1) 

Music 361 E 

University Singers (1) 

Music 361 F 

University Wind Ensemble (1) 

Music 361 W 

Women’s Choir (1) 

Music 362L 

Lab Band (1) 

Music 363J 

Jazz Combo (1) 

Philosophy 312 

Business & Professional 

Ethics (3) 

Philosophy 314 

Medical Ethics (3) 

Philosophy 323 

Existentialism (3) 

Philosophy 350 

Oriental Philosophy (3)* 

Political Sci 331 

Comparative Third World 

Politics (3) 

Political Sci 340 

Political Philosophy (3) 

Relig. Studies 250 

The Religion of Islam (3)* 


General Education 


133 


Relig. Studies 270 

Relig. Studies 305 
Relig. Studies 345A 


Relig. Studies 345B 


Relig. Studies 346A 


Relig. Studies 346B 


Relig. Studies 347A 

Relig. Studies 347B 

Relig. Studies 350 
Theatre 1 63 
Theatre 277 
Theatre 310 

Theatre 410A 

Theatre 41 OB 
Theatre 41 OC 
Theatre 41 1 

Theatre 414 


Introduction to the Oriental 
Relig. (3)* 

Anthropology of Religion (3)* 
History & Development of 
Christian Thought: The 
Beginning to 1274 (3) 

History & Development of 
Christian Thought: 1275 to the 
Present (3) 

History & Development of 
Jewish Thought: Biblical Origins 
to Maimonides (3) 

History & Development of 
Jewish Thought: 1204 to the 
Present (3) 

History & Development of 
Hinduism to 1200 (3)* 

History & Development of 
Hinduism from 1200 (3)* 

Major Christian Traditions (3) 
Beginning Acting (3) 

Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Oral Interpretation of 
Shakespeare (3) 

Oral Interpretation of Prose 
Literature (3) 

Oral Interpretation of Poetry (3) 
Oral Interpretation of Drama (3) 
Oral Interpretation of Children’s 
Literature (3) 

Readers Theatre (3) 


2. Implications and Explorations in the Social Sci- 
ences (3 units minimum) 


Courses in this area are topical and thematic, specialized 
inquiries into the contributions of the social sciences to the 
understanding of human behavior, both within and across 
traditional disciplines. 

Choices: 


Afro-Ethnic 101 

Afro-Ethnic 107 

Afro- Ethnic 220 

Afro-Ethnic 245 

Afro-Ethnic 280 
Afro-Ethnic 301 
Afro-Ethnic 309 
Afro-Ethnic 310 
Afro-Ethnic 31 1 

Afro-Ethnic 312 
Afro-Ethnic 317 
Afro-Ethnic 331 

Afro-Ethnic 335 
Afro-Ethnic 346 


Introduction to Ethnic 
Studies (3)* 

Introduction to Afro-American 
Studies (3)* 

The Indian in American 
History (3)* 

A Study of Black Political 
Development to 1 900 (3)* 
Afro-American History (3)* 
Afro-American Culture (3)* 
The Black Family (3)* 

Black Women in America (3)* 
Intracultural Socialization 
Patterns (3)* 

American Indian Women (3)* 
Black Politics (3)* 

Tribalism and Reservation 
Life (3)* 

History of Racism (3)* 

The African Experience (3)* 


Afro-Ethnic 422 

Afro-Ethnic 430 

Afro-Ethnic 485 

American Studies 

American Studies 
American Studies 
American Studies 

American Studies 


Psychology of the 
Afro-American (3)* 

A Social Psychological Study in 
Ethnic Minority Behavior (3)* 
Pan-Africanism and 
Contemporary Issues (3)* 

300 Introduction to American 
Popular Culture (3) 

301 The American Character (3)* 
345 The American Dream (3) 

386A American Social History, 

1750-1860 (3) 

386B American Social History, 
1865-1930 (3) 


American Studies 41 1 
American Studies 450 


The White Ethnic in 
America (3)* 

Women in American 


Anthropology 103 
Anthropology 300 
Anthropology 302 

Anthropology 309 
Anthropology 321 
Anthropology 325 
Anthropology 327 
Anthropology 328 
Anthropology 340 
Anthropology 345 

Anthropology 347 
Anthropology 360 

Anthropology 450 
Chicano Studies 106 

Chicano Studies 220 
Chicano Studies 305 
Chicano Studies 403 

Chicano Studies 406 
Chicano Studies 431 
Chicano Studies 432 
Chicano Studies 445 
Chicano Studies 450 

Chicano Studies 453 
Chicano Studies 460 
Child Dev 312 

Communications 233 

Counseling 380 

Criminal Justice 300 

Economics 201 
Economics 202 
Economics 330 


Society (3)* 

Introduction to Archaeology (3) 
Language and Culture (3) 
Culture and Personality: 
Psychological Anthropology (3) 
Applied Anthropology (3) 

The American Indian (3)* 
Peoples of South America (3)* 
Origins of Civilizations (3) 
Peoples of Africa (3)* 

Peoples of Asia (3)* 

Peoples of the Middle East & 
North Africa (3)* 

Peoples of the Pacific (3)* 
Contemporary American 
Culture (3)* 

Culture and Education (3) 
Introduction to Chicano 
Studies (3)* 

Mexican Heritage (3)* 

The Chicano Family (3)* 

Cultural Differences in Mexico & 
the Southwest (3)* 

La Chicana (3)* 

The Chicano Child (3)* 

The Chicano Adolescent (3)* 
History of the Chicano (3)* 

The Chicano and Contemporary 
Issues (3)* 

Mexico Since 1 906 (3)* 

The Chicano and Politics (3)* 
Human Growth and 
Development (3) 

Mass Communication in 
Modern Society (3) 

Theories and Techniques of 
Counseling (3) 

Introduction to Criminal 
Justice (3) 

Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

Comparative Economic 

Systems (3) 


General Education 


Economics 331 
Economics 332 
Economics 333 

Economics 334 

Economics 350 
Economics 361 
Economics 362 

Geography 160 
Geography 170 
Geography 332 
Geography 333 
Geography 340 
Geography 344 
Geography 346 
Geography 350 

History 270 
History 350 

History 360 

History 370 
History 386A 

History 386B 

History 452 
History 455 
Human Services 31 1 

Human Services 380 

Linguistics 108 

Linguistics 369 

Linguistics 412 
Philosophy 302 

Philosophy 341 
Philosophy 385 
Physical Educ 381 

Political Sci 300 

Political Sci 309 

Political Sci 310 
Political Sci 315 
Political Sci 317 
Political Sci 320 

Political Sci 330 
Political Sci 350 
Political Sci 352 
Political Sci 375 
Political Sci 445 


The Soviet Economy (3) 

Economic Problems of Asia (3) 
Economic Development: Analysis 
& Case Studies (3) 

Economics of Latin America & the 
Caribbean (3) 

American Economic History (3) 
Urban Economics (3) 
Environmental and Resource 
Economics (3) 

Culture and Environment (3) 

The City (3) 

United States and Canada (3)* 
Latin America (3)* 

Asia (3) 

Afripa 

The Pacific World (3) 

Conservation & Ecology in 
America (3) 

Women in American History (3)* 
History of Latin American 
Civilization (3)* 

Modern Asia: Nationalism & 
Revolutionary Change (3)* 
American Sex Reformers (3) 
American Social History, 1 750- 
1860 (3) 

American Social History, 1865- 
1930 (3) 

20th Century Brazil (3)* 

Latin America Since 1 945 (3) 
Intracultural Socialization 
Patterns (3)* 

Theories and Techniques of 
Counseling (3) 

Linguistics and Minority 
Dialects (3)* 

Language, Sex Roles and the 
Brain (3) 

Sociolinguistics (3) 

Introduction to Women’s 
Studies (3)* 

Assumptions of Psychotherapy (3) 
Philosophy of Social Sciences (3) 
Human Movement in Cultural 
Perspective (3) 

Contemporary Issues in California 
Government & Politics (3) 
Introduction to Metropolitan 
Politics (3) 

American Political Behavior (3) 
American Political Process (3) 
Black Politics (3)* 

Politics, Policy and 
Administration (3) 

Comparative Political Analysis (3) 
World Politics (3) 

American Foreign Policy (3) 

Public Law (3) 

Political Learning & 

Socialization (3) 


Political Sci 460 
Psychology 31 1 
Psychology 312 

Psychology 331 
Psychology 341 
Psychology 350 
Psychology 351 
Psychology 361 
Psychology 362 
Sociology 1 33 
Sociology 361 
Sociology 371 
Sociology 407 

Sociology 431 
Sociology 436 
Sociology 450 
Sociology 451 
Sociology 455 
Sociology 456 
Sociology 465 
Speech Comm 320 


The Chicano & Politics (3)* 
Educational Psychology (3) 

The Psychology of Human Sexual 
Behavior (3) 

Psychology of Personality (3) 
Abnormal Psychology (3) 
Environmental Psychology (3) 
Social Psychology (3) 
Developmental Psychology (3) 
Psychology of Aging (3) 
Introduction to Gerontology (3) 
Population Problems (3) 

Urban Sociology (3) 

Women in Contemporary 
Society (3) 

Minority Group Relations (3)* 
Social Stratification (3)* 

Sociology of Sex Roles (3) 
Sociology of the Family (3) 
Medical Sociology (3) 

Mental Illness (3) 

Law and Society (3) 

Intercultural Communication (3)* 


B. Life-Long Learning (3 units minimum) 


Courses in this section facilitate understanding of the hu- 
man being as an integrated physiological, social, and psy- 
chological organism. They may also integrate major areas 
of earlier portions of the general education program (Sec- 
tions II. through IV.A.2.). 


Choices: 

American Studies 450 
Anthropology 415 
Anthropology 417 
Anthropology 432 

Biological Sci 306 
Biological Sci 31 1 
Biological Sci 314 
Biological Sci 360 
Chemistry 1 1 1 
Chemistry 31 1 
Child Dev 312 

Child Dev 330 

Chicano Studies 305 
Comparative Lit 355 

English 355 

English 356 
Geography 357 

Health Science 101 
Health Science 301 
Human Services 300 
Music 350 


Women in American Society (3)* 
Culture & Nutrition (3) 

Life Quests (3) 

Women in Cross-Cultural 
Perspective (3) 

Biology of Aging (3) 

Nutrition and Disease (3) 

Human Issues in Genetics (1) 
Biology of Human Sexuality (1) 
Nutrition & Drugs (3) 

Nutrition and Disease (3) 

Human Growth and 
Development (3) 

Adolescence & Early 
Adulthood (3) 

The Chicano Family (3)* 

Images of Women in 
Literature (3) 

Images of Women in 
Literature (3) 

The Literature of Aging (3) 

Social Geography: Perception & 
Behavior (3) 

Personal Health (3) 

Promotion of Optimal Health (3) 
Character and Conflict (3) 

Music in Our Society (3) 


General Education 



Nursing 301 
Nursing 302 

Philosophy 120 
Philosophy 312 

Philosophy 324 
Physical Ed. 350 

Psychology 312 


Promotion of Optimal Health (3) 
Health Delivery System and the 
Consumer (3) 

Philosophy of the Person (3) 
Business & Professional 
Ethics (3) 

Existential Group (3) 

Physical Activity & Lifelong 
Well-being (3) 

The Psychology of Human 
Sexual Behavior (3) 


Psychology 361 
Psychology 362 
Sociology 341 
Sociology 450 
Sociology 451 
Sociology 460 

Speech Comm 345 


Developmental Psychology (3) 
Psychology of Aging (3) 

Social Interaction (3) 

Sociology of Sex Roles (3) 
Sociology of the Family (3) 
Sociology of Death and 
Dying (3) 

Communications and Aging (3) 



General Education 


Teaching Credential 

Programs 

California State University, Fullerton offers a full range of 
State-approved credential programs leading to careers in 
education. From its earliest days to the present, this has 
been one of the chief missions of the university. Pursuing a 
teaching credential in California is a complicated matter 
because of the number of specific requirements that must 
be met. Credential requirements are established by the 
Legislature and enforced by the Commission on Teacher 
Credentialing (CTC). This commission also reviews and 
approves all credential preparation programs, such as 
those at the university. An academic major in education is 
not permitted in California, thus students seeking teaching 
credentials must do so in conjunction with, or after the 
completion of, a baccalaureate degree program in an aca- 
demic area outside of education. CSUF offers programs 
leading to basic teaching credentials, specialist creden- 
tials, and services credentials. The specialist and services 
credentials, described briefly below, are more advanced 
programs designed to be taken in conjunction with gradu- 
ate study. 

In this section of the catalog information is presented re- 
garding: 

A. Basic Credential Programs 

B. The Multiple Subject Credential and Waiver Pro- 
gram 

C. The Single Subject Credentials and Waiver Pro- 
grams 

D. Supplementary Authorizations for the Basic 
Teaching Credentials 

E. Specialist and Services Credentials 

A. Basic Credential Programs 

In California there are two basic teaching credentials, the 
Multiple Subjects Credential and the Single Subject Cre- 
dential. The Multiple Subjects Credential authorizes a 
person to teach in a classroom where many different sub- 
jects are taught by a single individual, such as in elemen- 
tary schools. The Single Subject Credential authorizes a 
teacher to teach in a classroom where only one subject is 
taught, such as a classroom in departmentalized high 
schools and some junior high schools. Thus the person 
interested in elementary school teaching should pursue 
the program designed for the Multiple Subjects Credential, 
and the person interested in teaching a specific subject at 
the junior high or high school level should pursue the pro- 
gram for the Single Subject Credential. 

In California a person can earn first a preliminary and then 
a clear basic teaching credential. The requirements for the 
clear credential are built on those for the preliminary cre- 
dential. The preliminary credential is the level that autho- 
rizes beginning teaching. 



Teaching Credential Programs 


137 


Minimum Requirements for a Preliminary 
Multiple or Single Subject Credential 

Although it is possible to complete the minimum require- 
ments for a preliminary basic teaching credential in four 
years, it generally takes a good student with accurate aca- 
demic advising about four and a half years full time to 
complete all the requirements for a preliminary basic 
teaching credential and a baccalaureate degree. The mini- 
mum requirements for a preliminary basic credential in- 
clude: 

1 . A baccalaureate degree in a field other than profession- 
al education from a regionally accredited college or 
university. 

2. An approved program of professional preparation, includ- 
ing supervised student teaching. This two semester pro- 
gram is taken during the fourth and/or fifth year of study. 
Cal State Fullerton offers State approved professional 
preparation programs through the School of Human De- 
velopment and Community Service. Further information 
about these programs, including admission and prerequi- 
site requirements, is provided in this catalog under the 
Department of Elementary and Bilingual Education, and 
the Secondary Teacher Education Program. 

3. Passage of the California Basic Education Skills Test 
(CBEST), a test of reading, writing, critical thinking and 
mathematics skills. CSUF is one of the State-approved 
testing centers for this examination as well as for other 
examinations used in the teacher credential ing process. 

4. Demonstration of subject matter knowledge appropri- 
ate to the specific credential being authorized. This can 
be achieved either by passing a State-approved subject 
matter examination or by completing a State-approved 
examination Waiver Program. Cal State Fullerton of- 
fers Waiver Programs for the Multiple Subjects subject 
matter examination and for 14 Single Subject examina- 
tion areas. These programs are described in more de- 
tail below. 

5. Satisfactory completion of at least two semester units 
of work on the provisions and principles of the U.S. 
Constitution or passage of an examination on this area. 

6. Demonstration of a knowledge of the various methods 
of teaching reading. 

To help ensure that all credential requirements are met 
with a minimum of difficulty, it is essential that people seek 
sound academic advising as soon as possible. The Office 
of Admissions to Teacher Education, located in Education 
Classroom 207, provides information on waiver program ad- 
vising and specific credential requirements, details on proce- 
dures for admission to the professional program in teacher 
preparation, information on preprofessional prerequisites, 
and advice on a number of other important matters of con- 
cern to students interested in the possibility of becoming a 
teacher. Students are encouraged to seek the information 
offered by this Office at their earliest convenience. 


B. The Multiple Subject 
Credential and Waiver Program 

In California Professional Teacher Preparation is a two-se- 
mester program taken during the fourth and/or fifth year of 
college; there is no major in education. Since students will be 
devoting their first three years of work to completing general 
education, major and waiver program requirements, it is es- 
sential that students consider their selection of an academic 
major carefully. Most persons interested in earning a Multiple 
Subjects Credential at CSUF select child development, liber- 
al studies or human services as an academic major. Persons 
interested in working as bilingual teachers by earning a Mul- 
tiple Subjects Credential with a Bilingual Emphasis, might 
consider majoring in a foreign language. Majors in the social 
sciences, humanities or natural sciences can also be excel- 
lent backgrounds for careers in elementary school teaching. 
According to California law, any major (other than education) 
can be selected. 

Transfer students and students interested in qualifying for 
a CSUF waiver program should seek a transcript evalua- 
tion from the Credential Preparation Center, Education 
Classroom 207. 

A person seeking a Multiple Subjects Credential will also 
be required to demonstrate a broad general knowledge of 
the arts, humanities, social sciences, mathematics, lan- 
guage arts, and natural sciences. There are two ways to 
demonstrate that knowledge: one is by passing a State- 
approved examination, the other is by completing the 
CSUF State-approved Multiple Subjects Waiver Program. 

A student evaluated under an earlier waiver program re- 
tains the option of being evaluated under subsequent 
waiver programs. 


Multiple Subjects Waiver 

Note: The specific requirements of the CSUF waiver pro- 
gram are subject to change by the California Commission 
on Teacher Credentialing. Students wishing to complete 
waiver requirements as stipulated below must receive an 
official waiver evaluation through procedures established 
by the Credential Preparation Center located in the Educa- 
tion Classroom Building, Room 207. 

1. English (18 units) 

Composition: (6 units) 

English 101 Beginning College Writing (3)* 

Any course approved by the University Writing Board as 
meeting the upper-division writing requirement (3)** 


Teaching Credential Programs 


Grammar: Any of the following (3 units) 

English 303 The Structure of Modern 

English (3) 

Reading 201 Academic Reading (3) 

Reading 202 Vocabulary Comprehension (3) 

Literature: Any of the following (3 units)* 


Completion of 3 units of coursework from “Introduction to 
Social Sciences” section of the General Education Pro- 
gram (3) 

Child 390 Middle Childhood (3)1* 

Three of the following: (9 units) 


English 110 

English 111 

English 200 
English 311 

English 312 

English 321 

English 322 


Literature of the Western World 
from Ancient Through 
Medieval (3)* 

Literature of the Western World 
Renaissance through 19th 
Century (3) 

Introduction to Literature (3)* 
Masters of British Literature to 
1760 (3)* 

Masters of British Literature from 
1760 (3)* 

American Literature to 
Whitman (3)* 

American Literature from Twain to 
Moderns (3)* 


Speech: Any one of the following: (3 units)* 


Speech Comm 1 00 

Speech Comm 1 02 
Theatre 110 

Theatre 411 


Introduction to Human 
Communications (3)* 

Public Speaking (3)* 
Introduction to Oral 
Interpretation (3)* 

Oral Interpretation of Children’s 
Literature (3)* 


Critical Thinking (3 units)* 


Completion of the "Critical Thinking” requirement of the 
campus general education program (3)* 


2. Mathematics and Science (24 units) 

Math 303A, B Fundamental Concepts of 

Elementary Mathematics (6) 


Completion of 12 units of course work selected from the 
“Mathematics and Natural Science” section of the campus 
general education program. 

Two (6 units) from the following: 

Science Ed 310 Physical Science Concepts (3) 
Science Ed 453 Life Science Concepts (3) 


Any 3 units from general education and/or upper-division 
courses in biology, chemistry, geological sciences, and/or 
physics (other than the units used above) 

3. Social Science (24 units) 

Government (3 units) 


Sociology 450 
Sociology 451 
Sociology 453 
Amer Studies 420 

Child 312 

Child 385 
Child 386 
Hum Ser 380 

Psychology 31 1 
Psychology 361 
Geography 330 
Anthropology 450 


Sociology of Sex Roles (3) 
Sociology of the Family (3) 

Child in American Society (3) 
Childhood and Family in American 
Culture (3) 

Human Growth and 
Development (3)* 

Infancy and Early Childhood (3) 
Adolescence (3) 

Theories & Techniques of 
Counseling (3) 

Educational Psychology (3) 
Developmental Psychology (3)* 
California Landscape (3) 

Culture and Education (3) 


One of the courses approved for “Cultural Diversity” re- 
quirement of the CSUF general education program (3) 


4. Humanities/Fine Arts (18 units) 


At least nine units selected from the following: 


Art 380 
Dance 471 
Music 333 
Theater 402A 

Theat 403A 
Physical Ed 372 
English 433 
English 434 

Physical Ed 1 42 


Art and Child Development (3) 
Creative Dance for Children (3) 
Music and Child Development (3) 
Dramatic Activities for 
Children (3) 

Theatre for Children (3) 
Movement and the Child (3) 
Children’s Literature (3) 

Literature for Junior and Senior 
High School (3) 

Children’s Games (1) 


Completion of “ Arts and Humanities" requirement of the 
campus general education program (up to 9 units)* 


The above waiver program has been designed for maximal 
compatibility with the campus general education program. 
Nevertheless, good academic advising and careful course 
selection each semester are essential if a person is to 
complete major requirements, waiver requirements and 
general education requirements with the least amount of 
difficulty.^ 


♦Course work that can also be used to satisfy CSUF undergraduate gener- 
al education baccalaureate requirements. 


Completion of the "Government” requirement of the cam- 
pus general education program (3)* 

American/U.S. History (3 units) 

Completion of the “American History” section of the cam- 
pus general education program (3)* 


♦♦Course work that can also be used to satisfy the CSUF upper-division 
writing requirement. 

tCourse work that is a required prerequisite to admission to the Profes- 
sional Education Basic Credential Program. 

# Nine units of upper-division course work satisfying general education 
requirements must be taken no earlier than the first semester of the junior 
year. 


Teaching Credential Programs 


C. Single Subject Credentials 
and Waiver Programs 

Although a person seeking a Single Subject Credential 
may complete any academic major, most people decide to 
complete the degree major closest to the subject field in 
which they wish to be authorized to teach. CSUF offers a 
Single Subject Credential program in each of the following 
14 State-authorized subject fields: 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 

Students select one of the following areas of emphasis 

Drawing, Painting and General Art 

Art 207B Drawing and Painting (3) 

Art 347 Printmaking-Etching (3) 

Art 307A.B Advanced Drawing and Painting (6) 

Art 317 Life Studies: Draw, Paint and 
Sculpting (3) 

Crafts and Ceramics 


Art 

Business Education 

English (English, Speech, Theater) 

French 

German 

Government (Political Science) 

History 

Life Science (Biology) 

Mathematics 

Music 

Physical Education 

Physical Sciences (Chemistry, Geology and Physics) 
Social Sciences (Anthropology, American Studies, 
Economics, Geography, Chicano Studies, History, 
Afro-Ethnic Studies, Psychology and Sociology) 
Spanish 


To demonstrate subject matter competence a person must 
either pass the appropriate State-approved examination, or 
complete a State-approved waiver program. These waiver 
programs generally coincide sufficiently with the degree ma- 
jor to make it possible to complete major requirements and 
waiver requirements using many of the same courses. But 
degree programs and waiver programs serve different pur- 
poses; taking one is not a guarantee that you will have satis- 
fied the requirements of the other. Good advising and careful 
planning are crucial. Transfer students seeking a CSUF 
waiver should seek a transcript evaluation from the Creden- 
tial Preparation Center, Education Classroom 207. The 
CSUF waiver programs for each of the Single Subject fields 
listed above are presented below: 


Art 205B Beginning Crafts: Wood (3) 

Art 305A Advanced Crafts (3) 

Art 306A,B Advanced Ceramics (6) 

Art315A Jewelry (3) 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: BUSINESS 
EDUCATION 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (30- 
33 units) 

(All students must meet the following core requirements. 
In addition, each student must meet the requirements of 
one of the four specializations which are: accounting, mar- 
keting, economics, and office administration.) 

Demonstration of Typewriting Proficiency 

(Proficiency Exam: (1) five-minute timed writing; minimum 
score 40 words gross per minute with five errors maximum, 
and (2) demonstration of problem-solving ability: Setting 
up a business letter, tabulation problem and rough-draft 
material from unarranged copy and in mailable/usable 
form and (3) passing a written exam covering correct form 
and style (including punctuation, syllabication, and gram- 
mar) applicable to typewriting skill.) 

Demonstration of Office Machines Proficiency 

(Proficiency Exam: (1) Demonstration of ability to produce 
a complex business letter, containing tabulation, on a mi- 
crocomputer or wordprocessor, in mailable form, and (2) 
ability to add columns of figures on a 10-key calculating 
machine using the touch system.) 

Students pursuing a single subject waiver must take all of 
the following: (15 units) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: ART 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (36 
units) 


Econ 201 
Econ 202 

Accounting 201 A, B 
Management 246 


Principles of Microeconomics (3)** 
Principles of Macroeconomics (3)** 
Elementary Accounting (6) 

Business Law (3) 


Art 

Art 

Art 

Art 

Art 

Art 

Art 

Art 

Art 

Art 


103 

Two-dimensional Design (3) 

One of the following: 

(3 units) 

104 

Three-dimensional Design (3) 

Manag Sci 263 

Intro to Information Systems and 

106 A 

Beginning Ceramics (3) 


Micro-Computer Applications (2) 

107A,B 

Beginning Drawing and Painting (6) 


and 

117 

Life Drawing (3) 

Manag Sci 264 

Intro to Computer Programming 

201 A, B 

Art and Civilization (6) 


(2) or 

205A 

Beginning Crafts (3) 

Manag Sci 265 

Introduction to Information 

207A 

Drawing and Painting (3) 

Systems and Computer 

31 0A 

Watercolor (3) 


Programming (3) or 

312 

Art of the 20th Century 1900 to 

Present (3) 

Computer Sci 112 

Introduction to Computer 
Programming (3) 


Teaching Credential Programs 


All of the following: (9 units) 


Business Admin 301 Business Writing (3) 

Finance 310 Personal Financial 

Management (3) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

And one area of specialization: (3-6 units) 

Accounting Specialization* 

Accounting 301 A, B Intermediate Accounting (6) 

Marketing Specialization* 

Marketing 352 Principles of Retailing (3) 

Marketing 370 Consumer Behavior (3) 

Economics Specialization* 

Econ 310 Intermediate Microeconomic 

Analysis (3) 

Econ 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic 

Analysis (3) 

Office Administration Specialization* 

Demonstration of Shorthand Proficiency 

(Proficiency Exam: Ability to take dictation at a minimum of 
80 words per minute for three minutes and transcribe the 
material into mailable/usable form.) 


Management 339 Managing Business Operations 
and Organizations (3) 

Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 


Students must take 15 units selected from the following: 


Accounting 302 
Accounting 308 

Accounting 401 
Economics 310 

Economics 320 

Management 344 
Finance 320 
Management 340 
Marketing 352 
Philosophy 312 
Mathematics 135 
Computer Sci 223F 
Manage Sci 270 

Management 339 

Manage Sci 361 


Cost Accounting (3) 

Concepts of Federal Income Tax 

( 3 ) 

Advanced Accounting (3) 
Intermediate Microeconomics 
(3)*** 

Intermediate Macroeconomics 
(3)*** 

Intro to Systems Concepts (3) 
Business Finance (3) 
Organizational Behavior (3) 
Principles of Retailing (3)*** 
Business/Professional Ethics (3) 
Business Calculus (3) 

Workshop in Fortran-77 (2) 

File Concepts and Cobal 
Programming (3) 

Managing Business 
Operations/Organization (3)*** 
Probability and Statistical 
Methods in Business and 
Economics (4) 


♦The concentrations for the business administration major in accounting, 
economics and marketing require a total of 1 8-20 units of in-depth course 
work in those areas. 


♦♦Economics 21 0 Principles of Economics (5) may be substituted for Econ 
201 and 202. Students who have already completed Econ 100 and 200 may 
substitute this combination for Econ 201 and 202. 


♦♦♦These courses may not fulfill a portion of the breadth and perspective 
requirements if they are used to meet part of the core (specialization) 
requirements. 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: ENGLISH 
( ENGLISH , THEATER , SPEECH) 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (30 
units) 

Composition 

English 101 Beginning College Writing (3) 

One of the following: 


English 301 Advanced College Writing (3) 

Theatre 477B Senior Seminar in Critical 

Techniques (3) 

Speech Comm 300 Intro to Research in Speech 
Communications (3) 


Linguistics 


English 303 Structure of Modern English (3) 

One of the following: 


Linguistics 106 Linguistics and Minority 

Dialects (3) 

English 305 English Language in 

America (3) 

English 490 History of English Language (3) 


Literature 


All of the following: 


English 300 
English 311 

English 312 

English 321 

English 322 

English 334 


Analysis of Literary Forms (3) 
Masters of British Literature 
to 1760 (3) 

Masters of British Literature 
from 1760 (3) 

American Literature to 
Whitman (3) 

American Literature from Twain to 
the Moderns (3) 

Shakespeare (3) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 


Students may select one of the following areas of empha- 
sis: 

Theatre: All of the following: 


Theatre 200 
Theatre 263 
Theatre 276A 
Theatre 370A 
Theatre 402B 


Art of the Theatre (3) 
Acting (3) 

Stagecraft (3) 
Directing (3) 

Dramatic Activities for 
Children (3) 


English Literature: Fifteen semester units of adviser-ap- 
proved literature courses. 


Public Speaking: Five courses from the following: 


Speech Comm 1 02 
Speech Comm 1 38 
Speech Comm 200 
Speech Comm 324 
Speech Comm 332 
Speech Comm 334 


Public Speaking (3) 

Forensics (3) 

Human Communication (3) 

Small Group Communication (3) 
Processes of Social Influence (3) 
Persuasive Speaking (3) 


Teaching Credential Programs 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: FRENCH 

Upper-Division Requirements in Subjects Commonly 
Taught (30 units) 

Language (Select 6 units from the following) 

French 300 French Conversation (3) 

French 317 Advanced Composition and 

Grammar (3) 

French 318 Advanced Composition and 

Grammar (3) 

Culture (Select 6 units from the following) 

French 315 Origins of Modern France (3) 

French 325 Contemporary French 

Civilization (3) 

French 407 French Film (3) 

Unguistics (Select 6 units from the following) 

French 385 Translation (3) 

French 466 Introduction to French 

Linguistics (3) 

French 500 Stylistics (3) 

Literature (Select 6 units from the following) 

French 375 Introduction to Literature (3) 

French 415 French Classicism (3) 

French 425 French Romanticism (3) 

French 475ABCD Senior Seminar (3) 

French 485 French Literature (3) 

Electives: Six upper-division units of electives selected 
from courses listed above in consultation with an adviser 
based on candidate’s background, interest and teaching 
plans. 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: GERMAN 

Upper-Division Requirement in Subjects Commonly 
Taught (30 units) 


Literature (Select 6 units from the following) 


German 

German 

German 

German 

German 

German 


375 

Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

430 

German Literature and Culture to 
the Baroque (3) 

440 

18th Century German Literature 
and Culture (3) 

450 

19th Century German Literature 
and Culture (3) 

460 

20th Century German Literature 
and Culture (3) 

485 

Seminar in German 

Literature (3) 


Electives: Six upper-division units of electives selected 
from courses listed above in consultation with an advisor 
based on candidate’s background, interest and teaching 
plans. 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: 
GOVERNMENT 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (30 
Semester Units) 


Political Sci. 100 
Political Sci. 300 

Political Sci. 309 
Political Sci. 310 
Political Sci. 315 
Political Sci. 320 

Political Sci. 330 
Political Sci. 340 
Political Sci. 350 
Political Sci. 375 


American Government (3) 
Contemporary Issues in California 
Government and Politics (3) 

Intro to Metropolitan Politics (3) 
American Political Behavior (3) 
American Political Process (3) 
Politics, Policy & 

Administration (3) 

Comparative Political Analysis (3) 
Political Philosophy (3) 

World Politics (3) 

Public Law (3) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 Semester 
Units) 


Language (Select 6 units from the following) 

German 300 German Conversation (3) 

German 317 Advanced Conversation and 

Composition (3) 

German 401 Advanced Conversation and 

Vocabulary (3) 

Culture (Select 6 units from the following) 

German 315 Introduction to German 

Civilization (3) 

German 325 Current Trends in Culture of 

German-Speaking Peoples (3) 
German 482 German Film (3) 

Linguistics (Select 6 units from the following) 

German 399 German Phonetics (3) 

German 466 Introduction to German 

Linguistics (3) 

German 500 Advanced Structure and Style (3) 


U.S. Government (6 units) 

Two courses from the 

following: 

Political Sci. 311 

Research Proseminar in American 
Political Behavior (3) 

Political Sci. 347 

Political Theory and Political 
Practice (3) 

Political Sci. 407 

Quantitative Methods in Political 
Science (3) 

Political Sci. 410 

Political Parties (3) 

Political Sci. 413 

Pressure Groups and Public 
Opinions (3) 

Political Sci. 414 

The Legislative Process (3) 

Political Sci. 415 

Power and Participation in 

America (3) 

Political Sci. 416 

The American Presidency (3) 

Political Sci. 445 

Political Learning & 

Socialization (3) 

Chic 460 

The Chicano and Politics (3) 

Afro 335 

History of Racism (3) 


142 


Teaching Credential Programs 


Law (3 units) 

One of the following: 


Chic 360 
Political Sci. 376 

Political Sci. 470 
Political Sci. 473 

Political Sci. 474 

Political Sci. 475 


Chicanos and the Law (3) 
Research Proseminar in Public 
Law (3) 

Judicial Process (3) 

Introduction to Constitutional 
Law (3) 

Seminar in Constitutional Law: 
Civil Rights and Civil Liberties (3) 
Administrative Law (3) 


Comparative Systems/International Politics (3 units) 
One of the following: 


Political Sci. 335 
Political Sci. 351 

Political Sci. 425 

Political Sci. 430 

Political Sci. 431 

Political Sci. 446 

Political Sci. 452 

Political Sci. 455 


Comparative Political Change (3) 
Research Proseminar in 
International Politics (3) 
Comparative Public 
Administration (3) 

Government Politics of a Selected 
Nation-State (3) 

Government and Politics of a 
Selected Area (3) 

Corruption, Ethics and Public 
Policy (3) 

Foreign Policy of a Selected 
Country or Group of Countries (3) 
Comparative Analysis of Foreign 
Politics (3) 


Public Administration (3 units) 
One of the following: 


Political Sci. 321 

Political Sci. 421 
Political Sci. 422 

Political Sci. 423 

Political Sci. 424 

Political Sci. 425 

Political Sci. 426 

Political Sci. 427 

Political Sci. 429 


Research Proseminar in Politics, 
Policy and Administration (3) 
Public Finance Administration (3) 
Public Personnel 
Administration (3) 

Regional Planning and 
Development (3) 

Urban Planning and 
Development (3) 

Comparative Public 
Administration (3) 

Collective Bargaining in the Public 
Sector (3) 

Current Issues in Urban & 
Metropolitan Policy (3) 

Public Personnel Training (3) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: HISTORY 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (30- 
33 units) 


All of the following: 


History 1 1 0A 

Western Civilization to the 16th 


Century (3) 

History 11 0B 

Western Civilization Since the 


16th Century (3) 

History 383 

History of California (3) 

History 426 

Rise of Modern Europe (3) 

History 429 

Europe since 1914 (3) 


North America and U.S.: take one from the following: 

History 180 Survey of American History (3) 

History 170A,B United States History (6) 

Amer Studies 201 Intro to American Studies (3) 


Latin America: take one from the following: 

History 350 History of Latin American 

Civilization (3) 

History 453 Modern Mexico (3) 


Asia: take one of the following (3 to 6 units) 


History 360 
History 462A,B 
History 463A,B 
History 464A,B 
History 465A,B 


Modern Asia (3) 

History of China (6) 

History of Japan (6) 

History of Southeast Asia (6) 
History of India (6) 


Africa and the Middle East: take one pair (6 units) 


History 466A,B 
History 467 

and History 468 

History 458 

and Afro 346 


History of Islamic Civilizations (6) 
Middle East in the 19th 
Century (3) 

Middle East in the 20th 
Century (3) 

Southern Africa in the 20th 
Century (3) 

The African Experience (3) 


Breadth and Depth Requirements (15 units) 

Historical Methodology: (at least 3 units) 


History 300A 
Amer Studies 350 

History 490 
Amer Studies 401 


Historical Thinking (3) 

Seminar in Theory and Method of 
American Studies (3) 

Senior Research Seminar (3) 
Proseminar in American 
Studies (3) 


U.S. and North American History: (at least 6 units) 


History/Amer Studies 
386A 

History/Amer Studies 
386B 

Amer Studies 301 
Amer Studies 345 
Amer Studies 395 

Amer Studies 416 


Amer Studies 450 
Chicano 453 
History 380 
History 350 


History 453 
History 470 
History 471 


American Social History 
1750-1860 (3) 

American Social History 
1860-1930 (3) 

The American Character (3) 

The American Dream (3) 
American West in Symbol and 
Myth (3) 

Southern California Culture: 

A Study of American 
Regionalism (3) 

Women in U.S. History (3) 
Modern Mexico (3) 

Canada, 1534-1967 
History of Latin American 
Civilization (3) (If not used to 
satisfy core requirements) 
Modern Mexico (3) 

American Colonial Civilization (3) 
United States from Colony to 
Nation (3) 


Teaching Credential Programs 


History 472 

History 473 
History 474 
History 475 

History 476 
History 479 

History 485 
History 486 
History 487 


Jeffersonian Themes in American 
Society 1800-1861 (3) 

Democracy on Trial 1845-1877 (3) 
The United States 1876-1914 (3) 
America Comes of Age, 
1914-1945 (3) 

United States Since 1 945 (3) 

The Urbanization of American 
Life (3) 

U.S. Foreign Relations (3) 

United States Cultural History (3) 
History of American Parties & 
Politics (3) 


Western Civilization and Modern Europe: (at least 6 units) 


History 341 

Tudor-Stuart England (3) 

History 342 

Modern England and Great 

Britain (3) 

History 401 

European Intellectual History from 
1 500 to the Present (3) 

History 41 5A 

Classical Greece (3) 

History 41 5B 

Hellenistic Civilization (3) 

History 41 7A 

Roman Republic (3) 

History 41 7B 

Roman Empire (3) 

History 425A 

The Renaissance (3) 

History 425B 

The Reformation (3) 

History 432 

Modern Germany from 18th 
Century (3) 

History 434A 

Russia to 1890 (3) 

History 434B 

The Russian Revolutions and the 
Soviet Regime (3) 

History 437 

East Europe (3) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: LIFE 
SCIENCE 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (31 
units) 


All of the following: 

Biological Sci 141 
Biological Sci 1 41 L 
Biological Sci 161 
Biological Sci 1 61 L 
Biological Sci 302 
Biological Sci 302L 
Biological Sci 312 
Biological Sci 315 
Biological Sci 316 

One of the following: 

Biological Sci 31 5L 

Biological Sci 31 6L 


Principles of Botany (2) 
Principles of Botany Lab (2) 
Principles of Zoology (2) 
Principles of Zoology Lab (2) 
General Microbiology (2) 
General Microbiology Lab (2) 
Genetics (3) 

Cell and Molecular Biology (3) 
Principles of Ecology (3) 


Cell and Molecular Biology 
Lab (2) 

Principles of Ecology Lab (2) 


One of the following: 


Biological Sci 419 Marine Ecology (3) and 
Biological Sci 41 9L Marine Ecology Lab (1) 


Biological Sci 446 Phycology (4) 

Biological Sci 461 Invertebrate Zoology (4) 

Biological Sci 475 Ichthyology (4) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (27-30 units) 


Chemistry 120A,B General Chemistry (10) 

Physics 211A.B 

and 

Physics 21 1 AL,BL Elementary Physics (8) 
One of the following: 


Chemistry 301 A, B Organic Chemistry (6) 

and 

Chemistry 302 Organic Chemistry Lab (2), 

or 

Chemistry 303 Survey of Organic Chemistry (5) 

One of the following: 


Math 130 A A Short Course in Calculus (4) 

Math 150A Analytic Geometry and 

Calculus (4) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: 
MATHEMATICS 

Unit Requirement (34 units) 


Math 150A.B 

Math 250A.B 
Math 335 
Math 380 
Math 401 

Math 402 


Analytic Geometry and 
Calculus (8) 

Intermediate Calculus (8) 
Mathematical Probability (3) 
History of Mathematics (3) 
Algebra and Probability for the 
Secondary Teacher (3) 

Logic and Geometry for the 
Secondary Teacher (3) 


One of the following: 


Math 435 Mathematical Statistics (3) 

Math 438 Introduction to Stochastic 

Processes (3) 


One of the following: 

Computer Sci 112 Introduction to Computer 
Programming (3) 

Comp Sci 121 Programming Concepts (3) 

Engineering 205 Digital Computation (3) 


Closely Related Subjects Requirement (15) 


One of the following: 


Biological Sci 362 
Biological Sci 410 
Biological Sci 468 

Biological Sci 444 


Mammalian Physiology (4) 
Cell Physiology (4) 
Comparative Animal 
Physiology (4) 

Plant Physiology (4) 


Mathematics 302 Modern Algebra (3) 

Mathematics 307 Applied Linear Algebra (3) 


One of the following: 

Computer Sci 131 Data Structures Concepts (3) 
Computer Sci 231 File Systems Concepts (3) 


Teaching Credential Programs 


Two of the following courses: 


Take at least five of the following: (5 units) 


Math 350A Advanced Calculus (3) 

Math 370 Mathematical Model Building (3) 

Philosophy 368 First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 
Philosophy 369 Second Course in Symbolic 
Logic (3) 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: MUSIC 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (30 
units) 


Music 361 A 
Music 361 B 
Music 361 C 
Music 361 D 
Music 361 E 
Music 361 F 
Music 361 M 
Music 361 W 


Symphony Orchestra (1) 
University Choir (1) 

University Concert Band (1) 
Opera Theatre (1) 

University Singers (1) 
University Wind Ensemble (1) 
Men’s Choir (1) 

Women’s Choir (1) 


One of the following: (2 units) 


Music 111A.B 
Music 211 
Music 251 
Music 281 B,P,S,W 
Music 319 
Music 351 A 

Music 351 B 

Music 351 C 

Music 391 A 


Diatonic Harmony (6) 

Chromatic Harmony (3) 

Survey of Musical Literature (3) 
Orchestral Instruments (1) 

Form and Analysis (3) 

History and Literature of Music 
(Greek through Renaissance) (3) 
History and Literature of Music 
(Baroque and Classics) (3) 
History and Literature of Music 
(Romantic to Present) (3) 

Choral Conducting (2) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15+ units) 


One of the following: (2 units) 

Music 320A 20th Century Techniques (2) 

Music 320B 20th Century Techniques (2) 

One of the following: (4 units) 

Music 323A Orchestration (2) 

and 

Music 324 Scoring for the Band (2) 

Music 453A 
or 

Music 453B Choral Literature and 

Interpretation (2) 

and 
one of: 


Music 457A 
or 

Music 457B 
or 

Music 468A 
Music 381 

and 

Music 435 


Song Literature and 
Interpretation (2) 

Song Literature and 
Interpretation (2) 

Vocal Pedagogy (2) 
Survey of Recreational 
Instruments (1) 

Music in the Modern 
Classroom (3) 


One of the following: (2 or 3 units) 


Music 333 Music and Child Development (3) 

Music 354 Survey of Public School Choral 

Music Materials (2) 

Music 444 Survey of Marching Band 

Materials (2) 


Music 391 B Choral Conducting (2) 

Music 392A Instrumental Conducting (2) 

Performance Requirement: 

Perform at level sufficient to be admitted to Music 371 on 
principal instrument (0-4) 

Piano Proficiency Requirement: 

Completion of Music 282B or satisfactory passage of pi- 
ano proficiency examination (0-4) 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: PHYSICAL 
EDUCATION 

Core Requirements in, or directly related to, Subjects 
Commonly Taught (30 units) 


All of the following: (15 units) 


Physical Ed 300 

Principles of Movement (3) 

Physical Ed 349 

Measurement and Evaluation (3) 

Physical Ed 352 

Physiology of Exercise (3) 

Physical Ed 364 

Motor Development (3) 

Physical Ed 371 

Principles of Human Motor 
Learning (3) 

Analysis of Sports: 

(4 units) 

Physical Ed 303 

Field Events (2) 

Physical Ed 304 

Swimming (2) 

Physical Ed 305 

Golf (2) 

Physical Ed 306 

Gymnastics (2) 

Physical Ed 308 

Soccer (2) 

Physical Ed 309 

Badminton/Racquetball (2) 

Physical Ed 312 

Tennis (2) 

Physical Ed 316 

Volleyball (2) 

Physical Ed 319 

Softball (2) 

Techniques of Coaching: (2 units ) 

Physical Ed 328 

Gymnastics (2) 

Physical Ed 330 

Softball (2) 

Physical Ed 332 

Tennis (2) 

Physical Ed 334 

Baseball (2) 

Physical Ed 335 

Football (2) 

Physical Ed 337 

Basketball (2) 

Physical Ed 338 

Volleyball (2) 


Activities (9 units: at least one course in each of the five 
commonly taught areas; at least six of the nine units at the 
intermediate, advanced or intercollegiate level) 


Teaching Credential Programs 


Dance 

Dance 101 
Dance 1 1 2 
Dance 212 
Dance 312 
Dance 122A 
Dance 222 
Dance 323A 
Dance 132 
Dance 232 
Dance 332 
Dance 142 
Dance 242 

Basic Movement 

Physical Ed 100 
Physical Ed 101 
Physical Ed 102A 
Physical Ed 102B 

Physical Ed 104 
Physical Ed 105 
Physical Ed 108 
Physical Ed 125 
Physical Ed 144 
Physical Ed 146 
Physical Ed 151 A 
Physical Ed 1 51 B 
Physical Ed 152A 
Physical Ed 1 52B 
Physical Ed 1 54 
Physical Ed 246A 
Physical Ed 246B 

Sports and Games 

Physical Ed 117A 
Physical Ed 1 1 7B 
Physical Ed 1 1 7C 
Physical Ed 1 1 8A 
Physical Ed 1 1 8B 
Physical Ed 118C 
Physical Ed 1 19A 
Physical Ed 1 19B 
Physical Ed 119C 
Physical Ed 130A 
Physical Ed 130B 
Physical Ed 131 A 
Physical Ed 131 B 
Physical Ed 131C 
Physical Ed 131 D 
Physical Ed 132A 
Physical Ed 132B 
Physical Ed 1 32C 
Physical Ed 133 
Physical Ed 1 42 
Physical Ed 1 47 
Physical Ed 1 50A 
Physical Ed 150B 
Physical Ed 155A 
Physical Ed 155B 


Introduction to Dance (3) 
Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 
Intermediate Ballet (2) 
Advanced Classical Ballet (3) 
Beginning Modern Dance (2) 
Intermediate Modern Dance (3) 
Dance Composition (3) 
Beginning Jazz Dance (2) 
Intermediate Jazz Dance (3) 
Advanced Jazz Dance (3) 
Beginning Tap Dance (2) 
Intermediate Tap Dance (2) 


Physical Conditioning (1) 
Athletic Conditioning (1) 
Beginning Jogging (1) 
Intermediate/ Advanced 
Jogging (1) 

Horseback Riding (1) 
Cycling (1) 

Roller Skating (1) 

Rock Climbing (1) 

Exercise Weight Control (1) 
Body Building (1) 

Beginning Aikido (1) 
Intermediate Aikido (1) 
Beginning Karate (1) 
Intermediate Karate (1) 
Self-Defense (1) 

Basic Hatha Yoga (2) 
Intermediate Hatha Yoga (2) 


Beginning Bowling (1) 
Intermediate Bowling (1) 
Advanced Bowling (1) 
Beginning Archery (1) 
Intermediate Archery (1) 
Advanced Archery (1) 
Beginning Golf (1) 

Intermediate Golf (1) 

Advanced Golf (1) 

Beginning Badminton (1) 
Intermediate Badminton (1) 
Beginning Tennis (1) 
Advanced/Beginning Tennis (1) 
Intermediate Tennis (1) 
Advanced Tennis (1) 

Beginning Racquetball (1) 
Intermediate Racquetball (1) 
Advanced Racquetball (1) 
Handball (1) 

Children’s Games (1) 

Olympic Power Lifting (1) 
Beginning Wrestling (1) 
Intermediate Wrestling (1) 
Beginning Fencing (1) 
Intermediate Fencing (1) 


Physical Ed 160 
Physical Ed 161 A 
Physical Ed 161B 
Physical Ed 162 
Physical Ed 164A 
Physical Ed 164B 
Physical Ed 164C 
Physical Ed 1 65A 
Physical Ed 165B 
Physical Ed 166 
Physical Ed 167A 
Physical Ed 167B 
Physical Ed 167C 
Physical Ed 171 
Physical Ed 172 
Physical Ed 1 74 
Physical Ed 175 
Physical Ed 1 76 
Physical Ed 177 
Physical Ed 1 78 
Physical Ed 1 79 
Physical Ed 180 
Physical Ed 184 
Physical Ed 185 
Physical Ed 1 86 

Aquatics 

Physical Ed 110A 
Physical Ed 11 0B 
Physical Ed HOC 
Physical Ed 1 1 1 
Physical Ed 112 
Physical Ed 114 
Physical Ed 1 16 
Physical Ed 1 22A 
Physical Ed 122B 
Physical Ed 1 73 
Physical Ed 210 
Physical Ed 214 
Physical Ed 343 

Gymnastics 

Physical Ed 1 20A 
Physical Ed 1 20B 
Physical Ed 1 20C 
Physical Ed 1 70 
Physical Ed 306 


Baseball (1) 

Beginning Slow Pitch (1) 
Intermediate Slow Pitch (1) 

Fast Pitch Softball (1) 

Beginning Volleyball (1) 
Intermediate Volleyball (1) 
Advanced Volleyball (1) 
Beginning Soccer (1) 
Intermediate Soccer (1) 

Team Handball (1) 

Beginning Basketball (1) 
Intermediate Basketball (1) 
Advanced Basketball (1) 
Intercollegiate Golf (2) 
Intercollegiate Cross Country (2) 
Intercollegiate Track-Field (2) 
Intercollegiate Tennis (2) 
Intercollegiate Wrestling (2) 
Intercollegiate Fencing (2) 
Intercollegiate Basketball (2) 
Intercollegiate Baseball (2) 
Intercollegiate Soccer (2) 
Intercollegiate Football (2) 
Intercollegiate Volleyball (2) 
Intercollegiate Softball (2) 


Beginning Swimming (1) 
Intermediate Swimming (1) 
Advanced Swimming (1) 

Life Saving (1) 

Water Polo (1) 

Skin Diving (1) 

Springboard Diving (1) 
Beginning Sailing (1) 
Intermediate Sailing (1) 
Intercollegiate Water Polo (2) 
Water Safety Instructor (2) 
Basic Scuba (2) 

Intermediate Scuba (2) 


Beginning Gymnastics (1) 
Intermediate Gymnastics (1) 
Advanced Gymnastics (1) 
Intercollegiate Gymnastics (2) 
Gymnastics (2) 


Depth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 


One of the following courses: 

Physical Ed 380 History of Physical Education (3) 
Physical Ed 382 Philosophical Perspectives (3) 

One of the following courses: 

Physical Ed 381 Human Movement in Cultural 
Perspective (3) 

Physical Ed 384 Sport Sociology (3) 


Teaching Credential Programs 


Three of the following courses: 


Physical Ed 340 

Physical Ed 363 

Physical Ed 365 

Physical Ed 372 
Physical Ed 373 
Physical Ed 383 


Contemporary Movement 
Environments (3) 

Developmental Adaptations of the 
Atypical (3) 

Prevention and Care of Athletic 
Injuries (3) 

Movement and the Child (3) 
Movement Concepts (3) 

Sport Psychology (3) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: SOCIAL 
SCIENCES 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (33- 
36 units) 

One of the following courses: (3-6 units) 

History 180 Survey of American History (3) 

Amer Studies 201 Introduction to American Studies 
(3) 

History 170A.B United States History (6) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: PHYSICAL 
SCIENCE 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (39- 
42 units) 


All of the following: (24 units) 

Three units of History of California or California Govern- 
ment (3) 

Six units of American Government (6) 


Chemistry 120 A,B General Chemistry (10) 

One of the following: (5-8 units) 

Chemistry 301 A, B Organic Chemistry (6) 
and 

Chemistry 302 Organic Chemistry Lab (2), 

or 

Chemistry 303 Survey of Organic Chemistry (5) 

All of the following: (24 units) 

Physics 225A Fundamental Physics: 

Mechanics (3) 

Physics 225B Fundamental Physics: Electricity 

and Magnetism (3) 

Physics 225C Fundamental Physics: Modern 

Physics (3) 

Physics 225AL.BL.CL Fundamental Physics Lab (1,1,1) 
Geological Sci 101 Physical Geology (3) 

Geological Sci 1 01 L Physical Geology Lab (1) 
Geological Sci 201 Earth History (4) 

Physics 350 General Astronomy (4) 

Breadth and Perspective Requirements (19 units) 

Math 150A.B Analytic Geometry and 

Calculus (8) 

One of the following: 


Three units in Economics (3) 

History 110A Western Civilization to 16th 

Century (3) 

History 1 10B Western Civilization Since the 

16th Century (3) 

Anthropology 100 Non-Western Cultures and the 

Western Tradition (3) 
Geography 100 World Geography (3) 

One of the following: (3 units) 

Hum Ser/Afro 31 1 Intracultural Social Patterns (3) 
Chicano 445 History of the Chicano (3) 

One of the following: (3 units) 

Amer Studies 301 The American Character (3) 
Amer Studies 450 Women in American Society (3) 

Breadth and Perspective Requirements (18 units) 

One of the following courses: 

Geography 330 California Landscape (3) 

Geography 332 United States and Canada (3) 

All of the following: 

Three units of Sociology 

Three units of Political Science 


Geological Sci 340 
Chemistry 361 A 
Chemistry 371 A 
Physics 310 


General Meteorology (3) 

Intro to Physical Chemistry (3) 
Physical Chemistry (3) 
Thermodynamics, Kinetic Theory, 
and Statistical Physics (3) 


Two of the following: 


Biological Sci 101 Elements of Biology and Lab (4) 
(and 1 01 L) 

Biological Sci 141 Principles of Botany and Lab (4) 
(and 141 L) 

Biological Sci 161 Principles of Zoology and Lab (4) 
(and 1 61 L) 


Three units of Psychology 

Six units from any combination of the following: 


Afro-Ethnic Studies 

American Studies 

Anthropology 

Chicano Studies 

Economics 

Geography 

History 

Political Science 

Psychology 

Sociology 


Teaching Credential Programs 


147 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: SPANISH 

Upper-Division Requirement in Subjects Commonly 
Taught (30 units) 

Language (Select 6 units from the following) 


Spanish 300 Spanish Conversation (3) 

Spanish 317 Advanced Conversation and 

Composition (3) 

Spanish 400 Spanish for Advanced 

Students (3) 

Culture (Select 6 units from the following:) 


Spanish 315 
Spanish 316 

Spanish 415 
Spanish 416 


Intro to Spanish Civilization (3) 
Introduction to Spanish-American 
Civilization (3) 

Contemporary Spanish Culture (3) 
Contemporary Spanish-American 
Culture (3) 


Linguistics (Select 6 units from the following:) 

Spanish 466 Introduction to Spanish 

Linguistics (3) 

Spanish 467 Dialectology (3) 

Spanish 468 Spanish-English Contrastive 

Analysis (3) 


Literature (Select 6 units from the following:) 


Spanish 375 
Spanish 430 

Spanish 441 
Spanish 461 

Spanish 475 

Spanish 485 


Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 
Spanish Literature to 
Neoclassicism (3) 

Spanish American Literature (3) 
Spanish Literature since Neo- 
classicism (3) 

Topics in Spanish Peninsula 
Literature (3) 

Topics in Spanish American 
Literature (3) 


Electives: Six upper-division units of electives selected 
from courses listed above in consultation with an adviser 
based on candidate’s background, interest and teaching 
plans. 


D. Supplementary 
Authorizations for the Basic 
Teaching Credentials 

It is possible to expand the subject matter authorization a 
teaching credential initially carries to other subject fields. 
The State recognizes several subject areas that can be 
added to a Multiple Subjects Credential; thereby qualifying 
person to teach in departmentalized junior high class- 
rooms (grades 6-9). CSUF offers 14 Supplementary Au- 
thorizations for the Multiple Subject Credential in: 


Art 

French 

Health Science 
Music 
Spanish 
Business 
General Science 


Life Science 
Physical Education 
Social Science 
English 
German 
Mathematics 
Physical Science 


Supplementary Authorizations for the Single Subject Cre- 
dential permit a person who holds a credential in one 
broad subject field to be also authorized to teach in another 
more specific subject area, one that might be quite differ- 
ent from the field of broader authorization. CSUF offers 37 
supplementary authorizations for the single Subject Cre- 
dential in: 

Accounting/Computer Literacy 
Animal Science (Zoology) 

Anthropology 

Biology 

Ceramics 

Chemistry 

Comparative Political Systems/International 
Relations 

Composition/Critical Thinking 
Computer Concepts and Applications 
Crafts (Arts) 

Dance 

Drama 

Drug Use and Abuse 
Earth Science (Geology) 

Economics 

Economic and Consumer Education 

Electronics 

Family Health 

Geography 

Graphic Arts 

Instrumental Music 

Jewelry 

Journalism 

Literature 

Marketing and Distribution 

Painting and Drawing 

Personal Health 

Photography 

Physics 

Plant Science 

Psychology 

Sociology 

Speech 

U.S. Government/Civics 
U.S. History /California History 
Vocal Music 
World History 

Also, to permit the holder of a single subjects credential to 
teach certain subjects in grades 9 and below, CSUF offers 
eight supplementary authorizations in: 

General Science 
Introductory English 
Introductory French 
Introductory German 
Introductory Health Sciences 
Introductory Mathematics 
Introductory Social Science 
Introductory Spanish 

Contact the Credential Preparation Center, Education 
Classroom 207, for details concerning course require- 
ments for specific supplementary authorizations. 


Teaching Credential Programs 


E. Specialist and Services 
Credentials 

CSUF offers several State approved programs leading to 
more specialized credentials. Most of these programs 
build on the teaching experience that holders of a basic 
credential have achieved. Often these specialist or ser- 
vices credentials are oriented toward postbaccalaureate 
course work and coincide with Master’s degree programs. 
Further information about specific requirements for each 
can be obtained under the appropriate departmental list- 
ing in this catalogue. 

CSUF offers the following Specialist Credential pro- 
grams: 

1 . Gifted, to teach in classrooms designed for the special 
needs of gifted and talented students. See Department 
of Special Education, School of Human Development 
and Community Service. 

2. Learning Handicapped, to teach the learning handi- 
capped including the behaviorally disordered and educa- 
tionally retarded. See Department of Special Education, 
School of Human Development and Community Service. 

3. Reading Specialist, to teach reading to students of 
diversified grade and ability levels and to assist all 
teachers in being better reading teachers. See Depart- 
ment of Reading, School of Human Development and 
Community Service. 

4. Resource Specialist (Certificate of Competency), to 
serve as a resource specialist in programs serving spe- 
cial education students, their parents and their regular 
teachers. See Department of Special Education, School 
of Human Development and Community Service. 

5. Severely Handicapped, to teach the severely-multiply- 
handicapped, severely emotionally disturbed and au- 
tistic. See Department of Special Education, School of 
Human Development and Community Service. 


In addition CSUF is currently seeking approval for a newly 
authorized credential, Language Development Specialist, 
to teach limited or non-English proficient students. See 
Department of Foreign Language and Literature, School of 
Humanities and Social Science. 

CSUF offers the following Services Credential pro- 
grams: 

1 . Administrative Internship, a field based internship pro- 
gram leading to a preliminary level administrative ser- 
vices credential. See Department of Educational Ad- 
ministration, School of Human Development and Com- 
munity Service. 

2. Administrative Services (Preliminary Level), the first 
step of the new two-step administrative services cre- 
dential structure, authorizing service as a school site 
administrator, principal or other administrative officer of 
a school district. See Department of Educational Ad- 
ministration, School of Human Development and Com- 
munity Service. 

3. Administrative Services (Professional Level), the sec- 
ond step of the new two-step administrative services 
credential structure. See Department of Educational 
Administration, School of Human Development and 
Community Service. 

4. Clinical Rehabilitation (Language, Speech and Hear- 
ing), to provide services to students with exceptional 
needs and/or neurophysical disorders in language, 
speech, and hearing. See Department of Speech Com- 
munication, School of Humanities and Social Sciences. 

5. Clinical Rehabilitation (Special Class Authorization), to 
provide services to students with severe disorders of 
language. See Department of Speech Communication, 
School of Humanities and Social Sciences. 

6. Pupil Personnel Services, to provide counseling and 
testing services to students. See Department of Coun- 
seling, School of Human Development and Community 
Services. 


Teaching Credential Programs 


Extended Education 


Building T 14 
(714) 773-2611 

Extension Programs 

The Extension program is designed for those who are 
unable to take university work in residence but who wish to 
pursue university-level study for various purposes, such as 
resuming an interrupted or incomplete education, aug- 
menting professional or vocational abilities, or enhancing 
personal growth and fulfillment. 

Extension offerings include regularly established universi- 
ty credit courses as well as non-credit seminars and con- 
ferences, special weekend programs and travel study pro- 
grams. Workshops and courses designed to meet the 
needs of particular groups and agencies may be initiated 
at various times during the year. Any adult may enroll in an 
extension course provided the prerequisites of the course 
are met. An individual does not have to be enrolled in the 
university in order to take extension courses. 

The maximum amount of credit by extension which will be 
accepted toward a baccalaureate degree is 24 semester 
units. Nine semester units of extension credit may be ap- 
plied toward a master’s degree with appropriate approval. 
Extension credit may not be used to fulfill the minimum 
residence requirement for graduation. 

Extension courses are offered during fall, spring, summer 
session and intersession. 

Adjunct Enrollment 

Many of the regular university credit courses offered to en- 
rolled students are also open on a space-available basis to 
extension students through Adjunct Enrollment. Matriculated 
students may not enroll through this program. Contact the 
Office of Extended Education for further information. 

Summer Session 

The summer session program is designed for regularly en- 
rolled students, either at California State University, Fullerton 
or another university, who wish to accelerate progress to- 
ward a degree or credential; prospective students who wish 
to begin course work while admission to the university is in 
process; and members of the community who wish to enroll 
in a course or courses for professional advancement or per- 
sonal enrichment. Summer session offerings consist of regu- 
lar university courses and apply toward residence and gradu- 
ation requirements. Students must satisfy all prerequisites 
for the course or courses in which they intend to register. The 
summer session curriculum consists of lower-division 
through graduate-level courses. 


The summer session bulletin is available in March and 
may be obtained by writing or calling the Office of Ex- 
tended Education. The bulletin contains course descrip- 
tions, special offerings, registration form and instructions. 
Registration may be completed by mail at specified times. 
Summer enrollment does not constitute admission to the 
university. 

Teleconferences 

Satellite programming is scheduled through the Office of 
Extended Education for campus and public presentation. 

Intersession 

Intersession is open to everyone — continuing and pro- 
spective students, community residents and visitors. 
Scheduled during January, the one-, two- and three-unit 
courses are primarily designed to meet the needs of stu- 
dents who wish to accelerate their academic progress. 

The intersession offers extension courses as well as 
courses which earn resident credit and range from both 
lower- and upper-division credit courses to graduate-level 
offerings. 

Certificate Programs 

Certificate programs are designed for those who want for- 
mal recognition for completing a structured and rigorous 
course of study in a specific field, but who may not be 
interested in pursuing a university degree program. Certifi- 
cates are awarded when participants complete the course 
requirements. The Office of Extended Education offers 
credit certificate programs in the following areas; 

Gerontology 

Production and Inventory Practice 
School Business Management 
Technical Writing 

Non-credit certificate programs are available in several 
areas and new credit and non-credit programs are always 
being developed. For current titles, contact the Office of 
Extended Education. 

Community Programs 

The Office of Extended Education sponsors various com- 
munity educational outreach programs including the Con- 
tinuing Learning Experience (CLE) program for retired and 
semi-retired persons. For a list of current activities contact 
the CLE office. 


Extended Education 


International Programs 



Now in its 25th year of continuous operation, the California 
State University (CSU) International Programs offers stu- 
dents the opportunity to continue their studies overseas for 
a full academic year while they remain enrolled at their 
home CSU campus. The International Programs’ primary 
purposes are to enable selected students to gain a first- 
hand understanding of other areas of the world and to 
advance their knowledge and skills within specific aca- 
demic disciplines in pursuit of established degree objec- 
tives. Since its inception, the International Programs has 
enrolled nearly 9,000 CSU students. 

A wide variety of academic majors may be accommodated 
by the 34 foreign universities cooperating with the Interna- 
tional Programs in 16 countries around the globe. The 
affiliated institutions are: the University of Queensland 
(Australia); the University of Sao Paulo (Brazil); the Univer- 
sities of the Province of Quebec (Canada); the University 
of Copenhagen (through DIS Study Program); the Univer- 
sity of Provence (France); the Universities of Heidelberg 
and Tubingen (Germany); the Hebrew University of Jeru- 
salem (Israel); the University of Florence (Italy); Waseda 
University (Japan); the IberoAmericana University (Mexi- 
co); Massey University and Lincoln University College 
(New Zealand); the Catholic University of Lima (Peru); 
National Chengchi University (Republic of China/Taiwan j; 
the Universities of Granada and Madrid (Spain); the Uni- 
versity of Uppsala (Sweden); Bradford, Bristol, Sheffield, 
and Swansea Universities and Kingston Polytechnic (the 
United Kingdom). Information on academic course offer- 
ings available at these locations is in the International 
Programs Bulletin which may be obtained from the Inter- 
national Programs representative on campus. 

To be selected to participate, students must have upper- 
division or graduate standing at a CSU campus by the time 
of departure, possess a cumulative grade-point average of 
2.75 or 3.00, depending on the program, for all college 
level work completed at the time of application, and have 
completed required language or other preparatory study 
where applicable. Selection is competitive and is based on 
home campus recommendations and the applicant’s aca- 
demic record. Final selection is made by the Office of 
International Programs in consultation with a statewide 
selection committee. 


The International Programs pays all tuition and adminis- 
trative costs overseas for each of its participants to the 
same extent that such funds would be expended to support 
similar costs in California. Students assume responsibility 
for all personal costs, such as transportation, room and 
board, and living expenses, as well as for home campus 
fees. Because they remain enrolled at their home CSU 
campus while studying overseas, International Programs 
students earn full resident credit for all academic work 
completed while abroad and remain eligible to receive any 
form of financial aid (other than work-study) for which they 
can individually qualify. 


International Programs 


151 


Information and application materials may be obtained 
from Dr. Lee Gilbert, McCarthy Hall 103; the Office of Inter- 
national Education and Exchange, or by writing to The 
California State University, International Programs, 400 
Golden Shore, Long Beach, California 90802-4275. Appli- 
cations for the 1990-91 academic year overseas must be 
submitted by February 1, 1990. 

International Exchange 
Programs 

California State University, Fullerton has direct institutional 
exchange programs with universities throughout the world. 
Such agreements allow for the exchange of faculty and stu- 
dents for purposes of teaching, study, research and for the 
promotion of cultural understanding and interaction. 

Current programs link California State University, Fullerton 
with Fudan University, Shanghai; Zhejiang University, 
Hangzhou; Northwest University, Guangzhou, People’s 
Republic of China; eight campuses of the University of 
Paris, France; the Mexicali and Ensenada campuses of 
the Autonomous University of Baja California, Mexico; and 
Nanzan University, Nagoya, Japan. 

CSUF students pay home campus fees plus their living, 
transportation and related expenses. They must maintain 
home campus full-time enrollment status in the exchange 
program. They thereby may qualify for any financial aid for 
which they normally would be eligible. Credit received 
while studying abroad is subject to CSUF departmental 
approval for determination of equivalency. 

Information and application forms are available in the Of- 
fice of Academic Programs, McCarthy Hall-129, and in the 
Office of International Education and Exchange, McCarthy 
Hall-79. 

American Language Program 

California State University, Fullerton welcomes interna- 
tional students who wish to perfect their English language 
skills. The American Language Program (ALP) course of 
study provides intensive practice in listening, speaking, 
reading, writing and study skills while promoting an under- 
standing of U.S. culture and society. Classes are small, so 
students will receive individual attention which will help 
them achieve rapid fluency in English. 

All entering ALP students must take a placement test. On the 
basis of the test results, students are placed in one of six 
academic levels. At the beginning and intermediate levels, 
students attend multi-skills classes for 24 hours per week. 
Additional hours are required for homework and practice in 
the Language Laboratory. Advanced level students are in a 


semi-intensive program. In addition to multi-skills classes, 
they may take specialized classes such as English for Busi- 
ness, English for Science and Technology, or Test of English 
as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) preparation. 

No university credit is given for ALP classes; however, 
qualified advanced students may take one or two classes 
for university credit through Extended Education with the 
consent of the program director. Students should expect 
regular homework assignments in all their classes. For 
further information, contact the Director of the American 
Language Program (714) 773-2909. 

AIESEC 

AIESEC, the French acronym for International Association 
of Students in Business and Economics, is an international 
student organization which works in cooperation with local 
corporations to bring business trainees from all parts of the 
world to Orange County and, therefore, earns credits for 
placement of CSUF students in the 61 other participating 
countries. Students can be engaged for periods from six 
weeks to eighteen months and gain invaluable business 
experiences in another culture. For further information call 
(714) 773-2266. 

International Study Courses 

Cal State Fullerton students under The California State 
University International Study Programs register concur- 
rently at Cal State Fullerton and at the host institution 
abroad, with credits assigned to the student which are 
equivalent to courses offered at Cal State Fullerton. Un- 
dergraduate students who discover appropriate study op- 
portunities at the host Institution but no equivalent course 
at Cal State Fullerton may use Independent Study 499 and 
International Study 292 or 492. Graduate students may 
use Independent Graduate Research 599 and Internation- 
al Study 592. 

292 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-6 lower-division 
units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University In- 
ternational Programs. Study undertaken in a university 
abroad under the auspices of The California State University. 

492 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 upper-division 
units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University In- 
ternational Programs. Study undertaken in a university 
abroad under the auspices of The California State University. 

592 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 graduate units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University In- 
ternational Programs. Study undertaken in a university 
abroad under the auspices of The California State University. 


International Programs 


Special Programs 


From the total curriculum of the university, students may 
wish to plan a specially designed program of study that 
does not duplicate significantly any existing major or con- 
centration. The undergraduate special major and the grad- 
uate interdisciplinary studies program provide opportuni- 
ties for selected students to pursue individualized pro- 
grams of study leading to a degree when legitimate 
academic and professional goals can be satisfied by a 
judicious selection of courses from two or more fields, and 
when these aims cannot be satisfied by the authorized 
standard degree majors or double majors that are avail- 
able on the campus (e.g., liberal studies, social sciences). 
The special major and interdisciplinary studies program 
are designed for exceptional cases of individual students 
only and provide an opportunity to develop a concentration 
or specialization outside the framework of existing majors. 
These programs are not intended as a means of bypass- 
ing normal graduation requirements or as a means by 
which students may graduate who fail to complete the 
degree major in which they are enrolled. 

B.A. Special Major 

Students desiring to work for a bachelor’s degree with a 
special major should consult with the Office of Academic 
Advisement. 

1. Entrance to the special major program is normally at 
the beginning of the junior year (60 units remaining for 
graduation). 

2. The minimum requirement for the major is 48 units. A 
minimum of 36 upper-division units must be included in 
the major. 

3. Although students may include on their study plans, 
course work in progress and a maximum of 12 units of 
course work completed prior to the time of filing, ap- 
proval of these courses is not automatic. 

4. No more than six units of 499 (Independent Study) 
and/or internship course work may be included in the 
major. 

5. Neither lower- nor upper-division courses applied to 
general education breadth requirements will be appli- 
cable toward the major. 

6. At least three units of appropriate course work in meth- 
odology shall be included in the student’s study plan. 
Where appropriate this requirement may be waived by 
the University Curriculum Committee. 


7. All courses in the major must be taken for a letter grade 
(Grade Option 1 ). A GPA of 3.0 in the major is required 
for graduation. 

8. Prior to taking any substitute course work a petition for 
change of the study plan must be approved by the 
student’s adviser and the University Curriculum Com- 
mittee. 

9. A senior thesis shall be written by the student in this 
program during the semester preceding graduation. 
This thesis should show scholarly evidence of the merit 
in the student’s choice of an interdisciplinary program. 
This paper shall be written under the direction of the 
student’s special major adviser and approved by the 
faculty designated by the departments represented on 
the student’s study plan. 

M.A. Interdisciplinary Studies 

A graduate student desiring to work for a master’s degree 

in interdisciplinary studies should consult with the Office of 

Graduate Studies and fill out an initial request form avail- 
able at that office. 

1 . Entrance to the program requires a grade-point aver- 
age (GPA) of 3.0 in the undergraduate major and a GPA 
of 3.0 in the last 60 units of course work. 

2. The minimum requirement of units for an M.A. in Inter- 
disciplinary Studies is 30 units of which at least half 
must be graduate courses (500 level). 

3. Although students may include on their proposed study 
plan course work in progress or completed prior to the 
time of filing, approval of these courses is not automat- 
ic. No more than nine units of course work taken prior to 
classified standing can be approved on the program. 

4. The program may contain no more than six units of 
Independent Study, Project or Thesis. 

5. All courses on the study plan must be taken for a letter 
grade (Grade Option 1 ). A GPA of 3.0 is required on all 
work on the study plan. 

6. Prior to taking any substitute course work, a petition for 
change of the study plan must be approved by the 
student’s graduate adviser and graduate committee. 

7. AThesis or Project shall be required for the completion 
of the program. The completed thesis will be filed with 
the Library; whereas the project shall be filed with the 
Office of Graduate Studies. 


Special Programs 


153 


Curricula Information 


Course Descriptions 

Course descriptions briefly describe the content or subject 
matter to be covered and provide additional information on 
units of credit, the level of instruction (see course numbering 
code), prerequisites and the type of course (lecture, laborato- 
ry, activity, seminar and individually supervised work). 


Course Numbering Code 

The first number in each course designation is intended to 
indicate the level of complexity of the course. In addition, 
the first number also is a rough index of the student’s year 
of study at the university. The following are guidelines for 
course numbering. 

001-099 Developmental or remedial level course work is 
pre-college in nature. It may not be counted to- 
ward a degree objective. 

1 00-1 99 First year or freshman level course work is intro- 
ductory in nature. Such courses may provide the 
fundamental or essential elements or qualities 
important to a specific discipline. Emphasis in 
many first year courses may be on the develop- 
ment of preliminary skills. These courses are 
usually designed without prerequisites and may 
be characterized as emphasizing breadth rather 
than depth of instruction. 

200-299 Second year or sophomore level course work 
may include preliminary history or survey-type 
courses or intermediate skill development. Al- 
though there is no clear distinction made be- 
tween lower division courses listed at the 100 or 
200 level, there is an inherent assumption that 
students in the second year of study have ac- 
quired preliminary skills appropriate to university 
level work. 

300-399 Third year or junior level course work is likely to 
emphasize specialization for majors in their dis- 
ciplines. Work at this level is expected to be more 
challenging than lower division work. Usually, 
specific prerequisites are used to indicate the 
necessary competencies required for study at 
this level. The “core” courses of many disci- 
plines are offered at this level and provide the 
prerequisites necessary to senior level study. 
Many disciplines use 300 level courses to focus 
on areas of specialty or emphasis within the dis- 
ciplines. These courses do not give graduate 
credit unless included on an approved graduate 
study plan for a specific graduate student. 



Curricula Information 



400-499 Fourth year or senior level course work is intend- 
ed to provide depth of understanding or special 
focus appropriate to majors and generally re- 
quires prerequisite work. The student is expect- 
ed to be able to theorize and/or practice at a 
professional level of competence. Students en- 
rolled in 400 level course work are assumed to 
have advanced skills in writing proficiency. 
Courses at the 400 level are sufficiently sophisti- 
cated for inclusion on graduate study plans. 

500-599 Fifth year university study is for graduate stu- 
dents who are enrolled in advanced degree pro- 
grams. The courses of study are advanced and 
specialized in nature and require substantial un- 
dergraduate preparation. Independent initiative 
is expected in the theoretical, practical, critical, 
and analytical exploration of specialized topics. 
An essential feature of graduate study is the fa- 
cilitation of independent decision-making, inven- 
tion of theoretical constructs, application of re- 
search processes, and the development of origi- 
nal creations. 

700-701 Course numbers for graduate and postbacca- 
laureate students (including those seeking a cre- 
dential) to maintain continuous enrollment dur- 
ing a particular semester, and who are not en- 
rolled in regular courses. These numbers do not 
represent courses and do not therefore grant 
credit. 

900-999 Courses are specifically designed for profes- 
sional groups seeking vocational improvement 
or career advancement. Credit for these courses 
does not apply to undergraduate or graduate de- 
grees or credentials at the university. 

An honors course shall use the letter H. A laboratory 
course which accompanies another course should use the 
letter L. 

A controlled entry course is one which has enrollment 
requirements in addition to any prerequisite courses. Addi- 
tional requirements include prior approval of the instructor, 
special academic advisement, a qualifying exam, a place- 
ment test, an audition, a teaching credential, or similar 
special qualifications. 


Special Course Numbers 

For uniformity, certain types of courses have been listed by 
all departments and schools with the same numbers: 499 
and 599 are used respectively for undergraduate and 
graduate “independent study”; 196 or 496 for “student-to- 
student tutorials”; 597 for a graduate “project”; and 598 for 
a graduate “thesis.” 


Explanation of Course 
Notations 

Certain notations are uniformly used in the course descrip- 
tions in this catalog. 

1 . The figure in parentheses following the course title indi- 
cates the number of semester units for the course. 
Courses offered for varying units are indicated as (1-3) 
or (3-6). 

2. A course listing such as Afro-Ethnic Studies 108 (3) 
(Same as Linguistics 108) indicates that a student tak- 
ing the course may choose to count it in either of those 
two disciplines. 

3. A notation such as (Formerly 433) following the course 
title and the number of units indicates the same course 
previously was numbered 433. 


Student-to-Student Tutorials 

The "student-to-student tutorial” provides a formal way to 
encourage students to learn through teaching. It also pro- 
vides tutoring to all students who need and want tutorial 
assistance. 

In those departments which choose to offer such courses, 
the courses are numbered 196 or 496 and carry one to 
three units of credit. The prerequisites include a grade- 
point average of at least 3.0 and/or consent of the instruc- 
tor. The tutor and his/her tutee or tutees will work in mutual- 
ly advantageous ways by allowing all involved to delve 
more carefully and thoroughly into the materials presented 
in this specific course. One to three students may be tu- 
tored by the tutor unless the instructor decides that special 
circumstances warrant increasing the usual maximum of 
three tutees. Three hours of work per week are expected 
for each semester unit of credit, and this work may include, 
apart from contact hours with tutees, such other activities 
as: tutorial preparations; consulting with instructors; re- 
porting, analysis and evaluation of the tutorial exper- 
iences; and participation in an all-university orientation 
and evaluation program for tutors. A maximum of three 
units may be taken each semester. No more than three 
units of any combination of tutorial courses (196 or 496) 
may count toward an undergraduate degree program. The 
course must be taken as an elective and not counted to- 
ward general education, major or minor requirements. The 
course can be taken on a credit/no credit basis by the tutor. 
Requests for tutors must be initiated by tutees and can be 
initiated up until the official university census date. Tutors 
electing to respond to such requests will receive credits at 
the end of the semester and can register in the course until 
the official university census date. Both tutors and tutees 
must submit written reports, analyses and evaluations of 
their shared tutorial experience to the instructor, and both 
must participate in an all-university orientation program as 
well as in any conference or critique that the instructor of 
the course may require. 


Curricula Information 


155 


Further information can be obtained from the department 
in which the student is interested in a “student-to-student 
tutorial.” 

Independent Study 

Under the independent study program, the student may pur- 
sue topics or problems of special interest beyond the scope 
of a regular course under the supervision of a faculty adviser. 
The work is of a research or creative nature, and normally 
culminates in a paper, project, comprehensive examination, 
or performance. Before registering, the student must get his 
topic approved by the instructor who will be supervising inde- 
pendent study and by the department chair. 

A student may take no more than six units of independent 
study at the undergraduate level (299 and 499 numbered 
courses) in a given semester. No more than nine units of 
independent study may be applied toward completion of 
the baccalaureate degree. A graduate student may apply 
no more than six units of independent study (499 or 599 
numbered courses) toward completion of master’s degree, 
unless written approval is obtained from the appropriate 
school dean. 

Cross-Disciplinary University 
Programs 

A joint degree program is an endeavor involving two or 
more existing academic departments which need not be 
within the same school. Such programs are administered 
by program councils composed of representatives elected 
by participating departments. The joint degree programs 
are housed in administration units as follows: 

School of Human Development and Community 
Service 

Child Development, B.S. 

Human Services, B.S. 


School of Humanities and Social Sciences 

Environmental Studies, M.S. 

Latin American Studies, B.A. 

Liberal Studies, B.A. 

Russian and East European Area Studies, B.A. 

Social Sciences, M.A. 

The degree descriptions are located within the appropriate 
school section of this catalog. 

Bilingual/Cross-Cultural Studies 

Students may pursue a course of study with a bilingual/ 
cross-cultural emphasis. 

Complete course listings and details are available from the 
Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures, the 
Department of Chicano Studies, Division of Teacher Edu- 
cation and Educational Opportunity Program advisers. 


Library Courses 

201 Introduction to Library Resources (1) 

A practical introduction to library materials and methods en- 
abling undergraduate students to locate information for 
course-related, as well as independent study and research. 

200 Elements of Bibliographic Investigation (3) 

A survey of important information sources in various subject 
fields and the application of research methods which will 
enable students to become effective library users. Particular 
attention is given to the assembling of material for term 
papers and reports, including the preparation of bibliogra- 
phies. 

302 Library Research Methods for Specific Majors (1) 

Library research methodology and introduction to library re- 
sources in special subject areas such as business, educa- 
tion and science. 


156 


Curricula Information 



Curricula 


157 


























School of the Arts 


Dean: Jerry Samuelson 
Associate Dean: Frank Cummings III 

The learning opportunities within the School of the Arts are 
based on a commitment to artistic and academic excel- 
lence. We provide an environment which encourages indi- 
vidual achievement for performers, artists and scholars. 

Within the broader university liberal arts environment, the 
School of the Arts offers intensive programs in Art, Music, 
Theatre and Dance. We are also committed to the en- 
hancement of artistic awareness of all students. 

We extend a warm welcome to you and we promise that 
with your perseverance, we will do everything possible to 
further your goals and objectives in whatever field of art 
you choose. 

Academic Advisement is available through the depart- 
ments. Faculty advisors are available to assist students 
with career decisions and degree requirements. 

Several scholarships are available to students in the 
School of the Arts. Inquiries should be made to the respec- 
tive department offices. 



School of the Arts 


159 



Programs Offered 

Art, Bachelor of Arts 

Art History 
General Studio Art 
Teaching 

Art, Bachelor of Fine Arts 

Drawing and Painting 

Printmaking 

Sculpture 

Crafts 

Ceramics 

Graphic Design 

Illustration 

Environmental Design 
Creative Photography 

Minor in Art 

Art, Master of Arts 

Drawing and Painting 
Sculpture 

Crafts (including Ceramics, Glass, Fibers, Wood, 
Jewelry/Metalsmithing). 

Design (including Environmental Design, Graphic 
Design, Illustration, Exhibition Design, Creative 
Photography). 

Art History 

Art, Master of Fine Arts 

Drawing, Painting and Printmaking 

Sculpture 

Ceramics 

Crafts 

Design 

Creative Photography 

Certificate in Museum Studies 

Music, Bachelor of Arts 

Liberal Arts 

Music Education 

Music History and Theory 

Music, Bachelor of Music 

Commercial Music 

Composition 

Instrumental 

Keyboard 

Voice 

Accompanying 


Minor in Music 

Music, Master of Arts 

Music History and Literature 
Music Education 

Music, Master of Music 

Performance 

Theory-Composition 

Theatre Arts, Bachelor of Arts 

History and Theory 

Production/Performance 

Playwriting 

Oral Interpretation 

Acting 

Television 

Directing 

Technical Production/Design 
Dance 

Musical Theatre 
Teaching 

Theatre Arts, Master of Arts 

Acting and Directing 

Dramatic Literature and Criticism 

Oral Interpretation 

Playwriting 

Television 

Technical Theatre 

Theatre for Young Audiences 

Theatre History 

Theatre Arts, Master of Fine Arts 

Technical Theatre and Design 

Acting 

Directing 


School of Arts 



Department of Art 

Department Chair: Al Ching 
Department Office: Visual Arts 102 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Art 

Art History 
General Studio Art 
Teaching 

Bachelor of Fine Arts in Art 

Drawing and Painting 

Printmaking 

Sculpture 

Crafts 

Ceramics 

Graphic Design 

Illustration 

Environmental Design 
Creative Photography 

Minor in Art 

Master of Arts in Art 

Drawing and Painting 

Sculpture 

Crafts 

Design 

Art History 

Master of Fine Arts in Art 

Drawing, Painting, and Printmaking 

Sculpture 

Ceramics 

Crafts 

Design 

Creative Photography 

Certificate in Museum Studies 

Faculty 

Ruth Capelle, John Carter, Al Ching, Jim Cokas, 

Eileen Cowin, Frank E. Cummings III, Darryl Curran, 
Robert Ewing, Dextra Frankel, Maurice Gray, 

Raymond Hein, Thomas Holste, George James, 

Jim Jenkins, Lawrence Johnson, G. Ray Kerciu, 

Donald Lagerberg, Dana Lamb, Sergio Lizarraga, 

Clinton MacKenzie, Albert Porter, Ronald Raetzman, 

Leo Robinson, Jerry Rothman, Jerry Samuelson, 

V. Joachim Smith, Jon Stokesbary, Vincent Suez 

Advisers 

Undergraduate: Contact department office. 

Graduate: Darryl Curran 



Art 



INTRODUCTION 

The Department of Art offers programs which include the 
scholarly fields of art history, theory, analysis and criticism; 
the studio fields of drawing and painting, printmaking, 
sculpture, crafts (including fibers, jewelry, wood and met- 
al), ceramics (including glass), graphic design, creative 
photography, illustration, environmental design, and exhi- 
bition design; and the single subject teaching field of art 
education. 

Curricular plans for the Bachelor of Arts and the Bachelor 
of Fine Arts have been developed to meet the individual 
needs and interests of students in art. 

The general objectives of the programs are to provide a 
comprehensive learning environment which contributes 
technically and conceptually to the development of the art 
historian, the visual artist and the art teacher. Specifically, 
the programs provide opportunities for students to: (1 ) de- 
velop a knowledge and understanding of fundamental vi- 
sual experience and concepts basic to many forms and 
fields of art; (2) develop a critical appreciation of historical 
and contemporary art forms as they relate to individual and 
social needs and values; (3) express creatively one’s per- 
sonal experience and thought with skill and clarity in visual 
terms; and (4) to develop those understandings and skills 
necessary to pursue graduate studies in visual arts, or to 
teach art in the schools, and (5) develop the understanding 
and advanced specialized skills applicable to professional 
practice. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ART 

The Bachelor of Arts degree offers concentrations in Art 
History, General Studio Art, and Teaching. The program 
objectives are to provide correlative experiences, informa- 
tion and theory. 

The Art History concentration provides for an emphasis in 
the area of art history, theory, and appreciation and is 
particularly recommended for those students who wish to 
pursue graduate studies in art history or museum studies. 

The General Studio Art concentration is a general curricu- 
lum that provides a broad education in the visual arts. 

The Teaching concentration is for students who wish to 
meet the requirements for single subject instruction (Ryan 
Act) for teaching art in grades K-12. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, 
students must meet the other university requirements for a 
bachelor of arts degree. Students in the Teaching concen- 
tration must also meet specific requirements for the de- 
sired teaching credential. 

All art majors must take Art 300, Writing in the Visual Arts, 
and pass the university’s Examination in Writing Proficien- 
cy (EWP) after achieving junior standing (60 units). Testing 
dates for the EWP are available from the Testing Center or 
the Academic Advisement Center. 

To qualify for a bachelor of Arts in Art students must earn 
grades of C or better in all art courses required for the 
degree. 


Art History Concentration 

Preparation for the major (lower division — 21 units) 


Art 201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

Lower division studio courses 6 

Approved electives in art, American studies, an- 
thropology, history, literature, music, philos- 
ophy or theatre 9 

The major (upper division — 33 units) 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

480 Selected Topics in Art Hist 3 

481 Seminar in Art History 3 

Approved upper div. elec 3 

Upper division art history 21 

General Studio Art Concentration 

Lower Division (27 units) 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A.B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 3 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

Art Electives — Select at least two courses from 

two of the following areas: design; printmaking; 
creative photography; sculpture; ceramics; 
crafts; drawing and painting 6 

Upper Division (27 units) 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

Art History 6 

Studio area — include one course from each of 
the following: (1) drawing and painting; (2) 
sculpture, creative photography, printmaking; 

(3) crafts and ceramics; (4) design 12 


Electives — Choose two courses from at least 
two of the following: drawing and painting; 
printmaking; creative photography; sculpture; 
crafts (fibers and glass); ceramics; graphic de- 
sign; illustration; environmental design; exhibi- 
tion design; art education 6 

Teaching Concentration 

Single Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 
(Qualifies for Teaching Art in Grades K-12) 

Preparation for the major (lower division — 30 units) 


103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

106A Beginning Ceramics 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

1 1 7 Life Drawing 3 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

205A Beginning Crafts 3 

207A Drawing/Painting 3 


Major requirements (upper division — 24 units) 
Select either Drawing/ Painting or Crafts Emphasis: 


Drawing and Painting Emphasis: 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

307A,B Drawing and Painting 6 


162 


31 OA Watercolor 3 

31 7A Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 3 

347A Printmaking-Etching 3 

312 Modern Art 3 

441 A Media Exploration for Teaching Art 3 

Crafts Emphasis: 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

305A Advanced Crafts 3 

306A,B Advanced Ceramics 6 

31 OA Watercolor 3 

312 Modern Art 3 

31 5A Jewelry 3 

441 A Media Exploration for Teaching Art 3 

Professional Preparation (24-27 units) 

Art Ed 442 Teaching Art in the Secondary 

School 3 

Education course work 9-12 

Student teaching (one semester full-time) 12 


Program Requirements: 

1 . Be advised by a faculty adviser in art education as- 
signed by the art department chair. 

2. Fulfill credential requirements listed in the catalog with- 
in the School of Human Development and Community 
Service for the Ryan Act curriculum. 

3. Meet the requirements listed under the Teaching con- 
centration. 

4. Complete the major requirements prior to enrolling in 
the teacher education program. 

5. Be admitted to teacher education through the School of 
Human Development and Community Service prior to 
enrollment in Art Ed 442, professional education 
courses and student teaching. 

6. Be accepted for teacher education and student teach- 
ing based on candidate quotas, portfolio review, and 
evidence of success in completed university course 
work. 

7. Be recommended by the faculty adviser in art educa- 
tion. 

8. Complete Secondary Education 310 and 386 or equiv- 
alents. 

9. Pass C-BEST exam prior to admission to Teacher Edu- 
cation. 

10. Have a G.P.A. of 2.89 overall, 3.0 in major. 

Credential Information 

Upon completion of the above program and the bachelor of 
arts degree, the student is eligible for a partial credential, 
which meets state requirements for teaching art in grades 
K-12. Within the specified period of time from the begin- 
ning of a teaching assignment, 30 units of course work 
must be completed at an accredited college or university to 
qualify for a clear credential. Credentials are issued from 
the institution where this requirement has been completed. 


Multiple Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

The following three courses are recommended for all stu- 
dents intending to teach in the elementary schools in multi- 
ple subject classrooms. 

Art 380 Art and Child Development (3) 

Music 333 Music and Child Development (3) 

Theatre 402 Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 

BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS IN ART 

The Bachelor of Fine Arts degree is a professional pro- 
gram providing directed studies in nine studio concentra- 
tions within the visual arts. The program is designed for 
students seeking in-depth preparation for specialized 
goals selected from one of the following areas: drawing 
and painting; printmaking; sculpture; crafts; ceramics; 
graphic design; illustration; environmental design; or cre- 
ative photography. 

The program develops the understanding and advanced 
specialized skills applicable to professional practice, and 
to meet entrance requirements to graduate school. 

Admission Requirements 

All freshman students must apply to the B.A. (Bachelor of 
Arts) in Art program for their first semester of residence. 
After completing a minimum of 12 lower-division prepara- 
tion units with B or better grades, students may contact the 
Art Department to change their objective to the B.F.A. in 
Art program. 

Students who transfer from community colleges or other 
universities may apply to the BFA, providing they qualify. 
To qualify, they must have completed 12 units of studio art 
courses with B or better grades. 

Program Requirements 

The Bachelor of Fine Arts degree program requires a mini- 
mum of 70 units in art, with 28 lower-division units of prep- 
aration and 42 upper-division units, including 24 units in an 
area of concentration, six units of art history, three units of 
writing in art, and nine units of art electives. In addition to 
the minimum 70 unit requirement for the B.F.A. degree, 
students must meet the other university requirements for a 
bachelor’s degree (see the university Catalog and Class 
Schedule). 

To qualify for a bachelor of Fine Arts in Art, students must 
earn grades of C or better in all art courses required for the 
degree. 

Drawing and Painting Concentration 


Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

1 1 7 Life Drawing 4 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

207A.B Drawing and Painting 6 


163 


Art 


Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

307A.B Drawing and Painting 6 

317A,B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting — 6 

487B Special Studies, Life Drawing 3 

487A Special Studies, Painting 3 

Upper division drawing and painting options from 

487A.B and/or C 6 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Printmaking Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A.B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

1 1 7 Life Drawing 4 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

207A Drawing and Painting 3 

247 Beginning Printmaking 3 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

307A Drawing and Painting 3 

317A,B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 6 

338A Creative Photography 3 

347A, B Printmaking-Etching, Lithography 6 

487D Special Studies, Printmaking 6 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Sculpture Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A.B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

1 1 7 Life Drawing 4 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

216A.B Beginning Sculpture 6 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

316A,B Sculpture 6 

317A,B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 6 

326A Ceramic Sculpture 3 

336A Techniques and Theories, Cast Sculpture 3 

486A Special Studies, Sculpture 6 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Crafts Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

1 1 7 Life Drawing 1 

123B Descriptive Drawing 3 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

205A,B Beginning Crafts 6 


Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

305A,B Advanced Crafts 6 

Select 9 units from: 9 

306A,B Advanced Ceramics 

315A.B Jewelry 

330 Fibers and Papers 


355A.B Fibers, Fabric Printing & Dyeing 


364A,B Stained Glass 
365A,B Weaving 

485B Special Studies, Crafts 6 

495 Internship in Art 3 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Ceramics Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

106A,B Beginning Ceramics 6 

107A.B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

306A,B Advanced Ceramics 6 

326A,B Ceramic Sculpture 6 

424A.B Glass Forming 6 

484A or 484B Special Studies 6 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Graphic Design Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A.B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

1 1 7 Life Drawing 4 

201A.B Art and Civilization 6 

223A,B Lettering, Typography & Rendering 6 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

323A,B Graphic Design 6 

338A Creative Photography 3 

363 A, B Illustration 6 

483A Special Studies, Graphic Design 6 

495 Internship 3 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Illustration Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A.B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

123A Descriptive Drawing 3 


164 


201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

223B Lettering, Typography & Rendering 3 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

317A,B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 6 

323A Graphic Design 3 

363A,B Illustration 6 

483C Special Studies, Illustration 6 

495 Internship 3 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Environmental Design Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A.B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

1 1 7 Life Drawing 1 

123B Descriptive Drawing 3 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

213A.B Beginning Environmental Design 6 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

313A,B Environmental Design 6 

333A.B Environmental Design 6 

453A Exhibition Design 3 

483B Special Studies, Environmental Design . . 6 

495 Internship in Art 3 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Creative Photography Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A.B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

1 1 7 Life Drawing 4 

123A Descriptive Drawing 3 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

Art Elective 3 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

31 7A Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 3 

338A,B Creative Photography 6 

339A Photo Illustration or 348 Artists’ Books . . 3 

438A.B Creative Color Photography 6 

489 Special Studies, Creative Photo 6 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 


•Students must also take and pass the Examination in Writing Proficiency 
(EWP). 


MINOR IN ART 

A minimum of 24 units is required for a minor in art of which 
a minimum of 12 units are to be in upper division courses 
and in residence. Included in the program must be a basic 
course in each of the following areas: (1 ) art history, theory, 
analysis and criticism; (2) design; (3) drawing and painting; 
and (4) crafts. Those students planning to qualify for a 
standard teaching credential with specialization in ele- 
mentary or secondary teaching and art for a minor must 
obtain approval from the Art Department for the courses 
selected to meet the upper division requirements for a 
minor in art. 

The following additional list of courses would be strongly 
recommended for students who wish to expand their 
knowledge in any or all of the arts: 

Art 1 00, 1 01 , 1 03, 1 04, 1 06A, 1 07A, 201 A,B, 31 0A,B, 330, 
380, 441 A, B 

Dance 101, 112, 122, 132, 142, 323A.B, 422 
Music 1 1 1 A,B, 184A,B, 251, 281B,P,S,W, 283, 381 
Theatre 100, 263, 276A, 277, 370A,B, 402A.B, 403A,B 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ART 

This program provides a balance of study and practice for 
those who wish a career in the visual arts, or who want to 
prepare for further graduate work in the field. The program 
offers the following areas of concentration: (1 ) drawing and 
painting (including printmaking); (2) sculpture; (3) crafts 
(including ceramics, wood, glass, fibers, jewelry/metal- 
smithing); (4) design (including environmental design, 
graphic design, illustration, exhibition design, or creative 
photography); and (5) art history. 

Admission Requirements 

1. Conditionally classified standing requires: 

A. A baccalaureate degree in art from an accredited 
institution, or 24 upper division units in art. 

B. GPA minimum of 2.5 in the last 60 semester units 
attempted. 

C. Special requirements: 

(1) Studio program: satisfactory review of prelimi- 
nary portfolio by a faculty member in the area of 
studio concentration. 

(2) Art history program: satisfactory preliminary in- 
terview by a faculty member in art history. 

2. Classified standing requires: 

A. An approved undergraduate major in art or 24 units 
of approved upper division art including at least 12 
units in the area of concentration completed with 
grades of B or better. 

B. Comprehensive Portfolio review: Before any units 
may apply to the approved study program for the 
degree, the student must participate in an area fac- 
ulty committee evaluation of the student’s back- 
ground, including a statement of purpose by the 


165 


Art 


student and review of creative work; or, for art histo- 
ry applicants, submission of assigned research pa- 
pers. Portfolio review dates are usually in April for 
the following fall semester, and in November for the 
following spring semester of each year. Arrange- 
ments may be made through the Art Department 
office to meet these deadlines prior to admission. 

C. Art history program: reading knowledge of a foreign 
language may be required before advancement to 
candidacy. 

D. Development of an approved study plan. 

Study Plan 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study 
approved by the student’s graduate committee of which 1 5 
must be 500-level courses. The 30 units are distributed as 
follows: 

Units 

1 . Core courses in art history, philosophy, analysis 

and criticism 9 

A. Studio program: 

Art 500A Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3 
units) 

Art history program: 

Art 51 1 Seminar on the Content and Method 
of Art History (3 units) (ADMISSION WITH 
CLASSIFIED STANDING ONLY) 

B. Studio Program: 

Art 500B Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3 
units) 

Art history program: 

Art 512 Seminar on Selected Topics in Art 
History (3 units) (ADMISSION WITH CLAS- 
SIFIED STANDING ONLY) 

C. Art 481 Seminar in Art History (3 units), or 
substitute of a 400-level course in art history, 
theory, analysis or criticism on the recom- 
mendation of the major adviser. 

2. 500-and/or 400-level courses in the area of con- 

centration selected from one of the following 
(minimum of six units at 500-level) 12 

A. Drawing and painting (including printmaking) 

B. Sculpture 

C. Crafts (including ceramics, glass, fibers, 
wood, jewelry/metalsmithing) 

D. Design (including environmental design, 
graphic design, illustration, exhibition design, 
or creative photography) 

E. Art history 

3. Additional course work in the area of concentra- 
tion or approved electives 3 or 6 


4. Art 597 Project (for studio); or Art 598 


Thesis (for art history) 3 or 6 

Total 30 


The M.A. study plan must be completed with a B 
average, and all courses in the area of concentration 
be completed with grades of B or better. Every grad- 
uate student is required to demonstrate writing abil- 
ity commensurate with the baccalaureate degree. 
Please refer to the section on Graduate Regulations 
for further clarification. The Department of Art re- 
quires the studio candidate for the Master of Arts in 
Art to exhibit the project in one of the department’s 
graduate galleries prior to graduation. The art histo- 
ry candidate is required to submit a written thesis 
based on a specific topic of research. 

For further information consult the graduate pro- 
gram adviser. 

MASTER OF FINE ARTS IN ART 

The Master of Fine Arts in Art features a rigorous 
studio program for the seriously committed, respon- 
sible and talented student. The curriculum and facul- 
ty challenge the students to focus on the goal of 
becoming professional artists. 

The M.F.A. program provides in-depth study within a 
60-unit approved study plan in the following areas of 
concentration: (1) design (including graphic design, 
Illustration, environmental design, and exhibition de- 
sign); (2) ceramics (including glass); (3) crafts (in- 
cluding fibers, jewelry/metalsmithing, and wood- 
working/furniture); (4) sculpture; (5) drawing, paint- 
ing, and printmaking; and (6) creative photography. 

Admission Requirements 

An applicant may be accepted to the university in 
one of three categories: 

1. Postbaccalaureate Unclassified (no degree ob- 
jective or major declared). This is for students 
who hold a bachelor’s degree and wish to take 
additional course work to fulfill prerequisites or 
prepare for the comprehensive review. To qualify 
for admission an applicant must hold a baccalau- 
reate degree from an accredited institution, have 
attained a GPA of at least 2.5 in the last 60 units 
attempted and have been in good standing at the 
last college attended. Admission with postbacca- 
laureate unclassified standing does not consti- 
tute admission to the art graduate program or 
graduate degree curricula. 

2. Conditionally Classified (objective declared in 
art). An applicant who is admitted with condition- 
ally classified standing may enroll in graduate 
courses with the exception of ART 500 A,B. Ad- 
mission requirements are the same as for post- 
baccalaureate unclassified standing. In addition, 
the department requires all applicants to under- 
take the comprehensive portfolio review and be 
recommended for conditionally classified stand- 
ing by the faculty portfolio review committee. 


166 


Art 


3. Classified (approved study plan for the M.F.A. degree). 
Admission requirements are the same as for postbac- 
calaureate unclassified, with the addition of the follow- 
ing requirements: 

a. An approved undergraduate major in art or 24 units 
of approved upper-division art including a minimum 
of 18 units of upper-division study in the area of 
concentration completed with a grade-point aver- 
age of 3.0 or better. 

b. Comprehensive Portfolio Review. Before any units 
may apply to the approved study plan for the de- 
gree, students must receive a satisfactory faculty 
committee evaluation of their creative work, their 
ability to verbalize about their work and their aca- 
demic background. The comprehensive portfolio 
review is held semi-annually, in the fall and spring. 
Exact dates are announced each semester. A de- 
tailed description of the portfolio review may be 
obtained from the art department graduate sec- 
retary. 

c. Development, with the student’s graduate commit- 
tee, of an approved study plan. 

Study Plan 

The M.F.A. degree program requires 60 units of graduate 
study approved by the student’s graduate committee and 
the dean of graduate studies. The study plan must be 
completed with a grade-point average of 3.0 or better. The 
courses in the concentration must be completed with a 
grade of “B” or better. The 60 unit study plan is distributed 
as follows: 


Areas Units 

Theory, criticism: Art 500A, 500B 6 

History 9 

Area of concentration 24 

Electives in art 12 

Independent study: research 3 

Project 6 

Total 60 


Master of Fine Arts Project 

The M.F.A. project exhibition constitutes a professional 
one-person art exhibit which is installed in one of the de- 
partment’s graduate galleries and announced for public 
view by the student as the final phase of the M.F.A. pro- 
gram requirements. 

The Department of Art is nationally accredited at the high- 
est level of quality and professionalism (Division I) by the 
National Association of Schools of Art and Design. For 
further details on the comprehensive portfolio review, com- 
municate with the graduate coordinator or graduate secre- 
tary in the art department, Visual Arts 1 02 (71 4/773-3471 ). 


CERTIFICATE IN MUSEUM STUDIES 

Courses leading to the certificate are designed to educate 
students in museum practices in preparation for entry into 
the museum profession. The curriculum includes instruc- 
tion in the historical development and philosophical basis 
of collections, exhibitions and their design, and curator- 
ship. A museum internship is required. The certificate in 
museum studies may be undertaken as a self-contained 
program or may be taken in conjunction with the Master of 
Arts in Art degree or the Master of Fine Arts in Art degree 
or, by special permission, with other graduate degrees in 
the university. (For an M.A. or M.F.A. in Art degree with an 
exhibition design emphasis see M.A. and M.F.A. empha- 
ses under the design concentration.) 

Prerequisites 

1. B.A. in Art or other major by special permission 

2. Specific course prerequisites: 

A. 12 units in upper-division art history 

B. 6 units in graphic design and exhibition design 

C. 3 units of advanced writing (Communications 435 
Editorial and Critical Writing; or Communications 
362 Public Relations Writing; or English 301 Ad- 
vanced College Writing) 

D. 3 units of beginning accounting 

Study Plan 

The certificate program requires 24 units. The 24 units are 
distributed as follows: 

Units 


Art 463 Museum Studies 3 

Art 464 Museum Conservation 3 

Art 481 Seminar in Art History 3 

Art 483D Exhibition Design 3 

Art 495 Internship in Art 3 

Art 501 Curatorship 3 

Art 503D Exhibition Design 6 

Total 24 


For further information, consult the Department of Art. 


Art Courses 

100 Exploratory Course In Art (3) 

Use of a variety of art materials, processes and concepts. 
Field trips required. Not open to art majors for credit except 
by permission of Art Department. (6 hours activity) 

101 Introduction to Art (3) 

Historical and contemporary art forms of painting, sculpture, 
architecture and design. Field trips required. Not open to art 
majors for credit except by permission of Art Department. 


167 


Art 


103 Two-dimensional Design (3) 

Materials, concepts and elements of two-dimensional visual 
organization. (6 hours activity) 

104 Three-dimensional Design (3) 

Materials, concepts and elements of three-dimensional visu- 
al organization. (6 hours activity) 

106 A Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Form as related to ceramic materials, tools, processes. Kiln 
loading and firing, hand building, wheel throwing and raku. 
Instructional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

106B Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 106A. Form as related to ceramics. Glaze 
batching and its application, and the presentation of ceramic 
technique. Instructional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting (3,3) 

The traditional and contemporary use of drawing and paint- 
ing materials integrated with visual experiences and con- 
cepts. 107A emphasizes drawing; 107B emphasizes paint- 
ing. (6 hours activity) (107A = CAN ART 8, 107B = CAN 
ART 10) 

117 Life Drawing (1) 

The live model. May be repeated to a maximum of 4 units. 
Duplicate enrollment of this coures within the same semes- 
ter is permissible. (3 hours activity for each unit) 

123A,B Descriptive Drawing (3,3) 

Traditional and contemporary drawing techniques and theor- 
ies. 123A, representation of nature forms; 123B, manmade 
and mechanical forms including linear perspective. (6 hours 
activity) 

201 A, B Art and Civilization (3,3) 

The ideas, forms and styles of the visual arts as they devel- 
oped in various cultures from prehistoric time to the present. 

205A Beginning Crafts (3) 

Traditional and contemporary concepts and processes with 
emphasis on design principles in the development of esthetic 
forms based on function. (9 hours laboratory) 

205B Beginning Crafts (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 and 205A. Art 104 may be taken 
concurrently. The development of esthetic forms based on 
function, with emphasis on design principles and the creative 
use of hand tools and power equipment. (9 hours laboratory) 

207A,B Drawing and Painting (Experimental Methods and 
Materials) (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 117, 107A.B or equivalents. Traditional 
and contemporary methods and materials. (6 hours activity) 

21 3A Beginning Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. Design methodology and 
communication skills in the environmental design field. (6 
hours activity) 

21 3B Interior Space Planning and Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104; 21 3A or consent of instructor. 
The planning and organization of residential and commercial 
interior space. (6 hours activity) 

216A,B Beginning Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 104. The creative use of wood and metal, 
power equipment and hand tools. Instructional fee required. 
(9 hours laboratory) 


223A,B Lettering, Typography and Rendering (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. The history, design and use of letter 
forms; techniques for rough and comprehensive layouts; the 
use of hand-lettered forms and handset type. (6 hours activity) 

247 Beginning Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 107A.B. Printmaking forms; litho, etching, 
woodcut and serigraphy. Instructional fee required. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts (3) 

Principles, practices and objectives of writing in the visual arts. 
Includes descriptive, analytical and expressive essays; project 
and grant proposals; artist s statements; resumes; and profes- 
sional correspondence. Satisfies the classroom portion of the 
upper-division writing requirements for art majors. 

301 Ancient Art (3) 

The developments in art from the Paleolithic to late antiquity. 

302 Medieval Art (3) 

The developments in art from the late antiquity through the 
Gothic. 

303 Architectural and Interior Rendering (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 1 23B or consent of instructor. Rendering of 
architectural, interior and landscape environments, utilizing 
mechanical perspective and contemporary design drawing 
delineation techniques. Mixed media. (6 hour activity) 

305 A, B Advanced Crafts (3,3) 

Prerequisites: 205A and 205B. Advanced concepts and pro- 
cesses in the development of esthetic forms based on func- 
tion, emphasizing individual growth and personal expres- 
sion. (9 hours laboratory) 

306 A, B Advanced Ceramics (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103, 104 and 106A,B or consent of instruc- 
tor. Forms and the creative use of ceramic concepts and 
materials; design, forming, glazing and firing. Instructional 
fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

307A,B Drawing and Painting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A.B, 117, 207A.B or equivalents. The 
concepts, materials and activities of drawing and painting, em- 
phasizing individual growth, plan and craft. (6 hours activity) 

310A,B Watercolor (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 107A.B or equivalents. An exploration of 
watercolor media related to varied subject matter and design 
applications. Includes field trip activity. Provides skills and 
concepts useful for school art programs. (6 hours activity) 

311 Foundations of Modern Art (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Painting and sculpture 
from the French Revolution to the end of the 19th century. 

312 Modern Art (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Painting, the graphic 
arts, & sculpture from late 19th century to World War II. 

31 3A Environmental Design: Unit Concepts (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 and 213. Environmental design 
projects and the study of unit concepts. (6 hours activity) 

31 3B Environmental Design: Systems Concepts (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 31 3A. Environmental design projects and 
systems concepts. (6 hours activity) 

31 5A,B Jewelry (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 205A and 305A. Art 305A may be taken 
concurrently. Design and creation of jewelry. (9 hours lab) 


168 *, 


316A.B Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 104 and 21 6A. Sculptural materials and 
processes. Instructional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

317 Life Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: three units lower division life drawing. Draw- 
ing, painting and sculpture from the live model. (9 hours lab) 

31 7A Drawing and Painting 
317B Drawing and Painting 
317C Sculpting 

31 8A Drawing and Painting the Head and Hands (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A.B and Art 117. Specialized problems 
in construction and anatomy of the human head and hands, 
and their principal use in drawing, painting and illustration. (9 
hours laboratory) 

31 8B Portraiture (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A, 107B, 3 units of Art 117. Compre- 
hensive problems in composition, concept, content and ex- 
ecution of portraits. 

319 Landscape Painting (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A and B. Contemporary concepts and 
techniques of painting the landscape. 

320 History of Architecture Before the Modern Era (3) 

A study of selected monuments from Stonehenge through the 
late Baroque. Interrelationship between patronage, style, func- 
tion, structural principles and technological developments. 

323 A, B Graphic Design (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 223A and 223B or consent of instruc- 
tor. Development and projection of ideas in relation to the 
technical, esthetic and psychological aspects of advertising 
art. Instructional materials fee required. (6 hours activity) 

324 Beginning Glass Forming (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104 or consent of instructor. Hot 
glass laboratory equipment and techniques. Handling hot 
glass. Instructional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

326A.B Ceramic Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 117 or consent of instructor. 
Development of ceramic technology into individual sculptural 
forms and techniques. Instructional fee required. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

330 Fibers and Papers (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104, or consent of instructor. The 
use of fibers and papers as an art form. (9 hours laboratory) 

333A Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 31 3B. Materials and structural concepts as 
design determinants. (6 hours activity) 

333B Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 333A. Change and growth as design deter- 
minants; experimental design concepts and methods. (6 
hours activity) 

336 A, B Casting Techniques and Theories of Cast Sculpture 
(3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 31 6A. Waxing, molding and metal casting 
techniques. Aluminum and bronze and the lost wax process. 
(9 hours laboratory) 


338A Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103 or its equivalent. The photographic me- 
dia in personal expression. Historical attitudes and pro- 
cesses; new materials and contemporary esthetic trends. 
Field trips required. Instructional fee required. (9 hours labo- 
ratory) 

338B Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A. The photographic medium in person- 
al expression. Historical and new processes. Field trips re- 
quired. Instructional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

339A Photo-Illustration (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 338. The use of specialized pho- 
tographic techniques such as lighting, camera position, color 
and motion for solutions to illustration problems of narration, 
visual description, juxtaposition and imagery. Instructional 
fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

339B Photo Illustration (3) 

Prerequisites: 338A and 339 A, or consent of instructor. Con- 
cepts and attitudes in the field of photo illustration. Illustra- 
tion problems using narrative, visual description, juxtaposi- 
tion and imagery. Instructional fee required. 

347 A Printmaking Etching (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B, 117, and 247. Concept develop- 
ment, exploration and materials involved in printmaking tech- 
niques. Includes etching, aquatint. Instructional fee required. 
(9 hours laboratory) 

347 B Printmaking Lithography (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A.B, 117, and 247. Concept develop- 
ment, exploration and materials involved in lithography. In- 
structional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

348 Artists’ Books (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A or 247, or consent of instructor. 
Personal vision and concepts applied to the book form as art; 
the history and aesthetics of artists’ books. 

353 Environmental Design Practice (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 213, 313 and 333, or consent of instructor. 
Environmental design practice, including research tech- 
niques, project administration, specification writing, estimat- 
ing, forms and documents, evaluation techniques and ethics. 
Areas of emphasis: interior design, architecture, landscape 
architecture. 

355A,B Fibers: Fabric Printing and Dyeing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A or B or consent of instructor. 
Design concepts and printing and dyeing processes as ap- 
plied to fabrics. (9 hours laboratory) 

363A,B Illustration (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A.B and 117. Story, book, maga- 
zine, and film illustration. (6 hours activity) 

364 A, B Stained Glass (3,3) 

Leaded and stained glass; individual exploration, growth, 
planning and craftsmanship. (6 hours activity) 

365A,B Fibers: Weaving (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 1 03 and 1 04 or 205A.B or consent of instruc- 
tor. The use of the loom and weaving processes to design and 
create fiber and fabric art forms. (9 hours laboratory) 

371 History and Theory of Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 201 A and B. The chronology of design in 
relation to the philosophical and theoretical ideologies which 
have, along with related socio-political and economic condi- 
tions, influenced its implementation and development. 


169 


Art 


375 Professional Practices in the Arts (3) 

Practices unique to the visual arts, including an overview of 
changing concepts in the art market, traditional roles in cultural 
context, portfolio development, strategies for protecting ideas 
and avoiding abuses, and long term professional development. 

380 Art and Child Development (3) 

Art concepts, materials and processes as they relate to child 
development. (6 hours activity) 

413 History of Contemporary Art (3) 

Prerequisites: 312 and 461 B or consent of instructor. A his- 
torical perspective of contemporary art beginning with major 
developments in Europe and the United States in the 1950’s. 
Emphasis on new materials, new exhibition methods, and in 
particular the major conceptual issues raised by individual 
artists and groups. 

420 History of Modern Architecture (3) 

Development of modern architecture. The interrelationship 
among architecture, technology and society, from the in- 
dustrial and political revolutions of the 18th century to the 
present. Exploration of national differences and various 
approaches to city planning. 

424A,B Glass Forming (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 324 or consent of instructor. The 
chemistry, handling and manipulation of glass and its tools 
and equipment for the ceramic artist. Instructional fee re- 
quired. (9 hours laboratory) 

431 Renaissance Art (3) 

Painting, sculpture and architecture from the late 1 3th to 1 6th 
century in Italy. 

432 Baroque Art (3) 

Painting, sculpture and architecture of the 17th century in 
Europe. 

438A,B Creative Color Photography (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 338A,B. Concepts and techniques in cre- 
ative color photography. Historical attitudes and contempo- 
rary trends. Personal involvement with the medium. Instruc- 
tional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

441 A, B Media Exploration for Teaching Art (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 107A,B, 205A or consent of 
instructor. Exploring the art media used in secondary school 
art programs today. Materials for secondary art curriculum. 
Two and three dimensional media in subject matter applica- 
tions. (6 hours activity) 

443 Studio Graphics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 223A,B and 323A,B. Admission by inter- 
view and portfolio review. Studio production of graphics for 
the School of the Arts, including printed mailers, posters, 
booklets, catalogs, advertisements. Students experience 
designer/client relationships and translate concepts into pro- 
duction. (9 hours activity) May be repeated once for credit. 

453A,B Exhibition Design (3,3) 

Technical and esthetic experience in problem-solving exhibi- 
tion design concepts, evaluation and design analysis. The 
production of exhibitions in the University Art Gallery, their 
selection, design, installation, lighting and supportive inter- 
pretive material. (More than 9 hours laboratory) 


460 B Pre-Columbian Art (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 201 A, B or consent of instructor. An intro- 
duction to the art and architecture of Meso and South Amer- 
ica from the early formative stage to the Spanish Conquest. 
Emphasis on esthetic achievement with varying contexts of 
pre-Columbian culture. 

461 A American Art: Colonial Period to 1900 (3) 

The historical development of painting and sculpture in 
America from the Colonial Period until 1900. The role of the 
visual arts in helping to define, reflect and challenge Ameri- 
can values and institutions. 

461 B American Art: 20th Century (3) 

Painting and sculpture in America during the 20th century. 
The role of the visual arts in helping to define, reflect and 
challenge American values and institutions. 

463 Museum Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 453A, six units of art history or anthropology, 
and consent of instructor. Museums, their structure, function 
and operation. Museum governance, ethics, grant proposal 
preparation, conservation and educational programming. 

464 Museum Conservation (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 463. The examination of the preservation of 
objects; the history, role and principles of conservation within 
a museum context. Three combined sessions at Conserva- 
tion Center, LACMA; Huntington Library; J. Paul Getty Muse- 
um; and Museum of Cultural History, UCLA. 

470 History and Esthetics of Photography (3) 

Prerequisites: 201 A, B. Photography from ancient optical ob- 
servations through 19th-century invention to 20th-century 
acceptance as an art form. Esthetic movement and influen- 
tial innovators. Lectures, slides and class discussion. 

480 Selected Topics in Art History (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 201 A or B and consent of instructor. De- 
tailed study of the work of individual artists, patronage in 
particular places, specific pictorial, sculptural and architec- 
tural programs or art history periods. (Specific topic to be 
announced in class schedules.) 

481 Seminar in Art History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and evaluation in 
one area of art history and appreciation. May be repeated up 
to a maximum of 6 units. 

483 Special Studies in Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Maximum of 12 units, but 
no more than 3 units in any one area in a single semester. 
483A Graphic Design Instructional materials fee required. 
(6 hours activity) 

483B Environmental Design (6 hours activity) 

483C Illustrations (6 hours activity) 

483D Exhibition Design (More than 9 hours laboratory) 

483E Computer Assisted Graphics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 31 3 A or Art 323A or Art 363A and consent 
of instructor. Theory and practice of design using the comput- 
er. Students will explore the numerous applications of the 
computer through lecture demonstration, studio/ laboratory 
experience, guest speakers and field trips. May be repeated 
twice for credit. Instructional materials fee required. 

484A Special Studies in Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper-division units in ceram- 
ics. Maximum of 12 units, but no more than three units in any 
one area in a single semester. Instructional fee required. (9 
hours laboratory) 


170 


Art 


484 B Special Studies in Glass (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper-division units in glass. 
Maximum of 1 2 units, but no more than three units in any one 
area in a single semester. Instructional fee required. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

485 Special Studies in Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper-division units in desig- 
nated area or consent of instructor. Maximum of 1 2 units, but 
no more than three units in any one area in a single semester. 
(9 hours laboratory) 

485A Jewelry 

485B General Crafts 

485C Metalsmithing 

485D Fibers — Weaving 

485E Fibers — Fabric Printing and Dyeing 

485F Fibers and Fabrics 

486 Special Studies in Sculpture (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 316A,B and consent of instructor. Maxi- 
mum of 12 units but no more than three units in a single 
semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

486A Modeling and Fabrication Instructional fee required. 
486B Casting 

487 Special Studies in Drawing and Painting and 
Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisites: a minimum of six upper-division units in draw- 
ing and painting, and consent of instructor. Maximum of 12 
units, but no more than three units in any one area in a single 
semester. 

487A Painting (6 hours activity) 

487B Life Drawing (9 hours laboratory) 

487C Drawing (6 hours activity) 

487D Printmaking Instructional fee required. (9 hours labo- 
ratory) 

489 Special Studies in Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A.B. Photography as personal expres- 
sion. Maximum of 12 units but no more than three units in a 
single semester. Instructional fee required. (9 hours labora- 
tory) 

491 Professional Seminar (3) (Formerly 490) 

Guest speakers from professions in the visual arts. A lecture/ 
discussion seminar relevant to current issues and concepts 
in making and experiencing art. Topics will differ each se- 
mester. For the senior and graduate art major. May be re- 
peated up to a maximum of 6 units. 

495 Internship in Art (3) (Formerly 498) 

Work in a specific art field in business or industry. Must have 
senior standing. 

499 Independent Research (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in art with consent of department 
chair and written consent of instructor. May be repeated for 
credit. 

500A Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Prerequisite: classified standing. Problems and issues in art. 
Intellectual clarification and verbal articulation of individual 
intent as an artist. Oral and written material in support of the 
master’s project, (with 500B meets graduate level writing 
requirement). 


500 B Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 500A. Directed research in the area of ma- 
jor emphasis. Oral and written material on historical back- 
grounds and developments in art as they relate to individual 
intent as an artist (stated in Art 500A) and in support of the 
master’s project, (with 500A meets graduate level writing 
requirement) 

501 Curatorship (3) 

Prerequisites: B.A. in art, anthropology or other major by 
special permission, and Art 481 and 463. The curator col- 
lects, cares for and studies objects. 

503 Graduate Problems in Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development 
and evaluation of individual projects listed below. Maximum 
of 12 units in each area, but no more than three units in any 
one area in a single semester. 

503A Graphic Design (6 hours activity) 

503B Environmental Design (6 hours activity) 

503C Illustrations (6 hours activity) 

503D Exhibition Design (More than 9 hours laboratory) 

504 A, B Graduate Problems in Ceramics (3,3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development 
and evaluation of individual projects in ceramics. Maximum 
of 12 units in each area but no more than three units in a 
single semester. Instructional fee required. (9 hours labora- 
tory) 

505 Graduate Problems in Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development 
and evaluation of individual projects listed below. Maximum 
of 12 units in each area but no more than three units in a 
single semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

505A Jewelry 
505B General Crafts 

505D — Fibers Weaving, Fibers and Fabrics 

506 A, B Graduate Problems in Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development 
and evaluation of individual projects in sculpture. Maximum 
of 12 units in each area but no more than three units in a 
single semester. Instructional fee required. (9 hours labora- 
tory) 

507 Graduate Problems in Drawing, Painting and 
Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisite: 12 units of upper-division drawing and painting. 
Planning, development and evaluation of individual projects 
listed below. Maximum of 12 units in each area but no more 
than three units in a single semester. 

507 A Painting (6 hours activity) 

507 B Life Drawing (9 hours laboratory) 

507C Drawing (6 hours activity) 

507D Printmaking Instructional fee required. (9 hours labo- 
ratory) 

508 A, B Graduate Problems in Creative Photography (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Planning, development 
and evaluation of individual projects in photography. Maxi- 
mum of 1 2 units in each area, but no more than three units in 
a single semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

511 Seminar on the Content & Method of Art History (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 481 . Methods of research, bibliography, and 
theories and philosophies of art historical scholarship. May 
be repeated up to a maximum of 6 units. 


171 


Art 


512 Seminar on Selected Topics in Art History (3) 

Prerequisite: appropriate upper-division Art course ap- 
proved by instructor and Art 511 or consent of instructor. 
Analysis and evaluation of specific historical significance in- 
cluding cultural, social and economic circumstances. May be 
repeated up to a maximum of 6 units. 

597 Project (3 or 6) 

Prerequisites: Art 500A,B, written consent of instructor and 
recommendation of the student’s graduate committee. Art 
500B may be taken concurrently with Art 597 on approval of 
instructor. Development and presentation of a creative project 
in the concentration beyond regularly offered coursework. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Prerequisites: Art 51 1 , 512, written consent of instructor and 
recommendation of the student s graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students in art with consent of department 
chair and written consent of instructor. May be repeated for 
credit. 


Art Education Courses 

442 Teaching Art in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, 
methods and practices for teaching art in secondary 
schools. Required before student teaching of majors in art 
for the single subject teaching credential. 

449E Externship in Secondary Teaching (3) 

For candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act creden- 
tial. See description and prerequisites under Division of 
Teacher Education. Offered every fall semester. 

4491 Internship in Secondary Teaching (10) 

For candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act creden- 
tial. See description and prerequisites under Division of 
Teacher Education. Concurrent enrollment in Art Education 
449S required. Offered every spring semester. 

449S Seminar in Secondary Teaching (2) 

Seminar for student teachers in art. The practical aspects of art 
instruction in secondary schools. Concurrent enrollment in Art 
Education 4491 required. Offered every spring semester. 



Art 


Department of Music 



Department Chair: Benton Minor 
Vice Chair: Jane Paul 
Department Office: Performing Arts 262 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Music 

Liberal Arts 

Music Education 

Music History and Theory 

Bachelor of Music 

Commercial Music 

Composition 

Instrumental 

Keyboard 

Voice 

Accompanying 

Minor in Music 

Master of Arts in Music 

Music History and Literature 
Music Education 

Master of Music 

Performance 

Theory-Composition 

Single Subject (Secondary) Credential 

Faculty 

Charles Baker, Martha Baker, David Berfield, 

Marc Dickey, M’lou Dietzer, Rita Fuszek, Su Harmon, 
Carole Harrison, Nors Josephson, Burton Karson, 

Leo Kreter, Michael Kurkjian, Gary Maas, Todd Miller, 
Benton Minor, Gordon Paine, Jane Paul, Lloyd Rodgers, 
Preston Stedman, Robert Stewart, David Thorsen, 
Laurance Timm, Rodger Vaughan, Mary Mark Zeyen 


Music 


173 


INTRODUCTION 

Music is one of the most rewarding of all human endeav- 
ors, and the faculty and students in the Department of 
Music share a deep love for their art and a common desire 
to achieve excellence in it. The department offers a wide 
spectrum of degree programs and options with an overall 
emphasis in the area of performance. The curriculum pro- 
vides basic preparation for careers in music or further 
graduate study, and is designed to provide a balanced 
education in the many facets of musical experience. Artist- 
teachers offer instruction in all areas of performance, while 
practicing composers and theorists teach courses in the- 
ory, and active musicologists provide instruction in history 
and literature. It is the goal of the department to develop 
each student’s musical and intellectual potential to the 
highest level of individual capability. The Department of 
Music is fully accredited by the National Association of 
Schools of Music, in addition to the overall university ac- 
creditation by the Western Association of Schools and 
Colleges. 

Credential Information 

The Department of Music offers course work leading to a 
CSUF Waiver Program in Music for the Ryan Single Sub- 
ject Teaching Credential. For details, contact the Admis- 
sion to Teacher Education Office and the coordinator of 
music education. 

The Department of Music offers supplementary authoriza- 
tions for the Ryan Single Subject Teaching Credential in 
Instrumental Music and in Vocal Music. A supplementary 
authorization in music is offered for the Ryan Multiple Sub- 
ject Teaching Credential. For details contact the Office of 
Admission to Teacher Education. 

Advisement 

All music majors are required to obtain advisement each 
semester. Area coordinators serve as advisers, and students 
are assigned according to their area of concentration. 

Requirements of the Music Department 

1. All entering music majors are enrolled in the Bachelor 
of Arts degree program for at least the first semester of 
residence. Students may request a change in their de- 
gree objective to the Bachelor of Music upon comple- 
tion of at least one semester of course work at the 
university, successful completion of a jury examination 
and recommendation of the faculty in the appropriate 
area of concentration. Enrollment in the Bachelor of 
Music program is limited. 

2. Upon entering the university as a new music major or 
upon officially changing to a major in music, each stu- 
dent will present an audition in the appropriate principal 
performance area (instrument or voice) and a place- 
ment audition for class piano. 

3. All students must pass proficiency examinations in tra- 
ditional harmony (sight-singing, dictation, keyboard 
and paperwork) and piano before being approved for 
graduation. Transfer students will fulfill the theory re- 
quirement by passing the entrance examination in the- 
ory; first-time students and transfers with insufficient 


preparation at entrance will normally take the examina- 
tion in Music 211. The piano-proficiency requirement 
may be met by completion of Music 282B with a pass- 
ing grade. Students whose principal performance area 
is piano satisfy the piano proficiency requirement upon 
reaching 300 level in performance. 

4. Each music major must declare a single principal per- 
formance area, which must be approved by the faculty 
of that area upon completion of the entrance audition. 
In order to be approved for graduation, each student 
must achieve at least the 300 level of proficiency in the 
principal performance area. B.A. Liberal Arts-option 
students who elect project option 2 (Music 497: Project) 
need reach only the 200 level. 

5. Each music major is required to present one or more 
recitals or a project appropriate to the degree program 
before being approved for graduation. The project op- 
tion is available only in the Liberal Arts and Music Histo- 
ry and Theory options of the Bachelor of Arts degree. 
Recitals at the 300 level of performance are designated 
Music 398; recitals at the 400 level of performance are 
designated Music 498. See the sections below on the 
Liberal Arts and Music History and Theory options for 
recital/project information applicable to those degrees. 

6. Undergraduate music majors are required to partici- 
pate in a major performance ensemble (Music 361 ) and 
complete it with a passing grade each semester of resi- 
dence as follows: 

a. Students who declare wind or percussion as the 
principal performance area must register for band; 
students who declare a string instrument as princi- 
pal performance area must register for orchestra; 
students who declare voice as the principal perfor- 
mance area must register for chorus. (Bachelor of 
Music students in voice who have reached the 400 
level may elect to substitute 361 D, Opera Theatre.) 
A student whose principal performance area is key- 
board or classical guitar must register for one of the 
above major performance ensembles, according to 
the student’s qualifications and subject to audition. 

b. A music major admitted into the Bachelor of Music 
program whose senior recital instrument is key- 
board or classical guitar and who has participated 
in a major performance ensemble for at least five 
semesters (a minimum of two semesters at Cal 
State University Fullerton) may thereafter substi- 
tute chamber music and/or small performance en- 
sembles (Mu 362, 363, 386) to satisfy the depart- 
mental major performance ensemble (Mu 361) re- 
quirement. 

c. The educational purpose of the requirement that all 
music majors participate in an appropriate major 
performance ensemble during each semester of 
residence is to permit each student to experience 
the highest level of ensemble music-making com- 
mensurate with the student’s skill. To this end, the 
CSUF band/orchestra and choir programs are of 


174 


Music 


the traditional graded structure. University Singers 
(361 E), Wind Ensemble (361 F) and Symphony Or- 
chestra (361 A) are for the more advanced students; 
University Choir (361 B), Symphonic Band (361 C) 
and Women’s Choir (361 W) are for students of less 
skill or experience. Placement in bands, orchestra 
and choirs will be based on student ability as deter- 
mined by the directors of those ensembles. Music 
majors will be assigned to the ensemble for which 
they are best qualified. A student does not have the 
option of satisfying the requirements for participa- 
tion in a major performance ensemble by enrolling 
in an ensemble intended for those of less ability or 
experience. 

7. Applied-music study in the principal performance area 

is required as stipulated under the requirements for 

each degree program. The following conditions apply: 

a. If a student pursuing the Bachelor of Arts degree 
(Music History and Theory) or the Bachelor of Mu- 
sic degree (Composition) reaches the 300 level in 
the principal performance area before the required 
units in applied music are completed, Music De- 
partment electives may be substituted for the re- 
maining applied music units. 

b. In addition to the four units of applied music re- 
quired in the principal performance area, Bachelor 
of Music students in the Composition option must 
complete six units of applied composition (including 
the 498 recital) after taking Music 422A. The 498 
recital will consist of a presentation of the student’s 
own compositions. 

c. Students pursuing the Bachelor of Music degree in 
any option except composition must achieve the 
300 level in performance before giving the 398 re- 
cital and 400 level in performance before giving the 
498 recital. Specific information on jury-level crite- 
ria is available from the Music Department office. 

d. In order to register in applied music, an undergrad- 
uate student (with the exception of a student who is 
within six units of completing all degree require- 
ments) must be currently enrolled for a minimum of 
six units of music classes (including applied music), 
at least two units of which must be in an academic 
area of music (any course other than performing 
ensembles and applied music). In addition, the stu- 
dent must earn a passing grade in all music 
courses, be making satisfactory progress toward a 
degree, and be currently enrolled in the appropriate 
major performance ensemble, as stipulated in sec- 
tion 6 above. If the student fails to complete with a 
passing grade either the required six units of music 
classes or the major performance ensemble, ap- 
plied lessons will be withheld in the subsequent 
semester. Students are eligible for a maximum of 
three semesters of lessons at a given level of per- 
formance. 


e. Students in the B. A. program are eligible for a maxi- 
mum of eight units of applied music (398 and 497 
included). B.M. students are eligible for a maximum 
of 14 units (398 and 498 included.) 

8. Senior transfer students or graduate students in music 
entering to satisfy the legal waiver for teaching creden- 
tials, are expected to complete a minimum of one se- 
mester of upper-division course work in music with a 
GPA of at least 3.0 before they may be approved for 
admittance to teacher education. Required courses 
and competencies must be satisfied before the faculty 
committee will consider endorsing the student’s accep- 
tance into the credential program. 

9. A music major must maintain a 2.5 GPA in music 
course work at the university in order to be approved for 
graduation. 

10. All requests for exceptions to departmental or curricu- 
lar requirements must be directed by petition to the 
department chair. 

MUSIC DEGREE PROGRAMS 

The Department of Music offers a variety of courses that 
lead to baccalaureate and graduate degrees in teaching 
and the professions. The baccalaureate degree may be 
earned in either of two degree programs (Bachelor of Arts 
and Bachelor of Music). Within these programs, a student 
will pursue a concentration in liberal arts, music history 
and theory, music education, performance, composition or 
accompanying. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

The Bachelor of Arts in Music shall consist of no fewer than 
50 units of music, of which at least 29 shall be upper 
division (300 level and above). All Bachelor of Arts stu- 
dents must complete the basic requirements listed imme- 
diately below and must select and complete the require- 
ments listed in one of three concentrations: Liberal Arts, 
Music History and Theory or Music Education. 

Core Requirements 

Units 

Music theory (Music 111 A,B; 211; 31 9A; 320A 


or B) 14 

Music history and literature (Music 251; 

351 A.B.C) 12 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 4 

Major performance ensemble 

(Music 361A,B,C,E,F,W) 

Total 34 


Liberal Arts Concentration 

This concentration allows a student to take an academic 
major in music without being involved in a program of 
professional preparation. The degree emphasis is histori- 
cally the oldest such study plan in music in higher educa- 
tion and represents a liberal-arts response to the highly 
professional program of the Bachelor of Music degree. 


Music 


175 


Units 


Core requirements for BA degree 34 

Music theory (Music 316 or 318, 323A or 422A) 4 

Conducting (Music 382A or 383A) 2 

Senior project (Music 398 or 497) 1 

Music literature (Music 453A-460) 2 

Electives (minimum of 6 upper division; no more than 
2 units of Music 193-493) 7 

Total 50 


Senior Project 

Two alternatives are available to the student, each with a 
different focus and prerequisite: 

Alternative 1 (Music 398: Recital): Prerequisite is 
achievement of 300 applied music level in the area of 
principal performance one semester before the semester 
in which the student plans to present the recital. The stu- 
dent will present a brief recital in a regular recital time or in 
the appropriate workshop (at faculty discretion). 

Alternative 2 (Music 497: Project): Prerequisite is achieve- 
ment of 200 applied music level two semesters before the 
semester in which the student plans to present the project. 
The student will prepare a special project in the senior year 
which will culminate in a lecture, lecture-recital or other form 
of public presentation. To the greatest extent possible, this 
project should be an independent investigation into an area 
of special interest and should involve minimal faculty guid- 
ance. The public presentation will be evaluated by a faculty 
committee, as is the case with senior recitals, and must be 
approved by that committee prior to graduation. 

In the case of both alternatives, the recital or project will be 
included when calculating the student’s quota of state- 
funded private lessons. 

Music History and Theory Concentration 

This concentration is designed as a balanced program in 
music history and theory and provides suitable preparation 
for advanced degrees in theory, literature or musicology. It 
also provides basic preparation for advanced study in other 
fields, such as musical acoustics, music therapy, ethnomusi- 
cology, library science in music, and music in industry and 
recreation. 

Students seeking the concentration in Music History and 
Theory must submit a paper to the music history or theory 
coordinator not later than the beginning of their junior year. 
Acceptance into the degree program is contingent on the 
submission of a satisfactory paper. 

Allied requirements for the Music History and Theory con- 
centration: 

1 . Twenty units in a secondary academic area (not music, 
but related to the student’s project or useful to prepare 
the student for future graduate work in music). The 
choice of a secondary academic area must be ap- 
proved in writing by the coordinators of music history 
and theory. Suggested areas: art, English, theatre, his- 
tory, physics (acoustics), anthropology, languages or 
computer science. 


2. Foreign language proficiency, preferably German, to be 

satisfied by one of the following: 

a. Four years of study at the secondary school level, 

b. Passing an examination given by the Department 
of Foreign Languages and Literatures, or 

c. Completing with a passing grade the second se- 
mester of the beginning university sequence of a 
foreign language. 

Units 


Core requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Music theory (Music 316, 319A) 4 

Conducting or composition (Music 382A or 383A or 

422A) 2 

Project-proposal preparation (Music 499) 1 

Music history or theory project (Music 497) 1 

Electives in music 8 

Total 50 


Music Education Concentration 

Piano Pedagogy Emphasis: 

The emphasis in piano pedagogy is designed to provide in- 
depth preparation for individual and group piano instruc- 
tion and will not lead to teaching in the California public 
schools. 

Units 


Core requirements for Bachelor of Arts 34 

Keyboard Ensemble (363K) 1 

Applied Piano (393) 1 

Conducting (382A or 383A) 2 

Recital (398) 1 

Piano Literature and Interpretation (454A, B) 4 

Piano Pedagogy (467A,B,C)* 6 

Electives (recommended by advisement) 1 

Total 50 


* Co-enrollment in Observation and Practice Teaching (Music 465 and 466) 
strongly advised. 

Instrumental, Vocal-Choral, General Music Emphases: 

The emphases in instrumental, vocal-choral and general 
music are designed to provide in-depth preparation for 
teaching in the California public schools under the provi- 
sions of the Teacher Preparation and Licensing Law of 
1970 (Ryan Act). 


Instrumental Emphasis: Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Orchestral instruments (Music 281B/C,P,S/T,W/X by 

advisement) 4 

Music theory (Music 323A) 2 

Conducting (Music 382A,B) 4 

Chamber Music (363) 4 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives 1 

Total 50 


176 


Music 


Vocal-Choral Emphasis: Units 

Core requirement for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Orchestral Instruments (Music 281B,P,S,W) 4 

Conducting (Music 383A,B) 4 

Literature and Pedagogy (Music 453A or B and 

468A) 4 

Chamber Music (Music 363) 2 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives 1 

Total 50 

General Music Emphasis: Units 

Core requirements for Bachelor of Arts 34 

Orchestral Instruments (Music 281B,P,S,W) 4 

Conducting (Music 383A.B) 4 

Music and Child Development (Music 333) 3 

Music in the Modern Classroom (Music 435) 2 

Orff Techniques for Children (Music 436) 1 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives in music 1 

Total 50 


Credential Information 

Students desiring a California teaching credential in music 
must complete the following courses prior to enrolling in 
the professional education program as required by the 


Department of Secondary Education. 

Instrumental Emphasis: Units 

Music Education 295, 394, 395A; Music 324, 383A, 

353, 444, and 281 (C.T.X by advisement) 15 

Choral -Vocal Emphasis: 

Music Education 295, 394, 395B, 441; 

Music 354, 382A and 380 12 

General Music Emphasis: 

Music 295, 394, 395B, 441 and Music 381 8 


Students who wish to earn a single subject credential in 
Music in addition to a Bachelor of Arts with a Music Educa- 
tion concentration must complete the following: 

Units 


Music Education 442 (3) Music Education 449E (3) 
and professional education courses Secondary 

Education 440F and 440S 12 

Music Education 4491 (Student teaching) and Music 

Education 449S 12 

Total 24 


Prior to admission to teacher education, the student must 
reach 300 level in the principal performance area and pass 
functional examinations in keyboard and voice. The func- 
tional examination requirements may also be met by com- 
pleting Music 282B (piano) and Music 283B (voice) with 
minimum grade of B. 


BACHELOR OF MUSIC 

This degree program is designed to provide training for the 
highly gifted students who show promise and capability of 
becoming professional performers and composers. 

The degree consists of 132 semester units. A minimum of 
70 semester units in music are required, at least 32 of 
which must be upper division. 

Core Requirements for the Bachelor of Music 

Units 


Music Theory (Music 1 1 1 A,B: 21 1 : 31 9A: 320A 

or 320B*) 14 

Music History and Literature (Music 251 ; 351 A,B,C) 12 

Principal Performance Area (Applied Music) 6 

Major Performance Ensemble (Music 361) 4 

Recital (Music 498) 1 

Total 37 


♦Music 320A and 320B required in Concentration in Composition 

Composition Concentration Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316; 318; 31 9B; 323A; 422A) . 12 

Conducting (Music 382A or 383A) 2 

Applied composition 5 

Electives in music 14 

Total 70 

Instrumental Concentration 

Orchestral Instruments Emphasis: Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 323A, 422A) 6 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Conducting (Music 382A.B) 4 

Chamber music (Music 362 and 363) 6 

Electives in music 10 

Total 70 

Classical Guitar Emphasis: Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 323A, 433A) 6 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Conducting (Music 382A) 2 

Chamber music (Music 363G) 6 

Electives in music 6 

Course in guitar fingerboard skills 2 

Guitar history and literature (Music 459A) 2 

Guitar pedagogy (Music 459B) 2 

Total 70 

Keyboard Concentration Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 320A or B, 422A) 4 

Music literature (Music 454A,B) 4 

Conducting (Music 382A or 383A) 2 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 


Music 


177 


Chamber music (Music 362 or 363) 3 

Accompanying (Music 386) 1 

Pedagogy (Music 467A,B,C) 6 

Harpsichord or Organ class (Music 372 or 373) 1 

Electives in music 5 

Total 70 

Voice Concentration Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 422A) 4 

Music literature (Music 456; 457A.B) 7 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 

Opera Theatre (Music 361 D) 2 

Diction (Music 380A,B,C) 3 

Conducting (Music 383A) 2 

Pedagogy (Music 468A,B) 4 

Electives in music 4 

Total 70 


Allied requirement for voice concentration: 

Proficiency in two foreign languages (French, German, 
Italian), each to be satisfied by one of the following: 

a. Four years’ study of foreign language at the secondary 
school level, or 

b. Passing an examination given by the Department of 
Foreign Languages and Literatures, or 

c. Completing the second semester of the beginning uni- 
versity sequence of a foreign language. 


Accompanying Concentration Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 318, 422A) 6 

Music literature (Music 455, 457A) 5 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 5 

Chamber music (Music 363) 2 

Harpsichord class (Music 372) 1 

Organ class (Music 373) 1 

Functional Skills (Music 385) 2 

Accompanying (Music 386) 2 

Conducting (Music 383A) 2 

Diction (Music 380A,B,C) 3 

Recitals (Music 398, 498) 2 

Electives in music 2 

Total 70 

Commercial Music Concentration: 

Instrumental Emphasis Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music Theory (Music 31 2A,B) 4 

History of American Commercial Music (Music 356) . . 3 

Principal Performance Area (Applied Music) 6 

Improvisation (Music 265A.B) 3 

Major Performance Ensemble (Music 361) 4 

Recital (398) 1 

Lab Band or Stage Band (Music 362L or 362S) 4 

Electives in Music 8 

Total 70 


Commercial Music Concentration: 
Composition-Arranging Emphasis Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music Theory (Music 312A.B; Music 314A,B; 

Music 323A) 10 

History of American Commercial Music (Music 356) . . 3 

Applied Composition/Arranging 5 

Improvisation (Music 265A) 1 

Major Performance Ensemble (Music 361) 4 

Lab Band or Stage Band (Music 362L or 362S) 4 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives in Music 5 

Total 70 


MINOR IN MUSIC 

The minor in music may be used by persons whose majors 
are in other fields. A maximum of 14 lower-division units 
may be included in work counted toward the music minor. 
The minor requires a minimum preparation of 20 units as 
follows: 

Units 


Theory of music (selected from Music 101 ; 1 1 1 A,B; 

21 1 ; or any 300- or 400-level theory classes for 

which the student is qualified) 6 

Music history and literature (Music 100; 251 ; 350 or 
351 A,B,C; or courses at the 400- or 500- level for 

which the student is qualified) 5-6 

Applied techniques (selected from Music 183, 

1 84A,B; 281 B,P,S,W; 283A.B or any course in en- 
semble, conducting, piano, voice or orchestral in- 
struments at the 300- or 400-level for which the 
student is qualified) 8-9 

Total 20 


MASTER OF MUSIC AND 
MASTER OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

Two graduate degrees in music are offered in the Depart- 
ment of Music: the Master of Music and the Master of Arts. 
Each degree seeks to serve a special group of graduate 
students. For those who intend to pursue advanced de- 
grees beyond the master’s level, the Master of Music nor- 
mally leads to the D.M.A. degree, and the Master of Arts to 
the Ph.D. or the Ed.D. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Conditionally 
Classified 

All applicants admitted into the music program enter initial- 
ly in conditionally classified graduate standing. University 
requirements include: a baccalaureate from an accredited 
institution; a grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 
60 semester units attempted; and good standing at the last 
college attended. In addition, each applicant must present 
a satisfactory entrance audition and submit an acceptable 
written essay in the area of specialization. 


178 


Music 


Graduate Standing: Classified 

A graduate student may apply for classified graduate 
standing only upon attainment of the following prerequi- 
sites: (a) completion of all requirements for conditionally 
classified standing as described above; (b) a major in mu- 
sic (or the equivalent of a major; i.e., 29 upper-division 
units in music) with a minimum grade-point average of 3.0 
in the major; and (c) satisfactory completion of Music 500, 
Introduction to Graduate Study in Music. One objective of 
Music 500 is the selection of Departmental Advisory Com- 
mittee which aids in the preparation of a study plan listing 
all courses required for completion of the degree. This 
study plan must receive the approval of the student’s advi- 
sory committee, the Music Department graduate program 
adviser and the dean of graduate studies. Opportunity is 
given the student to remove deficiencies by taking certain 
prescribed courses, but such courses cannot be applied to 
the master’s degree program. 

Special Graduation Requirements 

Written comprehensive examinations in music history and 
music theory are required of all students. In addition, for 
Option 1 in music history and literature only, for the Master 
of Arts, the student must demonstrate reading ability in at 
least one foreign language, preferably German or French. 

MASTER OF MUSIC 

The Master of Music provides an avenue of graduate study 
for the highly creative composer or for the superior per- 
former in a program tailored to each student’s demonstrat- 
ed talent and to each student’s professional development. 
Applicants must have completed either a Bachelor of Mu- 
sic degree in performance or composition or show evi- 
dence of equivalent rigorous training. For the entrance 
audition, applicants in performance must demonstrate 
proficiency equivalent to the 400 level, that level expected 
of a performance major in the Bachelor of Music program 
at the time of the senior recital, while composition appli- 
cants must submit a portfolio of scores for examination by 
the composition faculty. For admission to the programs in 
choral or instrumental conducting, applicants must show 
evidence of substantial conducting course work at the un- 
dergraduate level plus practical experience. Further, to au- 
dition for entrance into the program, each choral applicant 
must demonstrate conducting proficiency with a mixed 
chorus and each instrumental applicant must demonstrate 
conducting proficiency with a band or orchestra. Under 
exceptional circumstances, a tape may be substituted for 
the live audition. 

Study Plan 

The Master of Music degree program requires a minimum 
of 30 units of graduate study in music, at least half of which 
must be in 500-level courses. Music 500, Introduction to 
Graduate Study in Music, must be taken within the first 
nine units. At least one recital is required, in addition to a 
corollary written project. Under certain circumstances, and 
with departmental approval, a thesis may be substituted 
for the recital and written project. 


MASTER OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

The Master of Arts provides advanced studies in breadth 
as well as in an area of specialization, either music educa- 
tion or music history and literature. The degree is for 
teachers and supervisors of music and for college teach- 
ing careers in music history or music education. For the 
entrance audition in history and literature, applicants must 
submit an example of a previously-written research paper 
on a musical subject, while applicants to the program in 
music education must submit a 30-minute tape demon- 
strating their teaching technique in a classroom situation. 

Study Plan 

The Master of Arts degree program requires a minimum of 
30 units of graduate study, no more than nine of which may 
be outside the field of music and at least half of which must 
be in 500-level courses in the major. 

Two options are offered in this degree program. Option I in 
history and literature requires reading ability in a foreign 
language, preferably German or French, prior to advance- 
ment to candidacy, a thesis and at least six units of study in 
a non-music field which is supportive of the major. Option II 
in music education requires either a thesis or a project, 
depending upon the nature of the student’s graduate re- 
search. Ten semester units are common to both options 
(Music 500, 3 units; Music 361-363, 2 units; Music 371- 
571 , 2 units; and Music 552-556, 3 units). Music 500, Intro- 
duction to Graduate Study in Music, must be included with- 
in the first nine units taken as a graduate student under 
both options. 

For further details or advisement, consult the Department 
of Music. 


Music Courses 

100 Introduction to Music (3) 

Musical enjoyment and understanding through a general 
survey of musical literature representative of styles and per- 
formance media. Music will be related to other arts through 
lectures, recordings and concerts. For non-music majors. 

101 Music Theory for Non-Music Majors (3) 

Basic theory and practical applications to improve music 
performance and listening skills. Includes sightsinging and 
relationship to keyboard and simple melodic instruments. 
For non-music majors. 

103 History of Rock (3) 

Rock music around the world; its origins and the develop- 
ment of national styles. Emphasis on listening. For non- 
music majors. 

Ill A,B Diatonic Harmony (3,3) 

Diatonic harmony and musicianship. Includes scales and 
intervals, triads and their inversions, harmonizations, non- 
harmonic tones, modulation and dominant seventh chords. 
Includes sightsinging, dictation and keyboard harmoniza- 
tions. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 


Music 


179 


182 Piano Class for Music Majors (2) 

Keyboard skills for students whose major performance in- 
strument is not piano. (3 hours activity) 

183 Voice Class for Non-Majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary techniques in singing for the non- 
music major. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

184 A Piano Class for Non-Majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary piano techniques for the non- 
music major. (2 hours activity) 

184B Piano Class for Non-Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: Music 184A or consent of instructor. Continu- 
ation of 184A. 

185A Guitar Class for Non-Majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary classical guitar techniques for the 
non-music major. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

185B Guitar Class for Non-Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: Music 185A or consent of the instructor. Ele- 
mentary classical guitar techniques for the non-music major. 
Continuation of Music 185A. May be repeated for credit. (2 
hours activity) 

193, 293, 393, 493 Individual Instruction (1-2) 

(Formerly 171,271,371,471) 

Prerequisite: jury recommendation. Individual study with ap- 
proved instructor. Emphasis on technique and repertoire. 
Music majors must register for a minimum of one unit per 
semester. Performance majors approved by jury recommen- 
dation should register for two units per semester. Jury exami- 
nation required. Instructional fee required. May be repeated 
for credit. 

196 Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

Prerequisites: a 3.0 or higher grade-point average and/or 
consent of instructor and simultaneous enrollment in the 
course or previous enrollment in a similar course or its equiv- 
alent. Consult “University Curricula" in this catalog for more 
complete course description. 

211 Chromatic Harmony (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 1 1 1 B. Continuation of Music 1 1 1 A,B; the 
chromatic practice of the 19th century. Secondary domin- 
ants: ninth, eleventh and thirteenth chords: sequence, and 
chromatically altered chords. Includes sightsinging, melodic 
and harmonic dictation, and keyboard practice. Required of 
all music majors. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

251 Survey of Musical Literature (3) 

Literature of music in Western civilization. Open to minors 
and qualified students by consent of instructor. Students 
should be able to read music as a part of the analysis of form, 
design and style. Required of majors. (3 hours lecture) 

265A Jazz Improvisation I (1) 

Prerequisite: Music 1 1 1 A,B, ability on a standard jazz instru- 
ment or consent of instructor. Application of scales and their 
relationship to chords, includes modes, jazz rhythmic phras- 
ing, blues progressions, and cycle of dominant seventh 
chords. Basic jazz keyboard drills and ear training involved. 

265B Jazz Improvisation II (1) 

Prerequisites: Music 265 A and 21 1 , or consent of instructor. 
Continuation of modal patterns and jazz rhythms for improvi- 
sation. Explores melodic construction in improvisation. Em- 
phasis on playing ll-V-l progressions in major and minor 
keys. Includes jazz keyboard drills and ear training. 


265C Jazz Improvisation III (1) 

Prerequisite: Jazz Improvisation I and II or consent of in- 
structor. Continuation of Jazz Improvisational pedagogy and 
techniques with an emphasis on performance application. 
Includes form and stylistic analysis and ear training. 

281 B,C,P,S,T,W,X Orchestral Instruments (1,1, 1,1, 1,1,1) 

Techniques and materials for teaching orchestral instru- 
ments. Required for music education emphasis. Instrumen- 
tal majors required to fulfill competency requirements for 
instruments listed in each course description except that of 
their major performance instrument. May be repeated for 
credit. Instructional fee required. (3 hours activity) 

281 B Brass Instruments (1) 

Trumpet and French Horn. 

281 C Brass Instruments (1) 

Trombone, Baritone and Tuba. 

281 P Percussion Instruments (1) 

Snare drum and mallet-played instruments with related work 
on other standard percussion instruments. 

281 S String Instruments (1) 

Violin and Viola. 

281 T String Instruments (1) 

Cello and String Bass. 

281 W Woodwind Instruments (1) 

Flute, Clarinet and Saxophone. 

281 X Woodwind Instruments (1) 

Oboe and Bassoon. 

282A,B Piano Class for Music Majors (2,2) 

Keyboard skills for students whose major performance field 
is not piano. A — Prerequisite: Music 182 or placement by 
instructor. B — Prerequisite: Music 282A or placement by 
instructor. Meets minimum piano proficiency requirements 
for degree. (3 hours activity) 

283A,B Voice Class for Instrumentalists (1,1) 

A — Prerequisite: teaching credential candidate or consent 
of instructor. Vocal skills for students whose major perfor- 
mance field is not voice. Prepares music education students 
to work with young singers in group settings by understand- 
ing their own vocal problems and the solutions in a variety of 
vocal styles. B — Prerequisite: Music 283A. Continuation of 
Music 283A at more advanced level. Completion of Music 
283B satisfies voice proficiency requirement for music cre- 
dential candidates. 

290 English Diction (1) 

Prerequisite: Sophomore standing or consent of instructor. 
Standard English for singers. Examples from American and 
British vocal literature explained through the use of the Inter- 
national Phonetic Alphabet. Individual performance of ex- 
amples plus assigned repertoire. 

301 Techniques of Song Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 101 or consent of instructor. Melody 
writing and setting of text to music. Includes consideration of 
metric values of text, music and chord progressions. For non- 
music majors. 

302 History of Jazz (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 100 or 101 or consent of instructor. His- 
torical study of jazz music in America: chronological develop- 
ment and stylistic evolution with consideration of peripheral 
trends. Emphasis on listening. For non-music majors. 


180 


Music 


303 Ethnic Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 100 or consent of instructor. Survey of 
music from Europe, Asia, Africa, Australia, Oceania, the Ca- 
ribbean and indigenous Indian music from North and South 
America. Emphasis on musical styles and forms, and reli- 
gious and ritualistic functions of music in various cultural 
frameworks. 

304 Music of Mexico (3) 

Survey of the art, folk and traditional music of Mexico from 
pre-Cortesian aboriginal music to 20th-century style, includ- 
ing neo-Hispanic, folk (corrico, etc.), mestizo, mariachi, na- 
tionalistic, jazz and modern art music. Interrelationship be- 
tween traditional (folk) and serious (art) music; effects of 
Mexico’s history on its music. 

312A,B Commercial Arranging (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 211. Harmonic practices in commercial 
music; stage band and jazz writing techniques. (May be re- 
peated once for credit.) 

31 4A Special Projects in Commercial Music (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 31 2B or consent of instructor. Three- and 
four-part voice accompaniment; planning and executing the 
multi-chorus small group arrangement. 

31 4B Special Projects in Commercial Music (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 31 4A or consent of instructor. Introduc- 
tion to harmonic substitutions; planning and executing ar- 
rangements for larger groups of instruments. 

316 16th-Century Counterpoint (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 21 1 or consent of instructor. Sixteenth- 
century counterpoint in two, three and four parts, covering 
motet, canon, double counterpoint. 

318 18th-Century Counterpoint (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 316 or consent of instructor. Eighteenth- 
century counterpoint in two, three and four parts, covering 
invention, canon, double and triple counterpoint and fugue. 

319A,B Form and Analysis (3,2) 

Prerequisite: Music 21 1 or consent of instructor. A — Analysis 
of structural elements of music such as motive phrase and 
period: binary, tenary, rondo, sonato allegro and larger musical 
forms in representative musical works. Required of all music 
majors. B — Continuation of A; larger musical works. 

320A,B 20th-Century Techniques (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Music 21 1 . Compositional practices of the 20th 
century; emphasis on written examples in the various styles, 
includes sightsinging, keyboard practice and dictation. A — 
Compositional techniques from 1 890 to 1 945. B — Comp- 
ositional techniques since 1 945, to include the synthesis of 
sound. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

323 Orchestration (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 31 9A, 320 or consent of instructor. Writ- 
ing and analysis of orchestral music. 

324 Scoring for the Band (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 323 or consent of instructor. Devices, 
techniques and skills required to produce complete tran- 
scriptions for the contemporary public school wind band. 

333 Music and Child Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 101 or equivalent or successful comple- 
tion of proficiency test. The relationship of music to child 
growth and development for the child from 5 to 12. Survey of 
age-appropriate music materials. 


350 Music in Our Society (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 100 or consent of instructor. Music in its 
relationship to general culture. A sociological approach; 
musical criticism and journalism, concert life, audience psy- 
chology and the political/religious/business aspects of the 
American musical scene. 

351 A History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 21 1 and 251 or consent of instructor. A 
study of the history and literature of music from early Greek 
beginnings through the Renaissance area. 

351 B History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351 A. A study of the history and literature 
of music of the Baroque and Classic eras. Fulfills the course 
requirement of the university upper division baccalaureate 
writing requirement for music majors. 

351 C History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351 B. A study of the history and literature 
of music from the Romantic era to the present. 

352 Symphonic Music in Western and Eastern Cultures (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 100 or 101 or consent of instructor. Sur- 
vey of symphonic music in Western and Eastern cultures 
from Baroque through Modern periods. 

353 Public-School Instrumental-Music Materials (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 382A or concurrent enrollment. The 
study of instrumental-music materials, repertoire, program- 
ming, and curriculum for public-school instrumental-music 
ensembles. Topics will include solo, chamber, and large- 
ensemble repertoire. 

354 Survey of Public School Choral Music Materials (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 383A. Examination and analysis of cho- 
ral repertoire suitable for junior and senior high choruses. 

355 Film Music (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 100 and an ability to read music or 
Music 101. An historical survey of motion picture musical 
scores. Analysis, listening and examination of motion picture 
scores. 

356 History of American Commercial Music (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 251, 31 2A, 31 9A and consent of in- 
structor. A study of American commercial music in the 20th 
century: jazz, popular, rock, theatre, dance, film, and televi- 
sion; includes stylistic, formal, and harmonic analysis of se- 
lected works. 

361 A-W Major Performance Ensemble (1) 

Study and performance of standard and contemporary music 
literature. Public concerts on campus and in the community 
each semester; participation is required. A concert tour may 
be included by some groups. (More than 3 hours major pro- 
duction) May be repeated for credit. 

361 A Symphony Orchestra (1) 

Prerequisite: audition or consent of instructor. Instructional 
fee required. 

361 B University Choir (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

361C Symphonic Band (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Instructional fee required. 

361 D Opera Theatre (1) 

Roles and representative excerpts from standard and contem- 
porary operas and the musical, dramatic and language tech- 
niques of the musical theatre. Performance of operatic ex- 
cerpts and complete operas. Also open to non-vocal majors. 

361 E University Singers (1) 

Prerequisite: advanced voice students or those accepted by 
audition. 


Music 


181 


361 F University Wind Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: advanced wind and percussion students ac- 
cepted by audition. Instructional fee required. 

361 W Women s Choir (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Performance of choral 
literature. 

362B Varsity Band (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The Varsity Band pro- 
vides music for Titan football and basketball games, and 
other related activities. May be repeated for credit. Instruc- 
tional fee required. 

362D Percussion Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of 
music written for the Percussion Ensemble. May be repeat- 
ed for credit. (2 hours activity) 

362E Brass Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of 
music written for large brass choir/ensemble. May be repeat- 
ed for credit. Instructional fee required. (2 hours activity) 

362L Lab Band (1) 

Open by audition or consent of instructor. Public perfor- 
mances on campus and in the community. May be repeated 
for credit. 

362M Horn Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of 
music written for French Horn Ensemble with emphasis on 
the solution of various problems relating to multiple horn 
literature. 

362P Choral Laboratory (1) 

Open by audition or with consent of instructor. Performance 
of choral literature for small vocal ensembles using student 
conductors. May be repeated for credit. 

362R Chamber Orchestra (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of 
representative chamber orchestra literature. Open to univer- 
sity students and qualified adults in the community. May be 
repeated for credit. 

362S Stage Band (1) 

Prerequisite: Open by audition and consent of instructor. (For 
those who do not qualify by audition for 362L.) Jazz and jazz- 
rock ensemble; public performance each semester. Open to 
non-music majors by audition. May be repeated for credit. 

362X Beginning Opera Techniques (1) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of voice faculty. Arias for the 
beginning opera student, and fundamentals of stage move- 
ment. May be repeated for credit. 

363B-X Chamber Music Ensembles (1) 

Open to all qualified wind, string or keyboard students. En- 
sembles will study, read and perform representative cham- 
ber literature of all periods. May be repeated for credit. In- 
structional fee required. (2 hours activity) 

363B Brass 
363G Guitar 
363J Jazz Combo 
363K Keyboard 
363S Strings 
363W Woodwind 
363X Saxophone 


365G Guitar Performance Workshop (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Weekly workshop perfor- 
mances by students, faculty and guests. Recommended for 
guitar majors each semester. May be repeated for credit. 

365K Keyboard Workshop (1) 

Weekly workshop performances by students, faculty and 
guests. Recommended for keyboard major each semester. 
May be repeated for credit. 

365V Vocal Workshop (1) 

Application of vocal technique to performance practices 
through lecture-demonstration, master classes and ancillary 
recitals. Recommended for vocal major each semester. May 
be repeated for credit. 

372 Harpsichord Class for Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in piano or organ or consent of 
instructor. The harpsichord as an instrument, the application 
of baroque stylistic characteristics, and training in the rudi- 
ments of continuo playing in ensemble with voices and in- 
struments. (2 hours activity) 

373 Organ Class for Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in piano or consent of instructor. 
The organ as an instrument, the playing techniques, and 
repertoire. The differences between piano and organ tech- 
niques. (2 hours activity) 

380A,B,C Diction for Singers (1,1,1) (Formerly 390A,B,C) 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing or consent of instructor. 
Proper singing diction; may not be considered a substitute 
for formal language study. Examples from standard vocal 
literature explained through the use of the International Pho- 
netic Alphabet. A — Italian. B — German. C — French. 

381 Survey of Recreational Instruments (1) 

Prerequisite: Music 101 or Music 1 1 1 A or consent of instruc- 
tor. Recreational instrument practices and a survey of mate- 
rials. Emphasis on recorder and guitar. Instructional fee re- 
quired. (2 hours activity) 

382A,B Instrumental Conducting (2,2) (Formerly 392A,B) 

Prerequisite: two courses from 281B,P,S,W or consent of 
instructor. A — Principles, techniques and methods of con- 
ducting orchestral and band groups. Required of all music 
education majors. (4 hours activity) B — Continuation of 
382A, including laboratory experience in conducting instru- 
mental groups, using standard instrumental literature. (4 
hours activity) 

383A,B Choral Conducting (2,2) (Formerly 391 A, B) 

Prerequisite: one semester of voice class or consent of in- 
structor. A — Principles, techniques and methods of con- 
ducting choral groups. Required of all music education ma- 
jors. (4 hours activity) B — Continuation of 383A including 
laboratory work with class and vocal ensembles, using stan- 
dard choral repertoire. (4 hours activity) 

385 Functional Skills for Keyboard Majors (2) 

Development of the ability to sight-read, harmonize, trans- 
pose and improvise. (4 hours activity) 

386 Piano Accompanying (1) 

Prerequisite: by audition only. Piano accompaniments for 
instrumentalists, vocalists and ensembles. Participation in 
rehearsals, recitals and concerts required. May be repeated 
for credit. (2 hours activity) 


182 


Music 


395 Internship: Professional Experience (1-3) (Formerly 396) 

Fieldwork in music under supervision of resident faculty and 
professionals in the field. Requires minimum six hours field- 
work per week for each unit credit. May be repeated for credit 
to a maximum of six units. Open to all music students by 
consent of instructor. 

398 Recital (1) 

Prerequisites: 300-jury level in the principal performance 
area and consent of instructor. Corequisite: Enrollment in 
Music 365K or V. Preparation and presentation of represen- 
tative works in the principal performance area. In the semes- 
ter of recital presentation, Music 398 will substitute for one 
unit of 393. Instructional fee required. 

411 Theory Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Completion of all lower division theory re- 
quirements, and at least senior standing or equivalent. A 
survey of the theoretical basis of music from 1 500 to the 
present through analysis, readings and discussion. 

422 Composition (2) 

Prerequisites: Music 316, 31 9A and 320A or B or consent of 
instructor. Composition of smaller forms in various contem- 
porary styles. 

424 Practicum: Electronic Music Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisites: Music 320B, 471 level in applied music com- 
position and consent of instructor. Individual and group in- 
struction in electronic music composition. May be repeated 
for credit. (3 hours laboratory) 

433 Music in Early Childhood (3) 

Prerequisite: ability to read and perform simple songs and 
games for young children. Songs, games, creative activities 
and materials suitable for young children in nursery school 
and early childhood education (approximately 3-7 years). 
Teaching-learning strategies. Instructional fee required. 

435 Music in the Modern Classroom (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 333 or consent of instructor. A survey of 
20th-century materials and techniques, of recordings for cre- 
ative movement to music, and of choral materials and tech- 
niques appropriate for the elementary school choir. 

436 Orff Techniques for Children (1) (Formerly Music Ed 436) 

Methods and techniques influenced by Carl Orff in teaching 
music for children. Rhythmic speech, song and movement, 
(one hour activity) 

444 Survey of Marching Bands (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Techniques, materials, 
administration for marching band. Charting for field shows 
and parade activities. 

450 History of Musical Style (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 351A,B,C, or equivalent, or consent of 
instructor. An intensive investigation of the principal musical 
styles in Western music from ancient Greece to the present, 
with an analytical philosophical examination of reasons and 
stylistic changes. 

453A,B Choral Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 

A — Prerequisites: Music 383A or equivalent and 351 A, B. 
Choral literature from Medieval, Renaissance and Baroque 
eras analyzed in historical perspective. Appropriate perfor- 
mance practices. B — Prerequisites: Music 383A or equiv- 
alent and 351 C. Continuation of A with examples from the 
Classic, Romantic and Contemporary eras. 


454A,B Piano Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Music 351 A, B and junior level piano standing, 
or consent of instructor. Performance of representative 
styles and schools of piano literature; solo and ensemble 
repertoire. A — contrapuntal forms, sonatas and variations. 
B — Character pieces, fantasies, suites and etudes. 

455 Instrumental Chamber Literature and Interpretation (3) 

Open to all music majors, or to non-majors by consent of 
instructor. The class will be grouped into ensembles for dem- 
onstration purposes. The stylistic differences required in 
performing works of all periods. 

456 Opera Literature and Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351A,B,C or consent of instructor. All 
periods and nationalities, including stylistic and historical 
considerations. 

457 A Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 31 9A, 380B or consent of instructor. 
Study and performance of German Lieder with representa- 
tive examples of periods and styles. 

457B Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 380C or consent of instructor. Study and 
performance of French art songs with representative exam- 
ples of periods and styles. 

458 Church Music; History, Literature and Methods (2) 

Prerequisites: Music 351 A, B or consent of instructor. A sur- 
vey of the role of music in the worship traditions of the Chris- 
tian Church; methods for implementation and maintenance 
of a successful church music program. 

459 Guitar Literature, Interpretation and Pedagogy (3) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in guitar or consent of instructor. 
The literature available to guitarists. Works for lute, vihuela 
and baroque guitar and the compositions and transcriptions 
for the modern guitar. Materials and methods essential for 
the guitar instructor. 

459A Guitar History and Literature (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 251, 211 or equivalent. Upper-division 
guitar standing or consent of the instructor. Historical survey 
of the literature for classical guitar. Important works for lute, 
vihuela and Baroque guitar, plus the compositions and tran- 
scriptions for modern guitar. 

459B Guitar Pedagogy (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 251, 211 or equivalent. Upper-division 
guitar standing or consent of the instructor. Fundamentals of 
teaching and coaching classical guitar. Materials and meth- 
ods for individual and group instruction. 

460 Interpretation of Early Music (3) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in principal performance area. 
The stylistic interpretations of vocal and instrumental litera- 
ture from the 16th, 17th and 18th centuries. For the senior or 
graduate student majoring in performance. Instructional fee 
required. (May be repeated twice for credit.) 

466 Pedagogy Observation and Internship (1) 

Prerequisite: junior level piano or consent of instructor. Co- 
enrollment in 467A.B or C required. Observation of and su- 
pervised internship in piano teaching. Teaching techniques, 
development of lesson plans, and materials will be included. 

467A,B,C Piano Pedagogy (2,2,2) 

Prerequisite: junior piano or consent of instructor. A — Mate- 
rials and methods for beginning and elementary students. 
Coenrollment in Music 466 recommended B — Materials 


Music 


183 


and methods of intermediate and early advanced students. 
Coenrollment in Music 466 recommended. C — Materials 
and methods for class piano. Coenrollment in Music 466 
recommended. 

468 A, B Vocal Pedagogy (2,2) 

Prerequisite: senior standing or consent of instructor. A — 
Fundamentals of vocal pedagogy for studio and public 
school teaching; physiology and acoustics as they apply to 
singing. B — Application of the fundamentals discussed in A. 
Seminar discussions and actual studio teaching. The diag- 
nosis and cure of specific vocal problems. 

485 Score Reading (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 282B and 382A.B, or 383A.B. Tech- 
niques for preparing scores (choral and instrumental) at the 
keyboard. Intended primarily for conductors and composers. 

496 Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

Prerequisites: a 3.0 or more grade-point average and/or con- 
sent of instructor and simultaneous enrollment in the course 
or previous enrollment in a similar course or its equivalent. 
Consult "Student-to-Student Tutorials” in this catalog for 
more complete course description. 

497 Senior Project (1) 

Independent investigation of an area of special interest in 
music culminating in a public performance, lecture, lecture- 
recital or other suitable demonstration. Instructional fee re- 
quired. 

498 Recital (1) 

Prerequisites: 400-jury level in the principal performance 
area (400-jury level in composition for composition majors) 
and consent of instructor. Corequisite: Coenrollment in Mu- 
sic 3651, K or V. Preparation and presentation of representa- 
tive works in the principal performance area. In the semester 
of recital presentation, Music 498 will substitute for one unit 
of Music 493. Instructional fee required. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

A special topic in music selected in consultation with and 
supervised by the instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Music (3) 

Required of all graduate music majors. Basic bibliography, 
literature, and research techniques and materials useful in 
graduate music study. 

524 Seminar in Music Theory (3) 

Theoretical subjects (form/style analysis, history of music 
theory, etc.) to be chosen by instructor. May be repeated for 
credit. 

552 Seminar in Music of the Renaissance (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The forms, styles, and 
characteristics of music between 1 400 and 1 600. Analysis of 
works by representative composers and theoretical writers. 

553 Seminar in Music of the Baroque Period (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351 A, B or consent of instructor. Musical 
forms, styles, and performance practices of the baroque pe- 
riod. Analysis of representative works. 

554 Seminar in Music of the Classic Period (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351 A, B or consent of instructor. The his- 
tory and literature of music from approximately 1 730 to 1 826. 
Analysis of representative works. 


555 Seminar in Music of the Romantic Period (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The structure and devel- 
opment of music in the 19th century. Analysis of representa- 
tive works. 

556 Seminar in 20th-Century Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351A,B,C or consent of instructor. Devel- 
opments in the music of western Europe and the western hemi- 
sphere since 1890. Contemporary music and its structure. 

558 Collegium Musicum (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advanced studies in the 
performance of rare and old music, which may include nota- 
tion, transcription, arranging, research, and performance. 
May be repeated for credit. Instructional fee required. 

567 Seminar in Piano Pedagogy (3) 

Graduate level study of the advanced learning theories, 
musical issues, and pedagogical methods involved in teach- 
ing piano through lectures, discussions and student presen- 
tations. Practice teaching required. 

569 Seminar in Piano Concert! (3) 

Advanced study of piano concerti with performance and 
analysis by class members and lectures by the instructor. 
Requirements can be met by performance and/or analysis. 

570 Seminar in Piano Literature (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 500 or consent of instructor. Advanced 
study of piano literature, with performances and analyses by 
class members and lectures by the instructor. Requirements 
can be met by performance and/or analysis. May be repeated 
for credit. 

582 Seminar in Advanced Instrumental Conducting and 
Interpretation (2) (Formerly 592) 

Prerequisites: Music 382B, keyboard facility for score read- 
ing and consent of instructor. Conducting techniques. Inter- 
pretive problems of each period covered in lectures. May be 
repeated for credit. 

583 Seminar in Advanced Choral Conducting and 
Interpretation (2) (Formerly 591) 

Prerequisite: Music 383B, conducting experience or consent 
of instructor. Choral conducting techniques. Lab work with 
student groups and concert conducting. May be repeated for 
credit when offered with different course content. 

593 Individual Instruction (1-2) (Formerly 571) 

Prerequisite: jury recommendation. Individual instruction with 
approved instructor. Emphasis on performance techniques 
and repertoire. Required of all graduate students whose termi- 
nal project is the graduate recital. May be repeated for credit. 
Instructional fee required. 

597 Project (3) 

Systematic study and report of a significant undertaking in the 
area of musical composition, musical performance, or other 
related creative activity. A written critical evaluation of the work 
or activity will be required. Instructional fee required. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Individual investigations of specific problems in the area of 
concentration by candidates for the M.A. degree, instruc- 
tional fee required. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing in music and consent of 
instructor. Research and study projects in areas of special- 
ization beyond regularly offered coursework. Oral and written 
reports required. 


Music 


Music Education Courses 

295 Clinical Practice in Instrumental/Choral Techniques (1) 
(Formerly 299) 

Clinical practice and field applications of instrumental/choral 
techniques classes, as in public and private schools. Coen- 
rollment in Music 383B or 382B recommended. (3 hours 
weekly to be arranged in nearby school) 

394 Practicum in School Materials and Techniques (3) 
(Formerly 342) 

Corequisite: Music Education 395A or 395B. For the music 
education major. Experience in the use of musical materials, 
conducting, organization and management. Observation 
and application of rehearsal and classroom techniques. 

395A Clinical Practice in Instrumental Conducting (1) 
(Formerly 3991) 

Prerequisite: Music Education 295. Clinical practice and field 
applications of concepts, materials and procedures as ap- 
plied to field situations, as in public and private schools. Co- 
enrollment in Music Education 394. 


395B Clinical Practice in Choral Conducting (1) (Formerly 
399V) 

Prerequisite: Music Education 295. Clinical practice and field 
applications of concepts, materials and procedures as ap- 
plied to field situations, as in public and private schools. Co- 
enrollment in Music Education 394. 


441 Teaching General Music in Secondary Schools (2) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education, senior stand- 
ing or consent of instructor. Objectives, methods and materi- 
als for teaching general music or allied art-humanities 
classes in secondary schools, including their relationship to 
specialized instrumental and choral programs. Practical 
problems and field work are included. 


442 Principles and Methods of Teaching Music in the 
Public Schools (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. History, princi- 
ples of public education, grades K-12, with emphasis on 
music. Philosophy, methods, materials and procedures for 
organizing and teaching music in elementary and secondary 
schools. Must take concurrently with Secondary Education 
440F and 440S. 


449 E Externship in Secondary Teaching (3) 

Must be taken concurrently with Music Education 442. For 
candidates who have declared for the single subject creden- 
tial in music. See description and prerequisite under Depart- 
ment of Secondary Education. 

4491 Internship in Secondary Teaching (10) 

For candidates who have declared for the single subject 
credential in music. See description and prerequisite under 
Department of Secondary Education. 

449S Seminar in Secondary Teaching (2) 

Must be taken concurrently with Music Education 4491. For 
candidates who have declared for the single subject creden- 
tial in music. See description and prerequisites under De- 
partment of Secondary Education. 

501 Contemporary Music Education (3) 

Recent innovations and overview of the history, philosophy 
and methodology of the art of teaching music. Trends and 
applications of educational theory in relation to the teaching 
of music. Required for M.A. in Music Education. 


542 Advanced Choral Techniques and Materials (2) 

Open to music education majors with teaching experience. 
Study of techniques and materials needed for successful 
junior high and secondary choral music programs. 



Music 


Department of Theatre 
and Dance 


Department Chair: Joseph Arnold 
Department Office: Performing Arts 157 
Production Office: Performing Arts 126 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Theatre Arts 

Dance 

History and Theory 

Production/Performance 

Teaching 

Master of Arts in Theatre Arts 

Dramatic Literature and Criticism 
Oral Interpretation 
Playwriting 
Television 

Theatre for Young Audiences 
Theatre History 

Master of Fine Arts in Theatre Arts 

Acting 

Directing 

Technical Theatre and Design 

Secondary Teaching Credential 

Faculty 

Barbara Arms, Joseph Arnold, Robert Christianson, 
Don Finn, John Fisher, Susan Hallman, Dale Hearth, 
Dean Hess, Lawrence Jasper, Robin Johnson, 
Michael Kane, Gretchen Kanne, Gladys Kares, 

Alvin Keller, Arthur Lessac (Distinguished Visiting 
Professor), Araminta Little, Juan Lopez, 

Alex MacKenzie, William Meyer, Sallie Mitchell, 

S. Todd Muffatti, Jerry Pickering, Jose Quintero 
(Distinguished Visiting Professor), Paul Reinhardt, 
Ron Wood, James Young, Allen Zeltzer 

INTRODUCTION 



The Department of Theatre and Dance undergraduate and 
graduate programs include the fields of acting, dance, di- 
recting, musical theatre, oral interpretation, playwriting, 
technical production and design, television, theatre for 
young audiences, theatre history and theory. Specifically, 
the course work and theatrical production activities are 
arranged to provide opportunities for students (1 ) to devel- 
op an appreciation for theatre arts; (2) to become aware, 
as audience or participants, of the shaping force of theatre 
arts in society; (3) to improve the knowledge and skills 
necessary for work in the theatrical arts as a profession; (4) 
to pursue graduate studies; and (5) to prepare for teaching 
theatre. 


186 


Theatre and Dance 


Public performance is at the center of the department’s 
programs. Therefore, continuing stage, dance and televi- 
sion production activities are essential for all students at 
California State University, Fullerton, including the under- 
graduate and graduate theoretical student as well as the 
undergraduate pre-professional and graduate conserva- 
tory student. In conjunction with on-campus dance produc- 
tions the Department of Theatre and Dance offers dancers 
and choreographers additional experience in its adjunct 
company: Dance Repertory Theatre. The company is 
made up of carefully selected California State University, 
Fullerton graduates and advanced students, chosen on 
the basis of demonstrated excellence in their work at the 
University. Dance Repertory Theatre presents lecture/de- 
monstrations and performs locally, as well as scheduled 
tours throughout the year. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 


rently with their first semester of upper-division courses. 
Prior to entering their junior year, or upon transferring to 
Cal State Fullerton, all students electing an Acting empha- 
sis under the Production/Performance concentration or 
the concentration in Dance will be evaluated and advised 
as to potential for advancement in the emphasis or con- 
centration. 

Theatre History and Theory Concentration 

Lower Division (15 units required) 

Theatre 110 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 
Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Upper Division (42 units required) 


The concentration in History and Theory is for those who 
wish to study theatre as a cultural contribution or who wish 
to pursue graduate degrees in theatre with emphasis in 
theatre history and theory. It is strongly recommended that 
students electing this plan support the major with ap- 
proved electives from art, music, foreign languages, litera- 
ture, philosophy or speech. 

The concentration in Production/Performance is designed 
to develop competency for pursuing the theatrical arts as a 
profession, or for pursuing graduate degrees in theatre 
with an emphasis in an area of concentration other than 
history of the theatre. Areas of emphasis are: acting, di- 
recting, musical theatre, oral interpretation, playwriting, 
technical design and television. 

The concentration in Dance is designed to develop compe- 
tency for pursuing dance as a profession or for pursuing a 
graduate degree in dance. 

The concentration in Teaching meets the requirements of 
the teaching credential with specialization in secondary 
teaching. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, 
students must meet the other university requirements for a 
bachelor of arts degree. Students pursuing a concentra- 
tion in Teaching must meet all specific requirements for the 
desired teaching credential. See description of secondary 
school teaching credential program under Department of 
Secondary Education. In addition, Plan III students should 
see the department’s secondary education adviser re- 
garding course sequence required for the single subject 
waiver. Those students who plan to work on the M.A. de- 
gree as well as the credential should see the chair of the 
Department of Theatre and Dance. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree with a major in the- 
atre, students must have a C or better in all theatre 
courses required for the degree. In addition to course re- 
quirements, all theatre and dance majors will enroll for two 
units of Theatre 478B each semester of residency up to a 
maximum of eight semesters. 

Theatre 200, or its equivalent, is a prerequisite for all up- 
per-division theatre courses with the exception of Theatre 
478 A, B. Transfer students may take Theatre 200 concur- 


Theatre 310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 
Theatre 364 Seminar in Playwriting (3) 

Theatre 370A Fundamentals of Directing (3) 
Theatre 377 Stage Costuming (3) 

Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 388 Historical Styles for Scene Design (3) 
Theatre 475A,B,C,D,E World Theatre (15) 

Theatre 477A.B Seminar in Critical Techniques (6) 
Electives in Theatre (3) 

Production/Performance Concentration 

Acting Emphasis 

Lower Division (23 units required) 

Theatre 110 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 241 Voice Production for the Performer (2) 
Theatre 251 Body Movement for the Actor (3) 
Theatre 263A.B Beginning Acting — Majors (6) 

Six units selected from: 

Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Upper Division (35 units required) 

Theatre 310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 
Theatre 341 Advanced Voice Production for the 
Performer (2) 

Theatre 363A.B Intermediate Acting (6) 

Theatre 370A Fundamentals of Directing (3) 
Theatre 463A.B Advanced Acting (6) 

Theatre 475A,B,C,D World Theatre (12) 

Theatre 482 Acting for Film and Television (3) 

Directing Emphasis 

Lower Division (24 units required) 

Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 
Theatre 276A,B Beginning Stagecraft (6) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 284 Introduction to TV Production (3) 


Theatre and Dance 


187 


Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Upper Division (35 units required) 

Theatre 350 Stage Management (2) 

Theatre 370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 
Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 450 Theatre Management (3) 

Theatre 470A.B Advanced Directing (6) 

Theatre 475A,B,C,D,E World Theatre (15) 

All theatre majors with an emphasis in directing must as- 
sistant stage manage a mainstage production either prior 
to or concurrently with Theatre 470 A, Advanced Directing, 
and must stage manage a mainstage production prior to 
graduation. 


Theatre 414 Readers Theatre (3) 

Theatre 475A,B,C,D World Theatre (12) 

Playwriting Emphasis 

Lower Division (18 units required) 

Theatre 110 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 
Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) or 
Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 284 Introduction to Television Production (3) 

Upper Division (39 units required) 


Musical Theatre Emphasis 

Lower Division (28 units required) 


Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 241 Voice Production (2) 

Theatre 251 Body Movement for the Actor (3) 
Theatre 263A,B Beginning Acting — Majors (6) 
Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Dance 142 Beginning Tap Dance (2) 

Dance 212 Intermediate Classical Ballet (2) 
Dance 232 Intermediate Jazz Dance (2) 

Music 101 Music Theory for Non-Music Majors (3) 
Music 171 Individual Instruction (Voice) (1) 

Musi 184A Piano Class (1) or equivalent 


Upper Division (30 units required) 


Theatre 363A.B Intermediate Acting (3,3) 
Theatre 436A,B Musical Theatre Workshop (6) 
Theatre 475 World Theatre (A.B.C, or D) (9) 
Theatre 475E World Theatre (3) 

Dance 332 Advanced Jazz Dance (3) 

Dance 336 Dance for Musical Theatre (3) 

Oral Interpretation Emphasis 

Lower Division (20 units required) 


Theatre 110 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 241 Voice Production (2) 

Theatre 251 Body Movement for the Actor (3) 
Theatre 263A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 
Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) or 
Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Upper Division (35 units required) 

Theatre 310 Oral Interpretation of 
Shakespeare (3) 

Theatre 341 Advanced Voice Production for the 
Performer (2) 

Theatre 370A Fundamentals of Directing (3) 
Theatre 410A,B,C Oral Interpretation of Prose, 
Poetry and Drama (9) 

Theatre 41 1 Oral Interpretation of Children’s 
Literature (3) 


Theatre 364 Seminar in Playwriting (3,3) 

Theatre 365 Television Writing (3) 

Theatre 370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 
Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 470A Advanced Directing (3) 

Theatre 475A,B,C,D World Theatre (12) 

Theatre 477A.B Seminar in Critical Techniques (6) 

Technical Production/Design Emphasis 

Lower Division (21 units required) 


Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 
Theatre 276A,B Beginning Stagecraft (6) 
Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 
Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Upper Division (38 units required) 


Theatre 350 Stage Management (2) 

Theatre 370A Fundamentals of Directing (3) 
Theatre 377 Stage Costuming (3) 

Theatre 379 Rendering for the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 388 Historical Styles for Scene Design (3) 
Theatre 475A,B,C,D World Theatre (12) 

Theatre 486 Advanced Lighting (3) 

Theatre 488 Advanced Design and Technology (3) 
and 3 units selected from: 

Theatre 284 Intro to Television Production (3) 
Theatre 385 Advanced Theatrical Makeup (3) 
Theatre 387 Audio Techniques (3) 

Theatre 486 Advanced Lighting (3) 

Theatre 487 Advanced Audio Techniques (3) 
Theatre 488 Adv. Design and Technology (3) 

Television Emphasis 


Lower Division (18 units required) 


Theatre 110 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 
Theatre 1 84 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 
Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 284 Introduction to Television Production (3) 


188 


Theatre and Dance 


Upper Division (39 units required) 


Theatre 365 Television Writing (3) 

Theatre 370A.B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 
Theatre 384 Television Production and Direction (3) 
Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 475A,B,C,D or E World Theatre (6) 
Theatre 484 Television Dramatic Techniques (3) 
Theatre 480 Television/Film Aesthetics and 
Criticism (3) 

Theatre 494 Cable TV Production Workshop (3) 
and 9 units electives selected from: 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 387 Audio Techniques (3) 

Theatre 486 Advanced Lighting (3) 

Dance Concentration 


Lower Division (25 units required). 


Dance 112 Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 
Dance 122A.B Beginning Modern Dance (4) 
Dance 126 Dance Improvisation (2) 

Dance 212 Intermediate Classical Ballet (2) 
Dance 222 Intermediate Modern Dance (3) 
Dance 226 Rhythmic Analysis (3) 

Theatre 263A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 
Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 
Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Upper Division (34 units required) 


Dance 312 Advanced Classical Ballet (3) 
Dance 323A.B Dance Composition (6) 

Dance 324 Forces and Figures in Dance (3) 
Dance 372 Dance Kinesiology (3) 

Dance 422 Advanced Modern Dance (3) 
Dance 423 Advanced Dance Composition (3) 
Dance 424 Fundamentals of Dance 
Instruction (3) 

Dance 425 Dance Repertory (3) 

Dance 497 Production and Performance 
Projects in Theatre (1) 

Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 387 Audio Techniques (3) 


Teaching Concentration (Single Subject) 

Lower Division (26 units required) 

Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 241 Voice Production (2) 

Theatre 251 Body Movement for Actors (3) 
Theatre 263A,B Beginning Acting — Majors (6) 
Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 
Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 


Upper Division (26 units required) 


Theatre 350 Stage Management (2) 

Theatre 370A.B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 
Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 


Theatre 402B Dramatic Activities for 
Children (3) 

Theatre 470A Advanced Directing (3) 

Theatre 475A,D,E World Theatre (9) 

Theatre Education majors are required to complete the 
Waiver Program in English. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 

The Master of Arts in Theatre Arts provides a program of 
coordinated graduate studies built on undergraduate prep- 
aration; incentive for intellectual growth reflected in teaching 
and professional recognition; and a sound basis for contin- 
ued graduate study in theatre. The student is expected to 
demonstrate a high degree of intellectual and creative com- 
petence and to demonstrate mastery of one of the areas of 
emphasis in theatre: (1) dramatic literature and criticism, (2) 
oral interpretation, (3) playwriting, (4) television, (5) theatre 
for young audiences, (6) theatre history. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: 

Conditionally Classified 

University requirements include a baccalaureate from an 
accredited institution and a grade-point average of at least 
2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted (see section of 
this catalog on admission of graduates for complete state- 
ment and procedures). 

Graduate Standing: Classified 

A student who meets the admission requirements and the 
following requirements may be granted classified graduate 
standing upon the development of an approved study plan: 
an appropriate undergraduate major in theatre, with a 
grade-point average of 3.0 in all upper-division work in the 
major, or at least 24 units of appropriate upper-division 
work in theatre, with a GPA of 3.0; Theatre 477A, Senior 
Seminar in Critical Techniques, or in the case of transfer 
students, its equivalent; satisfactory completion of the 
Graduate Writing Requirement; and, an oral interview. 
Upon recommendation of the student’s graduate commit- 
tee, additional prerequisites may be required prior to clas- 
sification and the approval of the area of emphasis. 

Study Plan 

The study plan will include at least 30 units of adviser- 
approved graduate studies, 1 5 units of which must be 500- 
level courses. Each program will have 24 units in theatre, 
including a core of nine units (Theatre 500, Introduction to 
Graduate Study which must be taken in the first semester 
of graduate study; Theatre 501, Advanced Theatre The- 
ory; Theatre 597, Project, or Theatre 598, Thesis) and six 
units of adviser-approved supporting courses in related 
fields, either in other departments or within the Department 
of Theatre and Dance. Before the degree is granted, each 
student will pass oral and written examinations. Students 
will be permitted to take the written examination twice. 

For further information, consult the Department of Theatre 
and Dance. 


Theatre and Dance 


189 


MASTER OF FINE ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 
(TECHNICAL THEATRE/DESIGN, 

ACTING AND DIRECTING) 

This degree is for students who wish professionally orient- 
ed education and training in design/technical theatre, act- 
ing, and directing. It is the objective of the department to 
educate and train highly skilled, motivated individuals for 
careers in professional theatre (including television and 
film) or for careers as artist-teachers in college or universi- 
ty theatre. Only those who demonstrate an exceptional 
talent, a high degree of motivation, and a deep commit- 
ment to their education and training will be admitted into 
the program. The highest academic and creative stan- 
dards will be demanded throughout the program. A posi- 
tive attitude and a rigid sense of theatre discipline are 
essential for success in the program. 

The degree requires 60 units of approved course work. Aver- 
age length of time to complete the program is three years. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Classified 

Prerequisites for admission to the program and granting of 
classified standing are: 

1 . B.A., B.F.A. or M.A. from an accredited college or uni- 
versity with a major in theatre; or a degree in a related 
field and extensive work in technical theatre, acting, or 
directing. 

2. Completion of an oral interview and satisfactory review 
of the student’s portfolio or audition. 

3. Acceptance by the faculty. 

4. Minimum GPA of 3.0 in all upper-division undergrad- 
uate work in theatre. A minimum GPA of 2.75 for the last 
half of the undergraduate program is also required. 

5. Completion of any additional prerequisites which may 
be required by the student’s individual committee prior 
to classification. 

6. Selection of a graduate adviser and committee. Total 
committee membership should be three or four faculty 
members, including the adviser. 

7. Submission of a formal M.F.A. study program approved 
by the individual committee, the department graduate 
adviser and the dean of graduate studies. 

8. Must meet the Graduate Writing Requirement. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: 

Conditionally Classified 

Students who do not meet certain prerequisites may be 
considered for admission in conditionally classified gradu- 
ate standing. Consult the graduate program adviser. 

M.F.A. Project 


assignments for major productions. Each project shall be 
reviewed by the individual committee within two weeks 
after completion. If accepted, the student shall submit a 
project book within a specified time. Before the degree is 
granted, each student will pass an oral examination over 


the project book. 

Study Plan — Acting 

Course Requirements * Units 

Take all of the following: 39 


Theatre 443 Audition and Rehearsal Processes (3) 
Theatre 477A Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
Theatre 500 Intro to Graduate Studies (3) 

Theatre 563 Acting Studio (24) 

Theatre 575 Seminar in Theatre History (3) 
Theatre 583 Graduate Seminar: Acting (3) 

Take one of the following: 3 

Theatre 436A Musical Theatre Workshop (3) 
Theatre 436B Musical Theatre Workshop (3) 
Theatre 482 Acting for Film and Television (3) 
Theatre 483 Advanced Acting Workshop (3) 


Take dance elective (3) 3 

Take 9 units adviser-approved electives 9 

Complete two creative projects: 

Theatre 597 Project (6) 6 

Total 60 


Study Plan — Directing 


Course Requirements * Units 

Take all of the following: 48 


Theatre 470A Advanced Directing (3) 

Theatre 470B Advanced Directing (3) 

Theatre 477A Seminar in Critical Tech (3) 
Theatre 484 Television Dramatic Tech (3) 

Theatre 500 Introduction to Graduate Studies (3) 
Theatre 563 Acting Studio (6) 

Theatre 570A,B Styles of Directing (12) 

Theatre 573 Seminar in Dramatic Literature (3) 
Theatre 575 Seminar: Theatre History (3) 

Theatre 597 Graduate Project (6) 

Theatre 599 Independent Research (3) 

Take 12 units adviser-approved electives (includes 6 


units technical coursework) 12 

Total 60 


The M.F.A. program shall be culminated by two creative 
projects which, by their nature, are of sufficient challenge 
and complexity to be accepted as worthy completion of the 
period of study. These projects, which shall be comparable 
to a professional undertaking, are determined by the indi- 
vidual committee and shall be design, acting or directing 


Study Plan — Technical Theatre Design 

Students should concentrate their activities in two of the 
following four technical theatre areas during their two year 
course of study: scene design, costume design-makeup, 
lighting-sound, and technical production. 


Theatre and Dance 


Course Requirements * Units 

Take all of the following: 9 


Theatre 477A Senior Seminar in Critical 
Techniques (3) 

Theatre 500 Introduction to Graduate Study (3) 
Theatre 575 Seminar in Theatre History (3) 

Take nine units from the following: 9 

Theatre 566 Graduate Seminar: Stagecraft (3) 
Theatre 577 Graduate Seminar: Costuming (3) 
Theatre 578 Graduate Seminar: Scene Design (3) 


Theatre 586 Graduate Seminar: Lighting (3) 

Take the following four times: 24 

Theatre 588 Design and Tech Theatre (6) 

Choose 12 adviser-approved units from technical 
courses in theatre, art or engineering 12 

Complete a creative project in two of the four technical 
areas: Theatre 597 Project (3) 6 

Total 60 


♦Based on a student’s previous undergraduate or professional experience, 
substitutions or revisions in the study plan might be appropriate. 


Dance Courses 

101 Introduction to Dance (3) 

Historical and contemporary dance forms. Experiences in 
various dance forms such as ballet, modern, jazz, folk, Afro, 
mime. Recommended for non-majors. 

112 Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 

The fundamental structure and technique of classical ballet. 
May be repeated once for credit. (4 hours activity) 

122A,B Beginning Modern Dance (2,2) 

Prerequisites: A is prerequisite to B. A — Exploration and 
manipulation of the instrument and materials of dance; devel- 
opment of aesthetic judgment. (4 hours activity) B — Expan- 
sion of Avia more complex technique and composition studies; 
development of performance quality. May be repeated once for 
credit. (4 hours activity) 

126 Dance Improvisation (2) 

Theory and practice of improvisation in movement. Practical 
use of improvisation in expressing imagery, developing cho- 
reographic concepts, and enhancing performance. (4 hours 
activity) 

132 Beginning Jazz Dance (2) 

Modern jazz dance techniques and basic jazz choreography. 
(4 hours activity) 

142 Beginning Tap Dance (2) 

Structure and technique of tap dance and tap choreography. 
(4 hours activity) 

212 Intermediate Classical Ballet (2) 

Prerequisites: Dance 112 and audition. Intermediate level 
technique of classical ballet. May be repeated once for credit. 
(4 hours activity) 


222 Intermediate Modern Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 122 and audition. Intermediate mod- 
ern dance and movement vocabulary in terms of composi- 
tion and communication. May be repeated for credit. (6 
hours activity) 

226 Rhythmic Analysis (3) 

Musical form and structure; musically notating dance 
rhythms and percussion accompaniment. 

232 Intermediate Jazz Dance (2) 

Prerequisites: Dance 132 and consent of instructor. Interme- 
diate level skills in jazz technique and choreography. (4 
hours activity) 

242 Intermediate Tap Dance (2) 

Prerequisite: Dance 142 or consent of instructor. Intermediate 
skills in tap technique and choreography. (4 hours activity) 

301 Dance and Cultural Diversity (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 101 or consent of instructor. Impact of 
various dance forms, from primitive time to modern, on diverse 
cultures. Contributions of immigrants, minorities and women to 
dance as a personal, social and cultural expression. 

312 Advanced Classical Ballet (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 212 and audition. Stylization and per- 
formance of classical ballet. May be repeated once for credit. 
(6 hours activity) 

323A.B Dance Composition (3,3) 

A — Prerequisites: Dance 122, 126, or equivalents. Study of 
basic elements and forms of dance composition. B — Pre- 
requisite: Dance 323A or consent of instructor. Problem solv- 
ing studies in space, time, and energy, using choreographic 
devices in solo and group situations. Final project required. 
(6 hours activity) 

324 Forces and Figures in Dance (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A history of dance from 
primitive times to the present. 

325 Dance Theory and Criticism (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 101, 122A or consent of instructor. 
Theory and criticism of dance. Comparison and relationship 
of dance principles and criticism among major dance genres, 
in addition to other art forms. 

332 Advanced Jazz Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 232 and consent of instructor. Ad- 
vanced jazz techniques and choreography through grade 
three of professional jazz dance. The relation of jazz to other 
forms of dance. (6 hours activity) 

336 Dance for Musical Theatre (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 112, 132, and audition, or consent of 
instructor. Dance utilized in musical theatre. Ensemble and 
individual approaches to the style. (6 hours activity) 

372 Dance Kinesiology (3) 

Structural aspects of the human body and factors that affect 
movement in dance. 

412 Classical Pointe (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 312 and consent of instructor. Tech- 
niques for performance of classical pointe. May be repeated 
once for credit. (6 hours activity) 

422 Advanced Modern Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 222 and audition. Advanced level skills 
in modern dance. Emphasis on individual techniques. May 
be repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 


Theatre and Dance 


191 


423 Advanced Dance Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Dance 323A.B or equivalent. Elements and 
forms in dance composition. The choreographing of dances 
of concert quality. (6 hours activity) 

424 Fundamentals of Dance Instruction (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 112, 222, 226, 323A, 372, and consent of 
instructor. Philosophies, techniques and methods for develop- 
ing progressions in dance instruction. 

471 Creative Dance for Children (3) 

Prerequisite: Upper division standing. Methods and materi- 
als for teaching creative dance to children. (6 hours activity) 

425 Dance Repertory and Performance (3) (Formerly 493) 

Prerequisites: Dance 212. Learning and rehearsing chore- 
ography of established and/or new dance works with perfor- 
mance intent. May be repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

497 Production and Performance Projects in Dance (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instruc- 
tor; application form with appropriate signatures must be on 
file in department office prior to registration. Projects which 
culminate in production or performance. May be repeated for 
credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of in- 
structor; application form with appropriate signatures must 
be on file in department office prior to registration. Under- 
graduate research projects. May be repeated for credit. 


Theatre Courses 

100 Introduction to the Theatre (3) 

For the general student leading to an appreciation and un- 
derstanding of the theatre as an entertainment medium and 
as an art form. Recommended for non-majors. 

110 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 

The analysis and performance of literature by the interpreter. 

163 Acting for Non-Majors (3) 

The form and content of acting: improvisation, action, moti- 
vation, and behavior. Recommended for non-majors. (6 
hours activity) 

175 History of Western Theatre (3) 

A survey of theatre and Western civilization from the classi- 
cal Greeks to the moderns. Recommended for non-majors. 

180 Great Moments in Radio and TV (3) 

Presentation and analysis of radio and television programs 
from 1926 to the present, including guest artists from the 
radio and television industry. 

184 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) 

The broadcasting industry and its impact and influence on 
our society. Broadcasting practices, audiences, production 
and programming. 

200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre as an art form, involving the interrelated processes 
of playwriting, directing, acting, design and theatre manage- 
ment. Study of plays, films and television with emphasis on 
dramatic analysis and cultural significance. Required of all 
theatre majors. 


241 Voice Production for the Performer (2) 

Use of voice in the theatre. Correction of speech faults and 
regional accents. Study of basic interpretive material. (4 
hours activity) 

251 Body Movement for the Actor (3) 

The body as an expressive instrument; acquiring of strength, 
flexibility, relaxation, control. The relationship of the body to 
the creative project. May be repeated for credit. (6 hours 
activity) 

263A,B Beginning Acting — Majors (3,3) 

Prerequisite for 263B: Theatre 200, 241 , 251 and 263A. Im- 
provisations, exercises, and techniques of acting for the 
stage. Motivation and behavior in characterization. (6 hours 
activity) 

276A.B Beginning Stagecraft (3,3) 

Prerequisite: 276A is prerequisite to 276B. A — Planning 
and construction of stage and television scenery. Use of tools 
and stage equipment. B — Drafting and reading of technical 
drawings. Work in the scene shop for department produc- 
tions is required for A and B. May be repeated for credit. (6 
hours activity) 

277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Costuming theatrical and television productions. Construc- 
tion techniques, organization and duties of the costume 
crew. (6 hours activity) 

284 Introduction to Television Production (3) 

The fundamentals of production for television. (6 hours activity) 

285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Makeup for stage and television. Individual skill in character 
analysis, application in pigment, plastic, hair, makeup, and 
selection and use of makeup equipment. (6 hours activity) 

288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Scene design, including script analysis, formation of visual 
concepts, floor plan development and model building for 
stage and television. (6 hours activity) 

310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 

Prerequisite: Upper division standing. Development of tech- 
niques for oral interpretation of Shakespeare with special 
emphasis on the problems of verse. 

341 Advanced Voice Production for the Performer (2) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 241. Intensive individual voice and 
speech training for the actor and oral interpreter. Projects 
involving theatrical material will focus on specific problems. 
May be repeated for credit. (4 hours activity) 

350 Stage Management (2) 

Corerequisite: Theatre 370A. Backstage management, in- 
cluding interrelationships of production personnel for stage 
and television. 

363 A, B Intermediate Acting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 200, 241 , 251 , 263A.B and audition. 
Characterization; roles, special problems, and application of 
acting techniques through exercises and two-character 
scenes from the contemporary theatre. (6 hours activity) 

364 Seminar in Playwriting (3) 

Prerequisites: evidence of interest in creative writing and 
consent of instructor. Study of superior models, development 
of style, and group criticism and evaluation of independent 
work, as it relates to playwriting. May be repeated for credit. 


192 


Theatre and Dance 


365 Television Writing (3) 

The writing of scripts and other forms of continuity for televi- 
sion. May be repeated for credit. 

370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 263A, or consent of instructor. 370A is 
prerequisite to B. Prerehearsal problems and procedures, 
structural analysis of plays, composition, picturization, pan- 
tomimic dramatization, movement and rhythm on stage and 
in television. Practice in directing scenes. (6 hours activity) 

377 Stage Costuming (3) 

Fashions and textiles of major historical periods, methods of 
research; interpretation and communication of historical 
dress for theatrical statement. 

379 Rendering for the Theatre (3) 

Scenic and costume sketching and rendering for communica- 
tion between production director and designers. Full scale cos- 
tume and scenic painting required. Theoretical and actual pro- 
duction idea presentation and execution. (6 hours activity) 

381 Radio and Television Announcing (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 110. Control room operation, including 
practice in microphone and camera techniques. (6 hours 
activity) 

384 Television Production and Direction (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 284. Theory and practice in the produc- 
tion of television programs and announcements: the planning, 
organizing, directing, rehearsing, performing, recording and 
editing of television programs and announcements. (6 hours 
activity) 

385 Advanced Theatre Makeup (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 285. Problems in makeup including 
special techniques and materials: prosthetics, hairpieces, 
and masks for stage and television productions. (6 hours 
activity) 

386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theories of lighting for stage and television productions. (6 
hours activity) 

387 Audio Techniques (3) 

Practice necessary to integrate live and recorded sound into 
performing arts productions. Recording, reproduction and 
studio techniques. (6 hours activity) 

388 Historical Styles for Scene Design (3) 

Visual survey through lecture and slides of architecture, interior 
design and furniture from ancient to modern times. Provides 
necessary basis for advanced design course. 

402 A, B Dramatic Activities for Children (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Upper division standing. Creative dramatics as a 
tool for buiding and developing creative and socialized pro- 
cesses in children. A — Sense memory, movement/mime, dia- 
logue, characterization, dramatization. B — Teaching tech- 
niques including concentration, imagination, dramatization, 
and improvisation for adolescents. (6 hours activity) 

403A,B Theatre for Young Audiences (3,3) 

Prerequisite: 403A prerequisite for 403B or consent of in- 
structor. Theatrical production for an audience of children. 
A — Philosophy, theory and practice; B — Application of 
production principles. (6 hours activity) 

41 0A Oral Interpretation of Prose Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Criticism and perfor- 
mance in the oral interpretation of prose literature. 


41 OB Oral Interpretation of Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Criticism and perfor- 
mance in the oral interpretation of poetry. 

41 0C Oral Interpretation of Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Criticism and perfor- 
mance in the oral interpretation of drama. 

411 Oral Interpretation of Children’s Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Oral presentation of 
children’s literature in classroom, recreation and home situa- 
tions including individual and group performance of fiction, 
non-fiction, fantasy and poetry. 

414 Readers Theatre (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 1 10 or consent of instructor. The inter- 
pretation of literature in the medium of readers theatre. May 
be repeated for credit. 

436A,B Musical Theatre Workshop (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363B, Dance 336, and audition. The- 
atre 436A prerequisite to B. Roles and excerpts from musical 
theatre: the musical, dramatic, language and dance tech- 
niques. Scenes and musical numbers in workshop. A — 
Large group and solo work. B — Small group and audition 
material preparation. (6 hours activity) 

443 Audition and Rehearsal Processes (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363A,B. Auditioning and rehearsal 
processes for professional work in theatre, television and 
film. Includes techniques for selecting material and perfor- 
mance preparation. (6 hours activity) 

450 Theatre Management (3) 

Oranizational principles of front-of-house and box office oper- 
ation. Participation in School of the Arts public presentations. 
(3 hours lecture, 6 hours activity) 

463A,B Advanced Acting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 310, Theatre 341, Theatre 363A.B 
and audition. Historical theories and techniques of styles of 
acting. A — Greek through renaissance periods. B — The 
neoclassic periods to contemporary styles. (6 hours activity) 

470A,B Advanced Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 288, 350, and 370A,B, or consent of 
instructor. Readings in theory, analysis of scripts and practice in 
directing plays for their oral and visual value as theatre. A — 
Each student directs a one-act play. B — Each student directs 
two one-act plays or equivalent. (6 hours activity) 

475A,B,C,D,E World Theatre (3, 3, 3, 3, 3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. The historical and dra- 
matic evolution of world theatre. A — Ancient Greece and 
Rome, Middle Ages; Italian renaissance; B — England from 
1558-1790; 16th- and 17th-century Spain and France; C — 
18th- and 19th-century Europe and Russia; 19th-century Eng- 
land; D — 18th- and 19th-century America; the Orient; the 
modern world; E — Historical background and contemporary 
view of the musical theatre. 

477A,B Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (3,3) 

Theatre 477A or consent of instructor prerequisite to 477B. 
A — Major critical theories in theatre. B — Application of 
critical theories to local dramatic productions. Theatre 477B 
fulfills the course requirement of the university upper-division 
baccalaureate writing requirement for theatre arts majors. 


Theatre and Dance 


193 


478A,B Production and Performance (2,2) 

A — Acting in stage or television performances. B — Techni- 
cal crew work on stage or television performances. One sec- 
tion of 478B per semester required of all theatre majors as 
well as non-majors cast in theatre department productions. 
(More than 6 hours activity) 

480 Television/Film Aesthetics and Criticism (3) (Formerly 
Theatre 490) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 384 or consent of instructor. The nature 
of film and television; aesthetic and theoretical and critical 
bases for film and television evaluation and understanding. 

482 Acting for Film and Television (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363A.B. The adaptation of stage 
techniques for the camera; audition, rehearsal, and final per- 
formance, utilizing videotape and studio equipment. (6 hours 
activity) 

483 Advanced Acting Workshop (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 463A,B and audition. Extensive 
scene study, based on particular needs and problem areas 
of the advanced acting student. (6 hours activity) 

484 Television Dramatic Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 384 and consent of instructor. Tech- 
niques of production for the director, actor and designer in 
televised drama. (6 hours activity) 

486 Advanced Lighting (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 386 or consent of instructor. Design 
and technology of lighting for the stage and television. (6 
hours activity) May be repeated for credit. 

487 Advanced Audio Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 387 or consent of instructor, advanced 
problems in the design and technology of live and recorded 
sound used in the performing arts. (6 hours activity) 

488 Advanced Design and Technology (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 276A.B, 277, 288 and consent of in- 
structor. Advanced design, coordination of scenery and/or 
costume design projects for various types of theatres and 
television. May be repeated for credit. 

489 Cable Television Production Workshop (3) (Formerly 
Theatre 494) 

Prerequisites: six units of television production and consent of 
instructor. Practical experience in the creation of full-length 
television dramatic productions for cable broadcasting. May be 
repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

495 Theatre Internship (3) (Formerly theatre 400) 

Consent of appropriate faculty supervisor. Supervised work 
experience in all areas of theatre to expand the dimensions of 
the classroom by integrating the formal academic training with 
direct application. Periodic seminar meetings to discuss work. 

497 Production and Performance Projects in Theatre (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instruc- 
tor; application form with appropriate signatures must be on 
file in department office prior to registration. Projects which 
culminate in production or performance. May be repeated for 
credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of in- 
structor; application form with ap prop hate signatures must 
be on file in department office phor to registration. Under- 
graduate research projects. May be repeated for credit. 


500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Theatre (3) 

Methodological problems in graduate research. Location of 
source materials, including library and original data; interpre- 
tation of research and practice in scholarly writing. Must be 
taken the first semester after admission to graduate study. 

501 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Theatre Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 500. Directed research; the relation- 
ship between historical backgrounds and developments in 
the theatre and the student’s area of concentration. 

563 Acting Studio (6) 

Prerequisite: audition. Re-creation and interpretation of 
roles utilizing period and contemporary dramatic literature, 
interrelating voice, movement, characterization and period 
style acting. Enrollment limited to M.F.A. students. 

566 Graduate Seminar: Stagecraft (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advanced theories in the 
preparation and installation of scenery for theatrical produc- 
tion; engineering drawings, exploration of materials, and re- 
search into new methods of theatre technology. May be re- 
peated for credit up to six units. 

570A,B Styles of Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 470A.B or consent of instructor. Re- 
search in the theories of directing styles and practice in 
directing period plays. A — Staging problems from Greek 
tragedy through the Restoration. B — Staging problems from 
recent classical work (Ibsen, Strinberg, Chekhov) to present. 
May be repeated once for credit. 

573 Seminar in Dramatic Literature (3) 

Directed research and criticism in the examination of contri- 
butions of major dramatists or dramatic genres. Emphasis 
on dramatic analysis. Topics will vary from semester to se- 
mester. May be repeated for credit. 

575 Seminar in Theatre History (3) 

Directed research and criticism in the examination of a signifi- 
cant historical period or movement in theatre history. Topics will 
vary from semester to semester. May be repeated for credit. 

577 Graduate Seminar: Costuming (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Costume production 
problems and their solutions. Examination of specific design- 
ers, past and present. Research in pratical methods of inter- 
preting the deisgner’s sketch. May be repeated for credit up 
to six units. 

578 Graduate Seminar: Scene Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Scenic design projects 
involving in-depth production style and scheme develop- 
ment. May be repeated for credit up to six units. 

583 Graduate Seminar: Acting (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 463A.B. Investigation and delinea- 
tion of current acting methods as techniques for solving 
problems presented by popular dramatic literature. Develop- 
ment of a personal acting philosophy and methodology. May 
be repeated once for credit. 

586 Graduate Seminar: Lighting Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advance theoretical light- 
ing design projects. Production problems and their solutions. 
Examination of specific designers, past and present. May be 
repeated for credit up to six units. 


Theatre and Dance 


588 Graduate Projects in Design and Technical Theatre (6) 

Theoretical projects and designs for productions prior to final 
projects. Faculty and student critiques. Tailored to individual 
student needs. Enrollment limited to M.F.A. students. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor, student’s graduate com- 
mittee and department executive committee. Development 
and presentation of a creative project beyond regularly of- 
fered coursework. May be repeated for credit up to six units. 
Student must complete course application form by the end 
of the seventh week of the semester preceding that in which 
the work is to be done. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of student’s graduate committee; appli- 
cation form with apropriate signatures must be on file in 
department office prior to registration. Development and pre- 
sentation of a thesis in the student’s area of concentration. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of student’s graduate committee and 
instructor; application form with appropriate signatures 
must be on file in department office prior to registration. 
Research in theatre. May be repeated for credit. 


Theatre Education Courses 

442 Teaching Theatre in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, 
methods and materials for teaching in the secondary school. 


449 E Externship in Secondary Teaching (3) 

See description under Department of Secondary Education. 


4491 Internship in Secondary Teaching (10) 

See description under Department of Secondary Education. 


449S Seminar in Secondary Teaching (2) 

See description under Department of Secondary Education. 


Theatre and Dance 


195 


* Trgar t ’ w n ff 1 • ; 

a. - * 5 t. ?ou? 3 Bi)p-rs • 

• »m ■•>; • •: . •**• <$W 'vj 3 $R 

... ptlitM« r (nta«t8 , ■■■ »n jn wt-f* 

<H3M*JK • •■'•■•' ■• '■>;' ■ w afi- flCV*qr J) :\'0 fcfccJ 

• •:;••' •& i<i ■ - ' v j% 


• . v ■ ■* '•• . ■ ? ■ ;• *• aa 

fsnil . ■~\' x • - :•*! 

o *’> .• “ V/ - v*tf, r 

r-A\icrt T^d 

r , . . . • • i*‘ . Jr • ■ .a-*: t>!'r tfi 

‘o •/: -.'0 . v t. ''•>.'•/ r\ v >; •' ••*. -:a>rr - x , •<..!-:• ;nvUw;i3 

; o/iv, ■ . ;. ., • ■ * V»Vw (' - ./*? f\l\o 

i v .'- ■ < C ' ■ v 

tf ' 

* 'V • ' • >: ' «*0tf3 , wMu. SQ ' >0 

Cj ?; ■ > ©;‘t! lb io TOttfe >8 

* - ft ■ ifl 


U . . 



so* O&fW&flNSdf' 


School of Business 
Administration and 

Economics 



Dean: Thomas L. Brown 
Associate Deans: 
Ken Goldin, Undergraduate Programs 
Paul Hugstad, Graduate Programs 
Keith Lantz, Accounting Programs 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 

Concentrations in: 

Accounting 
Business Economics 
Finance 
Management 

Management Information Systems 
Management Science 
Marketing 

Bachelor of Arts In Economics 
Bachelor of Arts in International Business 

Concentrations in: 

French 

German 

Japanese 

Portuguese 

Spanish 

Other Languages 

Minor in Business Administration 
Minor in Economics 

Minor in Management Information Systems 
Master of Science in Accountancy 
Master of Business Administration 

Concentrations in: 

Accounting 
Business Economics 
Finance 

International Business 
Management 
Management Science 
Marketing 

Master of Arts in Economics 

Master of Science in Management Science 

Concentrations in: 

Management Information Systems 
Operations Research 
Statistics 

Master of Science in Taxation 


School of Business Administration and Economics 


197 


INTRODUCTION 


Programs of study in the School of Business Administra- 
tion and Economics equip men and women with the intel- 
lectual and professional tools needed to assume responsi- 
ble positions in business, industry, education, government, 
and social service. The school offers a broad exposure to 
business administration and economics. Behavioral and 
quantitative sciences are studied in both theoretical and 
applied contexts. Mathematics is used as a key tool in the 
analysis of complex problems and in the interpretation of 
data. Emphasis is placed on effective oral and written 
communication. Students are made aware of the need for 
imaginative, innovative solutions to business problems 
that encompass human needs and ethical objectives. 

The school also offers the opportunity to develop technical 
expertise in a chosen discipline at a beginning profession- 
al level acceptable to prospective employers. Seven con- 
centrations are offered within the business administration 
major as well as an economics major, an international 
business major and a business education credential pro- 
gram. 

The School of Business Administration and Economics 
offers the only programs in Orange County accredited by 
the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business. 
Accreditation assures a rigorous course of study covering 
the full spectrum of business administration. It also indi- 
cates a well-qualified faculty, high standards for students, 
and access to an extensive library system. 

Preparation for Undergraduate Degree Programs 

Algebra and geometry are necessary for many required 
business courses. The equivalent of three years of high 
school mathematics, including a second course in algebra, 
is the prerequisite for the required Math 135, Business 
Calculus. Students without the necessary background 
should enroll in Math 100, Precalculus Mathematics. 

Proficiency in written English is essential to all college 
courses. Students should plan to take the written English 
component of General Eduation as soon as possible. 

Business students are encouraged to take courses in soci- 
ology, psychology, anthropology, speech communication, 
political science, history, philosophy, geography and for- 
eign languages. Many courses in these fields may be used 
to meet the general education requirement. For the inter- 
national business degree, intermediate level competency 


in a foreign language, equivalent to Foreign Language 204 
courses, is prerequisite to the required concentration 
courses. It is strongly recommended that students plan- 
ning to major in international business complete a mini- 
mum of three years of foreign language study while in high 
school. 

Business Advising Center 
Langsdorf Hall, Room 700 

Undergraduate Program Advising 

The Business Advising Center serves business adminis- 
tration, economics and international business majors. In- 
formation is available on admissions, curriculum and grad- 
uation requirements, as well as on registration and grading 
procedures, residence and similar academic matters. 
Transfer students should see an adviser immediately re- 
garding transfer credit. For information on general educa- 
tion, consult the Academic Advisement Center in the Hu- 
manities Building. 

Graduate Program Advising 

The graduate adviser (in the Business Advising Center) 
provides academic advising for the graduate programs in 
accountancy, business administration, economics, man- 
agement science and taxation. Information is available on 
admissions, curriculum and graduation requirements, as 
well as on registration procedures, residence and similar 
academic matters. Students also should consult the facul- 
ty coordinators for the programs in accountancy, econom- 
ics, management science and taxation. 

Transfer Credit for Business and Economics 
Courses 

Students should see an adviser immediately regarding 
transfer credit. In order to meet any degree requirement in 
the School of Business Administration and Economics, 
only those courses completed at an appropriately accredi- 
ted institution with a grade of “C” or better that are equiv- 
alent in content and level may be considered. Lower-divi- 
sion courses taken at four-year colleges and courses tak- 
en at two-year colleges may be used to satisfy only lower- 
division (i.e., 100 and 200 level) requirements at the 
university. Upper-division courses taken at four-year insti- 
tutions may be used to satisfy upper-division (i.e., 300 and 
400 level) requirements at the university. Lists of approved 
equivalent courses from local community colleges are 
available in the Business Advising Center. All other 
courses are subject to approval by the department chair 
concerned. In these cases, the student must supply cata- 
log descriptions, course outlines and textbook titles. 
Courses taken in the extension division of another univer- 
sity, or by correspondence, are generally not acceptable. 


School of Business Administration and Economics 


Internships and Cooperative Education 

Students may earn academic credit, first-hand work expe- 
rience and financial remuneration as well. Opportunities 
exist in accounting and auditing; cost-benefit analysis and 
econometrics; finance and real estate; insurance and 
banking; management and industrial relations; marketing, 
sales and advertising; and business data systems. For 
more information, consult the internship adviser in your 
department or in the Center for Internships and Cooperat- 
ive Education. 

Student Organizations 

Chapters of the following national honor societies have 
been established on campus with membership open to 
qualified students: Beta Alpha Psi (accounting), Beta 
Gamma Sigma (business), Delta Sigma Pi (business), Fi- 
nancial Management Association Honor Society (finance), 
Omicron Delta Epsilon (economics), Phi Kappa Phi (all- 
campus), Pi Sigma Epsilon (marketing). In addition there 
are the following clubs which students are encouraged to 
join: Accounting Society, AIESEC, APICS (American Pro- 
duction and Inventory Control Society Management), 
Black Business Students, Data Processing Management 
Association, Economics Association, Finance Associ- 
ation, Inter-Club Council, American Marketing Associ- 
ation, Personnel and Industrial Relations Association 
(management), Personnel Management Association of 
Aztlan, Rho Epsilon (real estate-finance), Securities and 
Investment Association, and The Institute of Management 
Science. 

Prizes in Business Administration and Economics 

Stephen J. Barres Leadership Award 

Theodore H. Smith Outstanding Graduate Student Award 

Advisory Board Award: Outstanding Student 

Advisory Board Award: Outstanding Faculty 

See also awards listed under each department. 


For additional information on awards and scholarships 
available to business students, contact the office of the 
Dean, Langsdorf Hall 700. 

Computer Facilities 

The CSUF Computer Center in McCarthy Hall and the 
SBAE Satellite Computer Laboratory in Langsdorf Hall are 
available for student use. Facilities include terminals 
(which access the campus’ main computers), microcom- 
puters, and printers. Computer facilities are generally 
available evenings and weekends during the school year. 

Information on the Degree Requirements 

Accountancy, Master of Science 
See "Department of Accounting” 

Business Administration, Bachelor of Arts 

Business Administration, Master of Business 
Administration 

Business Administration, Minor 
See "Business Administration Degrees" 

Economics, Bachelor of Arts 

Economics, Master of Arts 

Economics, Minor 
See "Department of Economics” 

International Business, Bachelor of Arts 
See "International Business Program ” 

Management Information Systems, Minor 
See "Management Information Systems” 

Management Science, Master of Science 
See "Department of Management Science ” 

Taxation, Master of Science 
See "Department of Accounting” 


School of Business Administration and Economics 


199 


Department of 
Accounting 


Associate Dean: Keith W. Lantz 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 700 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Accounting 
Master of Science in Accountancy 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Accounting 
Master of Science in Taxation 
Faculty 

Jack Coleman, Eugene Corman, Mary Fleming, 

Clyde Hardman, A. Jay Hirsch, Herbert Jensen, 

K.J. Kim, Judith Krimmel, Keith W. Lantz, Trini Melcher, 
Robert Miller, Stephen Moscove, Jacob Paperman, 
Shirish Seth, Robert Straith, Randy Swad, 

Dorsey Wiseman, Philip Woodward 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, pro- 
vides information on admissions, curriculum and gradua- 
tion requirements; registration and grading procedures; 
residence and similar academic matters. In addition, the 
Accounting Department provides advising on curriculum 
content and career opportunities: 

Accounting Keith W. Lantz 

CPA Examination Keith W. Lantz 

Taxation Clyde Hardman 

INTRODUCTION 

Accounting is often referred to as "the language of busi- 
ness.” Very generally, the accounting process is con- 
cerned with recording, classifying, reporting and interpret- 
ing the economic data of an organization. These data are 
important to users, who may include managers, investors 
and other interested groups. Accounting helps in decision- 
making processes by showing how money has been spent 
and where commitments have been made, by judging per- 
formance and by showing the implications of following 
different courses of action. Reliable information in a dy- 
namic business environment is necessary for sound deci- 
sions concerning the allocation of scarce resources. Thus 
accounting plays a very significant part in our social and 
economic systems. 

Programs in accounting are designed for students who are 
interested in careers in public accounting, industry, gov- 
ernment, or social accounting, and for students who intend 
to work for advanced degrees in accounting in preparation 
for teaching and research. 



Accounting 


Credential Information 

The Department of Accounting offers courses which may 
be included in the Single Subject Waiver Program in Busi- 
ness. Further information on the requirements for teaching 
credentials is contained in the Teacher Credential Pro- 
grams section of this catalog. 

Prizes in Accounting 

Outstanding Senior Award 
Amy Vanasse Memorial Award 
Arthur Andersen & Co. 

Arthur Young & Company 
Coopers & Lybrand 
Deloitte Haskins & Sells 
Ernst & Whinney 
Grant Thornton Co. 

National Association of Accountants, O.C. Chapter 
Peat, Marwick, Main & Co. 

Price Waterhouse 

Society of Accountants — O.C. Chapter 
Touche Ross and Co. 

Western Digital Corporation 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration Degrees, Accounting Con- 
centration.” 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ACCOUNTANCY 

The Master of Science in Accountancy program provides 
the conceptual understanding and technical competence 
for a career in professional accounting. Employment op- 
portunities include public accounting, industrial account- 
ing and government. The program encompasses both a 
theoretical foundation and technical skills. Emphasis is 
placed on the development of a professional attitude and 
the capacity to deal with issues of accounting policy and 
ethics. Graduates should be prepared for entry-level posi- 
tions, and for potential advancement in the profession. 

The M.S. in Accountancy program is scheduled especially 
for students who are employed full time. Courses are of- 
fered during the late afternoon and evening. Most students 
enroll on a part-time basis, taking two courses (6 units) per 
semester. 

The curriculum is designed for students with an under- 
graduate degree in business administration with a concen- 
tration in accounting. The 10 courses (30 units) may be 
completed in one year (full time) or 2V 2 years (part time). In 
addition to seven accounting courses, there are two elec- 
tives and a terminal, research-project course. 

Cal State Fullerton is the only university in Orange County 
accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate 
Schools of Business. This assures a rigorous program, a 
well qualified faculty, high standards for students, and ac- 
cess to an extensive library system. The qualifications of 
the M.S. in Accountancy faculty include advanced degrees 
in taxation, accounting, and law; practical tax experience; 
and professional standing as CPA’s and attorneys. 


Most graduate courses in the School of Business Adminis- 
tration and Economics require “classified SBAE status ” 
and are open only to students with classified standing in 
the M.B.A., M.S. in Accountancy, M.S. in Taxation, M.S. in 
Management Science, or M.A. in Economics programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be admit- 
ted to postbaccalaureate unclassified standing. 

1 . Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an institution accre- 
dited by a regional accrediting association, or equiv- 
alent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 se- 
mester units attempted and in good standing at the last 
college attended. 

Note: Postbaccalaureate unclassified students may enroll 
in undergraduate courses (100 through 400 level) but gen- 
erally are ineligible for graduate business courses (500 
level). Such students may wish to take undergraduate 
courses which are necessary to meet the requirements for 
classified standing (see below). Upon completing the re- 
quirements, the student may file an “Application for 
Change of Academic Objective — Graduate” requesting 
admission to the M.S. in Accountancy program. Admission 
to the university as a postbaccalau reate unclassified stu- 
dent does not constitute admission to the M.S. in Accoun- 
tancy program, does not confer priority, nor does it guaran- 
tee future admission. Students planning to apply for admis- 
sion to the M.S. in Accountancy program should confer 
with the graduate adviser in the School of Business Admin- 
istration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements 
may be admitted to the M.S. in Accountancy program with 
conditionally classified standing: 

3. Combination of GPA and score on the Graduate Man- 
agement Admission Test (GMAT) sufficient to yield a 
score of at least 950 according to one of the following 
formulas. Due to limited facilities and resources in the 
School of Business Administration and Economics, a 
higher score may be required of all applicants. 

A. If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2.5 and 
GMAT is at least 450, then score = (GPA x 200) + 
GMAT. 

B. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2.5 or GMAT 
is below 450, then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT 
-50. 

C. If GPA is based on the last 60 semester units of 
course work* then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT 
- 100 . 

* All work within any given quarter or semester must be 
included even though that will result in more than 60 se- 
mester units. The units to be included in the last 60 semes- 
ter units may come only from the following: (1) work taken 
in postbaccalaureate status during the last seven years 
toward fulfilling M. S. in Accountancy course work require- 
ments; (2) units taken under a prescribed remedial pro- 
gram agreed to by the associate dean, School of Busi- 
ness Administration and Economics; (3)units earned prior 
to the bachelor’s degree. 


Accounting 


Note: To be admitted as conditionally classified students, 
applicants must be within three courses (or 10 units) of 
meeting the requirements for classified standing (see be- 
low). Such courses must be completed within the first 12 
months of study. Students who do not do so will not be 
allowed to continue in the program. Conditionally classi- 
fied students may take a limited number of graduate 
courses (500 level) subject to the approval of the graduate 
adviser of the School of Business Administration and Eco- 
nomics. Applicants with a bachelor s degree in a field 
other than business administration (or whose deficiency is 
greater than three courses) should apply for the Master of 
Business Administration program. Upon completion of the 
M.B.A. foundation courses and Business Administration 
595 (or 596), an application for a change of objective may 
be filed for transfer to the M.S. in Accountancy program. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements 
will be advanced to classified standing. Such students are 
eligible to take graduate courses for which they qualify. 

4. A bachelor’s degree with a major in business adminis- 
tration and a concentration in accounting which meets 
the requirements stated in this catalog for such de- 
grees. The degree must include calculus and computer 
programming equivalent to passing Mathematics 135, 
Business Calculus (3 units), and Management Science 
264, Introduction to Computer Programming (2 units), 
with a minimum C grade. Courses in the major are to be 
no more than seven years old, and courses in the ac- 
counting concentration no more than five years old. 
Courses in the major (including the accounting concen- 
tration) must have at least a 3.0 (B) GPA. Courses with 
grades lower than C must be repeated. 

5. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum 

The curriculum requires 30 semester units of course work 
beyond the baccalaureate degree. At least 24 of the 30 
units required for the degree must be at the graduate level. 
A GPA of 3.0 (B) is required. Any study plan course in 
which a D is received must be repeated and must receive 
at least a C grade regardless of the overall GPA of the 
student. 


Required Courses 


Accounting 502 Seminar in 
Accounting 503 Seminar in 
Problems (3) 

Accounting 505 Seminar in 
Accounting 506 Seminar in 
Communications (3) 
Accounting 507 Seminar in 
Systems (3) 

Accounting 521 Seminar in 
Accounting 572 Seminar in 
and Shareholders (3) 


Accounting Theory (3) 
Contemporary Accounting 

Auditing (3) 

Professional Accounting 

Acctg. Information 

Admin. Accounting (3) 
Taxation of Corporations 


Electives in Accounting or Related Business Fields 

Two courses (6 units) at the 400 or 500 level, to be selected 
in consultation with, and approved by, the program coor- 
dinator. 


Terminal Evaluation 
Accounting 597 Project (3) 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration Degrees, Accounting Con- 
centration.” 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN TAXATION 

The Master of Science in Taxation program provides the 
conceptual understanding and technical competence for a 
career in taxation. Employment opportunities include the 
tax departments of CPA and law firms, as well as corpora- 
tions and government tax agencies. For those already 
employed in this field, the M.S. in Taxation program should 
meet the continuing education requirements of profession- 
al associations and licensing boards. 

The M.S. in Taxation program is scheduled especially for 
students who are employed full time. Courses are offered 
during the late afternoon and evening. Most students en- 
roll on a part-time basis, taking two courses (6 units) per 
semester. 

The curriculum is designed for students with an under- 
graduate degree in business administration. The 10 
courses (30 units) may be completed in one year (full time) 
or 2 V 2 years (part time). In addition to six courses in the 
field of taxation, there are three electives and a terminal, 
research-project course. 

Cal State Fullerton is the only university in Orange County 
accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate 
Schools of Business. This assures a rigorous program, a 
well qualified faculty, high standards for students, and ac- 
cess to an extensive library system. The qualifications of 
the M.S. in Taxation faculty include advanced degrees in 
taxation, accounting, and law; practical tax experience; 
and professional standing as CPA’s and attorneys. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business Adminis- 
tration and Economics require “classified SBAE status” 
and are open only to students with classified standing in 
the M.B.A., M.S. in Accountancy, M.S. in Taxation, M.S. in 
Management Science, or M.A. in Economics programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be admit- 
ted to postbaccalaureate unclassified standing: 

1 . Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an institution accre- 
dited by a regional accrediting association, or equiv- 
alent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 se- 
mester units attempted and in good standing at the last 
college attended. 

Note: Postbaccalaureate unclassified students may enroll 
in undergraduate courses (100 thru 400 level) but are gen- 
erally ineligible for graduate business courses (500 level). 
Such students may wish to take undergraduate courses 
which are necessary to meet the requirements for classi- 
fied standing (see below). Upon completing the require- 
ments, the student may file an “Application for Change of 


Accounting 


Academic Objective Graduate” requesting admission to 
the M.S. in Taxation program. Admission to the university 
as a postbaccalaureate unclassified student does not con- 
stitute admission to the M.S. in Taxation program, does not 
confer priority, nor does it guarantee future admission. Stu- 
dents planning to apply for admission to the M.S. in Tax- 
ation program should confer with the graduate adviser in 
the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements 
will be admitted to the M.S. in Taxation program with condi- 
tionally classified standing: 

3. Combination of GPA and score on the Graduate Man- 
agement Admission Test (GMAT) sufficient to yield a 
score of at least 950 according to one of the following 
formulas. Due to limited facilities and resources in the 
School of Business Administration and Economics, a 
higher score may be required of all applicants. 

A. If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2.5 and 
GMAT is at least 450, then score = (GPA x 200) 
+ GMAT. 

B. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2.5 or GMAT 
is below 450, then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT 
-50. 

C. If GPA is based on the last 60 semester units of 
course work* then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT 
- 100 . 

* All work within any given quarter or semester must be 
included even though that will result in more than 60 se- 
mester units. The units to be included in the last 60 semes- 
ter units may come only from the following: (1) work taken 
in postbaccalaureate status during the last seven years 
toward fulfilling M.S. in Taxation course work require- 
ments; (2) units taken under a prescribed remedial pro- 
gram agreed to by the Associate Dean, School of Busi- 
ness Administration and Economics; (3) units earned pri- 
or to the bachelor’s degree. 

Note: To be admitted as conditionally classified students, 
applicants must be within three courses (or 10 units) of 
meeting the requirements for classified standing (see be- 
low). Such courses must be completed within the first 12 
months of study. Students who do not do so will not be 
allowed to continue in the program. Conditionally classi- 
fied students may take a limited number of graduate 
courses (500 level) subject to the approval of the graduate 
adviser of the School of Business Administration and Eco- 
nomics. Applicants with a bachelor’s degree in a field 
other than business administration (or whose deficiency is 
greater than three courses) should apply for the Master of 
Business Administration program. Upon completion of the 
M.B.A. foundation courses and Business Administration 

595 (or 596), an application for a change of objective may 
be filed for transfer to the M.S. in Taxation program. 

(Note: The requirement of Business Administration 595 or 

596 does not apply to students admitted to the program in 
fall 1983 or earlier.) 

Students meeting the following additional requirements 
will be advanced to classified standing. Such students are 
eligible to take graduate courses for which they qualify. 


4. A bachelor’s degree with a major in business adminis- 
tration which meets the requirements stated in this 
catalog for such degrees, and Accounting 308, Con- 
cepts of Federal Income Tax Accounting (or an equiv- 
alent course or work experience). The degree must 
include calculus and computer programming equivalent 
to passing Mathematics 135, Business Calculus (3 
units), and Management Science 264, Introduction to 
Computer Programming (2 units), with grades of at 
least C. Courses in the major are to be no more than 
seven years old and must have at least a 3.0 (B) GPA. 
Courses with grades lower than C must be repeated. 

5. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum 

The curriculum requires 30 semester units of course work 
beyond the baccalaureate degree. At least 21 of the 30 
units required for the degree must be at the graduate level. 
A GPA of 3.0 (B) is required. Any study plan course in 
which a D is received must be repeated and must receive 
at least a C grade regardless of the overall GPA of the 
student. 

Required Tax Course 

Accounting 470 Tax Research, Practice and 
Procedures (3) 

Electives in Taxation and Related Fields 

Five courses (15 units) to be selected in consultation with, 
and approved by, the student’s adviser. 

Available courses include but are not limited to: 

Accounting 408 Problems in Taxation (3) 

Accounting 508 Seminar in Tax Planning (3) 

Accounting 572 Seminar in Taxation of Corporations 
and Shareholders (3) 

Accounting 573 Seminar in Taxation of Property 
Transactions (3) 

Accounting 574 Seminar in Taxation of International 
Business Operations (3) 

Accounting 575 Seminar in Estate, Gift and Inheritance 
Taxes and Estate Planning (3) 

Accounting 576 Seminar in State & Local Taxation (3) 
Accounting 577 Seminar in Taxation of Employee 
Compensation (3) 

Accounting 578 Seminar in Taxation of 
Partnerships (3) 

Other Electives 

Courses are to be selected in consultation with, and ap- 
proved by, the student’s adviser. 

One course (3 units) in either economics or political sci- 
ence and two courses (6 units) in either business or non- 
business fields. 

Note: recommended courses in economics and political 
science include Econ 517, Poli Sci 421, 519, 528. 

Terminal Evaluation 

Accounting 597 Project (3) 


Accounting 


Accounting Courses 

201 A Financial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: None. Accounting concepts and techniques es- 
sential to the administration of a business enterprise: analyz- 
ing and recording financial transactions; accounting valu- 
ation and allocation practices; preparation, analysis and in- 
terpretation of financial statements; international accounting 
issues. (Not open to freshmen) 


201 B Managerial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 A. Introduction to managerial 
accounting; product costing; budgetary control and respon- 
sibility accounting; analysis and techniques for aiding man- 
agement planning and control decisions; basic income tax 
concepts for planning business transactions. (Not open to 
freshmen) 


301 A, B Intermediate Accounting (3,3) 

Prerequisites for 301 A: Accounting 201 B, a passing score on 
the accounting qualifying examination, and completion of all 
lower division business administration core courses with 
grades of at least C in each course. Prerequisite for 301 B: A 
grade of C or better in Accounting 301 A. Accounting theory; 
preparation of income statements, balance sheets and state- 
ments of changes in financial position; present value and 
amount concepts; assets, liabilities and stockholders equity; 
price-level accounting; pensions; leases; earnings per 
share; financial statement analysis; accounting changes and 
error analysis. 


302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B, a passing score on the ac- 
counting qualifying examination, and completion of all lower 
division business administration core courses with grades of 
at least C in each course, or a grade of C or better in 301 A. 
Accounting information for management of manufacturing 
enterprises; cost records; cost behavior and allocation; prod- 
uct costing and inventory valuation; flexible budgeting; stan- 
dard costs; responsibility accounting; cost planning and con- 
trol; and operating decision analysis. 


308 Concepts of Federal Income Tax Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B, a passing score on the ac- 
counting qualifying examination, and completion of all lower 
division business administration core courses with grades of 
at least C in each course, or a grade of C or better in 301 A. 
Provisions, legislative history and implications of the federal 
income tax. 


401 Advanced Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 301 B. Business combinations; 
meaning, usefulness and methodology of consolidated 
financial statements; investments in non-subsidiary affiliates 
and corporate joint ventures; consolidated financial state- 
ments for overseas units of U.S. -based multinational com- 
panies; translations of foreign currencies. 


402 Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B and 302. The auditing stan- 
dards and procedures used by financial and operational 
auditors. Management information and computer systems, 
internal control, audit evidence, professional responsibilities 
and legal liabilities, standards of reporting financial informa- 
tion. 

403 Accounting for Governmental & Nonprofit Entities (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B or 511. Fund accounting as 
applied to governmental and nonprofit entities; state and 
federal governments, municipalities, hospitals and universi- 
ties. Budgets, tax levies, revenues and appropriations, ex- 
penditures and encumbrances, various types of funds, and 
accounting statements. 

407 Accounting Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 A and 302 and Management 
Science 265 or equivalent. Alternative accounting systems 
used for the collection, organization and presentation of in- 
formation. Theory and practice of information processing, 
organizational, behavioral and mechanical. 

408 Problems in Taxation (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. Federal income tax as it ap- 
plies to corporations, partnerships, fiduciaries, and federal 
estate and gift taxes as they apply to taxable transfers. 

470 Tax Research, Practice and Procedures (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. The methodology of tax re- 
search including case studies; the management of a tax prac- 
tice; administration procedures governing tax controversies; 
rights and obligations of taxpayers and tax practitioners. 

495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B (may be taken concurrent- 
ly), Accounting 302, a major in accounting, consent of the 
department internship adviser, and at least junior standing, 
2.5 GPA and one semester in residence at the university. 
Planned and supervised work experience. May be repeated 
for credit up to a total of six units. Credit/No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval of department 
chair. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to 
pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for 
credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 

502 Seminar in Accounting Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B, classified SBAE status and 
consent of instructor. The effects of professional, govern- 
mental, business, and social forces on the evolution of ac- 
counting theory. 

503 Seminar in Contemporary Accounting Problems (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.S. in Accounting status or consent 
of instructor. Current issues in financial reporting including 
pronouncements by the Financial Accounting Standards 
Board and the Securities and Exchange Commission. Cov- 
erage of topics will change as new issues in accounting 
emerge. 

505 Seminar in Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 402 and classified SBAE status. 
Auditing theory and practices; professional ethics; auditing 
standards; Securities and Exchange Commission and stock 
exchange regulations; auditor’s legal liability; statement 
trends and techniques. 


Accounting 


506 Seminar in Professional Accounting Communications (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.S. in Accounting status or consent 
of instructor. Compilation and composition of accounting re- 
ports and client presentations relating to accountants’ work- 
ing papers, client engagement letters, management advisory 
reports and prospectuses. 

507 Seminar in Accounting information Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 407, or equivalent with consent of 
instructor. Case studies of computer based accounting sys- 
tems used by organizations such as universities, banks, in- 
dustrial corporations and CPA firms. Emphasis on account- 
ing information, reports and internal controls. 

508 Seminar in Tax Planning (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of instructor. Substantive provisions of federal 
law; tax planning from a corporate viewpoint; case studies of 
the effect of federal tax law on business decisions. 

510 Financial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Accumulation, organi- 
zation, and interpretation of financial and quantitative data 
relevant to the activities of corporate business enterprise. 

511 Seminar in Managerial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B or 510, consent of instructor 
and classified SBAE status. Accounting information for man- 
agement decisions; elements of manufacturing, distribution 
and service costs; cost systems; standard costs; cost re- 
ports; cost analysis. 

518 Seminar in International Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B or 51 1 and classified SBAE 
status. Comparative analysis of accounting principles and 
practices outside the United States; international financial 
accounting standards; current problems of international fi- 
nancial reporting, accounting planning and control for inter- 
national operations; multinational companies. 

521 Seminar in Administrative Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 302 or 51 1 ; classified SBAE sta- 
tus and consent of instructor. Integrative aspects of account- 
ing, financial, and quantitative data for managerial decision- 
making; long-term, short-term profit planning; budgetary 
control; cost analysis; financial analysis and planning; tax- 
ation; and transfer pricing. 

572 Seminar in Taxation of Corporations and Shareholders (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to corpora- 
tions; organizing, distributions, liquidations and reorganiza- 
tions. 


573 Seminar in Taxation of Property Transactions (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to sales, 
exchanges and other transfers. 


574 Seminar in Taxation of International Business 
Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to U.S. 
citizens and corporations with foreign source income and of 
foreign persons with U.S. source income; planning for for- 
eign operations. 


575 Seminar in Estate, Gift, Inheritance Taxes and Estate 
Planning (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of instructor. Federal and California death taxes 
and the planning of personal estates. 


576 Seminar in State and Local Taxation (3) 

Prerequisites. Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of instructor. Application of interstate income allo- 
cations; multi-state tax compact; separate v. apportionment 
accounting; foreign country sourced income. Also, California 
taxes as applied to businesses and individuals. 


577 Seminar in Taxation of Employee Compensation (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to em- 
ployee compensation including pensions and profit sharing, 
stock options, ESOP’s, IRA’s, Keogh’s, maximum tax 5-year 
averaging, death benefits, group term life, etc. 


578 Seminar in Taxation of Partnerships (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, 
or consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to partner- 
ships, estates, trusts and other special entities. 


597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent 
inquiry. Not open to students on academic probation. 


599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor 
and approval by department chair. May be repeated for cred- 
it. Not open to students on academic probation. 


Accounting 


Business Administration 
Degrees 


INTRODUCTION 

This major prepares students for entry level positions in 
business and administration in both the private and public 
sectors. Career opportunities range from accounting, cost 
analysis, marketing research and statistical forecasting to 
real estate, personnel, sales and information systems. 
This curriculum also provides a foundation for advanced 
study. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

Admission to the Business Administration Major 

Admission to the Business Administration major involves 
two steps. Students who apply to the major are initially 
classified as Pre-business. After completing the lower-divi- 
sion core requirements with grades of at least “C”, stu- 
dents may apply to the Business Administration major. 
Pre-business students may take lower-division business 
courses, but most upper-division courses are not open to 
Pre-business students. 

All of the following requirements must be met for the de- 
gree. Students must earn a grade of at least C in each 
course listed below. However, a C average will be accept- 
able in the required concentration courses. For assistance 
in interpreting these requirements contact the Business 
Advising Center. 

Required Lower-Division Core Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

(Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), may 
be substituted for Economics 201 and Economics 202.) 

Math 135 Business Calculus (3) 
or Math 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 
or Math 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
Accounting 201 A Financial Accounting (3) 

Accounting 201 B Managerial Accounting (3) 
Management 246 Business Law (3) 

Manag Sci 265 Introduction to Information Systems 
and Computer Programming (3) 

Note: Manag Sci 264, Computer Programming (2), and 
Manag Sci 263, Introduction to Information Systems and 
Micro-Computer Applications (2), may be substituted for 
Manag Sci 265. 

Collateral Requirement 

3-unit introductory social science course other than Eco- 
nomics, chosen from General Education section III.C.1. 



Business Administration 


English Proficiency Requirement 

Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency 
(EWP) 

Business Administration 301 Business Writing (3) 
or Business Administration 301 W Business Writing 
Workshop (3) 

Note: Business Administration 301 Business Writing 
should be taken before registering for any 400-level SBAE 
courses. 

Required Upper-Division Core Courses 

Business administration majors shall not enroll in any re- 
quired upper-division core course until they have completed 
all of the required lower-division core courses with a grade of 
at least C in each course. Students desiring to enroll in 
required upper-division core courses while concurrently 
completing the last of their required lower-division core 
courses may select only Business Administration 301 , Busi- 
ness Writing, Economics 310, Intermediate Microeconomic 
Analysis (or 320, Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis), 
and/or Management Science 361 , Probability and Statistical 
Methods in Business and Economics. 

The following are required: 

Econ 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) 
or Econ 315 Intermediate Business 
Microeconomics (3) 

or Econ 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic 
Analysis (3) 

Note: Management concentration requires Econ 310, or 
315. 

Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Management 339 Principals of Management and 
Operations (4) 

Management 340 Organizational Behavior (3) 
Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Manag Sci 361 Probability and Statistical Methods in 
Business and Economics (4) 

Manag Sci 362 Management Science Methods in 
Business and Economics (3) 
or Manag Sci 363 Management Science (3) 

Required Concentration Courses 

A minimum of 18 units of course work is required in one 
concentration. See listing of concentration requirements 
below. 

Required Capstone Core Course 

After completing all lower and upper-division core 
courses, take: 

Management 449 Seminar in Business Policies (3) 

Other Requirements, Grades and Residence 

Global Awareness Requirement . Complete one course, of 
at least 3 units, in the area of Global Awareness. The 
course must be selected from the list of Approved Global 
Awareness Courses, which is available from the Business 
Advising Center. 


Other subjects. Complete at least 50 units of courses in 
subjects other than business administration or economics. 
Complete all university requirements for the bachelor’s 
degree. 

Grade-Point Average (GPA). Maintain at least a 2.0 GPA 
(C average) in all university courses and in the concentra- 
tion courses. Earn at least a C grade in each course re- 
quired for the major (other than concentration courses). 
Grade option. Take all required core courses and all re- 
quired concentration courses in the School of Business Ad- 
ministration and Economics for a letter grade (A,B,C,D,F). 
The Credit/No Credit grading option may not be used for 
these courses, and a grade of CR (credit) will not satisfy the 
requirements for the degree. Exception: Courses in calculus 
may be taken under the Credit/No Credit grading option, 
although courses taken to meet general education require- 
ments must be taken for a letter grade. 

Residence. At least nine units of courses in the area of 
concentration and at least 1 5 of the last 24 units of courses 
must be taken in residence at the School of Business 
Administration and Economics. Students also must fulfill 
university residence requirements. 

Concentrations for the B.A. in Business 
Administration 

Business administration majors must complete the re- 
quirements of one concentration in addition to the degree 
requirements shown above. 

Accounting Concentration (21 units) 

All students with an accounting concentration are required 
to take the courses shown below. Before taking these 
courses, students must first complete all of the required 
lower division core courses with a grade of at least C in 
each course and must receive a passing score on the 
Accounting Qualifying Exam. The examination must be 
passed during the two semesters prior to the semester of 
class enrollment. Exceptions to the requirement of com- 
pleting lower division business core courses may be grant- 
ed to students with non-business majors. 

Accounting 301 A, B Intermediate Accounting (3,3) 
Accounting 302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Accounting 308 Concepts of Federal Income Tax 
Accounting (3) 

Accounting 402 Auditing (3) 

Accounting 407 Accounting Info Systems (3) 
and one of the following courses: 

Accounting 401 Advanced Accounting (3) 

Accounting 403 Accounting for Governmental and 
Nonprofit Entities (3) 

Accounting 408 Problems in Taxation (3) 

Accounting 470 Tax Research, Practice and 
Procedures (3) 

Business Economics Concentration (18 units) 

All students with an economics concentration are required 
to take: 

Econ 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) 
or Econ 315 Intermediate Business 
Microeconomics (3) 


Business Administration 


as part of their business administration core requirements. Finance 452 Real Estate Finance (3) 

In addition, the concentration requires: Finance 453 Real Estate Valuation (3) 


Econ 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 
Econ 410 Government and Business (3) 

and 1 2 units of upper-division economics electives, 3 units 
of which must be at the 400-level. 

Students interested in economics also should consider the 
Bachelor of Arts in Economics. 

Finance Concentration (18 units) 

All students with a finance concentration must choose one 
of the following emphases: 

Financial Institutions Emphasis (18 units) 


and one of the following courses: 


Finance 451 
Studies (3) 
Finance 454 
Finance 455 
Finance 456 


Real Estate/Land Use Law — Case 

Real Estate and Urban Development (3) 
Real Estate Investment Analysis (3) 
Property Development and Real Estate 


Policy Analysis (3) 

Management Concentration (18 units) 


All students with a management concentration are re- 
quired to take: 


Finance 331 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3)* 

Finance 332 Theory if Corporate Finance (3) 

Finance 340 Introduction to Investments (3) 

Finance 425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution 
Management (3) 

Finance 440 Money and Capital Markets (3) 


Econ 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) 
or Econ 315 Intermediate Business 
Microeconomics (3) 

as part of their business administration core requirements. 
In addition, students must choose one of the following 
emphases. 


and 3 units of upper division finance electives (other than 
Finance 310) 

Financial Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Finance 331 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3)* 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Finance 340 Introduction to Investments (3) 


Contract Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 341 Service Operations (3) 
or Management 342 Production Operations (3) 
Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 
Management 347 Business Law (3) 
or Management 348 Business Law (3) 
Management 436 Government Contracts (3) 


and two of the following courses: 

Finance 370 International Business Finance (3) 
Finance 432 Financial Forecasting and Budgeting (3) 
Finance 433 Problems in Business Finance (3) 

and 3 units of upper division finance electives (other than 
Finance 310) 

Investments and Financial Planning Emphasis (18 units) 

Finance 331 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3)* 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Finance 340 Introduction to Investments (3) 


and 6 units of elective course work to be determined in 
consultation with a departmental adviser. 

Entrepreneurial Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 341 Service Operations (3) 
or Management 342 Production Operations (3) 
Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 
Management 345 Small Business Management (3) 
or Management 448 Seminar in Small Business 
Consulting (3) 

Management 349 Law for the Small Business (3) 
or Management 444 Project Management (3) 


and three of the following courses: 

Finance 360 Principles of Insurance (3) 

Finance 410 Theory and Practice of Personal Financial 
Planning (3) 

Finance 442 Advanced Investment Analysis (3) 

Finance 444 Options and Futures (3) 

Finance 455 Real Estate Investment Analysis (3) 

Note: In addition to the requirements shown above, stu- 
dents are encouraged to take Accounting 308 Concepts of 
Federal Income Tax. 

Real Estate Emphasis (18 units) 

Finance 331 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3)* 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Finance 351 Real Estate and Urban Land Analysis (3) 


and 6 units of elective course work to be determined in 
consultation with a departmental adviser. 

General Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 341 Service Operations (3) 
or Management 342 Production Operations (3) 
Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 
Management 347 Business Law (3) 
or Management 440 Emerging Issues in 
Management (3) 

Management 447 Management Decision Games (3) 

and 6 units of elective course work to be determined in 
consultation with a departmental adviser. 


♦Finance 331 L Financial Management Lab (1) is optional and is highly 
recommended for students enrolled in Finance 331 


Business Administration 


Operations Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 342 Production Operations (3) 
Management 421 Operations Systems Design (3) 
Management 422 Production and Inventory Control (3) 
Management 445 Operations Policy and Strategy (3) 

and two 3 unit electives chosen in consultation with a 
departmental adviser 

Human Resources Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 341 Service Operations (3) 
or Management 342 Production Operations (3) 
Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 
Management 433 Advanced Topics in Human 
Resource Management (3) 

Management 441 Labor-Management Relations (3) 

and 6 units of elective course work to be determined in 
consultation with a departmental adviser. 

Organizational Behavior Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 341 Service Operations (3) 
or Management 342 
Production Operations (3) 

Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 

Management 439 Organizational Change and 
Development (3) 

Management 443 Group Dynamics (3) 

and 6 units of elective course work to be determined in 
consultation with a departmental adviser 

Management Information Systems Concentration 

(22 units) 

All students with a management information systems con- 
centration are required to take: 

Management 344 Intro to Systems Concepts (3) 

Manag Sci 270 File Concepts and COBOL 
Programming (4) 

Manag Sci 300 Elements of Information Systems 
Design and Data Communication (3) 

Accounting 302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Manag Sci 408 Data Base Manag Systems (3) 
Management 454 MIS Analysis and Design (3) 

and 3 units of upper-division electives to be selected from 
the following courses: 

Comp Sci 423 Language Processor Tech (3) 

Comp Sci 459 Micro-Computer Software Sys (3) 
Management 444 Project Management (3) 
Management 490 Seminar in Management Information 
Systems (3) 

Manag Sci 302 Software Systems for Decision 
Support (3) 

Manag Sci 310 Adv COBOL Programming (3) 

Manag Sci 333 File Structures in BASIC 
Programming (3) 

Manag Sci 409 Distributed Data Processing (3) 

Manag Sci 41 1 Data Processing: Small Computers (3) 
Manag Sci 416 Computer Perform Evaluation (3) 
Manag Sci 418 Privacy, Security and Data 
Processing (3) 

Manag Sci 448 Computer Simulation in Business and 
Economics (3) 


Management Science Concentration (18 units) 

All students with a management science concentration are 
required to take: 

Manag Sci 440 Deterministic Models in Management 
Science (4) 

Manag Sci 441 Probabilistic Models in Management 
Science (4) 

Manag Sci 461 Statistical Theory for Management 
Science (4) 


and 6 units of upper-division management science elec- 
tives chosen from the following: 


Information Systems Courses 

Manag Sci 300 Elements of Information System 
Design and Data Communication (3) 

Manag Sci 302 Software Systems for Decision 


Support (3) 
Manag Sci 310 
Manag Sci 404 
Manag Sci 408 
Manag Sci 409 
Manag Sci 41 1 
Manag Sci 416 
Manag Sci 418 
Processing (3) 


Advanced COBOL Programming (3) 
Analysis of Information Systems (3) 
Data Base Management Systems (3) 
Distributed Data Processing (3) 

Data Processing: Small Computers (3) 
Computer Performance Evaluation (3) 
Privacy, Security and Data 


Operations Research Course 

Manag Sci 448 Computer Simulation in Business and 
Economics (3) 

Statistics Courses 


Manag Sci 420 Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 
Manag Sci 422 Surveys and Sampling Design and 
Applications (3) 

Manag Sci 467 Statistical Quality Control (3) 

Marketing Concentration (19 units) 


All students with a marketing concentration must choose 
one of the following emphases: 


Advertising Management Emphasis (19 units) 


Marketing 354 
Marketing 370 
Marketing 379 
Marketing 454 
Marketing 459 


Principles of Advertising (3) 
Buyer Behavior (3) 

Marketing Research Methods (4) 
Advertising Management (3) 
Marketing Strategy (3) 


and 3 units of upper-division marketing electives 


Marketing Management Emphasis (19 units) 

Marketing 370 Buyer Behavior (3) 

Marketing 379 Marketing Research Methods (4) 
Marketing 459 Marketing Strategy (3) 

Two of the following courses: 

Marketing 359 Business to Business Marketing (3) 
Marketing 460 Services and Nonprofit Marketing (3) 
Marketing 469 Business and Organizational Marketing 
Strategies (3) 


and 3 units of upper-division marketing electives 


Business Administration 


Retailing Emphasis (19 units) 


Marketing 352 
Marketing 370 
Marketing 379 
Marketing 456 
Marketing 459 


Principles of Retailing (3) 

Buyer Behavior (3) 

Marketing Research Methods (4) 
Retailing Management (3) 
Marketing Strategy (3) 


and 3 units of upper-division marketing electives 


Sales Management Emphasis (19 units) 


Marketing 356 
Marketing 370 
Marketing 379 
Marketing 455 
Marketing 459 


Professional Selling (3) 

Buyer Behavior (4) 

Marketing Research Methods (4) 
Management of the Sales Force (3) 
Marketing Strategy (3) 


and 3 units of upper-division marketing elective 


International Marketing Emphasis (19 units) 


Marketing 370 
Marketing 379 
Marketing 451 
Marketing 458 
Marketing 459 


Buyer Behavior (3) 

Marketing Research Methods (4) 
Export/Import Marketing (3) 
International Marketing Policies (3) 
Marketing Strategy (3) 


and 3 units of upper-division marketing electives 


MINOR IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 


The minor provides a basic understanding of the role of 
business in society and the methods used by business. 
This curriculum also provides a basis for advanced study. 
A working knowledge of algebra is necessary for several of 
the required courses. 

Business administration minors shall not enroll in any re- 
quired upper-division course (in the minor) until they have 
completed all of the required lower-division courses (in the 
minor) with a grade of at least C in each course. Students 
must earn a grade of at least C in each course listed below. 

Required Lower-Division Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 
or Economics 210 Principles of Economics (5) 
instead of Econ 201 and Econ 202 
Accounting 201 A. B Accounting (3,3) 

Management 246 Business Law (3) 

Management Science 265 Intro to Information Systems 
and Computer Programing (3)* 
or Sociology 289 Computer Methods in the Social 
Sciences (3) 


♦Recommended for students plan on taking additional electives in Manage- 
ment Science 

Required Upper-Division Courses 

Special Notice: Enrollment in these courses requires the 
completion of all lower-division minor requirements with a 
grade of C or better in each course. 

Management 339 Principles of Management and 
Operations (4) 

or Management 340 Organizational Behavior (3) 
Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 


Economics Majors Minoring in Business Administration: 
Economics Majors can complete a minor in business ad- 
ministration by taking Accounting 201 B, Management 
246, Finance 320, Management 339 or 340 and Marketing 
351. All other required courses for the minor are required 
for the major in Economics. 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DEGREE 

The M.B.A. degree program is accredited by the Ameri- 
can Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business. This 
assures a rigorous, in-depth program, covering the full 
spectrum of business administration. Accreditation also 
indicates a well-qualified faculty, high standards for stu- 
dents, and access to an extensive library system. 

Programs of Study 

The School of Business Administration and Economics 
offers two plans for the M.B.A. degree. 

The M.B.A. Generalist Plan is designed for students with 
little or no course work in business administration. The 
curriculum surveys the entire field of business administra- 
tion, preparing students for general management respon- 
sibilities. The plan is structured, keeping students together 
for most of their classes, and should be completed within 
three years. Courses may not be waived, although limited 
substitution of more advanced courses is allowed. This 
format requires a substantial and sustained commitment 
from students over the three-year period. Students who do 
not complete the curriculum within three years may 
change to the M.B.A. Specialist Plan. 

The M.B.A. Specialist Plan is designed for students with 
recent course work (or an undergraduate degree) in busi- 
ness administration; for those who wish to include a spe- 
cialized area of concentration in their curriculum; and/or for 
those unable to follow the structure of the M.B.A. General- 
ist Plan. Some courses may be waived on the basis of 
equivalent undergraduate course work. The program is not 
structured, and five years are allowed for completion. The 
areas of concentration are accounting, business econom- 
ics, finance, international business, management, man- 
agement science and marketing. 

The M.B.A. program is scheduled especially for students 
who are employed full time. Courses are offered during the 
late afternoon and evening. Most students enroll on a part- 
time basis, taking two courses (6-7 units) per semester. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business Adminis- 
tration and Economics require “classified SBAE status” 
and are open only to students with classified standing in 
the M.B.A., M.S. in Accountancy, M S. in Management 
Science, M.S. in Taxation or M.A. in Economics programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be admit- 
ted to postbaccalaureate-unclassified standing: 

1. Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an appropriately 
accredited institution, or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 se- 
mester units attempted and in good standing at last 
college attended. 


210 


Business Administration 


Note: Postbaccalaureate-unclassified students may enroll 
in undergraduate courses (100 thru 400 level) but are gen- 
erally ineligible for graduate business courses (500 level). 
Such students may wish to take undergraduate courses 
which are necessary to meet the requirements for classi- 
fied standing (see below). Upon completing the require- 
ments, the student may file an “Application for Change of 
Academic Objective-Graduate” requesting admission to 
the M.B.A. program. Admission to the university as a post- 
baccalaureate-unclassified student does not constitute 
admission to the M.B.A. program, does not confer priority, 
nor does it guarantee future admission. Students planning 
to apply for admission to the M.B.A. program should confer 
with the graduate adviser in the School of Business Admin- 
istration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements 
will be admitted to the M.B.A. program with conditionally 
classified standing: 

3. Admission into the MBA program is based upon an 
analysis of the following quantitative and qualitative 
considerations: 

A. A combination of GPA and Graduate Management 
Admission Test (GMAT) score, sufficient to yield a 
minimum score of 1000 according to one of the 
following formulas. Due to limited space, a higher 
minimum score may be required of all applicants. 

1 . If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2.5 and 
GMAT is at least 450, then score = (GPA x 200) 
+ GMAT. 

2. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2.5 or 
GMAT is below 450, then score = (GPA x 200) 
-l- GMAT -50. 

B. A score in the top three-fourth’s of both the Verbal 
and Quantitative areas of the GMAT. 

C. A minimum TOEFL score of 570 (international stu- 
dents only). 

D. Review by the MBA admissions committee of the 
following: 

1. Academic preparation for graduate study 

2. Any prior work experience 

3. Two letters of reference 

4. A “Statement of Purpose” in pursuing the MBA, 
to be submitted by applicant 

Note: Conditionally classified students may take a limited 
number of graduate courses (500 level), subject to the 
approval of the graduate adviser of the School of Business 
Administration and Economics. Students are expected to 
advance promptly to classified standing. In particular, any 
deficiencies in calculus or computer programming must be 
removed during the first 12 months of study. Students who 
do not do so will not be allowed to continue in the program. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will 
be advanced to classified standing. Such students are eligi- 
ble to take graduate courses for which they are qualified. 


4. Proficiency in calculus and computer programming 
equivalent to passing Mathematics 135, Business Cal- 
culus (3 units), and Management Science 264, Intro- 
duction to Computer Programming (2 units), with 
grades of at least C. Students with work experience in 
these fields may demonstrate proficiency by passing a 
challenge examination and should consult the chair of 
the Management Science Department for details. 

5. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum — M.B.A./Generalist Plan 

The M.B.A./Generalist curriculum includes 1 5 courses (47 
units). Two specified courses must be taken each spring 
and fall semester for six semesters. The remaining three 
courses may be taken at the student’s convenience, dur- 
ing summer school and/or regular semesters, and must be 
completed within the three years allowed. 

Any deficiencies in calculus or computer programming 
must be removed before starting the program. No courses 
may be waived, although limited substitutions of more ad- 
vanced courses in the same field will be allowed. Any study 
plan course in which a D grade is received should be 
repeated, and must receive at least a C grade, regardless 
of the overall GPA of the student. 

Foundation Courses 

Accounting 510 Financial Accounting (3) 

Economics 515 The Price System and Resource 
Allocation (4) 

Finance 517 Managerial Finance (3) 

Management 516 Organizational Theory and 
Management of Operations (3) 

Management 518 Legal Environment of Business (2) 
Manag Sci 513 Statistical Analysis and Forecasting 
Techniques (4) 

Manag Sci 514 Business Modeling and Solution 
Techniques (4) 

Marketing 519 Marketing Management (3) 

Advanced Courses 

Accounting 51 1 Seminar in Managerial Accounting (3) 
Econ 521 Macroeconomic Theory and Policy (3) 
or Econ 522 Comparative Economics Seminar (3) 
Finance 523 Seminar in Corporate Financial 
Management (3) 

Management 524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior 
and Administration (3) 

Marketing 525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 
Terminal Courses 

Business Admin 590 Seminar in Business 
Administration (3) 

Terminal Evaluation 

Business Admin 591 Management Game (3) 
Comprehensive Examination 

Students who are unable to complete the M.B.A./Gener- 
alist Plan within three years may change to the M.B.A./ 
Specialist Plan. This change will result in deleting Busi- 
ness Administration 590 (3 units) from the study plan and 
adding an area of concentration (12 units), a net increase 
of 9 units. 


Business Administration 


Curriculum M.B.A./Specialist Plan 

The M.B.A./Specialist curriculum includes a concentration 
in a specialized area and requires from 33 to 56 units of 
graduate course work. Students with a bachelor’s degree 
in business administration may be able to complete the 
program with the minimum of 33 units, whereas those with 
little or no recent course work in business administration 
may require the full 56 units. Any deficiencies in calculus or 
computer programming must be removed within one year. 
Any study plan course in which a D grade is received must 
be repeated, and must receive at least a C grade, regard- 
less of the overall GPA of the student. 

Foundation Courses 

Foundation courses may be waived on the basis of equiv- 
alent undergraduate course work, providing that the equiv- 
alent courses are no more than seven years old, have 
grades of at least C, and a GPA of at least B. 

Accounting 510 Financial Accounting (3) 

Economics 515 The Price System and Resource 
Allocation (4) 

Finance 517 Managerial Finance (3) 

Management 51 6 Organizational Theory and 
Management of Operations (3) 

Management 518 Legal Environment of Business (2) 
Manag Sci 513 Statistical Analysis and Forecasting 
Techniques (4) 

Manag Sci 514 Business Modeling and Solution 
Techniques (4) 

Marketing 519 Marketing Management (3) 

A list of equivalent undergraduate courses is available 
from the graduate adviser. In many cases, students with a 
recent bachelor’s degree in business administration from 
an accredited university will be able to waive all foundation 
courses. 

Advanced Courses 

All seminars in this group must be taken at the graduate 
level. The management science seminar will be waived for 
students who have taken both Manag Sci 51 3 and 51 4 (but 
not for students who have taken Manag Sci 361 and/or 
362). Students with a concentration in international busi- 
ness are required to take only five of the following courses: 

Accounting 51 1 Sem in Managerial Accounting (3) 

Note: Students who have satisfactorily completed a course 
in cost accounting must substitute Accounting 521 Sem in 
Administrative Accounting (3). 

Econ 522 Comparative Economics Seminar (3) 
or Econ 521 Macroeconomic Theory and Policy (3) 

Note: Economics 521 is not open to students with credit in 
intermediate macroeconomics. 


Finance 523 Seminar in Corporate Financial 
Management (3) 

Management 524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior 
and Administration (3) 

Marketing 525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 
Manag Sci 526 Forecasting, Decision Analysis, and 
Experimental Design (3) 

or Manag Sci 550 Special Topics on Information 
Systems Design and Data Communication (3) 
or Manag Sci 560 Adv Deterministic Models (3) 
or Manag Sci 561 Adv Probabilistic Models (3) 

Concentration Courses (except international business) 

12 units in one area of concentration: 

Accounting Management 

Business Economics Management Science 

Finance Marketing 

At least 6 units of the concentration courses must be taken 
at the 500-level. Concentration courses are to be ap- 
proved by the department chair concerned, or designee 
within the department, and the Associate Dean, Graduate 
Programs, School of Business Administration and Eco- 
nomics. 

Note: Students choosing the accounting concentration 
may have to take Accounting 301 A, B, Intermediate Ac- 
counting, and/or Accounting 308, Concepts of Federal In- 
come Tax Accounting, as prerequisites to their concentra- 
tion courses. 

Concentration Courses International Business 

Five of the following courses (15 units) are required, in- 
cluding at least 9 units at the graduate (500) level. ( Note 
that students with an international business concentration 
take only five of the courses listed above under Advanced 
Courses.) 

Accounting 518 Seminar in International 
Accounting (3) 

Economics 41 1 International Trade (3) 

Finance 570 Seminar in International Financial 
Management (3) 

Management 547 Comparative Management (3) 
Marketing 458 International Marketing Policies (3) 

Elective (3 units) to be approved by the international busi- 
ness advisor. Recommended electives include selected 
courses in History, Political Science, Communications, 
Geography and Chicano Studies. 

Terminal Requirements 

Business Administration 591 Management Game (3) 
Comprehensive Examination 

Note: In exceptional cases, a thesis (Business Administra- 
tion 598, Thesis) may be substituted for the comprehen- 
sive examination. See the graduate adviser for details. 


Business Administration 


Business Administration Courses 

For information about Business Administration 301, con- 
sult the Coordinator, Business Writing Program, in the 
Business Writing Office, Modular Unit 209 or Mobil Unit 
302. For information about Business Administration 590 
and 591, consult the graduate adviser in the Business 
Advising Center, LH-700. 

301 Business Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: English 101 or equivalent (with a grade of C or 
better). Principles of effective writing in business. Extensive 
practices in various forms of business writing. Case studies. 
Satisfies the classroom portion of the upper-division writing 
requirement for business and economics majors. Students 
may not receive credit for both Bus Ad 301 and Bus Ad 
301 W. 

301 W Business Writing Workshop (3) 

Prerequisite: English 101 or equivalent (with a grade of C or 
better). Principles of effective writing in business. Extensive 
practice in various forms of business writing. Case studies. 
Uses word processing facilities in computer lab. Satisfies the 
classroom portion of the upper-division writing requirement 
for business and economic majors. (2 hours lecture: 2 hours 
activity.) Students may not receive credit for both Bus Ad 301 
and Bus Ad 30 1W. 


499 Independent Study 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Open to qualified stu- 
dents desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May 
be repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic 
probation. 

590 Seminar In Business Administration (3) (Formerly 595) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, within nine units of 
completing study plan. Business administration capstone 
course integrating functional areas to formulate business 
policy. Micro and macro current issues are explored in detail 
illustrating the complexities and broad responsibilities of 
business management. 


591 Management Game (3) (Formerly 596) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, within six units of com- 
pletion of study plan and in final semester of program. As the 
terminal course in the M.B.A. prgram, this course is con- 
cerned with reviewing and integrating the areas of business 
into a synergistic whole. As a focal point, a computerized 
game allows student teams to plan and execute business 
strategies, analyzing the impact of decisions made under 
uncertainty. Not open to students on academic probation. 


598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status and consent of associ- 
ate dean. Individual research under supervision. See “The- 
ses and Projects’’ in this catalog for university requirements. 


Business Administration 


Department of 
Economics 


Department Chair: Anil Puri 

Director, Center for Economic Education: 

John Lafky 

Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 702 
Center for Economic Education: 

Langsdorf Hall 530 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Business Economics 
Bachelor of Arts in Economics 
Minor in Economics 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Business Economics 
Master of Arts in Economics 
Faculty 

Robert Ayanian, Victor Brajer, Kwang-wen Chu, 

James Dietz, Peter Formuzis, Andrew Gill, Ken Goldin, 
Jane Hall, Walter Hettich, Sidney Klein, John Lafky, 
Stewart Long, Robert Michaels, Howard Naish, 

Gary Pickersgill, Joyce Pickersgill, Anil Puri, Guy Schick, 
Eric Solberg, Murray Wolfson, David Wong 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, pro- 
vides information on admission, curriculum and gradua- 
tion requirements; registration and grading procedures; 
residence and similar academic matters. In addition, all 
economics majors should see a faculty adviser in the De- 
partment of Economics for information on career opportu- 
nities and advanced study. Undergraduates should consult 
the department office for the name of their faculty adviser. 
Graduate students should consult the graduate coordina- 
tor, Eric Solberg. 

INTRODUCTION 

As a scholarly discipline, economics is over two centuries 
old, dating back to the French physiocrats and Adam 
Smith in the 1 8th century. The nature of economic analysis 
has been described by John Maynard Keynes as "... a 
method rather than a doctrine, an apparatus of the mind, a 
technique of thinking which helps its possessors to draw 
correct conclusions.” 

Economic methods are used to study a basic question 
which faces all societies: how should limited resources be 
used to produce goods and how should that production be 
distributed? Not all wants can be satisfied because re- 
sources and knowledge are limited. Therefore, societies 



Economics 


are faced with choices. These choices are made in differ- 
ent ways: by custom; by command and centralized control; 
or by a system of markets and prices as in our mixed 
economy Economists examine alternative solutions to the 
basic economic problem by analyzing costs and benefits of 
changing existing patterns of resource use. 

Economists work in many specialties including money and 
banking, international trade and finance, labor, public fi- 
nance, industrial policy, business cycles and forecasting. 
Social issues and problems such as poverty, crime, dis- 
crimination, immigration, aging, energy, pollution and edu- 
cation are typical subjects of faculty research. 

The faculty of the Economics Department participates in 
programs leading to both undergraduate and graduate de- 
grees. One undergraduate program leads to a bachelor of 
arts degree with a major in economics, which focuses on 
economics as a social science. Another undergraduate 
program leads to a bachelor of arts degree with a major in 
business administration and a concentration in business 
economics and requires a larger number of business 
courses. Both programs prepare the student for a variety of 
career opportunities in business and government as well 
as advanced studies in economics, business, public ad- 
ministration and law. Graduate study is offered in econom- 
ics, leading to a master of arts degree. Alternatively, stu- 
dents may follow the Master of Business Administration 
curriculum, with a concentration in business economics. 

Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the De- 
partment of Economics offers courses which may be in- 
cluded in the Multiple Subjects Waiver Program; the Single 
Subject Waiver Program in Business; and in the Supple- 
mentary Authorization Programs in Economics and in Eco- 
nomics and Consumer Education. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching cre- 
dentials is found in the Teaching Credential Programs sec- 
tion of this catalog and also is available from the Depart- 
ment Office for Elementary and Bilingual Education and for 
Secondary Education. Students interested in exploring ca- 
reers in teaching at the elementary or secondary school 
levels should contact the Office of Admission to Teacher 
Education, Education Classroom 207. 

Prizes in Economics 

The Norman Townshend-Zellner Award 

Wall Street Journal Student Achievement Award 

Outstanding Senior in Economics 

Outstanding Graduate Student in Economics 

Levern F. Graves Award 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 

Admission to the Economics Major 

Admission to the Economics major involves two steps. 
Students who apply to the major are initially classified as 
Pre-economics. After completing the lower-division core 
requirements with grades of at least “C”, students may 


apply to the Economics major. Pre-economics students 
may take lower-division business and economics courses, 
but most upper-division courses are not open to Pre-eco- 
nomics students. 

All of the following requirements must be met for the de- 
gree. Students must earn a grade of at least C in each 
course listed below. However, a C average will be accept- 
able in the upper division economics electives. For assis- 
tance in interpreting these requirements contact the Busi- 
ness Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700. Students 
should also contact their faculty adviser in the Economics 
Department prior to or during their first semester. 

Required Lower-Division Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

(Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), may 
be substituted for Economics 201 and 202.) 

Accounting 201 A Financial Accounting (3) 

Math 135 Business Calculus (3) 
or Math 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 
or Math 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
Economics 440 Introduction to Econometrics (4) 
or Math 150B Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
or Accounting 201 B Managerial Accounting (3) 
Manag Sci 265 Introduction to Information Systems 
and Computer Programming (3) 

Note: Management Science 264, Computer Programming 
(2), and Management Science 263, Introduction to Infor- 
mation Systems and Micro-Computer Applications (2), 
may be substituted for Management Science 265. 

English Proficiency Requirement 

Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency 
(EWP). 

Bus Administration 301 Business Writing (3) 
or Bus Administration 301 W Business Writing 
Workshop (3) 

Note: Bus Admin 301, Business Writing, should be taken 
before registering for any 400-level SBAE courses. 

Required Upper-Division Courses 

Economics 310 Intermed Microeconomic Analysis (3) 
Economics 320 Intermed Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 
Manag Sci 361 Probability and Statistical Methods in 
Business and Economics (4) 

and 18 units of upper-division economics electives, 6 units 
of which must be 400 level. No more than 3 units of inde- 
pendent study may be used to meet the 400 level electives 
requirement. 

Other Requirements, Grades and Residence 

Other Subjects. Complete at least 50 units of courses 
outside the School of Business Administration and Eco- 
nomics. The department recommends that these courses 
be from the social sciences and mathematics. Students 
planning to do graduate work in economics are advised to 


Economics 


take Math 150A,B; Economics 440 and Economics 441. 
Complete all university requirements for the bachelor’s 
degree. 

Grade-Point Average (GPA). Attain at least a 2.0 GPA (C 
average) in all university courses and in the upper division 
economics electives. Earn at least a C grade in each 
course required for the major (other than the upper division 
economics electives). 

Grade Option. Take all required courses in economics, 
accounting and management science for a letter grade 
(A,B,C,D,F). The credit/no credit grading option may not 
be used for these courses, and a grade of CR (credit) will 
not satisfy the requirements for the degree. Exception: 
courses in calculus may be taken under the credit/no credit 
grading option, although courses taken to meet general 
education requirements must be taken for a letter grade. 

Residence. At least 15 units of courses must be taken in 
residence at the School of Business Administration and 
Economics at Cal State Fullerton. Also fulfill university 
residence requirements. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See "Business Administration, Business Economics Con- 
centration.” 

MINOR IN ECONOMICS 

The economics minor covers the basics in the discipline of 
economics and gives students the opportunity to explore 
personal interests through electives. Note that a course in 
calculus (Math 135 or equivalent) is prerequisite to Eco- 
nomics 310 and 320. Students must earn a grade of at 
least C in each course listed below. 

Required Lower-Division Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), may be 
substituted for Economics 201 and Economics 202. 

Required Upper-Division Courses 

Economics 310 Intermediate Microeconomics 
Analysis (3) 

or Economics 315 Intermediate Business 
microeconomics (3) 

Economics 320 Intermediate Macroeconomics 
Analysis (3) 

and 9 units of upper division economics electives 

Note: Students with a major in business administration and 
a concentration other than economics, who wish to minor 
in economics, must take Economics 201 and 202 (or 210) 
and 310 as part of their major. For such students, these 
requirements in the minor will be waived and the minor will 
consist of Economics 320 and nine units of upper-division 
economics electives. Students with a major in business 
administration and a concentration in business economics 
may not also minor in economics. 


MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See "Business Administration, Business Economics Con- 
centration.” 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 

This program provides preparation for professional ca- 
reers in private industry and government and provides a 
foundation for further graduate work at the doctoral level. 
Full-time and part-time students can be accommodated. 
Most of the courses are scheduled in the evening. 

The curriculum is designed for students with an undergrad- 
uate degree in business administration or economics, and 
consists of 10 courses (30 units). Provided that all prereq- 
uisites have been satisfied, the program may be complet- 
ed in one year (full time) or 2Vs> years (part time). 

The required courses progress from economic theory 
through economic model building and forecasting to the 
seminar in which the student prepares a thesis applying 
economic theory and econometric methods to a specific 
area of investigation. The curriculum also includes five 
courses (15 units) of electives. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business Adminis- 
tration and Economics require classified "SBAE status” 
and are open only to students with classified standing in 
the M.A. in Economics, M.B.A., M.S. in Management Sci- 
ence, or M.S. in Taxation programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be admit- 
ted to postbaccalaureate-unclassified standing: 

1 . Acceptable bachelor’s degree from appropriately ac- 
credited institution, or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 se- 
mester units attempted, and in good standing at last 
college attended. 

Note: Postbaccalaureate — unclassified students may en- 
roll in undergraduate courses (100 thru 400 level) but are 
generally ineligible for graduate economics courses (500 
level). Such students may wish to take undergraduate 
courses which are necessary to meet the requirements for 
classified standing (see below). Upon completing the re- 
quirements, the student may file an Application for Change 
of Academic Objective — Graduate requesting admission 
to the M.A. in Economics program. Admission tothe univer- 
sity as a postbaccalaureate — unclassified student does 
not constitute admission to the program, does not confer 
priority, nor does it guarantee future admission. Students 
planning to apply for admission to the program should 
confer with the graduate adviser in the Department of Eco- 
nomics. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements 
will be admitted with conditionally classified standing: 

3. Overall undergraduate GPA of at least 2.5. 

4. An average score of 500 on the Graduate Record Ex- 
amination (G.R.E.). 


216 


Economics 


Note: Conditionally classified students may take a limited 
number of courses at the graduate level, subject to the 
approval of the graduate adviser of the Department of 
Economics. Students are expected to advance promptly to 
classified standing. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will 
be advanced to classified standing. Such students are eligi- 
ble to take graduate courses for which they are qualified. 

5. Completion of the following courses at Cal State Fuller- 
ton (or equivalent courses at other institutions) with a 
grade-point average of at least 3.0 (B average). The 
course in calculus must have a grade of at least C. 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 
Economics 310 Intermediate Microeconomic 
Analysis (3) 

Economics 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic 
Analysis (3) 

Economics 420 Money and Banking (3) 

or three units of upper-division electives 

Manag Sci 361 Probability and Statistical Methods in 
Business and Economics (4) 

Mathematics 135 Business Calculus (3) 

6. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum 

Note: Students are urged to meet as soon as possible with 
the graduate adviser in the Department of Economics to 
file a study plan and advance to classified standing. 

Any study plan course in which a D grade is received must 
be repeated, and must receive at least a C grade, regard- 
less of the overall grade-point average of the student. 


Required Courses 


Economics 440 
Economics 502 
Economics 503 
Economics 505 


Introduction to Econometrics (4) 
Adv Microeconomic Analysis (3) 
Adv Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 
Econ Models and Forecasting (3) 


Elective Courses 


14-15 units of elective courses in economics at the 400 or 
500 level. (Note: With the approval of the graduate adviser 
of the Department of Economics, some of these courses 
may be in fields outside of, but related to, economics.) At 
least six units of elective courses must be at the 500 level, 
and at least six units must be in economics. Economics 
596 is specifically designed to serve as an elective in this 
program. The topic of the course rotates every semester 
and it may be repeated for credit. 


Terminal Evaluation: Thesis 


Economics 598 Thesis Research (3) 


Economics Courses 

100 The Economic Environment (3) 

The application of economics to the problems of unemploy- 
ment and inflation, the distribution of income, competition 
and monopoly, the role of government in the economy, and 
other policy issues. Not open to prebusiness, business ad- 
ministration majors or minors, economics majors or minors, 
or international business majors. 

201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Principles of individual consumer and producer decision- 
making in various market structures: the price system; mar- 
ket performance and government policy. 

202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 201. Principles of macroeconomic 
analysis and policy; unemployment and inflation; financial 
institutions; international trade; economic growth; compara- 
tive systems. 

210 Principles of Economics (5) 

Prerequisite: Open only to junior transfers. (Duplicates 201 
and 202.) Economic analysis and policy. The central problem 
of scarcity, economic institutions of the United States, re- 
source allocation and income distribution, economic stability 
and growth, the role of public policy, and international appli- 
cations. 

310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 202 or 210 and Mathematics 135; 
corequisite Management Science 361. Rational decision- 
making behavior of consumers and firms and price and out- 
put determination in markets. Primarily for Economics ma- 
jors, but open to all students who qualify. 

315 Intermediate Business Microeconomics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 202 or Economics 210 and Math- 
ematics 135. Corequisite: Management Science 361 . Analy- 
sis of business decisions in alternative market structures 
with special emphasis on problem solving in a business con- 
text using economic concepts and methods. Not open to 
Economics majors. Students may not receive credit for both 
Economics 310 and 315. 

320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 202 or 210 and Math 135; Corequi- 
site: Management Science 361. The determinants of the 
level of national income, employment and prices, and mone- 
tary and fiscal policies. 

330 Comparative Economic Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Alternative eco- 
nomic systems; their theoretical foundations, actual eco- 
nomic institutions, and achievements and failures. Contrast 
between socialist and capitalist systems. 

331 The Soviet Economy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The structure 
and performance of the Soviet economy; the problems of 
allocating scarce resources and sustaining economic growth 
in a planned economy. 

332 Economic Problems of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The natural re- 
sources, population, agricultural, industrial, transportation, 
communications, monetary, banking, etc. problems of Asia, 
(i.e., China, Japan, and the Asian subcontinent). The relation 
of non-economic problems to the economy. 


Economics 


333 Economic Development: Analysis and Case Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The processes 
of economic growth with references to developing areas. 
Capital formation, resource allocation, relation to the world 
economy, economic planning and institutional factors, with 
case studies. 

334 Economics of Latin American and the Caribbean (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Examines re- 
gional economic problems within an international context: 
dependence, industrialization and the international corpora- 
tion; agriculture; regional cooperation; inflation; trade and 
debt problems. Major economic thinkers will be discussed. 

335 The International Economy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 1 00 or 201 or 21 0. The theory, prac- 
tice and institutions of the international economy. Interna- 
tional trade and investment; European economic communi- 
ty; balance of payments; foreign exchange rates; multina- 
tional enterprise; trade with developing countries; East-West 
trade; international economic policy. 

340 The Economics of Regulation (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The laws per- 
taining to regulation and the implications for each regulated 
industry. Industry studies; the effects of regulation on price, 
output, innovations, etc. 

350 American Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The develop- 
ment of American economic institutions; economic prob- 
lems, economic growth and economic welfare. 

351 European Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The evolution of 
European economic institutions and their relation to the de- 
velopment of industry, commerce, transportation and finance 
in the principal European countries. 

361 Urban Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 1 00 or 201 or 21 0. Theory and anal- 
ysis of the urban economy, urban economic problems and 
policy. 

362 Environmental and Resource Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210, or consent of 
instructor. Economic analysis of environmental problems 
and related issues in resource development: externalities, 
property rights, social costs and benefits, user cost, rent and 
decisionmaking under uncertainty. 

363 The Economics of Energy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Economic theory 
applied to energy problems, the impact of energy develop- 
ment on economic structure, and the role of government in 
allocating energy resources and influencing their use. 

410 Government and Business (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 and Business Administration 
301 or the equivalents. Business organization, conduct and 
performance; the rationale and impact of public policy on 
business and business activities, including the regulated in- 
dustries, sick industries and antitrust policy. 

411 International Trade (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 and Business Administration 
301 or the equivalents. The theory of international trade and 
the means and significance of balance of payments adjust- 
ments; past and present developments in international, com- 
mercial and monetary policy. 


412 Labor Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 and Business Administration 
301 or the equivalents. Labor supply and demand, labor 
force participation, employment, unemployment, human 
capital, wage differentials, disadvantaged labor market 
groups, discrimination and wage-related income transfers. 

416 Benefit Cost and Microeconomic Policy Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or consent of instructor; Busi- 
ness Administration 301 ; or the equivalent. Application of 
microeconomic models and welfare economics to public 
policy. Concepts of economic efficiency, economic surplus 
and equity. Measurement of policy effects, including benefit- 
cost analysis, with applications to selected policy areas such 
as education and environmental programs. 

417 Public Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 or consent of the instructor, 
Business Administration 301 or the equivalent. Government 
finance at the federal, state and local levels; the impact of 
taxation and spending on resource allocation, income distri- 
bution, stabilization and growth. 

420 Money and Banking (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320 and Business Administration 
301 or the equivalents. The money supply process and the 
impact of monetary policy on economic activity. 

421 Monetary and Fiscal Policy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320 and Business Administration 
301 or the equivalents. The techniques of monetary and 
fiscal policy; of their relative roles in promoting economic 
stability and growth. 

440 Introduction to Econometrics (4) 

Prerequisites: Economics 202 (or 210), Manag Sci 361 and 
Business Administration 301 or the equivalents. Economic 
measurement: specification and estimation of econometric 
models; statistical methods in economic research. 

441 Introduction to Mathematical Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 202 (or 210) and Math 135 or 
equivalent. Economic theory, from microeconomics and ma- 
croeconomics. Content varies; constrained optimization 
problems and rational decision-making. 

446 Managerial Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 31 0 or 31 5, and Management Sci- 
ence 361. An application of microeconomic analysis and 
economic measurement to decision making at the individual 
firm level. The influence of the macroeconomic environment 
and market structure on the decisions of the firm. Applica- 
tions and case studies. 

450 History of Economic Thought (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 31 0 or 320 and Business Adminis- 
tration 301 . Major schools of thought and of leading individ- 
ual economists as they influenced economic thought and 
policy. 

495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: economics major with Business Administra- 
tion 301, Manag Sci 361, Economics 310 (or 320) (or the 
equivalents) or international business major with Business 
Administration 301 , Economics 202 and 335, Manag Sci 361 
(or the equivalents); and consent of the department intern- 
ship adviser, at least junior standing, 2.5 GPA and one se- 
mester in residence at the university. Planned and super- 
vised work experience. May be repeated to a total of six units 
credit. Credit/No Credit grading only. 


Economics 


496 Student-to-Student Tutorial (1-3) 

Prerequisites: economics major or concentration, Econom- 
ics 310 and 320, Business Administration 301 , senior stand- 
ing, 3.0 GPA and consent of department chair. Student 
learns through teaching (tutoring) other students enrolled in 
principles and intermediate economics courses. Consult 
"Student-to-Student Tutorials” in this catalog for more infor- 
mation. May not be used to satisfy the elective requirements 
for the major or concentration in economics. Credit/No Credit 
grading only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: economics major or concentration, Econom- 
ics 310 and 320, Business Administration 301 (or the equiv- 
alents), senior or graduate standing, and consent of instruc- 
tor and department chair. Directed independent inquiry. May 
be repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic 
probation. 

502 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 and classified SBAE status or 
consent of instructor. The determination of prices and out- 
puts in a market system. Deterministic and probabilistic 
models of demand, production, cost and investment. In- 
cludes behavioral, probabilistic, game theoretic and behav- 
ioral models of the firm. 

503 Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 320 and classified SBAE status or 
consent of instructor. The determination of employment, fluc- 
tuations of real and money income, and the forces underlying 
economic growth. 

505 Economic Models and Forecasting (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 440 and classified SBAE status or 
consent of the instructor. Statistical methods of econometric 
estimation and forecasting. Practical solutions to problems 
in model specification, estimation by regression, time series 
analysis and forecasting. 

515 The Price System and Resource Allocation (4) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status and Math 135 or the 
equivalent. Microeconomic analysis and policy under mixed 
capitalism. The economic environment and institutions, mar- 
kets, consumer choice, production and resource allocation. 
Monopoly power and government intervention. (Not open to 
M.A. Economic candidates.) 

516 Economics and Benefit-Cost Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 201 (or 210) and classified gradu- 
ate status in environmental studies or public administration. 
Economics and benefit-cost analysis of public projects. Con- 
sumer demand and the estimation of benefits; the nature of 
cost in a market economy; price controls, unemployment and 
inflation; and criteria for choice, for multi-year projects. For 
elective credit in the M.S. Environmental Studies or M.P.A. 


517 Economics of Public Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 515 (or 516) and classified gradu- 
ate status in environmental studies, public administration or 
taxation. Economics and federal, state and local govern- 
mental spending, taxation and borrowing. Major taxes, their 
effects on market prices, income distribution, employment 
and inflation and evaluation of reform proposals. (For elec- 
tive credit in the M.S. Environmental Studies, M.P.A. or M.S. 
Taxation.) 

521 Macroeconomic Theory and Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 515 and classified SBAE 
status. National income determination and macroeconomic 
models. Inflation and unemployment. Monetary and fiscal 
policies. International trade and foreign exchange (Not open 
to M.A. Economics candidates or students with credit for 
Economics 320.) 

522 Comparative Economics Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 515 or 310 and classified SBAE 
status. Analytical and prescriptive approaches to economic 
problems of scarcity, development, fiscal and monetary poli- 
cy, planning and poverty. (Not open to M.A. Economics can- 
didates.) 

590 Topics in Economic Analysis and Policy (3) (Formerly 
596) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 and 320; classified SBAE sta- 
tus or consent of instructor. Contemporary research in areas 
such as: resource economics; history of economic thought; 
international monetary systems; forecasting; economics of 
planning; human resource economics. May be repeated for 
credit. 

597 Project (3) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent 
inquiry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

598 Thesis Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 502, 503 and classified SBAE sta- 
tus. Corequisite: Economics 505. Selection and approval of 
topic; outline; methodology; literature survey; data collection 
and analysis; presentation of results. Award of the grade is 
contingent upon the completion and acceptance of the the- 
sis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 440, 502 and 503; classified grad- 
uate status; and consent of instructor and department chair 
(or designee). Directed advanced independent inquiry. May 
be repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic 
probation. 


Economics 


Department of Finance 

Department Chair: John Emery 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 556 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Finance 
Master of Business Administration 

Concentration in Finance 
Faculty 

Albert Bueso, Su Chan, Donald Crane, John Erickson, 

Albert J. Fredman, Peter Mlynaryk, Dennis O’Connor, 

P. James Stickels, Richard Stolz, Marco Tonietti, 

B. E. Tsagris 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, pro- 
vides information on admissions, curriculum and gradua- 
tion requirements, registration and grading procedures, 
residence and similar academic matters. In addition, ad- 
vising on curriculum content and career opportunities may 
be obtained from the chair of the Finance Department or 
from: 

Financial Management 
Insurance 

Personal Financial Planning 
Real Estate 

Securities and Investments 

INTRODUCTION 

Finance is the study of the methods by which a firm pro- 
vides itself with cash to run its daily operations and its long- 
range expansion. 

In choosing their course work students may elect one of 
four areas of emphasis within the finance concentration of 
the major in business administration: financial manage- 
ment; financial institutions; investments and financial plan- 
ning; and real estate. A financial management emphasis 
may lead to employment in a bank or savings and loan 
association. An investment and financial planning empha- 
sis may lead to employment in a brokerage firm or a finan- 
cial planning firm. A real estate emphasis may lead to 
employment in the real estate industry. 

Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the De- 
partment of Finance offers courses which may be included 
in the Single Subject Waiver Program in Business and in 
the Supplementary Authorization Program in Economics 
and Consumer Education. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching cre- 
dentials is found in the Teaching Credential Programs sec- 
tion of this catalog and is also available from the Depart- 
ment Office for Secondary Education. Students interested 


Marco Tonietti 
Marco Tonietti 
Donald Crane 
B. E. Tsagris 
Albert Fredman 



Finance 


in exploring careers in teaching at the elementary or sec- 
ondary school levels should contact the Office of Admis- 
sion to Teacher Education. 

Prizes in Finance 

The Wall Street Journal Award 

Edward D’Cunha Finance Award 

Financial Management Association Award 

Investment Trust Award 

Jack Nichols Scholarship Award 

Outstanding Finance Student Award 

Outstanding Service Award 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Finance Concentration.” 
MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See "Business Administration, Finance Concentration.” 


Finance Courses 

310 Personal Financial Management (3) 

Financial problems of the household in allocating resources 
and planning expenditures. Housing, insurance, installment 
buying, medical care, savings and investments. (May not be 
used to fulfill the concentration requirement in finance.) 

320 Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B; corequisite: Management 
Science 361 . Financing business enterprises; financial plan- 
ning and control; analysis of alternative sources and uses of 
combinations of short-, intermediate-and long-term debt and 
equity. Cost of capital. Study of capital investment decisions; 
capital budget analysis and valuation; working capital and 
capital structure management; relative impact on the inter- 
national environment of financial decisions. 

331 Financial Management and Computer Applications (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Analysis of working capital man- 
agement and policy. Use of available software programs and 
financial models in computer-aided analysis of working cap- 
ital management, financial forecasting, financial planning, 
capital budgeting, leasing problems, investments and other 
financial issues. 

331 L Financial Management Lab (1) 

Corequisite: Finance 331. Laboratory in computer assisted 
financial analysis. 

332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331 (may be taken concurrently). Risk 
and return analysis. An introduction to the capital asset and 
arbitrage pricing models. Analysis of capital budgeting, cap- 
ital structure, dividend policy, leasing, mergers and divesti- 
tures. 


340 Introduction to Investments (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331 (may be taken concurrently). Insti- 
tutional characteristics of securities markets, security valu- 
ation and trading methods, fundamental and technical analy- 
sis, selection and management of securities, introduction to 
the capital asset pricing model, role of options and futures 
markets, portfolio analysis and mutual funds. 

351 Real Estate and Urban Land Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320 or consent of instructor. Real es- 
tate principles, practices and investment decisions. Equity 
investment, finance, legal aspects, practices, principles, 
property development, real estate administration in the pub- 
lic sector, real estate market analysis, valuation. 

360 Principles of Insurance (3) 

Prerequisite: junior or senior status. Life, casualty and liabil- 
ity insurance, individual and group insurance programs; 
methods of establishing risks and rates. 

370 International Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320 or consent of instructor. Financing 
problems of international business. The international finan- 
cial environment, taxation of foreign income, international 
capital and money markets, problems of risk in foreign in- 
vestments, and financial techniques for the operation of a 
multinational firm. 

410 Theory & Practice of Personal Financial Planning (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Developing, implementing and 
monitoring comprehensive personal financial plans. Includes 
risk management, investments, taxation, retirement and es- 
tate planning, as well as professional practices. 

425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution 
Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. The solution of financial institu- 
tion problems. Major financial intermediaries and the deci- 
sion-making problems they face. Regulation and its effect on 
management operations. Group problems and case studies. 

432 Financial Forecasting and Budgeting (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331 . Forecasting in financial manage- 
ment; construction and interpretation of economic forecasts 
for the economy, industry and the firm; construction and in- 
terpretation of financial plans; evaluation of capital acquisi- 
tion decisions under certainty and uncertainty conditions. 

433 Problems in Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 332. Case studies. Group problems of 
estimating funds requirements, long-term financial planning, 
controlling and evaluating cash flows, and financing acquisi- 
tions and mergers, capital budgeting, and cost of capital. 
Group problems and case studies. 

440 Capital and Money Markets (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Capital and money markets in the 
American economy; markets for new corporate and govern- 
ment issues; secondary markets; interrelation of financial 
institutions; factors influencing yields and security prices. 

442 Advanced Investment Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 340 and Management Science 361 . 
Securities markets and company analysis, security valuation 
models the CAPM and the APT option pricing, and portfolio 
models. Practical application of investment theory and re- 
cent literature will be emphasized. 


Finance 


444 Options and Futures (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 340. Put and call options, option pric- 
ing theory and models. Financial futures pricing, hedging 
strategies and models. Institutional characteristics of futures 
trading. Options and futures on stock indices. Options on 
futures, theoretical relationship between options and futures. 

451 Real Estate/Land Use Law — Case Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Real estate law. Cases provide 
illustrations of specific legal situations; financial institutions, 
property rights, zoning, land use law and environmental im- 
pact requirements. 

452 Real Estate Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351 . Financial institutions and real es- 
tate credit. Sources and uses of capital (funds) in financing 
real estate transactions. Money and capital markets and their 
effect on credit availability. Instruments in real estate finance. 
Investment methods and decisions. Group problems and 
case studies. 

453 Real Estate Valuation (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Real property value, historical 
evolution of valuation principles, approaches in urban and 
real property appraisals, alternative methods and tech- 
niques for property valuation. 

454 Real Estate and Urban Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Factors and influences of urban 
growth and development. Economic factors and real estate 
supply and demand. Location theory and urban growth pat- 
terns. Public policy as a factor in real estate development. 
Analysis of real estate markets. 

455 Real Estate Investment Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351 . Alternative analytical techniques 
in evaluating real estate investments. Tax aspects, measure- 
ment of investment returns, application of computer models 
to investment decisions. Lecture, discussion and case analy- 
sis of major investment types — raw land, apartment 
houses, commercial and industrial uses. 

456 Property Development and 
Real Estate Policy Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Decision making process in the 
property development process — from raw land to retail mar- 
keting of completed product. Policy formulation and imple- 
mentation, project feasibility analysis, financial analysis, 
computer assisted analysis; case studies. 

495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 331 or 332, a major in finance, con- 
sent of department internship adviser, junior standing, 2.5 
GPA and one semester in residence at the university. Also 
open to international business majors. Planned and super- 
vised work experience. May be repeated for credit up to a 
total of six units. Credit/No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by department 
chair. Open to undergraduate students desiring to pursue 
directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not 
open to students on academic probation. 


517 Managerial Finance (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 510 and classified SBAE status. 
The methodology of financial management. The primary 
tools for financial analysis, long-term investment decisions, 
valuation and working capital management. International ap- 
plications. 

523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 and classified SBAE status. The 
analysis of the financial decision-making process through 
case studies and seminar presentations. Current financial 
theory and models. International applications. 

533 Seminar in Financial Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 523 and classified SBAE status. Opti- 
mal financing and asset administration; advanced tech- 
niques of capital budgeting; application of analytical meth- 
ods to the administration of the finance function of the busi- 
ness firm. 

540 Seminar in Financial Markets (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or equivalent and classified 
SBAE status. Structure and operation of major financial insti- 
tutions; portfolio composition, price-cost problems, and mar- 
ket behavior; analysis of financial intermediation and interre- 
lation of financial institutions and markets. 

541 Seminar in Investment Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or equivalent and classified 
SBAE status. Problems of investment and portfolio manage- 
ment; concepts of risk evaluation and investment criteria; 
analysis of interest rate movements; investment valuation 
and timing; regulation and administrative problems of the 
industry. 

551 Seminar in Real Estate Investment (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or equivalent and classified 
SBAE status. Problems of real estate investment; concepts 
of evaluation and investment criteria; analysis of real proper- 
ty values; real estate development and financing. Case stud- 
ies. 


570 Seminar in International Financial Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 51 7 or consent of instructor and clas- 
sified SBAE status. The financial problems of the multina- 
tional firm. International financing instruments, capital in- 
vestment decisions, and constraints on the profitability of 
multinational businesses. 


597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent 
inquiry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor 
and approval by department chair. May be repeated for cred- 
it. Not open to students on academic probation. 


222 


International Business 

Program 



Program Coordinator: Irene Lange 
Program Office: Langsdorf Hall 626 


Program Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in International Business 


Program Council 

Farouk Abdelwahed (Management) 

Linda Andersen-Fiala 
Alberto Bueso (Finance) 

Irene Lange (Marketing) 

Doris Merrifield (German) 

Gary Pickersgill (Economics) 

Marcial Prado (Spanish) 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, pro- 
vides information on admissions, curriculum and gradua- 
tion requirements, registration and grading procedures, 
residence and similar academic matters. Additional advis- 
ing on curriculum content and career opportunities is avail- 
able from the International Business Program: 


International Business: 
French: 

German: 

Japanese: 

Portuguese: 

Spanish: 

Other languages: 

INTRODUCTION 


Irene Lange 
Linda Andersen 
Doris Merrifield 
Keiji Matsumoto 
Ronald Harmon 
Marcial Prado 
Jacqueline Kiraithe 


The international business curriculum covers the funda- 
mentals of business administration, with an emphasis on 
international business. Foreign language courses are re- 
quired and stress the use of the language in international 
business. The program also includes an internship with an 
international business. This curriculum prepares students 
for entry level positions in international business. Opportu- 
nities exist in contracts, distribution and sales and may 
lead to general management positions. Since Southern 
California is a major international business center, there 
are career opportunities with internationally oriented firms 
in this area. Other career opportunities may involve inter- 
national travel or overseas assignments. 

Language concentrations are offered in French, German, 
Japanese, Portuguese, and Spanish. Other concentra- 
tions may be developed in the future. The program is of- 
fered jointly by the School of Business Administration and 
Economics and the Department of Foreign Languages and 
Literatures. 

Prize In International Business 

The Dennis Rippin-lnternational Marketing Association 
Scholarship 


ooq 

International Business w 


Preparation For The Major 

Students who expect to complete this program in the usual 
four-year period should realize that the total requirements, 
including general education courses and prerequisites, can 
exceed 124 semester units. Intermediate level competency 
in a foreign language, equivalent to courses numbered 204 
in the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures, is 
prerequisite to the required concentration courses. It is there- 
fore strongly recommended that students complete a mini- 
mum of three years of foreign language study while in high 
school. Similarly, algebra and geometry are necessary for 
many required business courses. The equivalent of three 
years of high school mathematics, including a second 
course in algebra, is the prerequisite for the required Math- 
ematics 135, Business Calculus. Students without the nec- 
essary background will need to enroll in Mathematics 100, 
Precalculus Mathematics. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN INTERNATIONAL 
BUSINESS 

Admission to the International Business Major 

Admission to the International Business major involves 
two steps. Students who apply to the major are initially 
classified as Pre-international business. After completing 
the lower-division core requirements with grades of at least 
“C”, and demonstrating satisfactory progress toward inter- 
mediate competency in a foreign language, students may 
apply to the International Business major. Pre-internation- 
al business students may take lower-division business 
courses, but most upper-division courses are not open to 
Pre-international business students. 

All of the following requirements must be met for the de- 
gree. Students must earn a grade of at least C in each 
course listed below. However, a C average will be accept- 
able in the required concentration courses. For assistance 
in interpreting these requirements, contact the Business 
Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700. 

Required Lower-Division Core Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

Note: Economics 21 0, Principles of Economics (5), may be 
substituted for Economics 201 and 202. 

Math 135 Business Calculus (3) 
or Math 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 
or Math 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
Accounting 201 A, B Accounting (3,3) 

Management 246 Business Law (3) 

Manag Sci 265 Introduction to Information Systems 
and Computer Programming (3) 

Note: Intermediate competency in the appropriate foreign 
language is prerequisite to the required concentration 
courses. If necessary, students should enroll in French, 
German, Japanese or Spanish 101, 102, 203 and/or 204, 
or, for students with previous study of a romance language, 
Portuguese 101 and/or 102. Students may enroll at any 
point in this sequence of courses for which their previous 


study and/or experience have prepared them. Normally, 
two or three years of high school language study are 
counted as the equivalent of 10 units of college language 
study. Students should consult an adviser in the Depart- 
ment of Foreign Languages and Literatures before enroll- 
ing in their first foreign language course. 

English Proficiency Requirement 

Cal State Univer. Fullerton Examination in Writing Profi- 
ciency (EWP) 

Business Administration 301 Business Writing (3) 
or Business Administration 301 W Business Writing 
Workshop (3) 

Note: Business Administration 301 should be taken before 
registering for any 400-level SBAE courses. 

Required Upper-Division Core Courses 

Note: International business majors shall not enroll in any 
required upper-division core course until they have com- 
pleted all of the required lower-division core courses with a 
grade of at least “C” in each course. Students desiring to 
enroll in required upper-division core courses while con- 
currently completing the last of their required lower-divi- 
sion core courses may select only Business Administration 
301, Economics 335 and/or Manag Sci 361. 

Economics 335 International Economy (3) 

Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Finance 370 International Business Finance (3) 
Management 339 Principles of Management and 
Operations (4) 

Management 340 Organizational Behavior (3) 

Manag Sci 361 Probability and Statistical Methods in 
Business and Economics (4) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Marketing 458 International Marketing Policies (3) 

And a minimum of three units chosen from among the 
following electives. It is recommended that students take 
up to 12 units of electives, if possible. 


Anthropology 303 Economic Anthropology (3) 
Anthropology 308 Culture Change (3) 

Comp Lit 453 The Novel in France and Germany (3) 
Geography 333 Latin America (3) 

Geography 336 Europe (3) 

Geography 344 Africa (3) 

Geography 360 Economic Geography (3) 

History 350 History of Latin America Civilization (3) 
History 429 Europe Since 1914 (3) 

History 453 Modern Mexico (3) 

Philosophy 312 Business and Professional Ethics (3) 
Poli Sci 430 Government and Politics of a Selected 
Nation-State (3)* 

Poli Sci 431 Government and Politics of a Selected 


Area (3)* 

Poli Sci 457 Politics of International Economics (3) 
Speech Comm 320 Intercultural Communication (3) 


♦When topic is appropriate. 


224 

T International Business 


Required Concentration 


Concentrations in Other Languages 


(choose one of the following concentrations) 
Concentration in French: 


French 310 
French 31 1 
French 315 
French 325 


French in the Business World (3) 
French for International Business (3) 
Origins of Modern France (3) 
Contemporary French Civilization (3) 


Concentration in German: 


German 310 German in the Business World (3) 
German 311 German for International Business (3) 
German 315 Introduction to German Civilization (3) 
German 325 Current Trends in Culture of German 
Speaking People (3) 


Concentration in Japanese: 


Japanese 310 
Japanese 31 1 
Japanese 315 
Japanese 316 


Japanese for Business (3) 

Japanese for International Business (3) 
Introduction to Japanese Civilization (3) 
Modern Japan (3) 


Concentration in Portuguese: 


Portuguese 310 Portuguese in the Business World (3) 
Portuguese 317 Advanced Conversation and 
Composition (3) 

Portuguese 320 Introduction to Luso-Brazilian Culture 
and Civilization (3) 

Portuguese 325 Contemporary Brazilian Civilization (3) 

Note: One of the following courses may be substituted for 
Portuguese 320 or 325: 

Spanish 310 Spanish in the Business World (3) 
Spanish 31 1 Spanish for International Business (3) 


Upon review and recommendation of the International 
Business Program Council, students who have earned ac- 
ademic credit for courses equivalent to those in the lan- 
guage concentrations, but in languages other than 
French, German, Japanese, Portuguese and Spanish, 
may be awarded a degree with a concentration in the 
relevant language. In cases where the student has com- 
pleted some, but not all of the equivalents, the Program 
Council may recommend appropriate course work. 

Required Internships 

Foreign Languages 495 Internship (3) 

and one of the following: 

Economics 495 Internship (3) 

Finance 495 Internship (3) 

Management 495 Internship (3) 

Management Science 495 Internship (3) 

Marketing 495 Intership (3) 

Note: All students are required to spend a minimum of four 
months in full-time employment with a faculty-approved 
firm having international dealings and in which daily use of 
a foreign language is normal procedure. (Highly qualified 
students, i.e., those having a 3.2 GPA in their upper-divi- 
sion core and concentration courses, will be aided in find- 
ing six-month positions abroad). Simultaneous enrollment 
in the two required internships is therefore expected, and 
students normally will not take any other course work dur- 
ing this period. 

Other Requirements 

Grade Point Average (GPA): Attain at least a 2.0 GPA (C 
average) in all university courses and in the concentration 
courses. Earn at least a C grade in each course required 
for the major (other than concentration courses). 


Concentration in Spanish: 


Spanish 310 
Spanish 311 
Spanish 315 
Spanish 316 
Civilization 


Spanish in the Business World (3) 
Spanish for International Business (3) 
Introduction to Spanish Civilization (3) 
Introduction to Spanish-American 
(3) 


Note: Students may substitute one of the following for 
Spanish 315 or 316: 

Spanish 415 Contemporary Spanish Culture (3) 
Spanish 416 Contemp Spanish-American Culture (3) 


Grade Options: Take all required core and concentration 
courses for a letter grade (A,B,C,D,F). The credit/no credit 
grading option may not be used for these courses, and a 
grade of CR (credit) will not satisfy the requirements of the 
degree. Exceptions: Calculus (Math 1 30, 1 35 or 1 50A) and 
Internship may be taken under the credit/no credit option, 
although courses taken to meet general education require- 
ments must be taken for a letter grade. 

Residence: At least 12 units of upper-division core 
courses, 6 units of upper-division concentration courses 
and 6 units of internships must be taken in residence at 
CSUF. 


International Business 



Department of 
Management 

Department Chair: Thomas Johnson 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 640 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 

Concentration in Management 

Master of Business Administration 

Concentration in Management 
Faculty 

Farouk Abdelwahed, Michael Ames, Thomas Apke, 

Mei Liang Bickner, Robert Chapman, James Conant, 
Richard Gilman, Gamini Gunawardane, 

Ghasem Haj-Manoochehri, Cheong Han, Dorothy Heide, 
Granville Hough, Richard Houston, Thomas Johnson, 
Geoffrey King, Brian Kleiner, Elliot Kushell, 

Thomas Maher, Thomas Mayes, Leland McCloud, 

Kent McKee, Tai Oh, Gustavo Vargas, Edgar Wiley, 
Edward Zilbert 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, pro- 
vides information on admissions, curriculum and gradua- 
tion requirements; registration and grading procedures; 
residence and similar academic matters. In addition, the 
Management Department provides advising on career op- 
portunities and on the emphases within the Management 
Concentration: 

Contract Manag. 

Entrepreneurial Manag. 

General Manag. 

Human Resource Manag. 

Law 

Operations Manag. 

Organizational Behavior 
and Organizational 
Development 

INTRODUCTION 

Managers are needed in a wide variety of different types of 
organizations — business and nonbusiness, large and 
small, foreign and domestic. In all of these organizations, 
managers need technical, human and conceptual skills to 
help achieve organizational goals. 

Management courses are designed to teach the funda- 
mental principles underlying organizations, to emphasize 
education which will improve students’ thought processes, 
to provide familiarity with the analytical tools of manage- 
ment, and to develop in the student an ability to use the 
techniques involved in analyzing and evaluating manageri- 
al problems and making sound decisions. 


Geoffrey King/Thomas Maher 
Michael Ames 
Farouk Abdelwahed 
Thomas Johnson 
Thomas Apke 
Michael Ames 
Brian Kleiner 


226 _ 


Students may pursue a wide variety of academic and ca- 
reer interests through six different emphases. These em- 
phases include: (1) contract management, (2) entrepre- 
neurial management, (3) general management, (4) human 
resource management, (5) production and operations 
management, and (6) organizational behavior 

Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the Man- 
agement Department offers courses which may be includ- 
ed in the Single Subject Waiver Program in Business and 
in the Supplementary Authorization Program in Econom- 
ics and Consumer Education. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching cre- 
dentials is found in the Teaching Credential Programs sec- 
tion of this catalog and is also available from the Depart- 
ment of Secondary Education. Students interested in ex- 
ploring careers in teaching at the elementary or secondary 
school levels should contact the Office of Admission to 
Teacher Education. 

Prizes in Management 

The H. Peter Guertin/APICS Orange County Chapter 
Scholarship 

The Orange County Industrial Relations Research 
Association (OCIRRA) 

The PERMA Scholarship 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See "Business Administration, Management 
Concentration.” 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See "Business Administration, Management Concen- 
tration". 


Management Courses 

246 Business Law (3) 

Philosophy, institutions and role of law in business and soci- 
ety. Functions of courts and attorneys, case studies in areas 
of contracts and on the law relating to sale of goods. 

339 Principles of Management and Operations (4) 

Prerequisites: all lower division business core courses or 
instructor s consent; corequisite Management Science 361 . 
Administrative processes in utility-creating business oper- 
ations: decision-making; planning; controlling; organizing; 
staffing; supporting business information systems; measur- 
ing and improving effectiveness; production processes, pro- 
duction operations and institutions in American and world- 
wide business. Uses the Production Lab. Includes taking the 
Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency (fee- 
charged). 


340 Organizational Behavior (3) 

Prerequisites: general education in social sciences. Social 
and cultural environments of business; corequisite: Manage- 
ment Science 361 . Business ethics. Communication, leader- 
ship, motivation, perception, personality development, 
group dynamics and group growth. Human behavior and 
organizational design and management practice in Ameri- 
can and world wide business. Uses the Behavioral Lab. 

341 Service Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339 and Manag Sci 361 . Sys- 
tems and quantitative procedures for services such as food 
service, entertainment, health care and government agen- 
cies. Processes for developing and testing new services. 
Uses Production Lab. Students may not receive credit for 
both Management 341 and 342. 

342 Production Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339 and Manag Sci 361. Pro- 
duction systems which combine materials, labor, and capital 
resources to produce goods. Systems, models and methods 
for management of production operations. Product and pro- 
cess development. Utilization of computer decision models. 
Uses the Production Lab. Students may not receive credit for 
both Management 341 and 342. 

343 Personnel Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 339 or consent of instructor. The 
personnel function, its activities, and its opportunities. Man- 
agement’s responsibilities for selection, development and 
effective utilization of personnel. Open to non-business ma- 
jors. 

344 introduction to Systems Concepts (3) 

Prerequisite: Manag Sci 265. The role of information sys- 
tems in organizations, general systems theory, information 
concepts, and the function of information in management 
decision making. Includes a project which requires the appli- 
cation of word processing and spreadsheet programs. 

345 Small Business Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Acctg 201 B, Manag 339, Marktg 351. Practi- 
cal applications of business administration techniques to the 
planning and operation of small businesses. Casework, re- 
search, and field work with selected local small businesses. 

347 Business Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246 or equivalent. Philosophy, in- 
stitutions and role of law in business relationships. Business 
ethics. Case studies in areas of agency, partnerships, corpo- 
rations, bankruptcy, unfair competition and trade regulation. 

348 Business Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246 or equivalent. The philos- 
ophy, institutions and role of law in commercial and personal 
transactions: case studies in personal property, bailments, 
commercial paper, secured transactions, real property, mort- 
gages, trusts, community property, wills, estate administra- 
tion and insurance. 

349 Law for Small Business (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246. The philosophy, institutions, 
and role of law and their practical applications in the areas of 
interest to the small businessperson. Product liability, con- 
sumer rights, worker’s compensation and other topics. 


Management 


421 Operations Systems Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 342 and Manag Sci 362. Man- 
agerial problems associated with designing an operations 
system, including product and process design, facilities 
planning, capacity choice, job design, automation, quality 
management and maintenance. 

422 Production and Inventory Control (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 342 and Manag Sci 362. Plan- 
ning and controlling of production activities and inventory 
levels. Identification of key problem areas. Presentation of 
applicable techniques and systems, and organizational and 
managerial concepts. Utilization of computer decision mod- 
els. 

431 Women in Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 340. (For men and women.) In- 
creasing participation in the management of organizations. 
Employment and earnings, affirmative action, understand- 
ing male-female and female-female work relationships, dual 
careers, and learning how to increase one’s effectiveness in 
organizations. 

433 Advanced Topics in Human Resource Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 343. Contemporary concepts 
and procedures in compensation and staffing. Current topics 
and controversial issues in human resource management 
are also covered. 

436 Government Contracts (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246. Advertised and negotiated 
procurement and the role of contract manager. Fiscal and 
regulatory limitations. The nature of changes, disputes and 
termination. Contract terms and conditions and administra- 
tion. 

439 Organizational Change and Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 340 or equivalent; senior or grad- 
uate status. Utilizing behavioral science knowledge to im- 
prove organizational effectiveness. Diagnosing organiza- 
tional problems; designing planned change; individual-, 
group- and organizational-level interventions; overcoming 
resistance to change and issues in the consultant-client rela- 
tionship. 

440 Emerging Issues in Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339 and 340 or consent of in- 
structor. For upper-division and graduate students. Business 
and management in America. The interrelationships of tech- 
nological, economic, political and social forces with the busi- 
ness enterprises and their ethical obligations to owners, em- 
ployees, consumers and society at large. Open to nonbusi- 
ness majors. 

441 Labor-Management Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 339. Impact of labor-manage- 
ment relations upon labor, management, and the public. 
Proper grievance procedure, collective bargaining and set- 
tlement of disputes. Uses the Behavioral Lab. 

443 Group Dynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339, 340 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Case studies and current literature on human problems 
of work situations. Developing self-knowledge; manager mo- 
tivation; communicator strengths; improving interaction 
skills; and improving interaction processes in groups. Uses 
the Behavioral Lab. 


444 Project Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management and management science core 
and other 300 level management courses in student’s con- 
centration. Technology for managing business and other en- 
terprises as cybernetic systems. The design and control of 
systems appropriate for product, project and program levels 
of analysis. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) Uses Produc- 
tion Lab. 

445 Operations Policy & Strategy (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 421, Management 422, and 
Manag Sci 362. Long term planning issues in operations and 
integrating operations strategy into corporate strategic plan- 
ning. Covers planning facilities, processes, capacity, support 
and control systems. Case studies and projects. Uses pro- 
duction computer labs. 

447 Management Decision Games (3) 

Prerequisites: business administration core less Manage- 
ment 449, or consent of instructor. A simulation of an oligopo- 
listic industry. Statistics and other analytical tools to make 
managerial decisions in management. (2 hours lecture; 2 
hours activity) 

448 Seminar in Small Business Consulting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B, Management 339, Market- 
ing 351 and senior standing. A seminar. Planning and work- 
ing in a consulting relationship with small local businesses. 
Lectures, research and field work. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours 
field work) 

449 Seminar in Business Policies (3) 

Prerequisites: all other School of Business Administration 
and Economics core courses and departmental approval. 
Integrative cases from top management viewpoint. Adminis- 
trative processes, ethical-legal-economic implications of 
business decisions, international applications; organization 
theory and policy formulation. Individual and team efforts. 
Uses the Behavioral Lab. 

453 Power and Politics in Business Organizations (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339, 340 and senior standing. 
Power and influence models as alternatives to quantitative 
decision-making methods. Used in the organizational/politi- 
cal setting of business to improve understanding of behavior 
and managerial effectiveness. 

454 MIS Analysis and Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339, 340; Manag Sci 362, 408; 
Accounting 302. Strategies for developing I/S applications. 
Life cycle phases; feasibility studies; project management; 
system requirements; system optimization; structured sys- 
tem design; conversion and maintenance. Seminar, case 
studies and laboratory supported projects. 

490 Seminar in Management Information Systems (3) 
(Formerly 494) 

Prerequisites: 300-level business core courses, Accounting 
302, Management 344, 444 (or 454), and Manag Sci 300. 
Senior seminar and applications in the design, implementa- 
tion and use of management decision/information systems. 

495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: six units of upper division management 
courses, including Management 339, major in management 
or international business, consent of department internship 
adviser and at least junior standing, 2.5 GPA and one semes- 
ter in residence at the university. Planned and supervised 
work experience. May be repeated for credit up to a total of 
six units. Credit/No Credit only. 


OOQ 

Management 


499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: management concentration, senior standing, 
and approval by faculty sponsor and department chair of 
proposed statement of work. Open to qualified students de- 
siring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeat- 
ed for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 

516 Organizational Theory and Management of 
Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, Manag Sci 514 (may 
be taken concurrently), Accounting 510, Economics 515. 
Modern organization theory and application in utility-creat- 
ing operations. Interpersonal behavior, planning, control, or- 
ganizing, directing, communication, production and informa- 
tion systems, and measures of effectiveness. International 
applications. Business ethics and relationships to society 
and politics. Graduate discussion and research reports. 

518 Legal Environment of Business (2) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status. Philosophy, institu- 
tions and role of law in business. Legal implications inherent 
in business decisions. Business ethics. Case studies in 
areas of agency, partnerships, corporations, product liability, 
employment and trade regulations. 

524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and 
Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, Management 516 and 
518 or equivalent. Human behavior in organizations, studies 
in organizational theories, and administrative action. 

535 Production/Operations Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 516 and Management Science 
514. An in-depth study of selected POM topics. Discussions 
of the operations function role and its importance, identifica- 
tion of the problem areas, and reviewing of the related con- 
cepts and techniques, including computer applications. Em- 
phasizing the current POM topics of interest to top manage- 
ment. 


542 Seminar in Labor-Management Relations (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, Management 516 and 
51 8. A seminar that focuses on various aspects of the labor- 
management relationship, issues in collective bargaining, 
the laws governing the relationship, contract administration, 
grievance handling, dispute settlement and arbitration. Ne- 
gotiation simulation and case analyses. 


543 Seminar in Personnel Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, Management 516 and 
518, or equivalent. Cases, problems and significant person- 
nel administration literature in personnel administration and 
human relations. 


547 Comparative Management (3) 

Management practices and processes in five geographical 
areas; market-structures and management characteristics 
different from those in the United States. Constraints which 
vary between countries because of cultural, legal, economic 
and/or political differences. 


597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent 
project. Student will select and have approved a project pro- 
posal, conduct the project and prepare a formal analysis and 
report. Not open to students on academic probation. 


599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor 
and consent of department chair. May be repeated for credit. 
Not open to students on academic probation. 


229 

Management tmmm \S 


Management Information 
Systems 

Coordinator: John Lawrence 
Coordinator's Office: Langsdorf Hall 562 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Management Information Systems 
Minor in Management Information Systems 
Committee 

Richard Gilman (Management) 

Dorothy Heide (Management) 

Gerald Hoth (Accounting) 

Keith Lantz (Accounting) 

John Lawrence (Management Science) 

Sorel Reisman (Management Science) 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, pro- 
vides information on admissions, curriculum and gradua- 
tion requirements; registration and grading procedures; 
residence and similar academic matters. In addition, ad- 
vising about curriculum content and career opportunities is 
available from the coordinator and the committee mem- 
bers listed above. 

INTRODUCTION 

Management information systems are computer based in- 
formation systems. These systems aid management in 
making decisions and assist in implementing and control- 
ling management policies. Management information sys- 
tems are used in business, industry and government oper- 
ations. Applications include airline reservations, banking 
transactions, crime prevention networks, election returns, 
real estate assessment, tax records, newspaper data- 
bases, sports statistics and computer assisted learning. 

Management information systems incorporate the use of 
data processing equipment, such as computers and their 
peripherals. Computer software is used to create, maintain 
and retrieve information. Techniques include mathemat- 
ical modeling and statistics, integrated with modern com- 
puter technology. These methods are applied to systems 
management, programming design, analysis of informa- 
tion flow, decision support, database organization, small 
business problems, data communication networking and 
distributed processing. 

Prizes in Management Information Systems 

Outstanding Management Information Systems Under- 
graduate Award 



Management Information Systems 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Information 
Systems Concentration.” 

MINOR IN MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS* 

This minor surveys modern computer methods and the 
development of information-systems. Emphasis is placed 
on systems which aid management decision-making. Stu- 
dents must earn a grade of at least C in each course listed 
below. 

Accounting 201 A Financial Accounting (3) 

Management 344 Introduction to Systems 
Concepts (3) 

Management Science 265 Introduction to Information 
Systems & Computer Programming (3) 


Management Science 270 File Concepts and COBOL 
Programming (4) 

Management Science 300 Elements of Information 
Systems Design and Data Communication (3) 
Management Science 408 Data Base Management 
Systems (3) 

Note: Manag Sci 265, 270 and/or 408 may be waived for 
students who have taken these courses, or their equiv- 
alents, as part of their major. However, students must com- 
plete a minimum of 1 2 units for the minor, so that if all three 
courses are waived, 3 units of electives (to be approved by 
the MIS Program Coordinator), must be added. Recom- 
mended electives include Management Science 302, 310, 
404, 409, 411 and 418. 


♦Students with a major in business administration may not minor in man- 
agement information systems. Such students should consult the Business 
Administration curriculum for concentration in management information 
systems. 


Management Information Systems 



t 

- Wrtm* 


Department Chair: Zvi Drezner 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 540 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 

Concentration in Management Science 

Master of Business Administration 

Concentration in Management Science 

Master of Science in Management Science 

Concentration in Management Information Systems 
Concentration in Operations Research 
Concentration in Statistics 

Faculty 

Lutchminia Bilici, Shu-Jen Chen, Steven Curl, 

Roger Dear, Zvi Drezner, Ben Edmondson, 

Nicholas Farnum, Daryoush Farsi, Zvi Goldstein, 

S. Hanizavareh, William Heitzman, Bhushan Kapoor, 
Ramesh Kumar, Mabel Kung, Bharat Lakhanpal, 

William Lau, John Lawrence, George Marcoulides, 

Dole Minh, Barry Pasternack, Sorel Reisman, 

Herbert Rutemiller, Joseph Sherif, Sohan Sihota, 

Ram Singhania, LaVerne Stanton, David Stoller, 

Ronald Suich 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, pro- 
vides information on admissions, curriculum and gradua- 
tion requirements; registration and grading procedures; 
residence and similar academic matters. In addition, the 
Management Science Department provides advising 
about curriculum content and career opportunities: 

Graduate Program: John Lawrence, David Stoller 


Department of 
Management Science 


Statistics: Sohan Sihota, LaVerne Stanton, Ronald Suich 

Information Systems: Shu-Jen Chen, Mabel Kung, Bharat 
Lakhanpal, William Lau, Ram Singhania 

Operations Research: Roger Dear, Zvi Drezner, John Law- 
rence 


INTRODUCTION 

Management Science is the application of the scientific 
method to decision-making in business and government. 
In practice, nearly all management science problems in- 
volve solutions using computers. Three of the major disci- 
plines in management science are operations research, 
statistics and information systems. Operations research 
uses mathematical and simulation models to provide deci- 
sion-makers with quantitative information pertaining to 
complex business situations. Statistics assists decision- 


Management Science 


makers by using techniques designed to draw inferences 
from experimental and sampling data. Information sys- 
tems focus on the application of modern computer tech- 
nology to provide accurate and relevant data to aid deci- 
sion-making. 

Situations that require operations research techniques 
arise in all areas of business: accounting, finance, produc- 
tion, marketing, and research and development. Among 
the problems addressed by operations research tech- 
niques are the determination of inventory strategies, the 
allocation of scarce resources and the design of service 
systems. Others include bidding in competitive environ- 
ments, selection of equipment replacement strategies and 
scheduling the completion of large projects. 

The statistician is often involved in activities such as sales 
forecasting, quality control and financial analysis. Statis- 
tics is also concerned with model building and the design 
of experiments dealing with product testing, surveys and 
sampling. 

Information systems is concerned with the management of 
large databases and the efficient reporting of timely infor- 
mation to decision makers. It relates to both the data pro- 
cessing hardware and the computer software. The hard- 
ware includes the computer and its peripheral equipment. 
The software is used to create, maintain and retrieve infor- 
mation. Information systems methods integrate math- 
ematical modeling and statistics with modern information 
and computer technology. These methods are applied to- 
systems management, analysis of information flow, and 
programming design. 

Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the De- 
partment of Management Science offers courses which 
may be included in the Single Waiver Program in Busi- 
ness. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching cre- 
dentials is found in the Teaching Credential Programs sec- 
tion of this catalog and is also available from the Depart- 
ment of Secondary Education. Students interested in ex- 
ploring careers in teaching at the elementary or secondary 
school levels should contact the Office of Admission to 
Teacher Education, Education Classroom 207. 

Prizes in Management Science 

Outstanding Management Science Undergraduate Award 

Outstanding Management Science Graduate Student 
Award 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Science 
Concentration.” 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Science 
Concentration.” 


MASTER OF SCIENCE IN MANAGEMENT SCIENCE 

The Master of Science in Management Science program 
provides the conceptual understanding and technical com- 
petence for a career in management science. Emphasis is 
placed on the use of scientific method to allocate re- 
sources so as to maximize profit or minimize cost. Special- 
izations include operations research, management infor- 
mation systems and statistics. These techniques are wide- 
ly used in both private business and public enterprise. 
Employment opportunities include positions such as man- 
agement analyst, data processing manager, statistician 
and forecaster. 

The M.S. in Management Science program is scheduled 
especially for students who are employed full time. 
Courses are offered during the late afternoon and evening. 

The curriculum should appeal to students with undergrad- 
uate degrees in business administration, computer sci- 
ence, mathematics, engineering or science. For students 
with an undergraduate degree in business administration, 
the 10-course (30-unit) curriculum may be completed in 
one year (full time) or 2 V 2 years (part time). In addition to a 
three-course survey of management science methods, the 
curriculum includes management science applications, 
electives, and a terminal research project. Students with a 
bachelor’s degree in a field other than business adminis- 
tration must first complete the eight M.B.A. Foundation 
Courses (26 units) or equivalent undergraduate courses. 

Cal State Fullerton is the only university in Orange County 
accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate 
Schools of Business. This assures a rigorous program, a 
well-qualified faculty, high standards for students, and ac- 
cess to an extensive library system. The qualifications of 
the M.S. in Management Science faculty include advanced 
degrees in operations research, statistics and applied 
mathematics; extensive computer experience; and practi- 
cal experience in business, industry and government. Cal 
State Fullerton is the only campus within The California 
State University offering an M.S. in Management Science. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business Adminis- 
tration and Economics require "classified SBAE status” 
and are open only to students with classified standing in 
the M.S. in Management Science, M.S. in Taxation, M.A. in 
Economics, M B A. or M.S. in Accountancy programs. 

Students meeting the following requirements will be admit- 
ted to postbaccalaureate unclassified standing: 

1 . Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an institution accre- 
dited by a regional accrediting association, or equiv- 
alent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 se- 
mester units attempted and in good standing at last 
college attended. 

Note: Postbaccalaureate unclassified students may enroll 
in undergraduate courses (100 through 400 level) but are 
generally ineligible for graduate business courses (500 
level). Such students may wish to take undergraduate 
courses which are necessary to meet the requirements for 


P'3'3 

Management Science 


classified standing (see below). Upon completing the re- 
quirements, the student may file an “Application for 
Change of Academic Objective Graduate” requesting ad- 
mission to the M.S. in Management Science program. Ad- 
mission to the university as a postbaccalaureate unclassi- 
fied student does not constitute admission to the M.S. in 
Management Science program, does not confer priority, 
nor does it guarantee future admission. Students planning 
to apply for admission to the M.S. in Management Science 
program should confer with the graduate adviser in the 
School of Business Administration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements 
will be admitted to the M.S. in Management Science pro- 
gram with conditionally classified standing: 

3. Combination of grade-point average and score on the 
Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT) suffi- 
cient to yield a score of at least 950 according to one of 
the following formulas. Due to limited facilities and re- 
sources in the School of Business Administration and 
Economics, a higher score may be required of all appli- 
cants. 

A. If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2.5 and 
GMAT is at least 450, then score = (GPA x 200) + 
GMAT. 

B. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2.5 or GMAT 
is below 450, then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT 
-50. 

C. If GPA is based on the last 60 semester units of 
course work/ then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT 
- 100 . 

Note: Conditionally classified students may take a limited 
number of graduate courses (500 level) subject to the ap- 
proval of the graduate adviser of the School of Business 
Administration and Economics. Students may take what- 
ever courses are necessary to fulfill requirement 4 (below) 
while enrolled as conditionally classified students. In addi- 
tion, a maximum of 9 units (three courses) from the M.S. in 
Management Science curriculum may be taken while in 
conditionally classified standing. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will 
be advanced to classified standing. Such students are eligi- 
ble to take graduate courses for which they are qualified. 

4. A bachelor’s degree with a major in business adminis- 
tration which meets the requirements stated in this 
catalog for such degrees. The degree must include 
calculus and computer programming equivalent to 
passing Mathematics 135, Business Calculus (3 units), 
and Management Science 264, Introduction to Com- 
puter Programming (2 units), with grades of at least C. 
Courses in the major are to be no more than seven 
years old, and must have at least a 3.0 (B) grade-point 
average. Courses withgrades lower than C must be 
repeated. Applicants with a bachelor’s degree in a 
field other than Business Administration may meet this 
requirement by passing the courses in calculus and 
computer programming (above) with grades of at least 


C, and also the Foundation Courses within the curricu- 
lum of the Master of Business Administration (26 units, 
including Accounting 510; Economics 515; Finance 
517; Management 516, 518; Management Science 
513, 514 and Marketing 519). 


♦All work within any given quarter or semester must be included even 
though that will result in more than 60 semester units. The units to be 
included in the last 60 semester units may come only from the following: (1 ) 
work taken in postbaccalaureate status during the last seven years toward 
fulfilling M.S. in Management Science course work requirements: (2) units 
taken under a prescribed remedial program agreed to by the Associate 
Dean, School of Business Administration and Economics ;(3) units earned 
prior to the bachelor’s degree. 

5. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum 

The curriculum requires 30 semester units of course work 
beyond the baccalaureate degree. At least 18 of the 30 
units required for the degree must be at the graduate level. 
A grade-point average of 3.0 (B) is required. Any study 
plan course in which a D is received must be repeated and 
must receive at least a C grade regardless of the overall 
GPA of the student. 

The requirement for a concentration is to satisfactorily 
complete at least 1 5 units of courses (required and/or elec- 
tive) in a specified field: Management Information Sys- 
tems, Operations Research or Statistics. A concentration 
is not required for the degree. 

Required Courses (9 units) 

Manag Sci 526 Forecasting, Decision Analysis and 
Experimental Design (3) 

Manag Sci 550 Special Topics on Information Systems 
Design and Data Communication (3) 
and either 

Manag Sci 560 Advanced Deterministic Models (3) 
or Manag Sci 561 Advanced Probabilistic Models (3) 

Management Science Applications and Electives 

(18 units) 

Courses to be selected in consultation with, and approved 
by, the student’s adviser from the following: 

Applications in Business and Economics (3 units) 

Accounting 51 1 Seminar in Managerial Accounting (3) 

Note: Students with credit for cost accounting may substi- 
tute Accounting 521, Seminar in Administrative Account- 
ing (3) 

Economics 502 Adv. Microeconomic Analysis (3) 
Finance 523 Seminar in Corporate Financial 
Management (3) 

Management 444 Project Management (3) 
or Marketing 525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 

Electives (15 units) 

Courses may be chosen from one or more of the following 
fields: 


P'34 

Lmm w I Management Science 


Operations Research: 

A general approach to decision-making based on scientific 
method. 

Manag Sci 560 Advanced Deterministic Models (3) 
Manag Sci 561 Advanced Probabilistic Models (3) 
Manag Sci 580 Linear Programming (3) 

Manag Sci 585 Queueing and Stochastic Processes in 
Business and Economics (3) 

Management Information Systems: 

Computer methods for collecting, analyzing and reporting 
data to aid in management decision making. 

Manag Sci 404 Analysis of Information Systems (3) 
Manag Sci 408 Data Base Management Systems (3) 
or Manag Sci 555 Data Structures and Data Base 
Management (3) 

Manag Sci 409 Distributed Data Processing (3) 

Manag Sci 41 1 Data Process with Small Computers (3) 
Manag Sci 416 Computer Performance Evaluation (3) 
Manag Sci 418 Privacy, Security and Data Process (3) 

Statistics: 

Collecting, analyzing, and interpreting data. 

Manag Sci 420 Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 
Manag Sci 422 Surveys and Sample Design and 
Applications (3) 

Manag Sci 461 Statistical Theory for Management 
Science (4) 

Manag Sci 467 
Manag Sci 572 
Manag Sci 575 

Variable Topic: 

Manag Sci 590 


Statistical Quality Control (3) 
Design of Experiments (3) 
Multivariate Analysis (3) 


Seminar in Management Science (3) 

Terminal Evaluation 

Manag Sci 576 Business Modeling and Simulation 
Comprehensive Exam 


Management Science Courses 

263 Introduction to Information Systems and Micro- 
computer Applications (2) 

Concepts of micro and mainframe computers and peripheral 
equipment; hardware and software concepts; representation 
of Data; auxiliary storage and file organization; data commu- 
nications. Hands-on examples of business applications in 
micro-computer classroom. Students may not receive credit 
for both Management Science 263 and 265. 

264 Introduction to Computer Programming (2) 

Computer programming in the BASIC language, including 
file processing and other applications to business data pro- 
cessing. 


265 Introduction to Information Systems and Computer 
Programming (3) 

Introduction to information systems; computer organization 
and problem-solving concepts; computer programming in 
the BASIC language, including file processing; applications 
to business data processing. Micro Computer applications 
and hands-on examples in a microcomputer classroom. 

265L Computer Programming Lab (1) 

Corequisite: Management Science 265. Hands-on computer 
programming experience for common business problems 
using spread sheets, word processing, BASIC, data base 
management and graphics software. 

270 File Concepts and COBOL Programming (4) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 264 or 265 or Computer 
Science 1 12 or equivalent. Structured COBOL; multiple-lev- 
el table handling, subscripting and indexing; file organization 
documentation; report generation; sequential file updating. 
(Same as Computer Science 270) 

300 Elements of Information System Design and Data 
Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 270. Search, sort; tape 
and disk; record format layouts, storage capacity, I/O tim- 
ings; structures; COBOL illustrations; data communications 
fundamentals; computer networks. 

302 Software Systems for Decision Support (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 265 and Finance 320 
and Accounting 302. Roles and uses of computer supported 
decision modeling and analysis packages in the context of 
modern management. Formulation and implementation of 
models. Case studies and computer projects. 

310 Advanced COBOL Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 270 or consent of the 
instructor. Advanced COBOL features: Indexed and direct 
file processing, report writer, sort feature, declarative and 
linkage sections, segmentation. Overlay structure, survey of 
job control language, libraries. Direct access. Hardware de- 
vices. 

333 File Structures in Basic Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 265, Accounting 201 A, 
Accounting 201 B, or consent of instructor. Advanced BASIC 
features: sequential and relative files, sorting and searching, 
error checking and business system design. 

361 Probability and Statistical Methods in Business and 
Economics (4) 

Prerequisites: Math 135 and Management Science 265 or 
equivalents. Probability concepts; expectations; descriptive 
statistics; discrete and continuous random variables; sam- 
pling; estimation; hypothesis testing; simple and multiple 
regression; time series; forecasting; nonparametric statis- 
tics. 

362 Management Science Methods in Business and 
Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361 (may be taken con- 
currently). Mathematical methods and their application to 
business and economic problems, e.g., production control, 
scheduling, inventory control, PERT, decision and network 
analyses, simulation and queueing. Elementary mathemat- 
ical optimization and production models. 


Management Science 


363 Management Science (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361 or both Math 335 
or 338 and Computer Science 112 or 121. The basic con- 
cepts of management science and its relationship to eco- 
nomics and decision theory. Optimization in continuous 
models, linear programming, queueing and inventory mod- 
els, network analysis and dynamic programming, and pro- 
duction scheduling and control. 

404 Analysis of Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 300 or both Manage- 
ment Science 270 and Computer Science 331 or equivalent. 
Software feasibility studies; information processing sys- 
tems; data processing project organization; cost effective- 
ness and system optimization, hardware/software selection; 
structured systems design; case studies and computer pro- 
jects. 

408 Data Base Management Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 300 and Management 
344. (Prerequisite for computer science majors is Computer 
Science 331.) Integrated data base systems; logical organi- 
zation; data description language (DDL); data manipulation 
language (DML); data independence; relational data bases; 
selected data base management systems (DBMS). (Same 
as Computer Science 408). 

409 Distributed Data Processing (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 300. Hardware and soft- 
ware developments in transmission technology; distributed 
data bases; network architectures; ISO layered models; in- 
terface problems; distributed network design and cost analy- 
sis; network topology and protocols, tradeoffs among distrib- 
uted and centralized processing systems, interface prob- 
lems and case studies. 

411 Data Processing with Small Computers (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 300. Small computer 
technology in data processing; selecting and designing busi- 
ness oriented small computer systems; implementing, main- 
taining, supporting and evaluating these systems. 

416 Computer Performance Evaluation (3) 

(Same as Computer Science 416) 

418 Privacy, Security and Data Processing (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 300. Security and priva- 
cy problems associated with the use of computer systems; 
ways to minimize risks and losses. 

420 Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361 . Statistical methods 
applied to problems in business and industry; practical multi- 
ple regression models with computer solutions; basic tech- 
niques in time-series analysis of trend, cyclical and seasonal 
components; correlation of time-series and forecasting with 
the computer. 

422 Surveys and Sampling Design and Applications (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361 . Principles for de- 
signing business and economic surveys. Applications in ac- 
counting, marketing research, economic statistics and the 
social sciences. Sampling; simple random, stratified and 
multistage design; construction of sampling frames; detect- 
ing and controlling non-sampling errors. 

440 Deterministic Models in Management Science (4) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 362. Deterministic 
mathematical modeling and solution techniques, including 
intermediate linear programming, network models, integer 
programming, dynamic programming. 


441 Probabilistics Models in Management Science (4) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 362. Probabilistic math- 
ematical modeling and solution techniques for business, in- 
cluding quality control and forecasting models, Markov pro- 
cesses, intermediate queueing theory, probabilistic inven- 
tory models. 

448 Computer Simulation in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 264 and 361 (or equiv- 
alents) and Management Science 362 (or 363). Computer 
generation of discrete and continuous random variables, 
their use in computer simulation. Applications include 
queueing, communications, computer systems, economics, 
gaming, inventory, scheduling and other management sci- 
ence topics. 

461 Statistical Theory for Management Science (4) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361 . Review of math- 
ematical topics needed for statistical theory. Distribution, 
theory, moment generating functions, central limit theorem. 
Estimation theory, maximum likelihood, least squares esti- 
mation. Hypothesis testing, Neyman- Pearson Lemma. Like- 
lihood ratio tests. Use of statistical software packages. 

467 Statistical Quality Control (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361 . Control charts for 
variables, percent defective and defects. Tolerances, pro- 
cess capacity; special control charts, acceptance sampling 
and batch processing problems. Bayesian aspects of pro- 
cess control. 

495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361 and 362, (or 363) 
and major in management science, or Management Science 
300 and major in management information systems or a 
major in international business, consent of department in- 
ternship adviser, and at least junior standing, 2.5 GPA and 
one semester in residence at the university. Planned and 
supervised work experience. May be repeated for credit up 
to a total of six units. Credit/No Credit grading only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361 and either 362 or 
363, senior standing, and approval by the department chair. 
Open to qualified students desiring to pursue directed inde- 
pendent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not open to 
students on academic probation. 

513 Statistical Analysis and Forecasting Techniques (4) 

Prerequisites: Math 135, Management Science 264 (or 
equivalents) and classified SBAE status. Basic probability 
and descriptive statistics; sampling techniques; estimation 
and hypothesis testing; simple and multiple regression, cor- 
relation analysis; forecasting; time series; computer pack- 
ages and other optional topics. 

514 Business Modeling and Solution Techniques (4) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 513 and classified 
SBAE status. Linear programming; inventory; PERT-CPM; 
queueing; simulation, computer application and other op- 
tional topics. 

526 Forecasting, Decision Analysis, and 
Experimental Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified 
SBAE status. Time Series Analysis. Trend, cyclical and sea- 
sonal components. Statistical decision theory. Fundamental 
principles of experimental design; interaction. Software 
packages. 


236 __ 


550 Special Topics on Information Systems Design and 
Data Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified 
SBAE standing. Information storage requirements; disk tim- 
ing considerations; file organization and processing charac- 
teristics; data structures; modern data communication sys- 
tems; computer networks. 

555 Data Structures and Data Base Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 550 and classified 
SBAE standing. File structures. Multiple-key retrieval file or- 
ganizations; Data Description Language (DDL) and Data 
Manipulation Language (DML); Data independence; hierar- 
chy, network and relational data bases. Students may not 
receive credit for both Management Science 408 and 555. 

560 Advanced Deterministic Models (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified 
SBAE standing. Advanced linear programming, dynamic 
programming, integer programming, non-linear program- 
ming, business applications. Software packages and com- 
puter utilization. 

561 Advanced Probabilistic Models (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified 
SBAE standing. Stochastic processes, Markov processes, 
advanced queueing and inventory models. Reliability. Soft- 
ware packages and computer utilization. 

572 Design of Experiments (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 513. Experimental de- 
sign. Analysis of variance, factorial experiments, nested de- 
signs, confounding and factorial replications. 

575 Multivariate Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 513 and 461 . The least 
squares principle; estimation and hypothesis testing in linear 
regression; multiple and curvilinear regression models; dis- 
criminant analysis; principle components analysis; applica- 
tion of multivariate analysis in business and industry. 


576 Business Modeling and Simulation (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 513 or equivalent. The- 
ory and application of modeling and simulation methodology. 
Probabilistic concepts in simulation; arrival pattern and ser- 
vice times; simulation languages and programming tech- 
niques; analysis of output; business applications. 

580 Linear Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 514. Theory and appli- 
cations of linear programming and extentions. Problem for- 
mulation and solution, simplex method, duality, sensitivity 
analyses, network, transportation and assignment models, 
and efficient computing techniques for specially structured 
problems. 

585 Queueing and Stochastic Processes in Business and 
Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 513 and 514. Single 
and multichannel queueing systems of Markovian and gen- 
eral arrival and departure streams; birth-death processes, 
cost models and optimization of queues; Markov analyses; 
introduction to renewal theory; reliability. 

590 Seminar in Management Science (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 526 and 560 and clas- 
sified SBAE status. Selected advanced topics and/or case 
studies in operations research, statistics, and/or manage- 
ment information systems, varying from semester to semes- 
ter. May be repeated for credit with consent of instructor. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent 
inquiry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status and consent of depart- 
ment chair. May be repeated for credit. Not open to students 
on academic probation. 


Management Science 


Department of Marketing 


Department Chair: Irene Lange 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 626 


Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 

Concentration in Marketing 
Master of Business Administration 

Concentration in Marketing 

Faculty 

Robert Barath, William Bell, Grady Bruce, Tom Buckles, 
Scott Greene, Paul Hugstad, Robert Jones, Irene Lange, 
Ronald Long, Cliff Scott, James Taylor, Robert Zimmer 

Advisers 


The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, pro- 
vides information on admissions, curriculum and gradua- 
tion requirements, registration and grading procedures, 
residence and similar academic matters. In addition, the 
Marketing Department provides advising on curriculum 
content and career opportunities: 

Advertising 
Industrial Marketing 
International Marketing 
Marketing Management 
Marketing Research 

Overall Career Advisement 


Retailing 

Sales Management 


James Taylor 
Paul Hugstad 
Irene Lange 
William Bell 
Robert Barath 
Tom Buckles 
Scott Greene 
Cliff Scott 
Grady Bruce 
William Bell 
Robert Zimmer 


INTRODUCTION 



Marketing is a basic business function, covering a wide 
range of activities. It includes studying markets, planning 
products, pricing them, promoting them, selling them, and 
then delivering these products to customers. People in 
wholesaling, retailing, advertising agencies, research 
firms and transportation companies are all working in the 
marketing area. Any firm which is reviewing its product 
policies needs marketers to identify the market, choose 
the products, find where they can be sold and decide on a 
price for them. 

Five program emphases are available to students which 
help to prepare for entry into the job market. They are 
designed to afford the opportunity to gain both quantitative 
and qualitative skills. At the same time, each emphasis 
retains sufficient flexibility to permit particular needs and 
interests to be pursued through elective course work. The 
emphases are advertising management, marketing man- 
agement, retailing management, sales management and 
international marketing. 


238 Marketing 


Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the De- 
partment of Marketing offers courses which may be includ- 
ed in the Single Subject Waiver Program in Business. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching cre- 
dentials is found in the Teaching Programs section of the 
catalog and is also available from the Department of Sec- 
ondary Education. Students interested in exploring ca- 
reers in teaching at the elementary or secondary school 
levels should contact the Office of Admission to Teacher 
Education. 

Prizes in Marketing 

The Michael T. Ashton Memorial Scholarship for 
Outstanding Leadership. 

The Gordon S. Fyfe Memorial Award for Outstanding 
Academic Achievement. 

Outstanding Marketing Student Award. 

American Marketing Association, Southern California 
Chapter Award. 

International Marketing Association Award. 

The Robert M. Olsen Scholarship Fund Award 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Marketing Concentration.” 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DEGREE 

See “Business Administration, Marketing Concentration.” 


Marketing Courses 

351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 202 or 210; corequisite: Manage- 
ment Science 361 . How management markets output of the 
enterprise and obtains revenue. Product management, pric- 
ing, promotion, distribution channels. Marketing’s role in 
socio-economic system from viewpoints of consumer, man- 
agement, social responsibility and government in American 
and worldwide business. 

352 Principles of Retailing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351 . Structure, scope, and evalau- 
tion of retail institutions; introduction to retail accounting, 
pricing, and merchandise management; consumer behavior; 
identifying markets; defining and positioning the retail mix 
components to convey meaning and bring about differential 
response. 

354 Principles of Advertising (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351 . The management of the adver- 
tising function; the role of advertising in marketing strategy, 
budgetary considerations, allocation among media, mea- 
surement of effectiveness, administration and control, and 
its economic and social implications. Uses of Behavioral 
Lab. 


356 Professional Selling (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351 . Salesmanship as an interper- 
sonal influence process. Selling using principles of human 
behavior. Selling skills and techniques. Uses the Behavioral 
Lab. 

359 Business to Business Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Marketing of business goods 
and services to other businesses, government agencies, 
and social institutions by the manufacturer. Market analysis, 
sales forecasting, product strategy, effective use of sales 
force and industrial advertising media. 

370 Buyer Behavior (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Consumer buying patterns, 
motivation and search behavior. The consumer decision- 
making process. Interdisciplinary concepts from economics, 
sociology, psychology, cultural anthropology and mass com- 
munications. Case analyses and research projects. 

379 Marketing Research Methods (4) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and Management Science 
361. Marketing research process: problem formulation, 
identifying sources, selecting data collection, analysis tech- 
niques, preparing research reports. Selecting marketing 
problems. Lecture-discussion, cases. Includes computer 
methods for solving marketing problems, marketing plan- 
ning, decision marking, using spreadsheet, statistical, data- 
base software, data display. 

451 Export/Import Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 370 and 379. Introduction to 
export and import concepts and procedures from determina- 
tion of market and product potential through final stages of 
distribution. Includes documentation, financial consider- 
ations and U.S. Government regulation. 

452 Advanced Salesmanship (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and 356. Negotiation style sell- 
ing techniques; videotape, audio-tape, structured and un- 
structured role plays. Sales writing skills. Field case studies. 

454 Advertising Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 354. The interrelationships of prod- 
uct planning, advertising management, sales management, 
financial management and corporate strategy in a competi- 
tive enrivonment. 

455 Management of the Sales Force (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351 . The sales manager in organiza- 
tion; recruiting and selecting salesmen; sales training; for- 
mulating compensation and expense plans; supervising and 
stimulating sales activities; morale; sales planning; evaluat- 
ing salesmen; and distribution cost analysis. Uses the Be- 
havioral Lab. 

456 Retailing Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 352. Factors influencing institutional 
change, trends, and contemporary issues. Merchandise 
management, planning and control. Coordinating and man- 
aging the retail marketing and financial strategies from an 
entrepreneurial perspective. 

458 International Marketing Policies (3) 

Prerequisites: at least one upper-division course in econom- 
ics, finance, management and marketing and senior stand- 
ing. Marketing problems across national boundaries and 
within various national markets. Business policies, including 
ethical implications, for international business firms. Integra- 
tive cases. Individual and team efforts. 


oqq 

Marketing C.VV/ 


459 Marketing Strategy (3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing, and two advanced marketing 
courses in addition to Marketing 370 and 379. Marketing 
problems of firm and society. Integrative interactions be- 
tween marketing activities and the interfaces of marketing 
with finance and production. Case method and current read- 
ings. 

460 Services and Nonprofit Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351 . Application of marketing tech- 
niques to the nonprofit sector. Use of marketing planning and 
research to develop effective marketing programs for organi- 
zations in health care, education, the arts, public services 
and related fields. 

469 Business and Organizational Marketing Strategies (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and 359 and Manag Sci 361 . 
Specialized marketing techniques for industrial companies; 
marketing forecasting; industrial buying models; designing 
distribution networks; industrial pricing and industrial promo- 
tional programs. 

495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: six units of upper division marketing courses, 
including Marketing 351 , major in marketing or international 
business, consent of department internship adviser, and at 
least junior standing, 2.5 GPA and one semester in resi- 
dence at the university. Planned and supervised work experi- 
ence. May be repeated for credit up to a total of six units. 
Credit/No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: marketing concentration, senior standing and 
approval by the department chair. Open to undergraduate 
students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. 
May be repeated for credit. Not open to students on academ- 
ic probation. 


519 Marketing Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 510, Economics 515, Manag Sci 
513, 514, Management 516, 518 (may be taken concurrent- 
ly) and classified SBAE status. Concepts, principles and 
techniques used in the administration of the marketing varia- 
bles. The role of marketing within the context of society and 
the business firm, social responsibility of business and inter- 
national marketing. 


525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 519 and classified SBAE status. 
Major marketing problems facing industry: definition of and 
organization for marketing task; demand analysis; decisions 
concerning product, price, promotion and trade channels. 
Use of case method and readings. 


596 Contemporary Topics in Marketing (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 519 or equivalent; classified SBAE 
status. Topics in areas such as marketing of services, public 
policy and consumer issues and strategic planning. May be 
repeated for credit. 


597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent 
inquiry. Not open to students on academic probation. 


599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor 
and approval by department chair. May be repeated for cred- 
it. Not open to students on academic probation. 


Marketing 





School of 
Communications 


Dean: David Sachsman 

Programs offered 

Bachelor of Arts In Communications 

Concentrations in: Advertising 
Journalism 

Photocommunications 
Public Relations 
Radio-Television-Film 

Bachelor of Arts in Communicative Disorders 

Bachelor of Arts in Speech Communication 

Master of Arts in Communications 

Concentrations in: Advertising 
Journalism 
Public Relations 
Radio-Television-Film 

Master of Arts in Communicative Disorders 

Clinical Rehabilitative Services Credential (CRSC) with 
Special Class Authorization (SCA) 

Master of Arts in Speech Communication 
Minor in Speech Communication 

The School of Communications is committed to advancing 
a democratic society by preparing students to function in a 
wide variety of communication professions. With a strong 
tradition in the liberal arts and social sciences, the aca- 
demic programs of the School share a common theoretical 
base which identifies the elements of human communica- 
tion and the principles governing their use in all communi- 
cative processes essential to contemporary society, 
namely, the spoken and written word and visual images. 
Specialized programs in advertising, communication the- 
ory and process, communicative disorders, news-editorial, 
photocommunications, public relations, and radio-televi- 
sion-film make up the basic curricula of the School. These 
programs of study lead to traditional academic degrees for 
undergraduates and graduates, to state credentials and 
licenses, to professional certification, and to entry into 
graduate and professional degree programs. 

Academic programs in the School of Communications pre- 
pare students to function as communication professionals in 
the fields of business, education, government, and the 
health-related professions. Undergraduate and graduate de- 
grees are offered in Communications, Communicative Dis- 
orders, and Speech Communication. Ancillary education ex- 
periences are available through the campus daily newspa- 
per, television facilities, forensics program (debate), speech 
and hearing clinic, and internships in professional settings. 


School of Communications 


The School also serves as a locus for the surrounding 
professional community in which leaders in the communi- 
cation professions provide and receive advice and counsel 
on matters related to public interest, curricular develop- 
ment, career interests, and opportunities for service to the 
greater good of the community as a whole. 

The School is dedicated to the principles of academic ex- 
cellence and sees its fundamental mission as preparing 
citizens to function as effective communicators who prac- 
tice their disciplines in accordance with the highest ethical 
codes of professional and personal conduct. 

Advisement 

Undergraduate students may call their department office 
for the name of their adviser, who will assist in developing a 
program of study. University policy requires students to 
see an adviser each of their first two semesters and every 
year thereafter. Three critical times for advising are before 
registering for the first semester, when selecting electives 
for the study plan, and two semesters before graduation 
for a graduation check. 

Graduate students should make contact with their depart- 
ment graduate adviser to arrange for advisement prior to 
entry into the master’s degree programs. 

Student Organizations 

The School of Communications supports a large number of 
student organizations and activities which provide a wide 
variety of pre-professional opportunities for academic ad- 
vancement. They include: the Advertising Club: American 
Speech-Language-Hearing Association; Association of 
Speech Communicators; Broadcast Production Association; 
Communications Week; Daily Titan; Debate (forensics); In- 
ternational Association of Business Communicators; Latino 
Communications Society; National Press Photographers 
Association; Photography Club; Public Relations Student 
Society of America; Society of Professional Journalists; and 
Women in Communication, Inc. 


Accreditation 

The Department of Communications is accredited by the 
Accrediting Council on Education in Journalism and Mass 
Communications. The Communicative Disorders program 
in the Department of Speech Communication is accredited 
by the American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 
and is one of only two such accredited programs in the 
state of California. 

Internships 

A wide variety of student internships are available through- 
out Southern California. In the Department of Communica- 
tions, students are required to complete an internship, 
unless specifically waived from doing so, normally as the 
culminating undergraduate experience. The Speech Com- 
munications internship is normally taken sometime in the 
junior or senior year. 

Scholarships and Awards 

Some $30,000 in scholarships and awards is presented 
annually to students in the School of Communications. 
Among the sponsors of scholarships are the Advertising 
Club of Orange County, the Business/Professional Adver- 
tising Association of Orange County, the Hearst Founda- 
tion, the Orange County chapter of the Public Relations 
Society of America. Awards annually are presented to stu- 
dents who excel in academic and pre-professional activi- 
ties in the two departments. 

Facilities 

The School of Communications is equipped with modern 
laboratory facilities including a sophisticated speech and 
hearing clinic; large and comprehensive photography 
darkroom and studio facility; two 20-station computerized 
writing laboratories; a Macintosh-based graphics laborato- 
ry; a television studio, control room, and video editing 
bays; a film editing laboratory; and a daily newspaper 
newsroom and production area. 


242 

I t—m School of Communications 


Department of 
Communications 

Department Chair: Edgar Trotter 
Vice Chair: Robert Rayfield 
Department Office: Humanities 230 
Daily Titan Newsroom, Humanities 213 
Daily Titan Business Manager, Humanities 225A 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Communications 

Concentrations: Advertising 

Journalism 

Photocommunications 
Public Relations 
Radio-Television Film 

Master of Arts in Communications 

Concentrations: Advertising 

Journalism 
Public Relations 
Radio-Television Film 

Faculty 

James Alexander, Jay Berman, Fenton Calhoun, 

Wendell Crow, David DeVries, Ronald Dyas, 

Tony Fellow, Lynne Gross, Terry Hynes, 

Carolyn Johnson, Sirish Mani, George Mastroianni, 

R. Dean Mills, Norman Nager, Patrick O’Donnell, 

Wayne Overbeck, David Pincus, Rick Pullen, 

Robert Rayfield, Marvin Rosen, Ted Smythe, 

Don Sunoo, Edgar Trotter, Larry Ward 

Advisers 

Undergraduate: All faculty serve as undergraduate advis- 
ers. Students may find their assigned adviser posted on 
the bulletin board outside Humanities 230. 

Graduate: R. Dean Mills 

INTRODUCTION 

Effective ethical communications are essential for the well- 
being of a democratic society. Thus, there is a need for 
persons trained in the theory and practice of informing, in- 
structing, and persuading through communications media. 
The educational objectives of the programs leading to the 
Bachelor of Arts in Communications are: (1 ) to ensure that all 
majors receive a broad liberal education; (2) to provide ma- 
jors with a clear understanding of the role of communications 
media in society;and (3) to prepare majors desiring commu- 
nications-related careers in the mass media, business, gov- 
ernment and education by educating them in-depth in one of 
the specialized sequences within the department. 



24Q 

Communications I 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIONS 

A communications major is required to take 1 1 units of core 
requirements in addition to 23 units in a chosen concentra- 
tion. The department offers five concentrations: advertising, 
journalism, photocommunications, public relations, and ra- 
dio-television-film. Students may substitute a broadcast jour- 
nalism program shared between the journalism and radio- 
television-film concentrations. 

The major totals 34 units. 

Collateral requirements: Twelve units of upper-division 
course work in other departments approved by the adviser 
are also required. Collateral courses for each concentra- 
tion are recommended by the concentration coordinator. 

Every major must take a minimum of 90 units outside the 
Department of Communications out of the 124 units re- 
quired for graduation. Of this 90 units, 65 must be in the 
liberal arts, humanities & sciences. 


Communications Core 

The communications core provides background and per- 
spective appropriate to all the departmental concentra- 
tions and an understanding of the role of communicators 
and their contribution to the development of high standards 
of professionalism. 

Eight units of required course work: 

Comm 233 Mass Comm in Modern Society (2) 
Comm 407 Communications Law (3) 

Comm 425 History and Philosophy of American 
Mass Communication (3) 


Plus three units selected from the following: 

Comm 410 Principles of Comm Research (3) 
Comm 426 World Communication Systems (3) 
Comm 427 Current Issues in Mass Comm (3) 
Comm 428 Communications and Social Change (3) 
Comm 431 Mass Communications in Communist 
Systems (3) 

Comm 480 Persuasive Communications (3) 

Comm 481 Mass Communication and Conflict (3) 


Communications Concentrations 


Plus three units selected from the following: 
Comm 217, 301, 361, 362, 381, 410, 451 


And twelve collateral units of upper-division courses be- 
yond general education which must be selected from the 
following list of approved courses: American Studies 301 , 
318, 345; Economics 310; English 301; Managment 340; 
Marketing 351 , 356, 359, 370, 379; Philosophy 31 2; Politi- 
cal Science 310; Psychology 351, 361, 453; Sociology 
345, 372, 436; Speech Communication 320, 333. Courses 
not listed must be approved in advance by an adviser. 


Journalism 


The principal objective of the journalism concentration is to 
provide the skills and practice necessary for careers in the 
print media. Specifically, the concentration objectives are: (1 ) 
to provide experience in writing various types of news stories, 
and to develop skills in reporting and news gathering tech- 
niques; (2) to develop critical acumen necessary to check 
news stories for accuracy and correctness; (3) to develop 
skills in graphics or photography that complement the jour- 
nalistic writing skills; (4) to provide actual on-the-job experi- 
ence by working on the campus newspaper and through an 
internship, and (5) to add breadth and depth to the profes- 
sional’s specialized skills through collateral courses. 


Comm 101 
Comm 201 
Comm 332 
Comm 335 
Comm 338 
Comm 439 


Writing for the Mass Media (3) 
Reporting for the Mass Media (3) 
Copy Editing and Makeup (3) 
Public Affairs Reporting (3) 
Newspaper Production (3) 

Mass Media Internship (2) 


Plus three units from: Communications 217. 
(Comm 358 may be taken with adviser’s consent.) 


And three units from: Communications 334, 430, 435, 436. 


Students who want to pursue broadcast journalism may 
substitute the above concentration requirements with the 
following courses: Communications 101, 302, 335, 371, 
372, 382, 390, and 439. 


Every communications major must select and complete 23 
units of course work in a major concentration. 

Advertising 


The objective of the advertising concentration is to pre- 
pare students for entry level positions in one or more of the 
four basic advertising activities: creative (copy, layout de- 
sign), media, research, and management. Students are 
provided with knowledge and skills needed for work with 
an advertiser, advertising agency, the print and broadcast 
media, or support service industry. 


Comm 101 
Comm 350 
Comm 352 
Comm 353 
Comm 358 
Comm 439 
Comm 450 


Writing for the Mass Media (3) 
Principles of Advertising (3) 
Advertising Media (3) 

Advertising Copy and Layout (3) 
Graphics Communications (3) 

Mass Media Internship (2) 
Advertising Comm Management (3) 


And twelve collateral units of upper-division courses in 
four different departments which must be selected from 
the following list of approved courses: Economics 330, 
335, 350, 361 , 365; English 300, 303, 305, 462, 463, 464; 
History 475, 476, 484, 485B; Political Science 300, 310, 
315, 340, 347, 350, 375, 413, 440, 442, 443, 451, 457, 
461, 473; Sociology 301, 341, 345, 348; Philosophy 300, 
301, 304, 305, 345. Courses not listed must be approved 
in advance by adviser. Students may substitute a Universi- 
ty-approved minor with adviser’s consent. 

Photocommunications 

The photocommunications concentration provides a com- 
prehensive study of the aesthetics, theories, and practices of 
contemporary photography for professional careers in maga- 
zine and newspaper photojournalism, and advertising/com- 
mercial photography. 


244 

Am I I Communications 


Comm 101 Writing for the Mass Media (3) 

Comm 217 Introduction to Black and White 
Photography (3) 

Comm 319 Photojournalism (3) 

Comm 321 Advanced Color Photography (3) 
Comm 439 Mass Media Internship (2) 

Plus six units selected from the following: 

Comm 311, 326, 338, 340, 358, 409, 460. 

Plus one of the following classes: 

Comm 301, 334, 362. 

And twelve collateral units of upper-division courses beyond 
general education which must be selected from the following 
list of approved courses: Accounting 301 A,B; Management 
339; American Studies 333; Anthropology 306; Philosophy 
31 1 ; Political Science 300; Biology 41 1 ; Chemistry 301 A,B; 
Physics 411. Courses not listed must be approved in 
advance by an adviser. 

Public Relations 

This concentration provides preparation in both theory and 
practice of two-way communication and management coun- 
sel for prospective professional public relations careers in 
business, industry, agency, government, and nonprofit sec- 
tors of society. 

Comm 101 Writing for Mass Media (3) 

Comm 361 Principles of Public Relations (3) 
Comm 362 Public Relations Writing (3) 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship (2) 

Comm 464 Public Relations Management (3) 

Plus nine units selected from the following: 

Comm 217, 301, 334, 338, 350, 358, 363, 410, 467, 
497 

And twelve collateral units of upper division courses be- 
yond general education which must be selected from the 
following: Art 323A; Economics 310, 320, 410; Finance 
320, 340; Management 339, 340, 343; Marketing 351; 
Management Science 422; English 301, 360; Geography 
370; Health Education 407; Political Science 309, 413, 
415; Psychology 351, 391, 453, 472; Sociology 341, 345, 
348, 473; Speech Communication 300, 320, 324, 333, 
334, 420, 425. Courses not listed must be approved in 
advance by an adviser. 

Radio-Television-Film 

Courses in this concentration are designed for an under- 
standing of the history, theory and practice of radio-television 
and film. Students are prepared for entry level positions in 
business, education, and the broadcasting, cable and film 
industries. 

Comm 301 Writing for Broadcasting and Film (3) 
Comm 382 Broadcasting in America (3) 

Comm 402 Advanced Writing for Radio, TV and 
Film (3) 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship (2) 


Plus nine units selected from the following: 

Comm 311, 378, 390, 411, 479, 484 or 488 
Plus three units selected from the following: 

Comm 345, 375 or 478 

And twelve collateral units of upper-division courses be- 
yond general education which must be selected from the 
following list of approved courses: Economics 320, 340, 
350; English 322, 463, 465; History 476, 485; Manage- 
ment 339, 340, 343, 441 ; Marketing 351 , 356, 452; Politi- 
cal Science 31 5, 41 0, 41 3, 41 4; Psychology 350, 351 , 391 ; 
Sociology 348, 371, 436; Speech Communication 320, 
324, 325, 333; Theatre 364. Courses not listed must be 
approved in advance by an adviser. 

Students who want to pursue broadcast journalism may sub- 
stitute the above concentration requirements with the follow- 
ing courses: Communications 101 , 302, 335, 371 , 372, 382, 
390 and 439 as well as the collateral course requirements 
listed under the journalism concentration. 

Writing Requirements 

A communications major must satisfy both departmental 
and university writing requirements. English Usage Test 
(EUT): The EUT is a prerequisite to Communications depart- 
ment writing courses. It is administered free in January, April, 
August and October. Students are allowed three attempts to 
earn a passing score, but all attempts must be completed 
within one year of the initial attempt. The test should be taken 
prior to declaring a major in communications or immediately 
following enrollment in communications classes. Only stu- 
dents who have earned a baccalaureate degree or who have 
equivalent EPT, SAT or ACT scores are exempt from the EUT 
requirement. 

University Writing Requirement: The course work portion 
of the university’s upper-division baccalaureate writing re- 
quirement for communications majors may be met by sat- 
isfactory completion of any one of Communications 301, 
334, 335, 338, 353, 362, 371, and 402. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIONS 

The degree is designed to provide advanced study in com- 
munications theory and research plus some concentration 
in one of the department s sequences: advertising, jour- 
nalism, public relations, or radio-television-film. 

The program prepares the graduate to apply advanced 
communications concepts, research and development 
skills, and theories relevant to the use of communications 
media for a wide variety of purposes. Such study may 
serve those whose careers involve the use of print, broad- 
cast and film media of communications to inform, instruct 
and persuade. Communications skills are highly applica- 
ble to a wide range of careers in business, industry, gov- 
ernment, education and the mass media. 

Students completing the Master of Arts in Communica- 
tions are eligible for journalism teaching positions in com- 
munity colleges. 


Communications 


Admission to Graduate Standing: 

Conditionally Classified 

Normally, an applicant must meet grade-point average re- 
quirements of 3.0 in the undergraduate major and 2.75 in 
the last 60 semester units of undergraduate course work, 
meet the university requirements, and satisfactorily com- 
plete the Graduate Record Examination General Test prior 
to admission. Students must also submit three letters of 
recommendation and an essay (approximately 1000 words) 
outlining reasons for pursuing the master’s degree. Consult 
department for details regarding additional admission re- 
quirements. 

Graduate Standing: Classified 

A student admitted in conditionally classified standing may 
be granted classified standing upon the development of an 
approved study plan and satisfactory completion of prerequi- 
site course work. Satisfactory coursework or its equivalent in 
the following may be taken concurrently with degree require- 
ments if not completed prior to classification: 

(a) communications writing (Comm 201, 301, 353, 

or 362) 

(b) an introductory course in the area of specialization 

(Comm 332, 350, 361 or 382) 

(c) Comm 410 Principles of Communication 

Research 

Study Plan 

The student is required to complete 30 units of approved 
studies with a minimum grade-point average of 3.0 including 
15 units in 500-level communications courses. Six of the 15 
units of 500-level courses will be in thesis or project. The 
remaining units will be comprised of upper division or 500- 
level courses appropriate to the communications sequence. 

The candidate shall develop a program of study in consul- 
tation with a sequence adviser and the graduate adviser of 
the Department of Communications. The candidate shall 
plan the thesis or project topic with a committee. The com- 
mittee will include at least two faculty members from the 
Department of Communications. 

Study plan requirements include the following: 

Core Courses (6 units) 

Comm 500 Theory and Literature of 
Communications 

Comm 508 Humanistic Research in 
Communications 

or Comm 509 Social Science Research in 
Communications 

Sequence-Related Courses (18 units) 

Comm 51 5 Professional Problems in Related Fields 
Comm 520A, B or C Communications Practicum 
or approved alternate 

Consult the Communications Department Master’s 
Program bulletin for additional sequence require- 
ments. 


Electives (0-6 units) 

Project/Thesis/ Exam (0-6 units) 

Comm 597 Project (3) 
or Comm 598 Thesis (6) 
or Comprehensive Exam 

For further information and advisement, please consult the 
graduate program adviser. 


Communications Courses 

101 Writing for the Mass Media (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications Department English Usage 
Test; typing ability. Principles and practices of writing for 
major types of mass communications media. Content, orga- 
nization, conciseness and clarity. 

201 Reporting for the Mass Media (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage 
Test, Communications 101 or equivalent; typing ability. De- 
velopment of expertise in the use of news reporting tech- 
niques combined with development of ability to compose 
complex journalistic writing forms for possible publication. 

217 Introduction to Black and White Photography (3) 

Cameras, accessories, materials, exposure, processing, 
printing, finishing, composition, filters, flash, studio tech- 
niques, and special subject treatments and applications. (2 
hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

233 Mass Communication in Modern Society (2) 

Newspapers, magazines, films, radio and television; their 
significance as social instruments and economic entities in 
modern society. (CAN JOUR 4) 

290A.B History and Aesthetics of the Motion Picture (3,3) 

The study of motion picture as a global influence in mass 
communications and entertainment. Examination of film move- 
ments, the rise and fall of the studio system, and social influ- 
ences. A — Origins to 1 945; B — 1 945 to present. Film screen- 
ings on and off campus. (2 hours lecture; 3 hours activity) 

301 Writing for Broadcasting and Film (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications Department English Usage 
Test; typing ability. Theory and principles of writing in the 
broadcast and film media. 

302 Writing Broadcast News (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage 
Test, Comm 101 or equivalent; typing ability. Intensive jour- 
nalistic writing and reporting for radio and television. Empha- 
sis on writing assignments for both audio and video tape. 
Lecture/discussion of issues and responsibilities facing 
broadcast journalists. 

311 Introduction to Motion Picture Production (3) 

Theory and practice of motion picture photography and film 
production. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

319 Photojournalism (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 21 7 or equivalent. Photography for pub- 
lication in print media. News, advertising, feature, sports, 
lifestyle, photo essay and documentary applications. (2 
hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 


Communications 


321 Advanced Color Photography (3) 

Prerequisites: Junior standing and Comm 319 or consent of 
instructor. Positive and negative color film processing sensi- 
tometry, and color printing. Creative and effective use of 
color in publications photography. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory) 

326 Communications Photography (3) 

Prerequisites: Junior standing and Comm 321 , or consent of 
instructor. Photographs and photographic communications 
produced with the large format camera for the mass media, 
business, education, government, industry and science. (2 
hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

332 Copy Editing and Makeup (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage 
Test and Comm 201 or equivalent. Principles and practice of 
newspaper editing: copy improvement, headline writing, 
news photos and cutlines, wire services, typography, copy 
schedules and control, page design and layout, law and eth- 
ics. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

334 Feature Article Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage 
Test and Comm 101 or equivalent. Nonfiction writing for news- 
papers and magazines; sources, methods and markets. 

335 Public Affairs Reporting (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage 
Test, Comm 101 and 201 , or consent of instructor; and junior 
standing. Comm 407 recommended. Reporting public inter- 
est news such as courts, education, finance, government, 
police and urban problems. 

338 Newspaper Production (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage 
Test, Comm 201 or equivalent or consent of instructor. Mem- 
bers of the class constitute the editorial staff of the university 
newspaper. Meets four hours per week for critiques in news 
reporting, writing, editing and makeup, followed by produc- 
tion. May be repeated for a maximum of six units of credit. 
(More than 9 hours laboratory) 

340 Photography in Advertising and Public Relations (3) 

Prerequisites: junior standing and Comm 326 or consent of 
instructor. Advertising and public relations photography. Ma- 
terials and techniques for producing photographs with visual 
impact suitable for photo reproduction. Students will prepare 
a portfolio of photographs. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours activity) 

345 The Language of Film and Television (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 233 or consent of instructor. Critical and 
theoretical analysis of film and television as communication. 
Examines the manner in which an organized sequence of 
images and sounds communicates meaning using literature 
in semiology and visual communications. 

350 Principles of Advertising (3) 

Advertising in America. The language and art of advertising 
and its role in marketing. 

352 Advertising Media (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 350 and junior standing. Planning, ex- 
ecution and control of advertising media programs. Basic 
data and characteristics of the media. Buying and selling 
process, techniques, and methods in media planning pro- 
cess. Audience measurement and media analysis. 


353 Advertising Copy and Layout (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage 
Test and Comm 101 , 350 or consent of instructor; and junior 
standing. Writing of copy and layout of advertisements, 
based on study of sales appeals, attention factors and illus- 
trations. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

358 Graphics Communications (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing. Printing processes, publication 
formats, copy preparation, copy-fitting techniques, layout 
principles, paper selection and distribution methods. (2 
hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

361 Principles of Public Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing. The social, behavioral, psycho- 
logical, ethical, economic and political foundations of public 
relations, and the theories of public relations as a communi- 
cations discipline. 

362 Public Relations Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage 
Test; Comm 1 01 or consent of instructor; typing ability; junior 
standing. Communications analysis, writing for business, in- 
dustry and nonprofit organizations. Creating effective forms 
of public relations communication. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours 
activity) 

363 Publications Editing (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 361 and six units of communications 
writing or consent of instructor; and, junior standing. Editing 
functions and techniques involved in creative development 
of publications for business, industry and nonprofit organiza- 
tions and institutions. Magazines, newspapers, newsletters 
and brochures. 

371 Radio-Television News and Public Affairs (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage 
Test, Comm 101, 302, 382 and 390; typing ability required. 
Covering news events and public affairs for radio and televi- 
sion. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours lab) 

372 Advanced TV News Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 371 or consent of instructor. Writing, 
production and evaluation of television newscasts for local 
cable TV distribution. Lecture-discussion sessions on ad- 
vanced reporting techniques and special problems in broad- 
cast journalism. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

375 The Documentary Film (3) 

Purpose, development, current trends, critical analysis and 
production requirements of the documentary film. Future of the 
medium in business, government, education, and television. 

378 Introduction to Audio Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications majors only. Audio produc- 
tion as it pertains to radio broadcasting, commercial produc- 
tion, and recording, television and film audio. (2 hours lec- 
ture, 3 hours laboratory) 

381 Broadcast Copywriting (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 350 and junior standing. Writing of ad- 
vertising copy for radio and television, based upon study of 
unique media and audience characteristics, costs and cov- 
erages. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

382 Broadcasting in America (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications major or consent of instructor. 
The foundation course of the telecommunications sequence. 
Radio and television from a professional perspective. Eco- 
nomic, historical, regulatory aspects and the social effects of 
these media. 


Communications 


390 Introduction to Video Production (3) 

Production of programs for broadcast stations and other vid- 
eo materials for cable, business, industrial, and instructional 
applications. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

402 Advanced Writing for Radio, Television and Film (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage 
Test (EUT), Comm 301, and junior standing. An advanced 
writing class concentrating on the long form of broadcast and 
film writing, including documentaries, features, special 
news, commentaries, and analysis. 

407 Communications Law (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233 and junior standing. The Anglo- 
American concept of freedom of speech and press; statutes 
and administrative regulations affecting freedom of informa- 
tion and publishing, advertising, and telecommunication. Li- 
bel and slander, rights in news and advertising, contempt, 
copyright, and invasion of privacy. 

409 Advanced Photojournalism (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 321 and junior standing or instructor’s 
consent. Advanced press photography. Extensive use of cam- 
eras for photographic reporting; evaluation and preparation of 
pictures for publication. Field/laboratory experience in black 
and white and color. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

410 Principles of Communication Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233 and junior standing. Research 
methods used to assess the effects of print, broadcast, and 
film communications on audience attitudes, opinions, knowl- 
edge, and behavior. Research design and data analysis in 
communications research. 

411 Advanced Motion Picture Production (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 301 , 371 , or consent of instructor. The- 
ory, procedures and practice in film production: motion pic- 
ture (silent and sound), scriptwriting, transfer and mixes, 
production, distribution and financing. (2 hours lecture, 3 
hours lab) 

425 History and Philosophy of American Mass 
Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233 and junior standing. American 
mass communication; newspapers and periodicals through 
radio and television; ideological, political, social and eco- 
nomic aspects. 

426 World Communication Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233 and junior standing. Major mass 
communication systems, both democratic and totalitarian, 
and the means by which news and propaganda are con- 
veyed internationally. 

427 Current Issues in Mass Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233, 407 and 425 and junior standing. 
Exploration of current issues which cross department se- 
quences. Controversial and changing concepts of the func- 
tion and role of the mass media. 

428 Communications and Social Change (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233 and junior standing. How innova- 
tions ideas, products, and practices perceived as new — are 
communicated to members of a social system. The roles of 
adopters, opinion leaders, change agents and communica- 
tions in the diffusion of innovations and consequent changes 
in social systems. 


430 Newspaper Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor and junior standing. Organi- 
zation, operation and administration of a newspaper’s depart- 
mental activities: advertising, business, circulation, mechani- 
cal, news-editorial and promotion. (3 hours lecture, field trips, 
detailed study of one selected newspaper department) 

431 Mass Communications in Communist Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Junior standing. Mass media in Communist 
societies; the U.S.S.R., the People’s Republic of China, Po- 
land and Yugoslavia. The mass media, people and party. 

435 Editorial and Critical Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage 
Test, upper division writing course and junior standing. Edi- 
torial and critical writer and opinion columnist roles. Tech- 
niques of editorial writing and aspects of critical thinking. (2 
hours lecture; 2 hours lab and fieldwork) 

436 Investigative and Specialized Reporting (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage 
Test, Comm 332, 335 and 407; and junior standing. Investi- 
gative and interpretive reporting of complex or specialized 
subjects. 

439 Mass Media Internship (2) 

Prerequisites: Senior standing, communications major and 
consent of instructor. Supervised internship, according to 
sequence, with newspaper, magazine, radio or television 
station, press association, public relations firm or advertising 
agency. Application must be made through department coor- 
dinator one semester prior to entering program. (Credit/No 
Credit only) 

450 Advertising Communications Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 350 and 352 and junior standing. The- 
ory and techniques for planning, directing and evaluating 
advertising programs with emphasis on media-message 
strategies. Managerial approach with case studies to the 
solution of advertising communications problems. 

451 National Advertising Campaigns (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 350, 352 and 353 and junior standing. 
Advertising campaigns and utilization of mass media such 
as television, newspapers and magazines, in national adver- 
tising programs. Design of complete campaigns from idea to 
production readiness. 

460 Advanced Studies in Professional Photography (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 326 and junior standing or instructor’s 
consent. Analysis and execution of contemporary photo- 
graphic concepts. Students will refine aesthetics and tech- 
niques culminating in a portfolio for professional entry into 
photojournalism or commercial media photography. (2 hours 
lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

464 Public Relations Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 361 and junior standing. Analysis of sys- 
tems and strategies for planning public relations campaigns 
and solving preventing problems. Individual, team case stud- 
ies, in corporate development of proposals; actual use of tools 
in addition to role playing presentations to management. 

467 Public Relations Agency Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 101, 361 and junior standing. Seminar 
focuses on psychology and functions of client counseling, 
proposal writing, new business development, agency man- 
agement, servicing clients, evaluation of methods, reporting 
results, and legal and ethical concerns. 


248 


Communications 


478 Management in the Broadcasting & Film Industries (3) 

Prerequisite: advanced standing, Comm 382 or consent of 
instructor. The study of management of the broadcasting, 
cable-TV and film industries with attention to financial struc- 
tures, programming and government regulation. 

479 Advanced Video Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 390 or consent of instructor. Producing 
programs for broadcast and other applications for cable, 
business, industrial and instructional use. Emphasis on loca- 
tion shooting and post production including electronic edit- 
ing. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

480 Persuasive Communications (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233 and junior standing. Persuasive 
communications applied to mass communication. The com- 
municator, audience, message content and structure, and 
social context in influencing attitudes, beliefs and opinions. 

481 Mass Communication and Conflict (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233 and junior standing. Changes and 
similarities in the mass communication of conflict issues 
over the past 75 years: war and peace, the role of women 
and various reform movements. Undergraduate seminar. 

484 Documentary Production (3) 

Prerequisites: B average in Comm 390 and 479 or 488 and 
consent of instructor. A lecture/laboratory course in which 
students write and produce radio, television and film docu- 
mentaries. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

488 Production Workshop for Cable Television (3) 

Prerequisites: B average in Comm 390 and 479 or consent of 
instructor. Students produce informational and sport pro- 
grams for cable TV systems and radio stations. May be 
repeated once for credit; only three units may apply to major. 
(9 hours laboratory) 

496 Student-to-Student Tutorial (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor and previous superior 
performance in a similar or equivalent course. Under faculty 
supervision, student provides tutorial assistance in a com- 
munications course. May involve small group demonstra- 
tions and discussions, individual tutoring and evaluation of 
student performance as appropriate. May be repeated to a 
maximum of four units either separately or in combination 
with Comm 499. 

497 Seminar in Public Communications Practices (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 464, junior standing and consent of in- 
structor. Operationalizing public relations management princi- 
ples. Role of public relations in contemporary society. Ethics, 
social responsibilities and trends in the emerging profession. 


499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of department chair. Individually su- 
pervised mass media projects and research on campus and 
in the community. May involve newspaper and magazine 
publishers, radio and television stations and public relations 
agencies. May be repeated up to a maximum of four units 
either separately or in combination with Com. 496. 

500 Theory and Literature of Communications (3) 

Prerequisite: Conditional classified status. Theories and re- 
search on communication processes and effects; source, me- 
dia, message, audience and content variables. Types, sources 
and uses of communication literature. Graduate seminar. 

508 Humanistic Research in Communications (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 410, 500 or concurrent enrollment and 
classified status. Humanistic methods of study in communi- 
cations: historical research and critical analysis applied to 
problems, issues and creative works in communication. 
Graduate seminar. 

509 Social Science Research in Communications (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 410, 500 and classified status. Social- 
scientific research design and analysis and the study of com- 
munication processes and effects. Graduate seminar. 

515 Professional Problems in Specialized Fields (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 500. Selected topics and issues in the 
field of mass communications. Subjects vary each semester. 
May be repeated for a maximum of six units. 

520A,B,C Communications Practicum (3,3,3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 500 and six units of study-plan courses in 
area of specialization. Under supervision of a faculty member, 
students plan, design, conduct and evaluate a team project in 
their field of specialization: A — News-Editorial, B — Radio- 
Television-Film, C — Public Relations. 

597 Project (3) 

Completion of creative project in a sequence beyond regu- 
larly offered course work. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Completion of a thesis in a sequence beyond regularly of- 
fered course work. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of department chair. Individually su- 
pervised mass media projects or research for graduate stu- 
dents. May be repeated. 


249 

Communications I 


Department of Speech 
Communication 


Department Chair: Joyce Flocken 
Department Office: Education Classroom 199 
Speech & Hearing Clinic: Education Classroom 190 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Communicative Disorders 

Master of Arts in Communicative Disorders 

Clinical Rehabilitative Services Credential (CRSC) with 
Special Class Authorization (SCA) 

Bachelor of Arts in Speech Communication 
Minor in Speech Communication 
Master of Arts in Speech Communication 

Faculty 

Daniel Canary, Daniel Crary, Michael Davis, 

Robert Emry, George Enell, Joyce Flocken, 

Robert Gass, Kaye Good, Lucy Keele, Kurt Kitselman, 
Edith Li, Emmett Long, Norman Page, Glyndon Riley, 
Arden Thorum, Lynn Williams, Richard Wiseman. 

Advisers 

Undergraduate: Norman Page 
Graduate: Daniel Canary 

INTRODUCTION 

Majors in the Department of Speech Communication study 
human communication as part of a liberal arts and social 
sciences education, and in preparation for a variety of 
career choices. Students with communication background 
studies and training are: prepared to understand the roles 
communication plays in human interaction; skilled in facili- 
tating and analyzing individual, small group, and public 
communication processes; experienced in planning and 
managing programs that improve the quality of communi- 
cation; sensitized to cultural and pathological differences 
that influence communication effectiveness; and equipped 
to apply scientific methods and technical procedures to the 
study of communication improvement and competencies. 

The Department of Speech Communication offers two un- 
dergraduate and two graduate degree programs in com- 
municative disorders and in speech communication. 

Instruction in Communicative Disorders has four specific 
goals: to discover relationships among human communi- 
cation and other human behaviors; to provide students 
with understanding of the communication process so they 
might evaluate normal and abnormal deviations; to provide 
theoretical understanding and functional skills which en- 
able the clinician-in-training to diagnose and treat disor- 



Speech Communication 


ders of speech, voice, language and hearing; and to devel- 
op graduate professional practitioners ofspeech pathology 
capable of serving in clinics, community centers, hospitals, 
private practice and school settings. 

Instruction in Speech Communication has four specific 
goals: to discover relationships among human communi- 
cation and other human behaviors; to provide students 
with understanding of the communication process en- 
abling them to evaluate and affect their communication 
environments; to improve the quality of human communi- 
cation; and to facilitate intellectual, social and political ma- 
turity by applying principles of communication. Students 
are prepared for careers as communication specialists in 
business, public relations, education and other profes- 
sions requiring a high level of communication competen- 
cies such as the law and the ministry, and for doctoral level 
studies in speech communication. 

PROFESSIONAL INFORMATION 

Accreditation 

The Communicative Disorders program is fully accredited 
by the American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 
(ASHA). Graduate study in this program leads to certifica- 
tion with ASHA. 

Licensure 

Graduate study in Communicative Disorders leads to li- 
censure with the California State Board of Medical Quality 
Assurance. 

Credential Information 

As an addition to the degree in Communicative Disorders, 
the Speech Communication Department offers credential 
programs in Clinical Rehabilitative Services and in Clinical 
Rehabilitative Services with Special Class Authorization ap- 
proved by the Commission for Teacher Credentialing (CTC). 

The Speech Communication Department offers course 
work leading to a waiver in the area of Language Arts for 
the Ryan Single Subject (Secondary) Teaching Credential. 
Interested students should seek advisement from the de- 
partment single subject waiver adviser. 

Awards in the Department of Speech 
Communication 

The following awards were established by family, friends 
and colleagues of the designees in memory of their com- 
mitment and contributions to students engaged in the 
study of human communication. 

These awards provide recognition and/or financial assis- 
tance to outstanding students majoring in Speech Com- 
munication or Communicative Disorders. 

The Seth A. Fessenden Award 

The Herbert W. Booth Award 

The Herbert W. Booth Outstanding Senior Award 

The Philip J. Schreiner Award 

The Lee E. Granell Award 

The Wayne Brockriede Award 


Graduate Assistantships and Fellowships 

The following appointments are awarded to outstanding 
graduate students in the form of competitively selected 
assistantships and lectureships: 

Clinical Graduate Assistants 
Graduate Assistants in Forensics 
Graduate Assistants in Research 
Lecturers in Speech Communication 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIVE 
DISORDERS 


Basic requirements: 42 units minimum 
Lower Division Requirements (3 units) 

Speech Comm 102 Public Speaking (3) 
Upper Division Requirements (33 units) 


Speech Comm 300 Introduction to Research in 
Speech Communication (3) 

Speech Comm 324 Small Group 
Communication (3) 

or Speech Comm 332 Processes of Social 
Influence (3) 

or Speech Comm 334 Persuasive Speaking (3) 
Speech Comm 341 Introduction to Phonetics (3) 
Speech Comm 342 Introduction to Communicative 
Disorders (3) 

Speech Comm 343 The Neurology of Speech and 
Hearing (3) 

Speech Comm 344 The Anatomy and Physiology of 
Speech and Hearing (3) 

Speech Comm 441 Dysarticulation and 
Stuttering (3) 

Speech Comm 444 Childhood Language Disorders 
and Adult Aphasia (3) 

Speech Comm 451 Diagnostic Methods in 
Communicative Disorders (3) 

Speech Comm 452 Therapeutic Procedures in 
Communicative Disorders (3) 

Speech Comm 463 Audiology (3) 


Electives: additional units from among the following 
courses: (6 units) 


Speech Comm 302 Introduction to Manual 
Communication (3) 

Speech Comm 308 Qualitative Research 
Methods (3) 

Speech Comm 312 
Language (3) 

Speech Comm 345 
Speech Comm 402 
Speech Comm 403 
Development (3) 

Speech Comm 443 
Palate (3) 

Speech Comm 453 The Speech/Language and 
Hearing Clinician as a Counselor (3) 

Speech Comm 464 Audiometry (3) 

Speech Comm 465 Aural Rehabilitation (3) 


Intermediate Sign 

Communication and Aging (3) 
Advanced Phonetics (3) 
Speech/Language 

Voice Disorders & Cleft 


Speech Communication 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MASTER OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIVE 

SPEECH COMMUNICATION DISORDERS AND IN SPEECH COMMUNICATION 


Basic Requirements: 42 units minimum 

Lower-Division Requirements: (9 units) 

Speech Comm 102 Public Speaking (3) 

Speech Comm 200 Human Communication (3) 
Speech Comm 235 Essentials of Argumentation 
and Debate (3) 

Upper-Division Requirements: (24 units) 


Core Courses: (9 units) 

Speech Comm 300 Introduction to Research in 
Speech Communication (3) 

Speech Comm 308 Quantitative Research 
Methods (3) 

Speech Comm 420 Communication Theory (3) 


Concentration Courses: (15 units of adviser approved 
coursework reflecting a thematic focus in advocacy, inter- 
personal communication, intercultural communication, or- 
ganizational communication, or rhetoric taken from among 
the following courses): 


Speech Comm 1 38 
Speech Comm 220 
Management (3) 
Speech Comm 320 
Speech Comm 324 


Forensics (2) 
Interpersonal Conflict 


Intercultural Communication (3) 
Small Group 

Communication (3) 

Speech Comm 325 Interviewing: Principles and 
Practices (3) 

Speech Comm 332 
Influence (3) 

Speech Comm 333 
and Industry (3) 

Speech Comm 334 
Speech Comm 335 
Speech Comm 338 
Speech Comm 415 


Processes of Social 


Communication in Business 


Persuasive Speaking (3) 
Advanced Argumentation (3) 
Intercollegiate Forensics (2) 
Interpersonal 
Communication Theory (3) 

Speech Comm 425 Organizational Communication 
Dynamics (3) 

Speech Comm 430 
Speech Comm 432 
Theory (3) 

Speech Comm 437 
Communication (3) 

Speech Comm 438 Principles of Rhetorical 
Criticism (3) 


Classical Rhetorical Theory (3) 
Contemporary Rhetorical 

Internship: Speech 


The Master of Arts in Communicative Disorders (speech- 
language pathology and audiology), accredited by the 
Education and Training Board of the American Boards of 
Examiners in Speech Pathology and Audiology since 
1969, is designed: (1) to provide students with graduate, 
professional level studies covering the broad field of com- 
municative disorders; (2) to provide students with opportu- 
nities to observe, learn and serve communicatively im- 
paired clients within a wide range of clinical facilities, both 
on-campus and off-campus; and (3) to train students to 
assess, diagnose and prescribe therapy plans, and to 
function as therapists for selected types and populations of 
the communicatively impaired. 

The Master of Arts in Speech Communication is designed 
for students who have exceptional interest in and aptitude 
for study in the area of communication theory and process. 
The objectives of the degree include the following: to im- 
prove the student’s academic and professional compe- 
tence, to prepare the student for advanced graduate work 
toward the doctoral degree, to develop the student’s re- 
search capabilities, to contribute to improvement in teach- 
ing or clinical skills, and to increase the student’s knowl- 
edge in the specializations appropriate to the particular 
profession. The student is expected to demonstrate a high 
degree of intellectual competence and scholarly discipline, 
to evaluate critically, and to demonstrate mastery of the 
field of concentration. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: 

Conditionally Classified 

Applicants must meet the university requirements for ad- 
mission to conditionally classified graduate standing: a 
baccalaureate from an accredited institution and a grade- 
point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 semester units 
attempted. 

Applicants for Communicative Disorders Program must 
have a baccalaureate in communicative disorders or the 
equivalent. The equivalent consists of a prescribed list of 
courses which total 30 semester units and which form an 
appropriate background for graduate studies. Applicants 
for Speech Communication are required to have a bacca- 
laureate in speech communication or an allied field. 

In addition, the following factors will be taken into consid- 
eration by the Graduate Committee in determining who 
shall be admitted to the program: 


Electives: (9 units of adviser approved coursework in 
Speech Communication) 

MINOR IN SPEECH COMMUNICATION 


1. Grade-point average. 

2. Letters of recommendation (preferably on department 
forms). 


Basic Requirements: 21 units of adviser-approved courses 
in speech communication. 


3. Professional objectives as presented in a student letter 
of intent. 


Speech Communication 


Graduate Standing: Classified 

A student who meets the requirements for conditionally 
classified graduate standing, as well as the following re- 
quirements, may be granted classified graduate standing 
upon the development of an approved study plan: 

1 . Enrollment in Speech Comm 500, Research in Speech 
Communication, is required within the first nine units of 
graduate work included on the study plan. 

2. Completion of the study plan with 30 units of studies 
approved by an adviser and the Department Graduate 
Committee. 

Study Plan 

Requirements for the Master of Arts degree in either 
Speech Communication or Communicative Disorders con- 
sists of (1 ) a minimum of 30 units of study approved by the 
department Graduate Committee, (2) at least 1 5 units in 
one of the major areas, (3) successful completion of com- 
prehensive examinations and a thesis (six units) or a di- 
rected graduate study research project (three units), and 
(4) may include up to six units of adviser-approved elective 
course work outside the department. 

Students in the Speech Communication program must 
complete one course in theory (Speech Comm 536), one 
course in research methods (Speech Comm 500), and a 
minimum of three additional courses in 500-level semi- 
nars. 

Students in the Communicative Disorders program must 
complete one course in research methods (Speech Comm 
500), two courses in language (Speech Comm 542 and 
543), two courses in speech disorders (Speech Comm 
570, 571, 573 or 574), and one course in either develop- 
mental or childhood language disabilities (Speech Comm 
575 or 577). 

For further information, consult the Department of Speech 
Communication. 

CLINICAL REHABILITATIVE SERVICES CREDENTIAL 

The credential is awarded by the State Department of 
Education and requires the following coursework: (85 units 
minimum) 

I. B.A. degree in Communicative Disorders or equiv- 
alent preparation as approved by the department 
Graduate Committee. (See Core Requirements for 
the B.A. in Communicative Disorders: 36 units). 
Electives to be selected from the generic program 
(see III below). 

II. Admission to the graduate program in communica- 
tive disorders. 

III. Generic program and advanced specialization pro- 
gram in speech, language and hearing disorders 
will include but not be limited to the following: 


Basic Requirements (21 units) 

Speech Comm 403 Speech/Language 
Development (3) 

Speech Comm 443 Voice Disorders and Cleft 
Palate (3) 

Speech Comm 453 The Speech/Language and 
Hearing Clinician as a Counselor (3) 

Speech Comm 464 Audiometry (3) 

Speech Comm 465 Aural Rehabilitation (3) 

Speech Comm 542 Neurophysiologic Bases of 
Speech and Language (3) 

Speech Comm 577 Seminar in Communicative 
Disorders: Childhood Language Disorders (3) 

Electives (6 units) 

Speech Comm 571 Seminar in Communicative 
Disorders: Stuttering (3) 

Speech Comm 573 Seminar in Communicative 
Disorders: Voice (3) 

Speech Comm 574 Seminar in Communicative 
Disorders: Articulation (3) 

Speech Comm 575 Seminar in Communicative 
Disorders: Developmental Disabilities (3) 

Related Areas Requirements (9 units) 

Special Ed 371 Exceptional Individual (3) 
Psychology 361 Developmental Psychology (3) 
Linguistics 402 Advanced Phonetics (3) 
or Linguistics 406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 

Clinical Practicum and Public School 
Practicum (13 units) 

Speech Comm 458 Basic Clinical Practice (3) 
Speech Comm 489A Public School Practicum in 
Communicative Disorders (4) 

Speech Comm 490 Seminar: Speech and Hearing 
Service in the Schools (2) 

Speech Comm 558 Interm Clinical Practice (2) 
Speech Comm 559A Adv Clinical Practice (2) 

CLINICAL REHABILITATIVE SERVICES CREDENTIAL 
WITH SPECIAL CLASS AUTHORIZATION 

This credential with special class authorization is awarded 
by the State Department of Education and requires the 
following: 

I. Completion of all requirements for the Clinical Re- 
habilitative Services Credential (see above 85 
units). 

II. Completion of the following: (15 units) 

Reading 480 The Teaching of Reading (4) 

Special Ed482A Exceptionality: Curriculum and 
Methods for the Learning Handicapped (3) 
Speech Comm 410 Perceptual and Cognitive 
Problems of the Severe Language Handicapped 
Child (3) 

Speech Comm 489B Public School Practicum in the 
Special Class (4) 


Speech Communication 


Speech Communication Courses 

100 Introduction to Human Communication (3) 

Process variables crucial to the outcome of communication 
transactions. Purposes and impact of communication, atti- 
tude formation, cognitive message elements and affective 
message elements. Participation in research projects. 

102 Public Speaking (3) 

Theory and presentation of public speeches, including an 
analysis of determinants of comprehension and attitude for- 
mation; selection and organization of speech materials, de- 
velopment of delivery skills and evaluation of message effec- 
tiveness. Student presentations required. Participation in re- 
search projects. (CAN SPCH 4) 

138 Forensics (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Investigation and practice 
in the background, format procedures and evaluation criteria 
of the various forensic events. Students must participate in at 
least two intercollegiate tournaments. May be repeated for 
credit. (More than 6 hours of classwork for each unit of credit) 

200 Human Communication (3) 

Theories and competencies in interpersonal, small group, pub- 
lic, organizational and intercultural communication. Variations 
in communication process across contexts is investigated. 

220 Interpersonal Conflict Management (3) 

Examination of the nature, causes and structure of interper- 
sonal conflict; communication strategies exhibited in conflict; 
and intervention principles for conflict management. Conflict 
management theory will be applied to conflicts within mar- 
riages, small groups, organizations and intercultural rela- 
tionships. 

235 Essentials of Argumentation and Debate (3) 

Introduction to methods of critical inquiry and advocacy. 
Identifying fallacies in reasoning, testing evidence and evi- 
dence sources, advancing a reasoned position, and defend- 
ing and refuting arguments. Analysis and evaluation of oral 
and written arguments. 

254 Nonverbal Communication (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 254) 

300 Introduction to Research in Speech 
Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 1 00 or 200, open only to speech 
communication majors. Understanding and using profes- 
sional literature in speech communication and using that 
literature to generate a formal research paper. A passing 
grade fulfills the course requirement of the university upper 
division baccalaureate writing requirement for speech com- 
munication majors and communicative disorders majors. 

302 Introduction to Manual Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The basic principles of 
manual communication and Pidgin sign language systems; 
fingerspelling and the development of basic sign language 
vocabulary in Sign English. 

303 Biology of Human Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Biology 101 or Zoology 161. The exploration 
of the biology and evolution of speech and language. In- 
cludes speech production, evolution and development; 
speech perception; language, hemispheric specialization, 
clinical studies; current methods in neurolinguistics; and 
plasticity and aging. 


305 Liberal Studies in Communication Processes (3) 

Introduction to interdisciplinary study and its relationships to 
communication theory. How communication occurs in var- 
ious disciplines. Theories about the nature of language and 
how this influences the pursuit of learning. No credit for 
speech communication majors. 

308 Quantitative Research Methods (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or 200. Current perspectives 
in empirical research methodology in the discipline of Speech 
Communication. Experimental designs, common statistical 
tests and the use of the computer as a research tool. 

312 Intermediate Sign Language (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 302 or consent of instructor. A 
review of basic sign language. Additional sign vocabulary 
acquisition and improvement of basic expressive and recep- 
tive skills in the simultaneous method of communication, 
utilizing traditional and SEE signs. 

31 4A Student Ambassador Program Training (1) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 100 or 102 and consent of in- 
structor. An intensive training course in which selected students 
function as public spokespersons for CSUF. Topics include: 
interpersonal and public communication; research and speech 
writing; team building; interviewing; and image management. 

315 Male/Female Communication (1) 

Prerequisite: Any introductory social science course. Exami- 
nation of differences between males’ and females’ conversa- 
tional styles, language usage, and nonverbal communica- 
tion. Exploration of interpersonal power as the basis for gen- 
der differences in communication. 

320 Intercultural Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100. Communication problems 
that result when members of different cultures communicate. 
How interpersonal communication can overcome differences 
in cultures’ perceptions of communication’s functionality, value 
orientations, nonverbal behavior, language, epistemologies 
and rhetorics. 

324 Small Group Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 1 00 or 200. Application of small 
group and interpersonal communication theory and behav- 
ioral research findings. Communication facilitation among 
individuals in task realization, including interpersonal needs, 
leadership, norms, roles, verbal and nonverbal messages, 
and group systems and procedures. 

325 Interviewing: Principles and Practices (3) 

Principles and practices of interviewing processes. Consid- 
eration of appraisal, counseling, employment, exit, journalis- 
tic, persuasive and survey types of interviews. Case analy- 
ses, simulations and community fieldwork required. 

332 Processes of Social Influence (3) 

Prerequisite. Speech Comm 100 or 200. Major theories of 
communication concerned with influence and persuasion in 
society. Communication effectiveness through strategic ap- 
plication of theory to affecting change and evaluating ap- 
peals for change by others. 

333 Communication in Business and Industry (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or 200. Human behavior, 
structural demands and communication within organiza- 
tions. Application of theory and behavioral research as a 
framework for generating managerial communication com- 
petencies such as interviewing, briefings, conference leader- 
ship and intergroup coordination. 


Speech Communication 


334 Persuasive Speaking (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 102 or equivalent. Strategies 
and tactics appropriate to leading social policy persuasive 
campaigns. Emphasis on analysis of receiver variables, pro- 
gressive use of persuasive materials, question and answer 
techniques, and the development of personal influence. Stu- 
dent presentations required. 

335 Advanced Argumentation (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 235 or consent of instructor. 
Argument as applied to advocacy; logic and evidence as 
related to analysis of significant issues. 

337 Communication in the Legal Arena (3) 

Prerequisite: an upper-division writing requirement course. 
The influence of communication behaviors on civil and criminal 
judicial processes. A review and evaluation of research into 
communication variables and legal practices, from interviewing 
to closing arguments. Courtroom observation required. 

338 Intercollegiate Forensics (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Directed activity in debate 
and other forensic events. Participation in intercollegiate 
competition is required for credit. May be repeated for credit. 
(More than 6 hours of classwork for each unit of credit.) 

341 Introduction to Phonetics (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or 200, or consent of in- 
structor. The analysis and classification of phonemes of 
American English; the use of the International Phonetic Al- 
phabet; and the study of factors influencing articulation and 
pronunciation. Work in language laboratory required. 

342 Introduction to Communicative Disorders (3) 

An overview of content areas and principles of communica- 
tive disorders; classification of speech and hearing disor- 
ders; professional role at public school, hospital, and clinical 
sites. Lecture, observation, films, and demonstration. 

343 The Neurology of Speech and Hearing (3) 

Prerequisite: Biology 101 or Psychology 101. Anatomy and 
physiology of the nervous system as they relate to speech, 
language, and hearing processes. Emphasis on neuroana- 
tomical bases of vision, audition, swallowing, and speech 
functions. Introduction to higher cortical functions also will 
be included. 

344 The Anatomy and Physiology of Speech and 
Hearing (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Anatomy and physiology 
of the speech and hearing mechanisms; respiration, phona- 
tion, resonation, articulation and hearing. Normal function- 
ing as a frame of reference for understanding disordered 
functioning. Laboratory experience. 

345 Communication and Aging (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or consent of instructor. 
Communicative changes found in older adults including nor- 
mal and pathologic changes in the physiological and behav- 
ioral aspects. Topics include diagnosis, rehabilitative strate- 
gies, social implications, and health care systems. 

402 Advanced Phonetics (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 341 or consent of instructor. 
Analysis of human speech sound production and narrow 
transcription. Sounds beyond the range of American En- 
glish. Taped materials and introduction to phonetics lab in- 
cluding spectrographic analysis. (Same as Linguistics 402) 


403 Speech Language Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or 200, or consent of instruc- 
tor. Phonology, morphology, syntax and semantics of speech 
and language development from birth through childhood. 
Meets the language and speech development and disorders 
requirement for specialized preparation to serve as teachers of 
exceptional children. (Same as Linguistics 403) 

410 Perceptual and Cognitive Problems of the Severe 
Language Handicapped Child (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in communicative disorders or 
consent of instructor. Philosophies and strategies used in 
training severe language handicapped children to have com- 
petencies in basic reading, language and numerical con- 
cepts. Classroom management. 

415 Interpersonal Communication Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or 200, 308, 324, 420 or 
consent of instructor. The behavioral and humanistic ap- 
proaches to theories of interpersonal communication. Func- 
tions of communication which influence interpersonal relation- 
ships, including communicator characteristics, information ex- 
change, situational demands and interpersonal evaluations. 

420 Communication Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 200, 300, 308, or graduate 
standing, or consent of instructor. Analysis of various theories 
and perspectives on human communication. Attention is paid 
to understanding basic forms of theories and to developing 
students’ theoretical perspectives on human communication. 

422 Applications of Intercultural Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 320. Nature and effects of inter- 
cultural communication within multicultural/multinational orga- 
nizations. Examination of intercultural leadership, negotiation, 
decision-making, and communication competence. Analysis of 
and practice in a number of intercultural training approaches. 

425 Organizational Communication Dynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 308 and 333. The interrelation- 
ships between management and communication theories. The 
microsystems and macrosystems within an organization are 
emphasized in terms of intrapersonal, interpersonal, small 
group and organizational communication theories. 

430 Classical Rhetorical Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: six units of upper division courses in communi- 
cation theory and process to include Speech Comm 300. 
Contributions of Greek and Roman rhetorical theorists, 4th 
century B.C. to 300 A.D. and practitioners of the art. 

432 Contemporary Rhetorical Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: six units of upper-division courses in commu- 
nication theory and process to include Speech Communica- 
tion 300. The nature of rhetorical theory in the 20th century. 

437 Internship: Speech Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: any two of the following courses: Speech 
Comm 305, 324, 333, 420, 425 or consent of instructor. On- 
site involvement with communication frameworks as they 
function in ongoing organizational settings. Working in an 
organization and seminar activities. Application for intern- 
ship must be submitted prior to enrollment. 

438 Principles of Rhetorical Criticism (3) 

Prerequisite: six units of upper-division communication the- 
ory and process courses to include Speech Comm 300. Ex- 
planation and evaluation of rhetorical experience. Historical 
modes of criticism, issues in rhetorical criticism, criticism in 
various contexts and experiences in criticism. 


Speech Communication 


441 Dysarticulation and Stuttering (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 300 or graduate standing, 341 , 
342, 344, or consent of the instructor Dysarticulation and stut- 
tering studied with emphasis on descriptive and treatment prin- 
ciples which emerge from current theory and practice. 

443 Voice Disorders and Cleft Palate (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 300 or graduate standing, 
341 , 342, 343, and 344, or consent of instructor. Etiologic, 
diagnostic, and management aspects of communicative dis- 
orders associated with oromaxillofacial and laryngeal dys- 
function or pathology. 

444 Childhood Language Disorders and Adult Aphasia (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 300 or graduate standing, and 
Speech Comm 341 , 342, 343, 344 and 403. Communicative 
disorders involving language impairments in children and 
adults. Emphasis on relationship of language impairments to 
cognition, central nervous system operations and environ- 
mental influences. 

451 Diagnostic Methods in Communicative Disorders (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 300, 341, 342, 343, 344, and 
441 . Lecture and supervised demonstrations; techniques and 
procedures for the assessment of communicative disorders. 

452 Therapeutic Procedures in Communicative 
Disorders (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 300, 341, 342, 343, 344, and 
441 . Lecture and supervised demonstrations; techniques and 
procedures for the treatment of communicative disorders. 

453 The Speech/Language and Hearing Clinician as a 
Counselor (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 342, 441, 463, or consent of 
instructor. The dynamics of conferencing and counseling. 
Effective use of numerous relational and communication ap- 
proaches in parent, family and client counseling. Increased 
self-awareness and the guidance of those exhibiting commu- 
nication disorders. Making appropriate referrals. 

458 Basic Clinical Practice: Communicative Disorders (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 341, 342, 343, 344, 441, 451 
and 452; senior or graduate standing and approved applica- 
tion prior to semester of practicum. The application of diag- 
nostic and therapeutic care to children and adults exhibiting 
communicative disorders. 

463 Audiology (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 343 and 344, or consent of 
instructor. The nature of auditory functioning, physical and 
psychological. Anatomy, pathology and treatment. Rehabili- 
tative methods, facilities and equipment. Partially fulfills the 
state requirements for public school audiometrist. 

464 Audiometry (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 463 or consent of instructor. 
Presents equipment, methods and procedures used in as- 
sessing the complete auditory system. Examines current 
topics of interest in the diagnosis and treatment of disorders 
of hearing. Partially fulfills the state requirements for public 
school audiometrist certification. 

465 Aural Rehabilitation (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 341, 463, or consent of in- 
structor. Historical background of lipreading, methods used 
in the visual reading of speech, and auditory training tech- 
niques used in the rehabilitation of the aurally handicapped. 


468 Audiology Practicum (1) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 463, 464, 465 and approved 
application prior to semester of enrollment in practicum. Audio- 
metric evaluations including pure tone testing, hearing aid eval- 
uations, impedance audiometry and report writing. Provides 
clinical clock hours in audiology. 

485 Aural Rehabilitation Practicum (1) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 464, 465, and approved appli- 
cation prior to semester of enrollment. Supervised rehabilita- 
tion of hearing impaired children and adults in on- and off- 
campus facilities. Provides clinical clock hours in aural reha- 
bilitation. Sign language background recommended. 

489A Public School Practicum in Communicative 
Disorders (4) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 559A, concurrent registration 
in Speech Comm 490, application approved prior to semes- 
ter of practicum, 165 clock hours of clinical practice and 
graduate status. Meets the directed teaching requirements 
for the Clinical Rehabilitative Services Credential. 

489B Public School Practicum in the Special Class (4) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 410, Reading 480, Special 
Education 482A, Speech Comm 559A; Speech Comm 489A 
and 490 or concurrent enrollment; approved application; and 
165 clock hours of clinical practice. Meets the directed 
teaching requirements of Clinical Rehabilitative Services 
Credential Special Class Authorization. 

490 Seminar: Speech & Hearing Service in Schools (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Problems and challenges 
unique to the student clinician in the organization and man- 
agement of the speech and hearing program in the school. 
The clinician’s role; planning, scheduling, case finding, treat- 
ment program reporting and other responsibilities. 

496 Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

Consult “Student-to-Student Tutorials” in this Catalog for 
more complete course description. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Open to upper-division students in speech communication 
only with signed consent form from department chair. May be 
repeated for credit. 

500 Research in Speech Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 300, 308, or equivalent; ad- 
mission to M.A. program. Research design and methods 
used in historical, descriptive and experimental research in 
speech communication. 

510 Seminar in Interpersonal and Relational 
Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 324, 415 and 420 or consent 
of instructor. Theoretical and empirical examination of inter- 
personal and relational communication. Generation of theo- 
retical frameworks and/or heuristic models of concepts and 
process under investigation. 

520 Seminar in Group Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 324 and 420. Small group 
communication theory. Small group variables, methods and 
outcomes, and group process as a learning tool. 

522 Seminar in Intercultural Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 320 or consent of instructor. Re- 
view of theory and methodology in intercultural communication 
research. Specific variables examined include attribution, val- 
ues, communication competence, and accultaration adapta- 
tion. Practice in completing original research in intercultural 
communication. 


Speech Communication 


525 Seminar in Organizational Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 324, 420, and 425, or consent 
of instructor Theoretical postulates concerning managerial 
and organizational communication. Research findings and 
case studies relating to communication determinants and 
organizational effectiveness. Communicative relationships 
among individuals, the work unit and the organization. 

535 Seminar in Advocacy (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 335. Texts and periodic litera- 
ture relating to argumentation and advocatory disclosure. 

536 Seminar in Rhetorical Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 430. Rhetorical issues and 
treatises chosen to represent complementary or contrasting 
systems of rhetoric. 

542 Neurologic Bases of Speech and Language (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 343, 344. 444, or consent of 
instructor. Functional neuroanatomy as it relates to speech 
production and swallowing; the neuropsychologic bases of 
consciousness, attention, sensation, perception, memory, 
higher mental functions, and language with emphasis on those 
aspects most relevant to the speech-language pathologist. 

543 Seminar in Communicative Disorders: 
Neuropathologies (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 441 , 443 and 542 or consent of 
instructor; admission to M.A. program. Problems in neuropath- 
ologies. Investigation of experimental and clinical research. 

544 Seminar in Communicative Disorders: Aphasia (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 542, 543 or consent of instructor; 
admission to M.A. program. The etiology of aphasia, dysarth- 
ria, and apraxia. Diagnosis of communication problems arising 
from brain-damage. Guest lecturers in aphasia, dysarthria, 
apraxia, stroke research, internal medicine. 

558 Intermediate Clinical Practice: Communicative 
Disorders (2) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 458 or equivalent, admission to 
graduate program in communicative disorders and approved 
application prior to semester of practicum. Intermediate 
clinical practicum in the on-campus Speech and Hearing 
Clinic for children and adults. Skills and procedures in diag- 
nosis, therapy, report writing and record keeping. 

559A Advanced Clinical Practice: Communicative 
Disorders (2) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 542, 558, one other seminar in 
communicative disorders, and approved application submitted 
prior to semester of practicum. Advanced clinical practice un- 
der supervision with children and adults. Off-campus program 
in hospitals, clinics, centers and other areas of rehabilitation. 
All aspects of communicative disorders, speech, hearing and 
language. 

559B Advanced Clinical Practice: Communicative 
Disorders (2) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 559A, approved application pri- 
or to semester of practicum, or consent of instructor. Ad- 
vanced clinical practice, under supervision, in off-campus 
medical, clinical and community center facilities. All aspects 
of communicative disorders, speech, hearing and language. 

570 Seminar in Communicative Disorders: 

Oromaxillofacial Dysfunction (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 441 and 443; admission to M.A. 
program. Anatomical and physiological classification systems 
and diagnostic, therapeutic and research considerations. 


571 Seminar in Communicative Disorders: Stuttering (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 441 and 444; admission to 
M.A. program. Problems in stuttering: investigation of ex- 
perimental and clinical research. 

573 Seminar in Communicative Disorders: Voice (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 441, 443, 542 or consent of 
instructor; admission to M.A. program. Problems of voice: 
investigation of experimental and clinical research. 

574 Seminar in Communicative Disorders: Articulation (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 441 , 443, 542 or consent of 
instructor; admission to M.A. program. Problems of articula- 
tion: investigation of experimental and clinical research. 

575 Seminar in Communicative Disorders: Developmental 
Disabilities (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 441, 444, 542 or consent of 
instructor; admission to M.A. program. Classifications, etiol- 
ogies, diagnostic and management programs including so- 
ciologic, vocational and psychologic factors and communica- 
tive disorders of the mentally retarded population. 

577 Seminar in Communicative Disorders: Childhood 
Language Disorders (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 542. Methods of describing and 
managing language pathologies in children; lecture, case 
presentation and review of current literature. 

596 Directed Graduate Research (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 500. Individual research study, 
under the supervision of the chair of the student’s advisory 
committee. 

598A,B,C Thesis (2,2,2) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 500. The selection, investiga- 
tion and written presentation of a selected problem in the 
field of speech. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students only with signed consent form 
from department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


Speech Communication 
Education Courses 

442 Teaching Speech in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, 
methods and materials for teaching speech in secondary 
schools. Required, before student teaching, of students pre- 
senting majors in speech for the standard teaching credential. 

449E Externship in Secondary Teaching (3) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education. 

4491 Internship in Secondary Teaching (10) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education. 

449S Seminar Secondary Teaching (2) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education. 


Speech Communication 




.... :• iwtfr*r* jB$$ 

■ •- •. 








".4 . ;?> *ar $\j c$t 

' ' •:' * ... • • -vlte Siv ■ : -?si » ^to 


•' , !-• i..- : 


• 0 , 


(1 .,>«■/ ‘ -v, v 'rn-i x vitv* • 


;• J 5 ... > . ’• I> ’ . •>” ■ ^ 

e ,‘1/8 * ■ n* 

•'. 3-..: i ?.-.i :’a '<niD nf®.!. 

(£) vjcIQ 


bie ur 4 


^ !. d& . . ep.. • ,teoibe I 

; r ,:^r ;r.r arts ■ * ?■*'?' 


•MX*} r *> 








ft. V;^V V ..-. 


School of 
Engineering 
and Computer Science 



Dean: John C. Bilello 

Programs Offered 

Computer Science (B.S., Minor, M.S.) 

Engineering (B.S., M.S.) 

Option in Civil Engineering and Engineering Mechanics 

Option in Electrical Engineering 

Option in Mechanical Engineering 

Option in Engineering Science 

Option in Systems Engineering (M.S. only) 

The curricula of the School of Engineering and Computer 
Science are designed to prepare students for careers in 
engineering, computer science, and other technical fields 
and for further study and specialization in advanced gradu- 
ate work. The faculty of the school is actively involved not 
only in instruction and scholarship but also in the advise- 
ment of students in the school on topics relating to the 
planning of career and program goals. A cooperative edu- 
cation internship program is available. 

Special School Requirements 

Recommended Preparation: For a career in computer sci- 
ence or engineering, sound preparation in mathematics 
and science is essential. High school preparation should 
include: 

• at least three, preferably four, years mathematics 

• chemistry and physics 

• two or three years of foreign language. 

Community college preparation should include at the min- 
imum: 

• college writing 

• calculus 

• college chemistry and physics (engineering) 

• first course in the major. 

Qualifying Examinations: Enrollment in introductory 
courses is restricted to those who are adequately prepared, 
as shown by performance on qualifying examinations. In 
addition, the Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) examination is 
required of all students. 


School of Engineering and Computer Science 


259 


Undergraduate Student Advisement 

Undergraduate students should call the department office 
of their major to arrange for advising and approval of their 
study plan. University policy requires students to see an 
adviser each of their first two semesters and every year 
thereafter. Three critical times for advising are before reg- 
istering for the first semester, when selecting electives for 
the study plan, and two semesters before graduation for a 
graduation check. Most departments prefer to advise their 
majors more frequently. 

Students interested in programs in the school, but without 
a declared major should call the Office of the Dean for 
advisement. 

Graduate Student Advisement 

Graduate students should consult the graduate adviser in 
their major department before registering for the first se- 
mester. No more than nine units may be completed before 
an approved study plan is filed. 


Program in General Education 

Because of high unit requirements for the Bachelor of Sci- 
ence in Engineering, these programs have modified re- 
quirements for general education. Students should consult 
the department for particulars. 

Majors in the School of Engineering and Computer Sci- 
ence should take mathematics and other courses in relat- 
ed fields early. General education courses normally should 
be scheduled throughout the study sequence. 

Minority Engineering Program (MEP) 

The school sponsors a Minority Engineering Program de- 
signed to provide special academic support for underrep- 
resented students (Black, Mexican American, Puerto Ri- 
can and American Indian) who are majoring in engineering 
or computer science. A summer orientation program, 
scheduling assistance, a study center, student tutoring, 
and special faculty help are provided to students in the 
program. Interested students should contact the dean’s 
office for further information. 


School of Engineering and Computer Science 


Department of Computer 

Science 

Department Chair: Charles Mosmann 
Vice Chair: David Falconer 
Department Office: Engineering 100G 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Science in Computer Science 
Master of Science in Computer Science 
Minor in Computer Science 

Faculty 

David Falconer, James Hester, Floyd Holliday, 

Alyce Jackson, Martin Katz, Edward McCormick, 
Demetrios Michalopoulos, Charles Mosmann, 

Nick Mousouris, Frank Pagan, Edward Sowell, 

Melanie Wolf-Greenberg 

INTRODUCTION 

The undergraduate program in computer science prepares 
students for careers in applications programming, sys- 
tems programming, and software engineering, as well as 
entrance into graduate and professional schools. The cur- 
riculum emphasizes fundamental concepts exemplified by 
various types of programming languages, computer archi- 
tectures, operating systems, and data structures. 

The program is accredited by the Computer Sciences 
Accreditation Board. 

The computer science major is designed to provide the 
student with the foundations of the discipline as well as the 
opportunity for specialization. Six objectives are ad- 
dressed: (1) development of the ability to write correct, 
well-documented programs in a reasonable time; (2) iden- 
tification of problems that are amenable to computer solu- 
tions, and knowledge of the various tools necessary for 
solving such problems; (3) development of the ability to 
work individually or as part of a team; (4) development of 
an understanding of basic computer architecture and oper- 
ations; (5) preparation to pursue in-depth training in one or 
more application areas, or further education in computer 
science, (6) development of the ability to write and speak 
effectively. 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 

Each Computer Science major is required to complete a 
minimum of 66 units of coursework related to the major. 
The degree program assumes that the student has already 
obtained a working knowledge of at least one high-level 
programming language such as Pascal. Students without 
this knowledge may be required to take up to three addi- 
tional units of coursework beyond those normally required 
by the major. 



Computer Science 



Courses taken toward the major or toward the require- 
ments in related fields must be taken on a traditional (letter 
grade) basis, unless the course is offered only on a non- 
traditional (credit/no credit) basis, or if the course is 
passed by a challenge examination. Further, no class with 
a grade of “D” or lower will be counted toward the major 
nor toward the requirements in related fields. 

Computer Science Placement Examination 

Before entry into the first course required by the major 
(Computer Science 131), the student is required to take a 
placement examination or complete the required prerequi- 
site course offered by the department. 

Computer Science Major (49 units) 

Lower-Division Core (14 units) 


Science/Quantitative Studies Requirement (14 units) 

Physical Science (8 units) 

One of the following combinations: 

Physics 225A Fundamental Physics: Mechanics (3) 
Physics 225AL Fundamental Physics: Laboratory (1) 
Physics 225B Fundamental Physics: Electricity and 
Magnetism (3) 

Physics 225BL Fundamental Physics: Laboratory (1) 
or 

Chemistry 120A General Chemistry (5) 

Chemistry 125 General Chemistry for Engineers (3) 
or 

Geological Sci 101 Physical Geology (3) 

Geological Sci 1 01 L Physical Geology Laboratory (1) 
Geological Sci 201 Earth History (4) 


Computer Sci 131 
Computer Sci 231 
Computer Sci 241 
Computer Sci 245 
Computer Sci 245L 
Laboratory (2) 


Data Structures Concepts (3) 

File System Concepts (3) 

Low-level Language Systems (3) 
Computer Logic and Architecture (3) 
Computer Logic and Architecture 


Upper-Division Core (18 units) 


Computer Sci 321 
Computer Sci 331 
Computer Sci 351 
Computer Sci 373 
Computer Sci 423 
Computer Sci 461 


High-level Language Concepts (3) 
Information Structure Concepts (3) 
Operating Systems Concepts (3) 
Formal Method Concepts (3) 
Language Processor Techniques (3) 
Software Engineering Techniques (3) 


Computer Science Workshops (5 units) 


Five (5) units of computer science workshop classes must 
be selected from Computer Science 223A-Z High-level 
Language Workshops, 243A-Z Low-level Language Work- 
shops, 253A-Z Operating System Workshops, and 270 
File Concepts and COBOL Programming. The student 
must take either 253U or 253V. The three remaining units 
of computer science workshops must be coordinated with 
the technical electives and approved in advance by a de- 
partmental adviser. 


Technical Electives (12 units) 


Biological Science (3) 

Biological Sci 101 Elements of Biology (3) 

Science/Quantitative Studies (3 units) 

A one-semester course selected with approval of adviser 
from courses such as: 

Electrical Engineering 425 Introduction to Systems 
Engineering (3) 

General Engineering 308 Engineering Analysis (3) 
Management Science 363 Management Science (3) 
Management Science 461 Statistical Theory for 
Management Science (4) 

Mathematics 335 Mathematical Probability (3) 
Mathematics 370 Mathematical Model Building (3) 
Physics 225C Fundamental Physics: Waves, Optics 
and Modern Physics (3) 

Undesignated Units (8 units) 

These are to be taken in related fields and/or career sup- 
port fields, with adviser approval. 

Upper Division Writing Requirement 

Computer Science 311, which meets the University re- 
quirements for an upper-division writing course, must be 
completed before the senior year. 


Each Computer Science major must take 12 units of techni- 
cal electives which must be approved in advance by a de- 
partmental adviser. These electives must be selected from 
upper-division courses offered by the department or upper- 
division courses in numerical analysis or simulation offered 
by closely-related departments. The electives shall consti- 
tute a coherent body of study consistent with the student s 
professional and educational objectives. No more than three 
(3) units of coursework may be selected from Computer 
Science courses numbered 490 through 499. 


MINOR IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 

A Computer Science minor shall consist of 21 units of 
course work which shall include Computer Science 131, 
231, 241, 245 and six units of adviser-approved upper 
division computer science elective courses and 3 units of 
programming language workshops (Computer Science 
223A-Z, 243A-Z, 270). The upper division courses must be 
taken in residence. 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 


Requirements in Related Fields (39 units) 

Mathematics Requirement (17 units) 

Mathematics 150A.B Analytic Geometry and 
Calculus (4,4) 

Mathematics 270A.B Mathematical Structures (3,3) 
Mathematics 338 Statistics Applied to Natural 
Sciences (3) 


Admission to Graduate Standing: Conditionally 
Classified 

A bachelor s degree from an accredited institution with a 
grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 semester 
units attempted is required. Additionally, nine units of com- 
puter science course work with a grade-point average of at 
least 3.0 is required. Any deficiencies must be made up and 


Computer Science 


will require six or more units of adviser-approved course 
work with at least a 3.0 average in addition to those re- 
quired for the degree. The applicant must submit Graduate 
Record Examination scores. Normally a combined Verbal 
and Quantitative score of 1 100 is required for admission. 

Classified Graduate Standing 

Achievement of this status requires the following: 

1 . Approval of a formal study plan (see description below) 
by the Computer Science Graduate Committee and the 
dean of graduate studies. 

2. Satisfactory completion of no more than nine units on 
the study plan. 

3. Satisfactory completion of the following courses or 
equivalents including prerequisites: Computer Science 
223, 231 , 241 , 245, 245L, 321 , 331 , 351 , 373, 408, 423 
and Mathematics 270A.B. 

4. Completion of requirements for meeting the Graduate 
Level Writing Requirement. 

5. Submission of a written statement indicating an intended 
focus of study. 

Talented professional computer scientists have traditional- 
ly come from a diversity of undergraduate preparations. 
The listed courses have been carefully selected to provide 
an adequate basis for graduate work while not unfairly 
precluding admission of persons without a bachelor’s de- 
gree in computer science. It should be noted, however, 
that each of these courses has prerequisites and the stu- 
dent without preparation in a closely related degree may 
have considerable work to complete beyond the courses 
listed here. Reference should be made to the catalog de- 
scriptions for prerequisites of each course deficiency. 

These courses and their prerequisites constitute program 
prerequisites. Students are advised not to enroll in courses 
for which they have prerequisite deficiencies. Students with 
experience equivalent to any or all of these prerequisite 
courses are encouraged to satisfy such prerequisites by ad- 
vanced placement examination. Consult the computer sci- 
ence graduate adviser for further information. 

Study Plan 

Prior to admission to classified graduate standing in com- 
puter science, the student with the aid of the computer 
science graduate adviser shall prepare and submit for ap- 
proval by the computer science department graduate com- 
mittee a formal study plan consisting of a minimum of 30 
units of 400 level and graduate course work. 

This shall include Computer Science 412, 461, 563, 589, 
597 or 598, and 1 5 units of electives (9 units must be at the 
500-level). At least 1 5 units shall represent courses offered 
by the Department of Computer Science. Courses offered 
by other disciplines, not listed here, and related to the 
students’ objectives in computer science may be approved 
by petition to the Department of Computer Science. 

All course work in the study plan must be completed with a 
GPA of at least 3.0. 


Graduate Student Advisement 

The graduate program adviser provides overall supervi- 
sion of the graduate program. The individual student 
chooses his adviser from the full-time faculty of the Com- 
puter Science Department on the basis of his particular 
interests and objectives. 


Computer Science Courses 

Prerequisites for computer science courses may be waived 
only by written consent of a departmental adviser. 

103 Introduction to Personal Computer Applications (3) 

Introduction to use and application of personal computers: 
word processing, spread-sheets, database systems, com- 
puter languages. Evaluation of personal computers and soft- 
ware. (2 hours lecture/2 hours activity per week) 

112 Introduction to Computer Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: three years of high school mathematics includ- 
ing two years of algebra. Provides programming experience 
in BASIC programming language. Problem solving and 
structured programming are emphasized. (2 hours lecture, 
2 hours laboratory) 

121 Programming Concepts (4) 

Prerequisite: three years high school mathematics including 
trigonometry. Introduction to programming of digital comput- 
ers: subroutines, functions, and structure of algorithms: ele- 
mentary input/output: arrays: strings, and data types. (3 
hours lecture, 2 hours laboratory). 

123 Programming Concepts Review (2) 

Prerequisites: three years high school mathematics includ- 
ing trigonometry and sufficient score on Computer Science 
Placement Exam. Accelerated coverage of Computer Sci- 
ence 121 for students who wish to take Computer Science 
131 but lack sufficient knowledge of Pascal. 

131 Data Structures Concepts (3) 

Prerequisites: Computer Science 121, 123, or sufficient 
score on the Computer Science Placement Exam, and three 
years high school mathematics including trigonometry. Data 
structures: linked lists, stacks, queues, arrays, sequential 
text files, text formatting. (3 hours lecture, 2 hours laboratory) 

223 High-level Language Workshops (1-3) 

Workshops in the use of various high-level programming lan- 
guages. Offered Credit